Download Open - LinkStation Web Access

InterForm A/S
Hyldalvej 11
DK-9541 Suldrup
Denmark
tel:
+45 98 37 80 17
fax:
+45 98 37 87 99
e-mail: [email protected]
[email protected]
web:
2
www.interform400.com
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Docum ent IFE-2014
Users Guide for InterForm 400 ® V2014.M01
Printed in Denm ark 2014
No part of this guide m ay be photocopied or reproduced in any way, except where noted,
without the written consent of Interform A/S.
All the nam es in this m anual are fictional and any resem blance to existing people or firm s is
purely coincidental.
© Copyright Interform A/S 2004. All rights reserved.
AS/400, iSeries , i5 and ‘System i’ are registered tradem arks of the IBM Corporation.
HP-PCL is a tradem ark of Hewlett Packard
All other tradem arks m entioned in this docum ent are registered tradem arks of their respective
owners.
InterForm A/S 3
Table of Contents
Table of Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
How the m anual is organized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
W hat is new in the 2014 versions. .
PCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCL/PDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZPL/IPL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Em ail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and upgrade. . . .
Adm inistration. . . . . . . . . . . .
W hat is new in this m anual. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
21
22
The modules of InterForm400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Basic InterForm 400 package. . . . . . . . . .
The InterForm 400 Classic package. . . . . . . .
InterArchive400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The ZPL Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The PDF and E-m ailing Module. . . . . . . . . . .
The Digital Signature / PDF Security Module.
The InterW ord400 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The InterFax400 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The W inPrint Module.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Em bed PDF Module.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Sign Pad Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
Getting Started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iASP installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore with the RSTLIBPC tool.
Alternative restore with FTP . . . .
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Setting Up the System .. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. W ork W ith Overlay/AFC Sam ple.. . . . .
5. About The Print Results. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
26
26
27
28
28
28
29
34
42
44
Unicode, DBCS and multiple codepage support in InterForm400 . .
Im portant: To notice after upgrading from a pre 2007 version. .
Using DBCS or m ultiple code pages in the sam e print out. . . . .
1. Sim ple setup - spooled file with a single code page..
2. DBCS support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Unicode setup - unicode spooled file. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
46
46
47
47
47
47
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
M enu Structures and General Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
1. Design Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Selecting an existing overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Creating a new overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Copy Overlay from Another Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global settings of an overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function keys for display of a spool file. . . . . . . . . .
Considerations for Zebra overlays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended Page Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Managem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orientation of design elem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Design Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overlay Elem ent Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Managem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overlay elem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1=FRAME.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2=HORIZONTAL LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3=VERTICAL LINE.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4=LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5=TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6=Print-info (Print inform ation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7=INK (fill pattern for succeeding sequence lines)..
Exam ples on use of Ink:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8=TABULATOR (Paragraph tabulation). . . . . . . . . .
9=REMAP W INDOW (re-m apping text areas).. . . .
I=IMAGE.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
?=IF...THEN (conditional nesting of overlays). . . . .
F=PCL-FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G=HP/GL-2-FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S=SUBOVERLAY .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* = COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How the sequence lines in overlay design are executed.. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52
53
55
57
59
61
62
65
65
66
67
69
69
70
71
71
72
73
73
74
75
76
76
78
80
84
84
87
88
89
89
90
Getting Familiar W ith Overlays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Making a W ork Copy of the Overlay IF400DEMO. . . . . .
Step 2. Make a Test Print of the Overlay+Spool Data.. . . . . . . . .
Step 3. Adding Round Corners to the Address Field. . . . . . . . . .
Step 4. Edit Subject Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 5. Form atting the body text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 6. Making Equal Distance Between Colum n Headers. . . . .
Step 7. Making Equal Distance between Item Line Colum ns. . . .
Step 8. Defining the Colum n Headers W hite on Black. . . . . . . . .
Step 9. Defining the Item Line Bars.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 10. Defining the 5 Item Coloum n Fram es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 11. Defining the logo as a water m ark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 12. Defining the Copy Managem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 13. Defining the COPY Sym bol as W aterm ark. . . . . . . . . . .
Step 14. Defining the Relatively Positioned Sub-form .. . . . . . . . .
Step 17. Cleaning the Overlay for Rem aining Text. . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 18. The Result.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple of Advanced use of Sub-overlays (Random text lines).
Creating the Main overlay:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling the first conditioned overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling the conditioned, fixed overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
91
92
92
93
94
95
96
98
100
102
103
103
105
105
106
107
108
110
111
111
113
InterForm A/S 5
The result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
M ain M enu Local Environment Setup. . . . . . . . .
2. Test Print Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Merge Spool Entry with Overlay. . . . . . .
8. Select File set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. Select Output Queue and Printer Type. .
10. W ork with actual Output Queue. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117
117
118
120
121
121
W orking with Overlay Selectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Selection Criteria Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Getting Familiar with Overlay Selectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Placing overlays in One File set. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2. Exam ining Spool Entry Selection Criteria. . . . . .
Step 3. Entering the Selection Criterias in the Selector.
Step 4. Testing the Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
126
126
128
129
131
General Description of Auto Form s Control Sub-system .
10. Start AUTO_FORM subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. End AUTO_FORM subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. W ork with Active Subsystem AUTO_FORM. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
132
133
133
134
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Overview of AFC M ain Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Spooled file selection criteria.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Auto Forms Control Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering queue and job nam es to an AFC definition.. . . . . .
Default Output Output Queue and Printer Type. . . .
Tem plate AFC-definition to be executed after this. .
Additional param eters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AFC Definition Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1=Merge with Overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2=Send Network Spooled File .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3=Transform AFPDS to *USERASCII . . . . . . . . . . .
4=Copy Spooled File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5=Move Spooled File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6=Hold Spooled File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7=Delete Spooled File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8=Call Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9=Exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A=Change attributes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B=Split spooled file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C= Prepare for Finishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D=Sort Spooled File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F=Change W riter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G=Archive to MultiArchive/400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H=Archive in InfoStore/400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P = Send PDF E-m ail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N = PDF File nam ing and -save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W = Print to W indows printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X = Create XML file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* = Com m ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert SAP spool entries (datatype *IBMSCS). . .
SAP spool entries (datatype *IBMSCS2) .. . . . . . . .
Generating m ultiple copies in input spool entries.. .
6
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
137
138
139
140
140
142
145
149
150
151
151
152
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
159
160
160
161
161
162
163
163
163
163
Auto Form s Control Hints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to stop processing spooled files. . . . . . . . .
Changing spooled file attributes has no effect. .
Auto_Form jobs does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
164
164
164
165
Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 1, Using Separate queues for Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Checking the W riter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2. Checking if Auto Form s Control is running. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3. Entering Auto Form s Definition AFC_INPUT1. . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4. Defining m ove of print jobs with type *STD. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 5. Defining m ove of Print jobs with Form type DEMO. . . . . . .
Step 6. Testing new functions in AFC_INPUT1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 2, Using sam e Queue for Input and Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Checking the W riter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2. Creating the AFC Definition:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3. Restricting the writer to process type *STD jobs only. . . . .
Step 4. Preventing following AFC functions to process type *STD.
Step 5. Defining the Overlay Merge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 6. Cleaning up processed jobs.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 7. Activating the AFC job AFC_INPUT1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 8. Testing the new AFC definition AFC_INPUT2. . . . . . . . . . .
Using a “TEMPLATE” AFC defintion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Form Type Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The overlay selection entry field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
166
166
166
166
167
168
169
170
171
171
172
173
173
174
176
177
177
178
181
181
Split Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Split Definition Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling a User Exit Program with the extracted spool pages.
Defining the spool file attributes for the result of a Split. . . . .
Exam ple Using Split. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
183
183
186
189
190
Finishing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Prinserter ® Pre-process Definition. Fixed num ber of pages. . . .
Defining Prinserter® pre-process Definition. Variable num ber of pages.
Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 1, Non sorted.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 2, Sorting in Ascending W eight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 3 , Sorting in Franking groups:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining PFE MailPrinter ® Pre-process Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 1, Non sorted.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 2, Sorting in Ascending W eight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 3 , Sorting in Franking groups:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Stapling Pre-process Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining Insertion Pre-process Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple: Neopost BARCODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to distribute E-m ails and faxes in InterForm 400 ®:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The E-m ail/Fax Finishing Definition.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. How to find E-m ail address / Fax num ber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Key definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Definition variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Default PDF-file nam e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Definition E-m ail text / Cover page text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Definition recipient-ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
194
194
196
196
197
197
198
199
200
201
201
202
203
205
207
211
211
212
213
215
215
215
217
InterForm A/S 7
The Page selection criteria:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. E-m ail addresses and fax num bers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. Senders E-m ail address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. Encryption and Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10. PDF bookm ark definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. PDF em bedding definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. OutBox directory.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. Mail text em bedded im ages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Em ail address syntax error handler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15. Archive in InterArchive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InterArchive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. W ork with em ail senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The File Nam ing Finishing Definition.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Receipient Key Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Variable Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. PDF File Nam e Com position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Page selections and Docum ent breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Receipient ID Inform ation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Closing User-Exit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. Encryption and Signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. PDF bookm ark definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Level Break Conditions for Finishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 1, Level Break on Page Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find Recipient ID in the Following Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 2, Level Break on Change in Custom er Info:. . . . . . . .
Exam ple 3, Level Break on Custom er ID and Attention Person.
Using the Finishing Definition with Auto Form s Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activate the Finishing pre-process definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Merge with pre-processed Finishing spool entry. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribute E-m ails with Auto Form s Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Reformat finishing definition. . . . .
Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User exit program .. . . . . . . . . . .
Detail lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Totals.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Footer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert reform atting in production.
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
217
221
223
224
225
225
226
226
227
228
228
231
232
232
233
235
236
236
237
237
237
238
239
240
240
241
242
242
243
244
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
247
247
249
249
252
254
254
The XM L Definitions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the XML conversion. . . . . . . . . .
XML output file and exit program . .
Page type definitions. . . . . . . . . . .
Line type definitions. . . . . . . . . . . .
XML structure and data. . . . . . . . .
XML Field Definitions. . . . . . . . . . .
The Functions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create the XML files in AFC.. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
255
255
256
258
260
261
262
265
269
Sort Definitions.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page Selection criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Find sort fields in the following positions. . . . . . . . .
Exam ples Using Sort.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple 1. Sort by Type, “Docum ent" letters first:.
Exam ple 2. Sort by Type, “m odules.” letters first:. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
270
272
272
272
273
274
Version 2014
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Exam ple 3. Sort by Type and Custom er ID:.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Exam ple 4. Sort by Custom er ID and type:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
PDF File Bookmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Getting familiar with PDF Bookmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7. User Output Queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
General Description of OSC (Output Schedule Control).
10. Start OSCCTL subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. End OSCCTL subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. W ork with Active Subsystem OSCCTL. . . . . . . .
Describing the OSC definition lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
284
285
285
285
286
Principle of OSC (Output Schedule Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Getting Fam iliar with OSC (Output Schedule Control).. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify input spooled file priority:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify placem ent of input spool file attributes at output:.
Define Sort Fields:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Grouping and separator page:.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define resulting output queues:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify autom atic start scheduling:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify autom atic start options:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify output queue for processed spooled files:.. . . . . .
Specify job priority:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
290
291
291
292
293
293
294
294
295
295
Configuration and licenses. . . . . . .
1. Appoint Adm inistrator. . . .
2. Configure InterForm 400. .
3. Configure em ail. . . . . . . . .
4. Configure W inPrint. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
296
297
298
304
307
Adm inistering InterForm400 ® Environment and Users.
1. W ork with InterForm 400 ® Users. . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. W ork with file sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Connect Users with Overlay File Sets. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
308
309
310
312
W orking with Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. W ork with Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Description of Additional Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple of Defining a Resident Printer font. .
4. W ork with soft fonts for PCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File transfer HP SFP Font files from a PC. . . .
5. Install True Type font for PDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. W ork with TrueType font for UCS2 (unicode). . . . . .
8. Auto download Soft Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto download for PCL soft fonts.. . . . . . . . . .
Auto Download for PDF output.. . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Download for InterW ord400 PDF output.
InterForm 400 ® Predefined Soft Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MICR Soft Font (Font ID 3998). . . . . . . . . . . .
OCRA Soft Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCRB Soft Font (Font ID 0003). . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
314
315
315
317
319
322
322
323
324
324
325
326
327
327
327
327
Barcode Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
InterForm A/S 9
USPS Intelligent Mail Barcode, MICR E-13B and POSTNET.
Setup of two-dim ensional and GS1 / RSS-14 barcodes . . . .
Barcodes in PDF output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcodes in ZPL output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Aztec barcode (ZPLII output only).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Support for UPS MaxiCode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating barcode height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create barcode fonts.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extended code 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Code 128 and EAN128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. EAN8, EAN13 and UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Postnet Barcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Barcode PDF417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Datam atrix and QR barcodes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MICR E-13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ple of editing a font ID for Code39 barcode. . . . . . . . . .
Getting Familiar with Soft-fonts and Barcodes.. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 1. Installing the Arial True Type Font. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 2. Creating the Code128 Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 3. Create font ID for the Arial soft-font . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step 4. Define auto-download of fonts (Arial and OCRB). .
Step 5. Testing the Barcodes in an Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
329
329
330
330
330
330
331
331
332
332
332
332
333
333
333
334
334
334
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
335
335
337
337
338
340
W ork with Zebra fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. Description of Zebra fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CG Trium virate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dot m atrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining barcodes for Zebra printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using soft fonts for printing on Zebra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. W ork with ZEBRA soft fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13. W ork with fonts in ZEBRA flash m em ory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download a soft font into flash m em ory. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete a soft font from flash m em ory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. Initiate ZEBRA flash m em ory and reload fonts and im ages.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
344
344
345
346
346
347
349
350
350
351
351
352
5. W ork with images.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W orking with black and white im ages. . . . . .
Im porting black and white im ages.. .
W orking with color im ages. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Im port color im ages .. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
354
355
355
356
356
W ork with Zebra images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. W ork with ZEBRA im ages.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. W ork with im ages in ZEBRA flash m em ory. . . . . . . . . . . . .
19. Initiate ZEBRA flash m em ory and reload fonts and im ages.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358
358
359
359
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6. W ork with PCL Files.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Im port PCL file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
7. W ork with palette colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Change the definition of the colors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
10
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
8. W ork with paper control options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Paper type to PCL-drawer conversion.. . . . . . .
2. SCS to PCL drawer conversion.. . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Output Sorter Bin Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an Output Sorter Bin for a User.
4. User defined PJL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
364
364
365
366
366
369
9. Work with AFPDS copy spooled file CPI & LPI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
20. Certificate administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
40. Email administration. . . . . . . . . . .
1. W ork with em ail groups . . . .
Using an em ail group. .
5. W ork with em ail log. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
374
375
376
376
Service Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Create Dem o Spool Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Display All Displayable Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. Save spooled file to the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory. . . . . .
7. Print Saved Spooled File from /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory.
8. Print Resource X-reference.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. W ork with Journaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10. Display resource statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21. Export of InterForm 400 resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy resources to export library.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W ork with resources in export library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W ork with distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22. Im port of InterForm 400 Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. W ork with resources in im port library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Transfer resources to the production library. . . . . . . . .
40. Install/upgrade InterW ord 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50. Apply PTF from the /APF3812Hom e/PTFs directory . . . . . . . .
60. Install Swiftview at drive C:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70. Install InterForm Designer on your PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75. Prepare server to support InterForm Designer . . . . . . . . . . . .
80. Install InterFax 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
377
377
378
378
379
379
380
381
384
384
386
386
387
387
388
390
391
391
391
391
391
How to create PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resources that can be used for PDF output.
Fonts used in PDF output.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IFS directories used by MRGSPLFPDF. . . . .
Creating PDF/A Com pliant PDF Files. . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Requirem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
392
397
398
398
398
399
400
Appendix A - Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Requirem ents. . . . . . . . . . .
First Tim e Installation. . . . . . . . . . .
The End User License Agreem ent.
License Codes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release Update.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrade rem ote sites. . . . .
Relations to Other Applications. . . .
Perform ance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
401
401
401
401
401
402
410
410
411
411
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
InterForm A/S 11
Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Appendix B - Attaching Printers to the iSeries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solving problem s with m issing resources in print out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attachm ent Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching through a Twinax Protocol Converter.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration by Auto Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring a Printer Device Manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Device Description from 5219 to 3812.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching through a TCP/IP Raw Socket (Port 9100/3700). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching through a 5250 Term inal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling Host Print Transform on an existing Printer Device Description
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching through a PC Printer Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSeries Access/400.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching through a TCP/IP LPD Printer Server (Rem ote W riter). . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating or Changing an Output Queue for TCP/IP LPD Printing. . . . . . .
Attaching through a TN5250E Print Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trouble Shooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
412
412
412
413
413
414
414
416
416
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
417
417
417
418
418
419
420
420
Appendix C - Printer Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Black and white printer types. . . . . . .
Color printer types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zebra printer types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interm ec printer types.. . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette Mapping (Drawers).. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting drawer by drawer num ber..
Select Drawer using Paper Type. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
421
421
421
422
422
422
423
423
Appendix D - Support for unicode spooled files.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the AFPDS unicode form at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the *SCS unicode form at. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lim itations of the unicode *SCS spooled files.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to create special *SCS unicode spooled files. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying unicode *SCS spooled files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing out unicode *SCS spooled files (without m erge). . . . . . . .
Using the data transfer program with your own W SCST. .
The workaround. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
425
425
426
426
427
429
429
429
429
Appendix E - Codepage Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Appendix F - Font-ID Information. . . . . . .
IBM 3812 font-ID Inform ation. . . . .
IBM Com patible Font List. . . . . . . .
Shipped Zebra Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . .
Typefaces known by PCL-Printers.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
432
432
433
435
436
Appendix G - Limitations of the Light Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Appendix H - Commands in Spooled Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Exam ple of using Escape Com m ands in the Data Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Appendix I - InterForm400 ® CL Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
NetServer Com m ands.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
The Add Netserver File Share Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
12
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The Add NetServer Printer share Com m and. . . . .
The Change Netserver Attributes Com m and. . . . .
The Display Netserver Attributes Com m and. . . . .
The End Netserver Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Rem ove NetServer share Com m and. . . . . . .
The Start Netserver Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save/Restore and Export/Im port Com m ands. . . . . . . . . . .
The Export Chart Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Im port Chart Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Restore Library from Folder Com m and. . . . .
The Save Library to Folder Com m and. . . . . . . . . .
The Save Library to Stream File Com m and. . . . . .
AFC and OSC Com m ands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The End Auto Form s Control Job Com m and. . . . .
The Start Auto Form s Control Job Com m and. . . .
The Start OSC Job Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities relevant for AFC Exit program s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Transform *AFPDS print Com m and. . . . . . . .
The APF3812 Overlay Merge Com m and. . . . . . . .
The Copy CPI Spooled File Com m and. . . . . . . . .
The Page Builder Spooled File Com m and. . . . . . .
The Convert PCL Spooled File Com m and. . . . . . .
The Merge Spooled File IPL Com m and. . . . . . . . .
The Merge Spooled File PDF Com m and. . . . . . . .
The Merge Spooled File ZPL Com m and. . . . . . . .
The Print ASCII File Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Split Spooled File Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled File Inspector (SFI).. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utility Com m ands relevant for E-m ailing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Clear Mail Log Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The End Mail Subsystem Com m and. . . . . . . . . . .
The Merge Spooled File PDF Com m and. . . . . . . .
The Send E-m ail com m and .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Send Mail Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Send Mails Com m and.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Start Mail Subsystem Com m and. . . . . . . . . .
The W ork Mail addresses Com m and. . . . . . . . . .
The W ork Mail Log Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Utility Com m ands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Edit Print Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The APF W ork Output Queue Com m and. . . . . . .
The APF W ork Spooled Files Com m and. . . . . . . .
The Calibrate QLnnn+ Printer Com m and. . . . . . .
The Display Black/W hite im age Com m and. . . . . .
The Display IP Address Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . .
The Display Unicode Spooled File Com m and. . . .
Encrypt InterForm 400 PDF File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The HP Macro Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Im port InterForm 400 Resources Com m and. .
The PCL-file from folder to Mem ber Com m and. . .
The Print PCL-m em ber Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . .
The Print PDF file Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Print TIFF File Com m and .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Print X-Ref List Com m and. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
450
450
450
451
451
451
451
451
452
452
452
453
454
454
454
454
455
455
455
456
456
459
460
460
460
461
461
462
463
463
463
464
464
467
467
468
468
468
471
471
471
472
472
473
473
474
474
474
476
476
477
478
480
480
InterForm A/S 13
The Start Screen Attention Com m and. . . . . . . .
The TIF-file from folder to m em ber Com m and.
The W ork with Profile Jobs Com m and. . . . . . .
W ork with Screen Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W ork with Stream File Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Unzip to current directory Com m and. . . . .
The Zip Stream File(s) Com m and. . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
480
481
482
482
484
484
485
Appendix J - Handling InterW ord400 TM Spooled Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Lim itations for InterW ord400 spooled files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Appendix K - Forms Server for non-System i environments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Adding Overlays to *SCS PC Print Jobs (PC Mail Merge). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Adding overlays to *ASCII PC printjobs (PCL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Appendix L - PDF and PCL View ing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
PDF viewing:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
PCL viewing:.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Appendix M - InterForm400 charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
The W ork with Charts com m and, W RKCHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
The &&CHA Chart com m ands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
14
Appendix N - Sending E-m ails from the System i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup of InterForm 400 SMTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup of OS400 SMTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Com bining OS400 SMTP and Dom ino/400 on the sam e m achine. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
519
520
520
521
Appendix O - Graphical Designer: Install and use. . . . . . . . . .
Requirem ents for the Graphical Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirem ents for the System i:. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirem ents for the PC:.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirem ents for the network:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lim itations of the Graphical Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Graphical Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing JAVA Environm ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and setting up the Graphical Designer.
Setting up the designer for DBCS use. . . . . . . . .
Starting the Graphical Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Im proving perform ance of the designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start designing an overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a new overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit an existing overlay.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open a Spooled File.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings and tools for the design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the displayed size.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the m easurem ent used. . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting unicode output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Previewing the result in PDF or SwiftView. . . . . .
Including a background im age . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock spooled file selections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Design preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designing the overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The spool view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Result view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting design elem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
522
522
522
522
522
523
523
523
525
525
526
527
528
528
528
528
529
529
529
530
530
530
531
532
534
536
537
538
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page Managem ent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspend design elem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to work with conditioned overlays in the Designer. . . . . . . . . .
Local save in the designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Movem ent of elem ents in the result view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping and ungrouping elem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem : Error m essage: 'Unable to load color m odel'. . . . . . . . . .
Problem : W rong font and/or m issing characters in the result view.
Problem : Spooled file data is not displayed correctly . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
550
551
552
553
553
554
554
554
555
556
Appendix P - Import/Export in details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of possible cross references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Copy resources used in already copied overlays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Copy auto download defs and soft font m em bers for all copied fonts..
W arnings/hints during im port.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renam ing resources in the export or im port library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check list when renam ing resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resources that cannot be exported/im ported. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Export Libraries (MEL) feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activation/deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Im port InterForm Ressources (IMPAPFRSC) com m and.. . . . . . . . .
Restrictions:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Param eters:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exam ples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Escape m essages:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sam ple scenario of using MEL and the IMPAPFRSC com m and. . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
557
557
559
559
559
561
562
563
564
564
564
564
564
564
564
565
565
566
Appendix Q - Building functions into your menues. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The alternative to W RKOUTQ (display m erged spooled files) ..
View the last created spooled file as either PCL or PDF file. . . .
Add dynam ic functions to the Attention (Escape) key . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
567
567
567
568
Appendix R - Install/Upgrade on mirrored machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W hat files (and other objects) should we include in the m irroring?.
W hat journal can we use for the mirroring?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for install of InterForm 400?.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Com m on problem during upgrade of m irrored system s.. . . . . . . . .
W hat to verify for a m irrored setup.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
575
575
575
575
576
577
Appendix S - Install/Upgrade on iASP machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirem ents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving to iASP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First tim e install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving an existing installation from SYSASP into an iASP. .
Changing the setup to iASP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving from an iASP onto SYSASP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
579
579
579
579
579
580
582
Appendix T: The Embed PDF M odule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup of an Em bed definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup file types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Descriptions of file type to be em bedded. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
583
583
584
585
586
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
InterForm A/S 15
2. Em bedding m odel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Icon.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Path to file(s) to be em bedded. . . . . . .
6. Page layout input spooled files.. . . . . .
7. Variables in head page 1. . . . . . . . . . .
8. Detail line layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. Variables in detail lines.. . . . . . . . . . . .
10. User exit program to find variable(s).
Using the em bed definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MRGSPLFPDF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Em ail finish definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting fam iliar with the Em bed PDF function. . .
Inserting the term s of delivery. . . . . . . . .
Inserting product im ages. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix U : Setting up CA in DCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up DCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a System Certificate store. . . .
Setting up the authority for the Certificate Store.
Getting a Certificate file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Im porting a certificate in DCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
586
587
588
589
590
590
591
592
593
594
594
594
595
596
599
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
603
603
604
605
605
607
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
16
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
About This Manual
This m anual is intended for the person or people responsible for production printing on the
site. For instance the system adm inistrator.
InterForm 400 ® is designed to operate com pletely transparent to the user, which m eans this
m anual is only used for designing overlays, setting up printers and for configuration of subsystem handling the overlays and printers.
InterForm 400 ® requires no program m ing of any kind in order to operate with existing print jobs.
All logical definitions for searching and selecting print jobs are set up in the InterForm 400 ®
m enus.
The m anual describes functions, that m ay require the purchase of additional m odules.
W henever additional m odule(s) are required it should be m entioned, but that cannot be
guaranteed. For guidelines refer to page 24. Ask your local InterForm 400 reseller if in doubt.
The term s ‘AS/400', ‘iSeries’, ‘i5' and ‘System i’ m ay be used in the m anual. Unless m entioned
they refer to all 4 types of m achines.
InterForm A/S 17
How the manual is organized
This m anual is built as a technical reference as well as a self study on creating overlays fast
and easy. The self study sections are constructed as follows:
Getting Started:
W ork through this chapter if you are installing the system for the
first tim e. You will end up with an illustrative sam ple printed
through the AutoForm sControl sub-system .
Getting Familiar
with Overlays:
This section will use the dem o overlay as tem plate and lead you
through virtually all the design features in InterForm 400 ®. To gain
full benefit of this section you should have worked through the
section Getting Started.
Getting Fam iliar with
Overlay Selectors
Getting Fam iliar with
Auto Forms Control
The overlay selector is a vital elem ent of InterForm 400 ®. It enables
specific pages in a spool entry to have unique overlays attached
according to the contents of the spool data. To gain full benefit of
this section you should have worked through the section Getting
Fam iliar with Overlays.
This chapter will lead you through a real life exam ple of using Auto
Form s Control. You will be guided step-by-step through the entire
procedure. To gain full benefit of this section you should have
worked through the section Getting Started.
Getting Fam iliar with Softfonts and Barcodes:
This section is structured as a learning-by-doing exam ple which
m akes extensive use of download fonts and bar codes.
Throughout the m anual you will find the following sym bols, which will provide you with special
inform ation:
J TIP J
If you would like to make an easy thing, then just make a ...
L TROUBLE SHOOTING L
Did you remember to ...
M WARNING M
Do not do that, as you will end up in deep..
G NOTE G
Im portant inform ation
18
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
What is new in the 2014 versions
This Users Guide describes functions available in version 2014M 01 and newer.
Below are listed m ost of the new features added in InterForm 400 since the last Users Guide
(version 2013).
PCL
•
Soft fonts for barcodes are now generated on the fly. This elim inates the need for
m anually generating these as well as the autodownload setup for barcodes. This also
ease the process of export/im port of non 2D barcodes for PCL.
•
Code128 barcodes (with code set C) could in rare situations generate the sequence
!R! causing a problem on Kyocera printers. A workaround was to set the Code 128
font num ber to characters set B only. This issue is now solved, so this workaround is
no longer needed.
•
The PRTTIFF command prints TIFF files in PCL. This com m and has now a new
parameter, SHRINK. W ith this option you can shrink the TIFF file to the selected page
size. The PRTTIFF com m and is described on page 480.
•
The interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes in PCL was previously inserted a bit too m uch to the
right (the displacem ent is relative to the size of the barcode). The barcodes are now
positioned correctly, so custom ers upgrading from previous versions will
experience, that the interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes in PCL will m ove a few m illim eters to
the left and actually position as specified - as in PDF output.
•
The variables in the em bed definition (for em bedding files in output PDF files) can now
be trimmed for both leading and trailing blanks. Previously the trim option would
only trim any trailing blanks. The previous trim option is now shown as *RIGHT and
the new *YES option trim s both leading and trailing blanks. The trim options are
described on page 588.
PDF
PCL/PDF
•
A new *PATHTIF3 option has been added for the &&IMG com m ands in the spooled
file. W ith this option you can scale dynam ic TIFF images to a certain size (height or
width) while keeping the ratio between height and width. This feature works for PDF
and color PCL output and is described on page 440.
ZPL/IPL
•
W hen using the &&IMG *PATHTIF com m and in the spooled file for ZPL output you
can now insert a ‘K’ for keep in position 6 to keep the image in the printers memory
(for the current spooled file) to reduce the size of print out and speed up the printing
process. This is described on page 440.
•
The &&RFID com m and has been extended with a new EPC form at. Refer to page
446 for details.
InterForm A/S 19
•
The ZPL printer data stream has been changed. Previously fixed (unchangable and
unprintable) characters was used as control characters in the data stream . This has
now been changed so that InterForm 400 is using only the configurable control
characters, that you can enter via the configuration as described on page 39.
The previous ZPL option to save and restore the configuration is no longer supported.
W ith this change (and the default settings) newer Zebra printers (ZT230 series) works
directly with InterForm 400.
•
A new Aztec barcode is now supported for ZPLII output. The barcodes m ust be
defined in the range 4000-4099. The barcode is described on page 330.
Designer
•
You can now find the origin of any elem ent in the result view - even if it is defined in a
conditioned or uncoditioned suboverlay. You just press <Ctrl> and then click the
elem ent to find the suboverlay as described on page 548.
•
Rendering of huge and com plex overlays now times out. This m akes it possible to
use the designer even when editing very large and com plex overlays. Previously the
designer would slow down, but now the result vindow will not be updated if it takes too
long, causing im proved response tim e for such overlays.
•
Copy and paste of conditioned overlays is now also possible. Previously you could
copy and paste any other elem ent except from this.
•
Positions with values below 1 can now be entered w ithout a preceding 0 (zero).
Now you can just enter a com m a or dot (without the 0) to enter such a value.
•
W hen creating suboverlays from a m ain overlay the suboverlays will now inherent the
size from the main overlay. This m akes editing a suboverlay (without the m ain
overlay) easier.
•
The new Aztec barcode supported for ZPLII output can also be selected in the
graphical designer.
Email
20
•
You can now em bed local im ages in the htm l, which defines the em ail contents.
Previously you could only link to im ages, that are globally available causing som e
receivers to have to right click in the em ail to download the im ages. The im ages can
even be dynam ically selected if you include variables as a part of the im age nam e
and/or path. This is described on page 226 for the em ail finishing definition and on
page 464 for the SNDEMAIL com m and.
•
You can now use up to 99 variables in the email finishing definition. Previously the
lim it was 9 variables. W ith the 99 variables you can e.g. convert a spooled file page
into the text contents of the em ail by using these variables in an htm l file. Page 215
shows how variables are defined.
•
A new M AILEXIT08 format for calling user program s has been added for the email
finishing definition. This new form at includes e.g. an array of the 99 variables, that
can now be defined. Future param eters will be added to the end of the data structure,
which is the entry param eter of the program . The new form at is described in the 2.
Key definitions section on page 213.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
•
The W RKM AILLOG command (and the W ork with email log option in the Em ail
Adm inistration m enu) has been extended:
1. The com m and now includes parameters to direct users into a specific subset.
2. The subset option now include more fields for subsetting.
3. A new forw ard option m akes it possible to forward e.g. failed em ails to another
receiver.
The W RKMAILLOG com m and is described on page 468.
Modules
•
A new m odule for signature pad support is now being offered. W ith this m odule you
can com bine InterForm 400 with a signature pad e.g. on a sales counter to let the
custom er sign a docum ent and directly create a PDF and/or printout of the signed
docum ent.
Installation and upgrade
•
Requirement for installation is now V5R4 or higher. For previous (2013) versions
V5R3 was required. The new requirem ent is included on page 27.
•
Installation is no longer possible via a CD. The installation is now only possible via a
zipped save file. The installation and upgrade procedures on page 28 and 402 have
been updated.
•
The list of journaled objects in the internal journal (APF3812/APFJRN) is now
checked during an upgrade. If any additional objects are journaled a norm al upgrade
cannot proceed. This is very often the case when upgrading a mirrored machine.
Previously the upgrade would stop with an error telling you that there is a lock on the
library, but not what to do. Now you will be informed about the problem with a
suggestion of how to solve it. This check is m entioned on page 29. Refer to
Appendix R on page 575 for details of how to upgrade a m irrored system .
•
During upgrades from pre 2014 versions all line barcodes (that are based on soft
fonts) like EANxx, Code128, Code39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 are all converted into the
new, editable form at. The settings of the new barcodes are determ ined in this way:
1. If any soft font is linked to a barcode font num ber, then the soft font settings has
the priory for the barcode settings.
2. If no soft font is linked to the barcode font num ber, the font num ber settings are
used.
This m eans, that if som eone has changed the font num m er settings (height/width)
without generating a new soft font (which is a very bad idea), then the PDF and PCL
result will be different in the pre 2014 versions. After the upgrade the PCL output w ill
be unchanged and the PDF output will after the upgrade adapt to the PCL result
- if a barcode soft font is found. This inform ation is also included on page 402.
Administration
•
You can now run user programs called via 8=Call Program in Auto Form s Control
under any user profile - not only AFCOPER or the owner of the spooled file. Refer to
page 153 for details.
InterForm A/S 21
•
Users could previously get to the AFC menu directly by CALL APF3812/AFCADM .
This is now only available via the com m and: APF3812/AFCADM . Refer to page 132
for details.
•
A new com m and, APF3812/RTVDTAQI (Retrieve Data Queue) has been added. Data
queues used with InterForm 400 are always defined as SEQ(*FIFO) (First In First Out),
but with this com m and you can also verify if that is the case. The com m and is
described on page 480.
•
You can now export and import autodow nload inform ation (Links between installed
font num bers and soft fonts). You can also export both autodownload inform ation and
referred soft fonts for overlays already copied for export. This new feature is
docum ented on page 385.
•
For the line barcodes (EANxx, Code128, Code39, Interleaved 2 of 5), these kind of
barcodes exported from a 2014 (or future version of InterForm 400) no soft fonts are
generated. However for backwards com patibility a barcode soft font is automatically
included in the export if such a PCL/PDF barcode is exported. This is m entioned on
page 402.
•
The IM PAPFRSC com m and (Im port APF Resources) is now able to directly im port an
import stream file directly into production. The com m and is useful for custom ers
that want to a sim ple and fast im port (without the need to check or renam e resources
during the im port). Previously only save files where supported for this com m and. The
com m and is described on page 564.
What is new in this manual
This lists the m ajor changes to the m anual, that does not concern the new functions. The
changes/additions are:
22
•
The special Zebra/Intermec overlay settings are described on page 59.
•
Designer: In the description of the designer elem ent there previously was too m any
references to the old 5250 ‘designer’. Now the details are explained (and up to date)
for the elem ents in the graphical designer from page 538 and onwards.
•
Designer: It is explained how to solve the error m essage ‘Unable to load color
model’ in a new trouble shooting section on page 554.
•
Designer: It is im portant to install the sam e TTFs (True Type Fonts) on the PC’s
running the graphical designer as in InterForm 400 if you want the result view to be
correct (not use a wrong font e.g. with m issing characters). This is stressed on page
555.
•
Designer: If the spooled file is not displayed in the correct code page in the designer,
then you m ight need to tell the designer what code page to use. This is described on
page 556.
•
The status of outgoing em ails is now described in details in the description of the
W RKM AILLOG com m and. This is included on page 470.
•
The limitations for IPL (Interm ec Printer Language) are now listed on page 422.
•
A tip has been added to help those using the SPLITSPLF com m and on page 461.
•
The export and import features are now described in details in Appendix P on
page 557. During the export and im port it is actually possible to check for existing
resources with the sam e nam e (or m atching fonts) and even renam e resources and
update cross references in the exported resources while exporting/im porting. The
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
docum entation of this on page 384 and onwards has also been updated and
im proved.
•
It is now em phasized that it is a very good idea only to use a single PCL printer
group in autodow nload - with the output queue *ALLPCL. The auto download
specifications for PCL printer groups can only be exported/im ported for the printer
group with *ALLPCL. This is m entioned on page 324.
•
All em ail com m ands: MRGSPLFPDF, SNDEMAIL and SNDMAIL refer to *CURRENT
as the sender of the em ail as default. The value *CURRENT refers to settings in the
system directory, which norm ally are not specified causing an error m essage when
trying to em ail unless a specific sender em ail address is specified. The error m essage
and solutions are m entioned on page 467.
•
The limitations of the BlueSeries M ail integration are m entioned on page 305. If any
unsupported option is used the norm al InterForm 400 em ail configuration is used.
InterForm A/S 23
The modules of InterForm400
Below basic InterForm 400 package and the m odules are described.
As m inim um you need to buy either the InterForm 400 Light version or the basic InterForm 400
package.
If wanted you need to install the additional m odules InterW ord400 and InterFax400.
InterFax400 is installed via option 80 on the InterForm 400 Service menu and requires the
InterForm 400 CD. The other m odules are installed along with InterForm 400 and only need to
be enabled with a new license code.
Refer to Appendix G on page 437 for details of the light version.
The Basic InterForm400 package
The basic InterForm 400 does not contain any of the functions, that are available as a m odule.
That m eans, that the following is NOT included in the basic package:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ZPL output
PDF output and E-m ailing with attached PDF files
Possibility to encrypt and digitally sign PDF files created by InterForm 400
InterW ord400 (OV400 replacem ent and System i m ail m erge)
Possibility to fax (Interfax).
Swiftview licenses apart from 1 license, that is delivered with InterForm 400 for free
And any other m odule, that m ay be offered for InterForm 400.
However the num ber of output queues supported for PCL output in the basic package is
unlim ited.
The InterForm400 Classic package
The InterForm 400 Classic package fits the functionality of the previous versions of
InterForm 400. The Classic package includes PCL output on an unlim ited num ber of output
queues, ZPL output, PDF output and e-m ailing.
If you already have purchased the full InterForm 400 license prior to the 2004 versions (and
have m aintenance) then you will get a 2010 license code for the classic package. If you
already have bought InterW ord400 or additional SwiftView licenses then the 2010 code (and
future license codes) will of course also include that.
InterArchive400
W ith InterArchive you can archive and retrieve docum ents created by InterForm 400 - including
copies of outgoing em ails. The functionality also includes workflow, scanning, Browser User
Interface and m uch m ore...
The ZPL Module
Purchase this m odule and you will be able to print on ZPL com patible printers including the
wireless QLnnn+ printers.
In order to start working with Zebra output you need to create a Zebra File set.
Refer to page 310 for how to do that. This m odule is included in the classic package.
24
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The PDF and E-mailing Module
If you want to create PDF files in InterForm 400 and/or send E-m ails with attached PDF files
you need this m odule. This m odule is included in the classic package.
The Digital Signature / PDF Security Module
If you want to encrypt PDF files created by InterForm 400 and/or digitally sign them , then you
need this m odule. Note, that you also need to buy the PDF and E-m ailing m odule if you do not
have the classic package. Refer to the PDF Security m anual for m ore inform ation.
The InterWord400 Module
Can be used as a substitute for OfficeVision400. It converts OV/400 docum ents into RTF
form at. Offers also the possibility to do m ail m erge directly on the System i. Ask your local
InterForm 400 reseller for m ore details.
The InterFax400 Module
The InterFax400 m odule enables distribution of the InterForm 400 docum ents via facsim ile.
The InterFax400 m odules ensures a correct translation of the InterForm 400 docum ents. This
is done in com bination with the E-m ail/Fax finishing definition in InterForm 400. Note that
InterFax400 is only supported for V5R1 or newer.
The WinPrint Module
W ith W inPrint you can extend the types of printers you can use with InterForm 400. A W inPrint
client is installed on one or m ore W indows PC’s and then you can print the m erged result on
any of the printers installed on these W indows PC’s (provided that the printer drivers supports
printing of e.g. norm al PDF files.).
The Embed PDF Module
W ith the Em bed PDF Module it is possible to em bed one or m ore files within a PDF file. This
can be com bined with any of the distribution m ethods supported including em ailing and
creation of PDF files locally. To test this m odule you only need a 2013 (or newer) version of
InterForm 400 and a test license code.
The Em bed PDF m odule is described in details in Appendix T on page 583.
The Sign Pad Module
W ith this m odule it is possible to sign the PDF files created by InterForm 400 and archive,
em ail and print out these signed PDF files. The m odule includes all: InterForm 400
com m unicates with a sign pad installed on a PC and processes the signed PDF.
InterForm A/S 25
Getting Started
The idea of the following procedure is to give you a safe and easy start on the InterForm 400 ®
system . No knowledge on InterForm 400 ® is required, and only m inor OS/400 knowledge is
needed.
The final result of the following will print a sam ple spool entry with a predefined overlay by
m eans of the Auto Form s Control (AFC) system , which is an essential part of the
InterForm 400 ® system . The result will be printed on a PCL printer of your own choice.
iASP installation
If you install or upgrade InterForm 400 on a system that is running iASP you need to read this:
InterForm 400 can only be installed on one ASP. This ASP m ust be varied on for both
upgrading and installing.
Installation will insert a symbolic link like this, where ‘aspdev’ is the ASP device:
ADDLNK OBJ('/aspdev/APF3812Hom e') NEW LNK('/APF3812Hom e')
The libraries used by InterForm 400 will all automatically be created in the sam e ASP as the
APF3812 library:
APFIMPORT
APFEXPORT
APFIMPDST
APFEXPDST
APFPTFnnnn
(Library used during im port)
(Library used during export)
(tem porary library used during im port)
(tem porary library used during export)
(Libraries containing installed PTFs - num ber nnnn).
During a first tim e install you are prom pted for which ASP you want to install on:
INS0103
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
This is the first time InterForm 400 is installed on this system.
Press Enter to continue.
Install to ASP device
F3=Exit
. . . :
*SYSASP
*SYSASP, ASP device
F12=Cancel
For future upgrades the sam e ASP will be used. If you install InterForm 400 into another ASP
than the system ASP, then you m ust go into InterForm 400 configuration (after the install) and
m ake sure that the job queues and subsystem descriptions are placed in a library inside the
system asp.
26
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
G NOTE G
Commitm ent control is used in InterForm 400 when you renam e fonts in InterForm 400 via
option ‘7=Assign new font num ber’ as shown on page 315. This is the only function in
InterForm 400 using com m itm ent control. This is im portant to notice if you are running an iASP
installation: The ASP group m ust be set prior to font renum bering.
G NOTE G
If you are running iASP and there is an abnorm al end for the Auto_Form jobs, you can risk
that there are spooled files, that are partially created in the output queue APF3812/APFSYS.
This will not influence the functions of InterForm 400.
1. Preparation
•
Make sure your OS/400 level is at least Version 5 release 4 or newer. (Refer to
System Requirements page 401)
•
Make sure you have QSECOFR rights on the System i, or sim ilar with USER CLASS
*SECOFR authority. The user profile used for the install m ust at least have *ALLOBJ,
*SECADM and *SPLCTL authorities in order to be able to do the install.
•
Make sure you have a PCL5, ZPL or IPL com patible printer attached either through a
LAN (SNA APPC, TCP/IP LPD, Raw Socket (port 9100) or TN5250E) or Twinax
(direct or through a Term inal or a PC em ulator card). Any PCL5 Printer configured to
use IBM Host Print Transform can be used. Refer to Appendix B page 412 for detailed
inform ation on attaching printers.
•
Note that printers with IPDS as the only language can not be used. Norm ally you can
define an additional printer device (type 3812) to point to the sam e physical IPDS
printer in order to print from InterForm 400.
InterForm A/S 27
2. Installation
Restore with the RSTLIBPC tool
The easiest way to upload and restore the library is to use a sm all java program which you can
run on your PC. In the InterForm 400 installation zip file you can find a file called
RSTLIBPC.exe. In order to start uploading you can double click on the RSTLIBPC.exe file.
This will start up a DOS window and this window will then appear:
In the screen above you enter the System i identification i.e. IP-address or server nam e and a
user ID and password used for signing on to the System i. Type the library APF3812NEW as
this is where you want to restore to and select the save file to upload (called SAVF3812) - you
can also keep the “Restore to Library” field blank to use the sam e library as is in the save file.
W hen the upload and restore is done you can start the installation like described below.
Alternative restore with FTP
If you are unable to run the java program you can m anually FTP the save file and install via
this. Here is how to do that:
28
1.
First create a save file on the System i onto which you will upload the save file. You
can e.g. create it in qgpl with this com m and: CRTSAVF QGPL/SAVF3812
2.
Next upload the save file SAVF3812 (e.g. found in the distributed zip file) e.g. via
FTP onto the save file (here we im agine the SAVF3812 file is placed in C:\tem p and is
to be uploaded to qgpl/savf3812:
a.
Open a DOS session on your PC
b.
Type ftp followed by the ip address of your System i and press Enter, type
your user profile and password when prom pted
c.
Type lcd c:\tem p (or wherever you have placed the SAVF3812 file
d.
Type cd qgpl to tem porarily place the save file in the qgpl library
e.
Type bin to change to binary transfer
f.
Transfer the file with the com m and: put SAVF3812
g.
Type quit to exit the ftp session.
3.
Now restore the apf3812new library from the save file QGPL/SAVF3812 (this save
flie in this exam ple) with the com m and:
RSTLIB SAVLIB(APF3812NEW) DEV(*SAVF) SAVF(QGPL/SAVF3812)
4.
Now you can delete the temporary save file:
DLTF FILE(QGPL/SAVF3812)
5.
Start the upgrade or install like described below
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
J TIP J
If you have a very limited bandwidth you can also consider to upload a zip file with the save
file within onto the System i and then unzip the file directly on the System i (with
apf3812/unzip) before you copy the SAVF3812 file into a save file (The save file must be
created before) with the command:
CPYFRMSTMF FROMSTMF('/pcdata/savf3812')
TOMBR('/qsys.lib/qgpl.lib/savf3812.file') MBROPT(*REPLACE)
CVTDTA(*NONE)
(Here we copy the file savf3812 in the IFS directory pcdata into a save file with the same name
in library qgpl).
Installation
After restoring the APF3812NEW library with one of the m ethods above you can now do the
actual installation.
Note: Refer to page 402 if you are perform ing the below steps as an upgrade to an existing
InterForm 400 ® installation.
1.
Run the com m and: APF3812NEW /APF3812NEW
2.
The first screen inform s you that any objects in the QTEMP library of the
installation/upgrade job will be deleted (confirm with ‘G’ for ‘Go’):
Display Program Messages
Job 264723/KSE/QPADEV000B started on 28/03/14 at 08:35:43 in subsystem QBASE
Library QTEMP will be cleared. (C G).
Type reply, press Enter.
Reply . . . G
F3=Exit
3.
F12=Cancel
The screen below will only appear if you have added journaling of extra objects in the
journal APF3812/APFJRN. The screen will show a list of any objects, that are norm ally
not journaled in InterForm 400:
InterForm A/S 29
Objects journaled to APF3812/APFJRN prevents upgrade.
JRN440D
Please end journaling to be able to upgrade. To end journaling use one or
more of the following commands: ENDJRN, ENDJRNPF and/or ENDJRNOBJ.
Press Enter to continue.
Type
*FILE
Object
APF3812/APFLCKP
End
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you see the screen above you are probably trying to upgrade InterForm 400 on a m irrored
m achine, where the journal is used for replicating changes. W hat you need to do is to end
journaling for each object m entioned above e.g. with the com m ands:
ENDJRN
ENDJRNPF
ENDJRNOBJ
Refer to page 576 for m ore inform ation of how to solve this. After ending journaling you need
to restart the installation or upgrade again with the com m and APF3812NEW /APF3812NEW .
4.
At the next screen you are asked to confirm that you agree with the End User License
Agreem ent:
Accept InterForm400 End User License Agreement
EUA200D
IMPORTANT: BY USING INTERFORM400 AND MODULES, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY
THE FOLLOWING INTERFORM A/S TERMS.
InterForm A/S (Licensor)
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Concerning the licensing of the Software InterForm400 and modules
(hereinafter referred to as "the Software").
Intellectual property rights
The Licensor holds the copyright and all other intellectual property rights
to the Software and all future versions and upgrades hereof.
The Licensee is not entitled to change or remove any notice on copyright,
trademarks or any other rights marked on the Software or the data media.
Scope of the license
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F16=Accept EULA
Please notice, that there are m ore than this screen. Press the <Page Down> key to view the
other screens and press <F16> to accept this license agreem ent. After the installation/upgrade
this agreem ent can be viewed from the m enu by selecting option ‘70. Configuration and
licences’ followed by option ‘60. Display InterForm 400 End User License Agreem ent’.
5.
30
You are now prom pted to choose your preferred language for the installation:
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Note:
If the installation detects an existing version of InterForm 400 ® on your
system you will, at this point, get prom pted to selected installation m ethod.
Refer to page 402 for m ore inform ation on release updates.
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
DE: Wählen Sie bitte eine Sprache aus, während verwendet zu werden installieren
Eingabetaste --> Weiter
DK: Vælg sprog for instruktioner under denne installation.
Tryk på Enter for at fortsætte.
ES: Seleccione por favor un lenguaje para ser utilizado durante instalan.
Pulse Intro para continuar.
FR: Veuillez choisir la langue à utiliser pendant l'installation.
Appuyez sur ENTREE pour continuer.
EN: Please select a language to be used during install.
Press Enter to continue.
PT: Favor selecionar uma língua a ser usada durante a instalação.
Aperte Enter para continuar.
EN
DE=Deutsch, DK=Dansk, EN=English
ES=Españoles, FR=Français, PT=Português
F3=Exit
6.
F12=Cancel
Confirm on the next screen (with Enter), that you are installing InterForm 400 and
specify the ASP device to use if you are running iASP. The screen after that requires
you to enter a valid licence type, in order to allow the installation to proceed. You can
also leave it blank and fill it out later.
INS0103
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
This is the first time InterForm 400 is installed on this system.
Press Enter to continue.
Install to ASP device
F3=Exit
. . . :
*SYSASP
*SYSASP, ASP device
F12=Cancel
Refer to page 26 for additional inform ation if you are running iASP.
InterForm A/S 31
Work with licence information
InterForm 400 version
Model / Feature . . .
Serial number . . . .
Operating system . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
LIC350D
2014.M01
270 22A2
65BD1BB
V5R3M000
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change 5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
_
License code
Production key
Test key
Mirroring key-1
Mirroring key-2
F3=Exit
7.
Not
Not
Not
Not
applied
applied
applied
applied
F12=Cancel=Cancel
In the following screen you can set the preferred language used in InterForm 400. The
language can be changed later if needed. This is done by option 2 at the
Administration menu to change the global settings for InterForm 400 ® or use option 4
to select language for specific InterForm 400 ® users.
Note:
InterForm 400 ® CL com m ands like MRGSPLFPDF, APF3812 etc. will be
installed in the language chosen here, and can not be changed unless a reinstallation is m ade.
INS0121
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
Select primary language, press Enter.
Primary language . . . . . . .
EN
DE=Deutsch, DK=Dansk, EN=English,
ES=Españoles, FR=Français, PT=Português
Primary language is used for:
1. The language of commands.
2. The language of displays.
Notice:
Language of commands can only be selected during install.
Primary language can be changed at the administration menu option 2.
F3=Exit
8.
32
F12=Cancel
If you are unsure, you should leave the default values. Refer to page 380 for m ore
inform ation on journaling.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
INS0122
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
Select journal, press Enter.
Journal . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
APFJRN___
APF3812___
If a journal is selected, changes are recorded to a journal receiver.
It is recommend to use the journal APFJRN in library APF3812.
This journal will be created during install, if used.
If you select a journal in a other library this journal must already exist.
F3=Exit
9.
The installation guide now gives you an overview of param eters you have chosen, for
the installation of InterForm 400 ®. Press F10 to start installation. Note that Status
m essages will be shown at the bottom of the screen during installation.
INS0129
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
Start installation with selected options.
Device . . . . .
Category . . .
ASP device . . .
License type . .
Licensed modules
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
Primary language . . . . . . .
Journal . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
APF3812NEW
*LIB
*SYSASP
*Demo
*Classic, *PDF-Security, *InterWord
EN
APFJRN
APF3812
Press F10 to install.
F3=Exit
10.
F10=Start installation
F12=Cancel
Press F10 to com plete the installation.
InterForm A/S 33
3. Setting Up the System
The system is now ready for setting up adm inistrators, file-sets, print queues and printers.
Enter the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu:
APF3812/APFMENU
W hen entering InterForm 400 ® for the first tim e, you will be asked to appoint an adm inistrator.
Enter option 70. Configuration and licences and go through the m enu points 1 - 3, as
follows:
1.
Enter 1. Appoint Administrator to appoint an adm inistrator of InterForm 400 ®, (e.g.
QSECOFR). It is recom m end to allow access to ALL until the system enters
production.
2.
Enter 2. Configure InterForm 400.
3.
Type in a default output queue. Select printer type according to the supported HP PCL
em ulation of your printer. (It is recom m ended to select HP4 or HP4D (D for duplex) in
order to have support for all fonts used in the overlay sam ple).
Refer to page 421 for other values.
Enter Y/N (Yes/No) whether you want to "Allow Users to override default printer
type". Answer ‘Y’ if in doubt.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
1/17
Specify default output queue for users with no individual output queue.
Users may override value when using the system.
Output queue . . . .
Library . . . . .
PRT01
QUSRSYS
Specify default printer type
Printer type . . .
HP4
HP4, HP4D, HP4_PJL, HP4D_PJL,
HP5C, HP4500, HP4500D,
ZEBRA203, ZEBRA300, QLZPL203,
IPL203, IPL300
Allow users to override default printer type ?
F3=Exit
Y
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
W hen you press Enter you are presented with the screen below. Here you decide what form
type to use as default (use *STD if in doubt), the paper size, and whether or not the
InterForm 400 users are allowed to override the paper size on overlays (See m ore on page 54).
34
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
2/17
Specify default form type for the InterForm 400 system.
Users may override value when using the system.
Form type
Select paper size
*STD______
4
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
A4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
COM-10
MONARCH
C5
DL
A = LEDGER
B = A3
C = A5
Y (Y N)
Do you want to define paper size on the individual overlays
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Leave the m acro offset value at “0". Refer to page 299 for additional info
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
3/17
Number to be added to the macro numbers the system works with . . .
___0
The reason to add a number can be, that printers are equipped with
flash-simm cards, that does not correspond to the HP standard saying,
that a macro in the printers internal memory should be selected,
even if it has the same number as a macro in the flash-simm.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you do not intend to exchange overlays between a num ber of InterForm 400 ®
installations, you can answer N to using DDM. Refer to page 300 for m ore inform ation
on using DDM.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
4/17
Do you want to use DDM to InterForm files
on other AS/400
Use DDM . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
Y
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
Enter the IP-address or Network nam e/NetServer Nam e of the System i you work
on. This nam e can be found with the com m and APF3812/DSPNETSVRA, or can be
found under "other com puters" on your System i Access connected W indows PC. This
option is used in relation to the PCL viewer and the DDM features. If you are in doubt
you can also specify the IP address of the System i - without surrounding ‘’.
InterForm A/S 35
Sharenam e can be used for situations, where you do not want to share the com plete
APF3812Hom e (In InterForm 400 it used m ainly for the possibility of a graphical view).
If you instead have shared the APF3812Hom e/VIEW directory you can state the
sharenam e here. Note, that you need to add the share before InterForm 400 will
accept this sharenam e. Use e.g. the com m and: APF3812/ADDFILSHR to share a
directory.
Public authorisation: W hen you view a m erge graphically a tem porary file is created
in /APF3812Hom e/VIEW . You can restrict access to this file, so that the public
authority is *EXCLUDE. Then only the file creator and users profiles with authority
*ALLOBJ have access to the file.
Install Sw iftView at drive: If your users want to install Swiftview in another drive than
the usual C-drive you can state a different drive nam e here. This is for all users.
G NOTE G
The change of PUBLIC authority of the files in /APF3812Hom e/VIEW is only used when
creating new files (not when replacing existing). To use the new authorisation delete the files in
/APF3812Hom e/VIEW , that holds the nam es of your end users. Do not delete the file
SVIEW .EXE.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
5/17
The Name that is used for this AS/400
under "Other computers" on PC's.
. . . . .
222.2.1.247
Sharename. . . . . . .
APF3812HOME
Networkname
Public authorisation to files that are created in the /APF3812Home/VIEW directory.
0
0=*EXCLUDE
1=*ALL
C
A - Z
Install SwiftView at drive
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The selection of Primary language for operating InterForm 400 ® was chosen during
the installation of InterForm 400 ®. It can be altered here if needed.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
6/17
Select primary language.
Language code
. . . .
F3=Exit
36
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
EN
DE=Deutsch, DK=Dansk, EN=English,
ES=Españoles, FR=Français, PT=Português
F12=Cancel
Version 2014
If you want Auto Form s Control to m onitor output queues with printers attached, you
now have the option to state which form type to print from the shared output queues.
State N for not using the program , APF3812/STRW TRCHK program if in doubt.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
7/17
Do you want to use the APF3812/STRWTRCHK program as validity checking program
for the STRPRTWTR and STRRMTWTR commands, to avoid a writer to be started with
FORMTYPE(*ALL) on one of the output queues defined in Auto-Forms-Control, and
if yes, what formtype has to replace *ALL when a writer is started on one of
these output queues.
Use APF3812/STRWTRCHK as a validity checker
N
(Y N)
Formtype to replace *ALL . . . . . . . . . .
__________
This option is especially usefull, if you are using the same output queue
for both input to AFC-functions and for output to a printer, as a writer
never should be started with FORMTYPE(*ALL) on souch an output queue.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
On the final screen of the configuration you state, if you want to use unicode and/or
DBCS spooled files with InterForm 400. If you state ‘Y’ unicode options will be visible
and the USRDFNOPT field of spooled files to be m erged will be inspected: If the value
‘IF-UCS2' is found the spooled file is considered to be unicode. You can also activate
unicode output when you m erge a spooled file with an overlay by stating ‘Unicode
output=*YES’. Refer to page 47 for details.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
8/17
Do you want to be able to use UCS2 (unicode) or DBCS (double byte) print.
Use UCS2 / DBCS
. . .
Y
(Y N)
Do you want underlines to be removed from DBCS input before merge.
Remove underlines
F3=Exit
. .
N
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
The next screen display the subsystem used for Auto Form s Control. If you prefer you
can use a different nam e and/or library.
InterForm A/S 37
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
9/17
Auto Forms Control subsystem
Subsystem description . .
Library . . . . . . . .
AUTO FORM
APF3812
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Just like for the AUTO_FORM subsystem above InterForm 400 will ask if you want to
change the other subsystem s on the next 4 screens:
Output Schedule Control
Em ail recovery
Card reader term inal
W inPrint
Default
Default
Default
Default
subsystem :
subsystem :
subsystem :
subsystem :
APF3812/OSCCTL
APF3812/MAILINTER
APF3812/TERMINTER
APF3812/W INPRINT
It is very easy to change the subsystem : You just type the new nam e and library
above. If the subsystem does not exist InterForm 400 will suggest to copy and/or
update a few necessary objects:
Create AFC subsystem description
Subsystem description . .
Library . . . . . . . .
AUTO_FORM3
KSE
Press Enter to create the subsystem description or
press F3 or F12 to cancel.
Note:
The following objects will also be created or updated in
the subsystem library:
Object
AUTO_FORM
AUTO_FORM
AUTO_FORM
AFCSTART
Type
*JOBQ
*CLS
*JOBD
*JOBD
F3=Exit
Description
Auto Forms Control
Auto Forms Control
Auto Forms Control
Auto Forms Control
job queue
class
job description
startup job description
F12=Cancel
Check page 140 to see the authority requirem ents for the Auto_Form Jobd used.
! IMPORTANT !
If you chose to change the subsystem name or library then remember to change your start up
IPL program to start the new sub system(s)!
(The Card reader term inal is used for the Digital signature/PDF Security m odule only).
The next configuration screen indicates how to handle Zebra printers:
38
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
14/17
Command prefixes and delimiter on Zebra printers.
- Control commands prefix
Hex
7E
Default = X'7E' (tilde)
- Format commands prefix
Hex
5E
Default = X'5E' (caret)
- Delimiter
Hex
2C
Default = X'2C' (comma)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Above you set the control characters, that InterForm 400 should use as a part of the ZPL data
stream . If you print to the sam e physical printer from other applications, then you need to
m ake sure, that all applications are using the sam e control characters.
The next screen looks like this:
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
15/17
Zebra spooled file preview
Preview mode
. . .
Preview printer
Port
. . . . . . .
F3=Exit
1
1 = Display simulated print
2 = Use preview printer
3 = Use preview printer, if available
(otherwise display simulated print)
192.168.151.238
9100
Host or ip address
1-65535 (Default = 9100)
F12=Cancel
In this screen you can decide how you would like to preview the m erged ZPLII result
from InterForm 400. The possibilities are these:
1 = Display simulated print
This is the default value. W ith this the ZPL spooled files are displayed via an internal
conversion in InterForm 400, that converts the ZPL datastream into PDF. The
advantage with this is, that you will see the result very quickly and no physical printer is
required. The disadvantage is, that what you see is not 100% correct (e.g. som e fonts
m ight look different than the printed result).
2 = Use preview printer
If you specify a printer (either as a nam e or IP-address) and a port num ber, then you
can use the printer for m aking previews. The advantage is, that the displayed result is
100% the sam e as the printed result. The disadvantage with this is, that the printer
InterForm A/S 39
cannot be used for any printing while previewing, it will also take longer to view the
result and that only the first page will be shown.
3 = Use preview printer, if available
If you select this option, then InterForm 400 will use the specified printer if available. If
the printer is not available, then sim ulated print will be shown.
The next screen of the configuration looks like below. You should norm ally select
principle 1 as shown below. If you however have any issues when selecting the right
drawer on the connected printers (when using the paper type), then you should
consider changing it to principle 2.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
16/17
Paper type selection principle
Principle . . . . .
1
1 = HP and most other printers
2 = Kyocera
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The final screen of the configuration is this:
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
17/17
Do you want email addresses to be syntax checked
Y
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
On the screen above you decide if you want InterForm 400 to do a syntax test of em ail
addresses when they are handled in an em ail finish definition. If this is ‘Y’ (recom m ended),
then any em ail address is e.g. syntax checked when entered in the m enues. If you set this to
‘N’, the syntax is not validated. The value ‘N’ can be used in installations, where custom ers
e.g. using a special fax solution that is supporting em ail addresses not fitting all syntax
requirem ents.
To finalize the configuration you should do this:
40
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
From the InterForm 400 Main Menu select ‘80. Adm inistering InterForm 400' and then enter
1. W ork with InterForm400 users. Press F6 to enter your System i user ID. Later you can
add additional users which will have access to configure and/or define overlays and m ergedefinitions in InterForm 400 ®.
Enter 2. W ork with file sets (on the adm inistration m enu). Press F6 to create an overlay file
set called e.g. TEST (select 1=Black/W hite Laser for Printer Class). This file set is referred in
the Getting Fam iliar with Overlays section on page 91. Later you can add file sets for different
purposes or for specific users.
Enter 3. Connect users with overlay file sets (on the adm inistration m enu). Connect your
user profile to file set SAMPLE and the file set you created in the previous step.
Start subsystem AUTO_FORM: From the Select 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control from the
InterForm 400 Main Menu followed by option 10. Start AUTO_FORM subsystem.
You can now proceed to install and setup the PCL/PDF-viewer (please refer to page 491 for
further inform ation) and the graphical designer (refer to page 522 for m ore inform ation).
InterForm A/S 41
4. Work With Overlay/AFC Sample
You are now ready to start working with the overlay, SAMPLE delivered with the package.
First we will m ake sure that our device is changed to use the sam ple queue which the
InterForm 400 ® dem o is preset for:.
Printer W riter (Tw inax, or TCP/IP (TN5250E or Raw Socket))
Make sure the printer writer PRTXXX (determ ined in step 3) is started. If not, the
following com m and will start the printer writer with our sam ple output queue
AFC_OUT1, which was created by the installation program previously:
STRPRTWTR DEV(PRTXXX) OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_OUT1)
If the printer writer is already started and attached to another output queue, the
following com m and will change PRTXXX to be attached to output queue AFC_OUT1:
CHGWTR WTR(PRTXXX) OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_OUT1)
Remote W riter (TCP/IP LPD)
Using a TCP/IP LPD attached printer does not require a printer device description.
You should instead follow the procedure explained on page 418 Attaching through a
TCP/IP Print Server in order to configure queue AFC_OUT1 as a rem ote LPD writer.
The entire environm ent should now have been set up. The AUTO_FORM sub-system is
running, and we have a PCL com patible printer attached to a predefined AFC output queue
(AFC_OUT1).
You can verify that the AFC job AFC_INPUT1 is actually started in sub-system AUTO_FORM
by entering the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu and select option 12. W ork with Active
subsystem AUTO_FORM in m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control.
In a new installation, the job, AFC_INPUT1 is set NOT to autom atic start with the subsystem ,
AUTO_FORM. You can change it this way: From the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu choose: 5.
W ork with Auto Forms Control, 1. Functions attached to Output Queues, choose option 2 for
AFC_INPUT1, Change ‘Autostart job’ from N (No) to Y (Yes). Start and stop the subsystem
and the job will run.
W e will now create a dem o spool entry, which the AFC system will m erge autom atically with a
sam ple overlay called IF400DEM O and send to the AFC output queue AFC_OUT1.
The dem o spool entry will appear on the output queue AFC_INPUT1 which is defined as input
queue for the AFC_INPUT1 job (The nam es of the input queue and the AFC job are in this
exam ple identical).
You could work with spool entries of your own as input to the AFC_INPUT1 job. A new spool
entry will, after a while, appear in output queue AFC_OUT1 as a result of the m erge process.
However, for best understanding of the exam ple we recom m end that you create a dem o spool
entry according to the following description
Enter the InterForm 400 ® m enus again with the com m and APF3812/APFM ENU. You will this
tim e be asked to select a file-set. Select file-set SAM PLE.
Enter 12. Service functions and select option 1. Create Demo Spool Entry (m ore info on the
dem o spool entry on page 377)
You should now receive four pages on print queue AFC_OUT1 with text and InterForm
overlays. You will find a re-print of one of the pages in the printout in the following section.
42
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
L TROUBLE SHOOTING L
NOT PRINTING!
Q Is there a message on the printer e.g. a request to change the forms?
A Reply “G” to such messages. You can enter queue AFC_OUT1 from the InterForm400 ®
main menu by selecting option 10. Work with output queue from the main menu.
Q Is the sub-system AUTO_FORM active, and is the AFC job AFC_INPUT1 started?
A Check the sub-system by entering W RKACTJOB (more info page 134, 285)
Q Do the spool entry in queue AFC_INPUT1 have status READY?
A Try to HOLD the spool entry in queue AFC_INPUT1 and release it again (the AFC functions
only works on jobs getting status READY in the defined input queues).
L TROUBLE SHOOTING L
PRINT IS GARBLED!
Q Is the printer type chosen in InterForm400 ® matching your printer (same PCL level)?
A Your printer must be at least PCL5 compatible, so try defining this printer type in
InterForm400 ®. (More info on printer types page 421)
J TIP J
Instead of printing the document, you can use the SwiftView PCL viewer delivered with the
InterForm400 ®. Refer to Appendix L. PCL Viewing (SwiftView) for information on setting up
and using the viewer.
G NOTE G
W hen you m erge a spooled file in InterForm 400 ® m ake sure, that the first line in the spooled
file (containing text) does not include characters in position 300 or above. These positions are
reserved for InterForm 400 ® inform ation.
InterForm A/S 43
5. About The Print Results
Maybe you noticed that page 2-4 was printed slightly faster than page 1. The reason is that the
overlay is loaded into the printer as a m acro at the beginning of the spool entry and is being
called from the printer m em ory on page one and the succeeding pages. The exam ple contains
som e bit im ages to give a feeling of this.
Notice that the address field text and the reference text are printed with a different font than
the rest of the text. The lines and colum ns where these text strings are found in the spool entry
are re-m apped by definitions in the sam ple overlay IF400DEM O. Enter 1. Design Overlay on
the m ain m enu and select overlay IF400DEM O and look at the overlay elem ents defined in
here. Do not m ake changes to this overlay, as it will be used as tem plate in section Getting
familiar with Overlays.
Try entering 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control on the m ain and select 1. Functions
attached to Output Queues. Select 2 for Change AFC_INPUT1 and look into the definitions
found in here.
You should now investigate further on your own. You will probably be am azed how sim ple the
concept really is. W e suggest that you either proceed with the section Getting familiar with
overlays which leads you through a process of adding m ore advanced overlay elem ents to the
sam ple you have been working on. Alternatively you can start building your own definitions.
M WARNING M
DO NOT create new overlays intended for production in the file-set SAMPLE. A future release
update will not update the changes you make in the file-set SAMPLE. Neither will changes
made to AFC-definitions in AFC-job/queue AFC_INPUT1, unless a “Light” code is entered in
the old version which is being updated from)
M WARNING M
DO NOT make any changes to the overlay IF400DEMO at this stage if you intend to work with
the Getting familiar with overlays section.
44
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Illustration of the dem o spool entry m erged with the overlay IF400DEMO delivered with
InterForm 400 ® (The illustration is a screen shot of the InterForm 400 ® PCL viewer function:):
InterForm A/S 45
Unicode, DBCS and multiple codepage support in
InterForm400
InterForm 400 supports both unicode and DBCS (Double Byte Character Set). For a
description of unicode refer to www.unicode.org.
The unicode support in InterForm 400 consists of 2 parts:
1. Previously spooled files handled by InterForm 400 could only contain one codepage. Now
also special unicode spooled files can be handled in InterForm 400. This is described in details
on page 47 and in Appendix D.
2. Multiple codepages are im plem ented in the InterForm 400 setup and screens. The
enhancem ents to the m enus and screens are described below.
Important: To notice after upgrading from a pre 2007 version
After you have upgraded InterForm 400, you m ight notice that text fields in the overlay and
fields in the e-m ail finishing definition are displayed in yellow (with the text code page is not
specified) as below:
The yellow colour and ‘Code page not specified.’ indicates that the field is not yet linked with a
code page, but if you press Enter on this screen the text is from now on printed EXACTLY as
displayed (the code page of your 5250 session is saved with the text).
If you previously have typed in text in a 5250 session running one code page knowing, that it
would be used in a different code page you should now stop that way of working
(It could be e.g. that you have typed in a ‘§’ (Hex ‘7C’) sign in a 5250 session running the
germ an code page 273, because Hex ‘7C’ is to used in the US code page 37 to denote the ‘@ ’
sign - if the m achine ran code page 37...).
In 2007 (and future) versions these fields are really printed as they look - if the code page of
the 5250 session is in the sam e sym bol set as used for the m erge.
Notice that the sym bol sets are:
46
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
1=CodePage850
2=CodePage852
3=Baltic
4=CodePage858
5=Cyrillic
6=CyrilEuro
7=ISO8859/9 Latin-5 (Turkish)
8=ISO8859/7 Greek
9=CentralEurope with Euro
A=Arab-864
This m eans e.g. that norm al western code pages (e.g. 273) cannot be m ixed with euro code
pages (e.g. 1141) in the sam e spooled file as code page 273 belongs to sym bol set
1=Codepage850 and 1141 belongs to Sym bol set 4=CodePage858.
Right after an upgrade the fields are however printed as in previous versions - until you change
them .
Notice that the code page of the graphical designer can now be set up per user via ‘80.
Administering InterForm 400' and ‘1. W ork with InterForm 400 users’.
Using DBCS or multiple code pages in the same print out
W hen you want to use m ore than one code page in the sam e print out you have these
possibilities:
1. Simple setup - spooled file with a single code page
W ithout m aking any changes to your setup you can e.g. insert fixed texts in your overlay
design in m any different code pages (retrieved from your 5250 session or code page of the
designer session) as long as all the texts belongs to the sam e sym bol set.
2. DBCS support
If you want to have full DBCS support you need to setup the DBCS codepage in these places:
a) On the user profile in order to know what DBCS codepage to use if InterForm 400 detects
that you are typing in DBCS characters in either the designer or via a 5250 session. Refer to
page 309 to see how.
b) Unless the spooled file to be m erged really has a specific DBCS codepage you will need to
tell Auto Form s Control for the used output queue what DBCS codepage to use if any DBCS
characters are found. Refer to page 140 for m ore inform ation.
3. Unicode setup - unicode spooled file
If you want to use m ore than one sym bol set, if you want DBCS support or if you want to use
unicode in the spooled file you should use the unicode setup below:
Note, that the phrase ‘unicode spooled file’ here refers to an *SCS spooled file form atted in a
special way - or an AFPDS unicode spooled file. (Refer to appendix at page 427 for details of
the special *SCS unicode spooled file).
If you want to use texts in code pages belonging to different sym bol sets or want to m erge a
unicode spooled file in InterForm 400 you need to do this:
InterForm A/S 47
1.
Select ‘70. Configuration and licences' and ‘2. Configure InterForm 400' followed by
Enter several tim es until you get to this screen:
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
8/17
Do you want to be able to use UCS2 (unicode) in your spooled files.
Use UCS2 . . . . . . .
Y
(Y N)
Do you want underlines to be removed from DBCS input before merge.
Remove underlines
. .
N
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Type in a ‘Y’ to activate unicode in InterForm 400. This will m ake the unicode options in
InterForm 400 visible and InterForm 400 will look for a user defined option
(USRDFNOPT) on the spooled files to be m erged.
If a user defined option is ‘IF-UCS2' then the spooled file is considered to be unicode
(or a m ix of unicode and norm al EBCDIC characters) and unicode soft fonts is used.
The more sim ple setup is however to create AFPDS unicode spooled files instead as
described on page 425.
48
2.
Install one or m ore TTF soft fonts to be used for unicode.
Refer to page 323 for a description of how to do that.
3.
Create a font num ber fitting the soft font attributes and add auto download for the soft
font. Refer to page 324 for additional inform ation.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Menu Structures and General Operation
The InterForm 400 ® system can be included in one of your m enus and can be called from here
(refer to the section Relations to other applications page 410). You can also enter the
InterForm 400 ® system via a com m and line by entering:
APF3812/APFMENU
You will then be presented with the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu:
InterForm 400 - MAIN MENU
InterForm 400 Samples
Select one of the following options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
12.
70.
80.
90.
Design overlay
Test print overlay
Merge spool entry with overlay
Work with overlay selectors
Work with Auto Forms Control
Work with Output Schedule Control
System.......:
Workstn ID...:
CCSID ....:
User ID......:
Administrator:
File set.....:
Output queue.:
library...:
Printer type.:
Version......:
INTER03
QPADEV0009
00277
KSE
*ALL
SAMPLE
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
HP4D
2014.M01
Select file set
Select output queue and printer type
Work with actual output queue
Service functions
Configuration and licences
Administering InterForm 400
Exit InterForm 400
Option:
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
In the upper right corner of the display you will find a selection of inform ation.
System :
The system nam e of the System i you are currently running on (relevant when
two or m ore system s are connected).
W orkstn ID:
The nam e of the workstation you are sitting at.
CCSID:
The code page of the current 5250 screen.
User ID:
The nam e of your user profile.
Administrator: The user profile nam e of the InterForm 400 ® system adm inistrator. This person
is the only one who can use the option "Adm inistering InterForm 400" on the
m ain m enu. If an adm inistrator has not been appointed this option is open to
anybody.
File set:
The nam e of the file-set you are currently operating on. Refer to Select File
set page 120 for further description. The description of the file set is included
on the left in line 2.
Output queue: The nam e of the output queue for your session in the InterForm 400 ® system
when printing from within the m enus (not via Auto Form s Control).
Printer type:
The default printer type of your session, which is only shown if the
adm inistrator has allowed users to select Printer type (this is done under
option 9 on the m ain m enu). Refer to page 421 for m ore inform ation.
InterForm A/S 49
Version:
The release num ber of InterForm 400 ®, also reflecting the year of the release.
The num ber will be followed by an M##, which is the m odification num ber.
M23 would m ean m odification 23.
At the bottom of the display you can see which com m and keys can be used everywhere in the
system . How to use them is only described here:
F3:
Brings you back to the previous m enu. In the m ain m enu F3 exits the
InterForm 400 ® system .
F12:
Always takes you one screen backwards in the system .
F6:
Displays the m essage queue.
Additionally using the ATTN key when your job is a group job will bring you out of the
InterForm 400 ® system tem porarily. W hen you return to the InterForm 400 ® system you will
continue from the point at which you pressed ATTN.
50
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
1. Design Overlay
Note, that InterForm 400 ® com es with a graphical designer. See Appendix O on page 522 and
onwards to see how to install and use it. Below the green screen designer is explained.
In this m enu overlay definitions and m anipulation with spool data are defined.
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name
__________
APF300D
F4=List
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F13=Set view/print parameters
F12=Cancel
Overlay names can be up to 10 characters long. The first character m ust be a letter A-Z. No
blanks or special characters can be used in the nam e; ONLY "_" (underscore) is perm itted.
Selecting an existing overlay
Press F4 to get a list of existing overlays to select from or type the nam e of the overlay.
You m ay be refused access with the m essage ‘Overlay in use by user XXX in designer job
NNN’ a Graphical Designer job is editing the sam e overlay. If you are sure, that this other job
can be stopped you can do so by selecting option ‘80. Adm inistering InterForm 400' and ‘50.
W ork with Designer job overlay locks’. Stop the job with option 4-Rem ove.
Creating a new overlay
Type in a nam e of the overlay you want to create and press Enter
InterForm A/S 51
Copy Overlay from Another Overlay
Type in a nam e of the new overlay you want to copy to and press Enter. Press F9 to enter a
overlay nam e to copy from and press Enter
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
Name of overlay to copy from
_______________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F9=Copy from another file set
F10=Copy from another AS/400
F12=Cancel
Press F9 to enter a overlay nam e to copy from and press Enter, or press F10 to enter the
nam e of another System i to copy from . You can then copy overlays from InterForm 400 ® on
another System i using DDM. (see page 300 for m ore inform ation)
If the overlay is not known, or if placed in another file set press F9 once m ore to get a list of file
sets to choose from . Select the file set containing the overlay you want to copy from , and
select the overlay you want to copy.
52
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Global settings of an overlay
The global settings of the overlay depends on the type of file set in which the overlay is placed.
These are the settings for file sets used for PCL printers and PDF output:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Last update . . :
APF300D
Overlay name
TEST
Overlay text
Line spacing
Rotation
Extra left margin
positions
Maximum number of
print positions
Extra blank lines
on top
Font
Extended page def.
Drawer / Papertype
Paper Size
Pages per side
Copy management
Duplex print
Duplex margin
Back page overlay
__________________________________
040___
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
000___
(*INPUT, 0, 90, 180, 270)
_0
(0-99)
378
(1-378)
2013-01-30
F20=Log
_0
(0-99)
0066__
*INPUT, fontnumber
F4=List
N
(Y N)
*PRINTER (*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-255, Name)
F4=List
0
F4=List
__
N
(Y N)
N
(N=no S=short edge margin L=long edge margin)
__0
in 1/240 of an inch (1-720)
__________ Code for placement _ (B=back page F=front)
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F13=Set view/print parameters
F11=Delete this overlay
F14=PCL-view
F12=Cancel
The data entered on this page describes how the spool file to be m erged with this overlay
should be m anipulated. The attributes (num ber of lines per inch, font etc.) of the spool entry
will be overwritten by these settings.
Overlay text:
For your own inform ation
Line spacing: Is dissolved in n/240 inch. For exam ple 6 lines per inch corresponds to 40/240
inch. You m ay have been expecting to have to specify line spacing in num ber
of lines per inch. W e have chosen this m ethod to give you a higher degree of
freedom of choice. This setting can be overwritten by Extended Formatting.
By stating *INPUT the value is set according to the attribute of the spool entry.
Rotation:
Extra Left
M argin:
Inform s the system how the contents of the input spool entry should be
rotated on the paper. You m ay specify 000, 090, 180 or 270 degrees (counter
clockwise). The values 180 and 270 can only be used in connection with
IBM3812/16. In connection with other printer types these values will be
perceived as 000. By stating *INPUT the value is set according to the attribute
of the spool entry. The attributes *COR and *AUTO is also inspected.
Num ber of character the print should be offset from the left m argin. Extra
positions defined here will be included in Extended Formatting
M ax Print pos: Maxim um Print Position should norm ally be set to 240. However, in case the
spool entry, intended for m erging with the overlay, contains unwanted
characters to the right, the num ber of print positions to be truncated can be
specified here.
Extra blank
lines:
Extra blank lines inserted before line one of the spool entry. This value can be
suppressed by Extended Formatting.
Font:
This font will be the global font for the entire spool entry unless otherwise
specified by Extended Form atting or the overlay definitions Remap W indow
and Tabulator. By stating *INPUT the value is set according to the attribute of
the spool entry
InterForm A/S 53
F4=Prompt
Gives a list of available fonts. The standard IBM 3812 font ID’s is predefined
(refer to page 432 or look at the font list in the back of this m anual). Other
fonts can be defined to the system and will then be available here (See
section 1. Description of additional fonts page 315)
F20=Log
The date of the last change (or update) of the overlay is shown on the top of
the screen. Press F20 to display previous change dates.
Overview Fonts
FNT100D
Type Selection, Press Enter.
1=Select Font
Select one of the following:
_
0281
Gothic Text 20
_
0290
Gothic Text 27
_
0751
Sonoran-Serif 8-pt Roman Medium
_
1051
Sonoran-Serif 10-pt Roman Medium
_
1053
Sonoran-Serif 10-pt Roman Bold
_
1056
Sonoran-Serif 10-pt Italic Medium
_
1351
Sonoran-Serif 12-pt Roman Medium
_
1653
Sonoran-Serif 16-pt Roman Bold
_
2103
Sonoran-Serif 24-pt Roman Bold
_
3998
MICR E-13B
_
3999
POSTNET barcode
_
9902
Sample - Univers 8p
_
9903
Sample - Univers 10p
_
9904
Sample - Univers 1p Bold
_
9906
Sample - Univers 18p Bold
F3=Exit
Extended
page def:
54
F12=Cancel
W hen stating Y in this field you can override the global settings of Line
Spacing, Extra blank lines on top and Font. Form atting is done for intervals
of lines and is especially convenient if large areas of text should be rem apped or if you want to form at the spool data into colum ns.
Draw er:
Depends on the printer type. Valid values are:
*INPUT
= The drawer specified in the spool entry
*PRINTER
= Sets the PCL drawer to 1.
1-255
= Printer specific paper source
Nam e
= Paper type (prom pt with F4 to list valid types)
The values 1-255 is inserted in the HP PCL com m and Esc&l#H (see
Cassette Selection page 422). For details about how to select drawer by use
of paper type (which is recom m ended) refer to page 364 and 423.
Paper Size:
Is only visible if you have allowed individual paper sizes for the overlays. If you
specify 0 in Paper Size the default value from the adm inistration m enu option
2. Configure InterForm 400 will be used for this overlay (m ore info page
299). You can also specify the custom page size, X. If you do, you will be
prom pted for the actual size:
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Set custom paper size
Using custom size paper is supported
at some printers.
It is important to set the paper size
in the printer to the same size as here.
Otherwise elements with rotation
other than 0° will be misplaced.
SviftView does not support custom
size paper.
Length . . .
Width . . .
Inch.pel
Inch.pel
F12=Cancel
This custom paper size is especially relevant if you want to print onto label
printers via the W inPrint m odule. Notice, that the size is m easured in inches
and pels, so e.g. 1.120 is one and a half inch (as 240 pels equals 1 inch).
Pages per
side
(M ulti-up):
Blank or 1 indicates no m ulti-up functionality. W hen 2 or m ore are indicated,
the overlay definitions Tabulator and Remap W indow will be able to handle
the total num ber of lines set for the Multi-up.
E.g. a spool page has 66 lines and m ulti-up is set to include 2 spool pages on
one laser printed page. A Tabulator will then be able to handle line 1-132 (2 x
66), resulting in both spool pages will have the sam e tabulator. The sam e
applies for the Remap W indow . The spool pages included in the m ulti-up
function could also be form atted in separate ways. I.e. rem oving of headers
and footers of the additional pages included in m ulti-up print.
Copy
M anagement: Stating N in this field, will enable you to define advanced pagination within the
overlay for use with spool entries consisting of different types of contents (see
using Page control page 69).
Stating Y will enable you to create several copies of each page. Also design
elem ents can be dedicated to specific copies. This is for instance used when
m aking copies of Invoices where the overlay for the copy should have
basically the sam e elem ents as the original but should be characterized by the
text “COPY” printed across.
Duplex options
These options are only visible if you have selected duplex print for the actual file-set (Option 5.
Create/Delete Overlay File Sets page 310). If the field Duplex print is filled in with N, only
the front of the paper is used.
Duplex
print:
If you answer S or L in the Duplex print field, both sides of the paper is used,
including the answer you have given about the duplex m argin being at the
long or short edge of the paper. W hen filling in S or L for Duplex print
together with N for Copy M anagement the Page Control on the Design
Overlay screen will be extended to include selection for restricting overlay to
odd or even pages (See Page control page 69).
M WARNING M
Combining Duplex with spooled file data on both back and front (i.e. without a back page
overlay) with copy management is not supported. If you try the result is not what you might
expect..
InterForm A/S 55
Forced front
page:
Duplex
margin:
Controls if the overlay for which the Duplex function has been selected,
always should be printed on a front page, when a overlay selector is used. By
stating *YES, you will avoid that an intended first page is printed on the duplex
side of the previous page.
This value in the field states the width of the binding m argin in n/240 inch.
Back page
overlay:
This field can be left blank m eaning that you want to use the sam e overlay on
both sides of each sheet. If the field is filled in with an overlay nam e, only the
front pages will be used for print and the back pages will contain the back
page overlay w ithout any spool data.
It is however, possible to put variable data on both sides of the sheet with
different overlays, by leaving this field blank, and using sub-overlays. A sim ple
“m ain” overlay should be m ade, that contains two sub-overlays calls only. In
the two If..then lines in the m ain overlay, the field “num ber of lines to rem ap”,
will indicate the lines the sub-overlay should process. All form atting m ust be
handled by the sequence lines in the sub-overlays.
Entering *VAR in this field will bring up a screen, where the conditions for
selecting the overlay m ust be stated. Note that *VAR can only be used with
Code for placement=B (or blank):
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name
APF300D
TEST
Overlay text
Line spacing
040
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
Rotation
000
(*INPUT, 0, 90, 180, 270)
Extra left margin
positions
............................................
Maximum number of
:
Variable Back Page Overlay
:
print positions
:
:
Extra blank lines
: Prefix . . . . . ______
:
on top
: Line number . . ___
:
Font
: Position . . . . ___ - ___
:
Extended page def.
:
:
Drawer
:
:
Paper Size
:
:
Multi-up
: F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
:
Copy management
:
:
Duplex print
:..........................................: edge margin)
Duplex margin
0
in 1/240 of an inch (1-720)
Back page overlay
*VAR
Code for placement B (B=back page F=front)
F4=Prompt
F11=Delete this overlay
F12=Cancel
F13=Set print parameters
Prefix
The first part of the back page overlay nam e. The overlay
which is called by this function consists of this prefix plus the
character string found by Line number and Position. For
instance if the prefix is INV, and Line Num ber and Position
finds the string 001, the back page overlay should be nam ed
INV001.
The Prefix m ust consists of m inim um 1 character, which can
not be a num ber. The Prefix plus the string found with Line
Num ber and Position can not exceed a total of 10 characters.
Line Number: The print line in the spool entry defining the last part of the
back page overlay nam e.
Position:
56
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The colum n interval containing the last part of the overlay
nam e.
Code for Placem ent:
The possibility of placing the back page overlay on the front of
the physical printed page is a unique feature of the system ,
which overcom es a com m on problem for duplex printing on
pre-printed form s. Norm ally a HP printer will print the back
page of a duplex print first in order to have it faced down in
the output tray. This m eans pre-printed form s has to be
turned upside-down in the input paper tray depending on the
print being sim plex or duplex. W hen stating F (front) as code
for placem ent you will not have to do this, as the system will
reverse the order before printing.
J TIP J
An easy way of making “short bind” duplex, is to define the front page overlay as normal, but
rotate the back page overlay 180 degrees.
M WARNING M
Do not combine duplex with spooled file data on both front and back (without a fixed back
page overlay) and copy management. If you combine the two the result is not what you might
expect...
Function keys for display of a spool file
F13:
Set view/print parameters:
This function is used to set the attributes of the spool file you want to m erge the
overlay with. This m ust be done prior to selecting F14, F18 or F19.
Select Parameters for view / Print
Overlay name
or Overlay Selector
Primary/Secondary set
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
Code page
Unicode output
Form type
Copies
Drawer / Paper type
View format
__________
________
_
__________
__________
______
__________
______
______
______
A4________
__1
*PRINTER__
_
APF730D
1=Primary 2=Secondary
Number, *ONLY, *LAST
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *INPUT, *OVERLAY, 1-255, Name)
1=PCL 2=B/W PDF 3=Color PDF
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue
Library
F3=Exit
Overlay Nam e
Primary/
Secondary Set:
__________
__________
F4=List overlays
Nam e of an overlay in the file-set you want to view together with a
spool file when using the PCL viewer (F14). This is required, though
the inform ation is used for PCL viewing only.
If you have defined Copy M anagement for the overlay (see page 70
and 62) you can test if you have m ade the correct selection of overlay
elem ents, by printing the overlay elem ents for one of the two sets
only. If this field is left blank (default) the system will as default pick
the Primary set.
InterForm A/S 57
Overlay Selector:
If you have defined an Overlay Selector you can test if it is able to
pick the correct overlay. In this case Overlay Nam e above m ust be
blank. (refer to section W orking with Overlay selectors page 123)
Spooled File:
Spooled file identification can be entered here.
There is an alternative to typing all the inform ation m anually. If you type the nam e of an output
queue in the bottom of the screen and press Enter, you can fetch the inform ation about the
spool entry from a view of the selected output queue by selecting with option 1:
Work with Output Queue
Queue:
PRTHP3
Library:
QUSRSYS
Type options, press Enter
1=Select 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Release 8=attributes
Opt
1
_
File
User
User Data
Sts
Pages
QPRINT
QPRINT
INTERFORM
INTERFORM
INVOICE
PROFIT
RDY
RDY
1
5
Copies
1
1
Form Type
*STD
*STD
Pty
5
5
Parameters for option 2
===> __________________________________________________
F3=exit
F11=View 2
F12=Previous
F21=Description
F24=More keys
Code page:
This defines if a specific code page should be forced for the spool
entry. *SYSVAL m eans that the default code page specified for the
system will be used, unless a specific code page is defined as
attribute for the spool entry.
Unicode output:
*INPUT m eans that the m erged spooled file will be unicode only if the
USRDFNOPT attribute of the spooled file selected is ‘IF-UCS2'.
Specify ‘*YES’ if you want unicode output independently of the
original spooled file.
Form type:
The Form type of the resulting printout. Default *STD
Copies:
1-255
Draw er:
Overwrite the drawer settings of the overlay global settings.
For details about how to select drawer by use of paper type refer to
page 364 and 423.
View :
You can specify what you want to view when you press F14 in overlay
design. If you choose ‘1=PCL’ pressing F14 will display the result of a
m erge to PCL - in SwiftView. Choosing option 2 or 3 will m ake
InterForm 400 ® create a PDF file and display it using Acrobat Reader
(assum ing that Acrobat Reader is associated with PDF files on your
PC). Refer to page 491 for m ore inform ation.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule or the classic package for
InterForm 400.
58
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Output Queue:
The nam e of the output queue where the spool entry to be m erged is
placed.
Library:
The library of the above output queue. If left blank the library list will
be used.
F18:
DSPSPLF
W ith the Rem ap W indow this function is relevant for displaying the spool entry in order
to determ ine lines and colum ns for the Rem ap W indow. F18 prom pts the com m and
DSPSPLF with the job inform ation set by F13 Set view /Print parameters, or by in
m enu 3. M erge spool entry with overlay (page 118). Pressing F18 will only appear if
this has been set prior to entering this m enu .
F19:
DSPPFM
This function works like F18, but prom pts the com m ands DSPPFM for displaying the
spool entry as a physical file. This is useful for revealing reprinted lines (bolding),
which is not displayed with F18 DSPSPLF.
Rem em ber to subtract the first 4 positions containing SKIP/SPACE inform ation, when
calculating coloum n positions in the DSPPFM view..
Changing the unit of measurement:
After you press Enter on the screen above you can actually change the unit of
m easurem ent in this ‘green screen designer’ as in the graphical designer. Just press
F22=Set unit to change the m easurem ent unit to m illim eters or inches and pels.
Considerations for Zebra overlays
G NOTE G
Creation of ZPL output in InterForm 400 requires purchase of the ZPL m odule or the classic
package.
For overlays intended to be used for label printers the Design Overlay screen looks like this:
The especially Zebra related param eters are:
Page size:
The length and width of the labels to print on.
Temperature: The tem perature to use for the printing head. This num ber is a relative
InterForm A/S 59
value (-30 to 30) for the tem perature to use for the print head of the Zebra
printer. This value will be added to the Darkness value specified on the
printers display. That is if Darkness is 10 and tem perature is 5 the actual
Darkness value for m erges with this overlay will be 15. If the sum of
tem perature and Darkness is outside the range 0-30 the nearest value is
used.
Printer speed: Specify the printing speed in num ber of inches per second. Note, that the
highest possible print speed varies from one m odel to another.
Copy M anagem ent:
For Zebra/Interm ec printers the num ber of copies can be up to 9999. If you
set the num ber of copies to 9999, then the printer will print the sam e label
indefinitely.
The Ink elem ent is not supported for ZPL/Interm ec output. To print som ething in white on
black you just print in the sam e place twice in the sam e place - in ZPL.
Rem em ber to create your overlays in a file set that fits the required output: A file set is
intended for either PCL/PDF output or ZPL/IPL (IPL=Interm ec Printer Language) output.
The fonts and im ages m ust be created/installed specifically for Zebra/Interm ec.
Special printer types are also used for Zebra/Interm ec output.
J TIP J
If you want to insert text, frames or images in reverse i.e. white on black background you can
do it by first adding a frame with black filling (=pattern) and then place the text or image on top
of the black frame (without specifying white in an Ink command). In this manner you reverse
the part of the text or image, that overlaps the black frame.
G NOTE G
Make sure, that the label length stated is correct. If not this will affect the positioning of
elem ents placed with rotation 90 and 270.
M WARNING M
Use a relatively low temperature e.g. 0 in order to avoid burn through of the ribbon and
potential damage to the print head. The wear of the print head increases when using a higher
temperature (or using a lower distance between paper and print head).
J TIP J
The print speed and temperature are related i.e. a higher speed might require a higher
temperature and for lower speeds a lower temperature may be sufficient.
J TIP J
Regarding barcode printing on label printers: If possible it is a good idea to place the lines of
the bars parallel with the travelling direction of the paper. In such a setup the print head will not
need to cool off and heat up for each bar thus making it possible to print faster and use a lower
temperature/Darkness setting.
60
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Extended Page Definition
Extended form atting is used to form at intervals of lines from the spool entry. This m ethod can
be used as alternative to using the design com m and type 9. Remap W indow , and will work
with 8. Tabulator lines
If the global setting Extended Page Definition equals Y, the following screen will be displayed
Update extended page definition
Overlay name: MYDEMO
APF305D
Overlay text: Mydemo
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
From
TopOpt
linenbr.
margin
5=Display
Left
margin
8=Start AFC-job
9=End AFC-job
Linespacing
Font
(No extended page definitions - Press F6 to create.)
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
End
F12=Cancel
The Global settings Line Spacing, Extra blank lines on top and Font will be decisive until
the first line of extended page definition is m et.
From line number:
A line num ber of the spool entry, from which the form atting should
change. The form atting will be valid until a new line num ber is defined.
Top margin:
Absolute m argin from top edge of the page dissolved in whole inches
and pels (see M easuring formats page 65).
Left margin:
Absolute m argin from the left edge of the page dissolved in whole
inches and pels (see M easuring formats page 65). Note that this
value will be added to the leftm argin value of the overlay com m and
type 8. Tabulator.
Line spacing:
Measured in n/240". For instance 6 lines per inch (1/6") will give the
value 40.
Font:
The font ID of the form atted text.
F4:
Prom pting of the font list
F18:
This function will display the spool entry with the job inform ation used
for m erge in option 3. M erge spool entry with overlay (page 118).
Pressing F18 will only work if this m erge has been m ade prior to
entering this m enu.
InterForm A/S 61
Copy Management
Copy m anagem ent is used to define the num ber of copies one single overlay should produce
when triggered. The following screen will autom atically appear when pressing Enter from the
global settings m enu where Y is filled in for Copy M anagement :
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: IF400DEMO
APF300D
Overlay text: Demo overlay for InterForm 400
Number of copies of each page
Primary set . . . . . . .
Secondary set . . . . . .
2_________
1_________
1-9, *VAR, *INPUT
1-9, *VAR, *INPUT
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Two sets of copies each consisting of up to 9 copies from a single spool entry can be defined.
The overlay elem ents (boxes, lines, im ages etc.) used on the prim ary and the secondary sets
can be different according to the definitions of a single overlay (See Copy M anagement page
70)
Primary set:
A value of 1 to 9 copies can be defined.
By selecting *VAR you will be able to define a line and position
num ber in the spool entry where the desired num ber of copies are
specified. This of course requires the application to insert this in the
spooled file.
*INPUT will use the COPIES attribute of the original spooled file.
Notice however, that values higher than 9 will be interpreted as 1.
W hen used with Auto Forms Control this set (*PRI) is the default set
to be used in 1. M erge w ith overlay (see page 145)
Primary set . . . . . . .
Secondary set:
62
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
*VAR
Print line
Position
This is basically just an extra set of copies m ade from the sam e spool
entry. The secondary set is m ainly intended to be used to create an
extra set with a fixed num ber of copies, independent of the variation
of copies in the m ain set. Stating a num ber for “Secondary set” will
not force a printout of this set. The secondary set will only be printed if
the Auto Form s Control definition 1. M erge w ith overlay states
Primary /Secondary set=*SEC. (see page 145), or if you in 3. M erge
spool entry with overlay (page 118) have stated 2=secondary.
Version 2014
Source Drawers for Copies
After having stated the num ber of copies, pressing Enter will extend the screen to include
definitions of source drawers:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: IF400DEMO
APF300D
Overlay text: Demo overlay for InterForm400
Number of copies of each page
Primary set . . . . . . . 2
Secondary set . . . . . . 1
1-9, *VAR, *INPUT
1-9, *VAR, *INPUT
Select paper from the following drawers:
Copy
1
2
Primary
__________
__________
Do you want stapling . . Y/N
F3=Exit
F13=Set view/print parameters
Secondary
__________
Valid drawers
1-255
Valid paper types:
F4=List
_
F14=PCL-view
F18=DSPSPLF
F12=Cancel
F19=DSPPFM
Here you can define from which drawer each copy should be taken from .
See Cassette Selection page 422 for m ore inform ation of selecting by drawer num ber. Refer
to page 423 and 364 for inform ation of how to select drawer by paper type.
M WARNING M
Different printer manufacturers have diverting opinions of which value should correspond to
which physical drawer. Therefore please consult your printers technical reference to verify the
drawer mapping.
M WARNING M
Combining Duplex with spooled file data on both back and front (i.e. without a back page
overlay) with copy management is not supported. If you try the result is not what you might
expect..
InterForm A/S 63
Stapling
This option defines if the copies should be stapled. This option can only be used on the
printers stated below. Rem em ber to use printer type HP4_PJL or HP4D_PJL when m erging.
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: TEST
APF300D
Overlay text:
Number of copies of each page
Primary printout . . . . . 2
Secondary printout . . . ..................................................
: Stapling primary printout
:
Select paper from the follo :
:
: Select printer type for stapling
:
Copy
:
:
1
:
printer type
1=HP5Si Mopier
:
2
:
2=Lexmark Optra N
:
:
3=IBM NP24 / IP32/40
:
:
4=Kyocera 7000/9000
:
:
5=Xerox N24 / N32 / N40
:
:
6=Xerox DC 240/255/265
:
:
7=Océ 3165
:
: Notice: Stapeling requieres use of
:
Do you want stapling . . Y/ :
printertype HP4_PJL or HP4D_PJL.
:
:
:
F3=Exit
: F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
:
F13=Set print parameters
:................................................:
Refer to page 369 for a description of how you can define your own PJL sequences to be used
with printer type U=User defined.
64
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Measuring Methods
All coordinates entered in InterForm 400 ® m ust be dissolved into inches and pels - apart from
the graphical designer, where you can also chose to work in ‘norm al’ inches and cm .
Digits before the decim al point specify inches, and the digits after the decim al point specify
pels and m ust not exceed 239. An inch is dissolved into 240 pels.
Exam ples of values:
1"
1 ½”
1 1/6 "
1 5/6 "
1,85"
1,000
1,(240/2)
1,(240/6)
1,(240/6 x 5)
1,(240 x 0,85)
=
=
=
=
=
1,000
1,120
1,040
1,200
1,204
You will notice that it would be m ost convenient to use a ruler indicating lines per inch.
W hen m ultiplying and subtracting values it m ight seem a little m ore com plicated, the following
are exam ples and the form ulas used to solve it:
3,100 + 1,200 = 4,+300 => 4+1,(300-240)
3,100 - 1,200 = 2,-100 => 2 -1,(240-100)
= 5,060
= 1,140
Orientation of design elements
All positions are m easured absolute to the upper left corner of the page, but depending on the
type of overlay elem ent and rotation of the page:
Text, Images, PCL files.
Relative to the upper left corner depending on the rotation
specified by Rotation under global settings.
Frames and lines:
Relative to the upper left corner of a Portrait page,
regardless of the rotation specified in the global settings.
J TIP J
You can print out a ruler from the Service menu option 4. Print ruler (see page ?). If you will
use an ordinary ruler, it is an advantage to find one with indication of 6 lines per inch. Using
the overlay “ruler” in file set “sample”, as an sub-overlay is also a method for easy
positioning of overlay elements and spool data.
InterForm A/S 65
The Design Screen
Note: Refer to Appendix O on page 522 for inform ation of how to install and use the
InterForm 400 ® graphical designer.
W hen you press Enter from the previous screens you will finally reach the screen where the
entry of overlay elem ents are m ade:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: IF400DEMO
Seqnbr. Type
APF300D
Overlay text: Demo overlay for InterForm400
Overlay definition
Seqnbr. Type
______
F3=Exit
F5=Service
F12=Cancel
F18=View Spool entry
An overlay consists of a num ber of sequence lines, each defining a part of the overlay like
fram es, lines, text constants etc.
W hen entering a screen with existing sequence lines the last entered lines will be displayed.
The system sim ply believes that you intend to continue entering overlay elem ents
You can scroll through the lines using page-up and page-down.
Each line in the overlay definition is accessed via its sequence number. If you select an
existing sequence num ber you will be able to update or delete this particular line. If you select
a line num ber not already in the definition it m eans you wish to add a new line.
Sequence num bers can be entered with 1 decim al position. This opens up the possibility of
inserting a new line anywhere in the definition, as the specification of a line with a decim al
results in the addition of 1 to the sequence num bers of all succeeding lines in the definition.
The new line is placed in the vacant space in the reference series. As exam ple entering 12,1
will insert a sequence num ber between line 12 and 13. W hen saved the inserted sequence
line is assigned num ber 13 and the following lines are increm ented by one.
After entering a sequence num ber press the Field Exit key to add or edit this line. The key
m apping of keyboards varies from one PC to another. The Field Exit key could be assigned to
e.g. the right Ctrl key, the Enter key or the ‘+’ key of your num eric keyboard.
66
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Service Options
By pressing F5 you will get a list of service options:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: IF400DEMO
Seqnbr. Type
APF300D
Overlay text: Demo overlay for InterForm 400
Overlay definition
Select one of the following options:
1. Move the placement on the page
2. Move definitions to another sequence number.
3. Copy definition into this overlay
4. Delete lines
5. Resequencing
6. Print overlay definition
7. Rotate overlay
Option: __
W ith these you can organize the overlay definitions:
1.
M ove the placement on the page
Here you can enter an interval of sequence lines and adjust them horizontal and
vertical in a single action instead of changing entering each line.
In this function you can move the overlay up/down or left/right on the page.
Line interval to be moved . . . . . . :
0000_ - 0000_
Distance to move:
- to the right +/- _______
- downwards
+/- _______
2.
M ove definitions to another sequence num ber
If you m ade a lot of lines, you m ight want to reorganize them in order to get a better
overview. W ith this option you define an interval of sequence lines to be m oved to
another line num ber.
In this function you can move an interval of definition lines to another
sequence number.
3.
Sequence number from/to to be moved . . . .
0000
Inserted at sequence number . . . . . . . .
___1
- 0000
Copy definitions into this overlay
This option allows you to copy definitions in the sam e overlay or from another overlay
InterForm A/S 67
In this function you can copy lines into this overlay definition.
Overlay to be copied from . . . . . . . .
Sequence numbers from/to to be copied . .
Inserted at sequence number . . . . . . .
TEST______
0000_ - 0000_
___1_
blank = this overlay
F4 = overview overlays
F24 = shift to look at FROM-overlay
4.
Delete lines
This option you delete an interval of lines instead of entering each lines and press
F11.
In this function you can delete an interval of definition lines:
Interval . . .
5.
0000_ - 0000_
Resequencing
If you have deleted lines you will get in the situation that you have free line num bers to
insert new overlay definitions on. This option will sort all rem aining lines num erical.
In this function you can resequence the lines in this overlay definition.
Press ENTER for resequensing. Press F12 for unchanged.
6.
Print overlay definitions
This option will print out a detailed list of the existing overlay definitions on your default
printer.
7.
Rotate overlay
Chose this option to rotate the current overlay:
In this function you can rotate the whole overlay definition.
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . +
(090, 180, 270)
Press ENTER for rotate, Press F12 for unchanged.
An alternative way to copy, delete, renam e and rotate overlays is found via the 2. W ork with
file sets option on the adm inistration m enu as seen on page 310.
68
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Overlay Element Selection Filters
W hen entering a sequence num ber and you press Field Exit the following entry screen will
appear:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: IF400DEMO
Seqnbr. Type
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
_
1 =
3 =
5 =
7 =
9 =
? =
G =
* =
F3=Exit
APF300D
Overlay text: IF400DEMO
Overlay definition
*=Suspend
_
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
Remap window
If .. then
HP-GL/2 file
Comment
2
4
6
8
I
F
S
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Image
PCL-file
Suboverlay
F12=Cancel
Page control
_
BLANK = all pages
1 = first page only
2 = page 2 and succ.
9 = last page only
F18=View Spool entry
Suspend: Next to the type you can enter an asterix (*) if you want to suspend/disable this
design elem ent. This is an alternative to deleting the elem ent if you tem porarily want to rem ove
this elem ent. The asterix is also shown when displaying the design elem ent list.
The right side of the screen will contain entries for Copy management or Page control
depending on the value for Copy management in the global settings of the overlay
Page Control
The Page Control fields are used to assign this specific sequence line to all printed pages or
to selected pages only.
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
_ 1
3
5
7
9
?
G
*
F3=Exit
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
Remap window
If .. then
HP-GL/2 file
Comment
2
4
6
8
I
F
S
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Image
PCL-file
Suboverlay
F12=Cancel
Page control
_
BLANK = all pages
1 = first page only
2 = page 2 and succ.
9 = last page only
F18=View Spool entry
M WARNING M
Do not use page control in conditioned overlays. (Overlays called by an If..Then line).
If S or L is filled in for Duplex Print for the global settings of the overlay the Page Control will
be extended with a possibility of entering if page num bering should be m ade on odd or even
pages only:
InterForm A/S 69
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
1
3
5
7
9
?
G
*
F3=Exit
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
Remap window
If .. then
HP-GL/2 file
Comment
2
4
6
8
I
F
S
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Image
PCL-file
Suboverlay
Page control
_
BLANK = all pages
1 = first page only
2 = page 2 and succ.
9 = last page only
_
BLANK = all pages
1 = odd pages
2 = even pages
F12=Cancel
F18=View Spool entry
Copy Management
The entry fields for Copy M anagement will appear if Y has been selected for Copy
M anagement in the global settings of the overlay.(see Copy M anagement page 55)
Seqnbr. Type
1
1
1
3
5
7
9
?
G
*
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
Remap Window
If .. then
HP-GL/2 file
Comment
F3=Exit
2
4
6
8
I
F
S
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Image
PCL-file
Suboverlay
F12=Cancel
Copy management
From
Primary
_
Secondary _
To
_
_
F18=View Spool entry
The Copy management field is used to assign this specific sequence line to all printed copies
or to selected copies only.
The following are exam ples of definitions for copy control:
Use this overlay elem ent on all copies of Prim ary and Secondary sets (all fields left blank):
1
1
1
3
5
7
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
2
4
6
8
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Primary
Secondary
From
_
_
To
_
_
Use this overlay elem ent on the first copy (the original) of the Prim ary set only:
1
1
1
3
5
7
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
2
4
6
8
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Primary
Secondary
From
1
_
To
1
_
Use this overlay elem ent on the first copy of the Prim ary set and the first copy of the
Secondary set:
1
1
1
3
5
7
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
2
4
6
8
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Primary
Secondary
From
1
1
To
1
1
Primary
Secondary
From
1
_
To
6
_
Use this overlay elem ent on all copies of the Prim ary set:
1
1
1
3
5
7
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
2
4
6
8
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Use this overlay elem ent all copies of both sets except the first one in the Prim ary set,
1
70
1
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
1
3
5
7
=
=
=
=
Frame
Vertical
Text
Ink
Version 2014
2
4
6
8
=
=
=
=
Horizontal
Line
Print-info
Tabulator
Primary
Secondary
From
2
1
To
6
6
Overlay elements
Up to 9999 overlay elem ents can be m ade in one overlay.
1=FRAME
Seqnbr. Type
11,0
1
F3=Exit
Frame
Top edge
Left edge
Right edge
Bottom edge
Thickness in pels
Round/Sharp (R S)
Pattern
F11 = delete
Inch.pel
______
______
______
______
___
_ Radius
_ F4=List
F12=Cancel
Repetition
Move right ______
Move down
______
Extra times
___
NW NE SW SE
__ __ __ __
F18=View Spool entry
Top Edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Left Edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Right Edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Bottom Edge: Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Thickness
in pels:
Thickness of a border in pels (1/240"). Zero m eans no border.
Round/Sharp: Determ ines whether the corners of the fram e will be round or sharp. You can
also specify the radius in pels of each of the 4 corners (NorthW est,
NorthEast, SouthW est, SouthEast).
You can m ix sharp and round corners by entering a radius in pels for the
corners you want round, and state zeros for the corners you want sharp.
If you specify R for round corners without entering radius in any of the 4
fields, the system will use the default value of 24 as radius for all 4 corners.
Pattern:
Defines a fill pattern for the fram e. Left blank m eans no pattern. Refer to
page 76 on how to use patterns.
Repetition
M ove right:
Inch,pels of the right m ovem ent of a duplicate of the fram e relative to the
value for left edge
M ove Down:
Inch,pels of the vertical m ovem ent of a duplicate of the fram e relative to the
value for Top edge
Extra times:
Extra copies of the fram e excluding the original. Extra copies will be
displaced relative to each other according to the settings of M ove right and
M ove Dow n.
InterForm A/S 71
NW :
Radius in pels for the North W est corner of the fram e
NE:
Radius in pels for the North East corner of the fram e
SW :
Radius in pels for the South W est corner of the fram e
SE:
Radius in pels for the South East corner of the fram e
Color
Printing:
Seqnbr. Type
3.0
1
W hen working in a file-set defined for color printing, the fram e definitions will
offer an additional pattern setting for color print. W hen having selected a
color INK setting prior to the fram e settings, this color INK selection will then
be used for the printed fram e and pattern. Fram es defined with Thickness in
pels (if any), will always be printed as a solid line.
Inch.pel
Top edge
______
Left edge
______
Right edge
______
Bottom edge
______
Thickness in pels
__3
Round/Sharp (R S) S Radius
Pattern, B/W-prt
_ F4=List
Pattern, color-prt B F4=List
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F11=Delete
F13=Set view/print parameters
F14=PCL-view
Frame
Repetition
Move right
Move down
Extra times
_______
_______
___
NW NE SW SE
__ __ __ __
F12=Cancel
2=HORIZONTAL LINE
Seqnbr. Type
1
2
Inch.pel
Horizontal line
From top edge ______
Left end
______
Right end
______
Repetition
Move right ______
Move down
______
Extra times
___
Thickness in pels ___
F3=Exit
From Top
Edge:
F18=View Spool entry
Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page
regardless of the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Left end:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Right end:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Thickness
in pels:
72
F12=Cancel
Thickness of a line in pels (1/240"). Zero m eans no border.
M ove right:
Inch,pels of the right m ovem ent of a duplicate of the line relative to the value
for left edge
M ove Down:
Inch,pels of the vertical m ovem ent of a duplicate of the line relative to the
value for Top edge
Extra times:
Extra copies of the line excluding the original. Extra copies will be displaced
relative to each other according to the settings of M ove right and M ove
Dow n.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
3=VERTICAL LINE
Seqnbr. Type
1
3
Inch.pel
Repetition
Vertical line
From top edge
From left
Lower end
______
______
______
Move right
Move down
Extra times
______
______
___
Thickness in pels ___
F3=Exit
From Top
Edge:
F12=Cancel
F18=View Spool entry
Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
From left:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Lower end:
Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of a portrait page regardless of the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Thickness
in pels:
Thickness of a the line in pels (1/240"). Zero m eans no border.
M ove right:
Inch,pels of the right m ovem ent of a duplicate of the line relative to the value
for left edge
M ove Down:
Inch,pels of the vertical m ovem ent of a duplicate of the line relative to the
value for Top edge
Extra times:
Extra copies of the line excluding the original. Extra copies will be displaced
relative to each other according to the settings of M ove right and M ove
Dow n.
4=LINE
Seqnbr. Type
n,0
2
Inch.pel
Repetition
Line
Endpoint 1 from top
from left
Endpoint 2 from top
from left
Thickness in pels
F3=Exit
______
______
______
______
___
F12=Cancel
Move right ______
Move down
______
Extra times
___
F18=View Spool entry
This definition works sim ilar to the two previous definitions. It distinguish itself by enabling lines
to be diagonal. This also m eans you will have to define coordinates for each endpoint.
Endpoint 1
From Top:
From left:
Inches, pels absolute to the top edge of a portrait page regardless of
the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of
the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
InterForm A/S 73
Endpoint 2
From Top:
From left:
Thickness
in pels:
Inches, pels absolute to the top edge of a portrait page regardless of
the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of a portrait page regardless of
the rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Thickness of a the line in pels (1/240"). Zero m eans no border.
M ove Right:
Inch,pels of the right m ovem ent of a duplicate of the line relative to the value
for left edge
M ove Down:
Inch,pels of the vertical m ovem ent of a duplicate of the line relative to the
value for Top edge
Extra times:
Extra copies of the line excluding the original. Extra copies will be displaced
relative to each other according to the settings of M ove right and M ove
Dow n.
If you are m aking horizontal and vertical lines it is recom m ended that you use definition 2 and
3, and only use this definition for m aking diagonal lines.
5=TEXT
This can be used to insert text constants with varying fonts in the overlay.
Seqnbr. Type
26,0
5
Inch.pel
Text constant From top edge
______
From left
_______
Adjustment
_
(U C R)
Rotation
___
Font
____
F4=List
Text
_____________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
______________________
F3=Exit
74
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
F18=View Spool entry
From Top:
Inches, pels absolute to the top edge of the rotation specified by the global
settings for the overlay.
From left:
Inches, pels absolute to the rotation specified by the global settings for the
overlay.
Adjustm ent:
Adjustm ent to use: U=Unadjusted, C=Centered, R=Right adjusted.
Rotation:
The available values for rotation are: 000, 030, 090, 120, 180, 210, 270, 300
degrees.
Font:
The font ID of the form atted text.
Text:
Text field
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
6=Print-info (Print information)
Seqnbr. Type
1.0
6
Inch.pel
Print-info
From top edge
From left
Rotation
Font
Info-type
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
______
______
___
___0
__________
F4=List
F4=List
F12=Cancel
From Top:
Inches, pels absolute to the top edge of the rotation specified by the global
settings for the overlay.
From left:
Inches, pels absolute to the rotation specified by the global settings for the
overlay.
Rotation:
The available values for rotation are: 000, 090, 180, 270 degrees.
Font:
The font ID used for printing out the inform ation required below.
Info-type:
Type of inform ation to be printed (can be prom pted with F4). Here you can
specify to either print out page num bers or inform ation about the job, that
created the spool file.
Value:
*PAGNBR
*ENDPAGE
*MUPPAGNBR
*JOBNAME
*USER
*JOBNBR
*JOB
*PGM
*PGMLIB
*OVERLAY
*FILESET
*PRTTXT
Prints out:
Page num ber of the actual page.
Total num ber of pages.
The actual page num ber when using Multi-Up.
The job nam e.
Userprofile used for the job.
Job num ber of the job.
All inform ation above, about the job.
The program , that created the spool file.
Library of the program , that created the spool file.
The overlay, that has been m erged with.
File set of the m erged overlay.
The PRTTXT attribute of the m erged spooled file.
J TIP J
You can print out the text: ‘Page X out of Y’, where X is *PAGENBR and *ENDPAGE is Y.
Place the text ‘Page
out of
‘ using option 5=Text, and then place the two numbers using
option 6=Print-info with *PAGENBR and another with *ENDPAGE.
InterForm A/S 75
7=INK (fill pattern for succeeding sequence lines)
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
7
Ink
Select ink for the succeeding lines
Pattern
8
blank = unchanged,
0 = 100% white shading,
1-8 = 1-100% shading, ...
F3=Exit
F13=Set view/print parameters
F12=Cancel
F14=PCL-view
Norm ally the system overwrites whatever m ight be the original contents, while leaving the
background unaltered.
W ith this overlay elem ent the Ink can be changed enabling printing white on black
background, a pattern transparently on another pattern etc. The possibilities are num erous.
Pattern :
For the pattern the following are valid:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
D
E
!
/
\
+
X
100% white shading (erases background)
2% shading
10% shading
20% shading
35% shading
55% shading
80% shading
99% shading
100% shading
1% shading (600 DPI)
3% shading (600 DPI)
6% shading (600 DPI)
8% shading (600 DPI)
24% sharding (600 DPI)
Horizontal lines
Vertical lines
Diagonal lines (to the right)
Diagonal lines (to the left)
Horizontal and vertical lines
Crossing diagonal lines
Examples on use of Ink:
W e have first m ade four large fram es with fill pattern"\" (diagonal stripes \\\).
In the sequence lines after, we have defined 4 sm all fram es with fill pattern "!" (vertical stripes
|||) and 4 text constants printed with font 2103, which fits in the large fram es.
In fram e 1 and 2 we state an Ink just before the text line. You will notice, that the pattern of the
elem ents are placed on top of the previous placed elem ents.
If you want the sm all fram e and text to be shown without the lines of the larger fram e you could
choose to first place the sam e fram e and text with fill pattern 0 (erase background) before
reprinting it with the wanted Ink as seen in fram e 3. Here ‘!’ is used for the sm all fram e and ‘/’
is used for the text.
Fram e 4 shows the result when choosing pattern = 0 (erase background) for the Ink and
printing TEXT. See the results below:
76
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Black Ink
Slash (/) Ink
(0) Ink follow ed
by Ink(/) / Ink(!)
(0) Ink
You can also insert an im age as a waterm ark, if you change the ink to be shading . Note
however, that you cannot use Ink to change PCL files into waterm arks.
Color
Printing:
Seqnbr. Type
2.0
7
W hen working in a file-set defined for color printing the INK settings will have
additional options, as per below.
Ink
Select ink for the succeeding lines
Pattern, B/W-prt
_
blank = unchanged,
0 = 100% white shading,
1-8 = 1-100% shading, ...
Pattern, color-prt 8
(See above)
Color
__3 1=Black, 2=Grey, 3=Red, ..
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
F13=Set view/print parameters
F14=PCL-view
This enables printing of spool data, text constants, lines and fram es in color on PCL
com patible color laser printers.
L TROUBLE SHOOTING L
Remember to select a color printer type when printing to a PCL compatible color laser printer
(HP5C, HP4500, HP4500D)
G NOTE G
Ink com m ands in m ain overlays will have not effect in conditioned suboverlays called by
If..Then.
InterForm A/S 77
8=TABULATOR (Paragraph tabulation)
A "tabulator" perform s form atting and horizontal m ovem ent of an interval of lines in the spool
date. Alm ost the sam e result can be obtained by using com m and type 9. Rem ap W indow .
The line and position num bers to be entered are those appearing in the input, regardless of a
general m argin or extra blank lines defined for the overlay.
Seqnbr. Type
1
8
F3=Exit
78
Tabulator
Input:
Line
___ - ___
Position
___ - ___
Print:
From left edge ______ Adjustment _ (U L C R N B +)
Font
____
F4=List
Condition: Position
___ - ___
Is > = < N
_ - ___________
Blank after
_ B = Blank condition after
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
F18=View Spool entry
Input Line:
The line interval to read including both lines entered here.
Input Position:
The Colum n interval to read including both positions entered
From left:
Inches, pels absolute to the rotation specified by the global settings
for the overlay. If m oved beyond the paper edge (e.g. 14") the data
will be rem oved from the data stream . Note that the Left edge is
m easured from the physical paper edge unless the line interval of the
Tabulator is included in an Extended Page Definition interval. In this
case the Left Edge of the Tabulator is m easured from the Left
M argin defined in the Extended Page Definition.
Adjustm ent:
Form atting of the text field. The Valid values are:
U
Un-formatted. The area is printed without any changes to
form atting, and spaces.
L
Left-adjustment. Spaces proceeding the first character in
text lines in the tabulator area are rem oved, causing the area
to be left adjusted at the position indicated by From Left.
C
Centred. Spaces within the tabulator area before and after
text lines are being rem oved, and the area is centred around
the position indicated by From Left.
R
Right-adjustment. Spaces following the character in text
lines in the tabulator area are rem oved, causing the area to
be right adjusted at the position indicated by From Left.
N
Numeric. Indicates if the text lines in the tabulator area
should be considered as num bers (am ounts).
B
Print succeeding spaces in barcode data. Indicates if the
spaces in the coloum n interval succeeding the barcode data
should be converted to barcode. This only apply to the
barcodes 128 and 3of9. The barcodes will always be leftadjusted. (Norm ally succeeding spaces will be ignored.)
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
here
+
Opens up for Extended Adjustement for definition of
Underline of text in the tabulator and/or lines of periods
(known as punctuation or dot leaders) m ade after each line of
the tabulator. The following options appear when + is entered:
Adjustm ent:
The adjustem ent of the underlined or
punctuated lines. Values U, L, C, R or N
acording to the above
Underline:
Underlining of text in the tabulator (spaces
are not underlined).
Punctuation
Length: If the last position of a line in the tabulator, defined
by the second Input Position field, is a period
sign, a line of punctuation will be printed. The
punctuation will start after the last printable
character, and end at the position (inches,pels)
stated in this field counting from the position stated
in From Left. Only Adjustm ent values U and L can
be used. No punctuation will be m ade if other
values are used, if no period sign is found or if the
text exceeds the punctuation length.
Font:
The new font of the form atted text.
Condition:
An optional set of values used if the tabulator should be executed on
a certain condition.
F18:
Position:
Only activate the tabulator If a character string in the interval of lines
defined by the Tabulator m atches this character string according to
the following condition.
Is >=<N
Only run tabulator if this following field contains a text string or a
number which m atch one of the following valid operators:
>
Greater than a num ber entered in the following field
=
Equal to a num ber or a text string (case sensitive) or a
num ber entered in the following field.
<
Less than a num ber entered in the following field
N
Not equal to a num ber or a text string (case sensitive) or a
num ber entered in the following field.
A
Acceptable characters. All the characters in m arked interval
m ust be one of the characters in the following field.
U
Unacceptable characters. None of the characters in the
m arked interval m ust be one of the characters in the following
field.
(See page 83 for a tip on use of ‘>’ and ‘<‘)
Blank After:
Stating B will rem ove the text string or the num ber which has been
used for the condition from the resulting print out.
W ith the Tabulator the function is relevant for displaying the spool
entry in order to determ ine lines and colum ns for the tabulator. F18
prom pts the com m and DSPSPLF with the job inform ation used for
m erge in option 3. M erge spool entry with overlay (page 118).
Pressing F18 will only work if this m erge has been done prior to
entering this m enu.
InterForm A/S 79
M WARNING M
If two or more overlapping tabulators are defined the first defined will take the text it needs
and leave blank positions in the relevant place for the next tabulator. A maximum of 200
tabulators per overlay can be defined. The limit of 200 includes any referenced
suboverlays. If you are using many conditioned tabulators you should consider to use the
conditioned overlay instead.
J TIP J
You can use a tabulator (left or unadjusted) to delete areas of text. Just tabulate the area over
the edge of the paper (e.g. 14"). This will not produce unnecessary code in the data stream.
InterForm400 ® detects if the code is defined to be printed outside the printable area, and will
then just ignore it. In case you have made many re-mappings you can define a tabulator as the
last sequence line which takes an area from line 1 to 72 and position 1 to 132, and move it
outside the page, thereby deleting any remaining data.
Extended Adjustment (+) does not support fixed width fonts e.g. Courier.
J TIP J
You can align numbers, where some are negative by use of numeric adjustment (N). See
below.
M WARNING M
Adjustment cannot place the adjusted text to the left of the left edge of the paper in PCL
output (negative positioning is not possible). So if you try to e.g. right adjust a long text, that
cannot fit in between the left edge of the paper and the specified position the text is moved to
the right to make room for all the text.
Input data is form atted for fixed pitch font tabulation
0
1
2
1234567890123456789012345
1 MICKEY MOUSE
1.100,00
2 refund EARS
-2.100,00
3 total
1.000,00If the above was uncritically printed with a proportional spaced font we would experience the
result displayed below on the left, due to varying width of characters in the font.
If we m ade a tabulator that defined colum n 16 to 25 of line 1 to 3 to be printed with num eric
adjustm ent, we would get the result displayed to the right. Notice that the minus is
com pensated for in the right alignm ent.
Proportional font without tabulator
Proportional font with a num erical adjusted
tabulator
M ICKEY M OUSE
M ICKEY M OUSE
refund EARS
total
1.100,00
-2.100,00
1.000,00-
refund EARS
total
1.100,00
-2.100,00
1.000,00-
9=REMAP WINDOW (re-mapping text areas)
Definition of a Remap W indow gives you the possibility of taking a particular part of a given
text line and print it elsewhere on the page, e.g. with rotation and another font.
A m axim um of 300 Remap W indow lines are allowed in one overlay. The lim it of 300
includes the rem aps in any referenced suboverlay. Additional rem ap window lines are ignored.
If this lim itation is a problem you should use 'If..Then' lines instead to create overlays, that are
80
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
m ore efficient and easier to m aintain. Contact your local InterForm 400 dealer to get m ore
inform ation of how to do that if in doubt.
Seqnbr. Type
1
9
Remap window
Print:
Input line
From upper edge
From left edge
Adjustment
Rotation
Font
Blank original
Condition: Position
Is > = < N
Blank after
___ - ___ Position ___ - ___
______ Line spacing . . ___
______ Ignore blank lines _ (Y N)
_
(U L R C N B E +)
___
____
F4=List
_
B = blank original version
___ - ___
_ ____________________________
_
B = Blank condition after
Input Line:
The line interval to read including both lines entered here. If the end
line is left blank or the sam e as the begin line, only one line will be
rem apped.
Position:
The Colum n interval to read including both positions entered here.
The m axim um position interval is 198 characters.
Upper edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of the page according to the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
From left edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of the page according the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Line Spacing:
Measured in n/240" which m eans 6 lines per inch will give the value
40. Failure to fill in this value, will default to a linespacing of zero
resulting all text to be printed in one line.
Ignore Blank
Lines:
Adjustm ent:
Enabling this option will cause all blank lines to be discarded.
form atting of the character string. Valid values are:
U
Un-formatted. The character string is printed without any
changes to
form atting, and spaces.
L
Left-adjustment. Spaces proceeding the first character in the
character string are rem oved, causing the string to be left
adjusted at the position indicated by From left.
C
Centred. Spaces within the character string before and after
printable characters are being rem oved, and the string is
centred around the position indicated by From left.
R
Right-adjustment. Spaces following the character in the
character string are rem oved, causing the string to be right
adjusted at the position indicated by From left.
N
Numeric. Indicates if the characters in the character string
should be considered as num bers (am ounts).
B
Print succeeding spaces in barcode data. Indicates if the
spaces in the coloum n interval succeeding the barcode data
should converted to barcode. This only apply to the barcodes
128 and 3 of 9. The barcodes will always be left-adjusted.
E
Block form atting. (aligning both left and right m argins). This
function enables changes to the num ber of letters per line,
based on the font size and the max. line w idth of the
justification. Distance between words is autom atically
adjusted.
M aximum line
w idth:: Defines the m axim um length of the justified text
line.(Inch/pels)
InterForm A/S 81
Right margin
adjustm ent:
Escape
sequences:
Defines when a text line should not be
justified. This is based on the percentage of
text characters versus blank spaces left on
the last line of a rem apped paragraph.(0100% )
Used when working with spool files having
escape sequences integrated.
(See Appendix H, page 438)
Note: For ZPL and IPL output the block function is lim ited to
changing line breaks to fit a certain m ax width as well as
setting a justification. Full justify is not supported for IPL
output.
+
Opens up for Extended Adjustment for definition of
Underline of text in the Rem ap W indow and/or a line of
periods (known as punctuation or dot leaders) m ade after the
text. following options appear when + is entered:
Adjustement: The adjustm ent of the underlined or
punctuation lines. Values U, L, C, R or N
according to the above.
Underline:
Underlining of text in the Rem ap W indow
(spaces are not underlined).
Punctuation
Length: If the last position of the text line in the Rem ap
W indow, defined by the second Input Position
field, is a period sign, a line of punctuation will be
printed. The punctuation will start after the last
printable character, and end at the position
(inches,pels) stated in this field counting from the
position stated in From Left. Only Adjustm ent
values U and L can be used. No punctuation will be
m ade if other values are used, if no period sign is
found or if the text exceeds the punctuation length.
M WARNING M
Adjustment cannot place the adjusted text to the left of the left edge of the paper in PCL
output (negative positioning is not possible). So if you try to e.g. right adjust a long text, that
cannot fit in between the left edge of the paper and the specified position the text is moved to
the right to make room for all the text.
82
Font:
The new font of the form atted text.
Blank original
B specifies, that the original text should be rem oved.
Condition:
An optional set of values used if the rem apping should be executed
on a certain condition.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Position:
Only activate the Rem ap W indow If the character
string read by the Rem ap W indow m atches this
character string according to the following condition:
Is >=<N
Only run tabulator if this following field contains a text
string or a number which m atch one of the following
valid operators:
>
Greater than a num ber entered in the
following field.
Version 2014
=
Equal to a num ber or a text string (case
sensitive) or a num ber entered in the
following field.
<
Less than a num ber entered in the following
field.
N
Not equal to a num ber or a text string (case
sensitive) or a num ber entered in the
following field.
A
Acceptable characters. All the characters in
m arked interval m ust be one of the
characters in the following field.
U
Unacceptable characters. None of the
characters in the m arked interval m ust be
one of the characters in the following field.
(See page 83 for a tip on use of ‘>’ and ‘<‘)
Blank After:
Stating B will rem ove the text string or the num ber
which has been used for the condition from the
resulting print out.
J TIP J
If you specify B for Blank original above, the text removed cannot be used for any conditions
(If..Then). If you want to combine the two, then do not blank the original in the remap. Instead
insert an additional line tabulating (type=8) the unwanted text outside the page e.g. 14 inches
from the left..
M WARNING M
Extended Adjustment (+) and Full Adjustment (E) does not support fixed width fonts e.g.
Courier.
M WARNING M
Even though you can remap text out of the visible paper, the text is still possible to find the
resulting PDF file when you merge with a spooled file. If you want to eliminate that possibility
use an unadjusted tabulator to remove the spooled file text.
J TIP J
If you want to compare a column of numbers (Right justified) to a specific value using ‘<‘ or ‘>’
and want to condition a ‘Tabulator’, ’Remap’ or ‘If..Then’ on the result, you should include a
space in front of the number, that you compare with.
This compare will work fine also for large numbers, that are much wider than the compared
value.
(Reason: A space (‘ ’) has a lower value than all digits ‘0'-‘9'.)
InterForm A/S 83
I=IMAGE
Seqnbr. Type
1
I
Inch.pel
From top edge ______
From left
______
Image name
__________
Reverse Image _
R = Reverse Image
Resolution
___
75,100,150,200,300,600
Image
F4 = overview images
F18=View Spool file
From top edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the upper edge of the page according to the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
From left edge:
Inches, pels absolute to the left edge of the page according the
rotation specified by the global settings for the overlay.
Image nam e:
The im age im ported under 5. W ork with Images in the adm inistration
m enu. Refer to page 354 for details.
Reverse Image:
Entering R here will cause the im age to be printed in negative. This
option is m eant to reverse im ages to norm al in relation to som e
scanning utilities which saves TIFF reversed. Note, that perform ance
wise it is better to reverse if necessary during install of the im age in
InterForm 400 - refer to page 354 for m ore inform ation.
Resolution:
The resolution by which the im age was scanned. This option can also
be used to scale the im age. For exam ple an im age scanned in 300
dpi can be scaled to double size in the print out by entering 150 here.
Entering 600 here will cause the sam e im age to be scaled to half size,
but only if the printer supports a 600 dpi resolution (HP4 and
com patibles). The resolution of 200 dpi is com m only used if the
overlay is intended for faxing through the BlueFax fax program also.
Color Printing:
W hen working in a file-set defined for color printing the Im age settings
will have an additional definition for color images. The resolution of
the color im age can be adjusted from the original settings, by stating
an specific resolution for Horisontal and Vertical values, respectively.
(1-600 DPI).
If the resolution settings are left blank, the original resolution settings
of the im ported im age will be used.
The Black/W hite im age definition is available to facilitate printing of
the sam e overlay both on black and white and color laser printers.
.
M WARNING M
Note that you can not specify rotation. An image always has the orientation specified in the
global settings for the overlay.
?=IF...THEN (conditional nesting of overlays)
This feature is useful in the situation where the appearance of the overlay has to be dependent
of the text that is m erged with the overlay. This can be caused by a spool entry containing two
or m ore different print outs, say invoices and credit notes, and where you want different
overlays on the individual printout.
Another use of the "If..then" feature is the case where a detail in the printout shall result in
adding an extra detail to the overlay (see exam ple page 106). Finally the If..then feature can
84
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
be used for form atting print lines or groups of print lines appearing in random line positions
(see exam ple page 110)
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
?
If . . . . .
Then . . . .
Input line
Position
Is > = < N
Overlay
Upper edge
Left edge
Blank after
___ - ___
___ - ___
_ _________________________
__________ Nos. of lines to remap ____
______ A/+/- _
______ A/+/- _
_
B = blank original text
F18=View Spool file
Input Line:
The line interval to read including both lines entered here.
Input Position:
The Colum n interval to read including both positions entered here
Is >=<N
Only call the sub-overlay if this following field contains a text string or
a number which m atch one of the following valid operators:
>
Greater than a num ber entered in the following field
=
Equal to a num ber or a text string (case sensitive) or a
num ber entered in the following field.
<
Less than a num ber entered in the following field
N
Not equal to a num ber or a text string (case sensitive) or a
num ber entered in the following field.
A
Acceptable characters. All the characters in m arked interval
m ust be one of the characters in the following field.
U
Unacceptable characters. None of the characters in the
m arked interval m ust be one of the characters in the following
field.
(See page 83 for a tip on use of ‘>’ and ‘<‘)
Overlay:
The nam e of the overlay to be used as sub-overlay. If the nam e
entered here is M ACROxxxxx where xxxxx represents a num eric
num ber (e.g. MACRO00001) InterForm 400 ® will m ake a PCL m acro
call using this num ber. This will require the PCL m acro to be loaded
into the printer prior to using the m ain overlay. The PCL file can be
loaded into the printer by the InterForm 400 ® HPMACRO com m and
(see page 474).
Number of
lines to remap:
This param eter is used to pass on a line interval to a sub-overlay
which can process the lines with Rem ap W indow s or Tabulator
com m ands. The first line of the interval will be the line defined by
Input line of the line interval and will be regarded as line 1 in the suboverlay, i.e. the sub-overlay will consider the interval as a virtual spool
entry to process.
Defining *VAR for this function, will cause this If..then com m and to
continue checking all lines starting from the beginning of the input line
interval, until another If..then com m and is m et, provided that it is
within the line interval of the original If..then com m and. If conditions
for m ore If..then com m ands are true concurrently, the field Lines to
remap is only used from the last If..then com m and.
This feature is designed specifically to form at item lines printed in
varying lines, and with varying num ber of lines between the item
groups (see exam ple page 110).
Vertical cursor repositioning
W hen you enter a num ber of lines to rem ap (other than 0) you are
prom pted for a vertical repositioning like below:
InterForm A/S 85
Vertical cursor repositioning
before execute of sub overlay
Position related to actual position
Number of pels . .
( -99 - 99 )
Or reposition related to previous
non blank input line
Number of pels . .
( 0 - 999 )
Or reposition after execute of suboverlay
related to highest Y-adress used in any
remap window in sub-overlay.
Number of pels . .
F3=Exit
40
( 0 - 999 )
F12=Cancel
W ith this function you can vertically reposition the rest of the spooled
file i.e. m ove the spooled file contents and all relatively positioned
elem ents e.g. tabulators and rem aps.
Position related to actual position:
This will m ove the rest of the spooled file up (negative value) or down
(positive value). See page 110 for an exam ple which uses this option.
Reposition related to previous non blank input line:
Use this repositioning e.g. in order to close the gap of blank lines on
the original spooled file. (Use the If..Then scanning from the last non
blank line.)
Reposition after execute of suboverlay:
The m ain benefit from this option is that if you are using an extended
rem ap window in the suboverlay, then you can m ake the height of the
suboverlay adaptive - to fit the text rem apped lowest on the page, but
this option can be used whenever the height of the suboverlay is
uncertain.
86
Upper Edge:
Inches, pels position according to the entry of the following field:
A
Vertical position of the sub-overlay is m ade absolute to the
upper edge of the paper. Vertical positioning of elem ents in
the sub-overlay is added to this value.
+
The sub-overlay is re-positioned downwards relative to the
position of the string m atching the criteria for the sub-overlay
to be called. Vertical positioning of elem ents in the suboverlay is added to this value.
The sub-overlay is re-positioned upwards relative to the
position of the string m atching the criteria for the sub-overlay
to be called. Vertical positioning of elem ents in the suboverlay is added to this value.
Left Edge:
Inches, pels position according to the entry of the following field:
A
Horizontal position of the sub-overlay is m ade absolute to the
left edge of the paper. Horizontal positioning of elem ents in
the sub-overlay is added to this value.
+
The sub-overlay is re-positioned to the right relative to the
position of the string m atching the criteria for the sub-overlay
to be called. Horizontal positioning of elem ents in the suboverlay is added to this value.
The sub-overlay is re-positioned to the left relative to the
position of the string m atching the criteria for the sub-overlay
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
to be called. Horizontal positioning of elem ents in the suboverlay is added to this value.
Blank After:
Stating B will rem ove the text string or the num ber, which has been
used for the condition, from the resulting print out. Rem em ber, that if
you use ‘B’ any subsequent conditioned overlays m ay be called if they
are conditioned by blanks in these positions .
M WARNING M
Global settings of the sub-overlay, inserted by the if..then line, will be ignored as well as 6 =
Print-info.
M WARNING M
Up to 300 ‘If..Then’ lines can be defined for an overlay.
M WARNING M
Only one level of conditioned sub-overlays is possible.’If..Then’ lines placed in overlays,
which are called by ‘If..Then’ are never executed.
M WARNING M
Totally blank lines are not considered for the If..Then line i.e. a condition on one or more
blank characters on a totally blank line will not trigger a call of the suboverlay. The OS/400
command DSPSPLF will show the lines which can be conditioned.
F=PCL-FILE
Insertion of a PCL-file m ight be one of the m ost im portant features of the system , as designing
form s m ore and m ore is a job for a PC. InterForm 400 ® allows a single overlay to be com bined
of several PCL form s as well as having standard elem ents included as described in the
previous sections.
W hen overwriting (updating) a PCL-file on the system all overlays referring to this PCL
resource will autom atically be updated. An “encapsulated” PCL-file (including PCL and/or HPGL/2) generated in any PC application equipped with an HP4 driver can be transferred to the
system by a File Transfer,a Virtual Print or copying between directories by m eans of iSeries
Access (see Importing PCL overlay from PC print file page 360).Note that inclusion of
PCL-files for the Printer type chosen as default, has to be confirm ed under 2. Set default
output queue and printer type (page 298).
Seqnbr. Type
1.0
F
PCL-file
Inch.pel
From top edge _______
From left
_______
File name
__________
(+ -)
(+ -)
The overlay elem ent that defines the PCL file to be inserted is quite sim ple. It is, however,
possible to fine adjust the placem ent of the PCL form com pared to the positions defined in the
original PCL-file. This frees you from starting up the PC applications if only the overall
placem ent needs to be changed.
From top edge Inches, pels vertical position of the PCL file is m ade absolute to the upper
edge of the paper. Vertical positioning of elem ents in the PCL file is added to
this value. Adding a m inus after the value, will cause an m ovem ent upwards.
(e.g. 1,120- for 1½” negative m ovem ent)
From left edge Inches, pels horizontal position of the PCL file is m ade absolute to the left
edge of the paper. Horizontal positioning of elem ents in the PCL file is added
InterForm A/S 87
to this value. Adding a m inus after the value, will cause a m ovem ent to the
left. (e.g. 1,120- for 1½”m ovem ent to the left)
Color
printing:
W hen working in a file-set defined for color printing the PCL-file settings will
have an additional definition for color PCL-files.
The Black/W hite PCL-file definition is available to facilitate printing of the
sam e overlay both on black and white and color laser printers.
M WARNING M
The system does not check the contents of the PCL file to be PCL5 or PCL5e code. Printing
code made for a PCL5e on a PCL5 printer might cause problems, as well as printing PCL5 on
a PCL4 printer definitely will go wrong. It is recommended to use an HP4 driver to create the
PCL files on the PC
G=HP/GL-2-FILE
A HP-GL/2 file can be file transferred to the system for storage as a m em ber in the physical
file APF3812/GL2. The PC file containing the HP-GL/2 code m ust be transferred to the system
by a File Transfer function.
This feature has been superseded by the PCL im ports option. Contact InterForm A/S for
details, if im port of HPGL files is needed.
Design APF3812 overlay
Overlay name: PROFIT
Seqnbr. Type
Overlay text: Final Result DM /YTD
Overlay definition
Seqnbr. Type
2,0
G
HP-GL/2 file
F3=Exit
APF300D
F4=Prompt
From top edge
From left
Height
Width
Rotation
Scale factor
Line width
File name
Inch.pel
______
______
______
______
___
______
__
__________
F12=Cancel
If you are using HP4 com patible printers only, you should choose to use the F=PCL-file
sequence line solely, as this will treat a HP-GL/2 files and PCL-files equally. This m eans you
can use the procedures for reading in PC-print into PCL-files explained on page 360 to retrieve
the HP-GL/2 file from the PC environm ent instead of using the iSeries Access (PC-support)
file-transfer function.
88
From top edge
Inches, pels vertical position of the HP-GL/2 file is m ade absolute to
the upper edge of the paper. Vertical positioning of elem ents in the
PCL file is added to this value. Adding a m inus after the value, will
cause an m ovem ent upwards. (e.g. 1,120- for 1½” negative
m ovem ent)
From left edge
Inches, pels horizontal position of the PCL file is m ade absolute to
the left edge of the paper. Horizontal positioning of elem ents in the
PCL file is added to this value. Adding a m inus after the value, will
cause a m ovem ent to the left. (e.g. 1,120- for
1½”m ovem ent to
the left)
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
S=SUBOVERLAY
If you are printing general com pany info in several overlays, i.e. the com pany letter head, it is
convenient to place this info in a separate overlay. W ith this function you can place such
inform ation in an overlay that can be called as a sub-overlay from any other overlays. Ie.
changing e.g. the phone num ber only have to do be done in this overlay.
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: Invoice
APF300D
Overlay text: Invoice overlay
Seqnbr. Type
Overlay definition
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
S
Suboverlay
Overlay name COMPINF
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The nam e of the overlay to be used as sub-overlay. If the nam e entered here is M ACROxxxxx
where xxxxx represents a num eric num ber (e.g. MACRO00001) InterForm 400 ® will m ake a
PCL m acro call using this num ber. This will require the PCL m acro to be loaded into the printer
prior to using the m ain overlay. The PCL file can be loaded into the printer by the
InterForm 400 ® HPMACRO com m and (see page 474).
M WARNING M
Global settings of the sub-overlay, inserted by the S=Suboverlay, will be ignored as well as 6
= Print-info.
* = COMMENT
This function will insert a com m ent in your overlay definition. Introducing a com m ent line in the
overlay definition is for easy overview purposes only and will not affect the resulting print.
Seqnbr.
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
Type
*
I
*
1
*
9
Seqnbr. Type
1.0
*
Overlay definition
Insert InterForm Logo in Upper Right Corner
Image DEMOIMAGE Top 01.100 Left 04.180
Recepient Frame
Frame top 01.100 left 00.200 right 04.120 bottom 02.160
Remap Recepient Adress into Recepient frame
Remap window 06-011 pos 08-040 top 1.160 left 1.000 L
Comment
Insert InterForm Logo in Upper Right Corner
InterForm A/S 89
How the sequence lines in overlay design are executed
The execution order is of the sequence lines is depending on the type of the line. They are
executed in this order:
1st.
Fram es, Lines, Text (option 5), Print-info, Ink, Im ages, PCL-files, HP/GL-files and
Suboverlays.
2nd.
9=Rem ap W indow
3rd.
?=If..Then
Last
8=Tabulator
Norm ally it is not necessary to rem em ber this order, but when you m ix them you could get a
problem : If you specify to blank out rem apped text by use of option 9=Remap W indow , then
you cannot use the text for a condition in If..Then. This can be solved by not blanking out the
text in the Remap W indow and instead insert an 8=Tabulator to tabulate the text out of the
page after the If..Then has been executed.
If you have several ?=If..Then lines, rem apping the sam e line(s), then only the last condition
m et will have the lines rem apped. The other conditional overlays are executed, but no lines are
transferred.
M WARNING M
A deviation from the rules above are seen if you transfer 2 or more lines to a sub-overlay by
use of If..Then. The second and following lines are transferred first - even before any Remap
Windows in the main overlay are executed.
G NOTE G
Ink lines in the m ain overlay will have no effect in conditioned sub-overlays (called by
If..Then).
G NOTE G
If you use absolute positioning for the sub-overlay called by If..Then you will notice this:
Tabulators in the sub-overlay are unaffected by the positioning of the sub-overlay.
Rem ap W indow s in the sub-overlay add the vertical position specified in the If..Then
com m and whereas the horizontal position is ignored.
J TIP J
Regarding design of Zebra overlays: If you want to insert text, frames or images in reverse
i.e. white on black background you can do it by first adding a frame with black filling (=pattern)
and then place the text or image on top of the black frame (without specifying white in an Ink
command). In this manner you reverse the part of the text or image, that overlaps the black
frame.
90
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Getting Familiar With Overlays
The following sections are structured so you will be brought through a process of im proving the
visibility of the sam ple spool entry IF400DEM O introduced in the Getting Started section on
page 42.
The chapter requires you have:
•
•
•
•
•
Run the Getting Started section.
A PCL5 capable printer attached to your default InterForm 400 ® output queue
(displayed in the upper right field on the main menu), or have configured the PCL
Viewer (Swiftview).
Not m ade changes to the sam ple overlay IF400DEM O delivered with the system .
Installed the graphical designer on your PC
Setup the m easurem ent in the designer to inches and pels (under Setup and
Measure)
It is recom mend that you have:
•
•
Quiet surroundings
A cup of coffee
You can start by printing the overlay IF400DEM O if you like to know how the final result will
appear.
Please abstract from the fact that it is not a piece of design artwork. W e have concentrated
m ainly on using as m any features of the system as possible.
InterForm A/S 91
Step 1. Making a Work Copy of the Overlay IF400DEMO
In order to keep the original sam ple we should first m ake a copy of the overlays to work with.
To prevent the changes we m ake to be overwritten by future updates of the SAMPLE file-set,
we will do the changes in our TEST file-set which was created on page 41 in the Getting
Started section.
To do that you start up the graphical designer and select the open overlay icon on the upper
left:
Select the IF400DEMO overlay and click open:
Now select ‘File’ and ‘Save as’ to save a copy of this overlay into the TEST file set. First click
on ‘TEST’ and then the save icon.
Step 2. Make a Test Print of the Overlay+Spool Data
Before we start changing things we will m ake a printout of the overlay so we know what we
have to begin with. To do that we also need to find a copy of the corresponding spooled file.
Click this icon in the top right to view all output queues with one or m ore spooled files:
Select the output queue APF3812/AFC_INPUT1:
92
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
and open the QPRINT spooled file with form type DEMO. If you cannot find the output queue
and/or the spooled file you can create in this m anner from the green screen with selection:
12. Service functions followed by 1. Create Demo Spool Entry.
Com pare the result window with page 45.
You can decide how to divide the rightm ost of the screen with this drop down. Select the ‘Place
windows vertically’ to view both the original spooled file and the m erged result:
You can also preview the result by pressing the rightm ost icons in the top:
In the next sections we will start to re-design the overlay.
Step 3. Adding Round Corners to the Address Field
The first thing we want to do with our overlay is to m ake round corners on the address field
fram e. To do that we sim ply click the Fram e elem ent and change the Corner setting from
‘Sharp’ to ‘Round’ like below:
InterForm A/S 93
Step 4. Edit Subject Text
Now we will change the appearance of the subject header text (Re. Your new...). W e therefore
click on the elem ent after which we want to insert the new elem ent:
Now we click the tabulator elem ent on the left (
) to add our first elem ent.
Then drag with the left m ouse button pressed around the text to be changed like below:
In the lower right corner of the designer we can see which lines and positions we have
m arked:
Finally we click in the result view to place the distance from the left where this should be
placed. In this case we want to center the text around 4 inches from the left. After this the
tabulator is added. Now we can change the properties for the tabulator. Select the ‘Form atting’
tab:
W e can fine adjust the distance from the left to exactly 4 inches if needed. Also the font is set
to 9906 and we chose to center the text around the 4 inch reference.
94
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 5. Formatting the body text
W e now want to form at the body text to print centered with a proportional spaced font. W e use
the sam e procedure as in the previous section, and we therefore click on the previous
tabulator elem ent we added and click the tabulator elem ent on the left:
Then select the text in the spooled file (Line 18-26, position 8-80) with the left m ouse button
and click in the result view to place the tabulator. Finally we adjust the position and font:
Again we define a safety m argin by stating 80 for m axim um position. W e select a 10 point
Univers font for the text.
Another Tabulator is inserted for the lines 43-64 also covering positions 8-80:
(W hich m eans from ‘Should you have....’ and onwards).
InterForm A/S 95
Step 6. Making Equal Distance Between Column Headers
W e now want to Form at the colum n headers in the m iddle of the page (Model, P-Group...) in
intervals of 1 inch. As we want to adjust the vertical position as well we will use the Remap
W indow elem ent, which look like this:
W e add the rem aps after the last tabulator. Like the tabulator you add a rem ap window by
clicking the elem ent type on the left, drag over the spooled file text in the Input view and finally
clicking the destination in the Result view and finally changing the properties of the elem ent.
First the ‘Product’ header text is rem apped:
W e rem ap a few extra characters to handle if the ‘Product’ text should change a bit in the
future.
W e also rem ap the ‘Model’ text in the spooled file:
W e proceed with colum n header “i-Group”:
- and the “Serial No.” header:
96
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
- and finally the “License Code” header:
Now the relevant area in the Result view should look like this:
The blue m ark is the reference for the last rem ap window.
InterForm A/S 97
Step 7. Making Equal Distance between Item Line Columns
W e now want to perform the sam e actions for the item -line colum ns below the dotted line. As
the horizontal positions of the item line colum ns are identical to the colum n headers, we can
copy the elem ents for the headers and just correct the vertical position (from upper edge) and
the input line num bers.
W e copy the elem ents by clicking the first rem ap, holding down the <Shift> key and then
clicking on the last rem ap inserted above and then use the clipboard options ‘Copy’, click the
Bottom of the elem ent list and then ‘Paste’:
W hile all the elem ents are all m arked (grouped) we can m ove them all sim ply by dragging one
of the grouped elem ents to the new position in the Result View. In this case we drag the
elem ents down 40 pels (1/6 of an inch):
All the m arked rem aps are referring to line 28, but they should refer to all the detail lines (3042) instead. So we need to edit each of the rem aps. This m ight be a problem if this default
setting is activated: (Double click rem ap and tabulator elem ents to update input)
This option is default activated to prevent the user from inadvertently change any rem ap and
or tabulator. So in order to change the rem ap window elem ents you can either disable this
option or start the com ing changes by double clicking the rem ap window elem ent.
Each of the m arked rem ap window elem ents is now changed to select lines 30-42 instead of
line 28. (Notice a double clicked rem ap turns black when editing is allowed). You can change
them by either dragging in the Input view or be typing the new line interval in the Input tab of
each elem ent.
Notice, that we need to disable the ‘Blank input text’ option on the first colum n as this
inform ation will need to rem ain in the spooled file, so a later call to a conditioned overlay can
‘see’ the original spooled file text:
98
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
InterForm A/S 99
Step 8. Defining the Column Headers White on Black
Now we would like to m ake the colum n headers appear with white text on a black background.
First we will need to define a black box, which is created as a fram e with black filling. It is very
im portant that the fram e is defined in a sequence before the text in order to place it as a
background for the text.
W e therefore insert the fram e before the rem apping of the colum n header “Product”. W e click
the tabulator just above in the elem ent list, click the fram e elem ent:
Then drag around the headers in the result view to get a fram e setting like below. W e disable
the grid to gain full control of where to position the fram e by clicking this icon:
W e also m ark the shading for both black/white and color output to be 100% black:
Now the fram e covers the header line:
100
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
W e now insert Ink elem ents to m ake the header lines print in white instead of the norm al
black. First we m ark the fram e elem ent and click the Ink icon:
Then we change the Ink setting to use white for both black/white and color:
W ith this change we can see the header lines again, but now the subsequent lines are also
printed in white. So we add another Ink line after the rem aps of the header lines to print the
rest in black: (Both in black/white and color output)
InterForm A/S 101
Step 9. Defining the Item Line Bars
W e would now like to exploit the Repetition and Pattern options in the overlay elem ent Fram e
to m ake shaded horizontal “bars” to provide a better appearance of the item lines.
W e place this definition before the first rem apping of an item colum n i.e. we click on the Ink
elem ent above in the elem ent list, click the fram e elem ent and drag around the second detail
line and setup the properties like below:
Notice that the height of the fam e is 40 pels (5,150 - 5,110), the thickness is set to 0, and the 5
tim es repetition with a displacem ent, which is double of the line height and the shading.
102
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 10. Defining the 5 Item Coloumn Frames
W e now want to define som e fram es to divide the item lines colum ns in the spool entry:
W e want to place the definition just after the previous definition of the raster fram es. So we
click that fram e elem ent and add a new one: (Dragging around the first coloum n)
Notice, that the thickness suggested will be that one last used (0), so you need to set it to ‘1'.
Also notice the Repeat setting to add fram es around all the colum ns.
Step 11. Defining the logo as a water mark
Instead of a signature we want to place the logo as a waterm ark in the bottom of the page.
For this we use the logo already used in the top of the overlay, but m anipulate it to work as a
waterm ark. W e intend to do the following com pared to the original logo (see page 45):
1.
2.
3.
Reverse it.
Scale it to double size
Grayscale it
W e define the sequence line for the logo just after the other logo by clicking the first logo
elem ent on the elem ent list, clicking the im age elem ent on the left:
- and then clicking in the Result W indow (on the left above
‘Regards’) to insert it. After that we select the B/W im age: DEMOIMAGE and change the
settings to reverse and double size (300 DPI):
InterForm A/S 103
The logo now needs to be dim m ed in order to appear as a waterm ark. For this we change the
ink of the im age. This is the sam e procedure we used for printing the colum n headers white on
black.
W e insert an Ink elem ent just before the im age:
As usual we will need to set the Ink back to black just after the logo:
104
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 12. Defining the Copy Management
W e will now add the text COPY on “page two" copies only. To do this we will first have to
enable and configure the copy management.
This is set in the General folder of the overlay:
W e set the prim ary num ber of copies to 2under the ‘Prim ary tab’:
Step 13. Defining the COPY Symbol as Watermark
The intention of the copy sign is to place this inform ation as a waterm ark in the address field.
W e can therefore place the text elem ent between the two Ink changes we m ade for the logo
waterm ark, and thereby exploit the sam e raster pattern definition.
W e click the first Ink elem ent, then the text elem ent on the right:
Then we click in the Result view in the bottom left of the address fram e. This inserts the text
elem ent as below. W e type the text ‘COPY’:
For the font out line we can select one from the existing list. The largest font currently
assigned to the system is font ID 2103 with point size 24 (see font list on page 433).
W e can now choose to use this font, or we can assign a new font ID a larger font.
If you feel com fortable enough with InterForm 400 ® by now, you should try to assign the large
font, Go to 80. Administration M enu (either in this session by exiting with F3, or by using
another session). Go to section 4. W ork with fonts and select 1.Description of additional
fonts. Now perform the steps described in the Example of defining a resident Printer Font
on page 317). Then select ‘File’ and ‘Reload fonts and colors’ in the designer to update the
font list.
The text elem ent is to be shown only on copy 2. This is set under the ‘Page m anagem ent’ tab:
InterForm A/S 105
You can see that the elem ent is included on the prim ary copy 2 only by the indication ‘C:P2-2'
in the elem ent list.
Step 14. Defining the Relatively Positioned Sub-form
W e want to add a condition to the output so that a special text ´*Note: Special offer!’ is added
to the right of the detail lines containing the PDF Security m odule.
This will use one of the m ore advanced features of the system , generally known as “nested
overlays”. To add the call to the other conditioned overlay we first click ‘Bottom ’ in the elem ent
list to add it as the very last elem ent and the click the ‘conditional elem ent’ on the left:
Now the call to a conditioned overlay is inserted and we can now m ark the spooled file line to
be considered in the Spool view. W e drag over the lines 30-42 with the left m ouse button
pressed to m ark the lines and drag over the positions 8-19 while holding down the right
m ouse button to m ark the positions for the condition. As the com pare text we write ‘PDF
security’ as written in som e lines (case sensitive).
W e want to create another overlay to call, so now we create it by pressing this icon on the
conditioned elem ent:
Then we are prom pted for the nam e of the new overlay and we type OFFER and press Save.
W e can now edit the OFFER overlay by clicking this icon on the conditioned elem ent:
Now we insert a new Text elem ent to the right of the fram e as high as possible (as close to the
PDF security line as possible - we will m ove it up later):
Now we go back to the m ain overlay (IF400DEMO) by pressing the ‘Close overlay’ icon:
Back in the m ain overlay we can now edit the conditioned elem ent to reposition it correctly in
the vertical direction. W e change the vertical placem ent to m inus 0,060:
106
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 17. Cleaning the Overlay for Remaining Text
If you printed the overlay at this stage, you will discover that som e of the original text used for
re-m apping are still visible.
On purpose we have not used “B=Blank after” in all the Rem ap W indow com m ands, as we
have not been sure that we would have needed the text for other purposes.
Instead we have waited to this m om ent, where we will clean all rem aining text by a single
com m and.
W e insert the last elem ent (a tabulator) at the very bottom of the elem ent list:
W e then m ark all the whole spooled file in the Input View and then click as far right as possible
in the Result View:
This will rem ove the horizontal lines and the original spooled file data in colum n 1.
InterForm A/S 107
Step 18. The Result
Now we can preview the result with the icons on the upper right and print the overlay m erged
with the spool entry using 3. M erge Spool entry with overlay in the green screen.
If your printout looks like the illustration on the next page, and you understood what went on,
you can consider yourself quite fam iliar with InterForm 400 ®.
W e have brought you through the heaviest kind of design you will experience with
InterForm 400 ®.
W ith this section our intention was to show you the potential of InterForm 400 ® as a Form s
Managem ent System and we haven't even talked about the Auto Form s Control features yet.
A sim ilar exam ple on Auto Form s Control features are m ade on page 166)
L TROUBLE SHOOTING L
Not the result as the following example?
Q Did you use a PCL5 compatible printer?
Q Are you sure all your entries was correct?.
A Try locating the overlay elements which went wrong and check the corresponding overlay
definition.
108
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Final print of MYDEMO m erged with the sam ple spool entry.(The illustration is a screenshot of
the InterForm 400 ® PCL viewer function:)
InterForm A/S 109
Example of Advanced use of Sub-overlays (Random text lines)
A very strong feature of InterForm 400 ®, is the ability to handle spool entries with random ly
positioned text lines so each line gets an individual form atting. The general description on
using sub-overlays are described on page 84, ?=If..then.
The following is an exam ple of a print job consisting of a random num ber of Item groups, each
containing a random num ber of Item lines. The Item groups will furtherm ore appear in random
line positions, and there will be a footer appearing in a random line position. You can use the
APF3812/APFEDTPRT com m and to change a spooled file to contain the sam e.
Page 1:
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+
1
2
Testing remap of item lines with random line positions
3
4
5
ITEM Fish:
6
Shark
7
Flounder
8
Herring
9
Salmon
10
11
12
ITEM Pets:
13
Cat
14
Dog
15
Chinchilla
16
Parrot
17
Hamster
18
ITEM Riding animals:
19
Horse
20
Camel
21
Elephant
22
23
This should be a fixed footer
Page 2:
*....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+
1
2
Testing remap of item lines with random line positions
3
4
5
6
ITEM Cars:
7
Rover
8
Porsche
9
Volvo
10
Mercedes
11
Opel
12
Audi
13
14
ITEM Aeroplanes:
15
Ellehammer
16
Boing
17
MIG
18
19
This should be a fixed footer
(Line num bers are not part of the spool entry)
W e want to form at this print job as follows:
1.
The text ITEM should be placed as a header of each item group with a 16 point font.
2.
The Item group nam es (Fish, Pets etc), should be m oved down and placed as subheaders below the header (ITEM), and should be printed with a 12 point font.
3.
The item s should be printed just below the item group nam e, with a 10 point font.
4.
The footer should be placed in a fixed position with Courier 10.
110
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Creating the Main overlay:
This overlay will be used to call the different sub-overlays, which will perform the actual
form atting of the spooled file:
W e start the graphical designer and press this icon to create a new overlay:
Now we select ‘File’ and ‘Save as’ and save it in our own file set as ‘M AIN’.
W e select the spooled file as shown above with this icon:
(You can create such a spooled file by editing another spooled file with the com m and
APF3812/APFEDTPRT).
Calling the first conditioned overlay
W e can now start the design. W e press this icon to add a call to a conditioned overlay:
This overlay is to be called for each ITEM group, so we scan the lines 1-70 and positions 1114 for the text ‘ITEM’. W e m ark the lines in the Input View while holding down the left m ouse
key and m ark the positions while holding down the right m ouse key. W e want to transfer all the
spooled file lines (i.e. the com plete group) until the next condition (whenever that is), so we
activate ‘Until another is true’:
W e want to add extra space for the large Group header, so the rest of the spooled file should
be pushed 1/6 of an inch down. That is set under the ‘Form atting’ tab:
Next we click the new icon (in the Input tab) on this elem ent to create the SUB1 overlay and
then the pencil icon to edit the SUB1 overlay:
In the Spool View we click the ‘Conditional’ tab to view the lines ‘seen’ by the conditioned
overlay:
InterForm A/S 111
W e insert a fram e elem ent, select the ‘ITEM’ text in the Spool/Conditional tab and click high up
on the Result view 2 inches from the left:
Next we rem ap the Item group (e.g. Fish:) to be printed below the ITEM text:
(W e extended the suboverlay with 40 pels earlier and now we have used them for this extra
line.)
The final thing m issing in this conditioned overlay is the rem apping of the (m any?) Item lines.
This is an unknown num ber, so we need to rem ap as m any lines as it possibly can be. The
width of the item is also unknown. W e handle up to position 70 and line 70 here:
Now we are done with this conditioned overlay and click close to return to the m ain overlay:
112
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Calling the conditioned, fixed overlay
W e now insert another conditional elem ent in the m ain overlay to handle the fixed footer text.
The footer text is found in a variable line, but should be printed in a fixed position in the final
output.
W e want to scan line 1-70 for the text ‘This’ in position 11-14. W e do that as before by adding
the conditioned elem ent and drag around in the Input View with the m ouse: Left m ouse key
pressed to select the lines and right m ouse key to select the positions for the condition. W e
also chose to transfer 1 line of spooled file data as you can see in the bottom :
Usually we want the conditioned overlay to be placed relatively to the found condition, but not
in this case, so we need to specify a fixed (absolute) vertical position under the ‘Form atting’
tab:
W e now click the ‘Input’ teb to create the new conditioned overlay with this icon:
W e save the new overlay as: SUB2
W e now click the pencil icon to edit the new, conditioned overlay:
W e click the ‘Conditional’ tab in the Spool View and insert a rem ap window elem ent to handle
the single line of input. W e drag (with left m ouse key pressed) over the ‘This should.......’ and
then click in the Result view to place the rem apped text:
InterForm A/S 113
W e rem ap line 1, positions 1-70 and place the result left adjusted 7 inches from the top and 1
inch from the left.
Now we close the conditioned overlay to get back to the m ain overlay.
114
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The result
Below is the result when the spool entry is m erged with the overlay M AIN. The result is not
intended to be a graphical wonder in any way, but is m erely intended to dem onstrate the
flexibility of this feature.
Page 1:
InterForm A/S 115
Page 2:
116
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Main Menu Local Environment Setup
2. Test Print Overlay
W ith option 2 on the m ain m enu you are able to m ake a test print of an overlay.
The choice of overlay is m ade in this display:
Test Print Overlay
APF720D
This program prints a test version of a given overlay. No data is merged with
it.
Overlay name
__________
Page control
_
Blank = all
1 = overlay
2 = overlay
9 = overlay
Code page
Form type
Copies
Drawer / papertype
*SYSVAL
*STD______
__1
*PRINTER
*SYSVAL, Number
definitions of the overlay
printed as page 1
printed as page 2 and following
printed as last page
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *OVERLAY, 1-9, 20-39, 251-255)
F3=Exit
F4=List overlays
Overlay Nam e Nam e of an overlay in the file-set you have open. F4 will prom pt for overlay
nam es.
Page Control: Inserting 1, 2 or 9 is used if Page Control is used, and you want to test the
definitions which are used on specific pages only.
Code page:
If the system is used by m ultiple countries, the national characters in the
overlays will get printed differently in each country. This option will allow the
default code page of the central com puter to be overruled.
Form type:
The Form type of the resulting printout. Default *STD
Copies:
1-255
Draw er:
Overwrite the global drawer settings of the overlay.
InterForm A/S 117
3. Merge Spool Entry with Overlay
W ith option 3 on the m ain m enu you are able to create a printout in which a spool-entry is
m erged with an overlay and placed in the default output queue for your session.
Merge Spooled File with Overlay
Overlay name
or Overlay Selector
Primary/Secondary set
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
Code page
Unicode output
Merge overprint lines
Form type
Copies
Drawer / Papertype
__________
________
_
Labels / Continuous
Media type
Print mode
1
1
1
__________
__________
______
__________
______
______
*INPUT
*NO_
A4______
_1
*PRINTER
APF730D
1=Primary 2=Secondary
Number, *ONLY, *LAST
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *INPUT, *OVERLAY, 1-256, Name)
1 = Seperate labels 2 = Continuous
1=Termo transfer 2=Termo media
1=Tear off 2=Rewind 3=Peel off 4=Cutter
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue
__________
Library
__________
F3=Exit
Overlay Name :
Primary/
Secondary Set:
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Nam e of an overlay in the file-set you have open. F4 will prom pt for
overlay nam es.
If you have defined Copy M anagement for the overlay (see page 70
and 62) you can test if you have m ade the correct selection of overlay
elem ents, by printing the overlay elem ents for one of the two sets
only. If this field is left blank (default) the system will as default pick
the Primary set.
Overlay Selector:
If you have defined an Overlay Selector you can test if it is able to
pick the correct overlay. In this case Overlay Nam e above m ust be
blank. (refer to section W orking with Overlay selectors page 123)
Spooled File:
Spooled file attributes can be entered here.
There is an alternative to typing all the inform ation m anually. If you type the nam e of an output
queue in the bottom of the screen and press Enter, you can retrieve the inform ation about the
spool entry from a view of the selected output queue by selecting with option 1:
118
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with Output Queue
Queue:
PRTHP3
Library:
QUSRSYS
Type options, press Enter
1=Select 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Release 8=attributes
Opt
1
_
File
User
User Data
Sts
Pages
QPRINT
QPRINT
INTERFORM
INTERFORM
INVOICE
PROFIT
RDY
RDY
1
5
Copies
1
1
Form Type
*STD
*STD
Pty
5
5
Parameters for option 2
===> __________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F11=View 2
F12=Previous
F21=Description
F24=More keys
Code page:
If the system is used by m ultiple countries, national characters m ay
get printed differently in each country if the code page is not specified
in the spool entry. This option will allow the code page of spool entry,
to be overruled. I this field is left blank and the spool file does not
specify a explicit code page, the system value will be used.
M erge overprint lines: Som e spooled files will not react as expected when m erging with an
overlay. This is the case when spooled files use overprinting i.e.
printing two lines on one e.g. for printing in bold - or if the output fields
are defined in the wrong order in the printer file.
Enable this feature and the overprinted spooled file lines are printed
as one m eaning e.g. that bold created in this m anner will be ignored.If
you press F19-DSPPFM in the green screen designer and you see
'0's in the left side of the screen, then this option should m ost
probably be activated.
Form type:
The Form type of the resulting printout. Default *STD
Copies:
1-255
Draw er:
Overwrite the drawer settings of the overlay global settings.
NOTE: Labels/Continuous, m edia type and print m ode are all active for ZPL (Zebra) output
only.
Labels / Continuous:
This is the feed control on the printer. Select 1=Labels if the m edia
contains of separate labels. select 2=Continuous if the m edia is not
separated into labels. Use 3=W eblabel and 4=Marklabel for other
ways to m ark the labels on the m edia. In case of 2=Continuous you
would probably select 4=Cut for the print mode param eter.
M edia type:
Select 1=Termo transfer if you use a non heat sensitive m edia
otherwise use option 2=Transfer media.
Print mode:
1=Tear off m ean that you will m anually tear of the labels. 2=Rew ind
can be used for rewinding all printed labels onto another roll. This
requires special hardware installed.
InterForm A/S 119
3= Peel off will print only one label at a tim e waiting for the current
label to be peeled off. (This also requires additional hardware).
4=Cut (requires hardware cutter) norm ally cuts the m edia for each
print job unless you use 2=Continuous - then 4=Cut will cut out each
label.
Output Queue:
The nam e of the output queue where the spool entry to be m erged is
placed
Library:
The library of the above output queue. If left blank the library list will
be used.
J TIP J
After a merge with an overlay the spool attributes are saved in this screen for future test prints
until the InterForm400 ® menus are left. As long as these information are kept, you will be able
to view the contents of the spool entry directly by pressing F14, F18 or F19 from within the
design menu
8. Select File set
A file set consists of related files defining overlays and report com positions.
If the system adm inistrator has granted you rights to access m ore than one file set your m ain
m enu will include the option 8. Select file-set.
W hen you choose option 8 on the m ain m enu you get the following screen:
Overview overlay and report file sets
Position to . . . . . .
APF235D
File set
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
_
_
File-ID
TEST
SAMPLE
Description
Testing InterForm 400 possibilities
Sample overlay
F3=Exit
You select the file set you wish to use by typing 1 in one of the lines.
Once you press Enter, the system returns to the m ain m enu. The selected file set now
appears in the upper right corner of the main menu.
If you have access to m ore than one file set, then the above screen will be presented to you
already when you enter the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu, if you enter with the com m and,
APF3812/APFM ENU KARTSET(*SELECT).
120
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
9. Select Output Queue and Printer Type
W hen you enter the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu, the system is connected with the output queue
which has been specified as the user output queue in your user profile for the InterForm 400 ®
system (refer to the page 298 and 309).
If you choose option 9 on the m ain m enu you will be allowed to change the nam e of the
output queue to be used for test printouts from the InterForm 400 ® system .
Select output queue
Enter the name of an output queue to be used for InterForm400-output.
Output queue PRTXXX______
Library
QUSRSYS_____
Also select the type of printer to be used.
Printer type . . .
HP4D
HP4, HP4D, HP4_PJL, HP4D_PJL
HP5C, HP4500, HP4500D,
ZEBRA203, ZEBRA300, QLZPL203,
IPL203, IPL300
W hen the display appears, it already contains the nam e of the output queue which is currently
active.
Output queue: Specify the nam e of the output queue you wish to use tem porarily.
Library:
Specify the library of the queue, or leave blank to search library list.
Printer type:
If users are allowed to override standard printer type (refer to 2. Set default
output queue and printer type page 298), you can select printer type. Refer
to page 421 For m ore inform ation.
Once you press Enter the system returns to the m ain m enu, and the new output queue,
Printer type will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
(For m ore inform ation on selection of printers refer to page 298 and page 421)
10. Work with actual Output Queue
If you choose option 10 on the m ain m enu you will work with the output queue which is
currently active for output from the InterForm 400 ® system . This is convenient when operating
with different form s types which causes the spool queue to generate m essages requesting
your reply.
This function activates the com m and APFW RKOUTQ and adds your default InterForm 400 ®
output queue to the com m and. This screen, however, has extended features com pared to the
usual W RKOUTQ screen. If you have installed the PCL Viewer, Sw iftview, you can e.g. use
option 5=display to view spool entries containing PCL data (datatype *ASCII). Refer to
Appendix L for m ore inform ation on the PCL Viewer.
The following com m and can be entered from outside InterForm 400 ®.
InterForm A/S 121
APF3812/APFWRKOUTQ
You can also see the num ber of pages that a m erged spooled file consists of. If you have used
a PJL printer type for the m erge in InterForm 400, you can even change the page range of the
m erged spooled file with option 2 - change spooled file.
Option '1' on the APFW RKOUTQ com m and has been extended com pared to the OS400
W RKOUTQ. In APFW RKOUTQ you can also chose to m erge a selected spooled file into a
PDF file and send it as an e-m ail.
J TIP J
If you need an System i command line, and you do not have a second session, and you do
not want to exit the InterForm400 ® menu, you can use this option to obtain a command line.
122
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Working with Overlay Selectors
An Overlay Selector will allow you to m ake conditioned overlay selections on certain
character com binations in the print data of the spool entry. The overlay selector decides what
overlay to m erge with for each page of the m erged spool file.
J TIP J
It is not necessary to define an AFC definition to let the Overlay Selector take effect. An
overlay selector can be used when making an interactive merge using option 3. Merge Spool
Entry with Overlay on the main menu.
W hen selecting option 4. W orking with Overlay Selectors on the m ain m enu the following
screen appears:
Work with Overlay selectors
AFC300D
Start with . . . __________ __________
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
Description
Selector
File-set
(No overlay selectors)
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
End
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new Overlay Selector:
Add Overlay selectors
AFC300D
Selector name . . . ________
Description . . . . __________________________________________________
File set . . . . . __________
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
End
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 123
Selector Name:
The nam e you will be referring to in the AFC function 1. M erge w ith
overlay in Functions attached to output queues (see page 145),
and when m aking interactive m erge using option 3. M erge spool
entry with overlay (page 118)
Description:
For your inform ation.
File set:
The file set which the overlay selector should be restricted to select
overlays from .
Selection Criteria Entries
Add Overlay selectors
Selector name . .
Description . . .
File-set . . . .
Seqnbr.
Overlay
AFC300D
. INTERMA_
. Selection for INVOICE_____________________________
. TEST
name
Overlay description
Seqnbr
______
F12=Cancel
You can now enter the specific requirem ents your spool entry data should m eet for selecting a
certain overlay. You can have several sequence lines checking on m any different types of
spool entries under the sam e selector definition, or you can m ake selectors for each print job
type.
If the conditions for a sequence line are true for a given page of the spool entry being checked,
the rest of the sequence lines will be ignored.
W hen entering a sequence line you will get the following screen:
124
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Add Overlay selectors
Selector name . .
Description . . .
File-set . . . .
Seqnbr.
Overlay
Seqnbr
1,0
AFC300D
. INTERMA_
. Selection for INVOICE____________________________
. TEST______
name
Overlay description
Overlay name
INV_FRONT_
AND/OR Print line
___
AND_
__1
____
___
____
___
____
___
____
___
Position
___ - ___
__1 - __7
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper Compare value
PAGE *FIRST__________________________
__EQ INVOICE__________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
Overlay name:
The nam e of the overlay to call in the file-set defined in the entry
screen for the Overlay Selector (page 123)
AND/OR:
Relate this statem ent to the previous statem ent
Print Line:
The print line in the spool entry to search
Position:
The colum n interval to search
Oper.
The operator relating to the com pare value
The operators used are standard operators known from e.g.
Query/400:
EQ
Equal to com pare value
NE
Not equal to com pare value
LT
Less than com pare value
LE
Less than or equal to com pare value
GT
Greater than com pare value
GE
Greater than or equal to com pare value
PAGE Select only for certain pages. This can be used for spooled
files with unknown contents.
Com pare Value:
The character string or num eric value which the operator should be
com pared to. If the operator is PAGE you can use these values:
*FIRST
*LAST
*ODD
*EVEN
Only
Only
Only
Only
for
for
for
for
the first page of the spooled file.
the last page of the spooled file.
odd page num bers
even page num bers
InterForm A/S 125
Getting Familiar with Overlay Selectors
The following m akes use of the dem o spool entry delivered with InterForm 400 ®. You can print
this from the m enu 12. Service Functions.
Our intention is to m ake a selector which prints all letters of the spool entry regarding the
InterForm 400 modules with the overlay IF400DEM O delivered with this system . For pages
regarding InterForm we want to use the m odified version M YDEM O which was created in
section Getting Familiar w ith Overlays.
Step 1. Placing overlays in One File set
As one selector is lim ited to operate with overlays from the sam e file set, we will first m ake a
copy of the overlay IF400DEM O from fileset SAM PLE into file set TEST. First m ake sure you
are standing in file set TEST (check upper right corner). If not, you should change file set with
option 8 on the m ain m enu.
Enter option 1. Design Overlays on the m ain m enu
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
IF400DEMO_____
Overlay name
F3=Exit
F4=List overlays
F12=Cancel
Here we can type in the sam e nam e as the overlay in file set SAMPLE. There will be no
conflict of names, as they are located in separate file sets.
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
Overlay name
IF400DEMO
Overlay text
Line spacing
Rotation
Extra left margin
positions
Maximum number of
print positions
Extra blank lines
on top
Font
Extended page def.
Drawer / Papertype
Paper Size
Pages per side
Copy management
Duplex print
Duplex margin
Back page overlay
______________________________
040___
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
000___
(*INPUT, 0, 90, 180, 270)
_0
(0-99)
378
(1-378)
_0
(0-99)
0066_
*INPUT, fontnumber
F4=List
N
(Y N)
*PRINTER (*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-255, Name)
F4=List
0
F4=List
__
N
(Y N)
N
(N=no S=short edge margin L=long edge margin)
__0
in 1/240 of an inch (1-720)
__________ Code for placement _ (B=back page F=front)
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F13=Set view/print parameters
F9=Copy from another overlay
F14=PCL-view
F12=Cancel
Since we are actually creating a new overlay we can use F9 to copy from another overlay/file
set:
126
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Name of overlay to copy from
F3=Exit
APF300D
__________
F9 = copy from another file-set F12=Cancel
F4=Prompt
W e know that the IF400DEM O overlay is in another file set so we have to press F9 to get a list
of file sets to choose from .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
...............................................
:
Overview InterForm 400 file-sets
:
: 1=Select
:
: 1 SAMPLE
InterForm 400 Samples
:
: _ TEST
Test file-set
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: F12=Cancel
:
:.............................................:
F9 = copy from another file-set F12=Cancel
W e select file-set SAM PLE and press Enter:
...............................................
:
Overview overlays
:
: Start with:
:
: 1=Select
:
: 1 IF400DEMO
InterForm400 demo
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
: F12=Cancel
:
:.............................................:
Now we select overlay IF400DEM O and press Enter:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
Overlay name
IF400DEMO
Overlay text
Line spacing
Rotation
Extra left margin
positions
Maximum number of
print positions
Extra blank lines
on top
Font
Extended page def.
Drawer / Papertype
Paper Size
Pages per side
Copy management
InterForm 400 Demo Overlay____
_40___
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
000___
(000 090 180 270)
_8
(0-99)
378
(1-378)
_4
_111_
N
*PRINTER
0
__
N
(0-99)
*INPUT, fontnumber
F4=List
(Y N)
(*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-255, Name)
F4=List
F4=List
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F11=Delete this overlay
F13= Set view/print parameters
F14=PCL-view
F12=Cancel
W e have now m ade a copy of the IF400DEMO overlay from file-set SAMPLE and stored it by
the sam e nam e in file-set TEST. W e can now exit to the design m enu with F3.
InterForm A/S 127
Step 2. Examining Spool Entry Selection Criteria
Before we create the overlay selector we need to exam ine the spool entry in order to find
som ething that distinct the pages.
Press F13= Set view/print parameter. Enter the overlay nam e and go to the bottom of the
screen to enter the Output Queue where the spool file resides. Find the DEMO spool entry in
the output queue and select it with option 1. Press Enter.
Select Parameters for view / print
Overlay name
IF400DEMO_
or Overlay Selector
Primary/Secondary set
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
Code page
Unicode output
Merge overprint lines
Form type
Copies
Drawer / Papertype
________
_
__________
__________
______
__________
_______
_______
*INPUT
*NO_
*STD______
__1
*PRINTER
1=Primary
APF730D
2=Secondary
Number, *ONLY, *LAST
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *INPUT, *OVERLAY, 1-256, Name)
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue . . . . AFC_INPUT1_
Library . . . . .
APF3812___
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
In the design screen F18=DSPSPLF will appear and the contents of the spool file can now be
viewed directly from the design screen.
By typing +1 and pressing Enter a few tim es we find the word “m odules.” in line 15 position 34
to 41 on all letters regarding the m odules.
DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE
File . . . . . : QPRINT
Page/Line 1/15
Function . . . . +1
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
---------------------------------Congratulations with your new InterForm400 module(s).
You are now able to fully exploit the benifits of combining
InterForm400 with one or more of the powerful modules to impress
your customers and ease the workflow in your organisation.
The following license code(s) will be needed to activate the
module(s) permanently to your System(s):
Product
Model
i-Group
Serial No.
License Code
---------------------------------------------------------------Interword400
510
i300
44A2971
81 20 01 3A
PDF security
520
i100
44A9032
3F 78 66 99
Should you have any questions regarding the modules, you are
welcome to contact our technical support via:
[email protected]
Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on:
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
By typing P+1 (page forward) and pressing Enter a few tim es we find that the text ”modules.”
is found in line 15 position 34 to 41 on all pages regarding InterForm 400 ®.
128
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
DISPLAY SPOOL FILE
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Page/Line 3/15
Function . . . .
P+1
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
---------------------------------Congratulations with your new InterForm400 module(s).
You are now able to fully exploit the benifits of combining
InterForm400 with one or more of the powerful modules to impress
your customers and ease the workflow in your organisation.
The following license code(s) will be needed to activate the
module(s) permanently to your System(s):
Product
Model
i-Group
Serial No.
License Code
---------------------------------------------------------------InterWord400
170
i050
4431043
A1 23 11 95
InterFax
270
i100
4420911
FA C0 03 99
Should you have any questions regarding the modules, you are
welcome to contact our technical support via:
[email protected]
Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on:
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
W e are now ready to m ake a selector which picks the correct overlay according to the above
conclusion.
Step 3. Entering the Selection Criterias in the Selector
W e select option 4 on the m ain m enu and press F6 to add a new selector:
Add Overlay selectors
AFC300D
Selector name . . . MYSELECT
Description . . . . Selection for Document and modules letters______
File-set . . . . . TEST_____
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
End
F12=Cancel
W e define the nam e M YSELECT which should be placed in file-set TEST and we press Enter
InterForm A/S 129
Add Overlay selectors
Selector name . .
Description . . .
File-set . . . .
Seqnbr.
Overlay
Seqnbr
1,0
AFC300D
. MYSELECT
. Selection for Document and modules letters______
. TEST______
name
Overlay description
Overlay name
IF400DEMO_
AND/OR Print line
_15
____
___
____
___
____
___
____
___
____
___
Position
_34 - _41
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper Compare value
EQ__ modules.________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
W e enter a new sequence line by typing 1 followed by Field Exit, and we type in the overlay
nam e IF400DEM O which we want to use if the conditions stated in this sequence line are true.
W e now define that if we in Print line 15 position 21 to 28 has a text string which equals
“modules.” (case sensitive). the condition is true.
W e press Enter to save this sequence line and enter sequence line 2.
Add Overlay selectors
AFC300D
Selector name . . . MYSELECT
Description . . . . Selection for Document and modules letters______
File-set . . . . . TEST______
Seqnbr.
Overlay name
Overlay description
0001
IF400DEMO
Demo overlay for InterForm 400
Seqnbr
2,0
Overlay name
MYDEMO____
AND/OR Print line
_15
____
___
____
___
____
___
____
___
____
___
Position
_34 - _41
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper Compare value
EQ__ Document________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
In this we just define that if we have Document in line 15 position 34 to 41 we will choose the
overlay M YDEM O.
W e press Enter and press F3 to leave the Overlay Selector m enus.
130
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 4. Testing the Selector
W e now enter m enu point 3. M erge Spool Data with Overlay on the m ain m enu.
Merge Spooled File with Overlay
Overlay name
or Overlay Selector
Primary/Secondary set
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
Code page
Unicode output
Merge overprint lines
Form type
Copies
Drawer / Papertype
APF730D
__________
MYSELECT
_
1=Primary, 2=Secondary
DSP010700_
PETER_____
073534
QPRINT____
0005_
_______
*INPUT
*NO_
*STD______
__1
*PRINTER
(no. / *ONLY / *LAST)
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *INPUT, *OVERLAY, 1-256, Name)
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue . . . .
Library . . . . .
F3=Exit
__________
__________
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
W e use the sam e procedure as in Getting Fam iliar W ith Overlays, but instead of stating an
overlay, we enter our selector M YSELECT.
W e notice that page 1, 2 and 4 uses overlay IF400DEM O (see page 45), and page 3 uses
overlay M YDEM O (see page 109).
The selector can also be used in an Auto Form s Control definition. You can try the selector in
the section Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control later.
InterForm A/S 131
General Description of Auto Forms Control Subsystem
Auto Form s Control (AFC) is a unique facility of the InterForm 400 ® system , which enables you
to define autom atic control of m erging spool entries with overlays without the need of any
program m ing.
Auto Form s Control is m onitoring data queues of defined output queues, looking for spool files
to becom e ready. W hen a spool file becom es ready, a dataqueue entry will be created which
wakes up the AFC job associated with the specific output queue.. A copy of the spool file will
be created and processed according to the AFC entries m ade for the m onitored output queue.
Auto Form s Control takes *SCS spool files from the spool system , adds an electronic form and
m anipulates the spool data accordingly and sends the resulting spool file (containing PCL
code) back to the spool system .
W hen installing InterForm 400 ®, Auto Form s Control is also autom atically installed.
During the installation of Auto Form s Control the following objects will be created on the
system :
•
•
Sub-system description:
User profile:
•
Job description:
APF3812/AUTO_FORM
AFCOPER PASSWORD(*NONE)
SPCAUT(*SPLCTL)
APF3812/AUTO_FORM
Note that if you want to m ake use of the feature of InterForm 400 ® to transform AFPDS spool
entries into *USERASCII, and these AFP jobs are using resource libraries not listed in the
system library list, then the above job description m ust be changed in order to include these
libraries in the library list.
J TIP J
If you alternatively use the AFPDS spooled files directly in InterForm400 only the text visible
via DSPSPLF will be used, but all functions in InterForm400 are supported.
The setup of the prim ary functions of Auto Form s Control is m anaged by selecting m enu
option 5 on the m ain m enu. The sam e m enu can be entered directly by the com m and:
APF3812/AFCADM
The m enu appears like this:
132
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
InterForm400
-
Auto Forms Control
Subsystem....: AUTO_FORM
Library...:
APF3812
System.......:
Workstn ID...:
CCSID ....:
User ID......:
INTER01
QPADEV0003
00037
PETER
Select one of the following options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Functions attached to Output Queues
Forms Type Table
Split Definitions
Finishing Definitions
Sort Definitions
PDF bookmark definitions
User output queue
Work with E-mail senders
10. Start AUTO_FORM subsystem
11. End AUTO_FORM subsystem
12. Work with active subsystem AUTO_FORM
Option:
F3=Exit
__
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
Beside the above definitions the function Overlay Selector can be used within the AFC
definitions. The overlay selector is used when the spool data should be the “trigger” for the
m erge in AFC. This function is found as option 4 in the m ain m enu.
10. Start AUTO_FORM subsystem
Auto Form s Control is running as an ordinary System i subsystem , and therefore has to be
started as such. It is a good idea to let the subsystem start autom atically at IPL. This is done
by inserting the following com m ands in your startup program :
STRSBS SBSD(APF3812/AUTO_FORM)
MONMSG CPF0000
Of course, you can always start the sub-system m anually, by the com m and:
STRSBS APF3812/AUTO_FORM
G NOTE G
If you have decided to nam e the Auto_form subsystem you need of course to change the
com m ands above accordingly. (Refer to page 37 for details of how to define the change in
InterForm 400.)
11. End AUTO_FORM subsystem
Before applying a new license code or m aking upgrades to the AUTO_FORM sub-system , this
should be ended.
This can be done in the m enu or by the com m and (check first if jobs are currently being
processed):
ENDSBS SBS(AUTO_FORM) OPTION(*IMMED)
InterForm A/S 133
12. Work with Active Subsystem AUTO_FORM
This m enu item is a shortcut to the com m and:
WRKACTJOB SBS(AUTO_FORM)
134
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Overview of AFC Main Definitions
The default output queue
for AFC to send the
processed print.
“OUTPUT OUTPUT
QUEUE”
Name of output queue
AFC is monitoring for
incoming spool files.
“INPUT QUEUE”
Add Auto Forms Control Definition
Output queue . . . . . . . . . ___________
Library . . . . . . . . . . ___________
Type choices and
Description .
Autostart job
Code page . .
then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
. . . . . . . _____________________________________________
. . . . . . .
_
(Y N)
. . . . . . . ________
Number, *SYSVAL
Default output output queue and printer type
Output queue . . . . . . . . ___________
Library . . . . . . . . .
___________
InterForm 400 printer type . ________
Optional template AFC-definition to be executed after this definition
Template AFC-definition:
Output queue . . . . . . . __________
Library . . . . . . . . __________
F3=Exit
F10=Additional parameters
Name of other AFC
defintion which functions
also should be used for
this AFC defintion.
“TEM PLATE”
F12=Cancel
“AFC Functions” for
the monitored “INPUT
QUEUE”, based on the
spool file selection criteria. (Attributes)
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue: _________
Seqnbr F
0001 1
0002
6
__________
Form type Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
DEMO
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
1.0
1
F3=Exit
Library:
AFC305D
Attributtes of input file for which to
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
Program UserData
execute the function
DEMO______
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 135
The “INPUT QUEUE” m entioned above is a created output queue without a device attached.
This enables InterForm 400 ® to pick up the spool files, without the printer writer is processing
the spool file.
AFC usually operates with both an “INPUT QUEUE” and the standard defined “OUTPUT
QUEUE” with a printer attached, but AFC can operate on one output queue shared with a
printer. For m ore about this feature refer to page 37 and page 171.
Spooled file selection criteria
The spooled file attributes listed above can be used for conditioning the specific function.
On the screen above the function 1=Merge with overlay is conditioned so that it is only
executed for spooled files which has form type=’DEMO’. Any blank fields for this criteria are
ignored.
The conditioned attributes are:
Form type
This is the FORMTYPE attribute of the incom ing spooled file. Rem em ber, that the
com parison is case sensitive!
Save attribute
This is com pared to the SAVE attribute. If you set ‘Save attribute’ to ‘Y’, then the
function will only execute if the SAVE attribute is ‘*YES’. You can e.g. use this to do a
conditional delete of the spooled file after processing: Add a 6=Delete spooled file
which is conditioned on this field to be ‘N’.
Job nam e
The job nam e that created the spooled file.
Spooled file nam e
The nam e of the spooled file.
Device file and Library
The device file (or rather printer file) used when the spooled file was created. You can
use the library if you e.g. want Auto Form s Control to react differently for spooled files
created from a test library.
Program that opened the file
The program that created the spooled file. Here you can also use the library as an
additional condition.
User-specified data
The user data (USRDTA) spooled file attribute. This is also case sensitive as the form
type.
136
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Auto Forms Control Definitions
W hen selecting option 1. Functions Attached to Output Queues in the m enu 5. W ork with
Auto Forms Control on the m ain m enu we get this screen:
Work with Auto Forms Control output queues
AFC300D
Start with . . . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
8=Start AFC-job
12=Work with output queue
13=Enter step by step mode
Opt
__
Outq
AFC_INPUT1
Library
APF3812
Description
Job for sample printout
9=End AFC-job
Status
*ACTIVE
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
F15=Subset
The first tim e this screen is entered only the Sample queue AFC_INPUT1 will exist (see the
Getting Started section page 26). Press F6 to create a new AFC definition. W hen created
press F5 to update the screen above.
W ith F15=Subset you can include only output queues in a specific library or only output
queues where the description contains a certain text.
Under status you can see if the relevant server job is running (*ACTIVE) or not.
Som e of the options are:
8=Start AFC-job
Starts the server job if not already started. In this m anner you can
start individual jobs without having to restart the whole AUTO_FORM
subsystem . You can also use the com m and APF3812/STRAFCJOB
to do the sam e.
9=End AFC-job
Ends the server job m onitoring the selected output queue. You can
also use the com m and APF3812/ENDAFCJOB to do the sam e.
12=W ork with output queue
Use this option to do a W RKOUTQ on this queue. Note however that
the com m and behind this option is APF3812/APFW RKOUTQ offering
you m ore functionality than the OS400 W RKOUTQ. Refer to page
471 for m ore inform ation of this com m and.
13=Enter step by step mode
If you want to test the functionality of the AFC definitions for an output
queue you can use this option. After running this option you will get a
break m essage in the current job and the AFC job will stop and wait
for an answer for each sequence line when a spooled file arrives. The
m essage will look like this:
InterForm A/S 137
Display Messages
Queue . . . . . :
Library . . . :
Severity . . . :
System:
Program . . . . :
Library . . . :
Delivery . . . :
QPADEV0009
QSYS
00
INTER03
*DSPMSG
*BREAK
Type reply (if required), press Enter.
AFC-job AFC_INPUT1/AFCOPER/203661 is ready to continue with seqnbr 1 from
AFC-queue AFC_INPUT1. (G *ENDDBG)
Reply . . .
___________________________________________________________
Bottom
F3=Exit
F13=Remove all
F11=Remove a message
F16=Remove all except unanswered
F12=Cancel
F24=More keys
You can now check the output queue and the spooled files generated so far before you
answer the m essage with ‘G’ (for Go) and let the AFC job execute this single sequence line.
W hen you tested enough and what the job to return to norm al execution you answer the
m essage with *ENDDBG (end debug) or end and restart the AFC job.
J TIP J
If you want to check up on what the AFC job have done you can change the AFC job to log
the CL commands: CHGJOB JOB(job number/AFCOPER/job name) LOGCLPGM(*YES)
This will tell InterForm400 not to remove any messages from the joblog thus giving you much
more information of what it have done - not just logging CL commands..
Entering queue and job names to an AFC definition
W hen changing or adding an AFC definition, the entry screen below will be shown.
Update Auto Forms Control Definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
AFC302D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812___
Type choices and then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
Description . . . . . . . . Job for sample printout_____________________
Autostart job . . . . . . . Y
(Y N)
Code page . . . . . . . . . *SYSVAL
Number, *SYSVAL
F4=List
When to use code page . . *SPLFATR
*SPLFATR, *ALWAYS
Default output
Output queue .
Library . .
Printer type .
output queue and printer type
. . . . . . . AFC_OUT1__
. . . . . . .
APF3812___
. . . . . . . HP4_______
Optional template AFC-definition to be executed after this definition
Template AFC-definition:
Output queue . . . . . . . . __________
Library . . . . . . . . .
__________
F3=Exit
138
F4=Prompt
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
F10=Additional parameters
F12=Cancel
Output Queue:
Nam e of output queue, AFC should be m onitoring for incom ing spool
files (INPUT QUEUE). The output queue you intend to use for AFC
functions should not have a printer device attached. The reason for
this is that the AFC sub system only works on spool entries that gets
the status *RDY in the queue. If the queue also had a printer device
attached, you could risk that the jobs would be printed before the AFC
system m anaged to com plete its autom atic functions. (See Getting
Fam iliar with AFC, Exam ple 2 for an alternative way of setting up
AFC)
Library:
Insert library or leave blank to search library list.
Description:
For your own inform ation.
Auto Start:
If Y is entered the AFC functions for this queue will be started
autom atically after IPL or when the subsystem AUTO_FORM is
started.
If N is entered the subsystem job has to be started m anually.
Code page:
This defines if a specific code page should be forced for the spool
entries processed by this AFC definition. *SYSVAL m eans that the
default code page specified for the system will be used, unless a
specific code page is defined as attribute for the spool file.
W hen to use code page
W ith *SPLATR the code page specified above is usually used unless the incom ing spooled file has a specific code page. If so then
the spooled file code page is used instead.
W ith *ALWAYS the code page above is ALW AYS used for e.g.
m erges independently of the code page setting of the original spooled
file.
Default Output Output Queue and Printer Type
Output Queue/
Library:
A default output queue for the result of e.g. AFC m erges can be
entered here. This queue will be used for the AFC definition lines
having *DEFAULT as keyword. For AFC definitions having a specific
queue defined this default queue setting will be ignored.
If these fields are left blank, the keyword *DEFAULT will not be
accessible in the AFC definition lines, i.e. a specific queue m ust be
entered for each AFC definition line.
Printer Type:
Sam e functionality as above, but for Printer Type.
InterForm A/S 139
Template AFC-definition to be executed after this
Output Queue/
Library:
If these options are filled in, the sam e spool entry will be processed by
the AFC definitions defined for the output queue stated here. This is
done im m ediately after the processing of this set of AFC definitions, as
if the other queues AFC definitions were placed in direct extension to
these queues definitions.
Note that if the AFC definition 9=Exit is executed in the original queue,
the spool file will not be processed by the AFC definitions for the queue
stated here.
This option is especially relevant when several printers should have the
sam e AFC definition. A Tem plate AFC definition can be m ade, which
then can be referred to from other AFC defintions.
Additional parameters
After entering the output queue you can press F10 to insert or change additional param eters:
Additional parameters
Type additional info and press Enter. Press F12 to exit.
Job name AUTO_FORM job . . . AFC_INPUT1
*OUTQ, Name
Job description . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Library list option . . . .
*DEFAULT__
__________
*JOBD_____
*DEFAULT, Name
Use spooled file code page
as job CCSID . . . . . . .
*NO_
*NO, *YES
Separator drawer . . . . . .
*NONE
*NONE, 1-9, 20-39
____0
_______
Number
F4=List
*SPLFATR, *ALWAYS
DBCS code page . . . . . . .
When to use DBCS code page
F12=Cancel
*CURRENT, *JOBD,
*SYSVAL, *NONE
The additional param eters (for which norm ally the default values will work fine) are:
Job name:
The contents of the field job name AUTO_FORM job is used as nam e
for the job in the subsystem , which perform s the autom atic functions. It
is recom m ended to use the sam e nam e as used for the output queue.
Job Description
W ith *DEFAULT it refers to the job description APF3812/AUTO_FORM.
DO NOT change this job description or any other object in the APF3812
as the change will not be copied over to the new version. If you need to
use a job description with other specifications then use another one
placed in another library than APF3812.
Requirements:
The user that change this param eter m ust have:
*OBJMGT authority for the Job description.
*EXECUTE authority to the library of the job description
*READ authority to the user profile: AFCOPER.
The AFCOPER user profile m ust have:
*USE authority for the job description
*EXECUTE authority to the library of the job description
Library
140
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Library where the job description is placed.
Version 2014
Library list option
How to build up the library list.
*JOBD will refer to the initial library list param eter, INLLIBL of the job
description used.
*CURRENT will use the sam e library list as the current job starting the
AFC job. The current job is AFCSTART when starting with the
subsystem , but if you start the job m anually the library list m ay be
different so use this value with care...
Use spooled file code page
as job CCSID
Norm ally the CCSID of the AFC jobs is the sam e as the system value
(with the value *NO) , but if you change the value from *NO (which is
default) into *YES the spooled file code page is used as the jobs
CCSID. This m eans that if you are running several codepages on the
sam e m achine you can now let the user program s called by Auto
Form s Control run under the CCSID indicated by the spooled file that
triggered the call.
If you state *YES and the spooled file has no specific code page (e.g.
*DEVD) then the CCSID of the job is set to the code page specified for
the AFC output queue - refer to page 138 to see where it is set.
Separator drawer
Sets the default separator drawer i.e. from what paper drawer in the
printer the separator page will be printed. This is activated via the
1=M erge w ith overlay com m and in AFC - if it has the value
*DEFAULT as the separator drawer - refer to page 149 for m ore
inform ation. The separator page contains the following inform ation:
Output from InterForm400 merge
Overlay name . . .
File set . . . .
Primary / secondary
Copies . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
: IF400DEMO
:
SAMPLE
: *PRI
: 001
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Input spooled file:
*.Jobname . . . .
*.Userprofile . .
*.Jobnumber . . .
*.Date . . . . .
*.Time . . . . .
*.Filename . . .
*.Filenumber . .
*.Number of pages
Kim Egekjaer
DBCS code page
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
QPADEV0002
KSE
092247
2001-04-25
02:40:15
QPRINT
0004
0000007
(Prom pt with F4 to list valid DBCS codepages.) If any DBCS characters
is found in the spooled file then the code page specified here will be
used - unless the spooled file has a explicit DBCS code page then the
next value determ ines the code page to use:
W hen to use DBCS code page
Possible values are:
*SPLFATR: The DBCS code page above is always used for any DBCS
characters in the spooled files - unless the spooled file has a specific
DBCS code page specified in CHRID - then this is used instead.
*ALWAYS: The code page of the spooled file is ignored for DBCS
characters and the DBCS code page above is always used when a
DBCS spooled file is detected.
InterForm A/S 141
AFC Definition Entries
The AFC function screen gives the possibility of entering sequence lines which will all be
executed for each spool entry getting RDY in the input queue for the AFC definition.
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . :
Library . . . . . :
Seqnbr F. Form type
AFC305D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
Program
UserData
Seqnbr Function
Suspend
1,0
_
_ *=Suspend
1 = Merge with overlay
9 = Exit
2 = Send Network Spooled File
A = Change Attributes
3 = Transform *AFPDS to *USERASCII B = Split spooled file
4 = Copy Spooled File
C = Prepare for Finishing
5 = Move Spooled File
D = Sort Spooled File
6 = Hold Spooled File
F = Change writer
7 = Delete Spooled File
P = Send PDF E-mail
8 = Call Program
* = Comment
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
F15=Subset
F17=Subset by Spooled File
F23=More options
Notice the suspend possibility: If you m ark a sequence line with a ‘*’ in the suspend field then the
sequence line is tem porarily ignored. This can be used e.g. for testing a new setup
without having to totally delete the old setup or to ‘rem ove’ lines that tem porarily are not needed.
W hen you want to activate the lines again you can either m anually rem ove the suspension ‘*’
from each line or rem ove all suspensions via F5=Service and option 1. Remove all
suspensions.
F15=Subset
If you have m any sequence lines you can subset the list so that you will only be
able to see sequence lines conditioned on one or m ore specific spooled file
attributes. Press F15 on the screen above to do that:
Subset list
Form type . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . .
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DEMO______
____
*NO *YES
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
If you fill out one or m ore of these spooled file attributes, then only sequence
lines conditioned on these values are listed. This m eans e.g. that with the values
above only line 1 and 2 will be listed of the lines shown below:
142
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Form type Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0002 1 DEMO
QPRINT
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0003 1
QPRINT
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0004 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
Suspend
2.1
F3=Exit
F15=Subset
AFC305D
Program
UserData
F5=Service
F13=Fold/Unfold
F17=Subset by Spooled File
Notice that even though line 4 is unconditionally run, then it is still not listed - as it
is not conditioned on the form type.
F17=Subset by Spooled File
If you want to check which sequence lines in the overlay that is triggered by a
specific spooled file, then you can use this function key. W hen you press F17
you will be prom pted for either the spooled file identification or an output queue
on which such a spooled file can be found:
Subset Spooled File
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spooled file no.
__________
__________
______
__________
______
Number, *ONLY, *LAST
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue . . . . AFC_INPUT1
Library . . . . .
APF3812___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you e.g. type the output queue like above, then you will be shown the specific
output queue and you can select the spooled file with option ‘1' to copy the
identification into the screen above. Hit Enter when done.
Please notice that this feature will list both the sequence lines of the current
output queue and any lines that will be executed in the linked tem plate output
queue - if used. The list is shown like below:
InterForm A/S 143
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT2
Library:
AFC305D
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Form type Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 C DEMO
Finish def: DEMOMAIL outq: *INPUT form type: MAIL
0002 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
Program
From template queue AFC_INPUT1 Library APF3812.
DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
Seqnbr Function
Suspend
3.0
0001
UserData
1
F3=Exit
F15=Subset
+
F5=Service
F13=Fold/Unfold
F17=Subset by Spooled File
W hen selecting a function the first screen will allow you to enter the spool file attribute(s) used
as criteria for executing this sequence line:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
AFC305D
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT1
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Form type Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0002 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
F3=Exit
Attributtes of input file for which to
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
Program
UserData
execute the function
DEMO______
____
*NO, *YES
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
W hen entering m ore than 1 spool file attribute, the selected attributes have to be valid before
AFC will execute the sequence line (Logical AND function). If an entry is left blank, the spool
file attribute is ignored.
144
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
G NOTE G
Many m isunderstand the save attribute above. So please read this if in doubt: The save
attribute is the CONDITION (just as the other attributes) for executing the line in question! So if
you state *YES only spooled files with the SAVE attribute set to *YES will be able to trigger the
sequence line. This does NOT affect the attribute of the m erged spooled file.
J TIP J
You can use the save attribute to m ake InterForm 400 delete the original spooled files (after
m erge) if the save attribute is *NO - refer to page 152 for additional inform ation of how to do
that.
1=Merge with Overlay
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . :
Library . . . . . :
Seqnbr F. Form type
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
PRTHP3_AFC
QUSRSYS
Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
Program
UserData
Merge with overlay
Output queue for merged print .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
InterForm 400 printer type . . .
Unicode output . . . . . . . . .
Merge overprint lines . . . . .
Find overlay in forms type table
F3=Exit
AFC305D
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
__________
__________
__________
*INPUT
*INPUT,*YES
*NO_
*NO,*YES
N
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
In this screen the specifications for the output device is entered:
Output queue/
library:
The queue to receive the resulting print out. If a specific queue, Printer
type has been defined in the previous screen, the keyword *DEFAULT
is preset for this field. This is overwritten when entering a queue and a
library here. Note that the keyword *DEFAULT apply to both Output
queue, library, InterForm 400 ® and printer type.
You can also type *USER for this field. W ith this value the m erged
spooled file will be created on the output queue specified for this user
(the spooled file owner) in option ‘7. User output queue’ (Refer to page
283 for details) and in this way the m erged spooled files are distributed
to the individual users. If the user profile is not found, the default output
queue (as specified on page 138) will be used. If both the user is not
found and there is not default output queue, then a m essage is issued
in the Auto Form Control job:
InterForm A/S 145
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
AFC5029
Inquiry
27/01/12
Severity . . . . . . . :
00
Time sent
09:10:22
. . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
Unable to print to *USER output queue. No output queue
defined for user KSE. (R I C).
No entry for user KSE in "User output queue" defined in Auto Forms Control
(AFC).
Possible choices for replying to message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
R -- Retry.
I -- Ignore this and remaining AFC functions for this spooled file.
C -- Cancel operation and end this AFC job.
Bottom
Type reply below, then press Enter.
Reply . . . . ________________________________________________________________
To proceed you can then either add the specific user in the table or
add a default output queue for the AFC job and answer ‘R’ or ignore
the input spooled file with ‘I’.
G NOTE G
*USER for the output queue is not allowed for the Light version
Printer type:
The printer type (refer to page 421) used for the above printer. Note
that the keywords *DEFAULT and *USER entered for output queue will
apply for this setting as well, i.e. the setting for Printer type from the
previous screen will be used for *DEFAULT and the printer type
specified on the user list will be used for *USER (refer to page 283 for
details).
Unicode output:
State *YES if you want the m erged spooled file always to be a unicode
spooled file (that is useful if you e.g. have unicode text constants to be
used with a norm al non unicode spooled file as input).
If you use *INPUT the m erged spooled file will be unicode only if the
input spooled file is a unicode spooled file i.e. has USRDFNOPT(‘IFUCS2').
Refer to page 47 for m ore details about unicode.
M erge overprint
lines:
Find overlay in
forms type table:
Specifies, that overprinted lines will be printed as one line. Refer to
page 119 for m ore inform ation.
Stating Y will cause the Form s type table to be used for the form type
stated for this entry. See page 181 for inform ation on how to use the
Form s type table. If stating N you will get the below screen.
In the following screen the definitions for the overlay is entered:
146
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . :
Library . . . . . :
Seqnbr F. Form type
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
PRTHP3_AFC
QUSRSYS
Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
Program
Merge with overlay
Overlay name . . . .
File set . . . . .
Or overlay selector .
Primary/Secondary set
Form type . . . . . .
Copies of each page .
F3=Exit
AFC305D
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F11=Delete
.
.
.
.
.
.
__________
__________
________
*PRI
*PRI, *SEC
__________
______ *INPUT, 01-99
F12=Cancel
Overlay name:
The Overlay you want to m erge with. Use F4 to get a list
File set:
The file set containing the above overlay.Use F4 to get a list.
Overlay selector:
If the above is not filled in, it m eans you intend to use an Overlay
Selector in order to search the spool data for special conditions, that will
select the overlay. See page 123 On how to use the Overlay Selector.
Primary/
Secondary Set:
This option will decide if the Prim ary or the Secondary set of copies of
an overlay are to be processed. The two sets of copies are defined in
Copy M anagement (page 62) if the Global Setting, Copy
M anagement is set to Y. If this setting is N for the overlay, the overlay
is regarded as Primary. *PRI is default for this option.
Form Type:
The Form type of the resulting print out. It is recom m ended to use *STD
for all output in order to avoid prom pting for change of form s from the
queue.
Copies:
You can decide how m any exact duplicates you want of each page in
the spool entry. Note that if you want different contents for the
duplicates you m ust define this in Copy M anagement for the overlay,
or you can define another sequence line in this AFC definition which
processes the sam e spool entry once m ore but with a different overlay.
This screen is only shown if you are m erging with an overlay or overlay selector for a label
printer (i.e. Zebra):
InterForm A/S 147
Seqnbr Function
1.0
1
Merge with overlay
Labels/Continuous .
Media type . . . . .
Print mode . . . . .
_
_
_
1=Labels 2=Continuous
1=Termo transfer 2=Termo media
1=Tear off 2=Rewind 3=Peel off 4=Cut
Labels / Continuous: Select 1=Labels if the m edia contains of separate labels. select
2=Continuous if the m edia is not separated into labels (in this case
you would probably select 4=Cut for the print mode param eter).
M edia type:
Select 1=Termo transfer if you use a non heat sensitive m edia
otherwise use option 2=Transfer media.
Print mode:
1=Tear off m ean that you will m anually tear of the labels. 2=Rew ind
can be used for rewinding all printed labels onto another roll. This
requires special hardware installed.
3= Peel off will print only one label at a tim e waiting for the current label
to be peeled off. (This also requires additional hardware).
4=Cut (requires hardware cutter) norm ally cuts the m edia for each print
job unless you use 2=Continuous - then 4=Cut will cut out each label.
In the following screen the spool attributes for the final output is entered:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . :
Library . . . . . :
Seqnbr F. Formtyp
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
PRTHP3_AFC
QUSRSYS
Save Jobname
Filename
Output spooled
file name:
User data:
148
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Device file
Program
UserData
Merge with overlay
Output spooled file name
User data . . . . . . .
Seperator drawer . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
Archive in InfoStore/400
Archive ID . . . . . .
F3=Exit
AFC305D
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
__________
__________
________
____
____
_
________
F11=Delete
*INPUT, Navn
*INPUT, *JOB, *USER ...
*NONE, *DEFAULT, Number
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
1=PCL, 2=PCL and SCS
F12=Cancel
This entry controls the spool file nam e.
You can change the spool file description of the resulting print data, so
the spool file can be located on the output queue. By entering *PAGES,
InterForm 400 ® will display the num ber of pages included in the output
from the m erge process in the User data field. W hen inserting the
keyword *PAGES the following field will be displayed:
Version 2014
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
Merge with overlay
....................................
Output spooled file : Text before number of pages
:
User data . . . . :
______
: ...
Seperator drawer . : F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
: mmer
Hold output spooled :
:
Save output spooled :..................................:
Archive in InfoStore/400 . _
1=PCL, 2=PCL and SCS
Archive ID . . . . . . . ________
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
Here you can type in a help text which will be added before the num ber
of pages as the first 4 characters in the user data field. *JOB or *USER
can also be specified m aking the user data field contain either the job
nam e or the user profile of the original spool file.
Separator Draw er:
See page 141 for explanation. Type *NONE to avoid a separator page.
Hold output
spooled file:
This affects the status of the output spooled file on the queue.
Save output
spooled file:
This will affect the spool file attribute SAVE of the output spooled file.
Archive in
InfoStore/400:
Archive ID:
InterForm 400 ® autom atically detects if InfoStore/400 is installed. If that
is the case, then this (and the next) option em erges enabling direct
archiving from InterForm 400 ® in InfoStore/400. Here you can decide to
archive the m erged PCL spool file or both the PCL file and the original
SCS spool file.
Archive ID in InfoStore/400, where the spool files are to be stored.
InfoStore/400 is an archiving system developed by Solitas AG.
2=Send Network Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
1,0
2
Send Network Spooled File
Send to:
User ID
Address
. . . .
. . . .
Data format
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
. .
________
________
________
F11=Delete
*RCDDATA, *ALLDATA
F12=Cancel
A spool entry can be sent to another system for processing or a processed job can be sent to
another system for printing.
For instance could an AFC output queue have the function 1.M erge w ith APF3812 overlay
defined, and the receiving output queue for the result is an AFC input queue could have
2.Send Netw ork Spooled File defined.
User ID:
Use a divided user address from a directory list (see contents using the
W RKDIRE com m and), or a distribution list (see possible distribution
lists using the com m and W RKDSTL).
Address:
Refer to the above
InterForm A/S 149
Data format:
You can either use *RCDDATA or *ALLDATA. *RCDDATA can be used
for *SCS files, W hile *ALLDATA is required, when sending m erged PCL
files. For m ore inform ation refer to the description of the DTAFMT
param eter of the OS/400 SNDNETSPLF com m and.
3=Transform AFPDS to *USERASCII
Seqnbr Function
1,0
3
F3=Exit
Transform *AFPDS to *USERASCII
Output queue for ASCII print . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
__________
__________
InterForm400 printer type
__________
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
. . .
F12=Cancel
AFPDS (Advanced Function Printing Data Stream ) spool files are m ade for printer devices
with AFP(*YES), which can only be printed out by IPDS printers.. This feature gives the
possibility of printing advanced print consisting of lines, fram es, different font types etc. directly
from an application program . By using this transform ation feature it is possible to print out
these advanced definitions on an ordinary PCL printer.
Output queue/
library:
Printer type:
Output from the transform ation will becom e a spool entry by the type
*USERASCII. This output queue m ust therefore have a PCL printer
attached which is defined as a *3812 device. If a specific queue and
Printer type have been defined in the previous screen, the keyword
*DEFAULT will be preset for this field. This is overwritten when entering
a queue and a library here. Note that the keyword *DEFAULT apply to
both Output queue, library and InterForm400 ® printer type.
A PCL printer type according to the choices listed on page (see page
421).
Note, if you want to m ake use of this feature to transform AFPDS spool entries into
*USERASCII, and these AFPDS spool files are using resource libraries not listed in the system
library list, then the APF3812/AUTO_FORM job description m ust be changed in order to
include these libraries in the library list.
M WARNING M
The transformation can not convert bar codes and AFP images into PCL. These definitions
will just be ignored in the process.
J TIP J
AFPDS spooled files can also be used as input directly in InterForm400. Then however only
the text visible via DSPSPLF will be used while any graphical elements are ignored and are to
be added in InterForm400.
150
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
4=Copy Spooled File
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . :
Library . . . . . :
Seqnbr Function
1,0
4
AFC305D
PRTHP3_AFC
QUSRSYS
Copy Spooled File
New output queue . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file .
Save output spooled file .
Owner of new spooled file
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
New Output queue:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F11=Delete
__________
__________
*NO
*NO
*INPUT
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
*INPUT, User
F12=Cancel
Output from this process will becom e a spool entry in the new output
queue with the sam e attributes as the original spool entry. If a default
queue has been defined, the keyword *DEFAULT will be preset for this
field.
Hold output spooled file
This affects the status of the copied spooled file on the receiving queue.
Save output spooled file
This will affect the spool file attribute SAVE of the copied spooled file.
Ow ner of new spooled file
Use *INPUT if you want the new spooled file to be owned by the sam e
user profile as the original spooled file.
It m ight be handy to specify another user to own the new spooled file if
you e.g. want to prevent the new spooled file to be deleted before it is
archived.
5=Move Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
1,0
5
Move Spooled File
New output queue . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
F3=Exit
New Output queue:
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*DEFAULT
__________
*NO
*NO
F11=Delete
Name,*DEFAULT,*USER
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
Output from this process will m ove the spool entry to a new output
queue. Following sequence lines will therefore not process the spool
entry. If a default queue has been defined for this output queue (see
page 139), the keyword *DEFAULT will be preset for this field.
The value *USER indicates, that the spooled file should be m oved to
the preferred queue of the spooled file owner. Refer to page 283 for
details of the user output queues and an exam ple.
G NOTE G
If *USER is used and the specific user is not on the list (see page 283) the 5=M ove
com m and is ignored, an exit is perform ed and the spooled file rem ains in the output queue.
InterForm A/S 151
G NOTE G
*USER is not allowed for the InterForm 400 Light version.
Hold output
spooled file:
Save output
spooled file:
This affects the status of the m oved spooled file on the receiving
queue.
This will affect the spool file attribute SAVE of the m oved spooled file.
6=Hold Spooled File
This function holds the original input spool entry for the AFC definition.
7=Delete Spooled File
This function deletes the original input spool entry for the AFC definition.
Hint: If you use the Save attribute of the spooled file as a condition for the delete you can
m ake InterForm 400 behave a bit like a norm al writer job: Delete the spooled file if the save
attribute is *NO after it has been m erged:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
AFC305D
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001
1
MY_SPOOL
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0002
7
*NO
MY_SPOOL
Delete Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
2.0
7
F3=Exit
152
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Program
UserData
Attributes of input file for which to execute the function
Form type . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
Version 2014
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
__________
*NO_
*NO *YES
__________
MY_SPOOL__
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
8=Call Program
Seqnbr Function
1,0
8
Program call
Program name . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
User profile . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
__________
__________
AFCOPER___
F11=Delete
*OWNER,
user profile
F12=Cancel
This function gives you the possibility of letting Auto Form s Control perform operations that are
not contained in this system . It could for instance be to store spooled print in a spool archive.
Other useful features is to m ake a m erge using the APF3812 CL com m and in order to create
a PCL file in the folder system as seen on page 455, or even E-m ail the m erged file as a PDF
file using the MRGSPLFPDF com m and (see page 392).
Program name:
A program to be called at this point
The program can be called with the following 7 param eters regarding the relevant spool entry:
Job nam e
User
Job num ber
File nam e
File num ber
Output queue
Library
*CHAR
*CHAR
*CHAR
*CHAR
*CHAR
*CHAR
*CHAR
10
10
6
10
4
10
10
An exam ple of an exit program can be seen in the source m em ber, FUNKT_8 in source file
APF3812/APISRC.
User profile:
The user profile under which the user exit program will run.
If e.g. a m erge is done by use of the APF3812/APF3812 com m and the sam e user profile will
be the owner of the m erged spooled file.
InterForm 400 will not call the program unless it is owned by QSECOFR. If the program is not
owned by QSECOFR when you add it you will be offered an possibility to change the owner (if
you are authorized) with this window:
Security change required
OWN600D
In order to prevent unauthorized programs from being used as
exit programs, the exit program must be owned by QSECOFR.
Press F10 to change the ownership of the program to QSECOFR.
Press F3 or F12 to cancel.
Program name . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . :
TEST
KSE
Creation date/time . . :
Current owner . . . . :
24/01/11
KSE
F3=Exit
F10=Change owner
18:00:45
F12=Cancel
Here you can sim ply press F10=Change owner to confirm that the program owner should be
changed. The sam e screen is shown in InterForm 400, whenever you try to add a call to a user
program not owned by QSECOFR. (Also for e.g. split exit program s)
InterForm A/S 153
M WARNING M
All exit programs called by InterForm400 ® must be owned by QSECOFR. If it is not the AFC
job will halt with an error message. Change the owner with the command:
CHGOBJOW N OBJ(library/program) OBJTYPE(*PGM) NEW OW N(QSECOFR)
J TIP J
In order to be able to change the owner of a program into QSECOFR, it is enough to have
*ADD authority for the QSECOFR user profile. You can give a user profile this via this
command:
GRTOBJAUT OBJ(QSECOFR) OBJTYPE(*USRPRF) USER(user profile) AUT(*ADD).
Notice however that if the program is adopting the authority from the owner, then *ALLOBJ
and *SECADM is required in order to change the object owner.
9=Exit
This function will cause all rem aining AFC functions (sequence lines) to be skipped.
If you want to insert AFC functions, that are to be executed for all spooled files not specifically
handled in previous lines you could use this function. Just after handling a specific spooled file
insert this function to exit from AFC.
Example:
Below we have defined, that spooled files with form type ‘DEM O’ should be m erged with
overlay ‘IF400DEM O’, spooled files with form type ‘DEM O2' should be m erged with overlay
‘RULER’ and all other spooled files should be m oved to output queue, PRT01 where they will
be printed.
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0002 9 DEMO
Exit
0003 *
0004
1
0005
9
0499
*
0500
5
Program
DEMO2
Merge, Overlay: RULER Fileset: SAMPLE
DEMO2
Exit
Move spooled file, new outq: PRT01 library: QUSRSYS
F3=Exit
154
AFC305D
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F5=Service
Version 2014
F13=Fold/Unfold
UserData
A=Change attributes
Seqnbr Function
1,0
A
Change attributes
Form Type
User data
. . . . . . __________ Form type, *SAME
. . . . . . __________ User data, *SAME
Restart with sequence no. 1
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
_
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
W ith this you can change FORMTYPE or USRDATA attributes of the input spooled file.
The idea of changing the form type is the requirem ent for a spool entry, which has been
processed under e.g. the overlay nam e INVOICE to be run through the statem ents defined for
the overlay SHIPPING. If the original spool entry had form type Invoice a sequence line
1.M erge w ith InterForm400 ® overlay would have m ade one printout. After this sequence line
you change the form s type of the original spool entry to Shipping which will cause another 1.
M erge w ith InterForm400 ® overlay to add the SHIPPING overlay and produce a new printout.
Form Type
User data
The new form type assigned to the original input spool entry.
The text description attached to a spool entry when viewing an output
queue. Changing of USRDTA will norm ally only be done to indicate that
a spool entry has been processed.
Rem em ber to state ‘Restart with sequence no. 1 = Y’ if you want Auto Form s Control to react
on the new form type.
InterForm A/S 155
B=Split spooled file
Seqnbr Function
1,0
B
Split spooled file
Split definition name __________
F3=Exit
F4=prompt
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
This function is used to split a spooled file into several separate spool files which can be
processed independently.
A Split definition m ust exist before this function can be selected. See Split definitions on
page 183 for m ore inform ation.
M WARNING M
Make sure, that you are not creating a loop in Auto Forms Control when you insert a split
definition. If you e.g. create new spooled files with a split definition and these new spooled files
are placed back on the same outq, then the new spooled file should NOT be able to trigger the
split definition again...
156
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
C= Prepare for Finishing
Seqnbr Function
1,0
C
Prepare for Finishing
Finish definition name . . . . .
Output queue for prepared print
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=prompt
F11=Delete
__________
*DEFAULT__
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
This function is used to pre-process an SCS spool entry in order to insert inform ation for the
Finishing Equipm ent. Refer to section Finishing Definitions page 194 for m ore inform ation.
Finishing Definition
Name:
The Finishing definition nam e. Use F4 to select from a list.
Output queue/
library:
Output from the pre-process will be a new SCS spool entry. If a default
queue has been defined, the keyword *DEFAULT will be preset for this
field. This is overwritten when entering a queue and a library here.
*INPUT in this field Indicates that the new spool entry m ust be written to
the sam e output queue where the input spool entry exists.
As the new spooled file afterwards will be input to a m erge operation,
*INPUT will often be appropriate. Note that the keyword *DEFAULT and
*INPUT apply to both Output queue and library.
M WARNING M
Even though *DEFAULT is the default value it is most likely W RONG. *DEFAULT will place
the temporary spooled files on the outq where the printer is attached and making it impossible
to make them run through the P=Send E-mail function.
Form type:
The form type entered here should be used as condition for a 1. M erge
w ith overlay following this AFC definition. The form type could typically
be FNSHREADY (Finish ready).
If you use an E-m ail finishing definition this screen will appear:
Seqnbr Function
10.0
C
Prepare for Finishing
Prepare for E-mail requires settings for
print that will not be send.
Output queue non E-mail print . __________
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
__________
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . __________
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
On this screen you specify on which output queue you want to place the pages, that cannot be
e-m ailed (no receiver was found). This should norm ally be an AFC m onitored output queue so
that a InterForm 400 ® m erge and print can be done.
InterForm A/S 157
M WARNING M
Make sure, that you are not creating a loop in Auto Forms Control when you insert a finishing
definition. If you e.g. create new spooled files with a finishing definition and these new spooled
files are placed back on the same outq, then the new spooled file(s) should NOT be able to
trigger the finishing definition again...
D=Sort Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
2,0
D
Sort Spooled File
Sort definition name . .
Outque for sorted print
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F11=Delete
__________
*DEFAULT__
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
This function is used to sort the spool entry accoding to criteria defined in a Sort Definition.
Refer to section Sort Definitions page 270 for m ore inform ation.
Sort Definition
Name:
Output queue/
library:
The Sort definition nam e.
Output from the Sort process will be a new SCS spool entry. If a default
queue has been defined, the keyword *DEFAULT will be preset for this
field. This is overwritten when entering a queue and a library here.
*INPUT in this field Indicates that the new spool entry m ust be written to
the sam e output queue where the input spool entry exists.
As the new spooled file afterwards will be input to a m erge operation,
*INPUT will often be appropriate. Note that the keyword *DEFAULT and
*INPUT apply to both Output queue and library.
Formtype:
The form type entered here should be used as condition for a 1. M erge
w ith overlay following this AFC definition. The form type could typically
be SORTED.
M WARNING M
Make sure, that you are not creating a loop in Auto Forms Control when you insert a sort
definition. If you e.g. create a new spooled files with a sort definition and these new spooled
files are placed back on the same outq, then the new spooled files should NOT be able to
trigger the sort definition again...
158
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
F=Change Writer
Seqnbr Function
2,0
F
Change writer
Writer name . . . .
Form type . . . . .
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
__________
__________
Name,*OUTQ
F12=Cancel
W riter name:
The nam e of the writer to change. W hen stating *OUTQ the writer
attached to the output queue specified in the default settings for the
AFC definition will be used.
Formtype:
The form type which the writer program will be restricted to process. All
other form types will be left for InterForm 400 ® to process.
This function m akes it possible to use the sam e OUTQ for both input to and output from
InterForm400 ®, and in cases where you have to use m ore than one type of paper and need to
receive a m essage for changing paper.
In cases where you only use one type of paper in the printer you place an AFC function
F=CHGW TR and change the form type to e.g. *STD. This will restrict the writer to process
spool entries of this type only. The next AFC function m ust be 9=EXIT conditioned by form type
*STD. This will cause InterForm 400 ® to stop processing print jobs of this type, and leave them
for the System i to print norm ally.
If you actually use m ore than one type of paper in your printer, and want to get the m essage to
change form s in the printer, then you can define a F = CHGW TR for each form type you want
to receive a m essage for changing paper.
For instance, if you want the form types *STD and IF400 to be used for output to your printer,
while other form types should be used for input conditions to other AFC functions, the following
4 AFC defintions should be m ade in the beginning:
1.
2.
3.
4.
For
For
For
For
form type=*STD, use F=CHGW TR to change form type to *STD
form type=*STD, use 9=EXIT
form type= IF400, use F=CHGW TR to change form type to IF400
form type=IF400, use 9=EXIT
Note that this function can be substituted by a m ore efficient m ethod as described on page 37.
J TIP J
Using option F can sometimes fail to change the writer job, if the printer is very fast. Fast
printers might print out before Auto Forms Control can get to the print. Therefore it is
recommended to use the more efficient way as described on page 37.
G=Archive to MultiArchive/400
This option is only visible when the program MultiArchive/400 library MLTARC400 is detected
on the system . MultiArchive/400 is a software only archiving system developed by the Danish
com pany MultiSupport A/S. As InterForm 400 ®, MultiArchive/400 exploits *SCS type spool
entries. The interaction between InterForm 400 ® and MultiArchive/400 controls that spool files
are archived with the necessary spool file inform ation, and AutoForm sControl is controlling that
data is not archived again when reprinting from the archive through InterForm 400 ®.
Read m ore about MultiArchive/400 on http://www.m ulti-support.dk.
InterForm A/S 159
Seqnbr Function
3,0
G
Archive to MultiArchive/400
Archive name . . . . _____
Item type . . . . . _______________________
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
H=Archive in InfoStore/400
This option opens up, when InfoStore/400 is installed on the sam e System i as InterForm 400 ®.
You can use this to archive *SCS spooled files in InfoStore/400.
Seqnbr Function
1.0
H
Archive in InfoStore/400
Archive ID . . . . .
________________
For archiving both PCL and *SCS spooled files see page 149.
InfoStore/400 is an archiving system developed by Solitas AG, Read m ore about InfoStore/400 on
http://www.solitas.com .
P = Send PDF E-mail
Seqnbr Function
1.0
P
Send spooled file as PDF email
Overlay name . . . . .
File set . . . . . .
or overlay selector .
Primary/Secondary set
Unicode output . . . .
Merge overprint lines
Color support . . . .
Save email . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
__________
__________
________
*PRI
*INPUT
*NO
*YES
*NO_
*PRI, *SEC
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
This function is used to distribute E-m ails. Note, that the spool file first has to be handled by a Em ail finishing definition before this function. Use Color support to tell InterForm 400 if you want to
attach black/white PDF files or color PDF files to the e-m ails that are sent. Refer to the description
of the other fields under 1=Merge with overlay on page 145. See page 211 And 244. Refer to
page 519 for inform ation of how to set up SMTP on the System i.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule or the classis package for
InterForm 400.
160
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
N = PDF File naming and -save
3.0
N
Save spooled file as PDF file in...
Overlay name . . . . . . .
File set . . . . . . . .
or overlay selector . . .
Primary/Secondary set . .
Unicode output . . . . . .
Merge overprint lines . .
Color support
PDF File naming definition
Seqnbr Function
3.0
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
IF400DEMO_
SAMPLE____
________
*PRI
*INPUT
*NO_
*YES
KSE_PDF___
*PRI, *SEC
*INPUT, *YES, *PDFA
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
Save spooled file as PDF file in ...
Compress text . . . . . . . .
User profile to run job . . .
F3=Exit
*NO
*SPLFOWNER
*NO, *YES
*SPLFOWNER,
user profile
F12=Cancel
This function executes a PDF file nam ing finishing definition. It will create PDF files, that are the
result of a m erge with the specified overlay or overlay selector. Refer to page 232 for m ore
inform ation of the PDF file nam ing finishing definition, read the description of P=Send PDF E-m ail
above and the com m on param eters under 1=Merge with overlay on page 145.
For the param eter Unicode output you can use the value ‘*PDFA’ to create PDF files, that are
PDF/A-1b com pliant. Refer to page 398 for inform ation of how what is required for creating
PDF/A-1b com pliant PDF files.
The param eter: Com press text indicates if you want to com press the text in the resulting pdf file.
*NO is default (to be backwards com patible). If the pdf file contains a lot of text (e.g. as in a
joblog) the com pression can be as high as 70%.
The last param eter: User profile to run job defines under which user profile this function will run
and thus also the user profile under which the PDF files will be created. If the spooled file owner
e.g. does not have enough authority to create the pdf files you can here specify a fixed user
profile with sufficient authority instead of *SPLFOW NER.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule or the classic package for
InterForm 400.
W = Print to Windows printer
This option is used with the W inPrint m odule to print the output of a m erge via a windows PC to
any connected printer on that PC. Refer to the W inPrint m anual for details of this m odule.
The m erge is defined as any other m erge:
InterForm A/S 161
Seqnbr Function
1.0
W
Print to Windows printer
Overlay name . . . . .
File set . . . . . .
or overlay selector .
Primary/Secondary set
Unicode output . . . .
Color support
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IF400DEMO
SAMPLE
*PRI
*INPUT
*YES
F4=Prompt
*PRI, *SEC
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
On the next screen you are prom pted for the PC and the printer on the selected PC. You can
prom pt both with F4:
Seqnbr Function
1.0
W
Print to Windows printer
Windows PC
. . . . . . . . .
Windows printer . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
X = Create XML file
W ith this option you can generate XML files with InterForm 400 by using an XML finish definition:
Seqnbr Function
4.0
X
Create XML file
Finish definition name . . . .
XML_DEMO
User profile to run job . . .
*SPLFOWNER
*SPLFOWNER,
user profile
Refer to page 255 to see how you define an XML definition. You can chose to run the Auto Form s
Control job under a specific user profile, this is handy if e.g. only a few users have write authority
to the output directory.
162
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
* = Comment
Seqnbr Function
1.0
*
Comment
____________________________________________________________
Use com m ent lines to great extent in order to keep track of what the AFC functions do. It m akes
future changes quicker and m ore safe.
Convert SAP spool entries (datatype *IBMSCS)
The program SAP100C delivered with InterForm400 ® is used to convert the SAP system s
propriatary spool form at with datatype *IBMSCS to ordinary spool entries with *SCS. The program
can be called from the AFC function 8=Call Program.
The SAP form at is intended to be additionally form atted by the native PCL drivers em bedded in
SAP, and can not be sent to a printer directly.
Control com m ands (CR, LF, FF) in SAP spool entries are form atted as text and not as hex
values. For instance is 0Dh0Ch form atted as F0hC4hF0hC3h. SAP generated spool entries has
no m eaningful attributes like page length/width. Instead the form type indicates the form at (eg.
DINA4 or 51X132). InterForm400 ® does not use this inform ation as the page size definition is
controlled by the overlay.
The source code for the program is placed in the file SAPSRC in the APF3812 library, as there
m ight be other flavours of SAP print (*IBMSCS), which has not yet been considered, and which a
program m er m ay need to adjust to.
SAP spool entries (datatype *IBMSCS2)
The latest releases of SAP software is creating spool file form at with datatype *IBMSCS2, which
is the sam e as *SCS and can by used directly in InterForm 400 ®.
Generating multiple copies in input spool entries.
W hen defining a finishing definition for which you want to use an overlay containing Copy
Managem ent, you will need to enter an overlay containing the num ber of copies in the Preprocess definition for the Finishing definition. Alternatively the program APF3812/PRSCOPY
delivered with InterForm400 ® can be used to create a new SCS spool entry with m ultiple copies
of selected pages, from an input spool entry with data type *SCS. The program can be used with
AFC function 8=Call Program.
The input spool entry should have a num ber from 1-9 placed in position 1 line 1, which PRSCOPY
takes as inform ation on how m any copies to generate. The copies will be placed im m ediately after
the original in the new spool entry. Page one of the copies (the original) will have a “C” placed in
position 1 line 1. This field can be used for selecting specific form s using the “Overlay Selector”.
Pages with a blank or characters other than 1-9 in position 1 line 1 will be copied to the resulting
spool entry as they are.
The resulting spool entry can be recognised by the characters “PRS”, which has been added
as the last 3 characters of the form type. If the original form type nam e used all available
characters, the last 3 characters of the form type will be replaced with “PRS”.
J TIP J
A simular function can be obtained by using Copy Management and stating *VAR as the number
of copies. Refer to page 70 for more information.
InterForm A/S 163
Auto Forms Control Hints
Som e are surprised of the way Auto Form s Control handles the incom ing spooled files. A few
situations causing confusion for som e are listed below:
How to stop processing spooled files
If you have m ade an erroneous setup in Auto Form s Control causing a situation (e.g. by a bad
split or sort definition), where it just keeps creating new spooled files you m ight want to stop this
process. One way could be to end the Auto Form s Control job, but when you restart the job the
loop will continue to work on the waiting spooled files.
The reason is, that Auto Form s Control is using a data queues connected to each output queue.
So if you want to stop such a situation you can e.g. change the definitions for the outq, delete the
spooled files or clear the used data queue with the com m and CLRDTAQ. The data queue is
nam ed the sam e as the m onitored output queue and is placed in the sam e library. Rem em ber
however that clearing the data queue will m ake InterForm 400 ignore ANY spooled file on the
output queue and you need to hold and release each spooled file on the output queue, that should
be handled.
Changing spooled file attributes has no effect
A setup like below is used:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file Program
0001 A *STD
Change attributes, Form type: NEWFORM User data: *SAME
0002 1 NEWFORM
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0003 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
1.1
Suspend
F3=Exit
F5=Service
AFC305D
UserData
F13=Fold/Unfold
The form type of the spooled file is changed in line 1 to NEW FORM, but still the m erge in the
second line is NOT triggered. W hy?
If you get the problem above then please rem em ber, that when the spooled file arrives at the
output queue the spooled file attributes are retrieved once and used for ALL the sequence lines. If
you want the changed spooled file attribute to be ‘seen’ by Auto Form s Control, then you need to
hold and release the spooled file to m ake Auto Form s Control ‘see’ the change. That can above
be done by stating a ‘Y’ for restarting in the function A:
164
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Seqnbr Function
1.0
A
Change attributes
Form type
User data
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
NEWFORM
*SAME
Restart with sequencenbr 1 Y
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
Form type, *SAME
User data, *SAME
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
If you change a spooled file attribute via a function 8=Call Program function in Auto Form s Control
you also need to hold and release the spooled file for this change to take effect in InterForm 400.
Auto_Form jobs does not start
If you have m erged m any spooled files in InterForm 400 and you have not restarted the Auto_form
subsystem for quite a while, then you m ight get into this situation when you restart the subsystem :
The job called AFCSTART keeps on running, and the other AFC jobs does not start.
W hen you look into the open files you m ight see that the AFCSTART job is running on a file called
OUTLOGP.
The file is used for listing ALL m erged spooled files and the m ain purpose is to log the num ber of
pages in a spooled file you if you have m erged the spooled file by use of a PJL printer type, then
inform ation in this file is available for a possible change of the page range via the APFW RKOUTQ
com m and.
The solutions to this situation are these:
1) Make sure that you restart the auto_form subsystem m ore frequently. This will decrease the
startup tim e.
2) If you are 100% sure that you do not need the special page range option on the
APFW RKOUTQ com m and you can also clear the file APF3812/OUTLOGP to m ake all the jobs
start faster.
InterForm A/S 165
Getting Familiar with Auto Forms Control
The following sections are structured so you will be brought through a process of creating AFC
definitions for processing of the IF400DEM O from the Getting Started section.
The chapter requires you have:
•
•
•
Perform ed step 13, 14, 18 and 19 in the Getting Started section.
A PCL5 capable printer attached and configured.
Not m ade changes to the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1.
The following two exam ples will cover the following:
Example 1:
W e will edit the existing AFC definition AFC_INPUT1, to m ove spool files with
type *STD to the output queue AFC_OUT1 without adding an overlay, and to
m ove spool files with form type DEMO (the sam ple spool entry) to the queue
AFC_INPUT2 after doing a m erge.
Example 2:
W e will define a new AFC definition AFC_INPUT2 and use the sam e queue as
input and output for Auto Form s Control. W e will m ake a m erge overlay definition
for processing printjobs with form type DEMO (the sam ple spool entry). These
printjobs are autom atically transferred from AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 by the
definitions m ade in exam ple 1.
Example 1, Using Separate queues for Input and Output
Step 1. Checking the Writer
First we will assign our writer to the correct queue.
Printer W riter (Tw inax, or TCP/IP (TN5250E or Raw Socket))
If the printer writer is already started and attached to another output queue, the
following com m and will change PRTXXX to be attached to output queue
AFC_OUT1. (If the writer is not started just replace CHGW TR with
STRPRTW TR)
CHGWTR WTR(PRTXXX) OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_OUT1)
Rem ote W riter (TCP/IP LPD):
You can not change a rem ote writer to use another queue as it is the queue itself
which contains the definition of the writer (IP address). You should instead follow
the procedure explained on page 418 Attaching through a TCP/IP Print Server
in order to configure queue AFC_OUT1 as a rem ote writer.
Step 2. Checking if Auto Forms Control is running
Select option 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control on the m ain m enu and enter m enu item 12.
W ork with active subsystem AUTO_FORM . If the sub-system is not active, return with F3 and
start the subsystem with option 10. Start AUTO_FORM subsystem .
If the AFC_INPUT1 job does not start up with the subsystem you can m anually start it by selecting
'1. Functions attached to Output Queues' from the AFC m enu followed by option '8=Start
AFC-job' for the AFC_INPUT1 outq.
166
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with Active Jobs
CPU %:
9,7
Elapsed time:
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Hold
4=End
8=Work with spooled files
Opt
__
__
Subsystem/Job
AUTO_FORM
AFC_INPUT1
User
QSYS
AFCOPER
00.03.36
27.02.98
Active jobs:
131
5=Work with
6=Release
13=Disconnect ...
Type
SBS
BCH
CPU %
0,3
0,2
INTER01
10.20.02
7=Display message
Function
PGM-AFC700
Status
DEQW
DEQW
Slut
Parameters or command
===>____________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F10=Restart statistics
F11=Display elapsed data
F12=Cancel
F23=More options
F24=More keys
Use this screen to verify that your AFC jobs are running, and for replying on m essages in error
situations.
Step 3. Entering Auto Forms Definition AFC_INPUT1
Now enter option 1. Functions attached w ith to Output Queues and select the AFC definition
AFC_INPUT1.
Work with Auto Forms Control output queues
AFC300D
Start with . . . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
2
Outq
Library
AFC_INPUT1 APF3812
5=Display
8=Start AFC-job
9=End AFC-job
Description
Job for sample printout
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Note that it is not necessary to end the AFC job in order to m ake changes to an AFC definition.
Changes will take effect im m ediately.
InterForm A/S 167
Update Auto Forms Control Definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
Type choices and
Description .
Autostart job
Code page . .
AFC302D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
. . . . . . . Job for sample printout___________________
. . . . . . . Y
(Y N)
. . . . . . . *SYSVAL
Number, *SYSVAL
F4=List
Default output output queue and printer type
Output queue . . . . . . . . AFC_OUT1__
Library . . . . . . . . .
APF3812___
InterForm 400 printer type . HP4_______
Optional template AFC-definition to be executed after this definition
Output queue . . . . . . . . __________
Library . . . . . . . . .
__________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F10=Additional parameters
F12=Cancel
W e do not m ake changes to these settings but press Enter once m ore.
Step 4. Defining move of print jobs with type *STD
On the next screen we notice that we have two definitions already.
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT1
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0002 6
Hold Spooled File
AFC305D
Program
UserData
Seqnbr Function
____
_
F3=Exit
F5=Service
F13=Fold/Unfold
The first line defines the merge and printing of the dem o spool entry used in the Getting
Started section.
The second line defines that the dem o spool entry should be Held after processing. That
m eans the dem o spool entry will rem ain in the queue after it has been used to create a new
spool entry with overlay which is sent to the printer.
W e now add an AFC function as the first line. W e type 0,1 and press Field Exit. Here we
select function 5 move spooled file. W e press Enter and we define the criteria *STD, which
m eans this AFC function should only be processed for spool entries having form type *STD:
168
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT1
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0002 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
0,1
5
Program
UserData
Move Spooled File
New output queue . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
F3=Exit
AFC305D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
AFC_OUT1__
APF3812___
*NO_
*NO_
F13=Fold/Unfold
*DEFAULT, *USER
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
W e want to send all spool entries with form type *STD to the output queue AFC_OUT1 without
adding any overlay. W hen we press Enter, we see the AFC function appear as the first line:
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT1
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file Program
0001 5 *STD
Move spooled file, new outq: AFC_OUT1 library: APF3812
0002 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0003 6
Hold Spooled File
AFC305D
UserData
Seqnbr Function
0,1
F3=Exit
F5=Service
F13=Fold/Unfold
Step 5. Defining move of Print jobs with Formtype DEMO
Currently sequence line 3 defines that all files should be put on hold when they have been
processed by line 1 and 2.
This m eans that currently the sam ple spool entry with form type DEMO is put on hold and
stays in the queue. W e now want to m ove this type of spool file to queue AFC_INPUT2, so it
can be processed by the AFC definition for that queue.
W e enter a sequence line between sequence line 2 and 3, m eaning that we will m ove the
dem o spool entry, after it has been used to create a m erged spool file on queue AFC_OUT1,
but before it would get put on hold by sequence line 3:
W e enter sequence line 2,1 and press Field Exit. W e enter form type DEMO as the criteria for
executing the m ove operation and we press Enter:
InterForm A/S 169
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
AFC305D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file Program
0001 5 *STD
Move spooled file, new outq: AFC_OUT1 library: APF3812
0002 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
0003 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
2,1
5
Move Spooled File
New output queue . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
F3=Exit
UserData
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F13=Fold/Unfold
AFC_INPUT2
*DEFAULT, *USER
APF3812___
*NO_
*NO, *YES
*NO_
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
Print jobs having neither *STD nor DEMO as form type will be put on hold on queue
AFC_INPUT1 by the last sequence line
Press Enter to save the new sequence line 3 and press F3 to exit the AFC definition window.
Step 6. Testing new functions in AFC_INPUT1
W e can now try to release a dem o spool entry using option 1. Create Demo Spool Entry
under 12. Service Functions.
You will notice that the dem o spool entry is printed with overlay IF400DEM O to the queue
AFC_OUT1 just as we experienced in the Getting Started section.
Now try changing the default output queue for your current job to be AFC_INPUT1. This is
done by the following com m and:
CHGJOB OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_INPUT1)
Try to m ake a screen dum p or print a log or another system report. Exam ple:
PRTDEVADR CTL01
It will now be printed to queue AFC_INPUT1, but as it has form type *STD it will be m oved to
queue AFC_OUT1 and be printed as norm al.
W e will also notice that the dem o spool entry (form type DEMO) has been m oved to queue
AFC_INPUT2, where it is placed with status *RDY:
WRKOUTQ APF3812/AFC_INPUT2
170
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Example 2, Using same Queue for Input and Output
W e will now create a new AFC queue, which will be used for both input and output for Auto
Form s Control
Step 1. Checking the Writer
First we will m ake sure our printer only prints out one specific form type, and leave others to
AFC.
The easiest way to do this is from the InterForm 400 ® Main Menu to choose 70. Configuration
and licences, 2. Configure InterForm 400 and then press Enter several tim es to get the
screen below:
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
7/17
Do you want to use the APF3812/STRWTRCHK program as validity checking program
for the STRPRTWTR and STRRMTWTR commands, to avoid a writer to be started with
FORMTYPE(*ALL) on one of the output queues defined in Auto-Forms-Control, and
if yes, what formtype has to replace *ALL when a writer is started on one of
these output queues.
Use APF3812/STRWTRCHK as a validity checker
N
Form type to replace *ALL . . . . . . . . . .
__________
(Y N)
This option is especially useful, if you are using the same output queue
for both input to AFC-functions and for output to a printer, as a writer
never should be started with FORMTYPE(*ALL) on such an output queue.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
In this screen you state Y to use STRW TRCHK as a validity checker, and specify which
particular form type the printer writer is restricted to process.
In case you do not want to use this general change, you can specify a specific form type when
starting or changing writer jobs as seen below.
Printer W riter (Tw inax, or TCP/IP (TN5250E or Raw Socket))
If the printer writer is already started and attached to another output queue,
the following com m and will change PRTXXX to be attached to output queue
AFC_INPUT2. (If the writer is not started just replace CHGW TR with
STRPRTW TR)
CHGWTR WTR(PRTXXX) OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_INPUT2)
FORMTYPE(*STD)
Defining form type *STD for the writer will lim it the subsystem QSPL to process
jobs with this form type only, thus leaving all jobs regardless of form type to be
processed by subsystem AUTO_FORM:
Remote W riter (TCP/IP LPD)
You can not change a rem ote writer to use another queue as it is the queue
itself which contains the definition of the writer (IP address). You should
instead follow the procedure explained on page 418 Attaching through a
TCP/IP Print Server in order to configure queue AFC_INPUT2 as a rem ote
writer. Note that rem ote writer m ust be started with form type *STD in order to
InterForm A/S 171
lim it the subsystem QSPL to process jobs with this form type only, thus leaving
all jobs regardless of form type to be processed by subsystem AUTO_FORM.:
STRRMTWTR OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_OUT1) FORMTYPE(*STD)
J TIP J
W hen using the same output queue for both Input and output it is highly recommended to
include the form type when starting the writer jobs in program QSTRUPPGM, in order to be
sure that the writers are started up with the correct Form Type after IPL. However this is
automatically fixed, when using STRW TRCHK as described above.
M WARNING M
Note that some PC emulated writers, such as the iSeries Access printer session,
automatically starts the writer with FORMTYPE=*ALL when initialising. These writers cannot
be used with APF3812/STRW TRCHK - use 2 output queue for those.
Step 2. Creating the AFC Definition:
Enter m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control and select option 1. Function attached to
Output queues. Here we press F6 to create a new definition:
Update Auto Forms Control Definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
Type choices and
Description .
Autostart job
Code page . .
AFC302D
AFC_INPUT2
APF3812
then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
. . . . . . . DEMO queue for both input and output
. . . . . . . Y
(Y N)
. . . . . . . *SYSVAL
Number, *SYSVAL
F4=List
Default output output queue and printer type
Output queue . . . . . . . . AFC_OUT2__
Library . . . . . . . . .
APF3812___
InterForm 400 printer type . HP4_______
Optional template AFC-definition to be executed after this definition
Output queue . . . . . . . . __________
Library . . . . . . . . .
__________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F10=Additional parameters
F12=Cancel
Here we define the queue to m onitor should be AFC_INPUT2. W e assign the sam e nam e for
the AUTO_FORM subsystem job, as it will be easier to recognise the correct job when looking
at active jobs.
As we will use the sam e queue for Input and Output for our AFC definitions, we assign the
sam e queue nam e for the default output queue.
For printer type we state a value m atching our specific printer.
There should be no criteria for changing the writer, so we press Enter twice to get the AFC
function entry screen.
172
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 3. Restricting the writer to process type *STD jobs only
Note: This step can be ignored, if you restrict the writer jobs using the STRW TRCHK
option as first mentioned.
W e create our first AFC function by entering 1 followed by Field Exit
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
AFC305D
Program
UserData
(No functions defined)
Seqnbr Function
1,0
F
Change writer
Writer name . . . .
Form type . . . . .
F3=Exit
*OUTQ_____
*STD______
F13=Fold/Unfold
Name, *OUTQ
F12=Cancel
The first AFC function we enter is F=CHGW TR. This function is the first action taken for any
spool file printed to queue AFC_INPUT2.
By stating *OUTQ instead of a specific writer nam e (PRTXXX) we define that the writer to
change should be the one currently assigned to the default queue AFC_INPUT2 defined in the
previous screen.
Step 4. Preventing following AFC functions to process type *STD
In order to let all spool files with form type *STD be printed without further processing by
InterForm400 ®, we define an Exit in a new sequence line. W e type 2 and press Field Exit.
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 F
Change writer: *OUTQ Form type: *STD
Seqnbr Function
2,0
9
F3=Exit
AFC305D
Program
UserData
Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function
Form type . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
*STD______
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 173
By function 9=EXIT we define that all spool files with form type *STD should not be processed
further by any sequence line after this..
Step 5. Defining the Overlay Merge
Now we want to define the m erge of our dem o spool entry with our overlay IF400DEM O. W e
enter sequence line 3 and press Field Exit. W e enter form type DEMO as the criteria for
executing the m ove operation and we press Enter:
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 F
Change writer: *OUTQ Form type: *STD
0002 9 *STD
Exit
Seqnbr Function
3,0
1
Program
UserData
Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function
Form type . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
F3=Exit
AFC305D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DEMO______
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 F
Change writer: *OUTQ Form type: *STD
0002 9 *STD
Exit
Seqnbr Function
3,0
1
Program
UserData
Merge with overlay
Output queue for merged print .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
InterForm 400 printer type . . .
Unicode output . . . . . . . . .
Merge overprint lines . . . . .
Find overlay in form type table
F3=Exit
AFC305D
F13=Fold/Unfold
*DEFAULT__
__________
__________
*INPUT
*NO_
N
(Y N)
*INPUT,*YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
W e select function 1=M erge and enter DEM O as condition for processing this sequence line.
W e press Enter and we define *DEFAULT for the output queue which should receive the
m erged print. The default is AFC_INPUT2 according to the previous screen.
Note that *DEFAULT include Library and Printer Type.
W e define that we do not want to search an overlay table, and we press Enter to get the entry
field for defining the overlay:
174
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 F
Change writer: *OUTQ Form type: *STD
0002 9 *STD
Exit
Seqnbr Function
3,0
1
Program
UserData
Merge with overlay
Overlay name . . . . .
File set . . . . . .
or overlay selector .
Primary/Secondary set
Form type . . . . . .
Copies of each page .
F3=Exit
AFC305D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IF400DEMO_
SAMPLE____
________
*PRI
*PRI, *SEC
*STD______
*INPUT
*INPUT, 01-99
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
If you have worked through section Getting Familliar with Overlay Selectors, You could
enter the selector M YSELECT instead of an Overlay nam e.
It is very im portant that we define the form type to be *STD. The resulting spool entry of this
AFC function will be sent back to the sam e queue AFC_INPUT2 and get status *RDY. That
m eans the first two AFC definitions we defined will be executed for the new spool entry.
However, the second line (9=EXIT on form type *STD), will see to that the m erged print is not
processed once m ore by sequence line 3, but instead processed by the writer as result of
sequence line 1=CHGW TR, which defined the writer to process jobs with form type *STD.
W e now press Enter to decide the spool file attributes of the m erged print out.
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
AFC305D
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 F
Change writer: *OUTQ Form type: *STD
0002 9 *STD
Exit
Seqnbr Function
3,0
1
Program
UserData
Merge with overlay
Output spooled file name
User data . . . . . . .
Seperator drawer . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
.
.
.
.
.
__________
IF400DEMO_
________
*NO_
*NO_
*INPUT, Name
*INPUT, *JOB, *USER ...
*NONE, *DEFAULT, Nummer
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
As user data we state the sam e nam e of the overlay, which will allow us to verify the spool
entry on the output queue AFC_INPUT2.
W e press Enter to save this AFC definition.
InterForm A/S 175
Step 6. Cleaning up processed jobs
The spool entry which was used for creating the new spool entry with overlays, will stay in the
queue with status ready, unless we define an AFC function to handle it.
W e have several possibilities. W e could just hold it with function 6, but we could also choose
to m ove it to another queue in order to save it. This queue could then be cleared every Friday,
when we are sure no re-prints are needed.
Finally we could choose just to delete the job which we intend to do in sequence line 4:
Update AFC-functions attatched to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT2
Library . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 F
Change writer: *OUTQ Form type: *STD
0002 9 *STD
Exit
0003 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
Seqnbr Function
4,0
7
F3=Exit
AFC305D
Program
UserData
Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function
Form type . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DEMO______
N
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
W e define that all spool entries with form type DEMO should be deleted, but only if the spool
file attribute SAVE=*NO. If SAVE=*YES there m ight be a good reason for it, which m eans we
should leave them alone.
W e press Enter to save
W e have not considered what to do with spool files with other form types than *STD or DEMO.
They will therefore just stay in the queue with status *RDY.
Now one m ight wonder if the spool files with form type *STD also rem ains in the queue, but
they are autom atically deleted when the writer has printed them .
176
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 7. Activating the AFC job AFC_INPUT1
W e now press F3 to exit our AFC definition and we select option 8 to start the AFC job.
Work with Auto Forms Control output queues
AFC300D
Start with . . . . . . . __________ __________
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
8
Outq
AFC_INPUT1
AFC_INPUT2
Library
APF3812
APF3812
5=Display
8=Start AFC-job
9=End AFC-job
Description
Job for sample printout
DEMO queue for both Input and Output
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Step 8. Testing the new AFC definition AFC_INPUT2
W e can now try to release a dem o spool entry using option 1. Create Demo Spool Entry
under 12. Service Functions.
If you m ade the changes to AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 according to Exam ple 1, the dem o
spool entry will autom atically be m oved to AFC_INPUT2 as result of sequence line 3 (function
5=m ove). If you did not m ake the changes you will have to m ove the spool file m anually from
outq AFC_INPUT1 to AFC_INPUT2 and release it.
As in Exam ple 1 you can try changing your default print queue to AFC_INPUT2 with the
com m and:
CHGJOB OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_INPUT2)
Try to m ake a screen dum p or print a log or another system report. Exam ple:
PRTDEVADR CTL01
It will now be printed to queue AFC_INPUT2, but the form type *STD will cause the job to print
without interference from Auto Form s Control.
W e will also notice that the dem o spool entry (form type DEMO) has been deleted after it has
been used to generate the m erged printout.
InterForm A/S 177
Using a “TEMPLATE” AFC defintion
As all printers being used together with InterForm 400 ® has to have an AFC-definition defined,
the use of a TEMPLATE AFC definition is very useful. A lot of the printers being m onitored by
AFC, will often have the sam e requirem ents in term s of which spool files are to be m erged with
which overlays.
In the following exam ple we delete the AFC entries m ade for AFC definition AFC_INPUT1,
even though the use of a tem plate definition will also work when AFC entries is m ade in the
m ain AFC defintion. The tem plate AFC entries will always be executed after the AFC entries
m ade in the m ain AFC definition.
Update Auto Forms Control Definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
Type choices and
Description .
Autostart job
Code page . .
AFC302D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
. . . . . . . Job for sample printout
. . . . . . . Y
(Y N)
. . . . . . . *SYSVAL
Number, *SYSVAL
F4=List
Default output output queue and printer type
Output queue . . . . . . . . AFC_OUT1
Library . . . . . . . . .
APF3812
InterForm 400 printer type . HP4_PJL
Optional template AFC-definition to be executed after this definition
Output queue . . . . . . . . TEMPLATE__
Library . . . . . . . . .
QUSRSYS___
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F10=Additional parameters
F12=Cancel
Rather than m aking the sam e AFC entries for a lot of sim ular m onitored output queues, we
create an AFC defintion with entries, which will operate as a tem plate for other AFC definitions:
Create an output queue w ithout a device attached.:
CRTOUTQ QUSRSYS/TEMPLATE
Create an AFC definition as per below, using option 1. Functions attached to output queue
from the AFC m enu option 5. W ork with Auto Form s Control. Press F6 to create.
Update Auto Forms Control Definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
Type choices and
Description .
Autostart job
Code page . .
AFC302D
TEMPLATE__
QUSRSYS___
then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
. . . . . . . Template AFC-definition___________________
. . . . . . . Y
(Y N)
. . . . . . . *SYSVAL
Number, *SYSVAL
F4=List
Default output output queue and printer type
Output queue . . . . . . . . TEMPLATE__
Library . . . . . . . . .
QUSRSYS___
InterForm 400 printer type . HP4_PJL___
Optional template AFC-definition to be executed after this definition
Output queue . . . . . . . . __________
Library . . . . . . . . .
__________
F3=Exit
178
F4=Prompt
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
F10=Additional parameters
F12=Cancel
W e will create a sim ple AFC entry for this AFC definition, where we want to m erge the spool
files with Form Type DEMO, with overlay IF400DEMO and send the resulting print to the
DEFAULT output queue, as follows:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
TEMPLATE
Library . . . . . . . :
QUSRSYS
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file
0001 1 DEMO
Merge, Overlay: IF400DEMO Fileset: SAMPLE
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
F3=Exit
Attributtes of input file for which to
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
AFC305D
Program
UserData
execute the function
DEMO______
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
W e will define that the print should be directed to the *Default output queue
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
Merge with overlay
Output queue for merged print .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
InterForm 400 printer type . . .
Unicode output . . . . . . . . .
Merge overprint lines . . . . .
Find overlay in forms type table
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
*DEFAULT____
_________
__________
*INPUT
*NO_
*NO, *YES
N
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
The spool file should be m erged with overlay IF400DEMO in file set SAMPLE and the resulting
spool file should have Form Type MERGED.
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
Merge with overlay
Overlay name . . . .
File-set . . . . .
Or overlay selector .
Primary/Secondary set
Form type . . . . . .
Copies of each page .
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F11=Delete
.
.
.
.
.
.
IF400DEMO_
SAMPLE____
________
*PRI
*PRI, *SEC
MERGED____
*INPUT
*INPUT, 01-99
F12=Cancel
The attributes of the resulting spool file we leave as *INPUT and set *NONE for Separator Drawer
and *NO for Hold or SAVE spool file.
InterForm A/S 179
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
Merge with overlay
Output spooled file name
User data . . . . . . .
Seperator drawer . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
*INPUT____
*INPUT____
*NONE___
*NO_
*NO_
F11=Delete
*INPUT, Navn
*INPUT, *JOB, *USER ...
*NONE, *DEFAULT, Nummer
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
Now start the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 and TEMPLATE with function 8 in ‘1. Functions
attached to output queues’. If you do not already have the dem o spool entry in output queue
AFC_INPUT1 you can create this dem o spool file, using function ‘1. Create Dem o Spool Entry’
in ‘12. Service Functions’ which you will find on the InterForm 400 Main m enu.
W hen you release the dem o spool file in output queue AFC_INPUT1, you will see that AFC will
process the spool file according to the AFC entries m ade in the TEMPLATE definition,
however the resulting spool file will still be directed to the default output queue AFC_OUT1,
which we have defined for AFC output queue AFC_INPUT1.
180
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
2. Form Type Table
An alternative to stating the Form Type directly in 1= M erge w ith Overlay (refer to page 142)
is to create a table which has all available form types listed.
Apart from having the form s listed in a well-arranged m anner, the form types table gives the
possibility of defining 3 copies with 3 different overlays for each page in the input spool entry.
Note that an AFC definition m ust be defined which lets the selection from the Forms type
table take effect.
W hen selecting the m enu point 2. Form Type Table from the Auto Form s Control
adm inistration m enu the following screen will appear:
Enrollment of Form Types to Auto Forms Control
AFC310D
Form type of spooled file . . . __________
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add form type
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
The overlay selection entry field
Pressing F6 to add a new form type results in the screen below:
Add form type to form type table
Form type
. . . . . . . . .
Merge with
File-set . . . . . . . . .
Overlay name . . . . . . .
Primary/Secondary set . .
Form Type . . . . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . . .
And if filled in, merge with
File-set . . . . . . . . .
Overlay name . . . . . . .
Primary/Secondary set . .
Form Type . . . . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . . .
And if filled in, merge with
File-set . . . . . . . . .
Overlay name . . . . . . .
Primary/Secondary set . .
Form Type . . . . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
AFC310D
__________
__________
__________
____
__________
_______
*PRI, *SEC
__________
__________
_____
__________
_______
*PRI, *SEC
__________
__________
_____
__________
_______
*PRI, *SEC
1-99, *INPUT
1-99, *INPUT
1-99, *INPUT
This screen contains the possibility to produce three different print-outs of the spool entry with
individual overlays attached. All sets will be printed on the sam e queue defined by the AFC
InterForm A/S 181
definition 1.M erge w ith overlay which has Find overlay in forms type table = Y. (refer to
page 145)
File-set:
The file-set where the overlay is placed. Prom pt available file-set with F4
Overlay name: The overlay to use from the above file-set
182
Form type:
The form type for the m erged output. It is recom m ended to use *STD in order
to avoid m essages from the writer about changing form s.
Copies:
The num ber of copies produced from each page of the input spool entry.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Split Definitions
W ith the Split Definition you will be able to select specific pages in a spool entry on basis of
contents of these pages. A split function will create a new spool entry with pages m eeting the
criteria. The conditional selection of pages works in the sam e way as the overlay selector
described on page 123.
W hen entering 3. Split definitions in the m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control on the
m ain m enu the following screen is displayed.
Work with Split Definitions
AFC300D
Start with . . . __________ __________
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
F3=Exit
Split name
5=Display
Description
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
End
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new split definition.
Split Definition Entries
Create Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : SHIPPING__
Description . . . . . . : Extract_invoices_only____________________________
Seqnbr.
Split detail description
Seqnbr.
______
Split detail description
F3=Exit
F5=Resequence
F13=Select spooled file F18=DSPSPLF
F12=Cancel
You can now enter the specific requirem ents your spool entry data should m eet for selecting a
certain overlay. You can press F13 and F18 to select and display the spooled file used to note
the lines and positions used for the split.
InterForm A/S 183
F13=Select spooled file
Press this function key to select a spooled file from this screen:
Select spooled file
Job name . .
User . . .
Job number
File name .
Spooled file
. .
. .
. .
. .
no.
SSF300D
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Number, *ONLY, *LAST
Name of output queue to search if splf file is unknown:
Output queue . . .
Library . . . .
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
You select the spooled by typing the output queue in which the spooled file is placed in the
bottom of the window and then select the spooled file with ‘1' - or by typing in the spooled file
identification in the top of the screen.
F18=DSPSPLF
After selecting the spooled file you can now display it with F18:
Display Spooled File
File . . . . . :
EDTPRT
Control . . . . .
Find . . . . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.
1
Herring Marine Research
Seaweed Street 14
9000 Battleaxe
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Wolly Weed
W hen entering a sequence line you will get the following screen:
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : SHIPPING_
Description . . . . . . : Extract invoices only
Seqnbr.
Seqnbr
1,0
Split detail description
______________________________
AND/OR Print line Position
Oper
___
___ - ___ ____
____
___
___ - ___ ____
____
___
___ - ___ ____
____
___
___ - ___ ____
____
___
___ - ___ ____
____
___
___ - ___ ____
F3=Exit
184
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Compare value
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
Split detail
description:
Description of the pages selected by this detail line.
AND/OR:
Relate this statem ent to the previous statem ent.
Print Line:
The print line in the spool entry to search.
Position:
The colum n interval to search.
Oper.
The operator relating to the com pare value.
The operators used are standard operators known from e.g. Query/400:
EQ
NE
LT
LE
GT
GE
Com pare Value:
Equal to com pare value
Not equal to com pare value
Less than com pare value
Less than or equal to com pare value
Greater than com pare value
Greater than or equal to com pare value
The character string or num eric value which the operator should
com pare with.
If you want to call a sequence line for all pages in a spooled file you need to specify a condition
above, that is true for all the pages. Such a dum m y condition could be this:
Seqnbr.
1,0
Split detail description
all
AND/OR Print line Position
1
1 1
OR
1
1 1
-
F3=Exit
F13=Select spooled file
Oper
EQ
NE
Compare value
F11=Delete
+
F12=Cancel
The condition sim ply says: Either there is a blank in position 1 in line 1 or there is not.
(W hich of course is always true ;-))
Please notice, that no delimiter is used for the com pare value.
InterForm A/S 185
Calling a User Exit Program with the extracted spool pages
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : IF400ONLY
Description . . . . . . : Sort IF400 Pages
Split detail description : IF400 ONLY
User exit program
Program name . . . . . . *NONE_____
Library . . . . . . .
__________
*NONE, name
name
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This screen can be used to call a user exit program , that inserts inform ation in the spool entry
resulting from the split.
InterForm 400 ® will call the program with a set of param eters consisting of up to either 5 or 10
lines each containing a field of up to 30 positions. The am ount of exit param eters depends on
the form at: 01 equals 5 exit param eters, 02 equals 10 exit param eters, 03 equals the 10 exit
param eters as well as 300 character param eter, that contains all attributes of the original
spooled file.
For additional inform ation on return param eters look into the sam ple program s, SPLEXIT,
SPLEXIT02, SPLEXIT03 and SPLEXIT04 in the source file APISRC in library APF3812.
Please notice that the spooled file attribute param eters are all RETURN param eters, that are
em pty when the program is called.
These various program s differs in these m anners:
SPLEXIT
(Form at=1). This was the first (sim ple) kind of split exit program supported.
The program get up to 5 texts from the spooled file and returns up to 10 texts
into the new splitted spooled file.
SPLEXIT02
(Form at=2). Sam e as SPLEXIT with the only difference, that you here can get
up to 10 texts from the spooled file.
SPLEXIT03
(Form at=3). Sam e as SPLEXIT02 with the only difference, that you here get a
com plete data structure with ALL the inform ation of the spooled file that
triggered the split definition.
SPLEXIT04
(Form at=4). This is a unicode exit program . This is needed if you want to use
a split definition to change the contents of a unicode spooled file. Please
notice that all text returned from the program are expected to be in unicode,
where the other split exit program s above run in the codepage of the spooled
file (or AFC job if not defined).
One exam ple could be a custom er ID which the user exit program uses to look up a fax
num ber in a database, which is returned to InterForm 400 ® to insert in the spool entry resulting
from the split.
186
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : IF400ONLY
Description . . . . . . : Sort IF400 Pages
Split detail description
User exit program
Program name . . . . .
Library . . . . . .
Format . . . . . . . .
When to call . . . . .
Exit parameter data
1. Linenbr.
2. Linenbr.
3. Linenbr.
4. Linenbr.
5. Linenbr.
Return data is
1. Linenbr.
2. Linenbr.
3. Linenbr.
4. Linenbr.
5. Linenbr.
F3=Exit
: IF400 ONLY
. GETFAXNR
.
QGPL
. 02
. 1
*NONE, name
name
01, 02, 03, 04 (UCS2)
1=Every page 2=When exit parm changes
3=First time the seqnbr is selected
13_ Position 57_ - 60_
6. Linenbr. ___
___ Position ___ - ___
7. Linenbr. ___
___ Position ___ - ___
8. Linenbr. ___
___ Position ___ - ___
9. Linenbr. ___
___ Position ___ - ___
10. Linenbr. ___
to be printed in the following positions
14_ Startposition 60_
6. Linenbr. ___
___ Startposition ___
7. Linenbr. ___
___ Startposition ___
8. Linenbr. ___
___ Startposition ___
9. Linenbr. ___
___ Startposition ___
10. Linenbr. ___
Position
Position
Position
Position
Position
___
___
___
___
___
Startposition
Startposition
Startposition
Startposition
Startposition
F12=Cancel
-
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
You m ight want to break up the spooled file for each possible value in a certain position in
the spooled file. To achieve this you select the line and positions in the screen above and in
your exit program you sim ply copy the incom ing value (e.g. &entrytxt1) into a variable
containing a spooled file attribute e.g. &form type. Please notice, that this works fine EVEN if
the sam e value is found on pages that are NOT successive - those pages are always m erged
into one spooled file with the sam e attributes.
The field ‘W hen to call’ above indicates when to call the user program m entioned above:
1=Every page
The user program is called for each page where the relevant sequence line is selected.
2=W hen exit parm changes
Norm al program s are determ inistic i.e. for a fixed set of input values the output will always be
the sam e. If that is the case for your program you should consider this setting. The values that
the program returned the first tim e will be used for the subsequent pages containing the sam e
values for the exit parm s. In this way you can save a bit of processing tim e by not calling your
program m ore than needed.
3=First time the seqnbr is selected
The first tim e the user program is called the returned param eters are stored and reused for the
subsequent calls. Please note, that if m ultiple sequence num bers use this option while being
called alternately the returned param eters can be m ixed up!
G NOTE G
If you return spooled file attributes like described above, then please note that if you return
blanks, then the spooled file attribute of the splitted spooled file(s) will the same as the
original spooled file i.e. if the original spooled file has ‘*STD’ as the form type and you return
blanks then the form type of the new spooled file(s) will be ‘*STD’.
J TIP J
You can only add to (not overwrite) the contents of the spooled file by use an exit program. If
you want to overwrite the contents you can use the CRTPBSPLF command - see page 456.
InterForm A/S 187
M WARNING M
All exit programs called by InterForm400 ® must be owned by QSECOFR. If it is not the AFC
job will halt with an error message. Change the owner with the command:
CHGOBJOW N OBJ(library/program) OBJTYPE(*PGM) NEW OW N(QSECOFR). Refer to page
154 to see what is required in order to be able to change the owner..
188
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Defining the spool file attributes for the result of a Split
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : SHIPPING_
Description . . . . . . : Extract invoices only
Split detail description : Split Invoice/Credit
Output queue . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page size
Length, Lines per page . . . . . .
Length, positions per line . . . .
Lines per inch . . . . . . . . . . .
Lines per inch . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters per inch . . . . . . . .
Overflow line number . . . . . . . .
Font ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degree of page rotation . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spool file name . . . . . . . . . .
User data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold spooled file . . . . . . . . .
Save spooled file . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
__________ *INPUT, *NONE, Name
___________
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
1-255
1-378
3, 4, 6, 7.5, 8, 9, 12
3, 4, 6, 7.5, 8, 9, 12
5, 10, 12, 13.3, 15...
1-255
*CPI, 3, 5, 11, 12...
*AUTO, *COR, 0, 90...
Character value, *STD
*USER, *JOBNAME, Name
*USER, *JOBNAME ...
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
Output queue: The output queue where the resulting spool entry from the split should be sent
to. The value *NONE m eans that the pages are not printed, but the user exit
program is called. This allows for a user exit program to take data from pages
which are not printed, and transfer them to the following pages.
The rest of the values are corresponding to the spool file attributes found in a printer file
(PRTF).
Blank fields equals *INPUT, which m eans the attributes of the original spool entry will be
copied to the resulting spool entry from the split. A user exit program can overwrite these
values, if any of the fields are filled out, when returning from the exit program .
The original spool entry will after the split rem ain untouched with status *RDY and could be
processed im m ediately by other AFC definitions, even another Split definition.
InterForm A/S 189
Example Using Split
The following m akes use of the dem o spool entry delivered with InterForm 400 ®. You can print
this from the m enu 12. Service Functions.
The distinction between Document and modules letters is the text “Docum ent” or “m odules.”
which is located on each page in line 15 position 34 - 41:
DISPLAY SPOOL FILE
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Page/Line 3/15
Function . . . .
+1
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Re. Your new InterForm400 Document Management System.
----------------------------------------------------Congratulations with your new InterForm400 software.
InterForm400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform
advanced data remapping and copy management of your existing SCS
print data. InterForm 400 exploits the advanced features of
standard HP-PCL printers and is the chosen document management
solution for over 2000 installations.
The following license code(s) will be needed to activate
InterForm400 permanently to your system(s):
Product
Model
i-Group
Serial No.
License Code
---------------------------------------------------------------InterForm400
515
i050
4449079
F2 E7 20 AA
InterForm400
810
i100
44B2031
AA BB 01 23
InterForm400
890
i600
44D3971
1A BC DE 44
InterForm400
520
i100
44A1460
79 10 22 F1
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
W e now enter item 3. Split definitions on the Auto Form s m enu.
Create Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . . IFLETTER__
Description . . . . . . . Extract Document letters__________________________
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Here we press F6 to add a Split definition, which we assign the nam e IFLETTER
190
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : IFLETTER
Description . . . . . . : Extract Document letters
Seqnbr.
Split detail description
Seqnbr
1,0
Split detail description
Split Document/modules_______
AND/OR Print line Position
____
_15
_34 - _41
____
___
___ - ___
____
___
___ - ___
____
___
___ - ___
____
___
___ - ___
____
___
___ - ___
F4=Prompt
F3=Exit
Oper Compare value
EQ__ Document________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
____ ________________________________
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
W e press 1 and Field Exit to create a new sequence line, and we fill in, that this split definition
should run, if the text in line 15 from position 34 to 41 equals (EQ) Document (case sensitive).
W hen we press Enter a screen for specifying a user exit program is shown. The exit program
can be used for collecting data from other applications or databases, for insertion in the
docum ent. W e are not using this facility, so the value *NONE is kept.
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : IFLETTER
Description . . . . . . : Extract Document Letters
Split detail description : Split Document/modules
User exit program
Program name . . . . . . *NONE_____
Library . . . . . . .
__________
F3=Exit
*NONE, name
name
F12=Cancel
W hen we press Enter again, a screen is shown, where we can state the spool file attributes of
the spool entry created by the split function. Note that the original spool entry used for m aking
the split will rem ain untouched:
InterForm A/S 191
Change Split Definition
SPL310D
Split definition name . : IFLETTER_
Description . . . . . . : Extract Document letters
Split detail description : Split Document/modules
Output queue . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Page size
Length, Lines per page . .
Length, positions per line
Lines per inch . . . . . . .
Lines per inch . . . . . . .
Characters per inch . . . .
Overflow line number . . . .
Font ID . . . . . . . . . .
Degree of page rotation . .
Form type . . . . . . . . .
Spool file name . . . . . .
User data . . . . . . . . .
Hold spooled file . . . . .
Save spooled file . . . . .
F3=Exit
. . . . AFC_INPUT1 *INPUT, *NONE, Name
. . . .
APF3812____
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
IFLET_____
__________
__________
*NO___
______
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
*INPUT,
1-255
1-378
3, 4, 6, 7.5, 8, 9, 12
3, 4, 6, 7.5, 8, 9, 12
5, 10, 12, 13.3, 15...
1-255
*CPI, 3, 5, 11, 12...
*AUTO, *COR, 0, 90...
Character value, *STD
*USER, *JOBNAME, Name
*USER, *JOBNAME ...
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
W e have defined that the spool entry containing the Docum ent letters should be sent to queue
AFC_INPUT1, which m eans back to our AFC input queue. W e define *NO for hold spooled file
which m eans the spool entry will here get status *RDY.
W e are changing the form type to IFLET. This is done to enable the AFC functions to process
the spool entry on basis of the form type. The original spool entry containing both Docum ent
and m odules letters will still be available with the original form type DEM O.
W e press Enter and F3 to exit this screen. W e press F5 to verify the creation of the Split
definition and press F3 to leave the Split m enu.
In an AFC definition we can activate the split definition IFLETTER, by using function B:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . :
Library . . . . . :
Seqnbr Funct Form type
Seqnbr Function
1,0
B
AFC305D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
Save
New output queue
Split spooled file
Split definition name
F11=Delete
.
IFLETTER__
F12=Cancel
The Split definition will cause the dem o spool entry to have pages extracted and another SCS
spool entry with form type IFLET is created and placed after the original spool entry in the
queue.
W e can now m erge the new spool entry with an overlay conditioned by the Form type IFLET or
by using an Overlay Selector:
192
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT1
QUSRSYS
Seqnbr Funct Form type Save
0001
B
DEMO
Split, definition: IFLETTER
Seqnbr Function
2,0
1
F3=Exit
Seqnbr Function
1,0
1
AFC305D
New output queue
Attributtes of input file for which to execute the function
Form type . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. IFLET
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
Merge with overlay
Output queue for merged print . AFC_OUT1___
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
APF3812___
InterForm 400 printer type . . . HP4________
Unicode output . . . . . . . . . *INPUT
*INPUT,*YES
Find overlay in forms type table N
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 193
Finishing Definitions
This function is used for departm ental printing with need for im m ediate stapling, folding and/or
insertion into envelopes and other related functions.
Currently the following finishing functions are supported:
1.
Folding and insertion into envelopes using the Prinserter® (W inserter in the US).
2.
Stapling on Canon, HP, Kyocera, Lexm ark, IBM, Océ, Ricoh and Xerox m odels.
3.
Various insertion system s e.g. som e Pitney Bowes, Böwe, Neopost, Bell+Howell and PFE
m odels are supported.
4.
Folding and insertion into envelopes using the PFE MailPrinter
5.
E-m ail and fax distribution. Fax distribution requires the purchase of a fax m odule for
InterForm 400.
6.
PDF file creation
7.
Reform atting of spooled files
Note that the printer type m ust be a HP4, HP4D or HP4_PJL type device when using the finishing
functions.
Defining Prinserter® Pre-process Definition. Fixed number of pages
This function is typically used for m ailings which is based on the sam e num ber of pages for all
recipients.
Enter Menu point 4. Finishing Definitions on the m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control.
Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 01 for m aking the definition valid for the
Prinserter:
Update Finish Definition
Definition name
Description
PRS310D
. . . . . : TESTDEF
. . . . . . . : test of prinserter
Type of Finishing
. . . . : 01
F3=Exit
Prinserter
F12=Cancel
If Copy Managem ent is used in the overlay intended to be used for the inserted pages, the
next screen m ust be filled in. The Prinserter definition will then check the overlay for the
num ber of pages defined in Copy Managem ent.
194
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . . PRINS
Description . . . . . . . .
................................................................
Ty :
:
: Already during the Prepare for Finishing function, the
:
: system has to know the number of copies of the individual
:
: page. If a succeeding merge with overlay function uses copy :
: management, you will have to tell here which overlay will
:
: be used during the merge function.
:
:
:
:
Overlay name . . . . . . . __________
:
:
File set . . . . . . . .
__________
:
:
Or
:
:
Selector name . . . . . . ________
:
:
Primary/Secondary set . . ____
*PRI, *SEC
:
:
:
: F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
:
:
:
:..............................................................:
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Now enter the fixed num ber of pages that should go into the envelope. If an enclosure is
required, this is included in this num ber.
Update Finishing Definition
Definition name
Description
. . . . :
. . . . . . .
TESTDEF
Mailing , 4 pages per envelope_
Type of Finishing
. . . . : 01
Pages per envelope
Enclosure . . . .
Flap size mm . . .
Seal envelope . .
.
.
.
.
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PRS310D
4___
____
____
____
Prinserter
*VAR, 1-5
*NO, *YES
36-61
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
Definition name:
Referred to by the AFC function C=Prepare for Finishing
Pages per envelope:
State a fixed set of pages, e.g. by stating 4 will produce 10 envelopes
from a 38 page spool entry.
W hen Description and Pages per envelope are filled in, pressing Enter will bring up the
screen above. Now fill in:
Enclosure:
Enclosures can be pre-folded, folded m anually, or folded by the
Prinserter.
Flap size m m :
Flap size of the Envelope m easured in m illim etres as the widest point
of the envelope flap. This is m ainly im portant in connection to sealing.
InterForm A/S 195
Seal envelope:
Seal envelope with water.
W hen pressing Enter the Prinserter definition is updated.
Go to section Using the Prinserter definition w ith Auto Forms Control on page 242 in
order to test the definition. You can use the spool entry which can be created under Service
Functions in the adm inistration m enu. This spool entry will be referred to for the exam ples in
the following sections.
Defining Prinserter® pre-process Definition. Variable number of
pages
The m ore advanced pre-processors can on basis of boolean equations determ ine the level
break between pages in a spool entry, and thereby allow varying num ber of pages to be
inserted into envelopes. The pre-processor can additionally define that the varying pages
should be sorted in to groups where each group contains a fixed num ber of pages. This is in
reality a postage group sorting m echanism .
Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups
Enter Menu point 4. Finishing Definitions in the Auto Form s Control m enu. Press F6 to
create a new Finishing definition and select 01 to m ake it valid for the Prinserter.
Create Finishing Definition
Definition name
. . . . :
PRS310D
TESTDEF
Description . . . . . . .
Pages per envelope . . . .
Our first Prinserter definition
*VAR
*VAR, 1-5
Flap size mm . . .
Seal envelope . .
Pages per envelope
Enclosure group-1
Pages per envelope
Enclosure group-2
Pages per envelope
Enclosure group-3
Pages per envelope
Enclosure group-4
Pages per envelope
Enclosure group-5
40
*YES
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
. . .
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
.
.
1
.
2
.
3
.
4
5
.
36-61
*NO, *YES
F3=Exit
Definition name:
F12=Cancel
Referred to by the sub-system function C=Prepare for Finishing
Pages per envelope: Define *VAR (Variable) for Pages per envelope
W hen Enter is pressed the above screen will appear. Now fill in:
196
Flap size m m :
Flap size of the Envelope m easured in m illim etres as the widest point of
the envelope flap. This is m ainly im portant in connection with sealing.
Seal envelope:
Seal envelope with water.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Pages per envelope
Group 1 - 5:
Up to 5 different postage franking groups can be defined. Valid values
are 1 to 5.
If none of the postage groups are defined, all pages will be printed to
the upper bin. If only the first group is filled in with 5 pages, all sets of
pages will be inserted into envelopes in the sam e order as the original
spool entry.
If m ore postage groups are filled in the original spool entry will be
sorted so sets of pages from 1 page to the num ber of pages defined in
group 1 are inserted first. Then sets with pages defined in group 1 plus
1 page, to the num ber defined in group 2, are inserted. etc.
If pages for one recipient exceeds the highest page count defined in
any group, these pages will be printed to the upper bin.
Any set of pages that exceeds 5 pages (excl. enclosure) will
autom atically be printed to the upper bin in order to be inserted
m anually into larger envelopes.
Enclosure Group 1-5: An enclosure can be defined for each of the groups, as this of course
affects the weight of the envelope. Valid values are 0=no enclosure
and 1=add enclosure
Example 1, Non sorted
W e want all sets of pages from 1 to 3 pages to be inserted in the sam e order as the original
spool entry. Sets of pages from 4 to m ore pages should not be inserted but be printed to the
upper bin. All envelopes should have en enclosure:
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
1
.
2
.
3
.
4
5
.
3
1
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Try stating 1 instead of 3 in the above sam ple for Pages per envelope Group 1 and run the
test spool entry with this definition com bined with the definitions of either exam ple 1 on page
239 Or exam ple 2 on page 240. You will then notice that the letters for Florence Flowers are
not inserted, as the num ber exceeds the m axim um num ber of sheets in one envelope defined
above.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page
238, to finalise the Prinserter definition.
Example 2, Sorting in Ascending Weight
Sam e exam ple as above, but all envelopes with only one page should be printed first, then
envelopes with 2 pages and finally all envelopes with 3 pages:
InterForm A/S 197
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
1
2
1
3
1
_
_
_
_
Try running this exam ple with the test spool entry com bined with the definitions of either
exam ple 1 on page 239 or exam ple 2 on page 240. You will then notice that the letters for
Forrest Friends are sorted so it is printed before the envelope with the two letters for Florence
Flowers.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page
238, to finalise the Prinserter definition.
Example 3 , Sorting in Franking groups:
By m easuring the weight of envelopes with varying num ber of pages we have determ ined that
an envelope with 2 page and 1 enclosure is within the lowest postage group inform ed by our
governm ental post office.
The next postage group allows m ax. 5 pages in all, which m eans we should decide if we want
to pay the higher charge just for adding the enclosure which will bring the total num ber of
pages in the envelope to 6. W e decide not to add an enclosure for these envelopes in order to
stay in the cheaper postage group.
W e enter the following definitions:
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
1
4
1
5
0
_
_
_
_
The above definition will cause all sets of pages of 1 or 2 to be inserted random ly according to
the input spool entry, but with an enclosure (ie. m ax. 3 sheets total). Secondly all sets with 3 or
4 pages plus an enclosure are processed (ie. m ax. 5 sheets total). Finally we prevent m oving
into the higher charge (which starts with 6 pages per envelope) by defining that envelopes with
5 pages should not have an enclosure.
W e do not have to take into account what to do when 6 or m ore pages are attem pted to be
inserted as InterForm 400 ® autom atically outputs these pages in the upper tray for m anual
insertion. It can then be decided at that stage if the enclosure should be added m anually.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page
238, to finalise the Prinserter definition.
198
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Defining PFE MailPrinter® Pre-process Definition
This pre-processor can on basis of boolean equations determ ine the level break between
pages in a spool entry, and thereby allow varying num ber of pages to be inserted into
envelopes. The pre-processor can additionally define that the varying pages should be sorted
in to groups where each group contains a fixed num ber of pages. This is in reality a postage
group sorting m echanism .
This function is typically used for m ailings which is based on the sam e num ber of pages for all
recipients.
Enter Menu point 4. Finishing Definitions on the m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control.
Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 04 for m aking the definition valid for the
PFE MailPrinter:
Update Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . : FINISHPFE
Description . . . . . . . : Finish definition for PFE Mail Printer
Type of Finishing
Envelope type
F3=Exit
. . . . : 04
. . . . . . .
2
PFE Mail-Printer
1 = Window envelope
2 = Printed envelope
F12=Cancel
Definition name:
Referred to by the sub-system function C=Prepare for Finishing
Envelope Type:
Here we can decide whether we use a window envelope, or we want to
use a plain envelope, where we get the possibility of printing on the
envelope.
InterForm A/S 199
Create Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . : PFEDEF1
Description . . . . . . . : Finish definition for PFE Mail Printer
Type of Finishing
Envelope type
. . . . : 04
. . . . . . : 2
PFE Mail-Printer
Printed envelope
Overlay for envelope
Overlay name . . . .
File set . . . . .
or selector . . . .
Primary / secondary
.
.
.
.
________
________
________
________
Overlay for contents
Overlay name . . . .
File set . . . . .
or selector . . . .
Primary / secondary
.
.
.
.
________
________
________
________
*PRI *SEC
F3=Exit
*PRI *SEC
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Overlay or Overlay Selector for envelope will only appear, if we have selected 2. Printed
envelope. This overlay could contain logo, sender address and a franking m ark. The definition
for placing the Recipient nam e and address on the printed envelope, should also be defined in
the envelope overlay. The envelope overlay MUST be in the sam e file set as the overlay for
the contents.
Overlay or Overlay Selector for contents should be filled in as per the requirem ent. Note if
Copy Managem ent is defined in the overlay for the contents, this will also be handled by
InterForm 400 ®. The overlay for the contents MUST be in the sam e file set as the overlay for
the Envelope.
! IMPORTANT !
W hen defining a 1. Merge with overlay in the Sub-system AutoForms Control following a
Finishing definition, the overlay name that should be referred to is the overlay for the contents
defined above and NOT for the envelope.
Defining Print Order of Sorted Groups
Enter Menu point 4. Finishing Definitions in the Auto Form s Control m enu. Press F6 to
create a new Finishing definition and select 01 to m ake it valid for the MailPrinter.
Update Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . : PFEDEF1
Description . . . . . . . : Finishing Definition for PFE MailPrinter
Type of Finishing
PFE Mail-Printer
Envelope type
. . . . . . : 2
Printed envelope
Seal envelope
. . . . . . . *YES
*NO, *YES
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
200
. . . . : 04
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
group-1
. . . .
group-2
. . . .
group-3
. . . .
group-4
. . . .
group-5
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Version 2014
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Seal envelope:
Seal envelope with water.
Pages per envelope
Group 1 - 5:
Up to 5 different postage franking groups can be defined. Valid values
are 1 to 5 .
If none of the postage groups are defined, all pages will be printed to
the upper bin. If only the first group is filled in with 5 pages, all sets of
pages will be inserted into envelopes in the sam e order as the original
spool entry.
If m ore postage groups are filled in the original spool entry will be
sorted so sets of pages from 1 page to the num ber of pages defined in
group 1 are inserted first. Then sets with pages defined in group 1 plus
1 page, to the num ber defined in group 2, are inserted. etc.
If pages for one recipient exceeds the highest page count defined in
any group, these pages will be printed to the upper bin.
Any set of pages that exceeds 5 pages (excl. enclosure) will
autom atically be printed to the upper bin in order to be inserted
m anually into larger envelopes.
Enclosure Group 1-5: An enclosure can be defined for each of the groups, as this of course
affects the weight of the envelope. Valid values are 0=no enclosure
and 1=add enclosure
Example 1, Non sorted
W e want all sets of pages from 1 to 3 pages to be inserted in the sam e order as the original
spool entry. Sets of pages from 4 to m ore pages should not be inserted but be printed to the
upper bin. All envelopes should have en enclosure:
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
1
.
2
.
3
.
4
.
5
.
3
1
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Try stating 1 instead of 3 in the above sam ple for Pages per envelope Group 1 and run the
test spool entry with this definition com bined with the definitions of either exam ple 1 on page
239 Or exam ple 2 on page 240. You will then notice that the letters for Florence Flowers are
not inserted, as the num ber exceeds the m axim um num ber of sheets in one envelope defined
above.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page
238, to finalise the PFE MailPrinter definition.
Example 2, Sorting in Ascending Weight
Sam e exam ple as above, but all envelopes with only one page should be printed first, then
envelopes with 2 pages and finally all envelopes with 3 pages:
InterForm A/S 201
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
1
2
1
3
1
_
_
_
_
Try running this exam ple with the test spool entry com bined with the definitions of either
exam ple 1 on page 239 or exam ple 2 on page 240. You will then notice that the letters for
Forrest Friends are sorted so it is printed before the envelope with the two letters for Florence
Flowers.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page
238, to finalise the PFE MailPrinter definition.
Example 3 , Sorting in Franking groups:
By m easuring the weight of envelopes with varying num ber of pages we have determ ined that
an envelope with 2 page and 1 enclosure is within the lowest postage group inform ed by our
governm ental post office.
The next postage group allows m ax. 5 pages in all, which m eans we should decide if we want
to pay the higher charge just for adding the enclosure which will bring the total num ber of
pages in the envelope to 6. W e decide not to add an enclosure for these envelopes in order to
stay in the cheaper postage group.
W e enter the following definitions:
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
Pages per
Enclosure
envelope
group-1
envelope
group-2
envelope
group-3
envelope
group-4
envelope
group-5
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
group
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
1
4
1
5
0
_
_
_
_
The above definition will cause all sets of pages of 1 or 2 to be inserted random ly according to
the input spool entry, but with an enclosure (ie. m ax. 3 sheets total). Secondly all sets with 3 or
4 pages plus an enclosure are processed (ie. m ax. 5 sheets total). Finally we prevent m oving
into the higher charge (which starts with 6 pages per envelope) by defining that envelopes with
5 pages should not have an enclosure.
W e do not have to take into account what to do when 6 or m ore pages are attem pted to be
inserted as InterForm 400 ® autom atically outputs these pages in the upper tray for m anual
insertion. It can then be decided at that stage if the enclosure should be added m anually.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page
238, to finalise the PFE MailPrinter definition.
202
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Defining Stapling Pre-process Definitions
Enter Menu point 4. Finishing Definitions on the m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control.
Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 02 for m aking the definition valid for
stapling:
Create Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . . STAPLE
Description . . . . . . . . test PH
Type of Finishing
. . . . . 02
F3=Exit
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Prinserter
Stapling per Recipient
Prepare for inserting
PFE Mail-Printer
Prepare for E-mail/Fax
PDF Filenaming
Reformat Spooled File
XML definition
F12=Cancel
If Copy Managem ent is used in the overlay intended to be used for the inserted pages, the
next screen m ust be filled in. The Prinserter definition will then check the overlay for the
num ber of pages defined in Copy Managem ent.
If the field below is left blank, and the overlay selected for the pages to be inserted does
contain Copy Managem ent, the result will be unpredictable. Note that the overlay entered here
is not necessarily the one being printed, but is m erely used for pre-defining a value for the
Copy Managem ent.
Create Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . . STAPLE
Description . . . . . . . . test PH
................................................................
Ty :
:
: All ready during the Prepare for Finishing function, the
:
: system has to know the number of copies of the individual
:
: page. If a succeeding merge with overlay function uses copy :
: management, you will have to tell here which overlay will
:
: be used during the merge function.
:
:
:
:
Overlay name . . . . . . . __________
:
:
File set . . . . . . . .
__________
:
:
Or
:
:
Selector name . . . . . . ________
:
:
Primary/Secondary set . . ____
*PRI, *SEC
:
:
:
: F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
:
:
:
:..............................................................:
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Select the printer m anufactorer and printer m odel via the screen below:
InterForm A/S 203
Select printer type for stapeling
Printer Manufacturer . . . . _
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
HP
Lexmark
IBM
Kyocera
Xerox
Océ
Canon
Ricoh
Minolta
Notice: Stapeling requieres use of
printertype HP4_PJL or HP4D_PJL.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Select U = User defined PJL to use your own self defined PJL sequences. Refer to page 369
for m ore inform ation.
Continue with section Define Level Break Conditions on page 238, to finalise the stapling
definition.
204
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Defining Insertion Pre-process Definitions
Enter Menu point 4. Finishing Definitions on the m enu 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control.
Enter F6 to create a new finishing definition and select 03 for m aking the definition valid for
external insertion system s:
Update Finish Definition
Definition name
Description
PRS310D
. . . . . : Stapltst
. . . . . . . : Test af stapling
Type of Finishing
. . . . : 03
Inserting equipment
. . . . __
Prepare for inserting
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
F3=Exit
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Prinserter
Stapling per Recipient
Prepare for inserting
PFE Mail-Printer
Prepare for E-mail/Fax
PDF Filenaming
Reformat Spooled File
XML definition
F12=Cancel
The inserter system s supported are:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Pitney Bowes OMR
PFE Minim ailer 2/3 Plus
BÖW E OMR
Neopost SI 68/72/76
Pitney Bowes BARCODE
PFE Autom ailer-2
Bell+Howell
Pitney Bowes OMR for DI380
Neopost BARCODE
Select 01 and press Enter to define the pre-process definitions for the Pitney Bowes insertion
system :
Update Finish Definition
PRS310D
Inserting equipment
. . . : Pitney Bowes
Placement of optical
Rotation . . . .
From top edge .
From left . . .
marks
. . . . ___
. . . . ______
. . . . ______
Print sequence . . . . . . . _
F3=Exit
1=Normal
2=Pages in reverse order
3=Reverse order per recipient
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 205
Placement of optical marks:
Refer to the docum entation of your insertion system for further inform ation on the optical
m arks.
Rotation:
The available values for rotation are: 000, 090, 180, 270
degrees.
From top edge:
Absolute m argin from top edge of the page dissolved in
inches and pels (see M easuring formats page 65).
From left edge:
Absolute m argin from the left edge of the page dissolved in
inches and pels (see M easuring formats page 65). Note that
this value will be added to the left m argin value of the overlay
com m and type 8. Tabulator.
Print Sequence:
This option defines the order which the pages should be output from InterForm400 ®:
Norm al:
The output order m atches the input order.
Pages in reverse
order:
The output order of the entire print job is reversed.
Reverse order per
recipient:
The output order is only inversed within the sam e recipient
according to the level break conditions.
Press Enter to continue defining the Pitney Bowes pre-processing:
Update Finish Definition
Inserting equipment
PRS310D
. . . : Pitney Bowes
Max. pages per envelope
. . ___
What to do if more than max
pages to a recipient . . . . _
Can there be code for outsorting in the printout . . _
1=Outsorting
2=More than 1 envelope
1=Yes
2=No
If YES to the above
Line number . . . . . . ___
Position . . . . . . . . ___
Value . . . . . . . . . _
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
M ax. pages per envelope:
206
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
This indicates the maxim um pages to be inserted into an
envelope. InterForm 400 ® will insert a “close envelope”
com m and at this point.
Version 2014
W hat to do if more than max. pages to a recipient:
Outsorting.
InterForm 400 ® will inform the Insertion system to outsort the pages for
this recipient ID according to the selections on the next screen.
M ore than 1 envelope:
InterForm 400 ® will autom atically continue insertion in new envelopes.
Can there be code for outsorting in the printout:
Yes:
InterForm 400 ® will insert the outsorting com m and selected on the
next screen, only when the code value defined below is found.
No:
InterForm 400 ® will insert the outsorting com m and selected on the
next screen, whenever a set of pages for a recipient exceeds the
num ber defined in M ax. pages per envelope.
If YES to the above.
Line number.
The line num ber to find the outsorting code
Position:
The coloum n position to find the outsorting code
Value:
The character value for the outsorting code, that will inform
InterForm 400 ® to insert the outsorting com m and according to the
selection on the next screen.
Press Enter to define the type of Outsorting m ark:
Update Finish Definition
Inserting equipment
PRS310D
. . . : Pitney Bowes
Which types of marks are used
1=Select
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Benchmark (BM)
End of collation (EOC)
End of collation mark absence (ECA)
Beginning of collation (BOC)
Divert to Deck (DTD)
Wrap around sequence (WAS) Ascending
Wrap around sequence (WAD) Decending
Parity (PR)
Safty (SF)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Refer to the docum entation of your Pitney Bowes insertion system for a thorough description
of the outsorting m arks.
W hen filled in press Enter, and continue with the next section Define Level Break
Conditions.
Example: Neopost BARCODE
For the Neopost barcode (and others) the screens look a bit different. After the copy
m anagem ent screen (which is shown for all inserter definitions) this screen is shown:
InterForm A/S 207
Update Finish Definition
Inserting equipment
PRS310D
. . . : Neopost BARCODE
Barcode reader configuration - Please refer to the Neopost bar code scheme manual
Number of digits in N of M . . . .
Swap N AND M . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of digits in sheet sequence
Number of digits in group sequence
Use insert/acumulate codes . . . .
Use divert-1 codes . . . . . . . .
Use divert-2 codes . . . . . . . .
Number of selective input feeders
Seeling control . . . . . . . . .
Number of envelope selections . .
Number of exit selections . . . .
Stop function . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 - 2
1=Yes
0 - 3
0 - 3
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
0 - 7
1=Yes
0 - 3
0 - 3
1=Yes
F3=Exit
2=No
2=No
2=No
2=No
2=No
2=No
F12=Cancel
Please refer to the Neopost barcode docum entation for details of the options above.
On the next screen you define which code 39 barcode you want to use, where to print it and if
you want out sorting (pages that should not be inserted into envelopes) and how to identify
pages to be out sorted:
Update Finish Definition
PRS310D
Inserting equipment
. . . : Neopost BARCODE
Placement of barcode
Rotation . . . .
From top edge .
From left . . .
Font . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 000
. 1,000
. 1,000
. 4600
Can there be code for outsorting in the printout . . 2
If YES to the above
Line number . . . . . .
Position . . . . . . . .
Value . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
4600-4699
1=Yes
2=No
0
0
F12=Cancel
On the next screen you setup the spooled file attributes of the new spooled files created by
this definition:
208
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update Finish Definition
Inserting equipment
PRS310D
. . . : Neopost BARCODE
Form type
Normal print
Max pages in an envelope
3
Max number of envelopes
to a recipient
User data
MAX3
2
Recipients with more
than max envelopes
MORE6
Out sorting
NO_ENVELOP
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
W ith the setup above 3 kinds of PRSPRINT spooled files m ight be created:
Form type=M AX3
Envelopes is allowed to contain up to m ax. 3 pages above. Spooled
files containing pages to be inserted into envelopes will get the form
type M AX3.
Form type=M ORE6
Above we only allow 2 envelopes for each recipient (each containing up
to 3 pages), so it m eans that pages for custom ers that are to get m ore
than 6 pages will get the form type: MORE6. These pages m ight be
m erged and printed and m anually put into envelopes.
Form type=NO_ENVELOP
If you have setup a condition for out sorting, then these pages will get
the form type NO_ENVELOP in this case.
On the next page you can have one or m ore sequence num bers:
Work with Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
PRS320D
NEO_BAR
Start with . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
Seqnbr.
001
5=Display
Description
all
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
For each sequence num ber you define this:
InterForm A/S 209
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
Page selection criteria
Print line
PRS330D
NEO_BAR
1
all
Position
-
Oper
Compare value
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
13
57 - 60
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
This works exactly as for the sorting definition. If the text found stated as recipient ID above
changes, then InterForm 400 will insert the pages into a new envelope. This inform ation should
norm ally be the custom er num ber or a docum ent num ber if you prefer to create a letter for
each docum ent. If the page selection criteria is blank, then the data of the recipient is retrieved
from all pages in the spooled file.
If the custom er num ber is only found on the first page of each docum ent, then you need to set
a Page selection criteria, which only selects the first page of each docum ent e.g. like this:
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
Page selection criteria
Print line
1
PRS330D
NEO_BAR
1
all
Position
1 8
-
Oper
EQ
Compare value
Page
1
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
13
57 - 60
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
Sim ular you can add m ultiple sequence num bers if the recipient ID is not found in a fixed line.
Refer to page 217 for additional exam ples of how this screen can be setup.
210
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
How to distribute E-mails and faxes in InterForm400®:
You can send em ails from InterForm 400 with a few em ail com m ands (e.g. MRGSPLFPDF),
but norm al distribution of em ail should norm ally be done with the feature described below.
Setup of E-m ailing is done in three steps:
1. Create a new type of finishing Definition (Type 05=E-m ail). This splits up the spool file
depending on the spool file page data and places details in an extra header page of each
PRSPRINT spooled file, that is generated (one spooled file per em ail).
2. Insert execution of the e-m ail Finishing Definition in Auto Form s Control. This will generate
two kinds of spooled files: PRSPRINT spooled files and a NONM AIL spooled file (containing
the pages where no em ail/fax receiver could be found).
3. Insert execution of function P=Send PDF E-m ail in Auto Form s Control. This definition
should only accept the PRSPRINT spooled files generated by the em ail finishing definition
above.
Note, that the E-m ail/Fax finishing definition can send both e-m ail and faxes in one procedure
(Faxing requires purchase of InterFax). If both a fax num ber and an e-m ail is found in the
spooled file or returned via a program for one custom er then InterForm 400 will use the e-m ail
address. (If the field for the e-m ail address is blank InterForm 400 will look for a fax num ber).
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule or the classic package for
InterForm 400.
The E-mail/Fax Finishing Definition
You can work with the finishing functions if you from the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu choose 5.
W ork with Auto Forms Control and 4. Finish Definitions. You can now add a new finishing
Definition by pressing F6:
Create Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . . DEMO______
Description . . . . . . . . Distribution of the Demo spool file____________
Type of Finishing
F3=Exit
. . . . . 05
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Prinserter
Stapling per Recipient
Prepare for inserting
PFE Mail-Printer
Prepare for E-mail/Fax
PDF Filenaming
Reformat Spooled File
F12=Cancel
W e are creating a new finishing definition for the InterForm 400 Dem o spool file.
Press Enter to create the finishing definition:
InterForm A/S 211
Work with E-mail/Fax definition
MAI300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Select one of the following options:
1. How to find E-mail address / Fax number
2. Key definition
3. Definition variables
4. Default PDF-file name
5. Definition E-mail text / Cover page text
6. Definition recipient-ID
7. E-mail addresses and Fax numbers
8. Senders E-mail address
9. Encryption and Signature
10. PDF bookmark definition
11. PDF embedding definition
12. OutBox directory
13. Mail text embedded images
14. Email address syntax error handler
15. Archive in InterArchive
Option: __
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Below we go through the elem ents of the E-m ail finishing definition and do the necessary
setup in order to distribute the Dem o spool file.
1. How to find E-mail address / Fax number
Work with E-mail/Fax definition
MAI300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spooled file
How to find E-mail address / Fax number
Select one of the following options:
1. By key
2. By user exit program
3. Find in spooled file
Option:
_
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
On the screen above you define how you intend to determ ine the e-m ail address or fax
num ber to send to for the individual pages. The selection here affects these other options:
212
1. By key
It will open up option '2. Key definitions' but with the user exit
program disabled. Also option '7. E-m ail addresses and Fax
num bers ' will be enabled.
2. By user exit program
W ill open up option '2. Key definitions' with the user exit
program enabled. Option '7. E-m ail addresses and Fax
num bers ' will be disabled.
3. Find in spooled file
Options '2. Key definition' and '7. E-m ail addresses and Fax
num bers' will both be disabled. (The elem ents for the e-m ail
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
is found in option '6. Definition recipient-ID'). Please refer to
special instructions on page 220.
2. Key definitions
Change E-mail/Fax key definition
MAI310D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Length key field-1 . . .
Field type key field-1 .
Allow blank key field-1
Key field-1 description
.
.
.
.
__4 (1 - 30)
1
1=Numeric 2=Alfanum. 3=Alfanum. lowercase
N
(Y N)
Customer number_____
Length key field-2 . . .
Field type key field-2 .
Allow blank key field-2
Key field-2 description
.
.
.
.
___ (1 - 30)
_
1=Numeric 2=Alfanum. 3=Alfanum. lowercase
_
(Y N)
____________________
Length key field-3 . . .
Field type key field-3 .
Allow blank key field-3
Key field-3 description
.
.
.
.
___ (1 - 30)
_
1=Numeric 2=Alfanum. 3=Alfanum. lowercase
_
(Y N)
____________________
Mail exit program . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
__________
__________
*NONE, name
F12=Cancel
Up to 3 keys can be defined. They are identifying the custom ers by e.g. custom er num ber,
departm ent or nam e. These are the identifiers, that are looked for in the spool file.
You can decide to call a m ail exit program . The finishing definition nam e, all keys and
variables are transferred to the program , that can return e.g. what e-m ail address to send to.
Sources for m ail exit program s can be seen in m em ber, MAILEXIT, MAILEXIT02,
MAILEXIT03 and MAILEXIT04 in source file, APISRC in library, APF3812:
M AILEXIT
M AILEXIT02
M AILEXIT03
M AILEXIT04
This is the first dem o source that was m ade. (Use form at = 01 when calling
this). This program is m ainly included backwards com patibility.
This is called with param eter form at=02. W ith this you can return the type of
text for the contents of the e-m ail. Refer to the description of 'Text and form at' on page 216 for m ore details.
Called with param eter form at=03. Includes the functions of MAILEXIT02 and
includes also the possibility to return an additional receiver of the e-m ail (CC:).
Called with param eter form at=04. Includes the functions of MAILEXIT03 plus
these param eters:
RTNTXTTYP
Tells InterForm 400 how to handle the text found in
&RTNTXT01-10 - or if to use an external htm l file.
RTNM SGSTM F
IF RTNTXTTYP is ‘X’ then the path and nam e of the
html stream file is to be placed in this param eter.
RTNUSRPW D
The user passw ord to the PDF file (The Digital
Signature/PDF Security m odule is required.)
CODPAG
The codepage in which the returned param eters
m ust be written - this norm ally contains the spooled
file codepage as inform ation for your exit program . If
the AFC codepage is as *SPLFATR, then this
contains the spooled file code page (if defined) or the
codepage set in AFC.
RTNTXTVER
Return text version. The text version in the
e-m ail finishing definition to use (sam e as
RTNTXTFNT in MAILEXIT03).
InterForm A/S 213
Apart from this you can return the nam e and e-m ail address of up to 3
receivers - not counting the CC: and BCC: receivers.
This dem o CL-program (MAILEXIT04) can only be com piled in V5R2 or later
because of the num ber of param eters. Refer to the source m em ber for
additional details.
M AILEXIT05
Called with param eter form at=05. This includes the param eters of
MAILEXIT04 plus the param eter:
RTNBCCADR
The return BCC e-m ail address to send to.
M AILEXIT06
Called with param eter form at=06. This is a unicode version of MAILEXIT05 m aking it possible to specify param eters for faxing/e-m ailing in unicode.
Please note that this form at can only be used when the prepare for finishing
job specifies Unicode output = *YES.
M AILEXIT07
Called with param eter form at=07. This includes the param eters of
MAILEXIT05 except that you can now define up to 9 receivers of the e-m ail:
RTNTOADR1 - RTNTOADR9
The e-m ail addresses of the up to 9 e-m ail receivers.
RTNTONAM 1 - RTNTONAM 9
The nam es of the receivers.
RTNSECATM sets an extra optional attachm ent.
M AILEXIT08
Called with param eter form at=08. The param eter is a data structure which
m ay be extended in future versions of InterForm 400. The m ain addition is that
an array of the 99 variables are included. Please notice that the RTNSECATM
field is the return secondary attachm ent (an extra optional attachm ent - you
set this to the IFS path to the file).
If you want to send to an em ail group (as defined as described on page 375), then the m ail exit
program should return the nam e of the em ail group as the ‘Recipient nam e’, and the E-m ail
address should be *GROUP. This can e.g. be done with these com m ands in the program :
CHGVAR
VAR(&RTNTOADR) VALUE('*GROUP')
CHGVAR
VAR(&RTNTONAM) VALUE('SALES_GRP')
(The group nam e m ust be written in capital letters).
M WARNING M
All exit programs called by InterForm400 ® must be owned by QSECOFR. If it is not the AFC
job will halt with an error message. Change the owner with the command:
CHGOBJOW N OBJ(library/program) OBJTYPE(*PGM) NEW OW N(QSECOFR). Refer to page
154 for requirements in order to be able to change the owner.
In this exam ple we intend to use the 4 digit custom er num ber as the only key. If the spooled
file includes the E-m ail address in every page the keys are not necessary - just select '3. Find
in spooled file' in option '1. How to find E-m ail address / Fax num ber ' and specify the position
in option '6. Definition recipient-ID '.
214
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
3. Definition variables
Change variables
MAI315D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Variable
*V01
*V02
*V03
*V04
*V05
*V06
*V07
*V08
*V09
*V10
*V11
Length
_25
_25
__4
_50
___
___
___
___
___
Description
Company name_______
Contact person_____
Customer number____
Subject____________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
___________________
+
Note:
By using variables *V01-*V09 only, *V1-*V9 can be used as aliases for
variables *V01-*V09.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Up to 99 variables can be defined. They are read from the contents of each spool file page.
The variables can be referred to in the subject, e-m ail text, the nam e of the attached PDF file,
the receiver E-m ail address and receiver nam e. The variables are inserted as *V01 .. *V99
(use upper case 'V').
Above only the length of the variables are defined. Later on we define from where the variables
should be fetched (That could depend of the contents of each page).
4. Default PDF-file name
Here you can specify a default nam e for the attached PDF file. This nam e can be overridden
for specific e-m ail text definitions.
Work with Default PDF-file name
MAI305D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Note: *NONE (in upper case) will result in an email without attachment.
Default PDF-file name
. .
Document_*V03.PDF__________________________________
If you set the PDF file nam e to be *NONE (in upper case), then no PDF file will be attached
when sending out the em ail. Please notice, that when calling the P = Send PDF em ail / Fax
function an overlay or overlay selector is still required, but this will not be used when specifying
*NONE above.
5. Definition E-mail text / Cover page text
InterForm 400 provides you with the possibility to include various texts in the e-m ail depending
on who you are e-m ailing to. To do that you sim ply create 2 or m ore e-m ail texts.
Below one E-m ail text definition is m ade.
InterForm A/S 215
Change E-mail / cover page text
Definition name . . . . :
Description . . . . . . :
DEMO
Distribution of the Demo spool file
E-mail text version
GB________
. . :
MAI345D
Description . . . . . . .
Demo spool file (English ver.)__
E-mail subject . . . . . .
*V04____________________________________________
Text and -format . . . . .
H
T=Text, H=HTML, R=Raw HTML, X=External
E-mail text . . . . . . .
For *V02, *V01.____________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Please read the attached file containing a message for you from____________
InterForm A/S._____________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
The reason why you have received this mail is, that you are registered as__
our contact person at *V01.________________________________________________
Please let us know, if that is incorrect.__________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Adjustment . . . . . . . .
U
(U C R)
PDF-file name . . . . . .
*DEFAULT________________________________________
Secondary attachment . . .
/APF3812Home/Work/MyFile.PDF____________________
Fax cover page overlay . :
IF400DEMO_
Name, *NONE
F4=Prompt
File set . . . . . . . .
SAMPLE____
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The E-m ail text version is a nam e identifying this e-m ail text. Here we have created a text
definition, that could be used for the english speaking custom ers (GB).
Text and -format:
W ith this you specify how the e-m ail text is to be presented in the final
e-m ail:
T=Text
The contents is shown in a fixed font (courier).
H=HTM L
HTML codes autom atically inserted so the contents are shown in a
proportional font (arial).
R=Raw HTM L Raw HTML codes in the contents can be included.
X=External
Use an external htm l file in the IFS for the contents of the e-m ail. If
you select ‘X’ you will be prom pted for the file nam e and path. You
can even use the variables *V01-*V09 in the text of the htm l file. The
text in the htm l file m ust be utf-8 encoded.
As the subject of the m ail the subject from the spool file is used (*V4). In the m essage text we
insert both the nam e of the receiver (*V2) and the com pany nam e (*V1). Variables could also
be specified for the PDF file nam e.
Like the variables you can also insert either *FROM or *TO in order to insert the nam e of either
the sender or receiver of the e-m ail.
W e can create several different text definitions - e.g. one for each language code.
Adjustment can also be selected for the com plete e-m ail text: U=Unadjusted, C=Centred,
R=Right adjusted.
If you set the PDF-file name to be *NONE (in upper case), then no PDF file will be attached
when sending out the em ail. Please notice, that when calling the P = Send PDF em ail / Fax
function an overlay or overlay selector is still required, but this will not be used when specifying
*NONE above. Even if you specify *NONE for the PDF-file nam e above you can still specify
and use a secondary attachm ent.
The fax cover page overlay is for fax support only. Faxing directly from InterForm 400 requires
the InterFax m odule.
W hen you insert variables in the subject of the m ail: Make sure, that you leave enough space,
so that the contents of the variable can be inserted on the sam e line.
216
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Secondary attachment
If you want to add an extra attachm ent (apart from the PDF file, which
is the result of a m erge between the overlay and a spooled file), then
you can specify it here. Specify *NONE, if you do not want an extra
attachm ent.
G NOTE G
From the 2007 versions the text you write is converted so it is really ‘W hat You See Is W hat
You Get’. In older versions a conversion would happen if you typed in the text using a 5250
session running a different code page than the one used for the P=Send Mail function.
6. Definition recipient-ID
A Recipient-ID is a description, that tells where to find the keys and variables on the spool file
pages. This is com bined with a page selection criteria, that is already known from the sorting
definition. The page selection criteria m akes it possible to find the keys and variables in
different places on the page depending on e.g. if either 'INVOICE' or 'CREDIT NOTE' is found
in a special place.
In this exam ple the keys and variables are always placed in a fixed position, and therefore the
page selection criteria is left blank.
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
PRS330D
DEMO
1
Demo Spool: Get keys and vars.
Page selection criteria
Print line
___
___
___
Position
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper
____
____
____
Compare value
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
_13
_57 - _60
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
F18=DSPSPLF
The functionality of F13 and F18 is described for the split defintion, which is found on page
183.
The Page selection criteria:
If all pages in a spooled file contains the recipient ID and variables in fixed positions, then you
can do like above using only one sequence num ber and keeping the page selection criteria
blank.
If you have m ultiple docum ents inside a spooled file and only the first page of each docum ent
contains the data for the variables, then you could use a condition for the page selection
criteria like below:
InterForm A/S 217
Create Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . .
Description . . . . . . .
Page selection criteria
Print line
1
PRS330D
DEMO
1
Demo Spool: Get keys and vars.
Position
1 8
-
Oper
EQ
Compare value
Page
1
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
13
57 - 60
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
F18=DSPSPLF
If the data for the variables and e.g. the recipient ID is m oving up and down from page to
page, then you can use m ultiple sequence num bers each with a special page selection criteria
like below:
Create Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . .
Description . . . . . . .
Page selection criteria
Print line
13
PRS330D
DEMO
1
Get keys and vars in line 13
Position
40 - 51
-
Oper
EQ
Compare value
Customer No:
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
13
57 - 60
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
218
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
F18=DSPSPLF
Create Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . .
Description . . . . . . .
Page selection criteria
Print line
14
PRS330D
DEMO
2
Get keys and vars in line 14
Position
40 - 51
-
Oper
EQ
Compare value
Customer No:
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
14
57 - 60
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
F18=DSPSPLF
If you want that not all of the pages are em ailed, then you can e.g. m ake sure that the em ail
address for those pages is set to blanks.
Please note: You CANNOT exclude pages from being em ailed by excluding the pages via the
page selection criteria. Any page not selected by any page selection criteria will be
included/em ailed together with the last/previous selected page. If you e.g. im agine the 4 page
dem o spooled file of InterForm 400 (which you can print out via option 1 in the service m enu),
then this single sequence num ber will em ail all pages to the sam e recipient (as only the first
page of the spooled file is selected):
(The page selection criteria is only true for page 1 in the spooled file).
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
PRS330D
DEMO
1
Demo Spool: Get keys and vars.
Page selection criteria
Print line
13
___
___
Position
57 - 60
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper
EQ
____
____
Compare value
1004
______________________________
______________________________
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
_13
_57 - _60
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
F18=DSPSPLF
Regarding the recipient ID:
You should also specify the recipient ID’s (=keys) in the bottom . This is used as a way to force
a level break.
Norm ally it is advisable to specify all of the keys (and only the keys) here. But you can use this
to split up one e-m ail into several: A problem could be, that one E-m ail address (=one set of
keys) is sent to for several com panies, but in order to ease distribution you want to create one
InterForm A/S 219
E-m ail per com pany. Specify for recipient ID a place on the page, that identifies the different
com panies (as well as the keys), and that is done autom atic. Press Enter.
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
PRS330D
TEST3
1
Demo Spool: Get keys and vars.
Enter where to find key(s) and variables in the print.
Field
Key-1
Key-2
Key-3
*V01
*V02
*V03
*V04
Description
Customer Number
Company Name
Contact Name
Customer number
Subject
Length
4
0
0
25
25
4
50
F3=Exit
Printline
_13_
____
____
__6_
_11_
_13_
_15_
Startposition
_57_
____
____
__8_
_13_
_57_
__8_
F12=Cancel
On this screen you define where the keys and variables should be found for the page selection
stated on the last screen. If you in option '1. How to find E-m ail address / Fax num ber' defined,
that you want to find the e-m ail address in the spooled file this screen will look like below:
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
Enter where
Field
*MAILADR
*NAME
*CCADR
*CCNAME
*FAXNO
*TXTVRS
*V01
*V02
*V03
PRS330D
DEMOSPLF
001
all
to find key(s) and variables in the print.
Description
Length
Printline
Position
Recipient email adr
1
1
Recipient name
50
11
13
CC email adr
CC Name
50
Fax number
25
Text version
4
13
57
Company
40
6
8
Contact Person
40
11
13
Document number
4
13
57
F3=Exit
Prefix
TEXT
F12=Cancel
In the screen above we im agine that we under ‘5. Definition E-m ail text / Cover page text’
defined text versions nam ed ‘TEXT1001', ‘TEXT1003' and ‘TEXT1004' for the dem o Spooled
file - and we expect the e-m ail address would be added in line 1 from position 1. W e use the
prefix ‘TEXT’ and add the 4 digit num ber found in line 13 in position 57 after this prefix.
If we want to get the receiving e-m ail address in the spooled file and we want just 1 fixed text
version we can define the whole text version name without any spooled file data like below:
(Clear the Length, Print line and Position for the *TXTVRS line).
220
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Update Finish Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
Enter where
Field
*MAILADR
*NAME
*CCADR
*CCNAME
*FAXNO
*TXTVRS
*V01
*V02
*V03
PRS330D
DEMOSPLF2
001
all
to find key(s) and variables in the print.
Description
Length
Printline
Position
Recipient email adr
1
1
Recipient name
50
11
13
CC email adr
CC Name
50
Fax number
25
Text version
Company
40
6
8
Contact Person
40
11
13
Document number
4
13
57
F3=Exit
Prefix
TEXT
F12=Cancel
If you use a setup like above then you need just one text version nam ed ‘TEXT’ in option ‘5.
Definition E-m ail text / Cover page text’.
If you want to send to an em ail group (defined as described on page 375), you should as the
*MAILADR refer to a place in the spooled file with the text ‘*GROUP’ (this m ust be inserted in
the spooled file), and *NAME should refer to a place, where the nam e of the em ail group is
found in the spooled file.
7. E-mail addresses and fax numbers
E-mail addresses and fax num bers are lists of addresses, that InterForm 400 can send to.
The addresses are identified by the keys defined earlier. For each set of key(s) the e-m ail/fax
address, the nam e of the person, e-m ail text version and a password for the attached PDF (if
used) are registered.
Please notice that you can press <Page Dow n> on the address to add up to 3 receivers of the
e-m ail for the current key value. (You can also select m ultiple receivers with the e-m ail exit
program MAILEXIT04.)
G NOTE G
This option is only open if you have selected '1. By key' in option '1. How to find E-m ail
address / Fax num ber'.
M WARNING M
Password protection of the PDF file requires a purchase of the Digital Signature/PDF security
module for InterForm400.
InterForm A/S 221
Work with E-mail addresses and fax numbers
MAI320D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Position to . . . . . .
_______________________
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
Customer number
5=Display
Customer number
1004
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Press F6-Create to add a new E-m ail address or fax num ber:.
Create E-mail address / Fax number
MAI330D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Customer number
. . : 1001
Recipient name . . . . Herring Marine Research___________________________
E-mail address . . . . [email protected]_______________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________
More...
Or .. Fax number . . . ________________________
CC Recipient name . . __________________________________________________
CC E-mail address . . _______________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________
E-mail text version . GB________ F4=Prompt
PDF User Password . . ___________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
The M ore... text in the screen above indicates, that you can add additional receivers: If you
press the <PageDown>/<PageUp> keys on your keyboard you can roll through all of the up to
9 possible receivers.
If you want to send to an em ail group (as defined as described on page 375), you should state
the nam e of the em ail group as the ‘Recipient nam e’ above, and the E-m ail address should be
*GROUP.
The Recipient nam e above can be referred to as *TO in the e-m ail text definition above (option
4).
For each receiver you specify what e-m ail text version to use.
Note: Use the com m and APF3812/W RKM AILADR to give users access to these addresses
without entering InterForm 400 - see page 468.
G NOTE G
A PDF user passw ord can only be used if the InterForm 400 security m odule is enabled.
222
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
G NOTE G
From the 2007 versions the text you write is converted so it is really ‘W hat You See Is W hat
You Get’. In older versions a conversion would happen if you typed in the text using a 5250
session running a different code page than the one used for the P=Send Mail function. So type
a ‘@ ’ in the 5250 session (in the e-m ail address) not m atter what code page you run.
8. Senders E-mail address
Work with E-mail sender information
MAI350D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Distribution of the Demo spool file
Code for sender
. . . . . . 1
1=Use fixed sender
2=Use owner of spooled file as sender
3=If possible, use owner of spooled file,
else use fixed sender.
Organisation . . . . . . . . __________
(When 'Code for sender' = 2 or 3)
Fixed sender name . . . . . Kim Egekjaer____________________________________
Fixed sender E-mail adr. . . [email protected]________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________
Send Bcc to sender . . . . . N
(Y N)
E-mail adr for Bcc copy . . _______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________ blank = senders E-mail adr
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
In this option you specify who should be specified as sender on the e-m ails:
1=Use fixed sender:
Use the nam e and E-m ail address specified in the bottom for all E-m ails.
2=Use ow ner of spooled file as sender:
If you specify this, then the user profile of the original spool file will be retrieved, and the nam e
and E-m ail address is extracted from inform ation in the list of E-m ail sender addresses found
in 8. W ork with E-mail senders in the Auto Form s Control m enu. Note, that when you do
this, then the sender e-m ail address will be found by going through this list in this specific order
when com paring with the registrations in 'W ork with E-m ail senders':
1. User profile and organisation
2. User profile
3. Organisation
3=If possible, use ow ner of spooled file, else use fixed sender.
A com bination of the two codes above.
You can decide, that the sender should receive a copy (BCC - Blind Carbon Copy) of the sent
E-m ails.
Organisation: If filled out it can be used for the digital signature. Then it will be the digital
signature of this organisation that is used for authentication of the PDF file
and not the personal digital signature.
InterForm A/S 223
G NOTE G
From the 2007 versions the text you write is converted so it is really ‘W hat You See Is W hat
You Get’. In older versions a conversion would happen if you typed in the text using a 5250
session running a different code page than the one used for the P=Send Mail function. So you
should type in a ‘@ ’ in the e-m ail address regardless of the code page you currently run.
9. Encryption and Signature
M WARNING M
Password protection and/or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of the Digital
Signature/PDF security module for InterForm400.
Work with Encryption and Signature Information
MAI380D
Definition name . . . . . : FILENAME
Description . . . . . . . : file naming
Type choices, press Enter.
Encryption information
Encrypt PDF File . . . . . . . . . N
User Access Restrictions . . . . . *NONE___
________
________
(Y=Yes, N=No)
*NONE, *NOPRINT ...
... *NOCOPY, *NOEDIT
New PDF Master Password . . . . .
Confirm Password . . . . . . . . .
Old password, when change . . . .
Digital Signature Information
Digitally Sign PDF File . . . . . N
Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . __________
Organisation . . . . . . . . . . . __________
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
(Y=Yes, N=No)
Name, *OWNER
F12=Cancel
In this screen you can specify if you want to encrypt or digitally sign the attached PDF file - if
you e-m ail.
Here is the explanations of the fields to fill in:
Encrypt PDF File:
State 'Y' if you want to encrypt the PDF file.
PDF M aster Passw ord:
State a password if needed, that will open all the created PDF files
with authority to do all.
User access limitations:
*NONE
Use this if you want no lim itations on what the receiver can do with the
created PDF file.
*NOPRINT
This lim itation m ake it im possible to print the PDF file.
*NOCOPY
Disables the possibility to copy the contents (text or graphics) of the
PDF file.
*NOEDIT
Makes it im possible to edit the PDF file.
Digitally Sign PDF File:
Enables inclusion of a digital signature in the PDF file.
Personal Certificate:
224
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Here you can either state the nam e of an already installed certificate
or refer to the certificate of the spooled files owner or sender.
Version 2014
Organisation:
If you state *OW NER or *SENDER as the personal certificate, then
the organisation stated will be used for looking up in the table shown
in option '8. W ork with E-mail senders' on the Auto Form s Control
m enu.
In this m anner you can insert different signatures for the sam e
sender/owner depending on the organisation related to the current
distribution (or finishing definition). Refer to details of '8. W ork with
E-mail senders' below for m ore inform ation.
G NOTE G
Digital signatures and passwords can only be used if you have bought the Digital
Signature/PDF security m odule of InterForm 400!
10. PDF bookmark definition
Work with Bookmark definition name
MAI390D
Definition name . . . . . : EMAILFAX
Description . . . . . . . : emailfax test
Bookmark definition name . .
F3=Exit
__________
F4=Prompt
Name, *NONE
F4=List
F12=Cancel
If you decide, that the attached PDF file (if you e-m ail) should include bookm arks, you can
specify what bookm ark definition to use here. If you want no bookm arks you can state *NONE.
Refer to page 277 for m ore inform ation about the PDF bookm arks.
11. PDF embedding definition
If you have purchased the PDF em bed m odule and want to em bed one or m ore files within the
PDF file, that will be em ailed, then you can use this option to select an em bedding definition:
InterForm A/S 225
Work with PDF embedding definition
MAI392D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMOEMAIL2
Description . . . . . . . : email the demo splf
PDF embedding definition . . EMBED
F3=Exit
Name, *NONE
F4=Prompt
F4=List
F12=Cancel
State *NONE if you do not want to em bed any files in the PDF file.
12. OutBox directory
W ith this option you can state a special output directory in which to place the outgoing e-m ail.
The directory is a subdirectory inside /APF3812Mail/OutBox/. The subdirectory will be created ,
it it does not exist. If you use the default value of *NONE, then the e-m ail will be stored in
/APF3812Mail/OutBox/.
G NOTE G
Rem em ber to regularly clean up old e-m ails. This should be done with the com m and
APF3812/CLRMAILLOG. Refer to page 463 for details.
13. Mail text embedded images
W hen you want to include im ages in the em ail contents you need to use htm l. (Refer to page
215 for how to use htm l). W ith InterForm 400 you can em bed local im ages within the htm l
instead of referring to globally available im ages.
If you do not em bed the im ages in the htm l you will need to link to globally available im ages in
your htm l. Linking to im ages (instead of em bedding) has these downsides:
a. Som e receivers will see this m essage when opening your em ails:
(The m essage above occours if the receiver has chosen not autom atically to download the
im ages referred to in em ails).
b. In worse cases the public im age has been rem oved and the link in the em ail refers to a nonexisting im age. Then the receiver will see this:
So to avoid this you should use this way of em bedding local im ages directly in the htm l.
226
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The em bedded im ages can be selected in these 2 ways:
1.
State only the image nam e in the htm l file (as <im g src="im age in IFS">) and set the
directory in which they are found via this option.
2.
Refer to an im age in htm l as cid:image1. Then the image including the path m ust be
specified below:
Work with Mail text embedded images
MAI396D
Definition name . . . . . : MAILEXIT
Description . . . . . . . : demo mail exit 08
File or directory
. . . . . /apf3812home/work/myfile.jpg
Note:
Specify an image file to be embedded as "cid:image1", or
specify a directory to embedd images by name.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
You can also use variables as part of the path or im age nam e(s).
Below an exam ple of each use is illustrated with an exam ple:
1. State only the image nam e in the html file:
The screen above should state the path to the images (e.g. /apf3812hom e/work) and you
sim ply state the im age nam es in the htm l file:
<html>
<head>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1">
<title>Insert title here</title>
</head>
<body>
This is an image: <img src="image_file.jpg">.</body>
</html>
2. Refer to an image in html as cid:image1.
If you have specified the image including the full path in the screen shot above, then you can
refer to the im age inside the htm l like below:
<img src="cid:image1">
As any variables referenced in the htm l file are substituted initially you can even use variables
as a part of the im age nam e e.g.: <img src="image_*V1.jpg">
The sam e feature is available in the SNDEMAIL com m and. This com m and is described on
page 464.
14. Email address syntax error handler
All of the address fields of the em ail finish definition are validated when entered via the m enu,
but em ail addresses can also origin from either the spooled file or a user exit program . Unless
InterForm A/S 227
you use insert an em ail address, the AFC job running the ‘P=Send PDF em ail / Fax’ option will
halt with an error if an invalid, nonblank em ail address is detected (e.g. m issing an @ -sign).
15. Archive in InterArchive
This option changes depending on which InterArchive that has been installed. After selecting
the option you can switch between the archives with ‘F10=Change archive’ - if both archives
are installed. The old InterArchive is no longer sold.
InterArchive
If you have installed InterArchive400, then the option will open this screen:
Work with Archive option
IDX400D
Definition name . . . . . : ARCHIVE
Description . . . . . . . : DEMO Archive emails
Archive option . . . . . . . 2
0=Dont archive, 1=Archive pdf file,
2=Archive email
Archive name . . . . . . . . MAI
Item type . . . . . . . . . Demo
Field
DOCNO
DATE
REGARDING
F3=Exit
Value
*V1
*SPLFDATE
*V3
F10=Change archive
F12=Cancel
The InterArchive com m and FILITM will be executed in the Auto Form s Control job, when this is
activated. You can assign values to the various fields as shown above. Please notice, that you
can use variables and fixed constants as well as a com bination of the two when assigning
values to the fields in the screen above.
InterArchive require a date for archiving. If you can find a date in the spooled file you can define
such a date as a variable and use that above, but you can also use the special value
*SPLFDATE as shown above. To use this you need to declare the date field in InterArchive as
having the form at YYYY-MM-DD and 10 characters long.
Should the list of fields above not be com plete for the specific item type, then the Auto Form s
Control job m ay halt with this m essage:
228
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
APF4771
Inquiry
19/03/12
Severity . . . . . . . :
00
Time sent
16:31:18
. . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
Error archiving email (R I C).
Cause . . . . . :
Error occured processing file
/APF3812Mail/OutBox/KSE-2012-03-19-16-31-18-364000.eml - see joblog for more
information.
Possible choices for replying to message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
R -- Retry.
I -- Ignore archiving for this file.
C -- Cancel operation.
Bottom
Type reply below, then press Enter.
Reply . . . .
F3=Exit
F6=Print
F9=Display message details
F10=Display messages in job log
F12=Cancel
F21=Select assistance level
If you then look into the joblog you should see the reason in a previous m essage:
Filing of the item was canceled.
By placing the cursor on the m essage and pressing F1 you can see the second level
inform ation:
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
UUA7007
Escape
19/03/12
Severity . . . . . . . :
00
Time sent
16:31:18
. . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
Filing of the item was canceled.
Cause . . . . . :
The filing of the item was canceled. Reason code
below describes the reason the operation was canceled.
1 - An error occurred during reading of fields
2 - Value not supplied for all fields
3 - Unknown origin specified
4 - Unknown ID in origin specified
5 - Local ID is not specified
6 - You canceled the filing by pressing F3=Exit
7 - You canceled the filing by pressing F12=Cancel
8 - The archive folder was not found
9 - Sort date is not specified
2 shown
More...
Press Enter to continue.
F3=Exit
F6=Print
F9=Display message details
F21=Select assistance level
F12=Cancel
You can then correct the em ail finishing definition and try again (R-Retry).
InterForm A/S 229
Work with email definition
MAI300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO
Description . . . . . . . : Demo email
The email address syntax error handler is a person, that in case of email
addresses witk syntax error, will recieve the email that can not be sent
with subject text changed to:
Syntax error in email address : x--the invalid address --x
This user can then find the correct address and send the email manually.
Email address syntax error handler
email address . . . . . . : [email protected]
*NONE, email address
When *NONE is specifioed, tha AFC-job will fail with a message in the
QSYSOPR message queue in case of syntax errors.
F3=Exit
230
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F12=Cancel
Version 2014
8. Work with email senders
Note: This option is reached from the Auto Form s Control m enu.
Work with E-mail senders
Position to . . . . . .
__________
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
User
KSE
PS
MAI360D
User profile
5=Display
User name
Kim Egekjaer
Peter Sørensen
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
This screen shows/edits inform ation, that are used for the E-m ail finishing definition.
Here you enter user profiles, that InterForm 400 should recognize as E-m ail senders.
InterForm 400 can use the E-m ail address and nam e you specify here when sending. See page
223. Press F6 to add a new E-m ail sender:
Create E-mail sender
MAI365D
User profile . . . . . . . MYUSER____
User name . . . . . . . . Demo User Profile______________________
Organisation . . . . . . . SALES_DEP_
E-mail address . . . . . . [email protected]____________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________
Personal Certificate . . . MY_CERT___
If you state in the E-m ail finishing definition, that the sender of the E-m ail should be the owner
of the spooled file or if the digital certificate should be either *OW NER or *SENDER, then this
inform ation is used.
First InterForm 400 will search for a m atch for both the user profile and organisation. If not
found InterForm 400 will take the inform ation, where there is a m atch for the user profile only. If
the is not m atch found here either a m atch with the organisation is looked for.
InterForm A/S 231
The File Naming Finishing Definition
By creating a finishing definition of type '06 = PDF File naming' you can create PDF files in
InterForm 400 using advanced functions - without any program m ing! You can use inform ation
from the spooled file to break up the spooled file as it is m erged into PDF files and let
inform ation from the spooled file be a part of the PDF file nam e and/or the path where it is
placed.
The functionality is sim ular to the E-m ail/fax finishing definition but m ore advanced. You can
e.g. define and use up to 34 variables (and 3 keys) for the path and PDF file nam es and use
exit program s for the variables if necessary.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule or the classic package for
InterForm 400.
W hen you create a new PDF file nam ing finishing definition you will see this screen:
Work with PDF Filenaming
Definition name . . . . :
Description . . . . . . :
PNM300D
DEMO_MAN
Demo for manual
Select one of the following options:
1. Receipient Key Definition
2. Variable Definitions
3. PDF File Name Composition
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Page selections and Document breaks
Receipient ID Information
Closing User-Exit
Encryption and Signature
PDF bookmark definition
Option:
_
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
1. Receipient Key Definition
This function works exactly as '1. Key definition' for the e-m ail/fax finishing definition. You can
define up to 3 keys identified as *KEY1-3. They can be referred to in the PDF file nam e/path
later in '3. PDF File Nam e Com position'.
The keys are also used in '6. Receipient ID Inform ation' where you can state a PDF
password depending on who the PDF file is intended for. You can also let a user exit program
return the passwords to be used. Refer to source file APF3812/APISRC m em ber PNMEXIT for
m ore inform ation. A program based on this source can be called with &Entrystep = '*ID'.
G NOTE G
You m ust define at least one key. If not you will get an error when running the definition.
Refer to page 213 for m ore inform ation of definition of the keys.
232
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
2. Variable Definitions
Select this option and you will see a list of the defined keys and variables. Press F6 to add new
a variable:
Create Variable Definition
Definition name . . . . :
Description . . . . . . :
PNM325D
DEMO_MAN
Demo for manual
Type choices and then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
Variable . . . . . . . . . *VA
*VA-*VZ, *V1-*V9
Description . . . . . . . Customer Name
Max. outputlength . . . . 30
1 - 40
Variable type
F3=Exit
. . . . . .
F4=Prompt
1
F5=Refresh
1=Spooled printinfo
2=Spoolfile attribute
3=Auto numerator
4=Date
5=Time
6=System environment info
7=User exit
F12=Cancel
The variable can by of various types:
Spooled print info:
Contains inform ation from the contents of the spooled file.
Refers to text in a certain line and interval of positions. Size
can be up to 40 characters.
Spoolfile attribute:
Can be any of these values: 1=Unique spoolID (40),
2=Spoolnam e, 3=Spoolno, 4=Jobnam e, 5=Owner,
6=Jobno, 7=Form type, 8=Userdata, 9=Program m nam e,
A=Program library
Auto numerator:
A counter, that increases each tim e a certain break occours.
You can state:
The number of digits to use.
If it should be fixed in length (*FIXED) or if preceding blank
signs should be rem oved (*TRIM ).
W hat to do if counter value exceeds the highest value allowed:
1=W rap m eans start from the initial value again and 2=Error
m eans, that the AFC job will halt with an error.
The increment value for the num erator.
The level of the num erator: *SYS, *TASK, *SPOOL,
*TASKKEY, *KEY:
*SYS
One com m on num erator for InterForm 400.
*TASK
A num erator for this finishing definition.
*SPOOL
It is reset for each new incom ing spooled file.
InterForm A/S 233
*TASKKEY
A num erator within this task / finishing definition, that
increases each tim e the key(s) change.
*KEY
Like *TASKKEY except this works across tasks / finishing
definitions.
G NOTE G
All the autonum erators change for each new PDF file. Except *TASKKEY and *KEY. Norm ally
you would create a new PDF file for each new key, but not necessarily.
Date:
Inserts the current date. It can be the: 1=System date, 2=Job
date (the date of the AFC job) or the 3=Spoolfile creation
date. Many different form ats (without delim iters) are
supported.
Time:
Inserts the current tim e. It can be either: 1=System or
2=Spool creation tim e.
System environment info:
At the m om ent only '1=System nam e' can be selected.
User exit:
Select this possibility and you will see this:
User exit program
User exit program
. . . .
. . . .
__________
__________
Exit fields variables
Parm 1 - 5 . . . . . . .
Parm 6 - 10 . . . . . .
Name, *NONE
Library, *LIBL
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____
_____ _____ _____ _____ _____
*KEY1-3, *VA-9
So with this option you can call your own program to insert a
value in a variable e.g. found by using other variables. You can
only use variables with nam es, that are lower e.g. *V2 can be
calculated with the values from *VA-*VZ and *V1.
J TIP J
For a demo source of a user exit program look in source file APF3812/APISRC in member
PNMEXIT. The program will be called with &Entrystep = *VAR. You return the value for the
variable in &Rtnparm 1.
G NOTE G
The sam e exit program can be called several tim es from different places in the PDF File
nam ing finishing definition. The field &Entrystep indicates from where it is called.
234
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
3. PDF File Name Composition
Select this option to state how the PDF file nam e is determ ined:
Create PDF Filename Composition
Definition name
. . . . :
DEMO_MAN
PNM330D
Demo for manual
Type choices and then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
PDF output path/file . . .
/Invoices/*KEY1/Inv *VB.pdf_____________________>
Composition, *USEREXIT
Create directory . . . . .
Replace file method . . .
N
G
(Y=Yes, N=No)
Y=Always, N=Never, G=*Gen when dupl.
Available variables
Var.
Type
Description
Len
*KEY1 Keydef.
Customer Numbers
4
*VA
SpoolVar Customer name
40
*VB
SpoolVar Invoice number
10
*VC
AutoNum
Global counter
6
Info
Numeric, Allow blanks=N
Inputlen.: 40, Position (-)
Inputlen.: 10, Position (-)
*SYS, Len=6, Str=0, Incr=0, *FIXED
Bottom
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F5=Refresh
F9=Expand
F12=Cancel
F14=Test
In the top of the screen you state either the com position of the PDF file nam es to be created or
*USEREXIT to let a user exit program determ ine the nam es of the PDF files.
As a part of the path you can use the keys and variables, that you have already defined. They
are all listed in the bottom of the screen.
If you specify *USEREXIT for the PDF file nam e(s) you should call a program sim ular to the
source in file APF3812/APISRC and m em ber PNMEXIT. The program will be called with
&EntryStep = *NAME.
You can press F4 to get the list of the defined variables to select from (when typing the path/file
nam e), F9 to get access to the full length available for the PDF file nam e com position or F14 to
test the com position with a specific spooled file and see what PDF file nam es it will create.
Other options are:
Create directory:
Specify if you want InterForm 400 to create the necessary
directories or not.
Replace file method:
Use 'Y' if you want to replace existing PDF files if found. 'N' will
result in an error m essage if the file exists and 'G= *Gen' will
append a num ber to the filenam e if it already exists. Note, that
this num ber will be appended after e.g. '.pdf' as the very last
of the file nam e.
InterForm A/S 235
5. Page selections and Document breaks
This works m uch like '5. Definition recipient-ID' for the E.m ail/fax finishing definition.
Refer to page 217 for m ore inform ation.
Norm ally it is sufficient with just one sequence line without any Page selection criteria.
You should however create one sequence line for each different layout - if the variables and/or
keys m oves depending on the layout of the *SCS spooled file. If you use m ore than one
sequence line you should use the Page selection criteria.
As the docum ent break definitions you need to state a place on the spooled file, that will trigger
a break i.e. whenever this inform ation changes a new PDF file will be created. This will
norm ally be the positions of the key(s), but it does not necessarily need to be so.
After creating a sequence line you must rem em ber to use option 8=Keys and variables, to
state where the variables and keys are placed for this selection of pages.
M WARNING M
DO remember to specify the position of all the keys and variables found in the spooled file
through option '8=Keys and variables' ! If you forget the AFC job will halt with an error when
you run the definition later.
6. Receipient ID Information
Through this option you can m aintain passwords for the receivers of the PDF files - per key
value. Below only the key, 'Custom er num ber' has been defined.
Create Receipient ID
PNM365D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_MAN
Description . . . . . . . : Demo for manual
Customer Number
. . .
PDF User Password
. .
__________
_______________________________________
G NOTE G
The use of PDF passwords requires purchase of the Digital Signature/PDF security m odule
plus installation of certain OS/400 products and options.
236
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
7. Closing User-Exit
Select this option to specify a program , that will be called right after each PDF file has been
created. You will get this screen when selecting this option:
Change Closing User Exit Program
Definition name . . . . :
Description . . . . . . :
PNM370D
DEMO_MAN
Demo for manual
Type choices and then press Enter. Press F3 or F12 to exit.
User exit program .
Library . . . . .
*NONE_____
*LIBL_____
Name, *NONE
Library, *LIBL
Exit fields variables
Parm 1 - 5 . . . . . _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
Parm 6 - 10 . . . . _____ _____ _____ _____ _____
*KEY1-3, *VA-9
You can state your own user program , that will be called e.g. to update an index of the created
PDF files. You can select up to 10 or 20 keys or variables, that will be transferred to the
program . For an exam ple of such a program (showing e.g. the expected param eters) look in
the source m em bers, PNMCLSEXIT (Form at=01) and PNMCLSEXI2 (form at=02) in source file
APF3812/APISRC. The exit program will be called with &Entrystep = *CLS.
G NOTE G
Any program called by InterForm 400 m ust be owned by QSECOFR. You can change the
owner (if you have enough authority) with the com m and: CHGOBJOW N. Refer to page 154 for
details of what is required in order to change the owner.
M WARNING M
NEVER place any objects e.g. programs or output queues in the APF3812 library. Those
objects will NOT be copied to the new release, when later doing a release update of
InterForm400.
8. Encryption and Signature
This option works exactly like option 8 of the E-m ail/fax finishing definition. Refer to page 224
for m ore inform ation.
G NOTE G
Password protection and/or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of the Digital
Signature/PDF security m odule for InterForm 400.
9. PDF bookmark definition
If you decide, that the PDF file should include bookm arks, you can specify what bookm ark
definition to use here. If you want no bookm arks you can state *NONE. Refer to page 277 for
m ore inform ation about the PDF bookm arks.
W hen you are done defining the PDF file nam ing definition you can go on and insert it in
production or test. You insert it in Auto Form s Control by inserting a function N = Create PDF
File. Refer to page 161 for m ore inform ation of how to do this.
InterForm A/S 237
Define Level Break Conditions for Finishing
The screen below appears autom atically in the process of creating any finishing definition:
This section is used for creating definitions for determ ination of the level break between
recipient inform ation. Or in other words, when to start insertion into a new envelope, when to
staple the pages or create a new pdf-file, e-m ail or fax.
Work with Finishing Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Start with . . . . .
PRS320D
TESTDEF
__________
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
Seqnbr.
Description
(No recipient ID definitions - F6 to create)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new definition
More definitions can be created but is only relevant if the Page Selection Criteria field is
used. Norm ally a Finishing definition will contain only one Recipient ID definition line.
Create Finishing Recipient-ID
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . .
Description . . . . . . .
PRS330D
TESTDEF
1___
Customer number in Demo Spool___
Page selection criteria
Print line
___
___
___
Position
Oper Compare value
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
_13
_57 - _60
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
W e enter 1 for the first Finishing Recipient-ID definition.
Page Selection Criteria:
The level break is m ade when a condition of one of the 3 Page Selection Criteria lines is true.
If the condition of line one is not true, the second line will be checked etc. If non of the 3 lines
are true the rest of the lines on this screen are ignored and the next Recipient ID sequence
num ber is processed. Read m ore on page 272.
238
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Print Line:
The print line in the spool entry to search.
Position:
The colum n interval to search
Oper.
The operator relating to the com pare value.
The operators used are standard Query operators.
EQ
NE
LT
LE
GT
GE
Com pare value:
Equal to com pare value
Not equal to com pare value
Less than com pare value
Less than or equal to com pare value
Greater than com pare value
Greater than or equal to com pare value
The character string (case sensitive) or num eric value which the
operator should com pare with. The com parison is in reality done on
hexadecim al values. This m eans that eg. the figure “1" which has
EBCDIC value F1h is greater than the character “Z” which has EBCDIC
value E9h.
Example 1, Level Break on Page Counter
The page selection criteria will prim arily be used when the spool data contains num bered
recipient pages, eg. runs of invoices where each new invoice in the spool entry indicates
“page1".
By displaying the test spool entry we find a page count in Line 3 colum n 72.
DISPLAY SPOOLED FILE
File . . . . . : QPRINT
Page/Line 1/3
Function . . . . _____
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . . _____
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
1
Herring Marine Research
Seaweed Street 14
9000 Battleaxe
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Martin Merman
1004/PDC.20-02-2008
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
By stating the following inform ation for the page selection criteria, we m ake a level break every
tim e the page count is reset to 1.
InterForm A/S 239
Page selection criteria
Print line
__3
___
___
Position
Oper Compare value
_72 - _72 EQ 1______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
In the test spool entry you will discover that the two letters for Florence Flowers are num bered
in succession. The above definition will therefore see it to that no level break occur between
these two letters which m eans they will be inserted into the sam e envelope, or stapled
together.
Go to section Using the Finishing Definition w ith Auto Forms Control in order to test the
definition.
Find Recipient ID in the Following Positions
This feature will m ake a level break on recipient variations found in the spool entry.
These fields can be com bined with the Page Selection Criteria but they are m ore likely to be
used alone. If Page Selection Criteria is used, then one of the three criteria lines m ust be true
in order for the recipient ID fields to be checked.
The level break is m ade when one or m ore characters changes within one of the defined line
and colum n intervals.
Print Line:
The print line in the spool entry to m onitor.
Position:
The colum n interval to m onitor
Example 2, Level Break on Change in Customer Info:
The m ost com m only used m ethod will be to m onitor a Custom er ID in a certain position. A
custom er ID will m ost likely be printed on all pages for one recipient.
The following exam ple m onitors the custom er ID in our test spool entry. That m eans if the
Custom er ID between two successive pages in the spool entry does not change these two
pages will be inserted in the sam e envelope, or stapled together. The Custom er ID is found in
line 13 colum n 57 to 60.
DISPLAY SPOOLED FILE
File . . . . . : QPRINT
Page/Line 1/13
Function . . . . _____
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . . _____
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+
1004/PDC.20-02-2008
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
The following definition should be m ade. Note that the Page selection criteria is left blank:
240
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Page selection criteria
Print line
___
___
___
Position
Oper Compare value
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
_13
_57 - _60
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This definition will cause the two pages for Florence Flowers to be inserted in one envelope, or
stapled together.
In order to test the above definitions proceed with the next section.
Example 3, Level Break on Customer ID and Attention Person
This exam ple extends the previous sam ple to consider that several persons could exist for the
sam e custom er ID, and the letters therefore should be inserted in separate envelopes, or not
stapled together.
The following exam ple m onitors two fields in our test spool entry. The Custom er ID and the
attention person. That m eans if there is no attention person or the attention person is the
sam e, all pages will insert into the sam e envelope or be stapled together. The attention person
in the test spool entry is found in line 11 colum n 13 to 30:
DISPLAY SPOOLED FILE
File . . . . . : QPRINT
Page/Line 1/11
Function . . . . _____
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . . _____
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
Att: Martin Merman
1004/PDC.20-02-2008
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
The following definition should be m ade. Note that the Page selection criteria is left blank:
Page selection criteria
Print line
___
___
___
Position
Oper Compare value
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
___ - ___ __ _______________
Find recipient ID in the following positions
Print line
Position
_13
_57 - _60
_11
_13 - _30
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
___
___ - ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This definition will cause the two pages for Florence Flowers to be inserted in two separate
envelopes, or stapled separately, as they have different attention persons.
In order to test the above definitions proceed with the next section.
InterForm A/S 241
Using the Finishing Definition with Auto Forms Control
Prior to m aking the following definitions for Finishing control in Auto Form s Control, a Finishing
Definition m ust exist.
Enter m enu point 5. Auto Forms Control on the m ain m enu, and select 1. Functions
Attached to output queues. Either create a new AFC queue to be used as input queue for
the PFE MailPrinter / Prinserter or printer with Finishing equipm ent, or edit an existing
definition. Please refer to the InterForm 400 ® m anual for additional inform ation on general
operation of Auto Form s Control.
Activate the Finishing pre-process definition
In the following we have created a new AFC queue called PFE_IN, and we define our first AFC
definition line to be C=Prepare for Finishing. By entering a Form type we can lim it the
preparation to specific input spool entries, in this case spool files with Form type DEMO:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
PFE_IN
Seqnbr F. Formtyp
Library:
Save Jobname
AFC305D
QUSRSYS
Filename
Device file
Program
UserData
(No functions defined)
Seqnbr Function
1,0
C
F3=Exit
Attributtes of input file for which to
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
execute the function
DEMO______
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
This function will read a spool entry with Form type DEMO, and create a new spool entry with
Form type PFEREADY and return it to the output queue PFE_IN..
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
PFE_IN
Seqnbr F. Formtyp
Library:
Save Jobname
AFC305D
QUSRSYS
Filename
Device file
Program
UserData
(No functions defined)
Seqnbr Function
1,0
C
Prepare for Finishing
Finish definition name . . . . .
Output queue for prepared print
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
242
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F4=Prompt
Version 2014
PFEDEF1___
PFE_IN____
QUSRSYS___
PFEREADY__
F12=Cancel
Finishing
Definition name:
Finishing Definition created with option 4. Finishing Definitions on the
Auto Form s Control m enu.
Output queue:
The Finishing pre-process will generate a *SCS spool entry. This spool
entry will be form atted with Finishing preprocessing inform ation (can be
viewed from position 341 using DSPSPLF). This spool entry should
norm ally be printed to the sam e AFC input queue, in order to m erge it
with an overlay. Note, that sending this spool entry directly to the PFE
MailPrinter / Prinserter or printer with Finishing equipm ent will have no
effect.
Form type:
The pre-processed spool entry should have a Form type defined which
allows a following 1=M erge w ith overlay line to create a PCL form atted
output for the PFE MailPrinter / Prinserter or printer with Finishing
equipm ent.
Merge with pre-processed Finishing spool entry
W e can now m erge the new spool entry with an overlay conditioned by the Form type
PFEREADY or by using an Overlay Selector:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
PFE_IN
Library:
QUSRSYS
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
0001 C DEMO
Finish def: PFEDEF1 outq: PFE_IN
Seqnbr Function
2,0
1
F3=Exit
AFC305D
Device file
Program
UserData
library: QUSRSYS form type
Attributtes of input file for which to
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
execute the function
PFEREADY__
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 243
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
PFE_IN
Library:
QUSRSYS
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
0001 C DEMO
Finish def: PFEDEF1 outq: PFE_IN
Seqnbr Function
2,0
1
Device file
Program
UserData
library: QUSRSYS form type
Merge with overlay
Output queue for merged print .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
InterForm 400 printer type . . .
Unicode output . . . . . . . . .
Merge overprint lines . . . . .
Find overlay in form type table
F3=Exit
AFC305D
*DEFAULT__
__________
__________
*INPUT
*INPUT,*YES
*NO_
*NO, *YES
N
(Y N)
F13=Fold/Unfold
F12=Cancel
Distribute E-mails with Auto Forms Control
W hen distributing spool files as PDF, an E-m ail Finishing Definition first has to be executed. To
do that you add a C = Prepare for Finishing function to the Auto Form s definitions of the relevant
output queue. This screen is shown:
Seqnbr Function
1.0
C
Attributes of input file
Form type . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
User-specified data . .
for
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
which
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
to execute the function
. . DEMO______
. . _
. . __________
. . __________
. . __________
. .
__________
. . __________
. .
__________
. . __________
Here you can insert conditions for executing the finishing definition. In this case we choose only to
E-m ail spool files with the form type DEM O. Press Enter.
Seqnbr Function
1.0
C
Prepare for Finishing
Finish definition name . . . . .
Output queue for prepared print
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMO______
*INPUT____
__________
EMAIL_____
Above an E-m ail Finishing definition is specified. An Auto Form s Control function P = Send PDF
E-m ail should be executed for the form type on the specified output queue. Press Enter to
continue.
244
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Seqnbr Function
1.0
C
Prepare for Finishing
Prepare for E-mail requires settings for
print that will not be send.
Output queue non E-mail print . *INPUT____
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
__________
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . PRINT_____
On this screen it is specified what to do with spool file pages, that are not possible to send. One
problem can be, that InterForm 400 is not able to find an E-m ail address for a key.
The final task is to insert the actual E-m ail com m and in Auto Form s Control. You do that by
inserting a function P. This option is shown on the AFC functions overview if you press F23=More
options. Below we have entered a function P:
Seqnbr Function
2.0
P
Attributes of input file for which to execute the function
Form type . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
EMAIL_____
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
In this exam ple we only want to E-m ail spool files with the form type EMAIL. Press Enter to get
the view below.
Seqnbr Function
2.0
P
Send spooled file as PDF email
Overlay name . . . . .
File set . . . . . .
or overlay selector .
Primary/Secondary set
Unicode output . . . .
Merge overprint lines
Color support . . . .
Save email . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
IF400DEMO_
SAMPLE____
________
*PRI
*INPUT
*NO
*YES
*NO_
*PRI, *SEC
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
Notice: As the Finishing definition is splitting up the original spool file, the P-function is executed
for each of the splitted spool files. This is done in order to keep track of what E-m ails that got
though and which ones that did not. In this m anner it is easier to resend a specific m ail if
necessary.
M WARNING M
You have to make sure, that Auto Forms Control executes a Finishing Definition of type 5=E-mail
for the spool file prior the function P = Send PDF E-m ail. If you fail to do that the Auto Forms
Control job will halt with an error: AFC7002 InterForm unable to send email from output queue
<library>/<output queue> (C R I).
! IMPORTANT !
W hen defining a merge with overlay for a pre-processed PFE MailPrinter finishing definition, the
overlay- or selector name entered must be for the contents of the envelope and NOT for the
envelope itself.
M WARNING M
The Prinserter is in reality a HP PCL5e compatible printer type and the printertype HP4 should
always be used.
InterForm A/S 245
M WARNING M
The Finishing definitions will not work with copies. If more copies have been defined for the
merge it will result in faulty insertions. (NOT valid for the PFE MailPrinter)
J TIP J
Copy Management defined for the overlay is only supported for the overlay entered in the pop-up
window when you defined your pre-process. You can, however, alternatively use the program
PRSCOPY to generate the copies. Refer to page 163 for more information.
(NOT valid for the
PFE MailPrinter)
246
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The Reformat finishing definition
In InterForm 400 you are always lim ited by the page breaks of the original *SCS spooled files. You
never able to m ove inform ation from one page to another or to change the height of the page
m aking it possible to print m ore inform ation on the final output. BUT with the Reform at finishing
definition things have changed.
The reform at definition m akes it possible to change the page breaks of an *SCS spooled file. It is
intended for *SCS spooled files, that contains docum ents for different custom ers with detail lines.
The reform at will create a new *SCS spooled file with new page num bers within each docum ent,
rearrange text for each detail line (and following text lines) and e.g. even call a user exit program
to include advanced calculations for each new detail line.
In order to create a new Reform at finishing definition you select this from the InterForm 400 Main
Menu:
'5. W ork with Auto Form s Control'
'4. Finish Definitions'
Press F6=Add
State a nam e and description and select type: '07 = Reform at Spooled File'.
Then you will see this screen:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Type option, Press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
Definition
Head
User exit program
Detail lines
Totals
Footer
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Below each of the elem ents are described:
Head
W hen you select this elem ent the first screen will look like this:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Input head
Number of lines
. . . . .
10__
1 - 200, *VAR
InterForm A/S 247
Here you can state how m any of the first lines (including the blank lines) from the input spooled
file, that are considered a part of the header i.e. that they are not detail lines. If you state e.g. 10,
then all line 1-10 of the input spooled file is considered to be the header. If you specify *VAR this
will part of the screen will change to this:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Input head
Number of lines
. . . . .
*VAR
The last line of head is found as
startposition ___
length __
or
or
or
+ 0 lines.
the first line, that has
= ________________________________________
= ________________________________________
= ________________________________________
= ________________________________________
Output heads are to have __ lines.
On the screen above you tell InterForm 400 how to detect the last line of the input header.
The num ber keyed in '+ _ lines' will be added to the line num ber where the condition above is
m et. So if the condition e.g. is found in line 5 and you have '3' in this place, then the first 8 lines
are considered to be a header.
The num ber in 'Output heads are to have ___ lines.' tells InterForm 400 the m inim um num ber of
lines for the output header. However the num ber of lines in the output header can never be lower
than num ber of lines in the header of the input spooled file.
Press Enter and you will com e to this screen:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Input head
Levelbreak is found in head
line
and line
and line
__
__
__
startpos. ___
startpos. ___
startpos. ___
length __
length __
length __
Page number within level is to be printed in output
line __
position ___
Line-id is to be printed in all output lines in output
position ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Each tim e there is a new custom er InterForm 400 will have to m ake a page break in the new
spooled file. Above you state how InterForm 400 can determ ine that. If the inform ation found in the
place pointed to by 'Levelbreak is found in head..' changes, then InterForm 400 will do a level
break. So here you should point to a place where a docum ent reference num ber is found (e.g.
invoice num ber).
Next you should state a place, where the page num ber within each new docum ent is to be placed.
Finally you can choose where to print the line-id of each detail line in the reform attet output. The
line-id is identification of each line that can be useful for m aking conditions in the overlay that you
m erge with later on.
248
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
User exit program
From the reform at finishing definition you can call a user exit program in order e.g. to extract
certain inform ation from the spooled file, transfer that to the program , where you e.g. calculate
other values which then are placed back into the new spooled file.
W hen you select this option you will see a screen like this (if you press Enter a couple of tim es):
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
User exit program . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . . :
__________
__________
*NONE
Name, *LIBL
Exit fields from 1st head in level to user exit program
Field-1
linenbr __
position ___
length ___
Field-2
linenbr __
position ___
length ___
Field-3
linenbr __
position ___
length ___
Is user exit program to be called when processing 1st head
in level . . . . . . . . . : ____
*NO, *YES
Placing of return fields in output head
Field-1
linenbr __
position ___
Field-2
linenbr __
position ___
Field-3
linenbr __
position ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
On the top you can enter a user exit program . This program m ust be owned by QSECOFR (like
all InterForm 400 exit program s). On the m iddle of this screen you can specify if you want the
reform at definition to call the program each tim e a new header is m ade or not. If you state *YES,
then the up to 3 fields specified in the top of the screen will be transferred to the user exit program
when called. The program can return up to 3 fields, that are placed as stated in the bottom of the
screen above.
For an exam ple of such a user exit program look in m em ber RFM EXIT in source file
APF3812/APISRC. This program m ust be owned by QSECOFR (like all user exit program s called
by InterForm 400).
Note, that the sam e program can be called when handling each detail line later. The param eter
&CALLID will indicate if the program is called from a header or detail line.
M WARNING M
Do NOT place any programs or other objects in the APF3812 library as these objects will not be
copied over to the new version in case of an upgrade of InterForm400.
Detail lines
Select this option and you will get to the screen below:
InterForm A/S 249
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Number of detail lines per output page
1st page per level break .
Following pages . . . . .
____
____
Maximum number of blank lines
between 2 detail lines . .
__
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
You fill in the fields:
1st page per level break
This indicates how m any detail lines, that there is room for on the
first page for each docum ent or custom er (after a level break).
Follow ing pages
The page header will be excluded from the second and following
pages. That should m ake room for m ore detail lines. You type
how m any lines there are room for here.
M aximum number of blank
lines betw een 2 detail lines
As a part of reform atting there m ight be som e new blank lines
within the detail lines. Here you can lim it the num ber of the blank
lines.
Press <Enter> and you will get a list of rule lines describing how the detail lines should be handled
and build up. Type a new sequence num ber and press the <Field Exit> key to create a new line:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Reformating detail lines
Rule 02 All non empty detail lines
01
All non empty detail lines
Rule
1.0
Description
______________________________
If
position . . . . . . . .
length . . . . . . . . .
compare type . . . . . .
compare value . . . . .
occurrence . . . . . . .
Number of lines to handle . . .
Action . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line-ID code . . . . . . . . .
Call user exit program . . . .
F3=Exit
___
1-378
__
1-30
_
= > < N A U
_______________________________
______
*ALL, *FIRST, *LAST
____
1-99, *VAR
_________
*REFORMAT, *DELETE
____
____
*NO, *YES
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
Here you first enter a condition to select only this specific type of detail line. This condition will only
be considered for the lines after the header:
Position
250
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
The starting position of the text com pare.
Version 2014
Length
The length of text to com pare.
Compare type
The type of com pare to do. Refer to page 84 for an explanation.
Compare value
The text, that should be com pared with.
Occurrence
States which of the lines (fitting the condition), that should be selected:
*FIRST will be used only for the first tim e this line is found after a level
break and *LAST will be used for the last tim e only that this line is found
within a level break.
Number of lines to
handle
Here you state how m any detail lines, that should be 'taken' from the
original spooled file if the condition is true. All the lines from the original
spooled file will be available for reform atting when progressing. If you use
*VAR this line will get all the detail lines of the original spooled file until this
or another condition is true.
Action
Select *REFORM AT if you want the text of the input detail line(s) on the
output spooled file as well. Use *DELETE if this line (or lines) should not
be visible on the output spooled file.
Line-ID code
A code for this kind of detail line. This will be inserted on the output
spooled file e.g. to be used for conditioning in the overlay design. The
position where this is placed is decided as described on page 248.
Call user
exit program
Tells InterForm 400 if the user exit program should be called for this detail
line. The program to call is defined as described on page 249 where you
also can find additional inform ation. If you activate this call this window will
pop up:
Exit fields
Detail exit field-1
Detail exit field-2
Detail exit field-3
Line __
Line __
Line __
Placing return fields
Return field-1 Lineno. ____
Return field-2 Lineno. ____
Return field-3 Lineno. ____
F3=Exit
position ___
position ___
position ___
length ___
length ___
length ___
position ___
position ___
position ___
F12=Cancel
Here you can specify the inform ation, that you want to transfer from the spooled file onto the user
program and where you want to place returned inform ation. The line num bers are all relative to
the line where the condition is m et.
If you above have chosen *REFORM AT for the action to take you will see a list of lines describing
how the output detail line(s) should look. You can insert 2 types of definition lines:
1 = Reformat input:
Seqnbr. Type
1.0
1
Input line
__
position
___
length
___
Output line
__
position
___
InterForm A/S 251
2 = Text constant:
Seqnbr. Type
2.0
2
Text constant
________________________________
Output line
__
position
___
W ith these 2 types of lines you can decide how the input detail line(s) should be presented in the
output spooled file.
M WARNING M
Plan how you want to structure the sequence of these lines as there is no tool for resequencing.
Totals
W hen you select this option you are asked if the print out has totals. If you answer *NO, then it is
assum ed, that the original spooled file has no totals and that no totals should be inserted in the
new reform atted spooled file. Below is described what to go through if you select *YES.
The first screen looks like this:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Localization of totals
total lines starts . . . . __
0 - 99
lines before the last occurrence
of the text . . . . . . . ______________________________
or . . . . . . . . . ______________________________
or . . . . . . . . . ______________________________
or . . . . . . . . . ______________________________
in position . . . . . . . ____
length . . . . . . . . . . ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
InterForm 400 will search for any of the texts you type in. You can tell how m any lines before the
'hit', that should be considered to be a part of the total. If e.g. you search for the text 'Total' and
there is a '***********' line just above this line, then you should enter '1' in 'total lines starts __
lines before the last occurrence'.
Press Enter to proceed to the screen below:
252
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Placing of totals
Select one of the following options:
1. Just after the last detail line
2. Like 1, if there is space for all total lines, otherwise next page.
3. In foot
Option
_
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
On this screen you can decide how the total should be inserted:
1. Just after the last detail line
This choice will insert the totals just after the last detail line. If there is no room for all lines for the
total, then the rest is inserted on the next page.
2. Like 1, if there is space for all total lines, otherw ise next page.
This works like a 'block protect'. Transfers all the total lines onto the next page if necessary.
3. In foot
Prints the totals in the footer.
Press Enter to proceed to this screen:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Extra total page
Extra total page is created, if number of output detail lines on the last
page is above a certain limit
Limit detail lines if last page is page 1 . . . .
Limit detail lines if last page is >1 . . . . . .
Total line-ID
If only 1 total page . . . . . .
If 2 total pages, first total . .
If 2 total pages, extra total . .
F3=Exit
__0
__0
____
____
____
F12=Cancel
The header m ay be larger on page 1 for each docum ent, so there m ight room for fewer detail
lines on the first page than on the subsequent pages. You state here the num ber of detail lines
that there are room for.
You can also state various line-ID's depending on if the total is spread across two pages or not:
InterForm A/S 253
If only 1 total page
This denotes the line-ID to be inserted if the total is not spread
across 2 pages.
If 2 total pages, first total
The specifies the line-ID for the part of the total lines, that are
placed on the page before the last - if the total lines are split
across pages.
If 2 total pages, extra total
States what line-ID to insert for the part of the total lines, that is
placed on the last page - if the total lines are split across pages.
W hen you press Enter you will proceed to this screen:
Work with reformat definition
RFM300D
Definition name . . . . . : DEMO_REFOR
Description . . . . . . . : Reformat the Demo spooled file
Reformating totals
0001
0002
1
2
Seqnbr. Type
2.0
_
01
Total
050
060
1
1
50
40
1 = Reformat input
2 = Text constant
F3=Exit
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
Here you can edit and rearrange the total lines in the output spooled file. This works exactly as for
the detail lines. Refer to page 251 for m ore inform ation.
Footer
Here you key in the placem ent of the footer i.e. in which line num ber it starts in the original
spooled file and how m any of the footer lines, that you want to include in the new reform atted
spooled file.
NOTE: The footer lines will in the output spooled file be placed between the header and the detail
lines.
Insert reformatting in production
W hen you have defined your reform at finishing definition you go to Auto Form s Control and insert
a function 'C = Prepare for Finishing' for the relevant output queue. Refer to page 157 for m ore
inform ation.
254
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The XML Definitions
W hen exchanging data with other applications it can som etim es be an idea to consider XML
files as a way of transport. You can use InterForm 400 to convert your spooled files into XML files
like described below.
Please note: The procedure to build up the structure of the XML file is quite easy to understand
and fast, but this also contains som e contraints, so not any XML file structure can be built.
In order to use the XML definitions you will need to have either a norm al full InterForm 400 classic
license or the *PDF option enabled in InterForm 400.
Setting up the XML conversion
Before you can convert spooled files into XML you will first need to specify how they should be
converted. The setup of the conversion is done via an XML definition, which you setup from the
InterForm 400 Main Menu by selecting option ‘5. W ork with Auto Form s Control’, ‘4. Finish
Definitions’ and finally pressing F6=Add to create a new XML definition - with the type 08 = XML
definition:
Create Finish Definition
PRS310D
Definition name . . . . . . XML_DEMO
Description . . . . . . . . Demo: Convert demo spooled file into XML
Type of Finishing
. . . . . 08
F3=Exit
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Prinserter
Stapling per Recipient
Prepare for inserting
PFE Mail-Printer
Prepare for email/Fax
PDF Filenaming
Reformat Spooled File
XML definition
F12=Cancel
The next screen looks like this:
InterForm A/S 255
XML structure and data
XML definition name . . :
Description . . . . . . :
XML300D
XML_DEMO
Demo: Convert demo spooled file into XML
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
Definition
XML output file and exit program
Page type definitions
Line type definitions
XML structure and data
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This is where you select each of the features below.
J TIP J
The definition, XML_DEMO defined here, is for the InterForm400 demo spooled file, which can
be printed via the InterForm400 Service Menu. You can try it out yourself after entering the same
definition.
XML output file and exit program
Here you specify the path and nam e of the XML file:
Change XML definition
XML300D
XML definition name . . :
Description . . . . . . :
XML_DEMO
Demo: Convert demo spooled file into XML
User exit program . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
*NONE
XML output file
/APF3812Home/Work/MyFile*V1-*STAMP.xml
. . . . .
Name, *NONE
Name, *LIBL
Create directories . . . .
N
Y=Yes, N=No
Generate unique* name
. .
N
Y=Yes, N=No
. . .
N
Y=Yes, N=No
Replace stream file
* Names are only unique per spooled file
F3=Exit
F10=Define variables
F12=Cancel
At the top of the screen you can state a user exit program if needed. The dem o source of the
program is included in source m em ber XMLEXIT in the source file APISRC inside the APF3812
library.
The program will be called in these situations:
*START
*OPEN
*DATA
256
Intial call before any processing (Open files if necessary)
Open new XML file (A new XML file is opened for write)
Field or attributte value (Assign a value to either a field or attribute)
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
*CLOSE
*END
XML file closed (The XML file is done: Process the finished file if needed)
End processing (Close files if necessary)
For the XML output file you can e.g. include variables (*V1-*V9) and the special variable *STAMP
to include a tim e stam p in the path or file nam e as shown above.
These options are available:
Create directories
Activate this option to let InterForm 400 autom atically create the necessary
directories, if they should not already exist. If you state ‘N’ and there is a
directory m issing, then you will get an error m essage, when you try to
create the XML file(s).
Generate unique* nam e
If you should happen to setup a definition, which will try to create an XML
file, that already exist, then you can with this option sim ply tell
InterForm 400 to autom atically generate a new XML file nam e if needed.
An extra counter will be added just before the .xm l extension in the file
nam e above. Please note, that the xm l files are only unique per spooled
file - so if you rerun the sam e spooled file, then the xm l files will be nam ed
the sam e as the first tim e you run the definition.
Replace stream file
State ‘Y’, if you want new XML files to replace existing ones with the sam e
nam e.
If you have included a variable (*V1-*V9) in the file nam e or path, then you need also to define
them . That is done via F10=Define variables on the screen above, via which you can see the
defined variables and add new with F6 like below:
Change variable definition
XML definition name
. . :
XML_DEMO
Sequence number . . . . .
Variable . . . . . . . . .
*V1
Description
Regarding
. . . . . . .
Page type(s) .
Line type . .
Use relative
Line . . . . .
From position
To position .
Length . . . .
. . .
. . .
line
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
XML371D
1
*V1-*V9
PAGE1
Operator . . . . . . . . .
Compare value . . . . . .
Y=Yes, N=No
15
12
41
F4=List
More...
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Refer to page 263 for a com plete description of how you can define the variables in an XML
definition.
Unless you state a double slash (//) for the root node in the XML structure (as described on page
262), you will only create one XML file and the value for the variables is found only on the first
page. If you do state a double slash one XML file will be created for each new value of the
variable.
InterForm A/S 257
Page type definitions
The next issue is to define at least one or m ore page types. You can add one by pressing
F6=Create on the screen below:
Work with page type definitions
XML definition name . :
XML_DEMO
Position to . . . . . .
Sequence number
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
SeqNbr
1
2
XML310D
5=Display
7=Change sequence
Description
Page 1 of each Document
Other pages
Page type
PAGE1
OTHER
End
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Change page type definition
XML definition name
. . :
XML311D
XML_DEMO
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
1
Page 1 of each Document
Page type
PAGE1
. . . . . . . .
Is first page . . . . . .
Is last page . . . . . . .
Y
N
Y=Yes, N=No
Y=Yes, N=No
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
AND/OR
Line(s)
3
Pos(s)
71-72
Operator
EQ
Compare value
1
More...
F3=Exit
258
F4=List
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F12=Cancel
Version 2014
Change page type definition
XML definition name
. . :
XML_DEMO
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
2
Other
Page type
OTHER
. . . . . . . .
Is first page . . . . . .
Is last page . . . . . . .
XML311D
N
N
pages
Y=Yes, N=No
Y=Yes, N=No
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
AND/OR
Line(s)
_
Pos(s)
_____
Operator
__
Compare value
_
More...
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
W ith the setup above, we can insert header inform ation of the first page of each docum ent and
use the OTHER page type to include the rest of the pages - if needed. If you want a field to be
retrieved on all pages of the spooled file, you will actually not need to condition it on any page
type, so the OTHER page type above will usually not be necessary.
The sequence num ber above indicates in which order, that InterForm 400 will check the
conditions. The first sequence num ber with a true condition will select the specific page type for
the relevant page. (Each spooled file page can only have one page type).
The description is for your own use.
The Page type is what you nam e the specific page(s), that are selected with the condition below.
You can later refer to page type e.g. for the lines or as conditions for variables and attributes.
Is first page
If you state ‘Y’ for this, then it indicates, that a new input docum ent/group starts
whenever this page type is selected (because of the condition being true).
Is last page
W hen this page type is selected, then it is interpreted as the last page of a
group/docum ent and a new group/docum ent is starting on the next spooled file
page.
If all docum ents in the spooled file are single page docum ents, then you can sim ply create one
single page type with ‘Y’ for both ‘Is first page’ and ‘Is last page’ - and no conditions in the bottom
of the screen.
The conditions below can be written with intervals of lines and positions. An interval is sim ply
written as ‘71-72', if you want to state the interval of 71 to 72 as shown above. You can prom pt the
operator with F4 to view a list of all possible operators:
CT
EQ
GE
GT
INVCHR
LE
LIST
LT
NCT
NE
NLIST
VALCHR
Contains string of characters
Equal
Greater than or equal to
Greater than
Invalid characters (One or m ore chars not listed)
Less than or equal to
List (field equals Value1, or equals Value2,...)
Less than
Does not contains string of characters
Not equal
Not list (field does not equal Value1, or....)
Valid characters (Allow only characters listed)
InterForm A/S 259
Later you can search for various variables in the spooled file depending on specific page type(s)
and/or line type(s).
Line type definitions
If you want to scan an interval of lines for a condition, you should create one or m ore line
definitions. If you want to refer to data, that is always placed in fixed lines/positions, then a line
type is norm ally not needed.
W hen you select option ‘1' for the ‘Line type definitions’, you will see the existing line definitions
listed:
Work with line type definitions
XML definition name . :
XML_DEMO
Position to . . . . . .
Sequence number
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
SeqNbr
1
XML310D
5=Display
7=Change sequence
Description
Detail lines
Line type
DETAIL
-
End
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
You create a new line type definition by pressing F6=Create:
Change line type definition
XML definition name
. . :
XML311D
XML_DEMO
Sequence number . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
1
Detail lines
Line type . . . . . .
Allow additional types
Include lines above .
Include lines below .
DETAIL
N
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Y=Yes, N=No
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
AND/OR
Line(s)
30-42
Pos(s)
1-30
Operator
NE
Compare value
More...
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
The screen includes these fields:
Sequence num ber
260
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Like for the page type, this determ ines in which order the line types are
executed. The first line type that contains a condition that is true for a
specific line in the spooled file, will exclude the following line types to be
Version 2014
selected for this spooled file line - unless the field ‘Allow additional
types’ has been set to ‘Y’.
Allow additional types
As indicated above, this can m ake it possible to assign m ore than one
line type to one spooled file line. This m ay be useful if you e.g. have 2 or
m ore colum ns in the spooled file. The value of this param eter can be
seen on screen XML310D (shown above) as a ‘+’ or ‘-‘ to the right of the
line type.
Include lines above
If you want to assign the sam e line type to a num ber of preceding
spooled file lines, then you can state just how m any lines above the one
selected by the condition (stated in the bottom of the screen), that should
also have this line type. (The first of these lines will later be referenced to
as line 1).
Include lines below
Sim ular to the previous field - only including spooled lines below the
condition.
You m ay notice the syntax for stating an interval of lines and/or positions above. Here we are
conditioning on the spooled file line interval 30 to 42 and searching the positions 1-30: If these
positions are not blank (within the line interval), then the line is a ‘DETAIL’ line. You m ay also
notice, that the operator can be prom pted with F4 (see possible values on page 259), and that the
com pare value should not be stated with hyphens (‘’).
Later you can search for specific variables in the spooled file, conditioned on line type(s) and/or
page type(s).
XML structure and data
Under this option you define the structure of the nodes within the XML file:
Work with XML nodes
XML definition name . :
XML_DEMO
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
SeqNbr
1
2
3
XML350D
Sequence number
5=Display
12=Field definitions
XML path
/Root
/Root//Document
/Root/Document//DetailLine
End
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Press F6=Create to add new nodes:
InterForm A/S 261
Change XML node
XML definition name
Node sequence
XML351D
. . :
XML_DEMO
. . . . . .
XML path . . . . . . . . .
3
/Root/Document//DetailLine
Note:
Specify XML path as /rotnode/node2/node3...
To allow duplicate fields inside page segments specify a double slash (//)
before the node that will be repeated when ever a field for the node is
repeated.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
You gradually add new nodes like shown above. Please note, that you insert the double slash for
the node, that will be repeated for each value found (for a specified variable) in the spooled file.
You m ay only insert one double quote (//) in each sequence num ber.
XML Field Definitions
One the overview screen of the nodes (XML350D), you can use option 12=Field definitions to link
the nodes with data found in the spooled file:
Work with XML nodes
XML definition name . :
XML_DEMO
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
SeqNbr
1
2
3
XML350D
Sequence number
5=Display
12=Field definitions
XML path
/Root
/Root//Document
/Root/Document//DetailLine
End
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
If you have defined any variable (*V1-*V9) for the XML file/path as shown on page 256, and you
want to create a new XML file for each value found, then you need to state the root path (called
/Root in the screen above) - not with a single slash, but double slash (e.g. //Root).
Via option 12=Field definitions this screen is accessed, where all existing fields for the current
node is shown:
262
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with field definitions
XML definition name . :
Sequence number . . . :
XML path . . . . . . :
XML_DEMO
2
/Root//Document
Position to . . . . . .
Field sequence
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
F-seq
1
2
XML360D
5=Display
Field@Attribute
@Company
DocumentNo
Page type(s)
PAGE1
PAGE1
Line type
End
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Work with field definitions
XML definition name . :
Sequence number . . . :
XML path . . . . . . :
XML_DEMO
3
/Root/Document//DetailLine
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
F-seq
1
1
2
3
4
5
XML360D
Field sequence
5=Display
Field@Attribute
@SEQ
Product
Model
i-Group
SN
LicenseCode
Page type(s)
Line type
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
End
F3=Exit
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Now you use 2=Change or F6=Create to edit or create a Field for this node as seen below.
If you want to add an attribute for a node, then you do it like shown below:
(Use sequence num ber=1, keep the Field blank and sim ply write the attribute).
InterForm A/S 263
Change field definition
XML definition name . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
XML path . . . . . . . . :
Field sequence
Field . . . .
Attribute . .
Description .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page type(s) .
Line type . .
Use relative
Line . . . . .
From position
To position .
Length . . . .
. . .
. . .
line
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
XML361D
XML_DEMO
2
/Root//Document
1
Company
Company Name
PAGE1
Y=Yes, N=No
6
8
40
Operator . . . . . . . . .
Compare value . . . . . .
F4=List
More...
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Use <Page Down> to view the second setup screen of the field/attribute:
Change field definition
XML definition name . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
XML path . . . . . . . . :
XML361D
XML_DEMO
2
/Root//Document
Constant . . . . . . . . .
Functions
. . . . . . . .
End
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
This above will insert the attribute ‘Com pany’ with the value found in the spooled file for the pages
where the page type is PAGE1.
A field can be inserted like this: (Keeping the attribute blank).
264
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Change field definition
XML361D
XML definition name . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
XML path . . . . . . . . :
XML_DEMO
2
/Root//Document
Field sequence
Field . . . .
Attribute . .
Description .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
DocumentNo
Page type(s) .
Line type . .
Use relative
Line . . . . .
From position
To position .
Length . . . .
. . .
. . .
line
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PAGE1
.
.
.
.
Document Number
Operator . . . . . . . . .
Compare value . . . . . .
Y=Yes, N=No
13
57
60
F4=List
More...
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Instead of inserting data from a fixed position like above, the data for the attribute or field can also
be stated in the following m anners:
1.
By stating a line type and Use relative line = Y, then data is selected from a the line
where the line type was found. If a num ber of lines above and/or below was specified for
a line type, then the topm ost line counts as line one. (Refer to page 260 for details).
2.
The Field or attribute can also be conditionally inserted with an operator and a com pare
value. The possible values for the operator can be listed via F4. Refer to page 259 for the
com plete list. The com pare value is written without quotes.
3.
Instead of values found in the spooled file you can also assign a constant value to the
attribute or field.
4.
Apart from the above you can even run up to 3 functions. They are executed from the
left to the right. The final value will be the result after running all the functions. The
functions are listed below.
The Functions
W hen you specify a variable to be used either for the XML file nam e or as a field/attribute in the
XML file, then you can use functions to calculate the final value.
The functions can be added, when editing the variables by pressing <Page Down>, where 3 fields
are shown. The functions are executed in the sequence from left to right.
The possible functions are:
InterForm A/S 265
Function
Description
COMPARE
DATE-DMY
DATE-MDY
DATE-YMD
EXITPGM
KEEPNUMCHR
NUMCOMMA
NUMERIC
RESETSEQ1
RESETSEQ2
RESETSEQ3
RMVNUMCHR
SEQ1
SEQ2
SEQ3
TRIMLEFT
Run com pare function here (only)
Date in form at day, m onth, year
Date in form at m onth, day, year
Date in form at year, m onth, day
Call exit program
Rem ove all non-num eric characters
Sam e as NUMERIC, but convert "," to "."
Form at value as num eric (Rem ove all non-num chr)
Reset sequence num ber 1
Reset sequence num ber 2
Reset sequence num ber 3
Rem ove num eric characters
Sequence num ber - 1
Sequence num ber - 2
Sequence num ber - 3
Trim text to the left
Each function is explained below.
COM PARE
Instead of running the com pare as the first thing before executing these
(up to 3) functions, you can decide when to do the com pare by inserting
this function. You can e.g. first trim the text to left before the com pare like
so: TRIMLEFT COMPARE
DATE-XXX
Interpret the data found as a date and include it in the XML output as
YYYY-MM-DD. This function tells InterForm 400, how to interpret the text
found in the spooled file. If the text found in the spooled file is ‘17/01/11'
and you state DATE-DMY, then the output will be ‘2011-01-17'.
EXITPGM
Call the exit program defined on a previous screen (See page 256) with
XEXITFNC=*DATA.
KEEPNUM CHR
Keep only the num eric characters in the data (rem ove any non-num eric
character).
NUM COM M A
Sam e as NUMERIC, but convert “,” to “.” and vise versa.
NUM ERIC
Form at as num eric - rem ove all non-num eric characters.
You can insert up to 3 ‘counters’ in the XML file, which you can use as values for any attribute or
field. The 3 ‘counters’ are called: SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3. If you want to insert an increasing
sequence num ber (Starting with ‘1'), then use this function. You can reset the value to 1 with the
RESETSEQx function.
RESETSEQ1
RESETSEQ2
Reset SEQ1 to “1".
Reset SEQ2 to “1".
RESETSEQ3
Reset SEQ3 to “1".
RM VNUM CHR
Rem ove num eric characters.
SEQ1
Insert the value of SEQ1 in the current attribute or field.
SEQ2
Insert the value of SEQ2 in the current attribute or field.
SEQ3
Insert the value of SEQ3 in the current attribute or field.
In the exam ple above we are using SEQ1 to add a sequence num ber as attribute for the detailline
node. Here is the details:
266
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Change field definition
XML definition name . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
XML path . . . . . . . . :
Field sequence
Field . . . .
Attribute . .
Description .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page type(s) .
Line type . .
Use relative
Line . . . . .
From position
To position .
Length . . . .
. . .
. . .
line
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
XML361D
XML_DEMO
3
/Root/Document//DetailLine
1
SEQ
DETAIL
N
Operator . . . . . . . . .
Compare value . . . . . .
Y=Yes, N=No
F4=List
More...
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Change field definition
XML definition name . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
XML path . . . . . . . . :
XML361D
XML_DEMO
3
/Root/Document//DetailLine
Constant . . . . . . . . .
Functions
. . . . . . . .
SEQ1
End
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Only thing m issing is to reset the sequence num ber each tim e there is a new docum ent num ber.
That is done in the com pany attribute:
InterForm A/S 267
Change field definition
XML definition name . . :
Sequence number . . . . :
XML path . . . . . . . . :
XML361D
XML_DEMO
2
/Root//Document
Constant . . . . . . . . .
Functions
. . . . . . . .
RESETSEQ1
End
F3=Exit
F4=List
F12=Cancel
The definitions m ade above are all intended for the InterForm 400 dem o spooled file, which you
can print out from the InterForm 400 Service Menu.
The final result of the settings done above results in an XML file nam ed:
MyFileYour new InterForm 400 m odules.-2011-03-29-12.50.55.411000.xm l
(W here “2011-03-29-12.50.55.411000" of course will be exchanged for the exact tim e stam p
whenever the conversion is run).
The contents of the XML file will be like
shown here. Because of the use of the
PAGE1 page type only one
<Docum entNo> field is shown for each
value - not 2 for “1001" - even though 2
pages contain this value.
268
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create the XML files in AFC
If you want to convert your spooled files into XML files, then you will also need to add an X-line in
Auto Form s Control (AFC) like below:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
0002 X DEMO
Create XML file def.: XML_DEMO
0003 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
2.0
X
P
N
W
X
*
F3=Exit
F15=Subset
=
=
=
=
=
AFC305D
Device file
Program
UserData
Suspend
*=Suspend
Send PDF email / Fax
Create PDF File
Print to Windows printer
Create XML file
Comment
F13=Fold/Unfold
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
F17=Subset by Spooled File
F23=More options
Apart from selecting the spooled file via its attributes this screen is shown:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
0002 X DEMO
Create XML file def.: XML_DEMO
0003 6
Hold Spooled File
Seqnbr Function
2.0
X
AFC305D
Device file
Program
UserData
Create XML file
Finish definition name . . . .
XML_DEMO
User profile to run job . . .
*SPLFOWNER
*SPLFOWNER,
user profile
Refer to the description of Auto Form s Control for details.
InterForm A/S 269
Sort Definitions
This function is used if pages in a spool entry for the sam e receiver ID are not consecutive, and
there is a dem and for them to be sorted this way.
The function should be used prior to an overlay m erge or a prinserter or PFE MailPrinter preprocess.
Enter Menu point 5. Sort Definitions on the m enu 5. W ork W ith Auto Forms Control. The
following screen will appear:
Work with Sort Definitions
Start with . . . . .
SOR300D
__________
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
Name
Description
(No Sort definitions - F6 to create)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new sorter definition.
One sorter definition is specific for one type of print job, and can be referred to by any num ber
of queues defined in AutoForm sControl.
Update Sort Definition
Definition name
Description
. . . . :
. . . . . . .
PETER
Sort IF400DEMO
Insert separator page before
start of new group . . . .
*YES
*NO, *YES
Insert separator page if
break in sort field no . .
1-6
F3=Exit
Definition name:
270
SOR310D
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
1_
F12=Cancel
This nam e will be referred to by the AFC function D=Sort Spooled File
(hidden).
Version 2014
Insert Pages before
start of new group: Stating *YES will produce an extra page in the sorted spool entry with
the text SEPARATOR PAGE inserted between each sorted group
within the resulting spool entry. The page will include the character
string which m et the sort criteria.
Insert separator page
if break in
sort field no.:
This option defines the detail level for insertion of the separator page,
e.g. stating 3 will insert a separator page if one or m ore characters
changes within any of the intervals defined in sort field num ber 1 to 3.
The separator page will additionally list the contents of each sort field.
Pressing Enter will bring up the following screen:
Work with Sort Definition Details
Definition name
. . . . :
Start with . . . . .
SOR320D
PETER
____
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
Seqnbr.
Description
(No sort definition details - F6 to create)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new definition.
More definitions can be created but is only relevant if the Page Selection criteria is used.
Create Sort Definition Details
Definition name
. . . . :
Sequence number . . . . .
Description . . . . . . .
SOR330D
DEMO
__1
Sort_by_Customer_ID__________
Page selection criteria
Print line
___
___
___
Position
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper
____
____
____
Compare value
_______________________________
_______________________________
_______________________________
Find sort fields in the following positions
Sort field no.
Print line
Position
1
___
___ - ___
2
___
___ - ___
3
___
___ - ___
4
___
___ - ___
5
___
___ - ___
6
___
___ - ___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F13=Select spooled file
Ascending/Descending
_
(A D)
_
(A D)
_
(A D)
_
(A D)
_
(A D)
_
(A D)
F18=DSPSPLF
InterForm A/S 271
The functionality of F13 and F18 is described for the split defintion, which is found on page
183.
Page Selection criteria
The page selection criteria should only be used if the sam e spool entry contains m ore than
one page layout.
This could be the case if a spool entry contains invoices and credit notes, and the custom er
ID, intended for use as sort field, is placed in different line/colum n positions on the invoices
than on the credit notes. In this case you should create two Sort Definition Details, where
one com pare with the text INVOICE and the other with CREDIT NOTE, and each has its own
specification for the custom er ID sort field.
If som e of the invoices consisted of several pages of which only the first page indicate
INVOICE, the successive pages will autom atically follow the first page of the invoice. That
m eans pages which are not recognized by any Page Selection criteria will in the final sort
autom atically succeed the last recognized page.
Print Line:
The print line in the spool entry to search.
Position:
The colum n interval to search
Oper.
The boolean operator relating to the com pare value.
The operators used are standard operators known from e.g.
Query/400:
EQ
NE
LT
LE
GT
GE
Com pare value:
Equal to com pare value
Not equal to com pare value
Less than com pare value
Less than or equal to com pare value
Greater than com pare value
Greater than or equal to com pare value
The character string or num eric value which the operator should
com pare with. The com parison is in reality done on hexadecim al
values. This m eans that e.g. the figure 1 which has EBCDIC value F1h
is greater than the character Z which has EBCDIC value E9h.
Find sort fields in the following positions
The Sort fields indicate the detail level of the sort process. Pages will be sorted in the sam e
order as the sort fields. Sort field no.1 is the m ost significant for the sort.
Print Line:
The print line in the spool entry to search.
Position:
The colum n interval to search.
Ascending/
decending:
Select the way you want to order this sorting field. If you leave it
blank it will default to ascending.
Examples Using Sort
The following m akes use of the dem o spool entry delivered with InterForm 400 ®. You can print
this from the m enu 12. Service Functions.
On all pages the Custom er ID is always four digits found in line 13 position 57 - 60:
272
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Display Spooled File
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Page/Line
1/3
Control . . . . .
Columns
1 - 78
Find . . . . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
1
Herring Marine Research
Seaweed Street 14
9000 Battleaxe
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Martin Merman
1004/PDC.20-02-2008
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
---------------------------------Congratulations with your new InterForm400 module(s).
You are now able to fully exploit the benifits of combining
InterForm400 with one or more of the powerful modules to impress
your customers and ease the workflow in your organisation.
The following license code(s) will be needed to activate the
module(s) permanently to your System(s):
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
The distinction between Docum ent Managem ent and Modules letters is the text “Docum ent” or
“m odules.” which can be located on each page in line 15 position 34 - 41.
Note that we m ust com pare the sam e num ber of characters, which is the reason why we
check for “m odules.” (Including the “.”) in order to m atch the length of the word “Docum ent”.
Display Spooled File
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Page/Line
3/15
Control . . . . .
+1
Columns
1 - 78
Find . . . . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Re. Your new InterForm400 Document Management System.
----------------------------------------------------Congratulations with your new InterForm400 software.
InterForm400 will enable you to print Electronic Forms and perform
advanced data remapping and copy management of your existing SCS
print data. InterForm 400 exploits the advanced features of
standard HP-PCL printers and is the chosen document management
solution for over 2000 installations.
The following license code(s) will be needed to activate
InterForm400 permanently to your system(s):
Product
Model
i-Group
Serial No.
License Code
---------------------------------------------------------------InterForm400
515
i050
4449079
F2 E7 20 AA
InterForm400
810
i100
44B2031
AA BB 01 23
InterForm400
890
i600
44D3971
1A BC DE 44
InterForm400
520
i100
44A1460
79 10 22 F1
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
Example 1. Sort by Type, “Document" letters first:
A sort definition could m onitor the field with the text “Docum ent” or “m odules.”. The spool entry
would then be sorted with all the Document letters first followed by the modules letters.
Document letters will appear before modules letters in the resulting printout, as the sort is
done alphabetically on the contents of the sort fields - with ascending (A) sort sequence..
InterForm A/S 273
Find sort fields in the following positions
Sort field no. Print line
Position
Ascending/Descending
1
_15
_34 - _41
A
2
___
___ - ___
_
Example 2. Sort by Type, “modules.” letters first:
To reverse the sequence of the letters com pared to above we can just state the sequence to
be Descending:
Find sort fields in the following positions
Sort field no. Print line
Position
Ascending/Descending
1
_15
_34 - _41
D
2
___
___ - ___
_
Example 3. Sort by Type and Customer ID:
To increase the detail level of the search we could have the groups of Docum ent and m odules
letters sorted according to Custom er ID. This would also be necessary if som e of the letters
consisted of m ore than 1 page, where page 2 and succeeding pages only indicate the
custom er ID, but not “Docum ent” or “m odules.”.
W e add an extra sort definition, where we search for the custom er ID:
Find sort fields in the following positions
Sort field no. Print line
Position
Ascending/Descending
1
_15
_34 - _41
A
2
_13
_57 - _60
A
Example 4. Sort by Customer ID and type:
Another approach could be to sort by custom er ID’s first and then by the type being
“Docum ent” or “m odules.”. This is achieved by reversing the order of the sort fields from the
previous exam ple:
Find sort fields in the following positions
Sort field no. Print line
Position
Ascending/Descending
1
_13
_57 - _60
A
2
_15
_34 - _41
A
In an AFC definition we can activate the sort definition SORTDEM O, by using function B:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT2
Seqnbr F. Formtyp
Library:
Save Jobname
AFC305D
APF3812
Filename
Device file
Program
UserData
(No functions defined)
Seqnbr Function
1,0
D
Sort Spooled File
Sort definition name . .
Outque for sorted print
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
274
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SORTDEMO__
*INPUT____
__________
SORTDONE__
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This will cause the dem o spool entry to have pages sorted into another SCS spool entry with
form type SORTDONE is created and placed after the original spool entry in the sam e queue.
W e can now m erge the new spool entry with an overlay conditioned by the Form Type
SORTDONE or by using an Overlay Selector:
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT2
Library:
AFC305D
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file Program
0001 D DEMO
Sort, def: SORTDEMO outq *DEFAULT &form type: SORTDONE
Seqnbr Function
2,0
1
F3=Exit
Attributtes of input file for which to
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save attribute . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spooled file name . . . . . . . . . .
Device file . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program that opened file . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-specified data . . . . . . . . .
F13=Fold/Unfold
UserData
execute the function
SORTDONE__
_
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
Update AFC-functions attached to output queues
Queue:
AFC_INPUT2
Library:
AFC305D
APF3812
Seqnbr F. Formtyp Save Jobname
Filename
Device file Program
0001 D DEMO
Sort, def: SORTDEMO outq *DEFAULT &form type: SORTDONE
Seqnbr Function
2,0
1
Merge with overlay
Output queue for merged print .
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer type . . . . . . . . . .
Unicode output . . . . . . . . .
Merge overprint lines . . . . .
Find overlay in form type table
F3=Exit
UserData
F13=Fold/Unfold
*DEFAULT__
__________
__________
*INPUT
*NO
_
(Y N)
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
F12=Cancel
The Sorted spool entry from exam ple 4, including a definition of insertion of a separator page if
break in sort field num ber 2 would look like this:
InterForm A/S 275
DISPLAY SPOOL FILE
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Page/Line 1/1
Function . . . .
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7...
** SEPERATOR PAGE **
1001
modules.
Florence Flowers
Tulip Road 16
4000 Marigold
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Susan Sunflower
1001/PDC.20-02-2008
Re. Your new InterForm400 modules.
---------------------------------Congratulations with your new InterForm400 module(s).
You are now able to fully exploit the benifits of combining
InterForm400 with one or more of the powerful modules to impress
your customers and ease the workflow in your organisation.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
J TIP J
You can use the sort selection criteria that is included on the separator page (in this example
1001 or InterForm400 ®) to have an overlay selector pick an overlay that prints the separator page
to be with a special overlay or from another drawer, e.g. with coloured paper.
276
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
PDF File Bookmarks
From the InterForm 400 m ain m enu select 5. Work with Auto Form s Control followed by 6. PDF
bookmark definitions. Here you can define how bookm arks should be inserted when you create
a PDF file in InterForm 400.
Note, that alternatively you can also include &&BMK com m ands in the *SCS spooled file you
m erge with to insert bookm arks. Refer to page 445 for m ore inform ation.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule or the classic package for
InterForm 400.
You can then later refer to a bookm ark definition when you create a PDF file in InterForm 400.
W hen you create a new bookm ark definition you are presented with this screen:
Create PDF Bookmark definition
BMK310D
Bookmark definition name .
FIN_REPORT_
Description
Bookmarks_for_financial_report___________
. . . . . . .
Display bookmarks at open.
1
0=No
1=Yes
Here you state a nam e for the bookm ark definition, a description and select if the bookm arks
should be displayed when the PDF file is opened or not.
W hen you press Enter/F3/F12 you will see this screen:
Work with PDF Bookmark details
Bookmark definition . :
BOOKMRK1
Position to . . . . . .
____
Sequence number
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
Seqnbr.
000
BMK320D
5=Display
7=Rename
Description
All pages
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Here you can define one or m ore rules for when and how bookm arks should be inserted. Press
F6 to add a new one:
InterForm A/S 277
Create PDF Bookmark details
Sequence number
Description
. . . . .
. . . . . . .
BMK330D
000
____
Type option, Press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Definition
Page selection
Initial open level
Level-1
Level-2
Level-3
Level-4
Level-5
Level-6
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Page selection:
If you want to use m ore than one rule (or sequence) for the bookm arks in
one spooled file, you need to restrict the sequence to som e of the pages
only by specifying rules in 'Page selection'. Otherwise skip this part. Refer
to page 272 for details.
Initial open level:
You can decide if the nested bookm arks should be expanded (and to what
level) or not when opening the PDF file. If you use '0' or blank for this, then
all levels are expanded. Any other value will expand all levels down to the
specified num ber.
Level 1-6:
Select one of these to specify the bookm arks at a certain level:
Change PDF Bookmark details
Sequence number
Description
. . . . :
. . . . . . .
BMK330D
000
All pages
Level-2
Field
1
2
Prefix
Zip:___________
City:__________
Color
F3=Exit
Print line
__8
__8
__5
Position
__8 - _11
_13 - _40
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Above we have defined the second level. The fields 1 and 2 will be concatenated to m ake the full
text of the bookm ark. So you can insert fixed text (prefix) followed by text from the spooled file
page to define each field. You can use any colour for the bookm ark. Define your own colours if
necessary by use of option '7. W ork with palette colors' from the InterForm 400 adm inistration
m enu. Refer to page 363 for m ore inform ation of how to do that.
The inform ation used from the spooled file will be inspected by the bookm ark generator. Only
when this inform ation changes a new bookm ark will be generated.
278
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
G NOTE G
Text for bookm arks m ust be placed in a fixed position on the page. If you want to search for a
certain text and insert bookm arks if found you could consider to use the APF3812/CRTPBSPLF
com m and to do copy the floating inform ation into a fixed spot of a new *SCS spooled file before
m erging. This could be called from an AFC user exit program .
InterForm A/S 279
Getting familiar with PDF Bookmarks
In order to dem onstrate how to insert PDF bookm arks we will go through the process necessary
to insert these bookm arks when creating a PDF file based on the InterForm 400 dem o spooled
file:
The idea is, that the first level contains inform ation of the custom er num ber. Each custom er could
have subsidaries in different cities, so level 2 refers to each zipcode and city. Level 3 finally points
out each contact person for each subsidary. Refer to page 377 for inform ation of the dem o
spooled file and how to create it.
From the InterForm 400 m ain m enu select 5. W ork with Auto Forms Control and 6. PDF
bookmark definitions followed by F6=Create to start creating a new PDF bookm ark definition:
Create PDF Bookmark definition
BMK310D
Bookmark definition name .
DEMOSPOOL_
Description
Bookmarks for the Demo Spooled File
. . . . . . .
Display bookmarks at open.
1
0=No
1=Yes
Above we have stated a nam e and description for the definition and decided, that the bookm arks
should be visible when opening the PDF file later. Press Enter to proceed. Here you will see a list
of bookm ark detail lines, that is em pty. Press F6=Create to create a new sequence line:
280
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create PDF Bookmark details
Sequence number
Description
. . . . .
. . . . . . .
BMK330D
000
All_pages_________________________
Type option, Press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Definition
Page selection
Initial open level
Level-1
Level-2
Level-3
Level-4
Level-5
Level-6
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Through Page selection we could have inserted conditions so we could handle bookm ark
differently for som e of the pages, but as this spooled file is the sam e for all pages, this will not be
used here.
Initial open level tells to what degree the bookm arks should be expanded. Here we use '1' as we
want this display when we open the PDF file:
The definitions for the individual levels are shown below:
Level-1
Field
1
2
Prefix
Cust._No._______
________________
Color
Print line
_13
___
_3
Position
_57 - _60
___ - ___
F4=List
Level-2
Field
1
2
Color
Prefix
Zip_____________
City____________
Print line
__8
__8
_5
Position
__8 - 11
_13 - 40
F4=List
InterForm A/S 281
Level-3
Field
1
2
Prefix
_______________
_______________
Color
Print line
_11
___
_8
Position
__8 - _35
___ - ___
F4=List
W hen done defining the levels you just press Enter several tim es and the bookm ark definition has
been saved.
As the final thing we want to use the PDF Bookm ark definition. You can do it in this m anner:
•
Create the dem o spooled file as described on page 377.
•
W ith the sam e interactive job you go to a com m and line and type the com m and:
APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF KARTSET(SAMPLE) KLICHE(IF400DEMO)
FILNVN(QPRINT) SPLNBR(*LAST) BMKDEF(DEMOSPOOL) OUTTYPE(*VIEW)
This will create a pdf file with the sam e nam e as your user ID in the /APF3812Hom e/VIEW
directory. If you have access to this directory from your PC and you have associated .PDF with
Acrobat Reader it will show you the result autom atically.
Go through the setup described in Appendix L if Acrobat Reader does not start or does not show
the PDF file.
282
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
7. User Output Queue
This feature offers the possibility to m ove any spooled file to a user dependent output queue. It
can be reached from the InterForm 400 Main Menu by first selecting 5. W ork with Auto Forms
Control and then 7. User output queue.
Work with user output queues
Position to . . . . . .
__________
AFC315D
User profile
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
User profile
KSE
HVE
SR
Output queue
HP5SI
PRT01
IMA7000
Library
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
Printer type
HP4D
HP4500
HP4
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Here you state a preferred output queue and the printer type used for m erges for each user
profile. You distribute spooled files depending on the spooled file owner by use of 1=M erge w ith
Overlay or 5 = M ove Spooled File line in AFC.
Refer to page 145 and 151 for details.
If the spooled file owner is not included in the list above, then the two Auto Form s Control options
will react differently:
1=M erge w ith overlay
If the user profile is not found, the AFC job will use the default output queue of the job and
that is also blank it will halt with a m essage (MSGW ) inform ing you, that the spooled file
owner is not in this list. You can then add the user and answer R-Retry or ignore the
m erge elem ent with I-Ignore.
5=M ove spooled file
If the spooled file owner is not found, then the move elem ent will be ignored and the
spooled file will rem ain on the sam e output queue.
InterForm A/S 283
General Description of OSC (Output Schedule Control)
Output Schedule Control (OSC) is a sub-system in InterForm 400 ® which m ain purpose is to
optim ize the daily m ail procedures in an organisation and thereby reduce the postage costs
significantly. The key elem ent with this function is that rather then sending 10 envelopes to the
sam e custom er, all docum ents should be sent together.
OSC will handle m ultiple spool files, independently of docum ent type and produce a new single
spool file in *SCS form at, sorted e.g. according to the recipient nam e.
OSC jobs works differently than Auto Form s Control jobs. OSC jobs are not running at all tim es.
OSC jobs wake up at specific tim es of the week and will m erge all spool files waiting at a specific
output queue into one large SCS spool file. This new spool file can be sorted and distributed and
then m erged using Auto Form s Control. W hen all waiting spool files have been handled, the OSC
job goes into ‘sleep m ode’ again, and awaits the next ‘wake up call’.
Output Schedule Control can help you print out in these situations:
1.
You have large spool files to print. It is not necessary to print them out im m ediately after they
are created. You want to (autom atically) print them out during the night, when the printers are
idle.
2.
You are going to print out very large spool files and you want to autom atically distribute the
workload on several printers.
3.
You have 2 or m ore spool files, that are to be distributed to the sam e custom ers. For easy
and low cost distribution, you want to m erge all the spool files to one and sort it, so pages for
the sam e custom er are collected and printed together.
4.
You have the situation as described in exam ple 3, but the custom er inform ation is placed on
differently on the page depending on the type of spool file.
5.
You want to use the solution described in exam ple 3, but you are sending out letters to
custom ers, and these letters have only custom er inform ation on the first page for each
custom er.
The setup of the prim ary functions of Output Schedule Control is m anaged by selecting m enu
option 6. from the m ain m enu. The sam e m enu can be entered directly by the program call:
CALL APF3812/OSCADM
The m enu appears like this:
284
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
InterForm 400
-
Output Schedule Control
Select one of the following options:
System.......: INTER02
Workstn ID...: IF400_PDC2
User ID......: POULD
1. Functions attached to Output Queues
10. Start OSCCTL subsystem / server
11. End OSCCTL subsystem and server
12. Work with OSCCTL subsystem
Option: __
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
Notice, that as default the nam e for the related subsystem is OSCCTL and placed in the
APF3812 library. This can be changed in the configuration option. If you change the
subsystem nam e and/or the library, the com m ands below should of course reflect this change.
10. Start OSCCTL subsystem
Output Schedule Control is running as an ordinary System i sub-system , and therefore has to
be started as such. It is a good idea to let the sub-system start autom atically at IPL. This is
done by inserting the following com m and in your startup program :
STRSBS SBSD(APF3812/OSCCTL) MONMSG CPF0000
Of course, you can always start the sub-system m anually, by the com m and:
STRSBS APF3812/OSCCTL
11. End OSCCTL subsystem
Before m aking upgrades the OSCCTL subsystem should be ended.
This can be done in the m enu or by the com m and:
ENDSBS SBS(OSCCTL) OPTION(*IMMED)
12. Work with Active Subsystem OSCCTL
This m enu item is a shortcut to the com m and:
WRKACTJOB SBS(OSCCTL)
If the subsystem is started, it will look like this:
InterForm A/S 285
Opt
Subsystem/Job
OSCCTL
OSCSERVER
User
QSYS
AFCOPER
Type
SBS
ASJ
CPU %
.0
.0
Function
PGM-OSC500C
Status
DEQW
MSGW
Note that the status MSGW (m essage waiting) is norm al, and does not indicate an error (as it
usually does).
Describing the OSC definition lines
If you from the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu choose 6. W ork with Output Schedule Control
and then 1. Functions attached to Output Queues, then the screen below is shown:
Work with OSC definitions
Position to . . . . . .
OSC100D
__________
Output queue
Type options, press Enter.
1=Run OSC
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print definition
12=Work with output queue
15=Hold output queue
16=Release output queue
Opt
__
__
Output que
AFC_INPUT2
BATCH
Library
APF3812
QUSRSYS
Description
Merge several spoolfiles to one
Batch printing.
Sts
RLS
RLS
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to add a new OSC definition, enter the output queue to be m onitored by OSC, a
description of the job and press Enter.
Now this screen is presented:
Create OSC definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Definition
Specify input spooled file priority
Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output
Define sort fields
Specify grouping and separator page
R Define resulting output queues
Specify automatic start scheduling
Specify automatic start options
R Specify output queue for processed spooled files
Specify job priority
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The ‘R’ (required) indicates the lines, which m ust be filled out before this OSC definition can
be used.
286
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The various definition lines does the following:
Specify input spooled file priority:
This definition line is only used for defining what spool file attributes to sort on, if
no sorting fields are selected. Norm ally it is not necessary to fill this out.
Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output:
If you decide to sort on the spool file attributes in com bination with text of each
spool page (e.g. custom er num ber), you can do this using this function. This
places the attributes on each page.
Define sort fields:
Here you state where to find the sorting keys (e.g. custom er num ber) on each
page. You also refer to positions, where the attributes have been inserted. If all
spool files have the sorting fields in the sam e positions, you only need one
sequence line. If the placem ent of the sorting fields varies, it is necessary to
have m ore sequence lines and to use the page selection criteria. For a
description of the page selection criteria see page 272.
Specify grouping and separator page:
Here you decide how m any sorting fields, that should change in order for
creating a new group. You can also specify to insert a separator page, when
changing groups.
A group is dealt with as an undividable num ber of pages. If you choose
to distribute the workload on several output queues a group will not be
broken up.
Define resulting output queues:
Specifies on which output queue(s) to place the resulting SCS spool file
including all the pages. You can decide, that OSC should balance the workload
between several output queues. Using the workload factor. Note that groups
defined above are kept together.
Specify automatic start scheduling:
Specifies weekdays and tim es, when the OSC job is to autostart and process all
waiting spool files.
Specify automatic start options:
Specify whether or not to send a m essage when starting or/and when finished.
It is also possible to decide to start or not to start the OSC job, if it could not be
started at the scheduled tim e (e.g. because of an IPL).
If you e.g. select this:
InterForm A/S 287
Specify automatic start options
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Send message . . . . . . .
1
Delayed auto start
option . . . . . . . . . .
2
Message queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
QSYSOPR
QSYS
1=Do not send message
2=Before processing output queue
3=After processing output queue
4=Both before and after
1=Start job
2=Send inquiry message
3=Skip delayed jobs
Delayed auto start can occur if Output Schedule Control (OSC)
- or the entire system - is ended and later restarted.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Then you will get an inquiry m essage on m essage queue QSYSOPR the next tim e the
OSCCTL subsystem is started - if the OSC job was scheduled to be run (via option
Specify automatic start scheduling) at a tim e when the OSCCTL subsystem was
down. In such cases you will see this m essage on the specified m essage queue when
the subsystem is started later:
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
OSC1001
Inquiry
27/09/07
Severity . . . . . . . :
00
Time sent
10:41:25
. . . . . . :
Start time for OSC job APF3812/AFC_INPUT1 exceeded (C G)
Bottom
Type reply below, then press Enter.
Reply . . . .
F3=Exit
F6=Print
F9=Display message details
F21=Select assistance level
F12=Cancel
If you answer ‘C’ (Cancel) the OSC job will not run now. Answer ‘G’ (Go) to start the
OSC job now.
Specify output queue for processed spooled files:
Specify an output queue for placing the incom ing spool files or specify *DELETE for
deleting them , when processed by OSC.
Specify job priority:
Specify the priority of the OSC job.
288
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Principle of OSC (Output Schedule Control)
In short OSC m erges all spool files into one and sorts the pages by spool file attributes and/or
text on each spool page. This m erge can be done at certain tim es of the week, and it can also
be initiated by choosing option 1=Run OSC from the OSC m enu.
The m erged SCS spool file can be distributed to one or m ore output queues, using a workload
factor. These output queues should be m onitored by Auto Form s Control and then m erged.
For this m erge an overlay selector is recom m ended.
The incom ing spool files can after the m erge be either deleted or m oved to another output
queue.
In the following exam ple, the output queue controlled by OSC, has 3 spool files.
In output queue 01, Spool file 1 has 5 pages (first page is for custom er 1, next for custom er 2
etc), the second spool file (spool file 2) has 6 pages and spool file 3 has 4 pages.
W e have defined that the resulting print job(1 spool file) should be shared by 2 printers, with a
workload factor of 40% for output queue 02 and 60% for output queue 03. As we have 15
spool pages in total to process, the resulting two spool files 4 and 5 will be as per below:
Contents of a Output Queue being m onitored by OSC:
Output Queue 01
Spool file 1
Spool file 2
Spool file 3
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
1
2
3
4
5
2
4
5
7
8
9
2
7
9
9
Contents in the OSC defined Resulting Output Queues:
Output Queue 02
W orkload 60%
Output Queue 03
W orkload 40%
Spool file 4
Spool file 5
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
Custom er
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
7
7
8
9
9
9
The resulting two spool files are now ready to be used as Input for Auto Form s Control.
InterForm A/S 289
Getting Familiar with OSC (Output Schedule Control)
W hen selecting option 1. Functions Attached to Output Queues in the m enu 6. W ork with
Output Schedule Control on the m ain m enu we get the screen below:
Work with OSC definitions
OSC100D
Position to . . . . . .
Output queue
Type options, press Enter.
1=Run OSC
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print definition
12=Work with output queue
15=Hold output queue
16=Release output queue
Opt
_2
Output que
OSC_OUTQ01
Library
APF3812
Description
Output Schedule Control DEMO definition
Sts
RLS
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new OSC definition. W hen created press F5 to have it updated in the
above screen.
Create OSC definition
Output queue . . . . . . .
Library
OSC_OUTQ01
. . . . . . . .
Description
. . . . . . .
OSC110D
APF3812___
Output Shedule Control DEMO definition
To update and change an OSC definition enter 2 in front of the OSC output queue. The
following OSC definitions will appear. Enter 1 in front of the OSC entries you wish to change.
Change OSC definition
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
1
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
F3=Exit
290
Definition
Specify input spooled file priority
Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output
Define sort fields
Specify grouping and separator page
Define resulting output queues
Specify automatic start scheduling
Specify automatic start options
Specify output queue for processed spooled files
Specify job priority
F12=Cancel
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
OSC300D
Specify input spooled file priority:
Specify input spooled file priority
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Input spooled file
Form type . . . . . . .
Job name . . . . . . . .
Job number . . . . . . .
Spooled file . . . . . .
Spool file no. . . . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sortingpriority
_10
___
___
___
_20
___
___
___
___
This sort sequence will be used for pages (defined at "Define sort fields")
having identical sort values. Lowest number have highest priority.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
In the above entry screen we define which sort values should be used and what priority
they have. Above we have selected that the FORM TYPE of the docum ent, have highest sort
priority and following the SPOOL FILE NO. should be used.
Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output:
Specify placement of input spool file attributes at output
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Input spooled file
Form type . . . . . . .
Job name . . . . . . . .
Job number . . . . . . .
Spooled file . . . . . .
Spool file no. . . . . .
Device file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Program that opened file
Library . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
- Insert into -Line
Position
__1
110
___
___
___
___
___
___
__1
120
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
The same placement will be used for all pages.
Use a area that is blank for all pages in the input output queue.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
In the above entry screen we define where the sort criterias should be inserted in the spool
files, that will be used in the OSC output queue.
M WARNING M
The positions selected above m ust be positions where now other inform ation will be stated. If
the original spool data are in the sam e positions as specified above, they will be over written.
InterForm A/S 291
Define Sort Fields:
Work with OSC sort definitions
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
Position to
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
. . . . .
Sequence
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
2
Seqnbr.
1
OSC330D
5=Display
7=Change sequence
Description
Find inserted sort fields
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to create a new Sort Definition. Enter 2 in front of an existing sort definition to
change.
Change OSC sort definition
OSC335D
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Sequence . . . . . . . . :
Description . . . . . . .
1
Find inserted sort fields
Page selection criteria
Print line
___
___
___
Position
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
Oper
____
____
____
Find sort fields in the following positions
Sort field no.
Print line
1
__1
2
__1
3
___
4
___
5
___
6
___
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Compare value
_________________________________
_________________________________
_________________________________
Position
110 - 119
120 - 129
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
___ - ___
In the above entry screen we define in which positions OSC will find the SORT fields, which we
previously defined. An extra feaure is the Page selection criteria, where we can define which
spool pages should be sorted, based on the spool data contents. For further inform ation about
the page selection criteria see page 272.
292
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Specify Grouping and separator page:
Specify grouping and separator page
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Group by number of
sort fields . . . . . . .
1
1-6
Insert separator page before
start of new group . . . .
Y
Y=Yes, N=No
A new group occurs when the content of one or more sort fields
(from sort field one to "Group by number of sort fields") changes.
All pages of a group will always be sent to same the output queue.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
A group is a num ber of successive pages having identical values in one or m ore sort fields. In
the above entry screen specify how m any sort values should be included in a group.
Furtherm ore, specify if you wish a separator page between groups.
Define resulting output queues:
Work with OSC resulting output queues
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
__
__
---- Destination ----Output que Library
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
AFC_INPUT2
APF3812
OSC350D
5=Display
Workload
factor
40
60
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
In the above entry screen we define one or m ore resulting output queues for OSC to send the
resulting spool file. As the resulting spool file could be quite big, it is possible to define m ore
output queues to share the resulting spool file. Furtherm ore, we can define which workload
factor the resulting output queues should have.
Above we have defined two resulting output queues to share the resulting OSC spool file. The
workload have been set to be 40% for output queue AFC_INPUT1 and 60% for output queue
AFC_INPUT2.
InterForm A/S 293
Specify automatic start scheduling:
Specify automatic start scheduling
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Monday
15:00
_____
_____
_____
_____
F3=Exit
Tuesday
15:00
_____
_____
_____
_____
Wed.day
15:00
_____
_____
_____
_____
F12=Cancel
Thursday
15:00
_____
_____
_____
_____
Friday
14:00
_____
_____
_____
_____
Saturday
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
Sunday
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
F20=Sort by time
In the above entry screen we can define a scheduled start tim e of each day of the week, if an
autom atic run of the OSC job is required. As an alternative to a scheduled start of a OSC job,
the job could be started m anually by the option 1. Run OSC in 1. Functions attached to output
queues.
Specify automatic start options:
Specify automatic start options
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Send message . . . . . . .
4
Delayed auto start
option . . . . . . . . . .
1
Message queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
QSYSOPR___
QSYS______
1=Do not send message
2=Before processing output queue
3=After processing output queue
4=Both before and after
1=Start job
2=Send inquiry message
3=Skip delayed jobs
Delayed auto start can occur if Output Schedule Control (OSC)
- or the entire system - is ended and later restarted.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
W hen the hour has com e for OSC to start a OSC job, we can define som e options, in
connection with the OSC job. First we define when or if we wish to be notified about an OSC
job. In addition we can define what should happen in the event that there has been taken
back-up of the System i, IPL has been perform ed or any other reason for the OSC job not
being able to run at the scheduled tim e.
Finally we define where possible m essages are to be sent.
294
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Specify output queue for processed spooled files:
Specify output queue for processed spooled files
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Output queue . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
ARCHIVE
APF3812
Output queue, *DELETE
All input spooled files will be moved to the specified output queue,
or will be deleted if *DELETE is specified.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
W hen the OSC jobs have been executed we can define what should happen with the original
spool files, taken from the OSC output queue. As per above entry screen, we can define if we
wish to delete the spool files or we could enter an output queue for archiving purposes.
Specify job priority:
Specify job priority
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
OSC300D
OSC_OUTQ01
APF3812
Type choices, press Enter.
Job priority (RUNPTY)
Form type
F3=Exit
. .
. . . . . . . .
50
11-99
*OSC______
F12=Cancel
Above we enter the desired run priority of the OSC job, and the form type used for the m erged
spool files.
The OSC definition has now been com pleted and upon exit from the OSC definitions we will be
asked to save the definition.
Now you only have to setup Auto Form s Control jobs to m onitor the output queues
AFC_INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2.
InterForm A/S 295
Configuration and licenses
If you want to setup the InterForm 400 configuration and/or licenses (e.g. inserting the license
code), then you first select option ‘70. Configuration and licences’ on the InterForm 400 Main
Menu:
InterForm 400
-
CONFIGURATION
Select one of the following options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
System.......:
Workstn ID...:
CCSID ....:
User ID......:
PMK11
QPADEV000H
00037
KSE
Appoint administrator
Configure InterForm 400
Configure email
Configure WinPrint
50. Licence Information
51. SwiftView Users
60. Display InterForm400 End User License Agreement
Option: __
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
Here you can setup the adm inistrators, configure InterForm 400, insert license codes and
register the Swiftview users:
296
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
1. Appoint Administrator
W hen you choose the option 1. Appoint adm inistrator on the configuration m enu, you get the
following screen:
Appoint InterForm 400 Administrator
APF100D
Choose a user to be administrator of the InterForm 400 system, or enter *ALL
to indicate that all users are given authority to the administration menu.
User profile KSE
Kim S. Egekjaer
Vice administrators
Type options, press Enter.
1=Add
4=Delete
Opt
User
Description
_
_
_
F3=Exit
HVE
KSE
KSE2
Henrik V. Erikson
Kim S. Egekjaer
Kim S. Egekjaer
F12=Cancel
It m ay be wise to appoint a frequent user of the InterForm 400 ® system to be adm inistrator.
You m ay also choose a person in your com puter departm ent.
Once you have specified an adm inistrator, and exit the system , only the appointed
adm inistrator will be given access to the adm inistration m enu.
The adm inistrator m ay later pass on the authority to another user or re-open the adm inistration
m enu to everyone (*ALL).
Viceadm inistrators have the sam e access as the adm inistrator, except that viceadm inistrators
are not able to add/rem ove adm inistrators.
InterForm A/S 297
2. Configure InterForm 400
W hen you choose option 2. Configure InterForm 400 on the Configuration m enu, you get the
following screen:
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
1/15
Specify default output queue for users with no individual output queue.
Users may override value when using the system.
Output queue
Library
__________
__________
Specify default printer type
Printer type . . . __________
HP4, HP4D, HP4_PJL, HP4D_PJL,
HP5C, HP4500, HP4500D,
ZEBRA203, ZEBRA300, QLZPL203,
IPL203, IPL300
Allow users to override standard printer type ?
F3=Exit
Y
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
If you are only using one laser printer for m anual m erges (option 3 in the m ain m enu), you can
specify it here.
If you have m ore than one laser printer, you m ay wish to assign printers to users individually.
This is done under W ork with InterForm 400 ® users.
The advantage of operating with standard output queues is, clearly, that users avoid having to
select an actual output queue each tim e they enter the InterForm 400 ® system .
The system supports a num ber of different printers. Besides the types m entioned in the above
screen, the system supports all other laser printers which em ulates an HP printer. If your
printer is not m entioned, you should specify HP4 in the field Printer type. Refer to page 421 for
detailed inform ation on supported printers.
If you have m ore than one printer type connected to System i, you should allow users to
override the default printer type. Press Enter and the next screen is displayed.
298
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
2/15
Specify default form type for the InterForm 400 system.
Users may override value when using the system.
Form type
Select paper size
*STD______
4
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
A4
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
COM-10
MONARCH
C5
DL
A = LEDGER
B = A3
C = A5
Y (Y N)
Do you want to define paper size on the individual overlays
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The specified type of form s will be used throughout the system unless you state Y to allow
individual paper size definitions for different overlays.
Note that the Paper size selection on the Design overlay m enu (see screen with Global overlay
settings on page 53) will only appear if Y has been stated in this screen. If N is inserted all
overlays throughout the system will use the default paper size stated here.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
3/15
Number to be added to the macro numbers the system works with . . .
____0
The reason to add a number can be, that printers are equipped with
flash-simm cards, that does not correspond to the HP standard saying,
that a macro in the printers internal memory should be selected,
even if it has the same number as a macro in the flash-simm.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The next screen is a possibility of defining an offset to the m acros generated by
InterForm 400 ®.
InterForm 400 ® will always load the overlay as a m acro prior to the spool data for perform ance
reasons. The m acro ID can in som e rare cases conflict with resident m acros installed in the
printer.
This default value of zero should norm ally not be touched.
InterForm A/S 299
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
4/15
Do you want to use DDM to InterForm files
on other AS/400
Use DDM . . . . . . .
_
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This screen will allow InterForm 400 ® to copy overlays from an installed InterForm 400 ® on
another System i using DDM (Distributed Data Managem ent). W hen applying Yes to this
option, the function key F10 will be available from the design m enu, when copying from
another overlay (see page 52)
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
5/15
The Name that is used for this AS/400
under "Other computers" on PC's.
Networkname
Sharename
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
222.2.1.247________________
APF3812Home
Public authorisation to files that are created in the /APF3812Home/VIEW directory.
1
0 = *EXCLUDE
1 = *ALL
C
A - Z
Install SwiftView at drive
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This screen is used to define the network nam e of the System i when accessed by TCP/IP
connected W indows PCs. This nam e is the IP-address or the System i system nam e (e.g.
QS4449079), but can be changed when configuring the iSeries Access TCP/IP connection.
You can verify this nam e in the “iSeries Access Connections” on the PC. Note that all users
using the InterForm 400 ® PCL viewer function, m ust have the sam e system nam e configured in
their iSeries Access TCP/IP connection.
If you want to install Swiftview on another drive than C: on the PCs, then you can define the
alternative drive above.
This feature is used for the PCL and PDF viewer. Refer to page 35 for m ore inform ation of the
param eters above.
300
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
6/15
Select primary language.
Language code
. . . .
EN
DE=Deutsch, DK=Dansk, EN=English,
ES=Españoles, FR=Français, PT=Português
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
This m enu sets the prim ary language for the InterForm 400 ® m enus. This can be overwritten
for each individual user.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
7/15
Do you want to use the APF3812/STRWTRCHK program as validity checking program
for the STRPRTWTR and STRRMTWTR commands, to avoid a writer to be started with
FORMTYPE(*ALL) on one of the output queues defined in Auto-Forms-Control, and
if yes, what formtype has to replace *ALL when a writer is started on one of
these output queues.
Use APF3812/STRWTRCHK as a validity checker
N
(Y N)
Formtype to replace *ALL . . . . . . . . . .
__________
This option is especially useful, if you are using the same output queue
for both input to AFC-functions and for output to a printer, as a writer
never should be started with FORMTYPE(*ALL) on such an output queue.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you want Auto Form s Control to m onitor output queues with printers attached, you now have
the option to state a specific Form Type the writer should process only.
The next screen is this:
InterForm A/S 301
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
8/15
Do you want to be able to use UCS2 (unicode) in your spooled files.
Use UCS2 . . . . . . .
Y
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you activate unicode in this screen it will m ake InterForm 400 do this:
1.
Unicode options on the InterForm 400 m enues will be m ade visible.
2.
The spooled files that are m erged are inspected to search for a user defined option
(USRDFNOPT) that is ‘IF-UCS2'. If that is found the spooled file is considered to be
unicode. Alternatively you can also use norm al AFPDS unicode spooled files as input.
Refer to Appendix D on page 425 and page 47 for m ore inform ation.
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
9/17
Auto Forms Control subsystem
Subsystem description . .
Library . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
AUTO_FORM_
APF3812___
F12=Cancel
The screen above shows the current subsystem description and the library of it, that is used
for Auto Form s Control. Here you can chose a different nam e or library if wanted. If you select
a description that does not exist InterForm 400 will suggest to copy the default objects used to
the new library:
302
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create AFC subsystem description
Subsystem description . .
Library . . . . . . . .
AUTO_FORM2
APF3812
Press Enter to create the subsystem description or
press F3 or F12 to cancel.
Note:
The following objects will also be created or updated in
the subsystem library:
Object
AUTO_FORM
AUTO_FORM
AUTO_FORM
AFCSTART
Type
*JOBQ
*CLS
*JOBD
*JOBD
Description
Auto Forms Control
Auto Forms Control
Auto Forms Control
Auto Forms Control
F3=Exit
job queue
class
job description
startup job description
F12=Cancel
Just like for the AUTO_FORM subsystem above InterForm 400 will ask if you want to change
the other subsystem s on the next screens:
Output Schedule Control
Em ail recovery
Card reader term inal
(Default subsystem : APF3812/OSCCTL)
(Default subsystem : APF3812/MAILINTER)
(Default subsystem : APF3812/TERMINTER)
(The Card reader term inal is used for the Digital signature/PDF Security m odule only).
The rem aining screens are explained on page 38 and onwards.
InterForm A/S 303
3. Configure email
W ith this option (within the configuration m enu) you setup how InterForm 400 should send em ail if needed. It offers the possibility so use norm al OS400 SMTP or InterForm 400 SMTP:
(The contents of the screen depends on the e-m ail m ode you select. Here all possible texts
are displayed.)
Configure email
SMP400D
Email recovery subsystem :
Library . . . . . . . :
MAILINTER
APF3812
Email mode . . . . . . . .
2
Automatic recovery
Delay before retry .
Number of retries
Delay before retry .
Number of retries
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Email gateway
Host or ip address . . . .
Port . . . . . . . . . . .
BlueSeries integration
Use when possible . . . .
1=IBM SMTP, 2=InterForm SMTP
3=InterForm SMTP (register only)
3
1
30
1
1-120 minutes
0-99
1-120 minutes
0-99
blank=no email gateway
1-65535, blank=default port (25/465/587)
N
Y=Yes, N=No
Note:
Subsystem MAILINTER must be active to enable automatic recovery.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F22=Gateway security
Error D/202 occured starting secure environment.
The options are these:
Email mode
1=IBM SM TP: This is the default value and will m ake e-m ailing from
InterForm 400 to run as in pre 2007 versions. This m akes InterForm 400 send
out via OS400 SMTP and MSF servers. This requires that the SMTP and MSF
servers are setup correctly and are running. Refer to Appendix N on page
520 for m ore inform ation of how to do that.
2=InterForm SM TP: Use the InterForm 400 SMTP instead of the IBM SMTP.
It requires that the M AILINTER subsystem is running and that the System i is
able to reach internet to e-m ail itself or via the E-m ail gateway.
3=InterForm SM TP (register only): All e-m ails sent from InterForm 400 are
not sent im m ediately but only registered. This can e.g. be used for testing.
You can then at a later tim e (e.g. at night where the bandwidth is m ost
probably not used) send all pending e-m ails with the com m and
APF3812/SNDM AILS. You can view the registered m ails via the
APF3812/W RKM AILLOG com m and.
Automatic
recovery
This is only relevant for InterForm SMTP. Here you setup the delay to use for
the first retries (if the receiving m ail server e.g. cannot be found) and the delay
for additional retries.
W ith the setup above InterForm 400 will try to send the e-m ail and then retry
twice with a 3 m inute delay. Then wait 30 m inutes and then try once again. If
still not found the e-m ail will end up with status *FAILED in the m ail log.
Em ail Gateway
This is only used for InterForm 400 SMTP. If you state a gateway this will be
used as an external m ail server for InterForm 400. If you leave this field blank
the System i m ust be able to reach the internet itself.
304
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Port
If you want to access the external m ail server above through another port
num ber than the default (25), then you can type it here.
BlueSeries Integration
If you have BlueSeries installed on the sam e System i and you want to em ail
through BlueSeries, then you can activate that here. Please notice, that som e
em ail options are not supported for BlueSeries Mail, so if any of these options
are used, then BlueSeries Mail will not be used - even if you activate this
option (and the norm al InterForm 400 m ail setup is used instead).
The em ail options not supported by BlueSeries Mail are:
*HTM L and *HTMLRAW (htm l and raw htm l com m ands in em ail contents).
Center or right alignment of the em ail contents.
Unicode output.
Only one receiver is supported by BlueSeries Mail. M ultiple receivers are not
supported by BlueSeries Mail.
CC and BCC receivers are not supported by BlueSeries Mail.
The Confirmation of delivery option is not supported.
Indexing (archiving) of em ail is not supported.
Use of variables in an htm l stream file is not supported.
Note, that the APF3812/M AILINTER subsystem m ust run in order to m ake autom atic retries
possible (only available for InterForm 400 SMTP). You should consider to start this subsystem
during IPL e.g. via the QSTRUPPGM program if you use InterForm 400 SMTP. Refer to the
com m ands APF3812/ENDMAILSBS and APF3812/STRMAILSBS on page 463 and 468 for
details.
F22=Gatew ay Security
In the bottom of the screen above you m ight see the m essage:
Error D/202 occured starting secure environment.
This m essage indicates that you have not setup any SSL or STARTTLS preferences and
setup DCM (Digital Certificate M anager). That can be used for InterForm SMTP (if you have
setup an em ail gateway) by pressing F22=Gatew ay security:
Configure email
SMP400D
Email recovery subsystem :
Library . . . . . . . :
MAILINTER
APF3812
Email gateway security
User . . . . . . . . . . .
Password . . . . . . . . .
[email protected]
xxxxxxxxxxx
Connection type
. . . . .
2
0=Clear text,
1=SSL, 2=STARTTLS
SSL/STARTTLS security
Certificate validation . .
0
0=Check certificate issued by a trusted CA
1=Trust ONLY the retrieved certificate
Press Enter to retrieve a new SSL/STARTTLS certificate
Last retrieved
Email gateway
Common name .
Serial number
Valid to . . .
F3=Exit
gateway
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
server certificate
. :
smtp.gmail.com
. :
smtp.gmail.com
. :
3b:74:ff:7b:00:00:00:00:68:a8
. :
2013-06-07 21:43:27
F10=Display retrieved certificate
F12=Cancel
Notice, that this is only used if you have selected InterForm SMTP and typed in an Em ail
gateway in the previous screen.
The user and the password is used for signing on to the m ail server. The connection type
sets the form at via which InterForm 400 will com m unicate with the m ail server. If you set the
InterForm A/S 305
connection type to be either SSL or STARTTLS, then you should also consider to set the
certificate validation to decide how to validate the certificate.
Certificate validation:
0=Check certificate issued by a trusted CA: Use this option to accept any certificate issued
by a trusted CA in DCM. If you select this, then the em ailing will still work after the current
certificate runs out.
1=Trust ONLY the retrieved certificate: If you select this option, then only the current
certificate is used/trusted. W hen it runs out you will need m anually to install a new certificate.
W ith F10=Display retrieved certificate you can view the certificate, that is used.
Appendix U on page 603 describes how to setup Digital Certificate Manageer (DCM) and how
to install the necessary certificates.
Use the APF3812/W RKM AILLOG com m and to see a log of all sent e-m ails.
G NOTE G
Rem em ber to run the com m and APF3812/CLRM AILLOG regularly to prevent a build up of
old em ails in the /APF3812m ail/Outbox directory. This com m and is described on page 463.
306
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
4. Configure WinPrint
W inPrint is a m odule for InterForm 400 which enables printing on any printer connected to a
windows PC (e.g. via USB), if the printer driver installed can print norm al PDF files. W inPrint
require that a W inPrint client is installed on the PC. For details refer to the W inPrint m anual.
This option sets the port num ber via which InterForm 400 will com m unicate with the W inPrint
clients:
Configure WinPrint
WIC400D
WinPrint subsystem . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
WINPRINT
APF3812
Port . . . . . . . . . . .
44556
F3=Exit
10000-65535
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 307
Administering InterForm400® Environment and Users
W hen the InterForm 400 ® system is installed for the first tim e, the option Adm inistering
InterForm 400 ® is open to everyone.
Once an adm inistrator of the system has been appointed, this person is the only one who can
select this option.
W hen you choose option 80 from the m ain m enu you will enter a m enu with the following
contents:
InterForm 400
-
ADMINISTRATION
Select one of the following options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
20.
30.
40.
50.
System.......: INTER01
Workstn ID...: QPADEV0003
User ID......: PETER
Work with InterForm 400 users
Work with file sets
Connect users with overlay file sets
Work with fonts
Work with images
Work with PCL-files
Work with palette
Work with paper control options
Work with AFPDS copy spooled file CPI & LP
Certificate administration
WinPrint administration
Email administration
Work with Designer job overlay locks
Option: __
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
The m enu item s 1 to 3 regards setup of the environm ent. Option '20. Certificate adm inistration’
can only be used if you have a license code for the Digital Signature/PDF security m odule of
InterForm 400.
The options are described individually in the following paragraphs.
308
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
1. Work with InterForm400® Users
W hen you choose the option 1. W ork with InterForm 400 ® users on the adm inistration m enu,
you get the following screen:
Work with InterForm Users
Position to . . . . . . __________
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
User
JEC
JENSP
PETER
APF220D
User profile
5=Display
9=File set access
Description
JEC
Jens
Peter Hansen
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
You can see other inform ations of the users by pressing F11-View2, and you can add/rem ove
access to file sets with option 9=File set access.
W hen adding a user profile by pressing F6 you will be prom pted to enter language and printer
inform ation for the user:
Create InterForm user
APF102D
User profile . . . . . . .
KSE_______
Language of user . . . . .
Users output queue . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
EN
PRT01_____
QUSRSYS___
DE, DK, EN, ES, FR, PT
Printer type . . . . . . .
HP4D_PJL__
HP4, HP4D, HP4_PJL, HP4D_PJL,
HP5C, HP4500, HP4500D,
ZEBRA203, ZEBRA300, QLZPL203,
IPL203, IPL300
Designer code page . . . .
When to use code page .
___37
________
blank = system default
*SPLFATR, *ALWAYS
DBCS code page . . . . . .
When to use code page .
_____
________
blank = system default
*SPLFATR, *ALWAYS
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The language of the user will affect the m enus in InterForm 400 ®. If left blank, the default
language of the installation, as entered in 2. Configure InterForm 400 (on the configuration
m enu), will be used. (Refer to page 301)
It is not necessary to define an output queue and a printer type. If left blank the definitions from
2.Configure InterForm 400 described on page 298 will be used.
InterForm A/S 309
If this user want to type in text in another code page than the system code page in the
graphical designer you can state it here. If you intend to use InterForm 400 with DBCS you
m ust type in the DBCS codepage used above for the individual users.
W hen to use code page:
*SPLFATR - Spooled file codepage will be used if it contains
a specific one.
*ALWAYS - Ignore any spooled file codepage - even if there
is a specific codepage on the spooled file attribute.
2. Work with file sets
The files in which overlay and report definitions are kept are subdivided into m em bers. The
idea is to enable individual users or user groups to m aintain their own file-sets.
It is not possible to operate on m ore than one file set at a tim e in the system . This m eans, for
exam ple, that all overlays to be used in a particular report m ust be saved in the sam e file set
as the report definition.
The program starts with the following screen:
Work with File sets
Position to . . . . . .
APF410D
__________
File set
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete 7=Rename 9=User access
12=Overlays in file set
Opt
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
File set
A
BALT
BE
BROCK
CARMEN
CERDO
COLOR
CONCORDE
DEMO
EURO
EX
FARBEN
ZEBRA
F3=Exit
Description
Files for A
File Set Balt Test
Be
Brock
Rot file set
Cerdo
Test of color fileset
Overlays for concorde print
demo
Overlay for euro
EX
Farbe druck
Zebra Garden
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
Type
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Laser DPX
Zebra
More...
F12=Cancel
You can now use the norm al options for changing, copying, deleting or renam ing file sets. You
can change the list of users that are allowed to work with a file set as well via option 9=User
access.
J TIP J
If you want to change access to many file sets for a specific user, it is easier to first select ‘1.
W ork with InterForm400 users’ and then ‘9. File set access’ instead of option 9 above.
Since the file-sets in the system are file m em bers, they m ust m eet the requirem ents to
m em ber nam es, i.e. the first character m ust be within the range A-Z. The succeeding
characters can be A-Z, "_" (underscore), 0-9 or blanks, with the restriction that blanks m ay
only appear at the end of the nam e.
If you press F6=Create, you get the following screen:
310
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create File set
File set name
Description
APF411D
. . . : TST_______
. . . . . ___________________________________________
Printer class
. . . . _
1 = Black/White laser
2 = Color laser
3 = Label printer
Do you want to use duplex print
(only active for HP4D and HP4500D)
_ (Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you have chosen a file set which already exists you m ay delete it or change the descriptive
text associated with it. If you have chosen a new nam e you m ust also enter text. The purpose
of the text is prim arily to ease the m anagem ent for users with access to m ore than one file.
The Printer Class specifies the type of printers, which this file set should include overlays for.
Depending on this selection, the m enus and available functions will change throughout the
program . Note that screen shots in this m anual correspond to a selection of 1=Black/W hite.
Note: W hen choosing printer class 1 instead of 2, you are restricting the overlay definitions in
this file set from using any colour resources e.g. colour im ages and selecting colours with the
INK lines. Printer class 3 are used for file sets for Label printers e.g. Zebra printes.
Only if you answer Y to duplex, screens related to design of overlays will include queries
about duplex (e.g. back page overlay).
If you select option ‘12=Overlays in file set ‘ on the work with file set screen, then you can
work with the overlays within the selected file set:
Work with overlays
File set . . . . . . :
Position to . . . . . .
APF420D
SAMPLE
Overlay
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
32=Rotate 180 deg
33=Rotate 270 deg
Opt
Overlay
BLANK
FORM1
FORM2
IF400DEMO
JOBLOG
PATTERNS
POSITIONS
RULER
TEST
7=Rename
Overlay description
Blank overlay
Prinserter sample DK envelopes
Prinserter sample DE envelopes
InterForm 400 Demo Form
Pattern IDs
Print SPLF with positions A4
Ruler
31=Rotate 90 deg
Paper Size
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
W ith the work with overlays screen you can now change, copy, delete, display, renam e and
even rotate the overlays. The rotation is counter clockwise.
InterForm A/S 311
3. Connect Users with Overlay File Sets
The system m ay contain any num ber of file sets. W ith this option you can specify which file
sets the individual users m ay operate on.
J TIP J
Even though you can add/remove user access via this option (which is a bit old), it is
normally much easier and faster to do that by first selecting ‘2. W ork with file sets’ and then
select option ‘9=User access’ for the file sets in question - or by selecting ‘1. W ork with
InterForm400 users’ and select ‘9=File set access’ for the user - if e.g. a new user should be
given access to multiple file sets.
The program starts with the following screen:
Connect users with overlay and report file sets
A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets
Several users may be connected with the same file set.
User profile __________
F3=Exit
F4=List InterForm users
F12=Cancel
Enter the user profile of the user in question, and you will get this screen:
Connect users with overlay and report file sets
A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets
Several users may be connected with the same file set.
User profile PETER
Peter Hansen
This user is connected with the following file-sets:
Specify name of file-set to be connected with / disconnected from user:
__________
F3=Exit
F4 = List InterForm 400 file-sets
F12=Cancel
If the user had already been connected with one or m ore file-sets these would have appeared
in the sub-file at the centre of the screen. However, in this case we are looking at a new user,
and the sub-file is blank. Once you enter the nam e of an existing file-set, you will get the
following screen:
312
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Connect users with overlay and report file sets
A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets
Several users may be connected with the same file set.
User profile PETER
Peter Hansen
This user is connected with the following file sets:
Specify name of file-set to be connected with / disconnected from user:
TEST
Peter Hansen's personal test file set
Connect file set with user (Y N)
_
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The text which now appears to the right of the file set nam e is the one that was specified when
the file set was created.
Answer Y to confirm that the chosen file set should be connected with the user. The display
changes as you can see here:
Connect users with overlay and report file sets
A user can be connected with one or more specific file sets
Several users may be connected with the same file set.
User profile PETER
Peter Hansen
This user is connected with the following file sets:
TEST
Peter Hansen's personal test file set
Specify name of file set to be connected with / disconnected from user:
__________
Connect file set with user
(Y N)
F3=Exit
_
F12=Cancel
Press F3 when all required file sets have been assigned.
InterForm A/S 313
Working with Fonts
InterForm 400 ® exploits resident and down loaded PCL fonts of HP com patible printers
independent of their attachm ent to the System i.
InterForm 400 ® has a built-in conversion table between IBM font ID’s, known from the IBM 3812
page printer, and the substituted “look-alike” PCL fonts of the HP4 (PCL5e) com patible printers.
This m eans that the native font conversion tables of interfaces, the iSeries Access printer
sessions, or other protocol converter functions, are NOT used for selection of fonts in the form s
(overlays) or the spool entries being used for filling of the form s.
RESIDENT FONTS
Appendix F (refer to page 432) displays a list of the em ulated IBM font ID’s which are selectable
in InterForm 400 ® as default.
Note, that font outlines m ight vary between the different printer m odels attached to your system ,
depending on their HP com patibility and their PCL em ulation level.
It is therefore advisable to print a font reference on all the different printers in your System i
environm ent, and base your corporate standard on fonts that looks the sam e on all of your
printers.
You can also define new font num bers based on typefaces known by the printers using option 1.
Description of additional fonts.
SOFT FONTS
Should you require to use fonts which are not currently available am ong the resident fonts of your
printers, you can choose to im port fonts to InterForm 400 ® from your PC environm ent.
InterForm 400 ® supports im port of True Type Font files (TTF). These can be converted to a soft
font by InterForm 400 ®.
You need to install/create the soft font for each kind of possible output, that you want to use i.e.
PCL, PDF and ZPL (for Zebra printers).
314
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
4. Work with Fonts
Work with Fonts
FNT001D
Select one of the following options:
Work with PCL and PDF fonts
1. Description of additional fonts
4. Work with soft fonts for PCL
5. Work with TrueType font for PDF
6. Work with TrueType font for UCS2 (unicode)
8. Auto download soft fonts
Work with ZEBRA fonts
11. Description of ZEBRA fonts
12. Work with ZEBRA soft fonts
13. Work with fonts in ZEBRA flash memory
14. Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts
19. Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images
Option:
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
Selecting option 4. W ork with fonts enables to you define new fonts, to work with soft fonts for
PCL (including download to flash SIMM m odules), to specify soft fonts to be autom atic
downloaded, to extract a soft font from a PC-print, to create a barcode soft font and to install a
True Type Font for PDF.
1. Description of Additional Fonts
This function gives you the possibility of using all fonts available on HP-printers or com patibles.
Work with Fonts
Position to . . . . . .
APF360D
____
Font
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
8=Display overlays referring to font
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Font
7001
9901
9902
9903
9904
9905
9906
9910
Description
Copy font
Sample - Universe
Sample - Universe
Universe - 10 pt
Sample - Universe
Sample - Universe
Universe - Sample
Sample - Universe
7=Assign new font number
7 pt
8 pt
12 pt
bold 9 pt
18 pt
7 pt
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
G NOTE G
Commitm ent control is used in InterForm 400 when you renam e fonts in InterForm 400 via
option ‘7=Assign new font num ber’ as shown above. This is the only function in InterForm 400
using com m itm ent control. This is im portant to notice if you are running an iASP installation:
The ASP group m ust be set prior to font renum bering.
InterForm A/S 315
Pressing F6 to add a new font brings up the following screen:
Create Font
Font
APF370D
. . . . . . . . . . .
4200-9999
4200-4299
4300-4399
4400-4499
4500-4599
4600-4699
4700-4799
4800-4899
4900-4999
5000-9999
F3=Exit
QR Bar Code - Model 2
Data Matrix Bar Code - ECC200
PDF417 barcode
EAN8/EAN13/UPC-A soft fonts
Code 39 soft fonts
Code 128 soft fonts
IDA bar codes
Interleaved 2 of 5 soft fonts
Other fonts
F12=Cancel
Additional fonts m ust have a font ID in the interval 5000-9999, i.e. you can define up to 5100
fonts in addition to the standard fonts. (refer to page 432). The other areas are reserved for
bar code soft fonts (refer to the Bar code section on page 331).
In order to define a new font, we could for instance enter 9990 and we would get the following
screen:
Description additional fonts
Font
. . . . . . . . . . .
9990
APF360D
Other fonts
Description . . . . . . . .
_______________________________________
Spacing
Pitch .
Height
Style .
_
_0,00
__0,00
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Stroke weight . . . . . . .
Typeface . . . . . . . . .
Symbol set . . . . . . . .
0_
____0
_____
0=Fixed, 1=Proportional
0,10-49,99
1,00-792,00
0=Upright 1=Italic 4=Condensed
5=Condensed italic
(-7 - +7) 0=Medium <0=Light >0=Bold
0-65535
blank=standard
Override spacing
_____
blank=standard
F11 = Delete
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
F4 = Prompt
F12 = Cancel
The description text will appear on overviews of fonts (prom pt with F4).
The following inform ation for your specific font can be collected by printing out a font list from
your printer. This is a facility of the HP printers, and is com m on for m any other com patible
printers also. Alternatively, you can consult your printers technical reference for inform ation on
the resident fonts.
316
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Spacing:
Indicates whether the font is m ono spaced (fixed pitch) or proportional spaced.
0=monospaced
Pitch:
This field is only of im portance if you have chosen fixed spacing. Then enter e.g.
10,00 for 10 CPI. If you have chosen proportional spacing, just enter a value within the
valid interval, as the width of the individual letters is relative to the height of the font.
Height: The
font
font
e.g.
Style:
1=Propotional spaced
height of a font is expressed in typographical points. A point is 1/72 of an inch. A
height of 1/3 of an inch therefore has to be specified as 24,00. The height of a
is slightly greater than the distance from the top of a capital letter to the bottom of
the letter "g".
Style has the following m eaning:
0=Upright
1=Italic
Stroke weight: This describes the thickness of the characters:
0=Medium
3=Bold
Typeface:
This field has to be filled in with an ID-num ber of the typeface to be used. There is a
lot of possible typefaces (refer to the font list or the technical reference of the printer).
Here a few of the scalable typefaces of the HP4 (PCL5e) are shown:
05
52
4148
16602
16901
=
=
=
=
=
CG Times Roman
Univers (PCL5)
Univers (PCL5e)
Arial
Times New Roman
For other typefaces refer to page 436.
Symbol Set:
The sym bolset of the font. Entering a sym bolset here is norm ally for selecting special
sym bol character sets.
Override spacing:
Here you can override the spacing for fixed width fonts. If you e.g. use a 10 CPI
courier font and override to 5 then the 10 CPI font is written with a spacing of 5 CPI.
Note that changing the above param eters does not change the appearance of the font unless
a font m atching the changes can be found in the printer. Print out a font list from the printers
front panel to get an overview of available resident PCL fonts.
Example of Defining a Resident Printer font
W e want to define a 70 point Univers Bold Italic for use in our overlay definitions. W e know this
font is available as a resident scalable font in HP4 com patible printers.
First we m ust print out a Font List from the printer’s front panel. Refer to the User’s Guide of
your printer.
Univers Bold Italic is listed on a HP4 Font List with the following PCL Escape Sequence:
<Esc>(s1p__v1s3b4148T
If we break it up, we have the following inform ation:
1p
= Proportional (Spacing)
InterForm A/S 317
___v
1s
3b
4148T
“Blank”
=
=
=
=
=
Em pty field for point size (Height)
Italic (Style)
Bold (Stroke W eight)
Univers (Typeface)
Use the default
W e now only need to define the font ID which will be used to select the font when designing
form s. By pressing F4 we will get a list of the font ID’s between 5000 and 9999 which are
already occupied.
In the following we have chosen font ID 7001 to represent our 70 point Univers font:
Description additional fonts
Font
. . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . .
Spacing
Pitch .
Height
Style .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7001
APF360D
Other fonts
Univers Bold Italic 70 Point
.
.
.
.
1
_0,10
_70,00
1
Stroke weight . . . . . . .
Typeface . . . . . . . . .
Symbol set . . . . . . . .
3_
_4148
_____
0=Fixed, 1=Proportional
0,10-49,99
1,00-792,00
0=Upright 1=Italic 4=Condensed
5=Condensed italic
(-7 - +7) 0=Medium <0=Light >0=Bold
0-65535
blank=standard
Override spacing
_____
blank=standard
. . . . .
F11 = Delete
F4 = Prompt
F12 = Cancel
Now font 7001 and the description Univers Bold Italic 70 point will appear in the list of available
fonts (prom pted by F4) anywhere in the InterForm 400 ® system where you can insert a font ID.
If you press F4 in this m enu you will get a list of the user defined fonts and bar codes only.
Printing “HELLO” with
Font 7001 will now
give this result:
318
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
HELLO
Version 2014
4. Work with soft fonts for PCL
This function gives you the possibility to work with soft fonts, create soft fonts from TTF files
and to download soft fonts to printers.
Work with PCL Soft Fonts
Position to . . . . . .
__________
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Member
TTFFONT
BARCODE39
BAR128
CODE128
CODE128_0
CODE39
EAN8_MICRO
EAN8JJ
FONT2501
IF_OCRA
IF_OCRAEXT
IF_OCRB
IF_OCRB_L
FNT310D
Font member name
6=Print
8=Dsp. attributes
9=Download
Font description
TrueType TTFFONT
Code 39, HPIII
7.69CPI 72.0 Heigh
Code 128, Portrait
9.09CPI 72.0 Heigh
Code 128, Portrait
9.09CPI 48.0 Heigh
Code 128, Portrait
6.81CPI 42.48Heigh
Code 39, Portrait
5.76CPI 48.0 Heigh
EAN 8/13, UPC-A, PCL5
14.28CPI 41.76Heigh
EAN 8/13, UPC-A, Portrait 10.71CPI 79.68Heigh
Interleaved 2 of 5, HPIII
4.68CPI 32.4 Heigh
OCRA
PC-850
OCR A Extended
PC-850
InterForm 400 - OCRB portrait
InterForm 400 - OCRB landscape
More...
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Here you can specify :
2=Change:
The description of a soft font can be changed. You cannot change the size of the barcode here
- even though it m ight seem so!
4=Delete:
Delete a soft font. This will also delete the corresponding m em ber from the apf3812/font file.
Note that you cannot delete a soft font, if it is specified to be auto downloaded.
5=Display:
Displays a soft font. This will prom pt you for what code page to use, and then open up the PCL
Viewer, SwiftView on a PC showing a sam ple of the soft font. Note, that the current version of
SwiftView does not support True Type Fonts.
6=Print:
Prints out a sam ple of the soft font. You are prom pted for which code page, output queue and
form type to use.
8=Dsp. Attributes:
Shows the attributes of the soft font e.g. pitch and height. For True Type Fonts it will also show
you the type face used. The type face should be referred to, when creating font num bers using
this soft font.
9=Dow nload:
This function gives you the possibility of downloading soft fonts to HP-printers or printers
em ulating a HP-printer via System i spool entries.
The following screen is shown:
InterForm A/S 319
Create spool entry to download of soft font
Font member
Font-id
. . . . . . . .
__________
. . . . . . . . . .
(0001-9999)
Description:
__________
Place into Flash Memory . .
_
F3=Exit
FNT700D
0
1
2
3
=
=
=
=
No
HP Flash memory option
Lexmark Flash memory option
File system for HP5, HP4000 ..
F4 = Prompt
Font member:
Type the file m em ber nam e from the APF3812/FONT file in the field
Font m em ber.
Font-id:
Must be given a num ber in the interval 0001-9999. It is used to m anage
m ore than one soft font in the printer sim ultaneously. I.e. if you
download a font with an ID that is already used by another down loaded
font in the printer, it is replaced with the new font. Otherwise there are
no restrictions to the id-num ber.
Description:
The text you enter in this field is used as user data on the spool entry
that is output from this program .
Place into flash
memory:
This feature works on any HP laser printer or Lexm ark laser printer
(4039 and Optra) equipped with an optional Flash SIMM m odule or
Harddisk (contact your local printer supplier for further inform ation).
W hen using this m ethod the font will not disappear when powering off
the printer.
Output from this program is a spool entry with HOLD(*YES) and SAVE(*YES).
Every tim e you want to download the font to the printer, all you have to do is to release the
spool entry. The font will then be available on the printer until the printer is switched off or
cleared from the printer’s operator panel, unless your printer is equipped with a flash card and
Place Into Flash m em ory has been filled in.
In order to select the soft font from an overlay is has to be described to the system in 1.
Description of additional fonts (page 315).
Import a True Type Font
From the W ork with PCL Soft Fonts m enu you can also im port a True Type Font uploaded
from a PC to the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory in the IFS.
If you press F6-Create, you get this screen:
320
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Install TrueType font to PCL from /APF3812Home/Work
Document name . . . . . . .
____________
FNT431D
F4=List
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Now you can either specify the nam e of the uploaded TTF file or press F4 to get an overview
of all files in the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory, and then select the TTF file.
Press Enter and this screen is presented:
Install TrueType font to PCL from /APF3812Home/Work
Document name . . . . . . :
TTFFILE.TTF_
Font name . . . . . . . . :
True type file text
Font name PCL . . . . . . .
File name______
Symbol set
_
. . . . . . . .
Type Face . . . . . . . . .
Member name in FONT file .
F3=Exit
______
__________
FNT431D
1=CodePage850 2=CodePage852 3=Baltic
4=CodePage858 5=Cyrillic 6=CyrilEuro
7=ISO8859/9 Latin-5 (Turkish)
8=ISO8859/7 Greek
(0 65535)
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Here you fill in the sym bol set, a type face and a m em ber nam e for the FONT file. Use
1=Codepage850 as default. Use 2=Codepage852 if you intend to use the font for Latin2
codepages and use 4=Codepage858 if you intend to use it for a western europe euro
codepage.
M WARNING M
Note, that the type face specified should not be the same as any type face of the resident
fonts on the printer. In order to avoid this, it is recommended to use type faces with the number
32768 or above.
Finally specify what to call the soft font. This is the sam e as the m em ber nam e. Before you
can use the soft font you need to create font number (Refer to page 315) that fits the soft font
attributes and specify autodownload of the soft font. (Refer to page 324 for inform ation of
autodownload.)
InterForm A/S 321
J TIP J
Use of an imported True Type Font requires that a font number with the same type face is
created, and that the font file member corresponding to the font number is specified to be
automatic downloaded.
File transfer HP SFP Font files from a PC
If you have HP PCL fonts in the DOS form at *.SFP these can be file transferred to
InterForm 400 ® as they are.
The file on the System i to receive the PC-file is: APF3812/FONT
The SFP file is stored as a file m em ber in this file. The rules for the file transfer is the sam e as
described in the previous section.
5. Install True Type font for PDF
This option enables you to install a True Type Font to be used in PDF output.
Install TrueType font for PDF from /APF3812Home/Work
Document name . . . . . . :
PDFFONT.TTF
Font name . . . . . . . . :
True Type Font for PDF
Member name PDF font file .
__________
F3=Exit
FNT451D
F4=List
F12=Cancel
First specify the docum ent nam e to be installed i.e. the nam e of the TTF file in the
/APF3812Hom e/W ork directory. Press F4 to see available docum ents. Select with option 1.
Enter a m em ber nam e to contain the soft font. After pressing Enter the soft font can be
referred to in option 8. Auto dow nload soft fonts, where you have to add the soft font and a
connected font num ber to the printer group *PDF. The font num ber is created by using option
1. Description of additional fonts.
J TIP J
Even if you upload a bold and/or italic True Type Font you still have to specify bold and/or
italic when defining font numbers using this soft font in 1. Description of additional fonts.
322
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
6. Work with TrueType font for UCS2 (unicode)
If you want to m erge overlays with unicode spooled files you also need to install at least one
unicode true type font.
The TTF files you install here does not need to be unicode. It will of course only be possible to
print/output in the characters included in the soft font. Most fairly new TTF files will include as
good as any character in SBCS (Single Byte Character Set) code pages.
To print DBCS (Double byte Character Set) characters you will norm ally need a real unicode
TTF font.
To install a TTF font place the ttf file in the IFS inside: /APF3812Hom e/W ork and press F6,
then press F4 to select the TTF file or type the nam e in the screen below:
Install TrueType font for UCS2 from /APF3812Home/Work
FNT355D
Document name . . . . . . : FONT.TTF
Font name . . . . . . . . : Font name
UCS2 font name
. . . . . . Font
F4=List
UCS2 font description . . . Arial
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The screen now asks for a UCS2 font nam e. You can press F4 for that to view the font nam es
already used. This is the nam e you refer to later for auto download. Refer to page 324 for
setup of auto download.
Use 5=Display to view the layout of a installed font:
InterForm A/S 323
Display TrueType font for UCS2 (unicode)
Font name
FONT
Font
Position to . . . . . . ____
Character
1E80
1E81
1E82
1E83
1E84
1E85
1EA0
1EA1
1EA2
1EA3
1EA4
1EA5
1EA6
FNT360D
Unicode character in hex
Description
477
478
479
480
481
482
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1933
1479
1933
1479
1933
1479
1366
1139
1366
1139
1366
1139
1366
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
In order to use the installed unicode font you need to link the soft font with one or m ore font
num bers. That is done via option 8. Auto dow nload soft fonts.
8. Auto download Soft Fonts
This m enu enables you to create groups of printers and fonts which should have ordinary soft
fonts and bar code soft fonts downloaded autom atically when the font num bers are addressed
in an overlay.
Auto download for PCL soft fonts
The printers are defined for auto download according to their System i printer queue nam es.
The soft fonts will be downloaded as tem porary fonts in the beginning of a spool entry and
deleted after the job is printed.
It is recom m ended to keep the am ount and size of downloaded fonts to a m inim um in order to
reduce the traffic on the network and the workload on the System i.
For each printer group you define a num ber of printer queues and a num ber of fonts to be
downloaded autom atically. For PCL is it recom m ended to create only 1 printer group and add
the output queue *ALLPCL via option 6=Update output queues. Only PCL printer groups
with *ALLPCL can be exported/im ported. Refer to Appendix P on page 557 for details about
export/im port.
M WARNING M
The queue you define for automatic download must be the one with the physical printer device
attached. I.e. when using Auto Forms Control the Auto download queue is the AFC output
queue, not the AFC input queue.
Refer to section Getting familiar with soft-fonts and barcodes and page 338, Define auto
dow nload of fonts for an exam ple of how to define the underlying m enus.
Please note this, when adding printers to a printer group: You can specify either of these
values instead of an output queue:
324
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
*ALLPCL: Download the soft fonts in a printer group (if used) to any printer or file (if m erging
to *OUTDOC with the com m and APF3812/APF3812). Use this if in doubt.
*OUTDOC: Download the soft fonts in a printer group (if used) to all files, if m erging to
*OUTDOC with the com m and, APF3812/APF3812.
Work with auto download soft fonts
Start with . . . . . . . .
__________
Type option, press Enter
2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete
Opt
_
_
F3=exit
Printer group
*PDF
*PCL
PGR300
6=Update output queue 8=Update fonts
Description
Output to PDF files
All PCL output (*ALLPCL)
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
In order to select the soft font from an overlay, it has to be described to the system in 1.
Description of additional fonts (page 315).
Auto Download for PDF output
If it is required to use True Type Fonts in PDF output, the TTF file has to be installed by using
option 5. W ork with TrueType font for PDF. Following you can specify, if a certain font
num ber is used when creating PDF output, then a specific PDF soft font m em ber should be
used.
You add a new font to be used in PDF, by using option 8-Update fonts. If you then press F6 to
add a new font, you get the screen below:
Add Auto download Soft Font
PGR332D
Printer group name . . . :
*PDF
Font number . . . . . . .
Symbol set number . . . .
____
_
F4=List
1 = Western
2 = Central European
3 = Baltic
4 = Turkish
5 = Cyrillic
6 = Greek
7 = Arabic
8 = Hebrew
U = UCS2 unicode
Font member name 0°
. . .
__________
F4=List
When to embed font . . . .
*ALWAYS___
*ALWAYS *PRI *SEC *NEVER
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
The font num ber m ust have the sam e characteristics as the soft font (bold, italic, condenced,
proportional/fixed). W ith 'W hen to embed font' you can state when you want to download the
font. *PRI will download the soft font only when you do a prim ary m erge and *SEC will
download the soft font only when you do a secondary m erge.
InterForm A/S 325
In this m anner you can include the soft font only in PDF files, where it is needed and save the
space if the soft font is already installed on the PC's that are to open the PDF files.
J TIP J
Even though the same font member can not be used for both PCL and PDF output, you can
associate one font number to a PCL font member and a PDF font member. Therefore if you
install a TTF as a PCL font member and a PDF font member you can get the same output on
both PDF and PCL using one font number.
Auto Download for InterWord400 PDF output
If you use InterW ord400 and you want to use soft fonts for the PDF output you need to install
the soft fonts in InterForm 400 (and InterW ord400) and setup auto download for this printer
group via option 8=Update fonts for the *IW PDF printer group:
Soft Fonts to be downloaded automatic
Printer group name . . . :
PGR330D
*IWPDF
Start with . . . . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Update
4=Delete
Opt
_
IW-fontnbr
9999
Symbol set
1 Western
Number of fonts
4
Font embedding
*ALWAYS
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to add new soft fonts to the list:
Add Auto download Soft Font
Printer group name . . . :
*IWPDF
InterWord font number . .
Symbol set number . . . .
9998
1
F4=List
1 = Western
2 = Central European
Font
Font
Font
Font
When
FONT_NM
FONT_BD
FONT_IT
FONT_BD_IT
*ALWAYS
F4=List
F4=List
member normal . . .
member bold . . . .
member italic . . .
member bold italic
to embed font . . .
F3=Exit
326
PGR332D
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
.
.
.
.
.
F4=Prompt
Version 2014
*ALWAYS *PRI *SEC *NEVER
F12=Cancel
InterForm400® Predefined Soft Fonts
Besides the predefined fonts ID’s which selects resident fonts in the printer, InterForm 400 ®
includes som e pre-defined softfonts.
MICR Soft Font (Font ID 3998)
The MICR E-13B font is used for check printing in USA, and exist per definition only in one
size.
The font include the decim al digits 0-9 plus four special characters. The fours characters will
be printed when the following characters is included in the text:
A=Am ount sym bol
D=Dash sym bol
O=On us sym bol
T=Transit sym bol
It is therefore predefined in InterForm 400 ® and does not need to be generated.
It can be used im m ediately by Rem ap W indow, a Tabulator and Text constant com m ands
within the overlay design window by selection of font ID 3998. The font will to the user function
as a resident printer font.
InterForm 400 ® will autom atically add start and stop codes and check digits.
OCRA Soft Fonts
Two soft fonts, IF_OCRA and IF_OCRAEXT are distributed with InterForm 400 ®. IF_OCRA is
BMP based and IF_OCRAEXT is based on a True Type Font. IF_OCRAEXT contains som e
extra characters com pared to IF_OCRA. Font num ber 19 is intended to be used with these
soft fonts. Rem em ber to specify (autom atic) download the soft font in option 3 of the fonts
m enu.
OCRB Soft Font (Font ID 0003)
OCRB is predefined in InterForm 400 ® with font ID 3, but the soft font is not autom atically
downloaded to the printer when selected. The font will need to be downloaded to the printer
according to the description on page 324 (8. Auto Download Soft Fonts).
Two font m em bers IF_OCRB and IF_OCRB_L represent the OCR-B in portrait and
landscape. PCL5 printers will autom atically rotate a soft font.
The selection field when adding the OCRB font to an Auto Font Download definition should for
an HP4 com patible printer always state font num ber 3:
InterForm A/S 327
Update Auto download Soft Font
PGR332D
Printer group name . . . :
ALLPCL
Font number . . . . . . :
Symbol set number . . . :
___3
0
F4=List
0=All symbol sets (barcodes only)
1=Roman-8 2=PC-8 DM 3=CodePage850
4=CodePage852 5=Baltic
6=CodePage858 7=Cyrillic
8=CylillicEuro
9=ISO 8859/9 Latin-5 (Turkish)
A=ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
B=CentralEurope w/Euro
Font member name 0° . . .
Font member name 90° . . .
IF_OCRB___
__________
F4=List
F4=List
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
The selection of Sym bol set should m atch the code page you are using.
The section Getting Familiar with Soft-fonts and Barcodes includes download of the OCRB
font.
328
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Barcode Support
InterForm 400 ® currently support generation of the following barcodes in any size:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Interleaved 2 of 5,
Code 128
Code 39
Code 39 Extended
EAN128
GS1-128
Postnet
EAN13
EAN8
PDF417
UPC-A
QR Bar Code - Model 2
Data Matrix Bar Code - ECC200
GS1 / RSS-14
USPS Inteligent Mail Barcodes
Aztec (for ZPLII only)
The barcodes created by InterForm 400 ® are autom atically stored as m em bers in the physical
file APF3812/FONT.
W hen printing a bar code, it appears to be placed a little to the right of the specified location. It
is because the start code is as wide as 2 digits and has the two thin lines that form the start
code placed in the right side of the sym bol.
If you want a num ber to appear below the bar code you m ust specify your overlay definition to
read the num ber from the data with a 9=Rem ap W indow and place it on the desired position.
USPS Intelligent Mail Barcode, MICR E-13B and POSTNET
The barcodes USPS (United States Postal Service) Intelligent Mail barcode, the MICR E13-B
(Magnetic Character Recognition) font and the POSTNET barcode are all predefined in
InterForm 400. So if you want to use them you just refer to the specific font num ber when you
want to present text as this relevant barcode in the output. The specific font num bers are:
Barcode/Font
USPS
MICR E-13B
POSTNET
UPS MaxiCode Bar Code
Font number
for PCL/PDF
3997
3998
3999
N/A
Font number
for ZPL/IPL
1999
N/A
N/A
1998
Setup of two-dimensional and GS1 / RSS-14 barcodes
InterForm 400 supports the two-dim ensional barcodes: PDF417, QR Bar Code - Model 2 and
Data Matrix Bar Code - ECC200.
The two-dim ensional and GS1 barcodes differ from the other barcodes supported (when we
are considering PCL output) in the ease of which you can define them . If you want to define a
two-dim ensional barcode (for PCL or PDF output) you sim ply create a new font num ber via
this selection (from the InterForm 400 m ain m enu):
80. Adm inistering InterForm 400, then 4. W ork with fonts and 1. Description of additional
fonts and press F6 to create a new font num ber.
InterForm A/S 329
Barcodes in PDF output
All the barcodes in InterForm 400 are also supported for PDF output. Note however that there
is a difference to the way that the barcodes for PDF are generated com pared to PCL output:
The barcodes appearance in PCL output are based on the soft font only. The appearance in
PDF output is based on the specifications in the used font num ber. Norm ally that will not be a
problem , but if you m anually have created the font num ber you should m ake sure, that the
pitch and height of the font num ber are exactly the sam e as stated in the description of the
barcode soft font.
Barcodes in ZPL output
It is very easy to define barcodes that are to be used for ZPL output (supported by Zebra
printers). You do not need any soft font and sim ply create a new font num ber via option 11.
Description of ZEBRA fonts on the font m enu. W hen defining the height of a ZPL barcode
the height is stated in the m easurem ent 1/72 inch i.e. a height of 72 equals 1 inch.
The Aztec barcode (ZPLII output only)
Aztec barcodes can be created for Zebra (ZPLII) output only. Such font num bers m ust be
defined in the 40xx range (via option 11. Description of ZEBRA fonts).
Change zebra font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . :
ZEB370D
4000
Other barcodes
Barcode type . . . . . . :
Aztec
Note: Aztec is not supported on Intermec printers.
Description . . . . . . . . Aztec size 4/6
Symbol element size in dots
ZEBRA203 . . . . . . . .
ZEBRA300 . . . . . . . .
6
4
Error correction / format :
Line separator
(1-10)
(1-10)
0
0
1-99
101-104
201-232
300
default 23 % error correction
% error correction minimum
1 to 4 layer compact symbol
1 to 32 layer full range symbol
a simple Aztec "Rune"
. . . . . .
4
1=A blank, 2=CR, 3=CRLF, 4=None,
5=Fixed, 6=Fixed (trim last line)
Hex byte prefix . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
^
Blank=Input does not contain hex bytes
The line separator and Hex byte prefix are explained for the PDF417 barcode on page 333.
Support for UPS MaxiCode
The UPS MaxiCode is supported for Zebra and Intermec printers.
The font number for UPS Maxi code is 1998. There is only one definition for this
barcode, so it is not possible to change anything in the font definition.
There are 5 modes the barcode:
2 - Structured Carier Message with numeric postal code 9 digits (USA)
3 - Structured Carier Message alphanumeric postal code (Non USA) 6 characters
4 - Standard Symbol
5 - Full EEC
6 - Reader Programming
Font number 1998 can be used with remap window, with tabulators and with text
constants. The text must start with the mode number followed by a colon. After that
the message to be in the barcode.
330
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
For mode 2 and 3, there are very strict rules for the beginning of the message called
”high priority message”
In mode 2 the the high priority message begins with a 9 digit postal code, then a 3
digit contry code (840 for USA), and now a 3 digit class of service code.
In mode 3 the high priority message must start with a 6 character postal code
(truncated to 6 if longer, padded with blanks if shorter), then a 3 digit contry code
followed by a 3 digit class of service.
For mode 2 and 3 the high priority message is followed by a ”low priority message”,
normally starting with [)> (there is a description of the low priority message available
from UPS).
For mode 4 – 6 there is no division between high and low priority message, whatever
data you send will be encoded.
In all modes there will be control characters outside the printable area. They has to
be entered like this <GS> for group seperator with hex value X'1D'. The following
values can be used:
<NUL> null
<SOH> start of heading
<STX> start of text
<ETX> end of text
<EOT> end of transmision
<ENQ> enquiry
<ACK> acknowledge
<BEL> bell
<BS> backspace
<HT> horizontal tabulation
<LF> line feed
<FF> form feed
<CR> carriage return
<SO> shift out
<SI> shift in
<DLE> data link escape
<DC1> device control 1 or X-ON
Calculating barcode height
The height of the font is entered in dots (1/300 of an inch). The following relations will assist
you when entering the barcode height in dots.
Inches and dots:
1 inch(240 pels) = 300 dots
Centimeters and dots:
1 cm (95 pels)
= 118 dots
Create barcode fonts
The barcodes are created like any other font num ber via option 1. Description of additional
fonts on the font m enu for PCL and PDF output and option 11. Description of ZEBRA fonts
for ZPLII and IPL output. The barcode fonts are restricted to specific ranges of num bers.
InterForm A/S 331
1. Code 39
This bar-code can consist of the alphanum eric characters 0-9, A-Z (Capital letters) and som e
special characters (e.g. * $ / + - . %). You can define if a Checksum should be calculated and
if unrecognized (or unprintable) characters should be replaced with blanks.
Extended code 39
The extended code 39 is a general purpose code which can code any ASCII character(any
character you can enter from the keyboard by norm al m eans). This code is double the size of
the standard code 39, as it uses two code 39 characters for each of the 128 ASCII characters.
To enable extended code 39, enter YES for Full ASCII mode.
2. Code 128 and EAN128
These barcodes can consist of all alphanum eric characters.
You are asked wether the barcode should be written as ‘character set B only’. Norm ally
InterForm 400 will use character set A, B and C in order to com press the barcode as m uch as
possible. However VERY few barcode scanners cannot read character set C (com pressed
num eric characters). For those scanners you should state ‘Y’. Use ‘N’ for all other scanners in
order to m ake the barcode as efficient as possible. For a description of character sets A,B and
C refer to the docum entation of your scanner.
If you need to insert the character FNC1 in the Code128 barcode you should insert the
character '|' (with the hexadecim al value BB in EBCDIC) in the text, that you convert into the
barcode.
W hen you create the code128 barcode for PCL and PDF output you will see this screen:
Create CODE-128 soft font
FNT370D
Font number
. . . . . . . .
4700
Description
. . . . . . . .
Code 128
Height of bars dots . . . .
Module width dots . . . . .
Dots are at 600 dpi.
6
60-2400
4-26
Character set B only
. . .
N
(Y N)
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . .
N
(Y N)
F3=Exit
300
4700-4799
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Notice, that the height and width for the Code128 barcode is m easured in 600 dpi.
Refer to section assigning font ID’s to barcode soft fonts page ? for details on how to
define wether the barcode should be printed as Code128 or EAN128 (GS1-128).
3. Interleaved 2 of 5
This bar-code consists of the digits 0-9 only. There can be blanks before or after the digits if
the figure contains an odd num ber of digits, the system will add a preceding zero. The system
also adds start and stop codes before and after the num ber.
332
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
If you try to use Interleaved 2 of 5 with non-num eric data, the contents will be printed with IBM
font-id 0011 (10 pitch courier).
G NOTE G
The Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode m ust consist of an even num ber of digits. If you activate the
checksum digit, then InterForm 400 m ight insert a '0' in front of the checksum digit, if
necessary to have an even num ber of digits.
4. EAN8, EAN13 and UPC-A
W hen a character string contains 8 digits, it will be printed as EAN8. A character string of 13
digits will be printed with EAN13 and 12 digits will be printed as UPC-A.
Using these barcodes with a num ber of characters other than 8, 12 or 13 or with non-num eric
data results in no barcode to be printed. This barcode also supports texts, that ends with ‘-‘
followed by 2 or 5 digits.
Postnet Barcode
The Postnet barcode exists, per definition, only in one size. It is therefore predefined in
InterForm 400 ®and does not need to be generated.
It can be used im m ediately by Rem ap W indow, a Tabulator and Text constant com m ands
within the overlay design window by selection of font ID 3999. The font will to the user function
as a resident printer font.
InterForm 400 ® will autom atically add start and stop codes and check digits.
Barcode PDF417
This is a two dim ensional barcode widely used in e.g. the autom otive industry. No soft font is
used for this barcode, which m eans it is not required to auto download the font. The barcode is
solely defined as a font num ber in the option 1. Description of additional fonts. The font can
only be used for the rem ap function in design overlay. W hen using a PDF417 barcode in
overlay design, you will be prom pted for the m axim um width of the barcode.
W hen you create a PDF417 font num ber (range 4400-4499) you are prom pted for these
param eters (apart from the param eters specifying the actual size and security level):
Line separator
W ith this you can state how line breaks of the spooled file text should be handled:
1=A Blank:
Any trailing blanks of any line is trim m ed and a space/blank is added for each
line break.
2=CR:
Like 1=A Blank except a Carriage Return (Hex 13) is added for each line break.
3=CRLF
Like 2=CR except that both Carriage return and a Line Feed (Hex 0A) is added.
4=NONE:
Any trailing blanks of any line is trim m ed and the line breaks are not reflected in
the scanned result.
5=Fixed:
Any trailing blanks of each spooled file line are also included in the barcode.
6=Fixed (trim last line):
All trailing blanks of all lines are also included in the barcode, except for the last
line of the rem ap, where the trailing blanks are trim m ed.
Hex byte prefix
This param eter has been included in order to m ake it possible to insert specific ASCII
characters specified by the hexadecim al value. State a special character here and when this is
found in the text to be printed as PDF417 barcode the next two characters are interpreted as
the hexadecim al value for the ASCII character to be inserted instead. If you e.g. use ‘]’ as the
escape code character, the text ‘]0A’ will be printed as the ASCII character having the
hexadecim al value <0A>. This option m ake it possible to print PDF417 barcodes for e.g. the
GM-1724-A/B/C Label standard used in the autom otive industry.
You use the PDF417 font num ber by rem apping a window of text. W hen you specify a PDF417
font num ber you are prom pted for a ‘Maxim um line width’ and ‘Maxim um line height’. You are
InterForm A/S 333
expected to specify only one of them . Norm ally you would probably use a maximum line
w idth and let the height vary with the variable am ount of characters to be converted, but a
maximum line height has been added to m eet requirem ents of the autom otive industry:
Datamatrix and QR barcodes
The explaination for the line separator and the escape character for the PDF417 Barcode
above also covers the Datam atrix and the QR barcodes. For m ore inform ation refer to page
346.
MICR E-13B
This font is norm ally used for cheque printing. Just insert text or rem ap windows functions in
the overlay using font num ber 3998.
Example of editing a font ID for Code39 barcode
Code39 can be defined in the font ID interval 4600-4699.
Change Font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . :
4622
Code 39 soft fonts
Description . . . . . . . .
Code 39 (2.75 CPI, 96.00 points)
Height of bars dots . . . .
Width narrow bar dots . . .
Width wide bar dots . . . .
Dots are at 600 dpi.
600
6
12
30-2400
6-26
12-78
Checksum
. . . . . . . . .
N
(Y N)
Replace unprintable
with blank . . . . . . . .
N
(Y N)
Full ASCII mode . . . . . .
N
(Y N)
Print characters
beneath bar code
N
F3=Exit
334
APF370D
. . . . .
F12=Cancel
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
(Y N)
Getting Familiar with Soft-fonts and Barcodes
This exam ple will bring us through all the m enu item s under 4. W ork W ith Fonts.
At the end of this section we will have m ade the following:
1.
Installed the TrueType Font ARIAL from the PC environm ent and stored it as a resource
(soft font m em ber).
2.
Created a Code128 bar code.
3.
Created a font num ber (5001) to be used with the arial soft font.
4.
Defined that the OCR-B soft font delivered with InterForm 400 ® is to be downloaded to any
printer queue autom atically when the font num ber 3 is used in overlays, and defined that
ARIAL soft font is to be downloaded whenever font num ber 5001 is used.
In order to get the exact result as described in the following it would require you to have a PCL5
com patible printer assigned to printer queue AFC_OUT1.
Step 1. Installing the Arial True Type Font
In the following we install the True Type Font directly from the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory:
Note: This procedure is describing how to install a TTF file to be used for printing (PCL). If the
TTF file is to be used for PDF output, the procedure is different (see page 322).
1.
Upload the TTF file to the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory.
2.
From the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu select option 80. Adm inistering InterForm 400, 4.
W ork with fonts and 4. W ork with Soft Fonts for PCL. Press F6=Create.
This screen is presented:
Install TrueType font to PCL from /APF3812Home/Work
Document name . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
____________
FNT431D
F4=List
F12=Cancel
You can either write the nam e of the TTF file to be installed or prom pt with F4, to get a list
of all files in the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory. Select the TTF file here with option ‘1'.
Press Enter.
InterForm A/S 335
3.
A description is retrieved from the TTF file and displayed as the font nam e. Following you
are prom pted for the code page, Type Face num ber and what to call the font m em ber.
Install TrueType font to PCL from /APF3812Home/Work
Document name . . . . . . :
ARIAL.TTF
Font name . . . . . . . . :
Arial
Font name PCL . . . . . . .
Arial
Code Page . . . . . . . . .
Type Face . . . . . . . . .
Member name in FONT file .
1
40000
ARIAL_____
F3=Exit
FNT431D
1=CodePage850 2=CodePage852
(0 65535)
F4=List
F12=Cancel
A new type face num ber have to be entered for the font. Enter a num ber higher than
32767 in order to assure, that this will not conflict with any typefaces of the resident fonts.
Enter a m em ber nam e for the new soft font (40000 is chosen). Press Enter and wait for
the font m em ber to be created (be patient). W hen finished you will return to the W ork
w ith PCL soft fonts m enu. Press F3 to go back to the W ork with fonts m enu.
336
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Step 2. Creating the Code128 Barcode
Select option ‘4. W ork with fonts’ in the InterForm 400 ® adm inistration m enu and then
select ‘5. Create bar code soft font’. W e select Code 128.
1.
Create font
Font number
FNT370D
. . . . . . . .
4700
4700-4799
Font height dots . . . . . .
Module width dots . . . . .
Dots are at 600 dpi.
80
6
60-2400
6-26
Character set B only . . . .
N
(Y N)
GS1-128
N
(Y N)
. . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
2.
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
W e have now defined our bar code: The font num ber to use in design is 4700, the
barcode is 80 dots high, with a narrow bar width of 6 dots. Each dot is 1/600 inch
wide/high, which equals 0,0423 m ilim eters.
Step 3. Create font ID for the Arial soft-font
1.
Before we can use the arial font in an overlay we m ust describe the font to the system .
W e select option ‘4. W ork with fonts’ in the InterForm 400 ® adm inistration m enu and
then option ‘1. Description of additional fonts’. W e will define a font num ber for our
Arial font.
2.
W e enter 5001 and get the following screen:
Create Font
Font
APF370D
. . . . . . . . . . .
5001
Other fonts
Description . . . . . . . .
Arial 24 point Italic/Bold______________
Spacing
Pitch .
Height
Style .
1
_1.00
_24.00
1
Stroke weight . . . . . . .
Typeface . . . . . . . . .
Symbol set . . . . . . . .
3
33000
_____
0=Fixed, 1=Proportional
0.10-49.99
1.00-792.00
0=Upright 1=Italic 4=Condensed
5=Condensed italic
(-7 - +7) 0=Medium <0=Light >0=Bold
0-65535
blank=standard
Override spacing
_____
blank=standard
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 337
First we state the Font-ID 5001, which has the highest priority after the Sym bol set
which was defined as CodePage850 under step 4. Then we state proportional
spacing, ‘1' for the Pitch (Pitch is not used for Proportional spaced fonts), 24 point
Height, Italic style and Stroke weight bold (=3).
For the typeface we use any num ber in the interval 32769-65535. W e select 33000 in
this case.
Step 4. Define auto-download of fonts (Arial and OCRB)
Finally, we need to add download inform ation for the Arial and OCRB fonts to our printer
group.
W e select option 4. W ork with fonts in the InterForm 400 ® adm inistration m enu and
then option 8. Auto download soft font.
1.
Work with auto download soft fonts
PGR300
Start with . . . . . . . .
Type option, press Enter
2=Change 3=Copy 4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
Printer group
*IWPDF
*PCL
*PDF
F3=exit
6=Update output queue 8=Update fonts
Description
Output to InterWord PDF files
Automatically created by auto download
Output to PDF files
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
If you do not have any other printer group for PCL you m ust create one with ‘F6-Add’ and
create a new printer group.
2.
338
Enter 6=update output queues for the Printer group (*PCL):
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with auto download soft fonts
PGR300
Printer group name . . . : *PCL
Start with . . . . . . . . __________
__________
Type option, press Enter
2=Change
4=Delete
Opt
_
Output queue
*ALLPCL
F3=exit
Library
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Here we add output queue *ALLPCL if not already there.
Note, that you can specify either of the values below instead of a specific output
queue:
*ALLPCL: Download the soft fonts in this printer group (if used) to any printer or file (if
m erging to *OUTDOC with the com m and APF3812/APF3812)
*OUTDOC: Download the soft fonts in this printer group (if used) to all files, if m erging
to *OUTDOC with the com m and, APF3812/APF3812.
3.
Now we m ust specify which fonts should be down loaded autom atically. In the screen
W ork with auto download soft fonts we select option ‘8=Update fonts’ for printer group
*PCL and we press F6 to add a download font to our printer group.
Add Auto download Soft Font
Printer group name . . . :
*PCL
Font number . . . . . . .
Symbol set number . . . .
5001
3
Font member name 0o . . .
Font member name 90o . . .
ARIAL_____
__________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
PGR332D
F4=List
0=All symbol sets (barcodes only)
1=Roman-8 2=PC-8 DM 3=CodePage850
4=CodePage852 5=Baltic
6=CodePage858 7=Cyrillic
8=CylillicEuro
9=ISO 8859/9 Latin-5 (Turkish)
A=ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
B=CentralEurope w/Euro
C=Arabic-864
U=UCS2 unicode
F4=List
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Here we enter our Arial font ARIAL. Note that if the font is stored as a file m em ber with
Codepage850.
InterForm A/S 339
Note that it is not necessary to define the font in 90 o as the PCL5 com patible printers
will rotate the font.
Now we will define the OCRB font. This font is delivered with the system and IBM font
num ber 3 is already reserved for these fonts, which m eans we do not have to describe
this font to the system as we did with the Arial font in step 9.
4.
Like in step 12 we press F6 to add a font.
Add Auto download Soft Font
PGR332D
Printer group name . . . :
*PCL
Font number . . . . . . .
Symbol set number . . . .
3
0
F4=List
0=All symbol sets (barcodes only)
1=Roman-8 2=PC-8 DM 3=CodePage850
4=CodePage852 5=Baltic
6=CodePage858 7=Cyrillic
8=CylillicEuro
9=ISO 8859/9 Latin-5 (Turkish)
A=ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek
B=CentralEurope w/Euro
C=Arabic-864
U=UCS2 unicode
Font member name 0o . . .
Font member name 90o . . .
IF_OCRB___
__________
F4=List
F4=List
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Note that the OCR-B font m ust have font num ber 3.
Step 5. Testing the Barcodes in an Overlay
340
1.
W e can now try to create an overlay with text constants using the fonts 0003, 5001
and 4700. The following exam ple is testing the OCRB font (font 3) and the barcode
(font 4700) only. The spool entry used for testing will be the dem o spool entry
delivered with InterForm 400 ® (Refer to section 1. Create Demo Spool Entry on how
to print it. See page 377)
2.
Enter 1. Design Overlay on the m ain m enu, and type the nam e FONTTEST.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
Overlay name
FONTTEST__
Overlay text
Line spacing
Rotation
Extra left margin
positions
Maximum number of
print positions
Extra blank lines
on top
Font
Extended page def.
Drawer / Papertype
Paper Size
Copy management
Duplex print
Duplex margin
Back page overlay
________________________________
040
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
000
(*INPUT, 0, 90, 180, 270)
_0
(0-99)
378
(1-378)
_0
(0-99)
0003
*INPUT, fontnumber
F4=List
N
(Y N)
*PRINTER (*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-256, Name)
F4=List
0
F4=List
N
(Y N)
N
(N=no S=short edge margin L=long edge margin)
__0
in 1/240 of an inch (1-720)
__________ Code for placement _ (B=back page F=front)
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F13=Set view/print parameters
F9=Copy from another overlay
F14=PCL-view
F12=Cancel
3.
The only thing we change on this screen is the default font. W e set this to OCRB (Font
3). This m eans the entire spool entry will be printed with OCRB.
4.
Before we start defining the barcode we will m ake a printout of the overlay in OCRB.
W e press F3 to exit to the main menu, and we enter m enu 3. M erge spool entry
w ith overlay:
Merge Spooled File with Overlay
Overlay name
or Overlay Selector
Primary/Secondary set
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
Code page
Unicode output
Merge overprint lines
Form type
Copies
Drawer / Papertype
APF730D
TESTFONT__
________
_
1=Primary, 2=Secondary
__________
__________
______
__________
______
*INPUT
*INPUT
*NO
*STD______
__1
*PRINTER
(no. / *ONLY / *LAST)
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *INPUT, *OVERLAY, 1-256, Name)
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue . . . . AFC_INPUT1
Library . . . . .
APF3812___
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
TESTFONT is already filled in because it was the last overlay active in the design
m enu.
Now go to the lower part of the screen and fill in queue AFC_INPUT1 and library
APF3812. Here we will select the spool entry created by option 1. Create demo spool
entry as described on page 377.
W e press Enter to look at entries in queue AFC_INPUT1:
InterForm A/S 341
Work with Output Queue
Queue:
AFC_INPUT1
Library:
APF3812
Type option, Press Enter.
1=Select 2=Change 3=Hold 4=Delete 5=Display 6=Release 8=Attributes
Opt
1
File
QPRINT
User
PETER
User Data
SMP001
Sts
HLD
Pages
4
Copies
1
Form Type
DEMO
Pty
5
Parameters for option 2, 3 or command
===> ________________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
F21=Description
F24=More keys
W e select the file with option 1 and press Enter
Merge Spooled File with Overlay
Overlay name
or Overlay Selector
Primary/Secondary set
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
Code page
Unicode output
Merge overprint lines
Form type
Copies
Drawer / Papertype
APF730D
TESTFONT__
________
_
1=Primary, 2=Secondary
DSP010700_
PETER_____
073534
QPRINT____
0005
*INPUT
*INPUT
*NO
*STD______
__1
*PRINTER
(no. / *ONLY / *LAST)
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
*NO, *YES
(1-255)
(*PRINTER, *INPUT, *OVERLAY, 1-256, Name)
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue . . . . __________
Library . . . . .
__________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
All the spool file attributes have now been inserted, and we can now press Enter to
print the Overlay TESTFONT m erged with this spool entry and we will autom atically be
returned to the main menu.
5.
342
W e now re-enter our overlay TESTFONT. Here we want to create a tabulator line for
replacing the “Serial No” inform ation as a barcode. But first we press F18 to determ ine
the colum n and line interval for the “Serial No inform ation”.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
DISPLAY OUTPUT FILE
File . . . . . : QPRINT
Page/Line 1/28
Function . . . . +1______
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . . _____________________________________
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Product
Model
i-Group
Serial No.
License Code
---------------------------------------------------------------Interword400
510
i300
44A2971
81 20 01 3A
PDF security
520
i100
44A9032
3F 78 66 99
Should you have any questions regarding the modules, you are
welcome to contact our technical support via:
[email protected]
Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on:
www.interform400.com
Regards
InterForm A/S
1
Florence Flowers
Tulip Road 16
4000 Marigold
DK-Denmark
END
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
Here we find the Serial num bers to be in position 46 to 52 in line 30 to 42.
6.
W e now create a tabulator:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
Overlay name: FONTTEST
Seqnbr. Type
0001
8
Seqnbr. Type
1,0
8
F3=Exit
APF300D
Overlay text:
Overlay definition
Tabulator lin.030-042 pos 46-052 left 3,200L font 4700
Tabulator
Input:
Line
_30 - _42
Position
_46 - _52
Print:
From left edge _3,200 Adjustment L (U L C R N +)
Font
4700
F4=List
Condition: Position
___ - ___
Is > = < N
_ _________________________
Blank after
_ B = Blank condition after
F4=Prompt
F18=DSPSPLF
F11=Delete
F12=Cancel
Here we define the characters which should be printed as barcode data, and define
our barcode font.
7.
Now exit the form s design window and m ake a printout using option 3. M erge spool
entry with overlay. A part of the printout is illustrated in the following figure:
InterForm A/S 343
Work with Zebra fonts
Fonts and soft fonts which are created/installed for PCL or PDF output cannot be used for
Zebra output. You need to create/install special (soft) fonts for zebra. The options below are
reached through 4. W ork with fonts, which can be reached from the InterForm 400
Adm inistration Menu.
Note that the Zebra font m enu options are only shown if you have defined a Zebra (=Label) file
set in InterForm 400.
You m ay notice, that the resident fonts on the Zebra printers are lim ited to 2 different typefaces
(CG Trium virate Bold Condenced and Dot Matrix).
G NOTE G
You can type text in several different codepages on one label. You can specify a specific
codepage on a font num ber.
G NOTE G
Creation of ZPL output (for Zebra) requires the purchase of the ZPL m odule for
InterForm 400.
Autodownload of soft fonts for Zebra printers works differently than for PCL printers. Soft fonts
for a font num ber are autom atically downloaded unless the soft font is registered as already
downloaded into the flash m em ory of the printer in ‘13. W ork with fonts in ZEBRA flash
memory’.
11. Description of Zebra fonts
Work with Zebra fonts
Position to . . . . . .
_____
Font
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Font
2000
3001
4450
4545
4600
4700
4900
ZEB360D
5=Display
7=Rename
Description
CG Triumvirate
H= 10.00/W= 5.00
Dot Matrix 11x7 H= 5
/W= 5
PDF417 EC=1 Lsep=CR Esc=§ H=3 W=3
EAN8 Narrow bar width=4 H=100.00
CODE39 Width=4, H=100, YYYY
CODE128 Width= 4 Height=100
I2of5 Width=4 Height=100 Rel.=2.5
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
W ith this option you can define fonts used for Zebra printers in addition to the fonts, that are
already known by the printers. For the standard fonts delivered with the printers see page 435.
Press F6=Create to create a font or barcode:
344
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create ZEBRA font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . .
ZEB370D
____
2000-9999
2000-2999
3000-3999
4200-4299
4300-4399
4400-4499
4500-4599
4600-4699
4700-4799
4900-4999
5000-9999
F3=Exit
CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed
Dot Matrix fonts
QR Bar Code - Model 2
Data Matrix Bar Code - ECC200
PDF417 barcode
EAN8 / EAN13 / UPC-A Barcode
Code 3 of 9 barcode
Code 128 barcode
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode
Other fonts
F12=Cancel
Note, that you cannot use any fonts already defined for PCL. You need to create fonts
especially for Zebra printers. Below are descriptions that can help you understand the
specifications of the fonts and barcodes:
CG Triumvirate
Change ZEBRA font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . :
ZEB370D
2000
CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed
Description . . . . . . . .
CG_Triumvirate___H=_10.00/W=_5.00
Height . . . . . . . . . .
Relative width . . . . . .
_10.00
5.00
F3=Exit
1.00-792.00
0.20-5.00
F12=Cancel
Here you define the size of the font in Height, but you can even change the width of the font
relatively to the standard width e.g. a relative width of 2 creates a font twice as wide as the
standard font with the sam e height.
InterForm A/S 345
Dot matrix
Change ZEBRA font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . :
ZEB370D
3001
Dot matrix font
Description . . . . . . . .
Dot Matrix 11x7
Font source . . . . . . . :
2
Height factor . . . . . . :
Width factor . . . . . . :
F3=Exit
5
5
H=
5
/W= 5
1 = 9x5 dot matrix
2 = 11x7 dot matrix
3 = 18x10 dot matrix
4 = 26x13 dot matrix
5 = 60x40 dot matrix
6 = OCRA dot matrix
7 = OCRB dot matrix
1-10
1-10
F12=Cancel
The height and width of dot m atrix fonts can only be defined as a whole (integer) factor tim es
the standard width/height.
Defining barcodes for Zebra printers
Barcodes for Zebra printers are defined as barcodes for PCL printers with these deviations:
a) Barcodes are interpreted directly on the printers m aking soft fonts unnecessary for this
purpose. You just specify a font num ber and use that for rem ap windows in overlay design.
(Use option '11. Description of ZEBRA fonts' on the font m enu).
b) For m ost barcodes you are prom pted for a barcode with in dots. This is to be specified for
both Zebra203 (200 DPI = 200 Dots Per Inch) and Zebra300 (300 DPI). If you want a barcode
to have the sam e width in both 200 DPI and 300 DPI you should define the width for Zebra203
to be 2/3 of the value for Zebra300. The width is m easured in dots. See page 331.
c) The height of the barcodes are m easured in 1/72 inch i.e. a height of 72 equals 1 inch.
The Datamatrix barcode:
Via the screen below you insert the setup of the barcode:
346
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create ZEBRA font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . .
ZEB370D
4344
Data Matrix Bar Code - ECC200
Description . . . . . . . .
Datamatrix_demo_barcode________________
Symbol element size in dots
ZEBRA203 . . . . . . . .
ZEBRA300 . . . . . . . .
4__
6__
(1-999)
(1-999)
Colums to encode . . . .
Rows to encode . . . . .
__
__
(10-48) or Blank = Based on data length
(10-48) or Blank = Based on data length
Line separator
. . . . . .
_
1=A blank, 2=CR, 3=CRLF, 4=None
UCC/EAN . . . . . . . . . .
_
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Colum ns/Row s
to encode
You can optionally insert a num ber of spooled file colum ns (positions) and/or
rows (lines) to be used for the barcode. If inserted they m ust be an even
num ber. In this m anner you can fix the size of the barcode in the horizontal or
vertical direction in this m anner to a m axim um value.
UCC/EAN
Like EAN128 it requires, that the data to be converted into the barcode fits with
this standard.
For general descriptions of barcodes see page 331.
Using soft fonts for printing on Zebra
W hen you create fonts in the range 5000-9999 this screen is shown:
Create ZEBRA font
Font
. . . . . . . . . . .
ZEB370D
5655
Other fonts
Description . . . . . . . .
Arial 12___________________________________
Height . . . . . . . . . .
Relative width . . . . . .
_12.00
1.00
Special EBCDIC codepage . .
_____
Soft font member name
Western . . . . . .
Central European .
Baltic . . . . . .
Turkish . . . . . .
Cyrillic . . . . .
Greek . . . . . . .
Arabic . . . . . .
Hebrew . . . . . .
Special . . . . . .
per
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F4=Prompt
1.00-792.00
0.20-5.00
symbolset
. ARIAL_____
. __________
. __________
. __________
. __________
. __________
. __________
. __________
. __________
Height: The height of the font.
InterForm A/S 347
Relative width:
The relative width of the font i.e. 1 equals the standard width and 2 equals a font twice
as wide as the standard font.
Special EDCDIC
codepage:
The EBCDIC codepage to use when printing using this font - if the default
codepage is not to be used. In this m anner you can print text in several different
codepages on one label.
Soft font member:
Specify previously installed soft fonts for each sym bolset, that you want to use.
G NOTE G
If you install and use a fixed soft font you m ay notice, that the font size should also be
specified in height even though pitch or CPI would be the norm al way to m easure it. Exam ples:
A height of 10 equals a CPI of 12 and a height of 12 equals a CPI of 10.
348
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
12. Work with ZEBRA soft fonts
W hen you select this option all installed soft fonts for Zebra printers are shown:
Work with ZEBRA soft fonts
Position to . . . . . .
__________ Member name
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
Member
FRUTBOCE
FRUTBOWE
LOGOFONT
FNT461D
Symbolset
Central European
Western
Special
6=Print
Description
TrueType Frutiger-Bold
TrueType Frutiger-Bold
TrueType Company Logo
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
5=Display
You can choose option 5=Display to display a sam ple of the font in SwiftView (if
installed). You are prom pted for the codepage to use. State the codepage with
preceding zeroes.
6=Print Som e few characters in som e soft fonts cannot be printed on a Zebra printer. To
m ake sure, that an installed soft font can be used it is recom m ended always to do a
test print before using the soft font in production.
Press F6 to install a True Type Font file as a new soft font for Zebra:
(Make sure that you do not violate any copyrights when installing the font).
Install TrueType font to ZEBRA from /APF3812Home/Work
Document name . . . . . . :
FONT.TTF
Font name . . . . . . . . :
Font
Font name PCL . . . . . . .
Font____________
Symbol set
1
. . . . . . . .
Member name in FONT file
F3=Exit
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Font______
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
FNT465D
Western
Central European
Baltic
Turkish
Cyrillic
Greek
Arabic
Hebrew
Special
F4=List
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 349
W hen installing you are prom pted for what sym bol set to use. Use the sym bol set, that you
want to use this soft font for. If the font is a specially designed font including e.g. the com pany
logo you should use 9 = Special.
13. Work with fonts in ZEBRA flash memory
As opposed to PCL output the soft fonts used for Zebra output are always downloaded when
used. You can however decide to download soft fonts or im ages into the printers flash
m em ory.
InterForm 400 use the table below to find out which soft fonts are already loaded in the flash
m em ory of the printer and therefore does not need to be downloaded when used.
Work with fonts in Zebra flash memory
Position to . . . . . .
__________
__________
________
FNT481D
Outq
Library
Fontmember
Type options, press Enter.
4=Delete
Opt
_
Outq
ZEBRA
Library
QUSRSYS
Fontmember
COURIER
Flash drive
E
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Download a soft font into flash memory
Press F6=Create to download a soft font into the flash m em ory of a Zebra printer:
Create spooled file with soft font download
Outq . . . .
Library . .
Fontmember .
Flash drive
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ZEBRA_____
QUSRSYS___
ARIAL___
E
F4=List
(E, B)
-----------------------------------------------|
|
|
Output queue . . . .
ZEBRA_____
|
|
QUSRSYS___
|
|
|
|
Form type . . . . .
*STD______
|
|
|
------------------------------------------------
F3=Exit
350
F4=Prompt
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F12=Cancel
Version 2014
FNT482D
This will create an entry in the list above, that InterForm 400 will use for rem em bering NOT to
download this soft font when used on this output queue.
This will also create a spooled file on the specified queue (which should be the one, where the
printer is attached). The spooled file nam e will be ‘ZEBRAFONT’ and the user data field of the
spooled file will be nam ed the sam e as the downloaded. This spooled file will do the actual
install of the soft font in the flash m em ory as well as print a sam ple of the soft font.
Delete a soft font from flash memory
If you use option 4=Delete for an installed soft font you will be asked to confirm and to specify
the form type of the spooled file, that will do the delete from the flash m em ory:
Confirm delete of fonts
FNT481D
Press Enter to confirm your choices for (4=Delete).
Press F3 or F12 to return to change your choices.
Opt
4
Outq
ZEBRA
------------------------------------------|
|
| Output queue . . . .
ZEBRA
|
|
QUSRSYS
|
|
|
| Form type . . . . .
*STD______
|
|
|
| F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
|
|
|
------------------------------------------End
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The entry of this soft font in the list above will be rem oved and a spooled file will be generated
on the assigned output queue. This spooled file has the nam e ‘DLTZEBFONT’ and a user data
field containing the flash drive and the soft font that will be deleted.
J TIP J
See description of option ‘19. Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images’
if there is not enough space in the flash memory.
14. Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts
The resident fonts of the Zebra printers only support W estern codepages. However in order to
be able to print other codepages (and use the internal fonts when possible) InterForm 400
provides with the option to specify to substitute the resident font with a previously installed soft
font for each code page:
InterForm A/S 351
Substitution for internal fonts when printing non-western code page
Substitute for
triumvirate
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Code page
Central European
Baltic
Turkish
Cyrillic
Greek
Arabic
Hebrew
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
Substitute for
dot matrix font
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
F12=Cancel
J TIP J
Suggestions for substitutions: You could use a Universe Bold or Arial Bold to substitute
Triumvirate and a fixed font e.g. Courier to substitute the Dot Matrix font.
19. Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images
As you install and delete resources in the flash m em ory of a Zebra printer the am ount of free
space in the flash m em ory will gradually decrease (em pty blocks in the m em ory from
previously installed elem ents cannot be reused).
In order for you to workaround this issue InterForm 400 provides you with this function. It will
erase a specific flash m em ory drive and rewrite all registered resources in onto the flash
m em ory.
M WARNING M
As all data in the specified flash memory drive will be erased you should make sure of this
before executing this option:
1. Are all your InterForm400 related resources in flash memory registered in InterForm400?
2. If you have downloaded other resources into the flash memory (not registered in
InterForm400) these should be reloaded after the memory has been rewritten. Do you have all
resources?
This screen is shown:
352
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images
Output queue . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
ZEBRA_____
QUSRSYS___
Flash drive
E
Form type
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
ZRL300D
(E, B)
*STD______
F12=Cancel
State the output queue where the printer is attached, the flash m em ory drive and the form type
to use for the spooled file, that will execute this function. The spooled file will have the nam e
‘ZEBRAFLASH’ and user data field ‘INZ-RELOAD’ - with status *RDY.
W hen the printer is done, it will print sam ples of all installed soft fonts and a list of all
resources in the flash m em ory, including how m uch mem ory they take up, and the am ount of
m em ory that are free.
M WARNING M
W hen you press Enter on the screen above you will NOT be asked to confirm. So please
make sure, that you have all the resources installed before pressing Enter.
InterForm A/S 353
5. Work with images
Im ages can be im ported from the directory /APF3812Hom e/W ork on the System i.
The following im age standards are supported for black and white im ages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
TIFF form at Rev. 4.0 non-com pressed or with data com pression Schem e-2.
TIFF Huffm an Com pressed
TIFF form at CCITT T.6 (fax group 4)
MOD:CA including black and white im age tags (If the MOD:CA file includes m ore
im ages only the first im age will be used)
LZW com pression
Grey im ages
These form ats are available with m ost scanners.
Color im ages m ust be in standard windows color BMP or JPEG form at. Sharp B/W BMP
im ages can only be inserted with the &&IMG *PATHBMP com m and.
W hen selecting option ‘5. W ork with im ages’ from the Adm inistration m enu the following
screen appears.
Work with images
IMG001D
Select one of the following options:
1. Work with black/white images
2. Work with color images
Work with Zebra images
11. Work with ZEBRA images
12. Work with images in ZEBRA flash memory
19. Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images
Option: __
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
From here you can select either if you want to work with or im port black/white or color Im ages.
If you want to use im ages for Zebra output these im ages should be im ported specifically for
Zebra in option 11. W ork with ZEBRA images.
354
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Working with black and white images
Selecting option 1. W ork with black and white im ages the following screen will appear.
Work with Images
Start with
IMG360D
. . __________
Select option. Press Enter.
2=Change description 3=Copy 4=Delete 5=View 6=Print
8=Display attributes 9=Convert to PCL5
Opt
Name
Description
_
Image_1
Image no. 1 for InterForm
_
Image_2
Image no. 2 for InterForm
_
Image_3
Image no. 3 for InterForm
_
Image_4
Image no. 4 for InterForm
_
Image_5
Image no. 5 for InterForm
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F8=Read from /APF3812Home/Work
F12=Cancel
Note that using 5=view requires the PCL Viewer to be installed.
J TIP J
Converting images to PCL5 format is not necessary in order to use the image from within an
overlay, but performance will increase when using converted images. If necessary reverse the
image when importing instead of reversing it in overlay design - it will increase performance.
Importing black and white images.
Pressing F8, from the W ork with Im ages will bring the Read im age from Folder screen.
Read Image from the /APF3812Home/Work directory
Start with
. . __________
Select option. Press Enter.
1=Read without conversion
Opt
_
_
_
IMG370D
2=Read with conversion to PCL5
File neme
Size in bytes
CEB2SW_5.TIF
19.802
PP.TIF
10.335
PRO1.TIF
21.079
Date/Time changed
2003.02.21 - 20:47:25
2003.02.22 - 09:23:28
2003.02.11 - 11:32:03
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F8=All file types
F12=Cancel
Select the TIFF file you want to read into InterForm 400 ® and specify the m em ber into which
you want to add the im age, and which is referred to in an overlay definition. If you select an
im age with grey tones you will see a screen like this:
InterForm A/S 355
Read B/W image from the /APF3812Home/Work directory
Document name
File type
. . . . :
. . . . . . :
171170.TIF
TIFF Palette color compression 32773
Width . . . . . . . . :
Height . . . . . . . . :
Output image name
Description
. . .
. . . . . .
Magnitude factor . . . .
F3=Exit
IMG375D
400
300
I171170___
Image_171170_-_in_double_size
2
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
InterForm 400 will show you the size of the im age in dots (300 equals an inch). If you intend to
print the im age larger it is a very good idea to enlarge it here. If you do so the grey areas will be
presented as fine as possible in the final output.
The magnitude factor states how m any tim es you want to enlarge the im age. Using '2' will
double the size.
Working with color images
From the "W ork with images" m enu you select option 2, if you want to work with color im ages.
Work with color images
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
12=Work with colors in image
Opt
_
_
_
Image name
Color_1
Color_2
Color_3
BMP100D
Image name
5=Display
6=Print
8=Display information
Description
InterForm Color image 1
InterForm Color image 2
InterForm Color image 3
Status
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Load BMP/JPG file
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Note that using 5=view requires the PCL Viewer to be installed.
Import color images
To load a new BMP or JPG im age from the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory on the System i
IFS press F6. Type in an im age nam e to be used in InterForm 400 ® and a description of sam e.
In the field From PC-file press F4 to retrieve a list of available BMP and JPG files. Select with
option 1.
356
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Notice that the extension m ust be either BMP or JPG.
Load BMP-file
BMP200D
Image name . . . . . . . .
Color_9___
Description . . . . . . .
From PC-file . . . . . . .
Finish . . . . . . . . . .
Color image no. 9 for InterForm______________
Color9____
Filename without .BMP
1
1=Matte
2=Glossy
1
1=Contone
2=Device-best dither
3=Smooth contone
4=Basic contone
1
1=Standard RGB
2=Vivid colors
Render . . . . . . . . . .
Color treatment
F3=Exit
. . . . .
F4=List
F12=Cancel
Enter your selection of im age details regarding Finish, Render and Color treament.
J TIP J
You can use the TIFTOMBR command (see page 481) to import multiple TIFF files from e.g.
a folder within qdls.
InterForm A/S 357
Work with Zebra images
Im ages that you want to use for Zebra printers m ust be installed for Zebra (using option 11.
W ork with Zebra images). You cannot use im ages installed for PCL or PDF output.
G NOTE G
Creation of ZPL output (for Zebra) requires the purchase of the ZPL m odule for
InterForm 400.
11. Work with ZEBRA images
Work with Zebra images
Position to . . . . . .
__________
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change description
3=Copy
8=Display attributes
Opt
_
_
Image name
LOGO
NEWLOGO
ZIM350D
Image name
4=Delete
5=Display
6=Print
Description
Company Logo
New Company Logo
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F8=Read from Folder
F12=Cancel
You can install TIFF im ages in the form ats noted on page 354. TIFF im ages can only be
installed from the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory.
G NOTE G
Even though you can specify up to 10 characters form the installed im age nam e you should
strict the nam e to m ax. 7 characters if you plan download the im age into the flash m em ory of a
Zebra printer.
358
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
12. Work with images in ZEBRA flash memory
Work with images in Zebra flash memory
Position to . . . . . .
__________
__________
_______
ZIM391D
Outq
Library
Image member
Type options, press Enter.
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
_
Outq
ZEBRA
ZEBRA
ZEBRA
ZEBRA
Library
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
Image member
LOGO
LOGO
LOGO
LOGO
Orientation
E
N
S
W
Flash drive
E
E
E
E
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
W ith this feature you can download im ages onto the flash m em ory of a Zebra printer. Only
im ages with nam es consisting of up to 7 characters can loaded into the flash m em ory. W hen
you add an im age to this list a spooled file is created, that will do the load of the im age. This
spooled file will also print out the downloaded im age with the specified rotation.
Rotation can be N, E, W or S for North, East, W est and South. These equals rotations 000,
270, 090 and 180 degrees (in the sam e order).
19. Initiate ZEBRA flash memory and reload fonts and images
This option will work exactly as option 19 (with the sam e nam e) on the 4. W ork with Fonts
m enu. Refer to page 352 for m ore inform ation.
InterForm A/S 359
6. Work with PCL Files
The InterForm 400 ® system features a possibility to im port PCL-files from a PC by the following
m ethods:
•
•
From a PCL spooled file (*USERASCII) on a System i output queue.
PCL print file placed in the /APF3812Hom e directory in the IFS.
The PCL-file can be created in any PC-Product capable of delivering an output for an HP page
printer (PCL4, 5 or 5e com patible).
It is recom m ended to work with applications m aking use of PCL drawing, text com m ands etc.
instead of just creating a large PCL bit im age. The PCL driver m ust correspond to the iSeries
attached printer intended for using the overlay.
W e recom m end to use an original HP driver even though your printer is another brand. NonHP drivers som etim es include native com m ands, which will appear in the print out on genuine
HP printers or other HP com patible printers.
No m atter how m any pages the PC-print consist of only the first page is stored. This is due to
the fact that the PC-print is intended to be a part of an overlay for use on only one page.
The program cleans the PC-print for unwanted control codes, such as form feed, tray
selections and printer reset.
W hen the PC-print has been read into a m em ber in the PCL-file, it can be used in design of an
overlay when selecting overlay elem ent F=PCL file.
W hen selecting option 6. W ork W ith PCL Files on the InterForm 400 ® adm inistration m enu,
you will get the following screen:
Work with PCL-files
PCL001D
Select one of the following options:
1. Work with B/W PCL-files
2. Work with color PCL-files
Option: _
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
The m enus for black/white and color files appear identical, but InterForm 400 ® needs to
operate with the two file types separately.
Selecting e.g. 1. W ork with B/W PCL-Files will bring up the following screen:
360
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with PCL-files
PCL100D
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
_
PCL-file
CEBIT
PCL-file
7=Rename
8=Display information
Description
Cebit Logo
Size
24.576
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Load PCL-file
F12=Cancel
Note that using 5=view requires the PCL Viewer to be installed.
InterForm A/S 361
Import PCL file
Press F6 to load a PCL file into InterForm 400 ®
Load PCL-file
PCL110D
PCL-file . . . . . . . . .
________
Description
_______________________________________________
Load from
F3=Exit
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
_
1=PC file in the /APF3812Home/Work dir
2=Output queue
F12=Cancel
Enter the m em ber nam e into which you want to add the PCL file, and which is referred to in an
overlay definition.
Enter whether you want to read the PCL file from a spool file or from the /APF3812Hom e/W ork
directory. In both cases a HP-PCL driver have been used to form at the overlay created in a PC
application.
If reading from the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory, the PCL driver should be configured to
print to a file. Either directly into the folder APF3812, or to the local hard drive and copied to
the folder.
If reading from output queue the PCL driver m ust be defined to print on a local printer on the
System i through iSeries Access.
W hen PCL-File and Load From is defined, the selection for the PC file will appear. If selecting
read from the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory, you will be able to use F4 to list available files
Load PCL-file
PCL110D
PCL-file . . . . . . . . :
PH
Description
________________________________________________
Load from
. . . . . . :
. . . . . . . :
From PC-file . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=List
1
1=PC file in the /APF3812Home/Work dir
2=Output queue
____________
F12=Cancel
J TIP J
You can use the PCLTOMBR command to import multiple B/W PCL files from e.g. a folder in
qdls.
362
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
7. Work with palette colors
Change the definition of the colors.
This option is designed for optim izing the color palette for your color printer.
Work with palette colors
Position to . . . . . .
PAL100D
Color nbr
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Color nbr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Black
Grey
Red
Green
Blue
Yellow
Orange
Brown
Red
0
128
255
0
0
255
255
128
0
0
0
0
0
Green
0
128
0
255
0
255
128
64
0
0
0
0
0
Blue
0
128
0
0
255
0
64
0
0
0
0
0
0
More...
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
Start of list.
F10=Print palette
F12=Cancel
It is recom m ened to print out the color palette on your color printer as a reference.
The first predefined 8 colors are fixed and cannot be changed.
Adding a new color is done by entering 2 in front of a vacant color num ber. Enter the RGB
com bination and press Enter. The new color definition will now be available for selection in the
INK settings when working with overlays. Consequently text, fram es and shading can be
printed in the new defined color.
InterForm A/S 363
8. Work with paper control options
This option is the entry to edit tables that will help you to select the right printer drawer, to
select the right output bin on the printers and to insert fully user defined PJL com m ands for
stapling. Check out each option below:
1. Paper type to PCL-drawer conversion
Som e few (old) printers does not support the possibility to select the drawer by paper type. For
these few printers this function has been added, that enables the user to m ap all of the
standard paper types to a PCL drawer num ber for each printer.
For a description of how to set this up for the m ain part of your printers refer to page 423 for
m ore inform ation.
Paper type to PCL-drawer conversion
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
Outq
HP4
PRT01
PAP300D
5=Display
Library
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Press F6=Create to add a new output queue (with a printer attached):
Create paper type to pcl-drawer conversion
Output queue . . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Type
PLAIN . . .
PREPRINTD .
LTRHEAD . .
TRNSPRNCY .
PREPUNCHD .
LABELS . .
BOND . . .
RECYCLED .
COLOR . . .
CARDSTOCK .
F3=Exit
364
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PCL-drawer
__2
__3
__2
__2
__4
__2
__2
__2
__2
__2
F12=Cancel
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
HP4_______
QUSRSYS___
or
Macro number
PAP305D
Here you can specify what drawer num ber each of the standard paper types should be
translated into. Note, that the paper types m aybe are translated into your native language on
the printer display.
2. SCS to PCL drawer conversion
W hen changing from printing with Host Print Transform onto InterForm 400 you will notice a
change in how the printer drawer is selected. Host Print Transform converts the EBCDIC
spooled files into ASCII and autom atically converts the drawer selection on the *SCS spooled
files into PCL codes to select the right drawer num ber.
W hen you put InterForm 400 into production you will need to decide for how the drawer should
be selected with InterForm 400. You have these options:
1.
Select the drawer by paper type in the overlay you m erge with. That is to be
preferred if at all possible. Refer to ‘1. Papertype to PCL-draw er conversion’ above
for m ore inform ation.
2.
Select the drawer num ber as *INPUT in the overlay. That will use the drawer
num ber from the *SCS spooled file when you m erge it with an overlay. This option (‘2.
SCS to PCL draw er conversion ‘) can help you to translate the *SCS drawer into a
PCL drawer num ber. Read below to see how it is done.
3.
The sim ple thing is to type in a PCL drawer number in the overlay. This is however
a printer specific setting so it could be a problem if you use the sam e overlay for
different types of printers. So this solution should be avoided.
If you go with option 2 using *INPUT as the drawer in the overlay, then the num ber you specify
in the DRAW ER param eter of the *SCS spooled file you m erge with, will be the exact sam e
num ber as the PCL drawer num ber.
This will however m ost often NOT be the sam e as the drawer as Host Print Transform sends
out. So with this option you can insert a table that tells InterForm 400 how to transform the
*SCS drawer num ber into a PCL drawer num ber. The table is printer specific so this is setup
per output queue. Press F6 to create a new one:
Create SCS to PCL drawer conversion
Output queue . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Printer description . . .
SCS-drawer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
F3=Exit
DRW310D
PRT05_____
QUSRSYS___
HP4_____________________________
PCL-drawer
1__
4__
5__
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
+
F12=Cancel
Specify the output queue you are m erging TO.
InterForm A/S 365
3. Output Sorter Bin Support
This function is used in departm ental printing environm ents with the following purposes:
•
Several users share the sam e printer, and want their print output in a specific output
tray depending on the User nam e.
Printing of jobs where an output tray should be selected depending on the overlay
chosen for the job.
Com binations of the above
•
•
This option has been tested and approved with the standard sorter units available for HP5Si
and the Lexm ark Optra series.
Defining an Output Sorter Bin for a User
Enter Menu point 8. W ork with printer control options followed by 3. Output Sorter
Definitions on the Adm inistration m enu. The following screen will appear:
Work with Output Sorters
Start with . . . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
Outq
Library
5=Display
Sorter type
Default bin
(No output sorters defined - Press F6 for add)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to add a new Output sorter definition.
One output sorter definition corresponds to one output queue. Additional output sorter
definitions m ust be defined for each additional output queue with a capable printer attached.
366
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create
Output Sorter Definition
Output queue . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
PRT02
QUSRSYS
Sorter type . . . . . . .
Default output bin . . . .
HP5SI
1
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Output Queue:
The output queue holding the HP5Si or Lexm ark Optra printer.
Sorter Type:
Not yet inspected.
Any value entered for Sorter type will default to HP5Si. This type can be
used for both HP5si and the Lexm ark Optra series.
Default output bin:
This bin will be used for any User or Overlay which does not m atch any
criteria defined in Output Sorter Details. A bin num ber from 1 to 11
can be defined for a HP5Si.
Bin 1:
The standard face-down bin.
Bin 2:
The standard face-up bin, which is only selectable if the
sorter unit is not installed.
Bin 3:
The upper face-up bin of the sorter unit.
Bin 4-11:
The 8 face-down bins of the sorter unit.
W hen pressing Enter the following screen will appear:
Work with Output Sorter Details
Output queue . . . . . . : PRT02
Library . . . . . . . :
QUSRSYS
Start with . . . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
Overlay
Pri/Sec
5=Display
User profile
Binno.
(No output sorter details - Press F6 for create)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
Press F6 to add Sorter details to you Sorter definition.
InterForm A/S 367
You can add additional Sorter Detail lines for each User profile and/or each overlay which
should result in addressing of a particular sorter bin:
Create
Output Sorter Details
Output queue . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . :
PRT02
QUSRSYS
Overlay name . . . . . . .
Primary/Secondary . . . .
User profile . . . . . . .
__________
_
QSECOFR___
Output bin number
4__
. . . .
1=Primary
2=Secondary
F3=Exit
Overlay name:
F12=Cancel
Type a nam e of an overlay which should result in printing to a bin
defined in Output bin num ber. If a user profile has been entered also,
the bin will only be addressed if both Overlay nam e and User profile
m atch.
Primary/Secondary: If Copy Managem ent has been defined for the Overlay this option will
decide if only the Prim ary or the Secondary set of copies will result in
printing to a specific sorter bin. As you norm ally do a prim ary m erge you
should state '1' when using an overlay nam e.
M WARNING M
If Primary/Secondary is left blank the overlay is not checked!
User Profile:
The System i user profile which should result in printing to a bin defined
in Output bin num ber. If an overlay nam e has been entered, the bin
will only be addressed if both Overlay nam e and User profile m atch.
Output bin number: A bin num ber from 1 to 11 can be defined for a HP5Si.
Bin 1:
The standard face-down bin.
Bin 2:
The standard face-up bin, which is only selectable if the
sorter unit is not installed.
Bin 3:
The upper face-up bin of the sorter unit.
Bin 4-11:
The 8 face-down bins of the sorter unit.
The following exam ple illustrate a situation where all letters, using overlay IF400DEMO, printed
to queue PRT02 are printed to output bin 8, except when printed by PETER which will result in
printing to bin 9. All other print jobs subm itted by PETER will be printed to bin 4. Any print job
subm itted by other users and with other overlays will be printed to the Default output bin
defined for this Sorter definition.
368
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with Output Sorter Details
Output queue . . . . . . : PRT02
Library . . . . . . . :
QUSRSYS
Start with . . . . . . .
Type option, Press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
Overlay
IF400DEMO
IF400DEMO
Pri/Sec
1
1
5=Display
User profile
PETER
PETER
Binno.
009
008
004
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Add
F12=Cancel
4. User defined PJL
W ith InterForm 400 you can define to staple several pages together. You can staple several
copies together via copy m anagem ent or staple papers for each recipient. InterForm 400 includes
predefined PJL com m ands for stapling for m any different printers, but with this option you can
even design your own PJL sequences if you want to m ake your own PJL com m ands instead.
You can create up to 10 different printer groups (or PJL sequences) with up to 10 PJL com m ands
in each.
Below we have created a printer group 0 showing to to add our own PJL sequence to add stapling
for a specific printer not covered by the InterForm 400:
First we pressed F6=Add to create the printer group:
Work with user defined PJL
Printer group . . . . .
Description . . . . . .
F3=Exit
PJL300D
0
My printer
F12=Cancel
Next we use 2=Change to insert the PJL sequences needed:
InterForm A/S 369
Work with user defined PJL
PJL300D
Printer group . . . . . : 0
Description . . . . . . : My printer
PJL Function . . . . .
Description . . . . . .
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
@PJL
0
Staple on my printer
COMMENT MYPJL SET STAPLE=TWOLEFT________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Now you can use the PJL sequence if you add stapling either via copy m anagem ent (page 62 ) or
via a stapling finishing definition (refer to page 203) if you select U = User defined PJL and
rem em ber to use a PJL printer type for m erging with the overlay.
J TIP J
If you want to find out what PJL sequences are necessary in order to staple on a specific printer
you can do this by printing to file (e.g. from Notepad) while activating stapling on the printer in
question. Then open the resulting .prn file in e.g. Notepad and now you can see the PJL
commands generated. Copy the PJL commands relevant for stapling into the setup above.
370
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
9. Work with AFPDS copy spooled file CPI & LPI
If you want to use AFPDS spooled files as input in InterForm 400, then you should consider if you
need to use this feature. It can be reached from the InterForm 400 Main Menu by selecting ‘80.
Adm inistering InterForm 400' followed by ‘9. W ork with AFPDS copy spooled file CPI & LPI’:
Work with afpds copy spooled file atributes
Position to . . . . . .
AFP901D
Printer file name
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
4=Delete
5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
Printer
file
MY_PRTF
SDF
TEST
Library
MY_LIB
KJH
TEST
Update
user
KSE
KSE
KSE
Update
date
2010.03.05
2010.03.05
2010.03.05
Update
time
10:48:56
10:55:33
10:55:48
CpySplf
CPI
17.0
33.0
20.0
CpySplf
LPI
12.0
16.0
6.0
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Here you can override specific printer files (also specifying the library of the printer file), that was
used for creating the spooled file, to a specific CPI and LPI:
Change afpds copy spooled file atributes
Printer file name . . . :
Library . . . . . . . . :
MY_PRTF
MY_LIB
Update user profile . . .
Update date . . . . . . .
Update time . . . . . . .
KSE
2010.03.05
10:48:56
Copy spooled file CPI
Copy spooled file LPI
17.0
12.0
F3=Exit
. .
. :
AFP905D
F12=Cancel
If you look at the attributes of a spooled file you m ay see the default CPI and LPI:
InterForm A/S 371
Work with Spooled File Attributes
Job . . .
User . .
Number .
Job system
. . .
. . .
. . .
name
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Page range to print:
Starting page . .
Ending page . . .
Record length . . .
Page size:
Length . . . . . .
Width . . . . . .
Measurement method
Lines per inch . . .
Characters per inch
Overflow line number
Fold records . . . .
:
:
:
:
QPADEV000H
KSE
074598
C005DE34
File . .
Number
Creation
Creation
. . . . . . . . . :
. . . . . . . . . :
. . . . . . . . . :
1
*END
202
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
66
100
*ROWCOL
6
10
60
*NO
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
. . .
. . .
date
time
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
QPRINT
000001
03/03/10
09:44:28
More...
Press Enter to continue.
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
F13=Change
But inside an AFPDS spooled file you can insert sm aller texts with a different CPI and LPI, so it
can be a problem to fit in the text in the space available. Norm ally InterForm 400 will e.g. push text
to the right to m ake space for all the text (avoiding overwriting previous texts), so nothing is lost,
but this m ay cause the alignm ent of colum ns to be lost.
That is why, you with InterForm 400 can override the CPI and LPI to spread out the spooled file
text, and thereby keep fixed positions and line num ber all through the spooled file.
If you are in doubt as to what CPI and LPI to select, you could e.g. state the CPI to be highest CPI
used (or higher) - although keeping in m ind that the m ax. width of a spooled file is still 378, and
that it is not that easy to design an overlay, for a spooled file that is so wide, that you are not able
to see a com plete line at a tim e. For the LPI it m ight be a very good idea to select a whole num ber
tim es the spooled file LPI. So if the spooled file has 6 LPI you could e.g. override it with this
function to e.g. 12 LPI (still keeping in m ind that the m ax. num ber of lines in a spooled file is 255).
If you select the double CPI, then every other line in the designer will (norm ally) be blank, but you
can then just use the half line distance in the overlay to com pensate for this.
372
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
20. Certificate administration
Refer to the PDF Security m anual for details of how to im port certificates to be used for digital
signatures in PDF files and how to digitally sign PDF files. The PDF Security m odule can also
encrypt and password protect PDF files generated by InterForm 400.
Refer to our web site for m ore details of this m odule:
http://www.interform 400.com /index.php/products/digital-signature-pdf-security
InterForm A/S 373
40. Email administration
This m enu covers the em ail adm inistration for the daily work:
Email administration
System.......:
Workstn ID...:
CCSID ....:
User ID......:
Subsystem....: MAILINTER
Library...:
APF3812
PMK250
QPADEV000B
00277
KSE
Select one of the following options:
1. Work with email groups
5. Work with email log
10. Start the MAILINTER subsystem
11. End the MAILINTER subsystem
12. Work with the MAILINTER subsystem
Option: __
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
W ith option 10, 11 and 12 you can work with the subsystem used for em ailing if you are using
InterForm 400 SMTP.
Option ‘1. W ork with em ail groups’ and ‘5. W ork with em ail log’ are covered below.
For additional email configuration refer to option ‘3. Configure em ail’ on the configuration m enu
as described on page 304.
If you want to specify the email address of various email senders (to be used in the em ail finish
definition) you use option ‘8. W ork with em ail senders’ on the Auto Form s Control m enu as
indicated on page 231.
G NOTE G
It is highly recommended to run the com m and APF3812/CLRMAILLOG reguarly to rem ove any
em ails older than a certain num ber of days. Refer to page 463 for details of this com m and.
374
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
1. Work with email groups
You can m ake InterForm 400 send out to a group of em ail addresses. In order to do that you will
first need to define an em ail group to use. This is done by selecting ‘80. Adm inistering InterForm
400' followed by ‘40. Em ail adm inistration’ and ‘1. W ork with em ail groups’:
Work with email groups
EMA100D
Position to . . . . . .
Email group
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
12=Work with email addresses
Opt
Email group
SALES_GRP
5=Display
7=Rename
Description
Group of all sales contacts
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Here you can create new ones with F6=Create, change the description of existing ones with
2=Change and use option 12=W ork with e-m ail addresses:
Work with email addresses
Email group . . . . . :
SALES_GRP
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
EMA120D
5=Display
Email address
AB@demo_company5.com
ABD@demo_company8.com
CSE@demo_company7.com
DD@demo_companyB.com
EE@demo_companyB.com
FF@demo_companyc.com
Hans_Hansen@demo_company1.com
Jason_Smith@demo_company4.com
Jens_Hansen@demo_company2.com
Jens_Jensen@demo_company3.com
KJ@demo_company3.com
K9@demo_company6.com
RPGLE@demo_companyA.com
More...
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
You can use F11=View 2 to view the e-m ail addresses, nam es or descriptions. You add new
receivers with F6=Create:
InterForm A/S 375
Change email address
Email group
. . . . . . :
Email address
. . . . . .
SALES_GRP
RPGLE@demo_companyA.com
Name . . . . . . . . . . .
Richard Peter Glenn
Description
Sales Manager of Demo CompanyA
F3=Exit
. . . . . . .
EMA130D
F12=Cancel
Using an email group
The use of an em ail group is described for each of the possible ways of e-m ailing, but generally it
is im plem ented in this way:
The em ail to address should be set to ‘*GROUP’ and the nam e of the receiver should contain the
nam e of the m ail group e.g. as below (as done in an e-m ail exit program ):
(The em ail group m ust be written in capital letters.)
CHGVAR
CHGVAR
VAR(&RTNTOADR) VALUE('*GROUP')
VAR(&RTNTONAM) VALUE('SALES_GRP')
If you are using a com m and like SNDEMAIL or MRGSPLFPDF you can refer to the group in this
m anner:
TOADR(*GROUP SALES_GRP) or TOADR((*GROUP SALES_GRP)) (for SNDEMAIL)
(Stating *GROUP as the m ail address and the nam e of the m ail group as the nam e of the
receiver). The em ail group m ust be written in capital letters.
The sam e principle is used if you want to address a group as a BCC or CC receiver: State
‘*GROUP’ as the address and the group nam e as the nam e of the receiver.
Please note, that it is currently not possible to state a group as a BCC receiver if you are using the
em ail finishing definition as you cannot specify a nam e for the BCC receiver here.
5. Work with email log
W ith this option you can view the log of sent em ails. Refer to the description of the com m and,
APF3812/W RKMAILLOG on page 468 for details.
376
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Service Functions
The service functions are accessed by selecting option 12 on the InterForm 400 Main Menu:
Service Functions
APF900D
Select one of the following options:
1. Create Demo Spool Entry
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
21.
22.
Display all displayable characters
Save spooled file to the /APF3812Home/Work directory
Print Saved file to the /APF3812Home/Work directory
Print Resource X-reference
Journal menu
Display resource statistics
Export of InterForm 400 resources
Import of InterForm 400 resources
40.
50.
60.
70.
80.
Install/upgrade InterWord 400
Apply PTF from the /APF3812Home/PTFs directory
Install SwiftView at drive C:
Install InterForm Designer on your PC
Prepare server to support InterForm Designer
Option: __
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
1. Create Demo Spool Entry
If you want to study the Auto Form s Control sam ple delivered with this program , this option will
create a spool entry in a form at which could have been the output from a com m on System i
application.
Create Demo Spooled File
SMP001D
This program will print a demo spooled file in the APF3812/AFC_INPUT1 outq.
The printout is intended for being merged with the IF400DEMO overlay from the
file-set SAMPLE.
If the AUTO_FORM subsystem is started, the merge operation is carried out
automatically by Auto Forms Control.
Output from the merge operation will be placed in the APF3812/AFC_OUT1 outq,
from where it can be printed on a HPIII or similar PCL5 printer.
Before the AUTO_FORM subsystem is started for the first time, you must call
the APF3812/AFCINSTALL program. The subsystem is then started with this
command:
STRSBS APF3812/AUTO_FORM
Press Enter to create the printout
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 377
5. Display All Displayable Characters
This option is m eant as a tool to solve problem s with character set m appings.
By m aking a print screen of this screen you can verify if the displayable characters will appear
the sam e in print.
Displayable characters
First hex char -> 01456789ABCDEF
0
&-|@°ì¢æå\0
1
é/Éajü£AJ÷1
2
âêÂÊbks¥BKS2
Second hex
-> 3
äëÄËcltACLT3
char
4
àèÀÈdmu©DMU4
5
áíÁÍenv§ENV5
6
ãîÃÎfow¶FOW6
7
}ï$Ïgpx¼GPX7
First hex char -> 01456789ABCDEF
8
çìÇÌhqy½HQY8
9
ñßÑ`irz¾IRZ9
A
#¤ø:«ª¡¬¯¹²³
Second hex
-> B
.Å,Æ»º¿|ôûÔÛ
char
C *<*%Øð{Яö~ÖÜ
D
()_'ý¸Ý¨òùÒÙ
E ;+;>=þ[Þ´óúÓÚ
F
!^?"±]®×õÿÕ
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
6. Save spooled file to the /APF3812Home/Work directory
This function provides a possibility to save a spool file to a folder. The file can then be attached
to an E-m ail and send to the support engineer or form s designer. The file can be restored with
m enu 7. Print Saved Spooled File from the /APF3812Home/W ork directory, and can be
used to define re-m apping in overlays or to solve support issues.
Save spooled file to the /APF3812Home/Work directory
Spooled file:
Job name
User
Job number
File name
Spool file no.
________
________
________
________
________
(no. / *ONLY / *LAST)
Name of output queue to search if spooled file is unknown:
Output queue . . . .
Library . . . . .
_________
__________
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Fill in the output queue nam e where the spool file resides and select with option 1. The spool
file details will autom atically be filled in. Following enter a nam e for the file.
378
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
7. Print Saved Spooled File from /APF3812Home/Work directory
This function provides a possibility to restore a spool file from a folder, which has originally
been saved through m enu 6. Save spooled File to the /APF3812Home/W ork directory.
Reprint Spooled File from the /APF3812Home/Work directory
Document name
F3=Exit
. . . .
____________
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
8. Print Resource X-reference
W hen selecting this option InterForm 400 will create a spooled file containing all resource cross
references in InterForm 400. The spooled file will be created on the output queue of the current
job. You can steer where it will be created e.g. by going to a com m and line and execute the
com m and:
CHGJOB OUTQ(<outq name>)
- prior to selection of this option. The CHGJOB com m and will change the default outq for the
current job.
You can also find the spooled file after execution (if it has not been printed out) if you from the
sam e job execute the com m and:
WRKJOB OPTION(*SPLF)
This will list spooled files created by the current job.
The cross reference list will list the following:
For all im ages, colors, PCL files, fonts etc. it will list in which lines in which overlays in what file
sets the resource is used.
If font num bers are used in overlay headers or extended page definitions, then these will also
be listed as *OVLHD and *EXTPAG in the 'used in' colum n.
All overlays are listed. If there is a reference to the overlay by use of an If..Then, you will see a
line with *CONDOVL stating the overlay and line num ber that refers to this overlay through an
if..then line. Overlays referring to the overlay with function 'S=Suboverlay' are listed with
*SUBOVL.
InterForm A/S 379
Inform ation inserted in autodownload will also be listed. Here you will be able to see what soft
font is downloaded with what font num ber and in which printer group(s) this is defined.
It will also list all user exit program s referenced, and list each place where they are referenced.
Apart from the spooled file m entioned above an additional spooled file is also created:
Display Spooled File
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Control . . . . .
Find . . . . . .
SAMPLE
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....8
InterForm 400
LAST USED LIST
30.01.12
14:20:05
Page
31
File set . . . . . . . :
SAMPLE
Description . . . . . :
InterForm 400 Samples
Overlay
Description
Last used
BLANK
Blank overlay
2012-01-30
FORM1
Prinserter sample DK envelopes FORM2
Prinserter sample DE envelopes IF400DEMO
InterForm 400 Demo Form
2012-01-30
PATTERNS
Pattern IDs
POSITIONS
Print SPLF with positions A4
RULER
Ruler
TEST
2011-05-23
DEMO
-
This spooled file is created with user data= ‘XREFLST4'. For each file set it lists all overlays
and the last used date. Please notice, that only the last used date is updated for the m ain
overlays only - any suboverlays (conditioned or unconditioned) will not get the ‘last used
date’ updated for a m erge.
9. Work with Journaling
The import function (see page 387) and the graphical designer (Refer to page 522) of
InterForm 400 ® requires journaling to be active for som e files in the APF3812 library.
The journal is used for logging any changes to the im portant InterForm 400 files in the
APF3812 library. The journal is used as a safety net m aking it possible to roll back changes.
Changes done via im port or via the graphical designer can even be rolled back via the m enu.
W e recom m end that you keep the default journal APFJRN in the InterForm 400 ® library
APF3812. If you wish to use an existing journal, type in the nam e and library of the journal. If
you do not want to use a journal leave these fields blank.
Norm ally you would need regularly to change the journal receiver, save the detached journal
receiver and then delete the old journal receiver, but the entries in the journal is usually fairly
lim ited and they are reset when doing an upgrade of InterForm 400, so this is norm ally not
needed.
For IBM i’s running with in a m irrored setup using e.g. Mim ix or sim ular you m ight want to add
journaling of all the files in the APF3812. Just rem em ber to use IMAGES(*BOTH) when
starting journaling. Refer to Appendix R on page 575 for special considerations when using a
m irrored system .
Notice: In order to undo changes the journal receivers has to be on the system at the tim e of
the undo.
380
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Journal menu
JRN001D
Select one of the following options:
1. Start journaling files in InterForm library APF3812
2. End journaling files in InterForm library APF3812
3. Delete journal and receivers in InterForm library APF3812
5. Work with changes
Option: _
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
If you select option 5. W ork with changes you will see the screen below:
Work with changes
JRN100D
Position to . . . . . .
Date
Type options, press Enter.
1=Rebuild to status before change
2=Rebuild to status after change
5=Display journal
8=Display information
Opt
Date
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
2013-03-08
F3=Exit
Time
17.18.11
17.18.16
17.18.19
17.18.24
17.18.27
17.18.30
17.18.32
17.18.33
17.18.36
17.18.37
17.18.39
17.18.40
F5=Refresh
Function
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
*IMPORT
F11=View 2
Resource
FUSS_AN
FUSS_KW
FUSS_MG
FUSS_SK
FUSS_SY
KOPF_AN
KOPF_KW
KOPF_MG
KOPF_SK
KOPF_SY
LOGO_DE_SW
LOGO_SK_SW
Type
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
*COLORIMG
More...
F12=Cancel
If you regret a change you can sim ply use option 1=Rebuild to status before change for the
changes listed and press Enter.
10. Display resource statistics
Select this option (on the service m enu) to view the used resources in InterForm 400: How
m any tim es each resourse is used and the tim e the resource was last used. Together with the
‘8. Print Resource X-reference’ option (or PRTXREF com m and) you have a great tool set to
overview the resources if you e.g. want to clean up old and unused resources. W hen you
select this option you will see this screen:
(W ait a bit while InterForm 400 is gathering the statistical data)
InterForm A/S 381
Display resource statistics
Position to . . . . . .
__________
USE100D
Type
Type options, press Enter.
5=Display detailed statistics
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Type
*AFCEXIT
*AFCOUTQ
*DIGISIGN
*EXPORT
*FINISH
*FINISH
*HLDSPLF
*IMPORT
*MOVSPLF
*OVERLAY
*OVERLAY
*OVERLAY
*PCDESIGN
F3=Exit
Sub type
*PDF
*EMAIL/FAX
*INSERT
*PCL
*PDF
*ZPL
F5=Refresh
Use count
18
170
3
7
10
6
246
21
1
4
298
18
57
Total pages
3247
1984
24
259
57127
46
Last used
2009-12-15
2010-03-04
2009-12-15
2010-03-04
2009-12-16
2009-12-15
2010-03-04
2010-03-04
2009-10-08
2010-03-03
2010-03-04
2010-02-16
2010-03-04
More...
F12=Cancel
If you select ‘5=Display detailed statistics’ for a resource type you can see the used objects of
the specific type, how m uch they are used and the date when they was last used:
M WARNING M
The ‘Last used’ date is NOT updated for suboverlays! (Neither conditioned nor unconditioned
suboverlays.)
Display resource statistics
Type . . . . . . . . :
Sub type . . . . . . :
USE110D
*AFCOUTQ
Type options, press Enter.
5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
Resource
AFC_INPUT1
EMAIL
PRTAKMF1_I
Qualifier
APF3812
QUSRSYS
QUSRSYS
Use count
141
18
11
Total pages
490
40
2717
Last used
2010-03-04
2009-12-16
2009-10-08
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
If you again use option 5=Display you can even see which users that has used the resource
and how m uch:
382
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Display resource statistics
Type . .
Sub type
Resource
Qualifier
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
USE120D
*OVERLAY
*PDF
IF400DEMO
SAMPLE
Press Enter to continue.
User
AFCOPER
HVE
KSE
Use count
5
10
71
Total pages
5
169
Last used
2009-12-15
2009-12-15
2010-03-04
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 383
21. Export of InterForm400 resources
This option is to enable users in distributing InterForm 400 ® resources i.e. by tape, SNDDST or
E-m ail. By using the Export function, resources are copied from InterForm 400 ® to an Export
library. The Export – and Im port libraries can be considered as being tem porary libraries, as
the resources copied to and from these 2 libraries, usually are relevant only for a certain
distribution.
All details of the export/im port feature are included in Appendix P on page 557.
The libraries (APFEXPORT and APFIMPORT) can be deleted when the distribution is
com pleted. For a com plete export you need to go through the options in this sequence:
1. Create empty export library APFEXPORT
2. Copy resources to export library
3. W ork with resources in export library (optional)
4. W ork with distributions
The options are described below:
Use option 1. Create empty export library APFEXPORT, to create an em pty im port library.
Work with export of InterForm 400 Resources
EXPORTD
System.......: INTER02
Version......: 2014.M01
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Create empty export library APFEXPORT
Copy resources to export library
Work with resources in export library
Work with distributions
Delete all resources from export library (except distributions)
Delete export library APFEXPORT (including all distributions)
8. Display resources in export library
Option
===> _
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
If you already have an old export library you can consider running either of these options first:
5. Delete all resources from export library (except distributions)
- or 6. Delete export library APFEXPORT (including all distributions)
Copy resources to export library.
This option gives you these options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Copy
Copy
Copy
Copy
all the resources
selected resources only
the resources used in already copied overlays
auto download defs and soft font m em bers for all copied fonts
The options are explained below:
1. Copy all the resources
Use this option to export all overlays, overlay selectors, fonts, soft fonts, im ages, palette
colors, form type tables, split definitions, sort definitions, PDF bookm arks, PDF em bedding
384
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
definitions, finish definitions, AFC definitions and auto download specifications. This should be
avoided for norm al support if possible as the export file can be quite large. Page 563 in
Appendix P lists the elem ents that cannot be exported/im ported.
2. Copy selected resources only
Use this option to selectively copy resources for export. You can e.g. export specific overlays
and then use option 3 and 4 to also export any resource referenced by these overlays. For
norm al support issues you should consider this option (followed by option 3 and 4 below).
3. Copy the resources used in already copied overlays
If you already have copied one or m ore overlays via option 2, then this will export any of these
resources, that are referenced by the overlay(s):
Overlay selectors, fonts, im ages and palette colors. It will not export any related form type
tables, soft fonts, autodownload specifications, finish definitions and AFC definitions. Any
related soft font and auto download specifications can be exported with option 4 below.
4. Copy auto dow nload defs and soft font mem bers for all copied fonts
This copies any auto download setup and any soft fonts to the export that are related to the
fonts, that are also m arked for export.
Copy InterForm 400 resources to export library
EXPORTD
Select one of the following resource types:
1. Overlay definitions
21. ZEBRA fonts
2. Font definitions
22. ZEBRA soft fonts
3. Soft fonts
23. ZEBRA images
4. Auto download definitions
5. Images
6. PCL-files
7. Selector definitions
8. Split definitions
9. Sort definitions
10. Finishing definitions
11. AFC definitions
12. Form type table
13. Palette colors
14. PDF bookmark definitions
15. PDF embedding definitions
Option
===>
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
If you select option 2 you can copy selected InterForm 400 ® resources to export like shown
above.
Note that when entering a specific overlay, only the definitions of the overlay are copied.
Any im ages, PCL-files, fonts etc. which the overlay definitions is referring to, has to be copied
separately e.g. by use of option ‘3. Copy the resources used in already copied overlays’ , which
will also copy any overlay selector referring to any of the exported overlays.
If you export a PCL/PDF line barcode (EAN, Code 39, code128 and interleaved 2 of 5) then a
barcode soft font will be added in the export distribution for support for older (pre 2014)
versions of InterForm 400. The soft font will be nam ed BARCDExxxx, where xxxx is the font
num ber.
M WARNING M
If you use option ‘3. Copy the resources used in already copied overlays’ the necessary soft
fonts will NOT be included. If you are using soft fonts you should also run option 4. Copy auto
download defs and soft font members for all copied fonts.
InterForm A/S 385
M WARNING M
Autodownload settings for PCL printer groups that does not include the output queue
*ALLPCL cannot be exported.
Work with resources in export library
W hen all selections have been m ade, you can verify that all relevant resources have been
copied to the export library, by using option 3. W ork with resources in export library, in the
export m enu. Here you can also chose to renam e the resources. Renam ing resources in the
export library will update referenced resources - please refer to Appendix P on page 557 for
details.
Work with distribution
This option is used to create a distribution file, which you need to send out the export.
Work with Distributions
EXP600D
Type options, press Enter.
1=Send savefile
4=Delete savefile and PC-file
5=Display savefile
9=Save to tape
11=Create PC-file in folder APF3812
Opt
__
Distribution
EXPORT.001
Description
Export of overlay IF400DEMO
Status
*BOTH
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
In this screen you will have an overview of existing distributions m ade.
Use F6 to create a new distribution.
Create Distribution
EXP610D
Type choices, press Enter.
Suffix . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . .
___
_______________________________________________
Create . . . . . . . . . .
_
1=Savefile only
2=Savefile and PC-file
Notice:
When you create a distribution all the current resources in the exportlibrary are copied to a savefile named EXPORT.xxx, where xxx is the suffix.
If you create a PC-file based on a distribution, it will be placed in the
/APF3812Home/Work directory, having the same name and content as the savefile.
The content of a distribution can not be changed later.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
You have the possibility of choosing conversion to a save-file only or both a save-file
and a PC-file. The suffix you enter is a way for you to separate the distribution from other
386
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
already created distributions. After you have entered the details for a particular distribution, a
save file will be created in the APFEXPORT library and optionally, a PC-file will be added to the
/APF3812Hom e/W ork directory.
You can now locate the export PC-file in the /APF3812Hom e/W ork directory with file nam e
“export.xxx”., This file can be send by e-m ail, to your consultant or to another InterForm 400 ®
site..
G NOTE G
It is possible to operate with m ore than one export/im port library at a tim e. Refer to Appendix
P on page 564 for m ore inform ation.
22. Import of InterForm400 Resources
Use this option to im port InterForm 400 ® resources. All details of the export/im port feature are
included in Appendix P on page 557.
Select option 1. Create empty APFIM PORT import library, to create an em pty im port library.
If you have an old im port library you should norm ally start a new im port by first deleting the
existing one (using option ‘5. Delete the APFIMPORT im port library’) before you create the new
im port library.
Work with import of InterForm 400 resources
Distribution
From system .
From version
From user . .
Description .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
EXPORT.TST
PMK250
2014.M01
KSE
test export from 2014M01
IMPORTD
System.......:
Import by . :
Date . . . . :
Time . . . . :
PMK250
KSE
2014-03-26
13:06
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Create APFIMPORT import library with empty files
Receive distribution into import library
Work with resources in import library
Transfer resources to production library
Delete the APFIMPORT import library
Display resources in import library
8. Start journaling
9. Work with changes
Option
===>
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
After the im port library has been created, use option 2. Receive distribution into import
library, to receive the distribution into the library. Select the required m ethod for receiving the
distribution.
3. Work with resources in import library
Upon having received the relevant InterForm 400 ® resources, you will be able to see the
various resources in the im port library, by using option 3. W ork with resources in import
library. Here you can also chose to renam e the resources. Renam ing resources in the im port
library will update referenced resources - please refer to Appendix P on page 561 for details.
Before transferring the resources in the im port library to the production library, you need to
start Journaling. This gives you the possibility of undoing the im port.
Note that if a resource i.e. a overlay called INVOICE is im ported, and a overlay also called
INVOICE already exists, this will be overwritten without further notice.
InterForm A/S 387
Journaling can be started by the option 8. Journaling in the Im port m enu.
If you should regret an Im port to the production library, use the option 9. W ork with changes.
Here you can also see and roll back any change of overlays uploaded from the InterForm 400 ®
graphical designer (Listed with function: *PC-SAVE).
Receive Distribution into Import Library
IMPORTD
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Receive
Receive
Receive
Receive
distribution
distribution
distribution
distribution
from
from
from
from
tape
network file
the /APF3812Home/Work directory
save file.
Option
===> _
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
4. Transfer resources to the production library
Work with import of InterForm 400 resources
Distribution
From system .
From version
From user . .
Description .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
EXPORT.TST
PMK250
2014.M01
KSE
test export from 2014M01
IMPORTD
System.......:
Import by . :
Date . . . . :
Time . . . . :
PMK250
KSE
2014-03-26
13:06
Select one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Create APFIMPORT import library with empty files
Receive distribution into import library
Work with resources in import library
Transfer resources to production library
Delete the APFIMPORT import library
Display resources in import library
8. Start journaling
9. Work with changes
Option
===>
F3=Exit
F6=Display messages
F12=Cancel
Entering the Im port m enu after having received the distribution file into the im port library, the
details of the distribution file will be stated in the top of the Im port m enu.
Selecting option 4. M ove resources to production library will give you an overview of the
resources ready to be m oved to the production library.
388
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Confirm move of all resources to production library
IMP820D
Press F10 to move all resources to production.
Press F3 or F12 to cancel.
Resource
SAMPLE/IF400DEMO
SAMPLE/RULER
Type
*OVERLAY
*OVERLAY
Notice
Exists
Exists
End
F3=Exit
F10=Move all resources to production
F12=Cancel
This screen will inform you if the overlays being m oved to the production library, already exists.
In this case you m ight want to renam e the overlays. W hen you press F10 InterForm 400 will
verify if the data base files are journaled before m ove the resources into production. If the files
are not journaled you can start the journaling via option ‘8. Start journaling’.
G NOTE G
If there is no printer group containing the *ALLPCL printer group at im port of PCL
autodownload settings, then such a printer group (nam ed *PCL) will be created during im port.
Sim ular to option 4 the option ‘6. Display resources in import library’ lists all the resources.
This option will however only list the objects with the option to print the list with F10.
As m entioned before accepting the m ove of resources will cause existing resources with the
sam e nam e to be overwritten.
Renam ing resources to be m oved to the production folder could be done under function
3. W orking with resources in import library.
In this exam ple, we have chosen to work with overlay definitions.
Work with File-sets in Import Library
Position to . . . . . .
IMP412D
File-set
Type options, press Enter.
1=Move to production
4=Delete
7=Rename file-set
12=Work with overlays in file-set
Opt
12
File-set
SAMPLE
Description
InterForm 400 Samples
Notice
Exists
End
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 389
Note: Renam ing e.g. file sets that already exists (using option 7. Renam e file set) will prevent
file sets from being overwritten.
Notice, however, that the users m ust be connected to the new file sets, in order to use the
overlays im ported.
Option 9. W ork with changes on the Im port m enu enables you to take advantage of the fact,
that every im port requires journaling of InterForm 400 ® files. Using this option you can e.g.
regret the last im port (*IMPORT) or changes done in the graphical designer (*PC-SAVE) and
roll the InterForm 400 ® back to the state prior to the im port. (Use e.g. option 1=Rebuild to
status before change on the W ork with changes m enu.
40. Install/upgrade InterWord 400
This option can be used for installing or upgrading InterW ord400 TM. This is done by installing a
PTF, which m ust be placed in the APF3812 folder.
You are prom pted for what PTF you want to install like option 50. Apply PTF from folder
APF3812. Enter the PTF num ber, that you want to install, press Enter and this screen below is
shown. Press F10 to confirm the install or upgrade of InterW ord400 TM.
Apply PTF from
folder
PTF number . . . . . . . :
. . . . :
PTF100D
2010
Press F10 to install this PTF,
press F3 or F12 to cancel.
PTF description
APF3812
or
Install InterWord
This PTF installs product InterWord
version
2.30.
400.
Library DCA400 will be created during installation of this
To enter InterWord issue the following
GO DCA400/INTERWORD
See InterWord 400 manual for more
F3=Exit
390
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
command:
information.
F10=Install
Version 2014
PTF.
PTF
F12=Cancel
50. Apply PTF from the /APF3812Home/PTFs directory
Apply PTF from the /APF3812Home/PTFs directory
Enter PTF-number . . . . . . .
PTF100D
_____
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
W ith this option you can load InterForm 400 ® PTF's from the /APF3812Hom e/PTFs directory.
These PTF's can be used to correct m inor problem s that will not result in new releases.
Enter the PTF num ber you have received and copied into the /APF3812Hom e/PTFs directory.
I.e. if the file was nam ed APF0015.PTF type 0015.
60. Install Swiftview at drive C:
W ith this option directory APF3812 is created on a PC`s C-drive and the Sview.exe file is
copied from System i directory /APF3812Hom e/View to the created C:\APF3812.
The drive letter on the PCs is configurable - Refer to page 300 for inform ation.
See further inform ation about the PCL-viewer, SwiftView on page 491.
70. Install InterForm Designer on your PC
This installs the InterForm 400 ® graphical designer on the C: drive of the PC. See page 522 for
the installation procedure of the graphical designer.
75. Prepare server to support InterForm Designer
This option starts the servers necessary for running the graphical designer. Refer to page 522
for m ore inform ation.
80. Install InterFax 400
In order to install InterFax400 you will need a CD in the CD-drive with Interfax included. Please
note that InterFax is not included in the norm al InterForm 400 installation Zip file. Refer to the
InterFax m anual for installation procedures. Contact your local InterForm 400 support to get a
trial copy of InterFax.
InterForm A/S 391
How to create PDF files
InterForm400 ® is capable of creating PDF output. This can be done using the CL-com m and,
APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF - Merge Spool File PDF. This com m and m erges a spool file with an
overlay or overlay selector like a norm al PCL m erge.
Note: You can also create PDF files with the PDF File naming finishing definition. Refer to
page 232 for m ore inform ation about this function.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule for InterForm 400.
W hen prom pting the com m and (with F4), all param eters can be seen when pressing F9.
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
InterForm 400 file set . .
Overlay name . . . . . . .
or Overlay Selector name .
Primary/Secondary set . .
Spooled file . . . . . . .
Job name . . . . . . . . .
User . . . . . . . . . .
Job number . . . . . . .
Spooled file number . . .
Code page . . . . . . . .
Unicode output . . . . . .
Color support . . . . . .
Bookmark definition name .
Embedding definition name
Signature Certificate . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. > KARTSET
.
KLICHE
.
SELNAM
.
VRSION
.
FILNVN
.
JOB
.
.
.
SPLNBR
.
CODPAG
.
UNICODEOUT
.
COLORSUP
.
BMKDEF
.
EMBDEF
.
CERTIFIC
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
__________
__________
__________
*PRI
*NONE_____
*_________
__________
______
*ONLY_
*INPUT
*INPUT
*YES
*NONE_____
*NONE
*NONE_____
Character value
Character value
Character value
*PRI, *SEC
Name, *NONE
Name, *
Name
000000-999999
Number,*ONLY,*LAST
Number, *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES,*PDFA..
*YES, *NO
Name, *NONE
Name, *NONE
Name, *NONE
More...
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Text Compression . . . . . . . . COMPRESS
PDF Title . . . . . . . . . . . TITLE
*NO
*NO, *YES
> KSE_TITLE
PDF Author . . . . . . . . . . . AUTHOR
> 'Kim Egekjær'
PDF Subject
> 'Just a subject'
. . . . . . . . . . PDFSUBJ
PDF Keywords . . . . . . . . . . KEYWORDS
> 'This is for extra text'
Output type . . . . . . . . . . OUTTYPE
To stream file . . . . . . . . . TOSTMF
*STMF
*STMF, *EMAIL, *VIEW
> '/apf3812home/work/file.pdf'
Filenaming definition name . . . NAMEDEF
Replace stream file . . . . . . REPLACE
*NONE
> *YES
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
392
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F5=Refresh
Version 2014
F12=Cancel
Name, *NONE
*NO, *YES, *NAMEDEF
More...
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
To attachment . . . . . . . . . . TOATTACH
_________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
To email address:
TOADR
_________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*NONE____________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . SUBJECT
*NONE____________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . MSG
*NONE__________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
...
*NONE, *STMF
Message stream file . . . . . . MSGSTMF
_______________________________
____________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Message variables . . . . . . . MSGVARS
____________________________________________
+ for more values
______________________________
End of line escape character . . MSGESCCHR
Mail text format . . . . . . . . MAILTXTFMT
Mail text adjustment . . . . . . MAILTXTADJ
*NONE_
*NONE,*FIXED,//,/%,/&
*TEXT___ *TEXT,*HTML,*HTMLRAW
*NONE__
*NONE,*CENTER,*RIGHT
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F13=How to use this display
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 393
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
From e-mail address:
FROMADR
*CURRENT________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Save e-mail . . . . . . . . . . SAVE
*NO_
*NO, *YES
Confirmation of delivery . . . . CFMDEL
*NO
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
CC e-mail address:
CC
________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*NONE_______________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
BCC e-mail address:
BCC
_______________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*NONE__________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
OutBox directory . . . . . . . . OUTBOXDIR
__________ Name, *CURUSER
Encrypt PDF file . . . . . . . . ENCRYPT
*NO_
*NO, *YES
Owner Password . . . . . . . . . OWNERPWD
__________________________________
_
User Password . . . . . . . . . USERPWD
__________________________________
_
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
394
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F5=Refresh
Version 2014
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Merge spooled file and overlay (MRGSPLFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
User Access Limitations
. . . . LIMITS
+ for more values
*NONE___
________
*NONE,*NOPRINT,*NOCOPY...
Additional Parameters
Primary target device
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
. . . . . PRITGTDEV
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
*PRT
*PRT, *DSP
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
If you want to send to an em ail group you should state ‘*GROUP’ as the ‘To e-m ail address’
and the nam e of the em ail group as the nam e of the receiver or in short:
TOADR(*GROUP MAIL_GRP), where MAIL_GRP is the nam e of the em ail group. The em ail
group m ust be written in capital letters.
Special param eters for this com m and include (listed in sequence as they appear):
COLORSUP
Specify if the PDF output is to be B/W or color.
BM KDEF
If wanted you can refer to a bookm ark definition and get bookm arks in
the created PDF file. See on page 277 how you create a bookm ark
definition. This value can also be determ ined by a used PDF file nam e
definition - refer to the description of the NAM EDEF param eter.
CERTIFIC
You can digitally sign the PDF file with this reference. For description of
digital signatures refer to the PDF security m odule for m ore inform ation.
This value can also be determ ined by a used PDF file nam e definition refer to the description of the NAM EDEF param eter.
COM PRESS
State *YES to com press the resulting PDF file. This will com press texts
in the PDF file thus m aking the PDF file sm aller.
OUTTYPE
Specify *EM AIL for creating an E-m ail with the PDF file as an attached
file, *STM F to create a PDF stream file in IFS or *VIEW to view the
result directly in Acrobat Reader (if associated with '.PDF').
InterForm A/S 395
396
TITLE, AUTHOR,
PDFSUBJ
and KEYW ORDS
These fields are extra keywords, that can be assigned for the PDF file.
These values can be seen if you click ‘File’ and ‘Properties’ in Acrobat
Reader (after opening the resulting pdf file):
TOSTM F
W hen creating a PDF file using the *STMF option on the OUTTYPE
param eter, you state where to place it and what to call it on the
TOSTM F param eter. E.g. if you state: /APF3812Hom e/DEMO.PDF you
create a file called DEMO.PDF in the APF3812Hom e directory. Use
*NAM EDEF to refer to the path and file nam e stated in the PDF file
nam ing definition stated in NAM EDEF. Rem em ber that files, that are
digitally signed cannot be created in QDLS.
NAM EDEF
If you insert a PDF file nam ing definition and use TOSTM F(*NAM EDEF)
then the inform ation in the PDF file nam ing definition will be used for the
bookm ark definition (BM KDEF), Signature certificate (CERTIFIC) and
encryption (ENCRYPT, OW NERPW D, USERPW D and LIM ITS) unless
these param eters have the value *NONE or have a specific value other
than blank.
REPLACE
States if the PDF file created is allowed to replace an existing PDF file.
*NAMEDEF refers to the REPLACE value of the PDF file nam ing
definition stated in the NAMEDEF param eter.
TOATTACH
If you are creating an E-m ail, the TOATTACH param eter states what to
call the attached file.
M SGSTM F
Either type in the contents of the e-m ail in the MSG param eter or type
*STM F in the M SG param eter and insert a stream file nam e here to use
instead. It m ust be the path and nam e of an .html file that is placed in
the IFS. The .htm l file can contain the variables *V1-*V9, that are
substituted with the data found in the M SGVARS param eter. The htm l
file m ust be utf-8 encoded.
M SGVARS
This list param eter can be used for defining the value of each variable
*V1-*V9 that can be substituted like described in MSGSTMF. The
variables are defined in num eric order i.e. the first value of M SGVARS
is used for *V1, the second for *V2 and so on..
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
M AILTXTADJ
The m ail text adjustm ent. The adjustm ent of the text in the MSG
param eter if used. Possible values are:
*NONE
The e-m ail text is not aligned.
*CENTER
The e-m ail text is aligned around the center.
*RIGHT
The e-m ail text is right adjusted.
FROM ADR
Specify the e-m ail address and nam e of the user, who is the sender of
the e-m ail. *CURRENT will retrieve the inform ation from directory entry
of the user running the current job.
CFM DEL
Confirm of delivery. Activate this to get a confirm ation e-m ail when the
receiver opens the e-m ail. Lotus Notes currently does not support this,
so it does not work if the receiver is running Lotus Notes.
OUTBOXDIR
Outbox directory (refers to a subdirectory inside /APF3812Mail/Outbox/
in the IFS). States the directory in which the outgoing e-m ails will be
stored. The directory will be created, if the directory does not exist. Use
the com m and APF3812/CLRMAILLOG to clean up the directory for old
e-m ails (cleans the used database as well). If you state *CURUSER the
directory will be nam ed the sam e as the user running the current job.
ENCRYPT
States if you want to encrypt the PDF file.
OW NERPW D
States the owner password of the PDF file. Requires that the
ENCRYPT param eter is *YES. W hen you open the file with this
password all is allowed. This is the sam e as 'Master password' in the
PDF file nam ing and E-m ail finishing definitions.
USERPW D
The user password can be used to open an encrypted PDF file with the
lim itations specified in the LIM ITS param eter
LIM ITS
This specifies the lim itations of the access to the PDF file when a user
opens the PDF file (with the USERPW D password). Possible values
are: *NOPRINT, *NOCOPY and *NOEDIT. Details for each value can
be found on page 224.
PRITGTDEV
The prim ary target device for the PDF file.
G NOTE G
Password protection and/or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of the Digital
Signature/PDF security m odule for InterForm 400.
The subject and message is used for the e-m ail. The End of line escape character
param eter states which characters are to be interpreted as an end-of-line code in the m essage
field (used only for e-m ails).
Resources that can be used for PDF output
If you want to insert im ages, you can insert TIFF im ages (B/W im ages) or color BM P and
JPEG im ages (color im ages) in the overlay. You can also insert PNG and GIF im ages from
IFS. But note, that you can only insert PNG and GIF im ages by inserting &&IMG *COLOR
com m ands in the m erged spool file (see page 440.).
Design elem ents entered in overlay design e.g. fram es, lines, shadings etc. are also supported
for PDF output.
PCL files and can not be used for PDF output (They are ignored if included in the overlay).
InterForm A/S 397
You can not com bine duplex overlays with a fixed back page overlay for PDF output. The fixed
back page overlay is not included in the PDF output.
Fonts used in PDF output
W hen referring to specific type faces which e.g. norm ally could be printer resident type faces,
the type faces are converted as follows:
Proportional Type faces (fonts) like 52, 4148, 4168, 16602, 24580 and 24607 are printed as
Arial.
Proportional Type faces (fonts) like 5, 4101, 4113, 4197, 16901, 24591, 24623, 24703 and
25093 are printed as Tim es New Rom an.
Courier is used for all fonts with fixed width.
If you want to use other type faces, you have to install the font as a True Type Font (TTF). See
page 322.
IFS directories used by MRGSPLFPDF
W hen using the MRGSPLFPDF com m and, a directory called APF3812Mail is created in IFS.
Inside the APF3812Mail directory another 3 directories are created:
APF3812M ail/Log
If you specify SAVE(*YES) in order to save the e-m ail, the e-m ail will be saved as an Outlook
m ail in this directory.
APF3812M ail/M ergeLog
In earlier versions of InterForm 400 ® a copy of each created PDF file was saved in this
directory. It is a good idea to clean up this directory.
APF3812M ail/OutBox
This directory holds the e-m ails, that can not be sent, if e.g. the Mail Server Fram ework is not
started. This can be started with the com m and: STRMSF.
APF3812M ail/PDFtem p
Directory for tem porary work files used when creating PDF files. Used files are autom atically
deleted.
Refer to page 519 for inform ation of how to enable SMTP on the System i.
Creating PDF/A Compliant PDF Files
If you want to archive PDF files for very long term archiving, then it can be a good idea to
create PDF files that are PDF/A com pliant, m aking it m ore likely that the PDF files can be
opened correctly in a very distant future.
To help you with that InterForm 400 also offers the ability to create PDF files that are PDF/A
com pliant. For an in dept description of PDF/A you can e.g. consult the site: www.pdfa.org
From the 2013 versions of InterForm 400 the PDF/A com pliant files are either PDF/A-2b or
PDF/A-3b com pliant. Earlier versions of InterForm 400 generated PDF/A-1b com pliant files.
The m ain differences between PDF/A-1b and PDF/A-2b (and PDF/A-3b) are:
398
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
•
•
•
•
The new form ats are generated in the PDF 1.7 form at, which m eans, that the PDF/A
files can be opened by e.g. Acrobat Reader 8 and newer. Pre-2013 versions
generated PDF/A files in the PDF 1.4 form at, which can be opened with e.g. Acrobat
Reader 5 and newer.
PDF/A-3b includes the possibility to em bed non-PDF files.
The PDF/A files created in version 2013 and future versions are a bit sm aller
com pared to the pre-2013 versions.
The new form ats has other advantages e.g. supporting layers of im ages.
If you com bine PDF/A with em bedded files (described in Appendix U on page 583) The
PDF/A files will be PDF/A-3b com pliant.
The Requirements
•
Before you can create PDF files that are PDF/A com pliant, you will need to install a
unicode soft font. The unicode soft font is installed as a TTF (True Type Font) as
described on page 323.
•
You need to link all used font num bers with a unicode soft font for the *PDF printer
group in Autodownload (in the font m enu) as shown on page 325.
Rem em ber that even the font num ber referenced on the header of the overlays also
need be linked with a unicode soft font in InterForm 400:
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
Overlay name
PDFA
Overlay text
Line spacing
Rotation
Extra left margin
positions
Maximum number of
print positions
Extra blank lines
on top
Font
Extended page def.
Drawer / Papertype
Paper Size
Pages per side
Copy management
PDF/A demo overlay
040
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
000
(*INPUT, 0, 90, 180, 270)
0
(0-99)
378
(1-378)
0
9900
N
*PRINTER
1
1
N
(0-99)
*INPUT, fontnumber
F4=List
(Y N)
(*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-256, Name)
F4=List
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F13=Set view/print parameters
F11=Delete this overlay
F14=View
F18=DSPSPLF
F4=List
(Y N)
F12=Cancel
F19=DSPPFM
InterForm A/S 399
•
You will also need to specify Unicode Output=*PDFA, when you m erge (with a
spooled file), as shown on page 161, when using the PDF file nam ing definition, and
with UNICODEOUT(*PDFA) as indicated on page 392, on the M RGSPLFPDF
com m and.
•
It is not allow ed to encrypt a PDF/A file, so it is not possible to encrypt these files.
(The PDF Security m odule is required for encryption).
The Result
W hen you open a PDF/A com pliant PDF file, you will see this in Acrobat Reader:
- indicating that the PDF file is PDF/A com pliant.
400
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix A - Installation
System Requirements
Your System i m ust run at least OS/400 version 5 release 3 m odification 0 or newer.
Disk space required for InterForm 400 is 500 Mb not including additional m odules (e.g.
InterW ord400, Interfax400..). During install additional 400 Mb storage is required for a
tem porary save file.
The printers which are used with the InterForm 400 ® system should be configured as 3812
m odel 1 (non-IPDS). Auto-configuration will, on m ost protocol converters for HP printers or
com patibles, result in a 5219 device definition. This will bring som e lim itations to the system ,
and if the protocol converter can not be configured to report to the System i as a 3812 device it
is recom m ended to m ake the device description m anually (see page 414) and disable autoconfiguration on the system .
Only exception to the rule about configuring as a 3812 is when the printer port of a 3197
display station is used. In this case the configuration should be for a 4214.
First Time Installation
The system is delivered either as a zip file.
It is recom m ended that you follow the steps described in the Getting Started section on page
26.
The End User License Agreement
During the installation you will be asked to accept the End User License Agreem ent (EULA).
After the installation you can at any tim e view this license via the InterForm 400 by selecting
‘70. Configuration and licences’ from the InterForm 400 Main Menu followed by option ‘60.
Display InterForm 400 End User License Agreem ent’. Rem em ber to press <Page Down> to
view the com plete license agreem ent.
License Codes
The license code can be entered by selecting ‘70. Configuration and licences’ followed by
‘50. License Information’ from the InterForm 400 ® M ain menu.
To supply you with a license code you need to provide the serial number, the model of your
iSeries and feature code (DSPSYSVAL QPRCFEAT)..
This inform ation can be displayed in option 50. License Information in the InterForm 400 ®
Configuration menu:
InterForm A/S 401
Work with licence information
InterForm 400 version
Model / Feature . . .
Serial number . . . .
Operating system . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
LIC350D
2013.M01
270 22A2
65BD1BB
V5R3M000
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change 5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
_
License code
Production key
Test key
Mirroring key-1
Mirroring key-2
F3=Exit
Not applied
Not applied
Not applied
F12=Cancel
Use option 5=Display to display the current license code. If you are m irroring the m achine and
thus wants to insert a license code for the other serial num ber you can insert the license code
for your m irroring m achine as either Mirroring key-1 or Mirroring key-2.
Enclose a printout of this screen when ordering a production code, or write the first five lines of
inform ation on your purchase order. Use “2=Change” for one of the license codes and paste
the license code into this screen and press Enter.
InterForm 400 can run a perm anent code and a tem porary code sim ultaneously: W hen the
tem porary code runs out, InterForm 400 will fall back to the perm anent code.
Release Update
M WARNING M
If your current InterForm400 ® is configured as a light version (the text LIGHT version will be
displayed in the heading of the InterForm400 ® main menu) the AFC-definitions AFC_INPUT1
and AFC_INPUT2 will be preserved. If your current InterForm400 ® configured as a test or
production version (the text LIGHT version is not displayed in the heading of the
InterForm400 main menu) the AFC-definitions AFC_INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2 will be
overwritten by the default definitions of the InterForm400 ® demo.
G NOTE G
It is advised to read the rem arks on page 46 if you intend to upgrade from a pre 2007
version.
G NOTE G
During upgrade the directory ‘/APF3812Hom e/lib’ (or ‘/IASPDEV/APF3812Hom e/lib’ if you are
running iASP) will be renam ed into ‘APF3812Hom e/lib.OLD.version’. Refer to page 26 for
additional inform ation about iASP support.
W hen you export any of the line barcodes EANxx, Code128, Code39 and Interleaved 2 of 5
(barcodes based on soft fonts for PCL), then a soft font is added in the export library for
backwards com patibility. The barcode soft font is nam ed BARCDExxxx, where xxxx is the font
num ber.
Important notice regarding barcodes: During upgrades from pre 2014 versions all line
barcodes (that are based on soft fonts) like EANxx, Code128, Code39 and Interleaved 2 of 5
402
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
are all converted into the new, editable form at. The settings of the new barcodes are
determ ined in this way:
1.
If any soft font is linked to a barcode font num ber, then the soft font settings has
the priory for the barcode settings.
2.
If no soft font is linked to the barcode font num ber, the font number settings are used.
This m eans, that if som eone has changed the font num m er settings (height/width)
without generating a new soft font (which is a very bad idea), then the PDF and PCL
result will be different in the pre 2014 versions. After the upgrade the PCL output w ill
be unchanged and the PDF output will after the upgrade adapt to the PCL result
- if a barcode soft font is found.
Norm ally you upgrade InterForm 400 via an installation file found on our download site. You
norm ally then just unzip the file and run the RSTLIBPC.EXE file as described on page 28. An
alternative way to restore the APF3812NEW library is also shown here
After the restore of the APF3812NEW library you start the upgrade like the first tim e
installation with the com m and: APF3812NEW /APF3812NEW and this will follow:
The first screen inform s you that any objects in the QTEMP library of the installation/upgrade
job will be deleted (confirm with ‘G’ for ‘Go’):
Display Program Messages
Job 264723/KSE/QPADEV000B started on 28/03/14 at 08:35:43 in subsystem QBASE
Library QTEMP will be cleared. (C G).
Type reply, press Enter.
Reply . . . G
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The screen below will only appear if you have added journaling of extra objects in the journal
APF3812/APFJRN. The screen will show a list of any objects, that are norm ally not journaled
in InterForm 400:
InterForm A/S 403
Objects journaled to APF3812/APFJRN prevents upgrade.
JRN440D
Please end journaling to be able to upgrade. To end journaling use one or
more of the following commands: ENDJRN, ENDJRNPF and/or ENDJRNOBJ.
Press Enter to continue.
Type
*FILE
Object
APF3812/APFLCKP
End
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you see the screen above you are probably trying to upgrade InterForm 400 on a m irrored
m achine, where the journal is used for replicating changes. W hat you need to do is to end
journaling for each object m entioned above e.g. with the com m ands:
ENDJRN
ENDJRNPF
ENDJRNOBJ
Refer to page 576 for m ore inform ation of how to solve this. After ending journaling you need
to restart the installation or upgrade again with the com m and APF3812NEW /APF3812NEW .
Initially the End User License Agreem ent is shown (press <Page Down> to view it all). Press
F16 to accept this agreem ent.
InterForm 400 ® then tests if any user exit program s called by InterForm 400 ® are not owned by
QSECOFR (They m ust be owned by QSECOFR because of security). If any such program s
are called from the current InterForm 400 ® installation they are listed below:
(You will not see the screen, if all is OK).
System . . : INTER03
******************************************************************************
*
Security changes required
*
*
*
* Owner of all InterForm exit programs must be changed to QSECOFR
*
*
*
* Press F10 to change owner to QSECOFR.
*
* Press F3 or F12 to cancel.
*
*
*
******************************************************************************
Program
TEST_AUT
Library
KSE
Description
Sample source for a AFC function-8 program
Bottom
F3=Exit
F10=Change owner to QSECOFR
F12=Cancel
You m ust confirm the change of object owner for all the program s with F10 before the
installation proceeds.
404
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
You are then prom pted to choose your preferred language for the installation:
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER02
DE: Wählen Sie bitte eine Sprache aus, während verwendet zu werden installieren
Eingabetaste --> Weiter
DK: Vælg sprog for instruktioner under denne installation.
Tryk på Enter for at fortsætte.
ES: Seleccione por favor un lenguaje para ser utilizado durante instalan.
Pulse Intro para continuar.
FR: Veuillez choisir la langue à utiliser pendant l'installation.
Appuyez sur ENTREE pour continuer.
EN: Please select a language to be used during install.
Press Enter to continue.
PT: Favor selecionar uma língua a ser usada durante a instalação.
Aperte Enter para continuar.
EN
DE=Deutsch, DK=Dansk, EN=English,
ES=Españoles, FR=Français, PT=Português
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The Installation will autom atically detect if a version of InterForm 400 ® is on the system , and if
so, the following screen will be displayed:
INS0104
InterForm 400 version 2014M01
INTER02
A previous version of InterForm 400 is currently installed.
Current version
Library
. . . . . . :
2013M04
. . . . . . . . . . :
APF3812
Press Enter to continue.
Following you will be prom pted for entry of the InterForm 400 ® license code - unless your
m achine is a known m achine by the installation program , then it will know the license code
and just proceed. If you enter a code here it will be validated. You can also leave it blank, but
then you cannot use InterForm 400 before a valid code has been entered.
InterForm A/S 405
Work with licence information
InterForm 400 version
Model / Feature . . .
Serial number . . . .
Operating system . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
LIC350D
2014.M01
E4A 5633
065DE34
V5R3M000
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change 5=Display
Opt
_
_
_
_
License code
Production key
Test key
Mirroring key-1
Mirroring key-2
F3=Exit
Not applied
Not applied
Not applied
F12=Cancel
In the following screen you can set the preferred language used in InterForm 400. The
language can be changed later if needed. This is done by option 2 at the Administration menu
to change the global settings for InterForm 400 ® or use option 4 to select language for specific
InterForm 400 ® users.
Note:
InterForm 400 ® CL com m ands like MRGSPLFPDF, APFEDTPRT etc. will be installed
in the language chosen here, and can not be changed unless a re-installation is
m ade.
INS0121
InterForm 400 version 2014M01
INTER03
Select primary language, press Enter.
Primary language . . . . . . .
EN
Current value
EN
. . . . . . . :
DE=Deutsch, DK=Dansk, EN=English,
ES=Españoles, FR=Français, PT=Português
Primary language is used for:
1. The language of commands.
2. The language of displays.
Notice:
Language of commands can only be selected during install.
Primary language can be changed at the administration menu option 2.
If InterArchive400 or InterW ord400 is installed and a newer version is included InterForm 400
will now also upgrade InterArchive400 and/or InterW ord400: (Press F10=Confirm to proceed).
406
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
INS0137
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
Note. InterWord400 400 will be upgraded during this installation
An active version of InterWord 400 has been found and will be upgraded.
InterWord 400 cannot be used during the installation so make sure
all users have logget out of InterWord 400.
Press F10 to accept and continue installation.
Press F3 to abort installation or press F12 to return to previous display.
F3=Exit
F10=Confirm
F12=Cancel
It is recom m end to use the journal APFJRN in library APF3812.
This journal will be created during install, if used.
If you select another journal, then this journal m ust already exist.
INS0122
InterForm 400 version 2014M01
INTER03
Select journal, press Enter.
Journal . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
APFJRN
APF3812
Current journal . . . . . . :
Library . . . . . . . . . .
APFJRN
APF3812
If a journal is selected, changes are recorded to a journal receiver.
It is recommend to use the journal APFJRN in library APF3812.
This journal will be created during install, if used.
If you select a journal in a other library this journal must already exist.
Since the installation is an upgrade you have the possibility to chose the Installation Method.
The Installation Method lets you decide if you want a warning before the installation ends the
subsystem AUTO_FORM and renam es the existing APF3812 library to APF3812OLD. The
InterForm 400 TM system can be used as norm al until this takes place and thus reducing down
tim e.
Select option 1 if no users will need InterForm 400 ® until the installation is com plete.
Select option 2 if InterForm 400 ® is in use while the upgrade is taking place. Then inform the
InterForm 400 ® users to leave InterForm 400 ® before pressing F10 to continue when the
Confirm update of InterForm screen appears.
InterForm A/S 407
INS0123
InterForm 400 version 2014M01
INTER03
Select installation method, press Enter.
Installation method
. . . . .
2
1=Rename without warning
2=Rename with warning
During install the library APF3812 will be reanmed APF3812OLD.
For method 2 a display will be shown before the library is renamed and
subsystem AUTO_FORM will be ended.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Select whether to restart the running InterForm 400 subsystem s autom atically when installation
is com plete. (Only the running subsystem s will be suggested.)
INS0124
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
INTER03
Select AFC subsystem start option, press Enter.
Start subsystems . . . . . . .
·
·
·
·
1
1=Start subsystems
2=Do not start subsystems
AUTO_FORM
OSCCTL
MAILINTER
WEBINTER
Select whether to start subsystem AUTO_FORM automatically when
installation is complete.
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If you selected option 2 for Installation Method the following screen will be shown when
InterForm 400 ® is ready to com plete the release update. Press F10 when you are ready to
com plete the installation
Press F10 to begin the upgrade
INS0129
InterForm 400 version 2014.M01
Start installation with selected options.
Device . . . . .
Category . . .
ASP device . . .
License type . .
Licensed modules
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
APF3812NEW
*LIB
*SYSASP
*Test
Primary language . .
Journal . . . . . .
Library . . . . .
Installation method
Start AFC . . . . .
Current version . .
Library . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
EN
APFJRN
APF3812
1=Rename without warning
1=Start subsystem
2008.M525
APF3812
Press F10 to install.
F3=Exit
408
F10=Start installation
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
F12=Cancel
INTER03
Note:
If you had any spooled files in any output queues in the library APF3812 before the
update took place these spooled files will now reside in output queues in library
APF3812OLD having the sam e nam e as the original output queues.
You should keep the old InterForm 400 ® library (APF3812OLD) on the system until
you are sure that you have tested that everything operates to your satisfaction with
the new version of InterForm 400 ®.
J TIP J
W hen upgrading InterForm400 the security settings of the APF3812/IMPORTC and
APF3812/EXPORTC programs will be copied onto the new version. This means that if you
have changed the programs so normal users are allowed to export/import, then it will also be
possible after the upgrade.
InterForm A/S 409
Upgrade remote sites
If the IBM i is placed on a rem ote network you can consider to upload the save file prior to the
installation instead of using the RSTLIBPC.EXE file. Refer to page 28 for details.
M WARNING M
The command APF3812NEW will delete all overlays in file-set SAMPLE and copy new
sample overlays into this file-set. If you have created overlays in file-set SAMPLE you should
copy them to another file-set prior to the following. Also changes made to AFC-definitions in
AFC-job/queue AFC_INPUT1 will be overwritten by the default definitions of the
InterForm400 ® demo.
M WARNING M
Do not place any user objects like output queues or programs in the APF3812 library. They
will not be copied to the new APF3812 library as a part of the upgrade.
Relations to Other Applications
The InterForm 400 ® system is developed for co-existence with other applications. Note the
following:
410
•
The InterForm 400 ® system does not change the library-list, and it is not necessary to
have the library APF3812 in the library list.
•
Do not include the apf3812 library in the system library list as this will cause a
problem when you do an upgrade of InterForm 400 later. (The new version is restored
into a new library).
•
You should not place any objects in the APF3812 library as this library is exchanged
when upgrading InterForm 400 ®. (Only InterForm 400 ® resources are copied to the
new APF3812 library).
•
The InterForm 400 ® system does not change local data areas.
•
If the InterForm 400 ® system is called from another system the system does not SIGN
OFF, instead it returns to the calling program (APF3812/APFMENU is not the initial
program of the user)
•
If InterForm 400 ® is running as a group job, the InterForm 400 ® m ain m enu will show
that you can suspend the InterForm 400 ® system by pressing the ATTN-button.
•
The system m ay create files in library QTEMP.
•
An abnorm al term ination will never harm the InterForm 400 ® system .
•
InterForm 400 is using the QPRINT system printer file. A few special values m ay have
side effects. It is e.g. advised not to have SHARE(*YES) on this printer file as this will
cause problem s for e.g. the e-m ail finishing definitions.
•
You can integrate functions (via the attention/escape key) into other interactive
applications without having the source code of these. See how on page 568.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Performance
Printing
InterForm 400 ® generates very com pact PCL code.
You will notice that using large im ages can increase the tim e to download the m erged spool
files to printers.
If printing m ultiple pages the system m akes extensive use of PCL m acros, which are stored in
the printer and called for all pages in the spool entry. If a paper jam occurs, and the printer
loose its resources, the m acros will be placed in the printer again as the spool entry is
released again.
W hen using im ported PC form s (PCL files, see page 360) it will be the application producing
the PCL file which is decisive for the size. Im ported PCL files will also be loaded as PCL
m acros as described above.
Som e sm aller HP printers (e.g. HP2015) have only lim ited font support for PCL5 (Courier and
Tim es New Rom an). You can get around that problem either by adding a font dim m m odule in
the printer or by installing a True Type Font in InterForm 400 and specify auto download for this
printer.
Processing
It is difficult to calculate the exact processor tim e consum ption of the system .
In general the m ost process dem anding operations of the system is to calculate right
adjustm ent of proportional spaced fonts, and com plex conditional search routines.
Adding overlay elem ents like fram es, lines, im ages and PCL files requires a m inim um of
processing.
J TIP J
If the printer is PCL5 capable (most are nowadays) then create only barcode soft fonts for
PCL5 (instead of PCL4). They will print out quicker.
J TIP J
W hen importing TIF images then convert the file to PCL5. It will print out quicker and can then
also be used for PDF output. If the imported image needs to be reversed, then reverse when
importing it instead of reversing it in overlay design.
InterForm A/S 411
Appendix B - Attaching Printers to the iSeries
This chapter provides inform ation on how to configure the physical attachm ent of HP
com patible Laser printers to your System i network.
Note: Below it is proposed to change the system value, QAUTOCFG. This change m ay cause
problem s in certain rare setups. Rem em ber always to have the approval of your System i
responsible before changing any system value.
Solving problems with missing resources in print out
In som e rare situations you m ight get a printed result, were the last of the print out is only plain
text without any graphics.
Two scenarios could result in this:
Scenario 1: If the printer runs out of paper you could get this result if you are using a printer
device with the default setting: PRTERRMSG(*INQ). The recom m ended value is
PRTERRM SG(*INFO).
Scenario 2: If you send a large spooled file to the printer, then the tim e interval between each
tim e that the IBM i and the printer ‘talk together’ is likely to be longer. In such a situation the
risk of a tim e out (in the m iddle of a spooled file) is larger - i.e. the printer has considered that
since it has not heard from the IBM i for a long tim e, then the com m unation has failed - or
there is no m ore to print, so it prints whatever is in the buffer and deletes any m acros
containing the graphics. W hen the rem inder of the print out arrives that will then be printed out
as plain text. To avoid this you can increase the time-out on the printers netw ork settings.
The printer settings can norm ally be changed via a browser:
A value of at least 15 seconds is recom m ended.
Attachment Methods
Most m odern laser printers are designed for operation with an MS-W indows platform and is
equipped with a Parallel Centronics port. Most of these printers understands HP-PCL5 which
412
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
is an ASCII based print language. In order for the printer to operate on the System i a physical
and logical protocol conversion m ust be used.
The attachm ent of printers can be m ade by any of the following m ethods:
!
Twinax to Centronics protocol converter (5219/3812 SCS com patible)
!
Printer port of a 5250 Term inal
!
Printer port of a PC with System i printer session capabilities (ASCII
transparency com patible)
!
Internal or external LAN Print Server supporting TCP/IP LPD, TN5250E or
Lexlink (Lexlink connection is not explained in this m anual)
!
Other attachm ent which can print through a server receiving ASCII print data
from the System i.
InterForm 400 ® contains an EBCDIC to ASCII conversion program i.e. the setup of Host Print
Transform is not used for m erged InterForm 400 spooled files.
Attaching through a Twinax Protocol Converter
The printer can be attached through any protocol converter em ulating an IBM SCS printer and
which understands the ASCII transparency SCS com m and (03h). This com m and is a standard
feature according to the 5250 attachm ent standard, and should be supported by m ost
interfaces em ulating 5219 or 3812.
The interface should preferably be configured to the system as 3812 m odel 1 SCS Printer
device. If another SCS device description (eg. 4214) is specified enabling host print transform
will allow ASCII transparency to be sent to this device as well. Refer to section Attaching
through a 5250 Terminal.
System Configuration by Auto Configuration
The easiest way to create the device description for the protocol converter is using Auto
Configuration.
1.
Enable Auto Configuration with the following CL com m and.
CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL(QAUTOCFG) VALUE(‘1')
2.
An available Twinax device address (0-6) should be provided by the system
adm inistrator. Follow the instructions of your protocol converter in order to alter this
switch setting.
3.
Attach the protocol converter to the Twinax network and power it on. After a while a
printer device and an output queue is created on the system . The nam e of the device
and the queue will be identical and will norm ally have a notation like “PRT05" or
“PRT010305". Type the following com m and and scroll to locate the new printer
device:
WRKDEVD *PRT
4.
The device will indicate the text “Created by auto configuration”. Use option 5 to
display the device description. Verify that the device type is 3812. If it indicates 5219
then proceed with section Changing device description from 5219 to 3812.
5.
If the device indicates a 3812 m odel 1 you just need to start the printer writer:
STRPRTWTR PRTXXX
InterForm A/S 413
6.
Go to section Print font reference list for testing the connection
7.
Note that if Auto Configuration is enabled on the System i the protocol converter
m ight change the device description back to 5219 the next tim e it is powered ON.
Disable auto configuration to prevent this problem :
CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL(QAUTOCFG) VALUE(‘0')
Configuring a Printer Device Manually
The following describes how to create a new device without the use of Auto Configuration.
1.
The following inform ation for the device m ust be provided by the system
adm inistrator: Port Num ber (0-7), the Switch setting (0-6) and the Attached
controller (CTL0x).
2.
Make sure Auto configuration is disabled by the following CL com m and.
CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL(QAUTOCFG) VALUE(‘0')
3.
Follow the instructions of your protocol converter in order to set the Twinax address
switch setting (0-6).
4.
Attach the protocol converter to the Twinax network and power it ON.
5.
The following CL com m and will create a new device description called PRTXXX for a
3812 m odel 1 on port 2 switch setting 3 and controller CTL01.
CRTDEVPRT DEVD(PRTXXX) DEVCLS(*LCL) TYPE(3812)
MODEL(1) PORT(2) SWTSET(3) CTL(CTL01) FONT(11)
If you are not able to fit the entire com m and on the com m and line, you can prom pt
the com m and CRTDEVPRT with F4 and fill in the rest.
6.
Vary on the device with the following com m and
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(PRTXXX) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*ON)
7.
Start the printer writer with the following com m and:
STRPRTWTR DEV(PRTXXX)
8.
Note that if Auto Configuration is enabled on the System i the protocol converter
m ight change the device description back to 5219 the next tim e it is powered ON.
Disable auto configuration to prevent this problem :
CHGSYSVAL SYSVAL(QAUTOCFG) VALUE(‘0')
Changing Device Description from 5219 to 3812
In order to change a device description it is necessary to delete the device description for the
Twinax attached printer em ulating 5219, and create a new description for a 3812 m odel 1. In
the following we assum e the nam e of the device to be PRTXXX.
1.
First you m ust determ ine the controller num ber, the port num ber and the device
address of the existing 5219 device. The following CL com m and will display the
existing device description:
DSPDEVD PRTXXX
414
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Display Device Description
Device description . . . . . . . . :
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :
Category of device . . . . . . . . :
PRTXXX
*BASIC
*PRT
Device Class . . . . . . .
Device type . . . . . . .
Device model . . . . . . .
Advanced function printing
Port number . . . . . . .
Switch setting . . . . . .
Online at IPL . . . . . .
Attached controller . . .
Font:
Identifier . . . . . . .
Point size . . . . . . .
Form feed . . . . . . . .
*LCL
5219
D2
*NO
2
3
*YES
CTL01
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
. . . . :
. . . . :
. . . . :
INTER01
16.01.11 09.27.57
011
*NONE
*AUTOCUT
Press Enter to continue
F3=Exit
F11=Display keywords
F12=Cancel
Make a note of the Port Num ber (2), the Switch setting (3) and the Attached
controller (CTL01).
2.
In order to m ake changes or delete the device description you m ust end the printer
writer PRTXXX. The following com m and will end the writer im m ediately:
ENDWTR WTR(PRTXXX) OPTION(*IMMED)
3.
Now you m ust vary off the device by the following com m and:
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(PRTXXX) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*OFF)
4.
You are now able to delete the 5219 device description by this com m and:
DLTDEVD DEVD(PRTXXX)
5.
Continue from step 5 in the previous section, but use the controller num ber, port and
address settings from the old device description:
InterForm A/S 415
Attaching through a TCP/IP Raw Socket (Port 9100/3700)
Som e LAN Print Servers from e.g. HP, Lexm ark, Kyocera and IBM offer the possibility of
attaching through a raw TCP/IP socket, which enables the host to com m unicate bidirectionally
with the printer using HP PJL. Support for this print m ethod was introduced with OS/400 V3R2
and V4R1. The advantage of this m ethod com pared to standard LPD printing, is that the host
receives status reply from the printer.
1.
The following inform ation for the device m ust be provided by the system
adm inistrator: IP address and Port Num ber (m ost print servers uses port 9100 as
raw socket (HP, Lexm ark and Kyocera), while IBM Print Servers uses port 3700 or
2501. Consult the user m anual of your IBM printer for correct port no..
2.
The following CL com m and will create a new device description called PRTXXX for a
3812 m odel 1 on port 9100 and IP address: 222.2.1.235.
CRTDEVPRT DEVD(PRTXXX) DEVCLS(*LAN) TYPE(3812)
MODEL(1) LANATTACH(*IP) PORT(9100) FONT(11)
FORMFEED(*AUTOCUT) PARITY(*NONE) STOPBITS(1)
TRANSFORM(*YES) MFRTYPMDL (*HP4 )
RMTLOCNAME('222.2.1.235') SYSDRVPGM(*HPPJLDRV)
PRTERRMSG(*INFO)
If you are not able to fit the entire com m and on the com m and line, you can prom pt
the com m and CRTDEVPRT with F4 and fill in the rest.
J TIP J
It is a good idea (but not necessary) to specify PRTERRMSG(*INFO). This value will make
the printer job automatically recover from a message if possible. if e.g. the printer runs out of
paper the printer job halts with an error. W hen you add paper the printer job will detect this and
‘reply’ to the message automatically.
See a list of som e of the possible port num bers at this site:
http://www-912.ibm.com/s_dir/slkbase.nsf/1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e/94e73364f979e388862569030071c398?OpenDocument&ExpandSection=3&Highlight=0,printing,port,number#_Section3
3.
Vary on the device with the following com m and
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(PRTXXX) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*ON)
1.
Start the printer writer with the following com m and:
STRPRTWTR DEV(PRTXXX)
Attaching through a 5250 Terminal
A 5250 term inal with a printer port is in reality working as a Twinax protocol converter. The
printer session has a dedicated device address which corresponds to a printer device
description on the System i. You should therefore follow the instructions in section Attaching
through a Tw inax protocol converter.
The requirem ent to the printer session of a 5250 term inal is that it understands ASCII
transparency. This is supported by term inals such as IBM 3197, IBM 3477 and IBM 3487.
Other brands like Mem orex Telex will in m ost cases also work. Consult the docum entation of
the term inal or your agent for further inform ation.
In m ost cases the term inal will em ulate either a 5219 or 3812 SCS printer. Som e m ay only
provide a 4214 em ulation which will require Host print transform to be enabled on the system
in order for ASCII transparency to be transm itted.
416
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
In case the printer session of your term inal configures as eg. a 4214 you should perform the
following steps to enable Host Print Transform for the device. Note that Host Print Transform
can be enabled for any SCS printer device description including 5219 and 3812.
InterForm 400 ® m akes the protocol transform ation itself which m eans IBM Host Print
Transform will only be interpreting the ASCII transparency com m and, thereby preventing Host
Print Transform to consum e processor power.
Enabling Host Print Transform on an existing Printer Device Description
This procedure will work for any existing SCS printer device description:
1.
In order to m ake changes to the device description you m ust end the printer writer
PRTXXX. The following com m and will end the writer im m ediately:
ENDWTR WTR(PRTXXX) OPTION(*IMMED)
2.
Now you m ust vary off the device by the following com m and:
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(PRTXXX) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*OFF)
3.
The following CL com m and will enable host print transform :
CHGDEVPRT DEVD(PRTXXX) TRANSFORM(*YES) MFRTYPMDL(*HP4)
Note that the choice of m anufacturer/m odel (MFRTYPMDL) is indifferent for
InterForm 400 ® as it controls the protocol conversion itself. Only printing not controlled
by InterForm 400 ® will be form atted by Host Print Transform . For this type of printing
the choice of m anufacturer/m odel should be *HP4
4.
You can now vary on the device
VRYCFG CFGOBJ(PRTXXX) CFGTYPE(*DEV) STATUS(*ON)
5.
Start the printer writer again by the following com m and:
STRPRTWTR DEV(PRTXXX)
Attaching through a PC Printer Port
If your PC em ulates a 5250 Twinax term inal through a Twinax adapter card you should consult
your docum entation for setting up a Printer session. Refer to the section Attaching through a
5250 Terminal for configuring the printer session to the System i.
iSeries Access/400
The following steps will take you through how to configure a printer em ulation on a PC with
iSeries Access.
1. First, ensure the PC printer, m ost likely on LPT1, is configured and recognized by W indows.
At the W indows desktop, select My Com puter, and select Printers. If the printer is not
defined, select Add Printer and follow the wizard instructions.
2. From the iSeries Access folder, select Accessories and then select Start/Configure Session.
At the Configure PC5250 screen, select a System i and enter a printer nam e in the
W orkstation ID field. This definition is the sam e as for a 5250 SNA printer em ulation
sessions and is saved in the [5250] section of the user's workstation profile, as are SNA
connections. Under Type of em ulation, click the Printer option and then click the Setup
button.
InterForm A/S 417
3. At the PC5250 Printer Em ulation Setup screen, specify the m essage queue and library
where print m essages should be sent. The default is QSYSOPR. Select Transform Print
Data and Printer m odel HP Laserjet 4.
4. A host session is started. The Session panel is displayed with an overlying printer status
panel whose title bar contains the System i system nam e and the printer ID. If you didn't
specify an ID at the Configure PC5250 panel, the System i autom atically creates a printer
device (if the System i's system value QAUTOVRT is not set to 0) and its nam e is displayed.
Select Printer Setup from the Session panel's File m enu.
5. At the Printer Setup screen, check that the correct PC-attached printer is highlighted as the
default printer. You can ignore the Setup button. It takes you to a panel that lets you define
additional printing inform ation such as paper size and orientation and num ber of drawers.
The System i can override m uch of this inform ation. Click OK.
6. Back at the Session panel, select Save As from the File m enu. At the Save W orkStation
Profile as screen, enter the printer ID in the File Nam e field and select the directory in which
you want to store the printer em ulation profile. The file nam e should have a .W S extension.
Click OK. You will be asked whether you want an icon and in what directory it should be
placed. I suggest that you say Yes to the icon and the location recom m endation.
Attaching through a TCP/IP LPD Printer Server (Remote Writer)
A TCP/IP LPD Printer Server exists in form of interface boxes, integrated Printer interfaces,
Spool Servers and W orkstation Daem ons.
No device description is used when printing by use of a rem ote writer. The TCP/IP address of
the Printer Server is defined directly in the output queue definition.
You can create or change an existing output queue to define an output queue to send print to
an LPD Printer Server.
Creating or Changing an Output Queue for TCP/IP LPD Printing
The following presuppose that TCP/IP has been configured and started on the System i:
1. In case a printing program is already assigned for the queue use the following com m and to
end it:
ENDWTR WTR(PRTXXX) OPTION(*IMMED)
2. Enter the following com m and to change the queue:
CHGOUTQ OUTQ(QUSRSYS/PRTXXX) and press F4
(For creating a new queue just replace CHG with CRT.)
3. Now fill in the following fields:
Remote System
RMTSYS(*INTNETADR)
Remote Printer Queue
RMTPRTQ(PR1)
(Insert the required port nam e for the queue. Som e m anufacturers
require a specific nam e for the LPD queue in order to allow binary
transfer, and others will autom atically default to binary transfer if a
random nam e is entered. Consult the m anual for your Printer Server, or
try with eg. PR1).
Exam ples: Use ‘raw 1' for the HP JetDirect, and ‘lp’ for ZebraNet
PrintServer.
418
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
See a list of som e of the possible queue nam es at this site:
http://www-912.ibm.com/s_dir/slkbase.nsf/1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e/b49aa3cf3ce97d0d862565c2007d4393?OpenDocument&Highlight=0,printing,port,num
W riters to autostart
AUTOSTRWTR(1)
Connection Type
CNNTYPE(*IP)
Destination Type
DESTTYPE(*OTHER)
Transform SCS to ASCII
TRANSFORM*YES
(This value could be *NO if the queue should only be used for
print controlled by InterForm 400 ®)
M anufac. type & model
MFRTYPMDL(*HP4)
(This value is not im portant if you are only printing through
InterForm 400 ® as InterForm 400 ® m akes the protocol
conversion)
Internet Address
INTNETADR(‘222.5.1.235')
(The IP address of your Printer Server. Consult your system
adm inistrator)
Destination options
DESTOPT( 'XAIX' )
(This will support e.g. the num ber of copies specified on the
spool file.)
4.
You can verify the connection to the printer using PING from an System i com m and
line:
PING RMTSYS(‘222.5.1.235')
5.
Creating and changing a queue for printing LPR will autom atically create and start a
printing program on the System i. Alternatively the printing program can be started
with the following com m and:
STRRMTWTR OUTQ(QUSRSYS/PRTXXX)
J TIP J
W hen setting up printing for a Zebra printer it is recommended to use a remote writer (or
attach through a PC printer port) in order to avoid the printer job ending abnormally.
Attaching through a TN5250E Print Client
TN5250E print clients exist incorporated in print server devices, and as software in relation to
term inal program s like iSeries Access.
Please refer to the User’s Guide for details on how to configure such a device.
InterForm A/S 419
Testing the Connection
In order to test if the connection is working you can print the InterForm 400 ® font list. If this list
prints properly, the connection is working. Com pare the list with the list in the back of this
m anual.
Note that the font list should be printed directly to the output queue where the printer is
connected. The AUTO_FORM sub-system does not need to be active. If you have other PCL5
com patible printers in your network you could try printing the font reference to these printers as
well.
Trouble Shooting
Missing printout:
Printer W riters:
1.
Check that the printer is varied on:
WRKCFGSTS CFGTYPE(*DEV) CFGD(PRT*)
2.
Check if the writer is started or if m essages are waiting (not for LAN attached
printers). Reply to any m essage regarding form s type with I=Ignore.
WRKWTR PRT*
3.
Check for m essages on the queue:
WRKOUTQ QUSRSYS/PRTXXX
Remote W riters:
1.
Check if a printing program is assigned to the queue by pressing F20. If not start the
printing program with the following com m and:
STRRMTWTR QUSRSYS/PRTXXX
2.
420
For TCP/IP attached printers only. If the print job hangs in the queue with status SND
check that the IP address setting and LPD port nam e defined for the output queue
corresponds to the Printer Server.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix C - Printer Types
The InterForm 400 ® system can be used in connection to the following printer types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HP LaserJet 4, 4+, 4Si, 4V, 5, 5Si, 4000, 8000
HP LaserJet 6
HP Color LaserJet, HP4500
Lexm ark Optra Series
Kyocera FS series
Any HP PCL5/PCL5e/PCL5c com patible printers.
Any ZPLII (Zebra Printer Langugae) com patible printer.
Any IPL (Interm ec Printer Language) com patible printer.
W ith the add-on m odule W inPrint any W indows attached printer can be used with
InterForm 400 (See details in the W inPrint m anual).
Som e differences exist between the function sets of various printers. You could experience
differences in the printout according to the printer being used. Consult your printer distributor
for inform ation.
The definitions for an overlay is the sam e regardless of the defined printer type. You need
however to use overlays within a label file set for ZPLII and IPL printers. Differences will not
show until the final printout. You will therefore be able to use the sam e overlay on several
printer types.
Black and white printer types
J TIP J
If your printer supports PJL you should use a PJL printer type in InterForm400. Using this kind
of printer type will enable you to use page range (print only a part of) on the merged PCL
spooled file - if you change the spooled file from the APF3812/APFW RKOUTQ command.
HP4:
For HP4, HP5 and HP6 and com patible PCL5e printers (e.g. Lexm ark Optra,
and the Kyocera FS series). Note that som e printers, such as OptraE are not
preset to PCL, and therefore needs a PJL com m and to switch to PCL. In
these cases the setting HP4_PJL m ust be used.
HP4_PJL:
Sam e as HP4, but using PJL (Printer Job Control) language e.g. to set
resolution to 600 dpi. Note that the use of PJL can in som e cases delete
downloaded resources. Use this PJL printer type to be able to be able to
use page range on the merged spooled file - see tip above.
HP4D:
For HP4Si, HP5Si and com patible PCL5e duplex printers. Note that som e
printers, such as OptraE are not preset to PCL, and therefore needs a PJL
com m and to switch to PCL. In these cases the setting HP4D_PJL m ust be
used.
HP4D_PJL:
Sam e as HP4, but using PJL (Printer Job Control) language e.g. to set
resolution to 600 dpi. Note that the use of PJL can in som e cases delete
downloaded resources. Use this PJL printer type to be able to be able to
use page range on the merged spooled file - see tip above.
Color printer types
HP5C:
For HP5 Colour Laserjet and com patible color laser printers.
HP4500:
For the HP4500 Laser Color Printer.
InterForm A/S 421
HP4500D:
As for HP4500, with Duplex support.
Zebra printer types
QLZPL203:
Used for e.g. wireless Zebra QL220+, QL320+ and QL420+ printers. (Use the
com m and APF3812/CALIBQL to calibrate the printer - refer to page 472 for
inform ation). The characters ‘^’ and ‘~’ are unsupported on these printers.
Print mode: 2=Rew ind is recom m ended for m erges in InterForm 400.
ZEBRA203:
To be used for 203DPI Zebra printers
ZEBRA300:
Intended for 300DPI Zebra printers
G NOTE G
W e have seen exam ples of non-Zebra printers claim ing to be ZPLII com patible even though
they were not, so for ZPL printing a Zebra ZPLII com patible printer is recom m ended.
Intermec printer types
IPL203
To be used for 203 DPI Interm ec printers supporting the IPL language.
IPL300
To be used for 300 DPI Interm ec printers supporting the IPL language.
Please notice this regarding Interm ec support:
Overlays should be created in a label file set (also used for Zebra printers).
If the used soft fonts (for Zebra/Interm ec) are installed in an earlier version of InterForm 400
(earier than a 2011 version), then you will need to reinstall soft fonts if you want to use them
for an Interm ec printer. Also please notice that PDF417 and Datam atrix barcodes are placed
with the upper left corner as the point of reference on an Interm ec printer, where the point of
reference is the lower left corner on Zebra and PCL/PDF.
G NOTE G
Even though the IPL output data stream is supported by InterForm 400, there are lim itations in
som e functionality caused by lim itations of IPL com pared to ZPL, so it is recom m ended to
consider to buy ZPLII com patible Zebra label printers whenever possible.
The IPL output has these lim itations com pared with the ZPL output:
•
•
•
•
•
No IPL preview is available
Extended rem ap window: Full justify is not supported for IPL output.
Reference point for PDF417 and Datam atrix is upper left corner for IPL and lower left
corner for ZPL, PDF and PCL, so you need a separate IPL overlay to produce the
sam e output when using these barcodes.
Trium virate and Dot m atrix fonts are printed as sim ilar fonts in IPL, but are not 100%
the sam e as the ZPL output.
Relative widths on the fonts are not supported for IPL output. For IPL output the
relative width is always 1.
Cassette Mapping (Drawers)
Selecting the drawer on an overlay can be done either by specifying a drawer number
(*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-255) or a paper type. W henever possible it is recom m ended to select
the drawer by use of the paper type as described below.
422
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Selecting drawer by drawer number
W hen selecting a drawer in Design InterForm400 ® Overlay in the InterForm 400 ® system , you
should be aware of the differences between various printer types. InterForm 400 ® will know
from your specification of printer type which emulation the output should be form atted to but
will not know which optional paper feeders etc. are installed on the printer.
For HP and other PCL com patible printers, the code specified in e.g. the field Drawer on the
design m enu will be used as value for the HP Paper Source PCL com m and ESC&l n H. You
should refer to the user’s guide delivered with your printer to verify which paper source is used
for each value of “n”.
For HP and other PCL com patible printers we have som e m ore possibilities. The following is
the standard definitions for the value of n and for the value stated for Drawer in the
InterForm 400 ® system , when printing on HP 5Si com patible printers:
1 - Tray 2 (upper drawer)
2 - Manual feed (tray 1, right side tray)
3 - Manual envelope feed (tray 1. Right tray)
4 - Tray 3 (lower drawer)
5 - High Capacity Input (HCI), first tray
6 - Optional envelope feeder.
7 - Autoselect
8 - Tray 1 (right side tray)
20-39 - High Capacity Input (HCI) trays 2-21
Select Drawer using Paper Type
It is advisable to use paper types for controlling drawer selection for each printer. The
advantages when com paring to the traditional setup (where a drawer num ber is specified on
the overlay design instead of a paper type) are:
•
The same overlay can be used for printing on printers with totally different
draw er setup. The paper type (and not the drawer num ber) on the overlay will be sent
to the printer, where the paper type is translated into a drawer num ber depending on
the setup of the printer.
•
It is possible to m ove a m erged spooled file intended for a printer with one drawer
setup to another printer with a totally different drawer setup.
The requirem ents for selecting drawer on the printer using the paper type:
•
The printer needs to support the possibility to select the drawer by the paper type
instead of the drawer num ber.
•
You need to m anually m ake sure, that all of your printers have the sam e paper type
setup so that the correct drawers are selected e.g. drawers with ‘PREPRINTED’ paper
type should always contain preprinted paper with the com pany logo.
These are the standard paper types known by printers:
PLAIN
PREPRINTD
LTRHEAD
TRNSPRNCY
PREPUNCHD
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
CARDSTOCK
InterForm A/S 423
Note, that these nam es m ay be translated into your native language on your printers, but
InterForm 400 ® will still select the sam e correct paper type.
Refer to page 54 for a description of how to put this into production. Refer to page 364 for
inform ation of how to select drawers on printers not supporting paper type.
424
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix D - Support for unicode spooled files
In order to use unicode in InterForm 400 you need to do a few things:
1.
Activate Unicode in InterForm 400 via this screen:
Configure InterForm 400
APF101D
8/17
Do you want to be able to use UCS2 (unicode) in your spooled files.
Use UCS2 . . . . . . .
Y
(Y N)
Do you want underlines to be removed from DBCS input before merge.
Remove underlines
. .
N
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
The screen is found from the InterForm 400 m ain m enu if you select 70. Configuration and
licences followed by 2. Configure InterForm 400 and press <Enter> several tim es.
2.
You need to install at least one soft font: True Type Font (TTF) for unicode. Refer to
page 323 for m ore inform ation of how to do that.
3.
Create font num bers and link the fonts with the installed soft fonts (TTFs) via auto
download - additional inform ation can be found on page 324. Rem em ber to specify
U=Unicode.
4.
The spooled file you m erge with m ust be identified as a special unicode spooled file
in order to contain unicode. This can either be an AFPDS spooled file (recom m ended)
or a special *SCS spooled file.
Introduction to the AFPDS unicode format
If you want to use unicode spooled file as input for InterForm 400 the easiest way is sim ply to
define a unicode AFPDS spooled file. You can do that in these steps:
1)
Install a Unicode True Type Font (TTF) e.g. Arial unicode into the IFS, so that AFPDS
can 'see' it. This is done by copying it into the IFS within:
/qibm /UserData/OS400/Fonts/TTFonts
2)
Make sure that the AFPDS printer file is referring to the nam e of the installed True
Type Font nam e exactly as written inside the font e.g. as below, where the field, FLD1
is written
A
A
A
FLD1
2G
10
5FONTNAME('Arial Unicode MS Regular+
' (*POINTSIZE 15.1)) +
CCSID(13488 *NOCONVERT)
InterForm A/S 425
W ith the AFPDS spooled file you do not need to change the USRDFNOPT field or add any
special shift-in and shift-out sequences as for the special *SCS spooled file below.
Introduction to the *SCS unicode format
NOTE: It is highly recom m ended NOT to use the special form at as described below. This
form at was necessary before *AFPDS support was added in InterForm 400. If you want to use
unicode spooled files as input in InterForm 400 you should define them as AFPDS unicode
spooled files like described above!
W hen you want to com bine InterForm 400 with unicode *SCS spooled file there is one
problem : To this date IBM have not yet defined a standard for unicode *SCS spooled file, so it
have been necessary to define a special unicode standard (which have been defined by
InterForm 400) in order to print in unicode from InterForm 400.
If you create a special *SCS unicode spooled file you will need to set the value ‘IF-UCS2' for
the User defined option (USRDFNOPT) as below:
Change Spooled File Attributes (CHGSPLFA)
Type choices, press Enter.
AFP Characters . . . . . . . . . AFPCHARS
+ for more values
Front side overlay:
FRONTOVL
Overlay . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Offset down . . . . . . . . .
Offset across . . . . . . . .
Back side overlay:
BACKOVL
Overlay . . . . . . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Offset down . . . . . . . . .
Offset across . . . . . . . .
Constant back . . . . . . . .
User defined option . . . . . . USRDFNOPT
*NONE
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
*SAME
'IF-UCS2
'
- and it also requires that unicode text is m arked with special <Shift Out> and <Shift In>
sequences. You can use either DEVTYPE(*LINE) or DEVTYPE(*SCS) for the unicode
spooled file. This special kind of spooled file is described below.
In the spooled file you can have both unicode text and norm al single code page text so any
unicode text m ust be surrounded by indicators in order to identify them as unicode.
For DBCS (Double Byte Character Set) spooled files you use the two special 1 byte characters
<Shift Out> (which is hex ‘0E’) and <Shift In> (which is hex ‘0F’) to start and end any DBCS
field.
A sim ular <Shift Out> and <Shift In> technique m ust be used for unicode fields as well, so the
special InterForm 400 *SCS unicode spooled file m ust use hex ‘0E’ for <Shift Out> to m ark the
start of unicode text and hex ‘000F’ (Note that it is here a 2 byte sequence) as <Shift In> to
m ark the end of the unicode text.
Limitations of the unicode *SCS spooled files
Note that a unicode spooled file setup in the m anner described above cannot be displayed or
printed in a norm al m anner, but InterForm 400 includes tools for that. These tools are
described later in this appendix on page 429.
Note also that there are other lim itations to the functions supported in InterForm 400 for the
426
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
unicode spooled files at the m om ent. The lim itations are:
•
OSC (Output Schedule Control) does not handle unicode spooled files (they are
ignored).
•
If you want to call a split exit program and extract/return unicode data, then you need
to use form at=04 of the split exit program s.
•
The only finishing definition supported is the e-m ail finishing definition.
How to create special *SCS unicode spooled files
If you want to change your program s to print certain unicode fields from a database you can do
it in this m anner:
J TIP J
Instead of defining a special *SCS unicode as described below you can also simply create
normal AFPDS unicode spooled files and use them directly with InterForm400 instead.
1. The data fields must of course be defined as unicode. Here is an exam ple:
Columns . . . :
1 80
Browse
SEU==>
FMT PF .....A..........T.Name++++++RLen++TDpB......Functions+++++++++++++++
*************** Beginning of data **********************************
0001.00
A
UNIQUE
0002.00
A
R CUSTMSTR
0003.00
A
CUSTNO
5 0
TEXT('Customer number')
0004.00
A
NAME
30G
CCSID(13488 15)
0005.00
A
ADR1
30G
CCSID(13488 15)
0006.00
A
ADR2
30G
CCSID(13488 15)
0007.00
A
ADR3
30G
CCSID(13488 15)
0008.00
A
ADR4
30G
CCSID(13488 15)
0009.00
A
K CUSTNO
****************** End of data *************************************
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F16=Repeat find
F9=Retrieve
F10=Cursor
F24=More keys
F11=Toggle
F12=Cancel
The unicode fields are defined as type G. The length is m easured in unicode characters so the
fields above with length 30 actually takes up 60 bytes.
2. The printer file must be changed so you e.g. can change between unicode output and
norm al output e.g. via an indicator (in the exam ple below indicator 90 is used):
InterForm A/S 427
Columns . . . :
1 80
Browse
SEU==>
FMT DP .....AAN01N02N03T.Name++++++RLen++TDpBLinPosFunctions+++++++++++++
*************** Beginning of data ********************************
0001.00
A
REF(CUSTMSTP)
0002.00
A
R CUST
0003.00
A
CUSTNO
R
10SPACEB(2)
0004.00
A 90
NAMEDS
63
16
0005.00
A N90
NAME
R
16
0006.00
A 90
ADR1DS
63
16SPACEB(1)
0007.00
A N90
ADR1
R
16SPACEB(1)
0008.00
A 90
ADR2DS
63
16SPACEB(1)
0009.00
A N90
ADR2
R
16SPACEB(1)
0010.00
A 90
ADR3DS
63
16SPACEB(1)
0011.00
A N90
ADR3
R
16SPACEB(1)
0012.00
A 90
ADR4DS
63
16SPACEB(1)
0013.00
A N90
ADR4
R
16SPACEB(1)
****************** End of data ***********************************
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F16=Repeat find
F9=Retrieve
F10=Cursor
F24=More keys
F11=Toggle
F12=Cancel
The fields with ‘DS’ as the end are the unicode fields so you can use indicator 90 so activate
unicode output.
The spooled file also m ust have USRDFNOPT('IF-UCS2') which could be achieved via
OVRPRTF before you generate the spooled file.
3. The printer program should be changed.
The program m ust be able to switch between norm al output and unicode output. In this
exam ple it is done via indicator 90.
The program in this case also defines the unicode fields like this:
Columns . . . :
1 100
Browse
SEU==>
FMT ** ...+... 1 ...+... 2 ...+... 3 ...+... 4 ...+... 5 ...+... 6 ...+...
*************** Beginning of data ***********************************
0001.00
H DECEDIT('0,') DATEDIT(*DMY.) DFTACTGRP(*NO) ACTGRP('APF3812')
0002.00
FCUSTMSTP IF
E
K DISK
0003.00
FCUSTPRTF O
e
printer
0004.00
DNameDS
DS
0005.00
D
1
inz(X'0E')
0006.00
DNAME
0007.00
D
2
inz(X'000F')
0008.00
DADR1DS
DS
0009.00
D
1
inz(X'0E')
0010.00
DADR1
0011.00
D
2
inz(X'000F')
0012.00
DADR2DS
DS
0013.00
D
1
inz(X'0E')
0014.00
DADR2
0015.00
D
2
inz(X'000F')
0016.00
DADR3DS
DS
0017.00
D
1
inz(X'0E')
0018.00
DADR3
0019.00
D
2
inz(X'000F')
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F16=Repeat find
F9=Retrieve
F10=Cursor
F24=More keys
F11=Toggle
F12=Cancel
So this illustrates one way of adding the <Shift In> and <Shift Out> sequences to the unicode
fields (which in this exam ple ends with ‘DS’).
ERP vendors or other software providers, that would like to use InterForm 400 for unicode
printing can contact InterForm A/S or the local InterForm 400 contact as tools m ay be provided
428
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
to ease the changes necessary to your sources.
Displaying unicode *SCS spooled files
A problem related to the special unicode spooled is, that unicode characters are represented
by 2 bytes and thus cannot be fully displayed via a norm al DSPSPLF com m and. To help you to
around that problem InterForm 400 is delivered with a com m and sim ular to DSPSPLF:
APF3812/DSPUNISPLF.
W here a norm al DSPSPLF com m and will not show any unicode text the DSPUNISPLF
com m and will display any unicode character that is represented in the code page of the
current 5250 session.
The DSPUNISPLF com m and is included in the APF3812/APFW RKOUTQ com m and so if you
display an *SCS spooled file with USRDFNOPT('IF-UCS2') the DSPUNISPLF com m and is
used instead of DSPSPLF.
Printing out unicode *SCS spooled files (without merge)
W hen using the special *SCS unicode spooled file you will norm ally m erge them in
InterForm 400, but you m ight want to print them out directly without m erging.
The special unicode sequences are not supported by the standard printing process so you
need to do a sm all change of the used output queues (for rem ote writers) or printer devices to
print out the *SCS unicode spooled files.
InterForm 400 is delivered with a special program , APF3812/IFWTRTRP, that can be used as
a Data Transfer Program with the param eter: USRDTATFM (APF3812/IFW TRTRF) on either
output queue or printer device.
For any spooled file that does not have USRDFNOPT(‘IF-UCS2') the program will run as if it
was not there. Only spooled files with this option will be inspected and any unicode text will
printed (all supported characters will be printed).
If you are using a data transfer program you will be forced to specify TRANSFORM(*NO) i.e.
disabling host print transform . That is no problem as host print transform is done in the called
program (IFW TRTRF).
Using the data transfer program with your own WSCST
If you have defined your own workstation custom izing object (*W SCST) and you want to use
that com bined with a data transfer program like above you will need to do a workaround to
m ake it work.
Please note, that this is a problem only if you are using M FRTYPM DL(*W SCST) com bined
with a *W SCST object in field W SCST on the output queue (for rem ote writers) or printer
device description. It is NOT a problem if you are using any of the predefined *W SCST objects
in QSYS, that are selected via the MFRTYPMDL param eter on output queues and printer
devices.
If you try to com bine a *W SCST object with MFRTYPMDL(*W SCST) you will get the error
m essage: CPD83F0 Device class of the custom izing object mismatched.
The workaround
The workaround can according to IBM be done by replacing any of the predefined *W SCST
objects in QSYS (use one that you would never use e.g. QW PIBM4019 m ight be a candidate..)
with your own *W SCST object. It is a very good idea to just renam e the *W SCST object in
QSYS and then m ove or copy you own *W SCST object into QSYS - with that sam e nam e..
InterForm A/S 429
Note, that the workaround have the problem , that you will need to do this each tim e you
upgrade the m achine you run on...
430
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix E - Codepage Support
InterForm 400 ® m akes a com plete protocol conversion of EBCDIC/SCS data to ASCII/PCL
data.
This requires the National Code Page ID of the system to be known as well as the available
ASCII codepage in the PCL Printer.
InterForm 400 ® determ ines the System Code page from the system value QCHRID and m akes
an EBCDIC to ASCII conversion on basis of this.
The supported national languages are listed in the table below which also indicates the
resulting ASCII sym bol set.
Country
EBCDIC Codepage
USA/Canada
Austria/Germ any
Denm ark/Norway
Finland/Sweden
Italy
Spanish-Speaking
United Kingdom
France
Arabic
Hebrew
Multinational
Thailand
Latin
Iceland
Greece
Japan Katakana
Korea
Sim plified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japan English
Cyrillic (Russia)
Turkey
Farsi
Latvia
Lithuania
Hong Kong
037
273
277
278
280
284
285
297
420
424
500
838
870
871
875
930
933
935
937
939
1025/880
1026
1095
1112
1112
1377
Unicode*
13488*
EURO codepage ASCII Symbol Set
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
850
850
850
850
850
850
850
850
1148
1153
1149
Unicode
852
850
DBCS
DBCS
DBCS
DBCS
DBCS
1154
1148
1148
850
850
DBCS
* Note that the UCS2 (unicode) code page (13488) is supported via a special *SCS unicode
spooled file form at or via Unicode AFPDS . The code page 13488 code page can not be
specified for a m erge, but is indicated via USRDFNOPT(‘IF-UCS2') on the spooled file to be
m erged. Refer to Appendix D on page 425 for additional inform ation.
InterForm A/S 431
Appendix F - Font-ID Information
This appendix lists the standard fonts shipped with InterForm 400 for both PCL/PDF and Zebra
printers. Also a list showing typefaces of the m ost used resident fonts of PCL printers is
included.
IBM 3812 font-ID Information
The system uses the IBM font ID’s to select fonts.
This font list will include the standard IBM 3812 font set (3 to 2103). If printed on a PCL printer
the fonts will be em ulated by the selection of PCL printer type (refer to page 121, 298 and
421).
The m ost com plete em ulation is obtained by selecting the HP4 or HP4D printer types.
The available font definitions can be prom pted by F4 from different locations in the system and
will include the fonts defined under option Description of additional fonts in the m enu W ork
w ith Fonts (see page 315)
Note that the extra fonts (e.g. 9903), predefined for use in the sam ple described in the Getting
Started section on page 26, has been added to the prom pted list. These fonts are not
available on standard IBM SNA printers (such as 3812, 4028, 3916 and 3116) but only on
PCL5 com patible printers.
Note that your printer m ay contain a num ber of native resident fonts, which are m ost likely not
described in the System i Guide to Programming for Printing from IBM . These fonts
therefore have to be declared to the system under Description of additional fonts (page
315) in order to have them listed on the font list generated by the InterForm 400 ® system and in
the list prom pted by F4 (displayed on page 54)
432
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
IBM Compatible Font List
Font Name
CPI
Font-ID
OCRB
10
3
Orator
10
5
Courier10
10
11
Prestige Pica
10
12
Artisan 10
10
11
Courier Italic 10
10
18
Pica
10
12
Orator Bold
10
38
Gothic Bold 10
10
39
Gothic Text 10
10
40
Roman Text 10
10
41
Serif Text 10
10
42
Serif Italic 10
10
43
Courier Bold 10
10
46
Gothic Text 12
12
66
Gothic Italic 12
12
68
Gothic Bold 12
12
69
Serif Text 12
12
70
Serif Italic 12
12
71
Serif Bold 12
12
72
Script
12
84
Courier 12
12
85
Prestige Elite
12
86
Letter Gothic 12
12
87
Light Italic 12
12
112
Letter Gothic Bold
12
110
Prestige Elite Bold
12
111
Prestige Elite Italic
12
112
Boldface Italic
PS
155
Modern
PS
175
Boldface
PS
159
Essay
PS
160
InterForm A/S 433
434
Essay Italic
PS
162
Essay Bold
PS
163
Essay Light
PS
173
Document
PS
175
Gothic Text 13
13
204
Prestige 15
15
230
Courier 15
15
230
Serif Text 15
15
229
Gothic Text 15
15
230
Courier 5
Courier Bold 5
5
244
5
245
C o u rier 17
17
252
C o u rier Bold 17
17
253
C o u rier 17 (sub/super)
17
254
G o t hic Text 20
20
281
Gothic
27
290
Sonoran-Serif 8-pt Roman Medium
typ
751
Sonoran-Serif 10-pt Roman Medium
typ
1051
Sonoran-Serif 10-pt Italic Bold
typ
1053
Sonoran-Serif 10-pt Italic Medium
typ
1056
Sonoran-Serif 12-pt Roman Medium
typ
1351
Sonoran-Serif 16-pt Roma Bold
typ
1653
Sonoran-Serif 24-pt
typ
2103
Text
27
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Shipped Zebra Fonts
These fonts are known by the Zebra printers and the font definitions are shipped with
InterForm 400 ®:
Font number
Description
6
Trium virate 6 pt
7
Trium virate 7 pt
8
Trium virate 8 pt
9
Trium virate 9 pt
10
Trium virate 10 pt
11
Trium virate 11 pt
12
Trium virate 12 pt
13
Trium virate 13 pt
14
Trium virate 14 pt
15
Trium virate 15 pt
16
Trium virate 16 pt
17
Trium virate 17 pt
18
Trium virate 18 pt
20
Trium virate 20 pt
22
Trium virate 22 pt
24
Trium virate 24 pt
28
Trium virate 28 pt
30
Trium virate 30 pt
36
Trium virate 36 pt
48
Trium virate 48 pt
72
Trium virate 72 pt
1001
Matrix 9 x 5 dots
1002
Matrix 11 x 7 dots
1003
Matrix 18 x 10 dots
1004
Matrix 26 x 13 dots
1005
Matrix 60 x 40 dots
1006
OCR-A
1007
OCR-B
InterForm A/S 435
Typefaces known by PCL-Printers
PCL printers norm ally have several resident fonts. Below a few possible resident fonts and the
m ost likely typeface num ber are listed.
Font Description
Typeface
number
Albertus
4362
Antique Olive
4168
Arial
16602
CG Om ega
4113
CG Tim es
4101
Clarendon Cond
4140
Coronet
4116
Courier
4099
Garamond
4197
Letter Gothic
4102
Marigold
4297
Sym bol (Symbol)
16686
Times New Roman
16901
Univers
4148
W indings (Wind ing s)
6826 / 31402
G NOTE G
Italic/Bold/Norm al/Condensed m ay not be supported for som e of the typefaces.
M WARNING M
Not all typefaces are supported on all PCL printers and the actual typeface number can vary
depending on printer model. Print out a font list on your printers to make sure, that this
coincides with the mapping of your printers if in doubt.
J TIP J
If you want to use a font/typeface, that is known by only some of your printers you could
consider to install a TTF file with the same font and auto download it to the printers missing the
font. Refer to page 320 and 322.
436
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix G - Limitations of the Light Version
The following are rules given for the Light version:
1.
Spool entries for m anual m erge can only be selected from the queues nam ed
AFC_INPUT1 and AFC_INPUT2.
2.
The program will support only two sets of AFC print queues. These queues are nam ed
AFC_INPUT1, AFC_OUT1, AFC_INPUT2 and AFC_OUT2. The queues can be m ixed
(e.g. AFC_INPUT1 -> AFC_OUT2), and input from e.g. AFC_INPUT1 can, by the
existing AFC functions, be split up to print m erged data to both AFC_OUT1 and
AFC_OUT2.
3.
The queues AFC_INPUT1 and AFC_OUT1 is the set of queues installed according to
the Getting Started section. These queues can of course be used in production also,
but care should be taken when calling the program AFCINSTALL as all definitions in
the AFC definition AFC_INPUT1 will be overwritten by the sam ple definitions.
4.
All 4 queues m ust be placed in the library APF3812. Therefore, in the screen shown
when choosing F6=add under 1.Functions attached to output queues, the Library
field will not be displayed.
5.
Make sure the Light code is entered in the old version before making a Release
Update (APFRELUPD). (m ake sure the Main Menu indicate Light before you renam e
the APF3812 library to APF3812OLD). If the light code is not entered prior to the
update, the AFC definitions in the AFC job/queue AFC_INPUT1 in the new version will
not be updated with your AFC definitions from library APF3812OLD.
6.
W hen running a Release Update, existing AFC definitions, other than AFC_INPUT1
and AFC_INPUT2, will be updated as well, even though the Light code has been
entered prior to the Release Update.
However, it is the custom ers responsibility to change the Output queue and the
AUTO_FORM job nam es of these AFC job/queues to either AFC_INPUT1 or
AFC_INPUT2, or to set Auto-start = N for the AUTO_FORM jobs.
7.
Attem pts to start AFC jobs with other nam es than AFC_INPUT1 or AFC_INPUT2 will
result in error conditions.
It is the custom ers responsibility not to start AFC jobs with other nam es (avoid by
setting Auto-start job = N).
8.
Attem pts to start the AFC jobs AFC_INPUT1 or AFC_INPUT2 (updated by a Release
Update) with AFC definitions containing other queue nam es than AFC_INPUT1/2 or
AFC_OUT1/2, will result in error conditions.
It is the custom ers responsibility not to change the nam es.
9.
Output queues (updated by a Release Update) defined under 2. Form s Type Table
m ust be either AFC_OUT1 or AFC_OUT2. It is the custom ers responsibility to correct
existing definitions.
10.
Function 5=M ove Spooled File in Auto Form s Control is NOT supported in the light
version.
11.
The CL Com m and APF3812 does not work in the light version.
12.
No PDF and e-m ail support.
13.
The *USER option for 1=M erge w ith overlay in Auto Form s Control is not supported.
Conditions for new features will be added as they are being im plem ented.
InterForm A/S 437
Appendix H - Commands in Spooled Files
The system contains a com m and interpreter. This m eans you have a possibility of inserting
com m and lines as a part of the print out.
W hen InterForm 400 ® identifies a com m and line, the system will execute the com m and instead
of just printing it.
A com m and line is a line, where the first two positions contain a com m and specification.
The com m and recognition characters <&&’ are norm ally used. A special com m and can change
these characters into som ething else.
The requirem ent for the com m ands in the spool file to take effect is that the spool file is
m erged with an InterForm 400 overlay e.g. in Auto Form s Control. The overlay used for the
m erge, do not need to contain any form at definitions, i.e. the line spacing, font selection,
rotation etc. can be set to *INPUT.
INPEL is an abbreviation of Inches and Pels, and m ust be written with preceding zeros e.g.
03120 indicates 3½ inch.
G NOTE G
The only com m and line supported for PDF and ZPL output is &&IMG. Refer to page 440 and
441.
Com mand line Overview :
Command
Position
Contents
Description
BOX
1-2
3-5
6-6
7 - 11
12 - 12
13 - 17
18 - 18
19 - 23
24 - 24
25 - 29
31 - 33
35 - 35
37 - 38
39 - 39
40 - 44
45 - 45
46 - 50
52 - 54
<&&’
<BOX’
sign (+/-) top border
upper border distance to edge INPEL
sign (+/-) left border
left border distance to edge INPEL
sign (+/-) right border
right side distance to edge INPEL
sign (+/-) bottom border
distance bottom border to edge INPEL
line width PPP (0-31)
round/sharp corners (R S)
pattern for filling
sign (+/-) move right
move right INPEL
sign (+/-) move down
move down INPEL
number of moves
Draws a frame of which the upper
and lower borders are defined
relatively to the top edge of the
paper, and the left and right
borders are defined relatively to left
edge of the paper.
IN indicates measurement in
inches.
PEL indicates measurement in
Pels.
Leading zeros must be filled in.
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relative to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current line.
If position 39-54 is filled in, the
frame will be repeated as many
times as stated in position 52-54.
438
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Command
Position
Contents
Description
VAN
1-2
3-5
6-6
7 - 11
12 - 12
13 - 17
<&&’
<VAN’
sign (+/-) distance to paper top edge
distance to top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) left end point
distance left end point to left paper edge
INPEL
sign (+/-) right end point
distance right end point to left paper edge
INPEL
line width PPP (0-31)
sign (+/-) move right
move right INPEL
sign (+/-) move down
move down INPEL
number of moves
Draws a horizontal line. The line is
horizontal to the paper rotation,
regardless of rotation of the
contents.
18 - 18
19 - 23
25 - 27
28 - 28
29 - 33
34 - 34
35 - 39
41 - 43
IN indicates measurement in
inches.
PEL indicates measurement in
Pels.
Leading zeros must be filled in.
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relatively to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current line.
If position 28-43 is filled in, the line
will be repeated as many times as
stated in position 41-43.
LOD
1-2
3-5
6-6
7 - 11
12 - 12
13 - 17
18 - 18
19 - 23
25 - 27
28 - 28
29 - 33
34 - 34
35 - 39
41 - 43
<&&’
<LOD’
sign (+/-) distance to top end point
distance top end point to top paper edge
INPEL
sign (+/-) distance to left paper edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
sign (+/-) bottom end point
distance bottom end point to top paper edge
INPEL
line width PPP (0-31)
sign (+/-) move right
move right INPEL
sign (+/-) move down
move down INPEL
number of moves
Draws a vertical line. The line is
vertical to the paper rotation,
regardless of rotation of the
contents.
IN indicates measurement in
inches.
PEL indicates measurement in
Pels.
Leading zeros must be filled in.
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relative to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current line.
If position 28-43 is filled in, the line
will be repeated as many times as
stated in position 41-43
LIN
1-2
3-5
<&&’
<LIN’
6-6
7 - 11
12 - 12
13 - 17
1. Point
sign (+/-) distance top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
18 - 18
19 - 23
24 - 24
25 - 29
2. Point
sign (+/-) distance top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
31 - 33
35 - 35
36 - 36
37 - 41
42 - 42
43 - 47
49 - 51
line width PPP (0-31)
round/sharp ends (R S)
sign (+/-) move right
move right INPEL
sign (+/-) move down
move down INPEL
number of moves
Draws a line between 2 points. The
line is oriented to the paper
rotation, regardless of rotation of
the contents.
IN indicates measurement in
inches.
PEL indicates measurement in
Pels..
Leading zeros must be filled in.
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relatively to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current print line.
If position 36-51 is filled in, the line
will be repeated as many times as
stated in position 49-51.
InterForm A/S 439
Command
Position
Contents
Description
TXT
1-2
3-5
6-6
7 - 11
12 - 12
13 - 17
19 - 21
23 - 26
28 -198
<&&’
<TXT’
sign (+/-) distance top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
rotation
font
text for print
Prints a text line, for which the
appearance is independent of the
normal text lines in the data stream.
IMG
1-2
3-5
7 - 16
17
18 - 22
23
24 - 28
30 - 32
34
35
36 - 45
47 - 56
<&&’
<IMG’
image name
sign (+/-) distance to top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance to left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
resolution (600 300 150 100 075)
<R’ = reverse image
Image rotation (N, E, W, S)
file name
library
Prints an image with the same
rotation as the paper rotation.
Special for ZPL output:
The positions 30-32 contains the rotation,
which can be 000, 090,180 or 270. Positions
34 and 35 are not used for ZPL and the
image cannot be scaled for ZPL. If position 6
is ‘K’ (for keep), then the image will be kept
in the ZPL printers memory to prevent
multiple downloads of the same image within
the same spooled file - up to 25 images can
be ‘kept’ in this way.
(36-56 is only used if the image is located in
another file than APF3812/IMAGE)
If 7-16 is ‘*PATH’ or ‘*PATHBMP’ a B/W
BMP file is looked for in position 36-98.
If 7-16 is ‘*PATHTIF’ a TIF file is looked for in
the (IFS) path in position 36-98.
If 7-16 is ‘*PATHTIF2' then position 36-38
are the number of rows of dots to cut from
top of the TIF image (position 1-35 have the
same meaning as above). Position 40-42 are
the number of dots to cut off from the left of
the TIF image. (Remember to precede both
with zeroes). For *PATHTIF2 the path to the
image is placed in positions 44-106.
If 7-16 is ‘*PATHTIF3' then you can set this
for PDF and color PCL output only:
Position 29 may contain a resolution or size
code:
Position 29=H is a Height size code.
Position 29=W is a Width size code.
Position 29=blank: Use the resolution.
Position 30-34 sets the size as iippp if
position 29 is either H or W else the
resolution in position 30-32 is used.
Position 37 is the image rotation: N,E,W,S.
Position 38-198: The path to the tiff image.
440
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relatively to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current print line.
If no resolution is stated, the image
will be printed with 300 dpi.
*PATHTIF is also supported for
PDF output - but only for
compressed TIF files. *PATH is
also supported for PDF output.
The BMP file must be sharp
Black/white i.e. no grey.
The size in *PATHTIF3 marked as
iippp is the size in inches and pels,
where the ii denotes the inches and
ppp the pels. Preceeding zeroes
are required so e.g. 00120 set a
size of half an inch.
Command
Position
Contents
Description
IMG
*COLOR
1-2
3-5
7 - 16
17
18 - 22
23
24 - 28
29
‘&&’
IMG
*COLOR
sign (+/-) distance to top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance to left edge
distance to paper left edge INPEL
Resolution / size code H=height, W=width
blank= resolution
For resolution (pos. 29) = blank, resolution
horizontal
For resolution (pos. 29) = blank, resolution
vertical
For resolution (pos. 29) = H or W, size in
INPEL
Image rotation (N,E,W or S)
This image extension (*COLOR)
makes it possible to insert color
BMP or JPEG images in PDF and
PCL output. This is ignored when
specifying COLORSUPP(*NO)
when you merge into pdf files.
30 - 32
34 - 36
30 - 34
37
------------
color image name
38 - 47
- or 38 - 198
- or 38 - 198
/IFS BMP, GIF, PNG or JPEG file
Link to image server:
http://my_imageserver.com/myimage
For PCL output you need to use
either the HP4500, HP4500D or
HP5C printer type.
JPEG images can be inserted in
PDF and PCL output and they
need to be formatted for 16 mill.
colors.
Please notice that printing PCL
with JPEG images via this function
includes a conversion into bmp
which takes a while - so use this
function for smaller images only.
BMP color image name
or
JPEG/GIF/PNG file in IFS
(include the slash “/”)
If you state H or W in position 29 (for resolution), then you state the size (height or width) in
positions 30-34. The size is written as inches and pels with preceding zeroes: 2 digits for the
inches and 3 for the pels. If you state either H or W in position 29, the im age will be resized to
fit the size and the other dim ension (height or width) will be resized, so the ratio between width
and height is kept.
If you leave position 29 blank, the horizontal and vertical sizes are written in positions 30-32
and 34-36 - also as inches and pels in the sam e m anner.
G NOTE G
Note, that if you place two im ages at the exact sam e position, then only the first will be
printed. If you place a color im age and then a black and white im age at the sam e position, then
only the color im age will be printed when m erging with color support, and the black and white
im age is printed for black and white output.
InterForm A/S 441
Command
Position
Contents
Description
OVL
1-2
3-5
7 - 16
17
18 - 22
23
24 - 28
<&&’
<OVL’
overlay name
sign (+/-) distance top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
Prints an overlay containing the
definitions listed in an overlay
created in InterForm400® .
FNT
1-2
3-5
7 - 10
<&&’
<FNT’
font-id
Changes the font type for the rest
of the page.
PPL
1-2
3-5
7-9
<&&’
<PPL’
points per line
Changes the line density for the
remaining text lines on the page.
ESC
1-2
3-5
7-8
<&&’
<ESC’
new command recognition character string
Changes the command recognition
character string from <&&’.
GL2
1-2
3-5
7 - 16
17
18 - 22
23
24 - 28
30 - 34
35 - 39
<&&’
<GL2’
plot name (member in APF3812/GL2)
sign (+/-) distance to top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance to left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
hight INPEL
width INPEL
Prints a HP-GL/2 plot with the
same rotation as the paper
rotation, i.e. which edge is
regarded as the upper edge is of
no importance.
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relatively to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current print line.
If hight or width are not stated the
plot can reach the lower right edge.
The GL2 command only works on
PCL5 printers.
442
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Command
Position
Contents
Description
PCL
SKU
1-2
3-5
7 - 16
17
18 - 22
23
24 - 28
36 - 45
47 - 56
1-2
3-5
6
<&&’
<PCL’
PCL-file name
sign (+/-) distance to top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance to left edge
distance to left paper edge INPEL
file name
library
Prints a PCL-file with the same
rotation as the paper rotation, i.e.
which edge is regarded as the
upper edge is of no importance.
(36-56 is only used if the PCL date is located
in another file than APF3812/PCL)
If a distance is stated without a
leading sign the distance is
calculated relatively to the paper
edge. If a sign (+/-) is stated, the
distance will be calculated
according to the base line of the
current print line.
If 7-16 is ‘*PATH’ a PCL file is looked for in
the (IFS) path in position 36-
PCL-files can not be used on IBM
3812 and 3816 printers.
<&&’
<SKU’
tray number
Used for control of paper trays. The
command must be stated in line
number 1 of the print file.
On IBM3812 and IBM3816:
1=top paper tray
2=bottom paper tray
On other printers:
1=top paper tray
2=manual feed
3=manual envelope feed
4=bottom paper tray
6=envelope feeder
When duplexing this command will
cause forced front page.
HPM
1-2
3-5
7 - 10
<&&’
<HPM’
macro number 00000-32767
Executes an HP-macro.
The macro must be down loaded to
the printer prior to this command
call.
In order to avoid mixing of the
internal use of macros in the
InterForm400® system, it is
recommended to define macro
numbers larger than 09999.
INK
1-2
3-5
6-6
8-8
<&&’
<INK’
Foreground color: B=black, W=white,
U=unchanged, 1-7=HP raster
Background color: B=black, W=white,
U=unchanged, 1-7=HP raster
WARNING:
This command will change the ink of any text
being printed after this command has been
issued.
Print sequence considerations:
The sequence of printing command lines
versus normal text lines and constants in the
overlay cannot be predicted. Only a sequence
of command lines in succession can be
guaranteed to be printed in the specified
sequence.
Changes the ink of any preceding
text being printed.
Example of valid use of &&INK:
&&INK B W
&&TXT ...
&&BLA ...
&&BLO ...
&&BLO...
&&INK W B
TIP:
To avoid any problems you shoudl
always reset foreground ink to
black and the background ink to
white immediately after having
used any special ink in your
command lines.
InterForm A/S 443
Command
Position
Contents
Description
BLA
1-2
3-5
6-6
7 - 11
12 - 12
13 - 17
19 - 21
23 - 26
<&&’
<BLA’
sign (+/-) distance top edge
distance to paper top edge INPEL
sign (+/-) distance left edge
distance to left paper edge
rotation
font
(BLA = Block attributes)
Sets the attributes for any
preceding block-commands (See
BLO). These attributes will be used
for any BLO-commands until
another BLA is issued.
28-32
Maximum line width of lines in the block
INPEL when being printed.
Spacing between lines ( PEL)
Percentage of line width to cause rightmargin-adjustment.If printing a line in the
block (using normal spacing) would exceed
this percentage (of the block width), spaces
between words will be increased in size to
cause the line of text to occupy the entire
line.
Escape sequence 01
Escape function 01
Escape sequence 02
Escape function 02
Escape sequence 03
Escape function 03
Escape sequence 04
Escape function 04
Escape sequence 05
Escape function 05
Escape sequence 06
Escape function 06
Escape sequence 07
Escape function 07
Escape sequence 08
Escape function 08
Escape sequence 09
Escape function 09
Escape sequence 10
Escape function 10
Escape sequence 11
Escape function 11
34-36
38-40
42-44
45-48
50-52
53-56
58-60
61-64
66-68
69-72
74-76
77-80
82-84
85-88
90-92
93-96
98-100
101-104
106-108
109-112
114-116
117-120
122-124
125-128
Escape function 1-11 defines the function
of an escape sequenc. The following
functions are supported
Function Description
UL
Start underlining text.
ENUL
End underlining text.
Syllable hyphen. A '-' is inserted
only if a part of the word (the part
before syllable hyphen) can fit the
line width. Then the rest of the
word are moved to the next line.
NL
New line forces the following text
to
begin at the next line.
HLUP
Half line up/superscript.
HLDW
Half line down/subscript.
ENHL
End half line up/down
NORM End underlining, ends half line
up/down and set font to font
specified in the &&BLA command
(font number) Change to APF-font
number.
BLO
1-2
3-5
7 - 198
<&&’
<BLO’
Text to be printed (incl. any esc. sequences)
Escape sequences and functions
are used together. Sequence 01
are used in conjunction with
function 01 and so on.
Escape sequence 1-11 defines
the allowed escape sequences in
the text of the &&BLO-commands.
An escape sequence can consist of
1 to 3 characters.
BLO = Block
Adds a line of text to the block
The line of text will be included with
other &&BLO-commands and
wrapped to fit the line width
specified in the &&BLA-command.
A &&BLA-command must proceed
any &&BLO command.
444
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Command
Position
Contents
Description
BMK
1-2
3-5
7
9
'&&'
'BMK'
Bookmark level code 0-6
Code telling if bookmark on higher level
should be open to start with: 0=Closed,
1=Open
Colour number. Non numeric will be
interpreted as black.
Code for focus. 0= Show page. 1=Show
specific place on the page specified by Ycoordinate.
sign (+/-) distance top edge. Blank is absolute,
+/- is relative to place of the command.
Y-Coordinate: Absolute/relative distance from
the top of the page. Insert as inches and pels:
IIPPP with preceding zeroes.
Inserts bookmark in PDF output
files.
11-13
15
17
18-22
If there is no lines with
bookmark level code = 0 the
bookmarks will be shown
automatically when opening the
PDF file.
If there are more than one line
with level=0 the last one will be
used. Level=0 lines outside the
pagerange will be ignored.
Level 1 to 6 must be written in
order and holes in this order are
allowed.
Bookmark text
24-103
Refer to page 277 for another
way to insert PDF bookmarks.
CPY
1-2
3-5
7-11
'&&'
'CPY'
Number of copies
URI
1-2
3-5
6
7-11
12
13-17
19-21
23-26
28-378
'&&'
'URI'
Sign (+/-) distance top edge
Distance to paper top edge INPEL
Sign (+/-) distance left edge
Distance to left paper edge INPEL
Rotation
Font
Link (Optionally followed by <Space> and text
to be shown in the PDF file)
Inserts addtional copies of each
pages. This works until the end
of the spooled file or until
another &&CPY command
overrides it.
INPEL is an abbreviation for 2
chars defining inches and 3 for
pels. Use preceding zeroes.
The web-address to link to
followed by one or more spaces.
If additional text is found after
the spaces this text will be
shown in the PDF file for this
link.
J TIP J
Insert the text below in the *SCS spooled file to insert a link in the resulting PDF file to
www.interform400.com with the text 'company' appearing in the PDF file:
&&URI 03000 02120 000 0011 www.interform400.com company
The link will appear 3 inches from the top and 2½ inches from the left on the PDF file.
InterForm A/S 445
Command
Position
Contents
Description
RFID
1-2
3-6
8-13
14
15
16
17
18
19-24
25
26
27-37
‘&&’
‘RFID’
‘SSCC96'
‘,’
Filter, F. (Value 0-7)
‘,’
Partition, P. (Read below..)
‘,’
Company prefix, CCCCCC.
‘,’
Extension digit, E
Serial number, SSSSSSSSSSS.
Sends a command to a RFID
ZPLII compatible printer to print
or burn a RFID label.
If you need to print anything
else on the page print another
line with line spacing=0.
There is no check-digit.
If there are more than one
&&RFID command on a page
only the last will be encoded.
The filter value can be 2 for
shipping unit.
If the length of CCCCCC +
ESSSSSSSSSS is not 17 or
they contains non numeric
data, the tag will not be
encoded.
The Partition value gives the length of the com pany prefix and serial num ber:
446
Partition value
Length of Company prefix
Length of
extension + serial number
0
12
5
1
11
6
2
10
7
3
9
8
4
8
9
5
7
10
6
6
11
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Example of using Escape Commands in the Data Stream
Using the Edit Print Com m and APF3812/APFEDTPRT in InterForm 400 ® below exam ple has
been created, based on the Dem o Spool Entry in InterForm 400 ®.
In the exam ple below we have m ade use of the escape com m ands for Font, Fram es, im ages,
and Block form atting.
Furtherm ore we have created 2 additional fonts in InterForm 400 ®:
Font ID 7510 = New Tim es Rom an 10 (Typeface 16901)
Font ID 7610 = New Tim es Rom an 10 BOLD (Typeface 16901)
W hen you have finished editing the spool file, according to the below, press F3 to exit and
press Enter to create the revised spool entry.
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+..
1
&&FNT 0066
&&BOX 00160 00120 03100 02040 005 R B
Herring Marine Research
Seaweed Street 14
9000 Battleaxe
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Martin Merman
&&IMG DEMOIMAGE 01080 04220 600
1004/PDC.20-02-2008
&&BLA 03100 02120 000 7510 03180 040 080 /ULUL
/BO7610 /NONORM /NLNL
&&BLO Re. Your new InterForm400 modules./NL
&&BLO ---------------------------------&&BLO
&&BLO Congratulations with your new /BOInterForm400/NO module(s).
&&BLO You are now able to fully exploit the benifits of combining
&&BLO /BOInterForm400/NO with one or more of the powerful modules to impre
&&BLO your customers and ease the workflow in your organisation.
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO The following license code(s) will be needed to activate the
&&BLO module(s) permanently to your /BOSystem(s)/NO:
&&BLO
&&BLO Product
Model
i-Group
Serial No.
License Code/NL
&&BLO ----------------------------------------------------------------/NL
&&BLO Interword400
510
i300
44A2971
81 20 01 3A /NL
&&BLO PDF security
520
i100
44A9032
3F 78 66 99 /NL
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO Should you have any questions regarding the modules, you are
&&BLO welcome to contact our technical support via:
&&BLO
&&BLO [email protected]
&&BLO
&&BLO Or download the latest documentation from the Internet on:
&&BLO
&&BLO /ULwww.interform400.com/NO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO
&&BLO Regards/NL
&&BLO InterForm A/S
InterForm A/S 447
As m entioned before in this chapter, a Merge with overlay has to be m ade in order for the
Escape sequences in the spool file to take effect.
Create a sim ilar overlay as defined below, and call this overlay in a AFC definition.
Design InterForm 400 overlay
APF300D
Overlay name
NOOVERLAY
Overlay text
Line spacing
Rotation
Extra left margin
positions
Maximum number of
print positions
Extra blank lines
on top
Font
Extended page def.
Drawer / Papertype
Paper Size
Pages per side
Copy management
Escape sequences in datastream
040
in 1/240 of an inch (*INPUT, 1-720)
*INPUT
(*INPUT, 0, 90, 180, 270)
_0
(0-99)
378
(1-378)
0
*INPUT
N
5
4
(0-99)
*INPUT, fontnumber
F4=List
(Y N)
(*INPUT, *PRINTER, 1-255, Name)
F4=List
N
(Y N)
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F13=Set view/print parameters
F11=Delete this overlay
F14=PCL-view
F18=DSPSPLF
F4=List
F12=Cancel
F19=DSPPFM
The resulting PCL-file from the m erge, will look as per below. Notice that the &&-com m ands
are not printed. Furtherm ore you will see the effect of the BLOCK defined spool lines, which
are form atted according to the total width length of the BLOCK. Unless a NL (New Line) is
inserted, blank lines will be ignored and the spool text from each line will be reorganised
according to block width and consequently a full justification will be obtained. (Equal left and
right m argin).
448
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
InterForm A/S 449
Appendix I - InterForm400® CL Commands
NetServer Commands
The Add Netserver File Share Command
The APF3812/ADDFILSHR com m and can be used for sharing objects on the System i. It can
e.g. be used for sharing the QDLS as below:
Add NetServer File Share (ADDFILSHR)
Type choices, press Enter.
Share name . . . .
Object . . . . . .
_______
Text 'description'
_______
Data authorities .
Maximum users . .
. . . . . . . > QDLS________ Name
. . . . . . . > /QDLS______________________________________
. . . . . . .
QDLS_______________________________________
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
*RW
*NOMAX_____
*R, *RW
Number, *NOMAX
The Add NetServer Printer share Command
W ith the APF3812/ADDPRTSHR com m and you can share a printer on the System i.
Add NetServer Printer share (ADDPRTSHR)
Type choices, press Enter.
Share name . . . .
Output queue . . .
Library . . . .
Text 'description'
_______
Printer driver . .
_______
Spooled file type
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
__________
Name
__________
Name
*LIBL_____ Name, *LIBL
*OUTQ_____________________________________
. . . . . . .
'HP LaserJet III'_________________________
. . . . . . .
*USERASCII
*USERASCII, *AFP, *SCS
The printer driver is default ‘HP LaserJet III’ and describes a printer driver to use when
installing this printer on e.g. a PC.
The Change Netserver Attributes Command
The APF3812/CHGNETSVRA com m and can change the netserver nam e and dom ain of the
System i.
Related com m ands: DSPNETSVRA, STRNETSVR, ENDNETSVR and the netserver share
com m ands: ADDFILSHR, ADDPRTSHR and RMVNETSHR.
The Display Netserver Attributes Command
The APF3812/DSPNETSVRA com m and displays the netserver nam e and dom ain nam e used
for the System i. This can be used when configuring the netserver.
450
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Display NetServer Attributes
Server name
. . . . . . :
QS4449079
Domain name
. . . . . . :
WORKGROUP
Text . . . . . . . . . . :
Os/400
The End Netserver Command
The APF3812/ENDNETSVR com m and ends the netserver on the System i.
The Remove NetServer share Command
The APF3812/RM VNETSHR com m and can be used to rem ove a share of an object, that
previously has been added either by use of Operations Navigator or ADDFILSHR or
ADDPRTSHR.
The Start Netserver Command
The APF3812/STRNETSVR com m and can be used to start the Netserver on the System i without the use of Operations Navigator.
Save/Restore and Export/Import Commands
The Export Chart Command
Chart resources can not be exported and im ported in the usual way through the m enus. The
APF3812/EXPCHT can however save resources for a chart e.g. in the APFEXPORT library,
which then can be saved as a save file or as a PC file using the norm al export procedure.
This com m and is used in conjunction with the APF3812/IM PCHT com m and
W hen exporting and im porting charts the following m ust be noted:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Charts can only be exported by the APF3812/EXPCHT com m and.
Charts can not be renam ed or deleted (from the export library), when they are
exported.
Charts are not shown when viewing the resources in the export/im port libraries.
Charts can only be im ported using the APF3812/IMPCHT comm and.
Charts can be im ported several tim es from the APFIMPORT library.
The rebuild/journal function can not be used for charts.
Prior to execution of the com m and, it is required, that the APFEXPORT library has been
created. See how on page 384.
InterForm A/S 451
The Import Chart Command
The APF3812/IMPCHT com m and is used for im porting charts from the APFIMPORT library.
Previously the chart have to be exported using the APF3812/EXPCHT com m and.
W hen im porting it can be specified, wether or not an existing chart can be overwritten.
Im portant notes are stated below the description of the APF3812/EXPCHT com m and at page
451.
Prior to this com m and you have to im port resources into the APFIMPORT library. See how on
page 387.
The Restore Library from Folder Command
The com m and APF3812/RSTLIBFLR com m and is intended to be used for support purposes
to restore a com plete library from a folder, originally saved with the com m and
APF3812/SAVLIB2FLR.
Restore Library from Folder (RSTLIBFLR)
Type choices, press Enter.
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . SAVLIB
______ Name
From folder . . . . . . . . . . FROMFLR
_______________
___________________________________________
From document . . . . . . . . . FROMDOC
_______ Character value
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPTION
_______ *ALL, *NEW, *OLD, *FREE
Database member option . . . . . MBROPT
_______ *MATCH, *ALL, *NEW, *OLD
Allow object differences . . . . ALWOBJDIF _______ *NONE, *ALL
Restore to library . . . . . . . RSTLIB
_______ name, *SAVLIB
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The Save Library to Folder Command
The com m and APF3812/SAVLIB2FLR com m and is intended to be used for support purposes
to save a com plete library to a folder. The file created in the folder can then be sent as an
attachm ent to an E-m ail. The saved file can be restored with the com m and
APF3812/RSTLIBFLR.
452
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Save Library into Folder (SAVLIB2FLR)
Type choices, press Enter.
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . LIB
______
Name
To folder . . . . . . . . . . . TOFLR
______________________
_______________________________________________________________
To document . . . . . . . . . . TODOC
______
Character value
Replace document . . . . . . . . REPLACE ______
*NO
Target release . . . . . . . . . TGTRLS ______
*CURRENT
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The Save Library to Stream File Command
This com m and saves a library into a norm al save file and copies the save file into a stream file in
the IFS. You can e.g. restore library by placing the stream file in the folder system and use the
APF3812/RSTLIBFLR com m and. The APF3812/SAVLIBSTM F com m and looks like this:
Save library into stream file (SAVLIBSTMF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Library . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIB
__________
Name
Stream file name . . . . . . . .
TOSTMF
__________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________
Replace document . . . . . . . .
REPLACE
*NO_
*NO, *YES
Target release . . . . . . . . .
TGTRLS
*CURRENT
*CURRENT,*PRV,V3R1M0.
Data compression . . . . . . . .
DTACPR
*NO_
*NO, *YES
Save active . . . . . . . . . .
SAVACT
*NO_
*NO, *LIB
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
InterForm A/S 453
AFC and OSC Commands
The End Auto Forms Control Job Command
The APF3812/ENDAFCJOB com m and can be used for ending a specific Auto Form s Control
job. The job can either be stopped im m ediately or controlled. This com m and can be used in
conjunction with the APF3812/STRAFCJOB com m and.
The Start Auto Forms Control Job Command
The APF3812/STRAFCJOB com m and can be used for starting one specific Auto Form s
Control job. Using this com m and it is e.g. possible to schedule a CL-program calling this
com m and in order to start m erging and printing at a giving tim e.
Rem em ber, in order for the job to becom e active, it is necessary that the AUTO_FORM
subsystem is active. Refer to page 133.
The Start OSC Job Command
The APF3812/STROSCJOB com m and is equivalent to choosing option 1 = Run OSC for a
specific output queue, on the W ork with OSC definitions screen (see page 290).
Rem em ber, that in order for the job to becom e active it is necessary, that the OSCCTL
subsystem is active. Refer to page 284.
454
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Utilities relevant for AFC Exit programs
The Transform *AFPDS print Command
The APF3812/AFPTOASCII com m and converts AFPDS spool files to ASCII spool files.
This com m and operates in the sam e m anner as function 3 = Transform AFPDS to *USERACII
in Auto Form s Control. Description and lim itations can be seen at page 150.
Note, if you want to m ake use of this function, and the AFPDS spool files are using resource
libraries not listed in the system library list, then the job description, APF3812/AUTO_FORM
m ust be changed in order to include these libraries in the library list.
J TIP J
If you alternatively use the AFPDS spooled files directly in InterForm400 only the text visible
via DSPSPLF will be used, but all functions in InterForm400 are supported.
The APF3812 Overlay Merge Command
The com m and APF3812/APF3812 is intended to be included in CL-program s, so a spool entry
created in a program , can be m erged with an overlay within a job.
The com m and contains the following param eters: (Press F9 to display all the param eters including OUTDOC, OUTFLR and REPLACE.)
Merge spooled file and overlay (APF3812)
Type choices, press Enter.
InterForm 400 file set . . . . KARTSET
__________
Character value
Overlay name . . . . . . . . . KLICHE
__________
Character value
or Overlay Selector name . . . SELNAM
________
Character value
Primary/Secondary set . . . . VRSION
____
*PRI, *SEC
Spooled file . . . . . . . . . FILNVN
__________
Name, *NONE
Job name . . . . . . . . . . . JOB
__________
Name, *
User . . . . . . . . . . . .
___________ Name
Job number . . . . . . . . .
______
000000-999999
Spooled file number . . . . . SPLNBR
_____
Number, *ONLY, *LAST
Code page . . . . . . . . . . CODPAG
_____
Number, *INPUT
Unicode output . . . . . . . . UNICODEOUT *INPUT
*INPUT, *YES
Output queue . . . . . . . . . OUTQ
__________
Name, *JOB, *INPUT
Library . . . . . . . . . .
____________ Name, *LIBL
Form type . . . . . . . . . . FORMTYPE
__________
Character value, *STD,
Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . COPIES
______
01-255, *INPUT
Printer type . . . . . . . . . PRTTYP
__________
IBM4019, IBM4029,
Interface . . . . . . . . . . INTERF
__________
SYSTEM, SYSTEM850..
Output spooled file name . . . SPLFNAME
__________
Name, *INPUT
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAWER
________
*PRINTER, *INPUT,
Seperator drawer . . . . . . . SEPDRAWER
_____
*NONE, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
User data . . . . . . . . . . USRDTA
__________
Character value, *INPUT,
Hold output spooled file . . . HOLD
____
*NO, *YES
Save output spooled file . . . SAVE
____
*NO, *YES
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUT
_______
*PRINT,*VIEWER,*STMF,*OUTDOC
To stream file . . . . . . . . TOSTMF
______________________________________
___________________________________________
Output document . . . . . . . OUTDOC
____________
Character value
Output folder . . . . . . . . OUTFLR
______________________________________
___________________________________________
Replace document . . . . . . . REPLACE
*NO
*NO, YES
Bottom
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
F13=How to use this display
F24=More keys
InterForm A/S 455
The OUTPUT param eter is used to select what kind of output you want:
*PRINT
Using this value, the output is a m erge PCL spool file. The file is
placed in the output queue specified in the OUTQ param eter.
*VIEW ER
This will m erge and open Swiftview to display the result. (Should only
be used in an interactive job).
*STMF
Outputs to a stream file in the IFS. The TOSTMF field is to contain the
path and file nam e.
*OUTDOC
This value requires, the OUTDOC, OUTFLR and REPLACE
param eters to be filled out. A PCL file (nam e defined in OUTDOC) will
be created in the folder defined in OUTFLR.
The Copy CPI Spooled File Command
W hen you press F19-DSPPFM in overlay design you can see the tem porary file:
QTEMP/APF3812P. W ith the com m and APF3812/CPYCPISPLF you can create another file
with the sam e contents. It is m ainly intended for spooled files with variable CPI. The CPI of the
spooled file is placed in position 199-201.
The Page Builder Spooled File Command
Software developers can update a copy of an existing SCS spooled file by using the
InterForm 400 ® PageBuilder feature.
The Page Builder feature is invoked by entering the Create PageBuilder Spooled File
com m and (APF3812/CRTPBSPLF).
Prior to using the PageBuilder feature, a PageBuilder program m ust be created. This program
m ust be specified for the PAGBLDPGM param eter on the CRTPBSPLF com m and.
456
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Description of the Create PageBuilder Spooled File command, CRTPBSPLF
Create PageBuild Spooled File (CRTPBSPLF)
Type choices, press Enter.
PageBuilder program . . . . . . PAGBLDPGM
__________
Name
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
__________ Name
Data parameter definition:
DTAPARM
_
Find 'string' . . . . . . . .
__________
Value, *PAGE, *ANY
String length . . . . . . . .
*STR__
1-256, *STR
Return length . . . . . . . .
*STRLEN
1-256, *STRLEN
Minimum line . . . . . . . . .
______
1-255
Maximum line . . . . . . . . .
______
1-255
Minimum starting position . .
______
1-378
Maximum starting position . .
______
1-378
+ for more values
_
Spooled file . . . . . . . . . . FILE
__________
Name
Job name . . . . . . . . . . . . JOB
*_________
Name, *
User . . . . . . . . . . . . .
__________ Name
Number . . . . . . . . . . . .
______
000000-999999
Spooled file number . . . . . . SPLNBR
*LAST_ 1-9999,*ONLY,*LAST
Application ID parameter . . . . APPIDPARM
_______________________________
_______________________________________________
Output queue . . . . . . . . . . OUTQ
*INPUT____
Name, *INPUT
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
__________ Name, *LIBL
Form type . . . . . . . . . . . FORMTYPE
*INPUT____
Character value
Output spooled file name . . . . SPLFNAME
*INPUT____
Name, *INPUT
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
F13=How to use this display
•
First the CRTPBSPLF com m and calls the PageBuilder program (specified by the
PAGBLDPGM keyword) with param eter 1 = ‘STR’.
•
Then the CRTPBSPLF com m and reads all pages from the input spooled file specified
by the FILE, JOB and SPLNBR keywords.
•
For every page in the spooled file the PageBuilder program is called having param eter
1 = ‘PAG’ and param eter DATA01-DATA10 equal to the data found on the active page
according to the values for the DTAPARM keyword - unless you use *PAGE then the
contents of the current page is transferred in an array 378 char wide by 255.
•
The PageBuilder program now updates param eters (DATA01-DATA10) according to
program logic - or the array if you use *PAGE.
•
The CRTPBSPLF com m and creates a new page in a new SCS spooled file with the
updated values (DATA01-DATA10).
•
After processing all pages your PageBuilder program is called once m ore having
param eter 1=’END’
The param eters of the com m and are these:
PAGBLDPGM
The PageBuilder program that the com m and is to call for each page.
DTAPARM
Use this to define each of param eters DATA01-DATA10. Insert a '+' in
the first or last line to insert and define another DATA field. Each of
the DATA fields are defined like this:
Find 'string':
Type in e.g. *PAGE to transfer the contents of whole spooled file
page to the page builder program without the use of DATA01DATA10. Use of *ANY tells that you do not want to search after any
specific text. Other values are interpreted as a string to search for in
each spooled file page.
InterForm A/S 457
G NOTE G
If you use *PAGE for Find string, the rest of the fields for DTAPARM are ignored.
String length:
The length of the string to search for/com pare with in 'Find string'.
Use of *STR indicates that you want to use the length of the that
string.
Return length:
The num ber of characters to insert in the spooled file from the
DATAxx, that is returned from the page builder program .
M inimum/maximum line:
The interval of lines in the spooled file to search for the string. If you
know what line you want to use just specify this for both.
M inimum/maximum starting position:
The interval of positions to search in the spooled file for the 'Find
string'.
Pass data from position:
You can pass som e spooled file data from the line where the string of
text is found onto the page builder program (in DATAxx). Here you
state the starting position of this text. Use *STRPOS to use the
position where 'Find string' text is found.
Pass data length:
W orks like the previous field. This just determ ines the length of
the spooled file data to m ove to the page builder program .
FILE
Spooled file nam e of the *SCS spooled file to operate on.
JOB
Job nam e, user profile and job num ber of the spooled file.
SPLNBR
Spooled file num ber.
APPIDPARM
Application ID param eter. This is transfered onto the page builder
program as a param eter. This can be useful if you e.g. want to call the
sam e pagebuilder program from different uses of the CRTPBSPLF
com m and.
OUTQ
The output queue where the new and changed spooled file will be
created. *INPUT will m ake the com m and create the new spooled file
on the sam e output queue as the original spooled file.
FORM TYPE
The form type of the new, changed spooled file.
SPLFNAM E
The nam e of the new spooled file.
Example:
CRTPBSPLF
458
PAGBLDPGM(LIB1/BPSAMP)
DTAPARM((‘INVOICE NO’ 10 10 1 80 51 51) (*ANY 9 9 11 11 12
12))
FILE(QSYSPRT)
JOB(*)
SPLNBR(*LAST)
APPIDPARM(‘MY ID’)
OUTQ(DIAG)
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
This will process the last QSYSPRT spooled file for the current job, calling the program
BPSAMP in library LIB1 for every page in this spooled file.
Keyword DTAPARM describes where to find the values for param eters DATA01-DATA10 (see
PageBuilder program param eters below) which are passed to program BPSAMP.
(‘INVOICE NO’ 10 10 1 80 51 51) = specification of DATA01.
Value will be ‘INVOICE NO’ (or blank if not found in line 1-80 position 51).
Length = 10 characters.
Length = 10 characters, when returned from the program BPSAMP,
(*ANY 9 9 11 11 12 12) = specification of DATA02.
*ANY indicate whatever found (in line 11 position 12).
Pass 9 characters to program BPSAMP
Return 9 characters from program BPSAMP.
G NOTE G
The DATA01-DATA10 param eters can be used for searching for a specific text in the
spooled file. Note however that they return/find only the FIRST occurrence on the page.
PageBuilder program parameters
Parameter #
Length
Usage
Description
1
3
I
CRTPBSPLF call option STR, PAG or END
2
64
I
Value from the APPIDPARM keyword
3
256
I/O
DATA01 (input from spool file - DTAPARM)
4
256
I/O
DATA02 (input from spool file - DTAPARM)
.....
256
....
....
12
256
I/O
DATA10 (input from spool file - DTAPARM)
For exam ples of sources for a Page Builder Program see m em ber PAGBLDPGM and
PAGBLDPGM 2 in source file APF3812/APISRC. PAGBLDPGM 2 illustrates how to use the
*PAGE option.
The Convert PCL Spooled File Command
The APF3812/CVTPCLSPLF com m and converts a PCL spool file to a SCS spool file. This
com m and has been created m ainly for converting J.D. Edwards OneW orld spool files to SCS,
m aking it possible to m erge the spool file in InterForm 400 ®.
InterForm A/S 459
Convert PCL Spooled File (CVTPCLSPLF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Spooled file . . . . . .
Job name . . . . . . . .
User . . . . . . . . .
Number . . . . . . . .
Spooled file number . .
PCL command subset . . .
PCL application . . . .
Output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
User data . . . . . . .
Save output spooled file
Code page . . . . . . .
Input page width . . . .
Maximum page length . .
Maximum page width . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
FILE
JOB
SPLNBR
PCLSUBSET
PCAPPL
OUTQ
FORMTYPE
USRDTA
SAVE
CODPAG
INPWID
OUTPAGLEN
OUTPAGWID
F12=Cancel
__________
*_________
__________
______
*LAST_
001
*ANY_____
*INPUT____
__________
*INPUT____
*INPUT____
*INPUT
*INPUT_
*DFT____
255___
360___
Name
Name, *
Name
000000-999999
1-9999, *ONLY,.
001
*ANY, *ONEWORLD,
Name, *INPUT
Name, *LIBL
Character value
Character value
*INPUT,*YES,*NO
*INPUT, *SYSVAL,
1-28, *DFT, *A4,
10-255
80-360
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The Merge Spooled File IPL Command
W hen you want to m erge a spooled file and print the result on an IPL (Interm ec Printer
Language) com patible printer, then you should consider to m erge in Auto Form s Control and
use either printer type IPL203 or IPL300.
If you want to m erge the spooled file via a com m and, then you can consider the com m and:
APF3812/M RGSPLFIPL
The com m and is VERY sim ular to the MRGSPLFZPL com m and, so please refer to the
description of that com m and below on page 460 for further details.
The Merge Spooled File PDF Command
This com m and, APF3812/M RGSPLFPDF can be used for creating PDF files containing the
result of a m erge in InterForm 400 ®. This PDF file can even be e-m ailed as an attached file,
directly from your System i. See m ore inform ation at page 392.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule for InterForm 400.
The Merge Spooled File ZPL Command
The Merge Spooled File ZPL Com m and, APF3812/M RGSPLFZPL can be used e.g. to m erge
into a Zebra spooled file from an Auto Form s Control user exit program . This com m and is the
Zebra printer equivalent to the com m ands APF3812/APF3812 and APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF.
For details of the param eters see the APF3812/APF3812 com m and at page 455. Only
additional param eters com pared to the APF3812/APF3812 com m and are these:
Print mode
(PRINTM ODE):
*TEAROFF m ean that you will m anually tear of the labels.
*REW IND can be used for rewinding all printed labels onto another roll. This
requires special hardware installed.
*PEELOFF will print only one label at a tim e waiting for the current label to be
peeled off. (This also requires additional hardware).
*CUTTER (requires hardware cutter) norm ally cuts the m edia for each print
460
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
job unless you use *CONTINUOUS - then *CUTTER will cut out each label.
Labels / Continuous
(M EDIATRACK):
Controls the feed of the labels on the printer. Select *LABELS if the m edia
contains of separate labels. select *CONTINUOUS if the m edia is not
separated into labels (in this case you would probably select *CUTTER for the
print mode param eter). Other values are: *W EBLABEL
and *M ARKLABEL - for various ways to m ark the edge of a label on the
m edia.
M edia type
(M EDIATYPE):
Select *TRANSFER if you use a non heat sensitive m edia otherwise use
*THERM AL.
G NOTE G
Creation of ZPL output from InterForm 400 requires the purchase of the ZPL m odule for
InterForm 400.
The Print ASCII File Command
The APF3812/PRTASCF com m and prints a ASCII file to an output queue as a SCS spool file.
The ASCII file m ust be placed in IFS. The contents of the ASCII file m ust be PRTCTL(*FCFC),
which m eans the first character of each line is a control code for the printer. E.g. a ‘1' in
position 1 is specifying, that this line is to be printed as the first line of a new page. All other
lines m ust have a blank in this position.
This com m and can substitute the OS/400 com m ands: PRTASCSTMF and CVTPCLSPLF.
The input for CVTPCLSPLF and PRTASCF have to be sym bol set ISO-8859-1 (Latin 1).
The Split Spooled File Command
The com m and APF3812/SPLITSPLF m akes it possible to split an *SCS spooled file without
Auto Form s Control. You only identify the spooled file and an InterForm 400 split definition:
Split Spooled File (SPLITSPLF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Split definition . .
Job Name . . . . . .
User Name . . . .
Job Number . . . .
Spooled File Name .
Spooled File Number
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SPLITDEF
JOB
FILE
SPLNBR
F5=Refresh
__________
__________
__________
______
__________
*LAST
F12=Cancel
Name
Name, *
Name
000000-999999
Name
1-999999, *ONLY, *LAST
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
InterForm A/S 461
Split definitions will norm ally be executed through a function B in Auto Form s Control. Refer to
page 156 and 183 for m ore inform ation about that.
After running the SPLITSPLF com m and in your own program you can e.g. find the new
resulting spooled files if you give each resulting spooled file a unique spooled file nam e and
refer to the last created spooled file with that nam e created by the current job e.g.:
CHGSPLFA FILE(<Spooled file name>) JOB(*) SPLNBR(*LAST)
OUTQ(<Library>/<New output queue>)
Spooled File Inspector (SFI)
The purpose of this feature is, that InterForm 400 ® can look for a special string in a spool file
and change the form type of the spool file depending on wether the string was found or not.
This can be done without any program m ing.
To m aintain SFI definitions use the APF3812/W RKSFID com m and. (See Sam ple SFI
definition below). To use/run an SFI definition, enter a line in an Auto Form s Control definition
using function 8 (Call Program ), and specify program RUNSFI and library APF3812. (See
Description of the RUNSFI program below).
Create SFI definition
SFI110D
SFI definition . . . . . .
DEMO______
Description
. . . . . . .
My_test__________________________________________
Search text
Page . . .
Print line
Position .
.
.
.
.
Total_errors____0________________________________
*LAST_
*ANY, *FIRST, *LAST
1__ -_72
2__ -_18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
New form type
If text found . . . . .
- If not found . . . . .
*SAME
ERROR
Form type, *SAME
Form type, *SAME
W hen AFC invokes the RUNSFI program , it will look for a SFI definition having the sam e
nam e as the form type of the spooled file. (I.e. if the form type of your spooled file is DEMO,
the SFI definition nam ed DEMO will be used).
The RUNSFI program then scans the spooled file for the search text string specified in the SFI
definition (within the specified page-, line- and position-lim its).
If the text string was found, the form type of the spooled file will be changed to the value
specified in the 'New form type If text found' field. Likewise the form type will be changed to the
value specified in the '- If not found' field if the text string wasn't found.
Finally the RUNSFI program will hold and release the spooled file - in order to let AFC process
the spooled file with the new form type - unless the value for New form type is *SAME, then the
spooled file will not be held and released.
Note:
If a SFI definition with the nam e of the spooled file's form type doesn't exist - no action will be
perform ed. All com parisons in SFI are case sensitive - including the SFI definition / form type
com parison.
462
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Utility Commands relevant for E-mailing
The Clear Mail Log Command
The com m and Clear Mail Log (APF3812/CLRM AILLOG) is closely linked with the
APF3812/W RKMAILLOG com m and. W henever you e-m ail from InterForm 400 both the e-m ail
and the status of the e-m ail is stored in a log. If you want to purge old e-m ails and log entries
you can use the Clear Mail Log com m and. As default all entries older than 120 days will be
deleted when you run this com m and:
Clear Mail Log (CLRMAILLOG)
Type choices, press Enter.
Mimimum days old . . . . . . . . MINDAYS
OutBox directory . . . . . . . . OUTBOXDIR
Reorganize physical file mbrs . RGZ
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
120
*ALL
*NO
14-365
Name, *ALL
*NO, *YES
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The OUTBOXDIR (OutBox directory) can be used for specifying a specific sub directory
(within /APF3812Hom e/OutBox), if you only want to clean up a specific subdirectory. W ith
*ALL (default) all subdirectories will be cleaned for old e-m ails.
You can also decide to reorganize the m em bers of the physical files used for the m ail log with
this com m and. As default the m em bers are not reorganized. For a description of what
reorganizing is refer to the description of the OS400 com m and, RGZPFM .
The e-m ails are stored in /APF3812Mail/OutBox.
J TIP J
It is a REALLY good idea to run the CLRMAILLOG command on a regular basis to prevent
excessive disk usage as the e-mails will build up in /APF3812Home/OutBox.
The End Mail Subsystem Command
The com m and APF3812/ENDM AILSBS can be used for ending the APF3812/MAILINTER
subsystem which is used for InterForm 400 SMTP. Refer to page 304 for details. The
advantage of the ENDMAILSBS com m and com pared to norm al ENDSBS is e.g. that this will
run faster.
InterForm A/S 463
The Merge Spooled File PDF Command
This com m and, APF3812/M RGSPLFPDF can be used for creating PDF files containing the
result of a m erge in InterForm 400 ®. This PDF file can even be e-m ailed as an attached file,
directly from your System i. See m ore inform ation at page 392.
Refer to the description of the SNDEMAIL com m and above for a description of the fields
MSGSTMF and MSGVARS and how to refer to an htm l file in the IFS.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule for InterForm 400.
The Send E-mail command
The com m and APF3812/SNDEM AIL is a newer version of the APF3812/SNDMAIL com m and
with the m ain difference that the SNDEMAIL com m and is able to send to m ultiple receivers:
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
To email address:
TOADR
_
Email address . . . . . . . .
___________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*NONE______________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________ + for more values
_
Subject . . . . . . . SUBJECT
*NONE______________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F5=Refresh
F13=How to use this display
F10=Additional parameters
F24=More keys
More...
F12=Cancel
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
Message . . . . . . . MSG
*NONE______________________________________
___________________________________ *NONE, *STMF, *BLANK
+ for more values
___________________________________________
___________________________________
Message stream file . MSGSTMF
___________________________________________
______________
Message variables . . MSGVARS
___________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________
+ for more values
Mail text format . . .
Mail text adjustment .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
464
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
MAILTXTFMT *TEXT
MAILTXTADJ *NONE__
F5=Refresh
Version 2014
F12=Cancel
*TEXT, *HTML
*NONE, *CENTER, *RIGHT
More...
F13=How to use this display
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
Mail text embedded images
. . . MAILTXTIMG
*NONE
+ for more values
Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . ATTACH
*NONE
+ for more values
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
From email address:
FROMADR
*CURRENT
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save email . . . . . . . . . . . SAVE
Confirmation of delivery . . . . CFMDEL
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDX
+ for more values
Index library . . . . . . . . . IDXLIB
Archive directory . . . . . . . ARCDIR
Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
*NO
*NO
*NONE
More...
F13=How to use this display
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
Item type . . . . . . . . . . . ITMTYPE
Data:
DATA
Field . . . . . . . . . . . .
Value . . . . . . . . . . . .
+ for more values
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
InterForm A/S 465
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
Additional Parameters
CC email address:
Name or group
CC
. . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
*NONE
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Send email (SNDEMAIL)
Type choices, press Enter.
BCC email address:
Name or group
BCC
. . . . . . . .
*NONE
OutBox directory . . . . . . . . OUTBOXDIR
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Type ‘+’ in TOADR if you want to add another receiver.
The m essage can be typed into the MSG field or you can refer to an htm l file in the IFS if you
type *STM F in the M SG field and type the stream file nam e (htm l file) in the param eter
M SGSTM F. You can even substitute any variable (*V1-*V9) typed either in the MSG text or in
the SMTF referred to via MSGVARS. The first lines added as M SGVARS is substituted for *V1
the next for *V2 and so on..
Mail text form at (MAILTXTFMT) indicates how the m essage of the e-m ail is to be sent - either
as sim ple text (in a fixed font) or with htm l comm ands within.
If you are specifying your own htm l either in the MSG param eter or in the referred htm l file,
then you can also em bed local im ages directly in the htm l - instead of linking to im ages, that
are globally available . You can do that in two ways:
1.
State a directory in which all the local im ages inside the htm l are stored in the
MAILTXTIMG param eter. The htm l should then only refer to the im age file nam es like
e.g. <img src="bottom-banner1.jpg">.
2.
List the im ages in the MAILTXTIMG param eter like:
MAILTXTIMG('/pcdata/temp/png/Interform-01-01.png'
'/pcdata/temp/png/as400.jpg')
466
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
- and refer to the im ages by the num ber in the MAILTXTIMG param eter list inside the
htm l e.g. like so:
MSG('<b>This email is from InterForm 400! :)</b><br>'
'Here is an image:<br>'
'<img src="cid:image1" alt="Manual"><br>'
'Here is another image:<br>'
'<img src="cid:image2" alt="AS400">')
Rem em ber to specify the FROMADR as the default value, *CURRENT will refer to the em ail
inform ation stored in system directory of the user running the current job. If you forget you
m ight get this error m essage:
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
APF4705
Information
06/01/14
Severity . . . . . . . :
00
Time sent
14:33:29
. . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
Preferred name and SMTP-name not found for user <User>.
Add the missing information to the system directory for user <User>.
To solve this error you need either to specify the sender or alternatively update the needed
inform ation for the user profile running the current job e.g. via W RKDIRE.
If you want to send to an em ail group, you should state it like ‘TOADR((*GROUP
SALES_GRP))’, where MAIL_GRP is the nam e of the em ail group defined (written in capital
letters).
For archiving in InterArchive you should use the param eters:
ARCHIVE
The archive to archive in.
ITMTYPE
The Interarchive Item type to archive as.
DATA
Fields and corresponding data to use for archiving.
OUTBOXDIR states the subdirecory (if any) to use (inside /APF3812Hom e/OutBox) to store
the e-m ail. If you state *CURUSR the directory will be the sam e as the owner of the original
spooled file. The subdirectory will be created autom atically, if it does not exist.
The Send Mail Command
The APF3812/SNDM AIL com m and can be used for sending an E-m ail from the System i with
up to 30 attached files of your choice, but it does not support an InterForm 400 ® m erge in the
sam e m anner as APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF.
Note, that this com m and has the param eter: Confirm ation of delivery (CFMDEL). W ith this you
will get a confirm ation e-m ail when the receiver opens the e-m ail. Note however, that this
confirm ation does not work with e.g. Notes.
Refer to the description of the SNDEMAIL com m and above for a description of the fields
MSGSTMF and MSGVARS and how to refer to an htm l file in the IFS. Please note that the
htm l file referred to as MSGSTMF m ust be utf-8 encoded.
It is recom m ended to use the SNDEMAIL com m and above instead as SNDEMAIL com m and
can do the sam e as SNDMAIL - and send the em ail to m ultiple receivers.
The Send Mails Command
The Send Mails com m and (APF3812/SNDM AILS) is to be used only by installations, that have
chosen to use ‘3=InterForm SMTP (register only)’ in option ‘3. Configure email’ of the
InterForm 400 Configuration m enu (Refer to page 304). It will send out any e-m ails, that have
been registered to be sent.
W ith option ‘3=InterForm SMTP (register only)’ the e-m ails are only registered and stored
InterForm A/S 467
waiting for execution of the com m and APF3812/SNDMAILS. Use the
APF3812/W RKM AILLOG com m and to see any waiting e-m ail (they will have status *READY).
Refer to page 304 for inform ation of how to register e-m ails.
The Start Mail Subsystem Command
The APF3812/STRM AILSBS com m and can be used for starting the APF3812/MAILINTER
subsystem which is used for InterForm 400 SMTP. Refer to page 304 for inform ation of
InterForm 400 SMTP.
The Work Mail addresses Command
The APF3812/W RKM AILADR com m and enables the possibility to give access to
m aintenance of E-m ail addresses without entering the InterForm 400 ® m enues. These
addresses are used in com bination with the E-m ail finishing function - see page 221.
The com m and should be called with a param eter, MAILTASK, that identifies the E-m ail
finishing definition to work with.
The Work Mail Log Command
This com m and works exactly like the m enu option ‘5. W ork with em ail log’, which can be found
via ‘80. Adm inistering InterForm 400', ‘40. Em ail adm inistration’.
The com m and can be called with these param eters:
Work with mail log (WRKMAILLOG)
Type choices, press Enter.
Job name
User . .
OutBox .
Text . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
JOB
USER
OUTBOX
TEXT
*ALL
> *ALL
> INVOICES
*ALL
From email address . . . FROMADR
*ALL
To email address . . . . TOADR
*ALL
Status . . . . . . . . . STATUS
> *FAILED
Views . . . . . . . . . VIEWS
*ALL
+ for more values
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Name, *ALL
Name, *ALL
Name, *ALL
*ALL, *READY, *SENT...
*ALL, *SUBJECT, *FROMADR...
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
All of them selects a subset of the em ails except the VIEW S field. The VIEW S field can be
used for selecting which fields, that you want to include on the list of em ails. Possible values
are: *ALL,*SUBJECT, *FROMADR,*TOADR,*OUTBOX. You can select one or m ore of these
fields.
The W ork Mail Log Com m and (APF3812/W RKMAILLOG) shows a list of the e-m ails, that
have been sent:
468
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with email log
SMP100D
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
1=Send
3=Hold
5=Display
12=Work with receivers
Opt
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Date/time
11-27 16:47
11-27 16:48
11-27 16:50
11-27 17:11
11-27 17:12
11-27 17:14
11-27 17:15
11-27 17:23
12-13 10:52
12-13 14:53
12-13 14:54
F3=Exit
Date
Time
6=Release
11=Open email
Email text
Test *IBMSMTP
Test *IBMSMTP 2
Test *IBMSMTP 3
Test gennem IMAD01
Test gennem IMAD01
Test gennem IMAD01
Test gennem IMAD01
Test gennem IMAD01
test1
F5=Refresh
F11=View 2
Status
*IBMSMTP
*IBMSMTP
*IBMSMTP
*SENT
*SENT
*ERROR
*ERROR
*ERROR
*FAILED
*IBMSMTP
*READY
More...
F12=Cancel
F15=Subset
Possible statuses for e-m ails sent via InterForm 400 SMTP are:
*ERROR, *FAILED, *HELD, *READY, *RETRY, *SENT and com bined *RSEF.
E-m ails sent via OS400 SM TP cannot be m onitored in the sam e details so such e-m ails
always have the status *IBM SM TP to indicate that the e-m ail have been transferred onto the
OS400 SMTP/MSF servers.
The other statuses m eans this:
(See details via option 12=W ork with receivers if the status indicates a problem .)
*ERROR
Indicates that the e-m ail could not be sent. InterForm 400 SMTP tried once,
but got an error m essage back. Perhaps the receiving e-m ail account does
not exist?
*FAILED
Indicates that InterForm 400 attem pted to send the e-m ail m ore than once, but
after all retry attem pts the e-m ail still could not be sent.
*HELD
An e-m ail that have been registered to be sent (*READY), that have been held
via option 3=Hold. Refer to page 304 for inform ation of how to register em ails.
*READY
E-m ails that have been registered to be send later (via the
APF3812/SNDMAILS com m and). Refer to page 304 for inform ation of how to
register e-m ails.
*RETRY
InterForm 400 SMTP did not succeed in sending out the e-m ail in the first
attem pts but it is still trying...
*SENT
The e-m ail have been successfully sent via InterForm 400 SMTP.
*RSEF
This is a com bined status of e-m ails that are sent to m ultiple receivers. The
status includes som e of the letters R,S,E and F depending on the status of the
e-m ails sent to each receiver:
R is included if *RETRY or *READY is the status for at least one receiver.
S is included if *SENT is the status for at least one receiver.
E is included if *ERROR is the status for at least one receiver.
F is included if *FAILED is the status for at least one receiver.
W ith F15=Subset you can subset the list above to include only specific em ails. You can e.g.
chose to only see the em ails in error or em ails for a specific em ail address:
InterForm A/S 469
Subset list
Job name . . . . .
User . . . . . . .
OutBox . . . . . .
Subject . . . . . .
From email address
To email address .
From date/time . .
To date/time . . .
Status . . . . . .
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
present
[email protected]
DDMMYY HHMMSS
DDMMYY HHMMSS
*ERROR
*READY, *SENT, *RETRY,
*ERROR, *FAILED, *IBMSMTP
F12=Cancel
You could e.g. use the subset above to subset the list to only include em ails containing the
phrase “present” in the subject for the em ail address “santa_claus@ northpole.com ”, which are
in status “*ERROR”.
Regarding the status of the emails:
The em ail consists of 2 parts: user nam e and dom ain. The user nam e is to the left of the
@ -sign and then dom ain is to the right of the @-sign.
W hen you try to send an em ail, then there can be 3 error scenarios:
1)
2)
3)
The dom ain does not exist or the receiving m ail server does not answer within the
specified retries.
The dom ain exists, but the user nam e does not exist.
The syntax of the em ail address is wrong (e.g. m issing an @ -sign or invalid characters
are used).
Each scenario is handled like this:
1)
2)
3)
470
If the dom ain does not exist: You will get an error in the InterForm 400 m ail log - status
*ERROR or *FAILED.
If the dom ain exists and the user does not exist, then the status of the em ail will be
*SENT, but the em ail address, which is setup as the sender will receive an em ail
telling that the em ail could not be delivered. This scenario cannot be found in
InterForm 400 as the em ail goes directly to the sender.
If there is a syntax error in the em ail address e.g. a m issing @ -sign, then one of two
things can happen:
a)
If you on the em ail finish definition has selected option '13. Em ail address
syntax error handler' and here setup an em ail address which will receive those
em ails with a bad em ail address. The em ail will contain this as the subject:
'Syntax error in em ail address: <wrong em ail address>' and the rest of the
em ail (including attachm ents). The special subject is possible to use as a
condition e.g. in F15=Subset above.
b)
If you have not setup a syntax error handler as above, then you will get an
error m essage in the AFC job when you try send the em ail.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Other Utility Commands
The Edit Print Command
The APF3812/APFEDTPRT com m and m akes it possible to edit a spool entry before m erging
with an overlay.
Copy and edit print (APFEDTPRT)
Type choices, press Enter.
Input spool file . . . . . . .
Input output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . . .
Output queue for edited print
Library . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
. FILNVN
. FROMOUTQ
.
. TOOUTQ
.
F5=Refresh
*SELECT
_______
_______
_______
_______
F12=Cancel
Name, *SELECT
Name
Name, *LIBL
Name
Name, *LIBL
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
State the output from where you want to select the spooled file to be edited and on what output
queue you want to create the edited spooled file. After selecting the spooled file with '1' you enter
an editor (SEU) where you can change the contents as you please. W hen done with the editing
just press F3 and press Enter on the next screen to confirm the changes.
Notice the lim itations of the com m and:
1) This com m and uses SEU and has the sam e lim itations: Only up to 32764 lines can be
handled by this com m and.
2) Only spooled files up to 198 characters wide can be handled.
The APF Work Output Queue Command
The com m and APF3812/APFW RKOUTQ looks and acts like the W RKOUTQ com m and, except
that this com m and opens up a Swiftview window on the PC, if a spool file containing PCL codes
is displayed with option 5. If the spooled file contains ZPL codes, it is displayed as a PDF file.
Two other things differs from the standard OS/400 W RKOUTQ:
•
If you have used a PJL printer type in InterForm 400 when you did the m erge, you can
actually change PAGERANGE on the m erged PCL spooled file, if you change this
attribute through option 2 on this com m and. In this m anner you can print only a part of
the m erged spooled file. Note however, that the full spooled file will be downloaded to the
printer even though only a part will be printed. (This requires, that the printer is PJL
com patible).
•
If you select option 1=Send for a spooled file you will get this screen:
InterForm A/S 471
Output Queue
Queue:
APFOUTQD
AFC_INPUT2
Library:
APF381_A04
Status:
RLS
Type options, press Enter.
----------------------------------------------------------- ase
7=Messages
|
Send spooled file
|
|
|
|
Select one of the following options:
| s Form Type
Pty
|
|
DEMO
5
|
1. Send Network Spooled File
|
1001
5
|
2. Send PDF E-mail
|
1003
5
|
|
1004
5
|
|
|
|
|
Option: _
|
|
|
| F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
|
|
|
End
----------------------------------------------------------===>
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F5=Refresh
F9=Retrieve
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
F17=Top
F18=Bottom
F20=Writers
F21=Description
F22=Printers
So if the spooled file is *SCS you can use option 2 to m erge the spooled file with an overlay and
send the m erged PDF file as an attachm ent in an e-m ail. In this m anner you can send the e-m ail
interactively.
The APF Work Spooled Files Command
Sim ular to the APFW RKOUTQ com m and, the com m and APFW RKSPLF is an InterForm 400
version of an OS400 com m and - in this case W RKSPLF, with additional functionality. Refer to
the APFW RKOUTQ com m and above for a description of the extra functionality.
The Calibrate QLnnn+ Printer Command
The wireless QLnnn+ printers (e.g. the QL420+ printer) can be used via the QLZPL203 printer
type on the InterForm 400 m erges. The printer however is not able to calibrate when e.g. the
m edia is changed. To help you with that, the APF3812/CALIBQL (Calibrate Qlnnn+ Printer)
com m and have been added.
The com m and will create a spooled file, that will calibrate the printer when printed. You can e.g.
activate the save attribute of the spooled file so it can be released from the output queue
whenever a calibration is necessary. The com m and looks like this:
Calibrate QLnnn+ Printer (CALIBQL)
Type choices, press Enter.
Output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
Media type . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
472
F4=Prompt
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
Version 2014
OUTQ
FORMTYPE
HOLD
SAVE
MEDIA
F12=Cancel
*JOB______
__________
*STD______
*NO_______
*NO_______
*GAP_
Name, *JOB
Name, *LIBL
Character value
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
*GAP, *MARK
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
F24=More keys
The media type indicates the m edia used: *GAP m eans that the labels are separated by a gap,
and *M ARK indicates labels indicated by a m ark on the back of the m edia.
The Display Black/White image Command
The com m and, APF3812/DSPBW IM G can be used for graphically viewing a black and white
TIFF im age using SwiftView.
If the im age has been im ported to InterForm 400 ® via option 5. W ork with Im ages in the
Adm inistration Menu, only the param eters IMAGE and RESOLUTION has to be filled out (then
the TIFF im age is a m em ber in the APF3812/IMAGE file).
If the im age is not placed in the APF3812/IMAGE file, this im age can be viewed by stating *FILE
as the IMAGE param eter and the file and m em ber nam e as the FILE and MBR param eters.
Display Black/White image (DSPBWIMG)
Type choices, press Enter.
Image . .
Resolution
File . . .
Library
Member . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. > IMAGE
.
RESOLUTION
.
FILE
.
.
MBR
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
*FILE_____
300
__________
*LIBL_____
__________
Name, *FILE
75, 100, 150, 200,
Name
Name, *LIBL,*CURLIB,
Name
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The Display IP Address Command
If you program yourself you m ight want to know the ip-address of the connected 5250 session for
an interactive job. You can find that out via the Display IP Address com m and
(APF3812/DSPIPADR). The com m and have no param eters and displays the result like this:
Display IP address
Device name . . . . . . :
Device IP address . . . :
F3=Exit
QPADEV000F
222.2.1.100
F12=Cancel
InterForm A/S 473
The Display Unicode Spooled File Command
This com m and (APF3812/DSPUNISPLF) can be used for displaying special *SCS unicode
spooled files as defined in Appendix D on page 425. Only the characters represented in the
code page of the running 5250 session are displayed. Unsupported characters are shown as a
large square as below:
The param eters for the com m and are the sam e as for the DSPSPLF com m and. Note, that the
com m and have also been built into option 5=Display of the APF3812/APFW RKOUTQ com m and.
Encrypt InterForm400 PDF File
W ith this com m and (APF3812/ENCIFPDF) you can take an existing InterForm 400 PDF file and
copy it to another encrypted PDF file. You can add an owner password, which will enable any
function and a user password, that will open the PDF file with the restrictions stated under 'User
Access Lim itations'.
It is possible to encrypt som e PDF files, that have not been created by InterForm 400, but it
cannot be guaranteed, that all pdf files can be encrypted in this m anner.
G NOTE G
Password protection/encryption and/or digital signature of the PDF file requires a purchase of
the Digital Signature/PDF security m odule for InterForm 400.
Encrypt InterForm PDF File (ENCIFPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Input PDF File . . . . .
_____________________
Output PDF File . . . .
_____________________
Replace stream file . .
Owner Password . . . . .
______
User Password . . . . .
______
User Access Limitations
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
. . . . FROMPDF
__________________________________
. . . . TOPDF
__________________________________
. . . . REPLACE
. . . . OWNERPWD
*NO_
*NO, *YES
__________________________________
. . . . USERPWD
__________________________________
. . . . LIMITS
+ for more values
*NONE_____
__________
__________
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
*NONE,*NOPRINT,*NOCOPY,
*NOEDIT
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Note, that the input PDF file cannot be the sam e as the output PDF file.
The HP Macro Command
The com m and APF3812/HPM ACRO is intended to be included in your CL-program s or activated
from the com m and line. This com m and can only be used in relation to HP printers and
com patibles.
474
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The com m and gives you the possibility of down loading an overlay in the printer, where it is
stored as a m acro, which can either be printed autom atically on every succeeding page or
activated on m acro calls in your print data.
This com m and is very useful if you want to create an overlay that should be activated on all
pages printed from the printer, and when printing word processing docum ents containing
advanced features such as Justification, super/sub script, fonts etc.
The m acro can then be activated from a word processing docum ent (e.g. Office DisplayW rite
400) by inserting a com m and in the header or the footer text in the docum ent (e.g. on som e
interfaces you could enter the text /1B&f999y3X in a header text to add the overlay defined as
MACRO-ID 999 to the printout).
You can also have the m acro called as a sub-overlay from an overlay definition. This is done by
the ?=if...then com m and (see page 84). The overlay nam e entered in the If...then sentence
should be M ACROXXXXX where the XXXXX denotes the HP Macro ID entered into the
HPMACRO com m and.
Download overlay as a HP-macro (HPMACRO)
Type choices, press Enter.
InterForm 400 file set .
Overlay name . . . . . .
Printer type . . . . . .
Interface . . . . . . .
Macro-id (0 32767) . . .
Automatic on every page
Place into Flash Memory
Output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
KARTSET
KLICHE
PRTTYP
INTERF
MACROID
AUTOMATIC
FLASHMEM
OUTQ
FORMTYPE
______ Character value
______ Character value
______ IBM4019, IBM4029, IBM4039...
______ SYSTEM, SYSTEM850, ASCIIR8...
______ 0-32767
______ *NO *YES
______ *NO *HP4 *IBM4039
______ Name, *JOB
_______ Name, *LIBL
______ Character value
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
KARTSET:
Defines the nam e of the file-set, in which you have defined the overlay
you wish to download as an HP m acro.
KLICHE:
Is the nam e of the overlay you wish to download.
PRTTYP:
States the printer type you wish to use. If you are using another printer
type than the ones listed in PRTTYP you should select HP4. Refer to
page 421 for further inform ation on the printer types.
INTERF:
This param eter is no longer used.
M ACROID:
An HP m acro m ust be given an ID in the interval 0-32767. The printer
can store a num ber of different m acros. If a m acro is down loaded
with the sam e m acro ID as one already resident in the printer, the new
m acro definition will override the old one. If you choose to work with
several m acros in the printer sim ultaneously you should num ber the
m acros unam biguously.
AUTOM ATIC:
This param eter defines if the m acro should be executed on all pages
(*YES) or only when called from a m acro definition incorporated in the
print data (*NO).
FLASHM EM :
This param eter indicates if the m acro should be stored in e.g. the
optional Flash SIMM m odule on a printer. Valid values are:
InterForm A/S 475
*No
*HP4
= Only downloaded to the m em ory of the printer.
= Store in HP Flash SIMM.
OUTQ:
Here the output queue for the final printout is stated. The m acro will
be transform ed into a spool-entry with the filenam e MACROnnnnn,
where nnnnn is the m acro ID. The description of the spool entry will
be the nam e of the overlay.
FORM TYPE:
This is the form s type you want the m acro to have when placed as a
spool-entry on the output queue defined by OUTQ.
The output will be placed in the output queue with status HOLD(*YES) and SAVE(*YES).
W hen you wish to download the m acro you only have to release the spool entry.
The Import InterForm400 Resources Command
W ith this com m and you can im port InterForm 400 resources directly into production (into the
APF3812 library) without a lot of m enu selections:
Import InterForm resources (IMPAPFRSC)
Type choices, press Enter.
Save file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . .
Transfer to production
Display errors . . . .
Stream file name . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
SAVF
TFRPROD
DSPERR
STMF
__________
*LIBL
*YES
*YES
F12=Cancel
Name
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*YES, *NO, *PROMPT
*YES, *NO
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Refer to page 564 for m ore inform ation of this com m and.
The PCL-file from folder to Member Command
The APF3812/PCLTOM BR com m and can be used for inserting one or several PCL files (from
a folder) into a physical file as m em bers. The PCL files can be specified as generic or *ALL.
476
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
PCL-file from folder to member (PCLTOMBR)
Type choices, press Enter.
From folder . . . . . . . .
_________________
From PC-file name . . . . .
From PC-file extension . . .
To physical file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Member prefix . . . . . . .
Add extension to member name
Delete PC-file after copying
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
. .
FROMFLR
_____________________________
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DOCNAM
EXTENSION
OUTFILE
________
____
__________
*LIBL_____
_____
*NO__
*NO__
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F5=Refresh
PREFIX
MBREXT
DLTDOC
F12=Cancel
Char, generic*,
Char, generic*,
Name
Name, *LIBL
A - Z , *NONE
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
A m em ber prefix can be specified (A-Z or *NONE). If the prefix is a letter, the m em ber nam e
of the PCL files will then be the nam e of the PC file preceded by this character.
Note, that in order to be able to use the PCL files when designing overlays, the PC files have
to be placed as m em bers in the APF3812/PCL file (for Black and white) or the
APF3812/PCLCOL file (for colour files).
PCL files not placed in PCL and PCLCOL can only be used by inserting &&-com m ands in the
spool file.
TIF files can be inserted with a sim ular com m and, as seen at page 481.
The Print PCL-member Command
This com m and can be used in conjunction with PCL files, that are already installed in
InterForm 400. W ith this com m and you can print such an installed black/white PCL file:
Print PCL-member (PRTPCLMBR)
Type choices, press Enter.
Member . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . .
Top offset . . . . . . .
Left offset . . . . . .
Output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
Paper Size . . . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . .
Output spooled file name
Drawer . . . . . . . . .
User data . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MEMBER
ROTATION
TOPOFFSET
LEFTOFFSET
OUTQ
FORMTYPE
SIZE
COPIES
SPLFNAME
DRAWER
USRDTA
HOLD
SAVE
F5=Refresh
__________
0__
0_____
0_____
*JOB______
__________
*STD______
*A4_______
1__
*MEMBER___
*PRINTER__
*MEMBER___
*NO_
*NO_
F12=Cancel
Name
0, 90, 180, 270
-1200-1200
-1200-1200
Name, *JOB
Name, *LIBL
Character value, *STD
*LETTER,*LEGAL,*LEDGGER
1-255
Name, *MEMBER
1-255, *PRINTER
Character value, *MEMBER
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
(After installation and preparation the installed B/W PCL files are saved as m em bers in the
PCL file in InterForm 400). The unit used for displacem ent is dots m easured in 300 dots per
inch. A negative value for an offset will m ove the PCL file up/left com pared to the original.
InterForm A/S 477
Rem em ber, that any top m argin is rem oved from the PCL as a part of the install in
InterForm 400.
The Print PDF file Command
The com m and PRTPDF enables you with the possibility to print a pdf file directly on the
System i.
Print PDF file (PRTPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
From IFS path name . . . . . . . PATH
> '/apf3812home/view/kse.pdf'
Output format
> *SCS
*PCL,*PCLCOLOR,*PCLGREY..
> *JOB
*STD
PDFPRINT
PDFPRT
*NO
*NO
*A4
1
*PRINTER
Name, *JOB
Name, *LIBL
Character value, *STD
Name
Character value,*INPUT..
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
*INPUT, *LETTER, *LEGAL..
1-255
1-256, *PRINTER
*NO
*NO, *YES
. . . . . . . . . OUTFMT
Output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
Output spooled file name
User data . . . . . . .
Hold output spooled file
Save output spooled file
Paper Size . . . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . .
Drawer . . . . . . . . .
To stream file . . . . .
Replace stream file
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OUTQ
FORMTYPE
SPLFNAME
USRDTA
HOLD
SAVE
SIZE
COPIES
DRAWER
TOSTMF
. . . . . . REPLACE
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
More...
F13=How to use this display
Print PDF file (PRTPDF)
Type choices, press Enter.
Right Adjust Version . . . . . . ADJUSTVER
Code page . . . . . . . . . . . CODPAG
Windows PC . . . . . . . . . . . WINPC
*NONE
037
*SELECT
Windows printer
*SELECT
. . . . . . . . WINPRT
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The special fields of the com m and are explained below:
OUTFM T
478
The output form at (OUTFM T) defines the form at of the spooled file generated.
*PCL
Print the PDF file in black/white PCL5.
*PCLCOLOR Print the PDF file in color PCL (PCL5c).
*PCLGREY
Print the PDF file in grey PCL5.
*PDF
Prints the PDF file as a PDF spooled file. Note, that PDF
spooled files can only be printed on printers, that supports the
PDF printer data stream .
*TXT
Converts the PDF file into a text file (stream file) as specified
in TOSTM F.
*SCS
Prints the PDF file as an *SCS spooled file. Notice the
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
*W INPRINT
ADJUSTVER field to adjust the process.
Prints the PDF file through W inPrint as specified on the
W INPC and W INPRT fields. Notice, that the value *SELECT
for the W INPC and W INPRT fields should only be used for
interactive jobs!
Notice that it is not guaranteed that all PDF files can be printed via this com m and. Encrypted
pdf files (that are not protected with a password) can be printed.
InterForm A/S 479
The Print TIFF File Command
Use the com m and, APF3812/PRTTIFF to print TIFF file placed in the IFS. The TIFF file m ust
be black/white and in a form at supported by InterForm 400. Refer to page 354 for a list of the
supported TIFF form ats.
Print TIFF file (PRTTIFF)
Type choices, press Enter.
From IFS path name . . .
___________________
Output queue . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . .
Form type . . . . . . .
Paper Size . . . . . . .
Copies . . . . . . . . .
Drawer . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . .
Resolution . . . . . . .
Shrink to fit print.area
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
PATH
_________________________________________
OUTQ
*JOB______
__________
*STD______
*A4_______
1____
*PRINTER
*AUTO
*AUTO
*NO
FORMTYPE
SIZE
COPIES
DRAWER
ROTATION
RESOLUTION
SHRINK
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Name, *JOB
Name, *LIBL
Character value, *STD
*LETTER, *LEGAL, *LEDGGER...
1-255
1-256, *PRINTER
*AUTO, 0, 90, 180, 270
*AUTO, 75, 100, 150, 200...
*NO *WIDTH *HEIGHT *BOTH
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The Print X-Ref List Command
The com m and APF3812/PRTXREF prints a list of all InterForm 400 resources and lists any
reference to each resource including the autodownload specifications. Refer to page 379 for
m ore inform ation of this list. The com m and has no param eters - it prints to the default output
queue of the job.
The Retrieve Data Queue Information Command
The com m and, APF3812/RTVDTAQI (Retrieve Data Queue Inform ation) can be used for
retrieving the sequence of a data queue. Data queues are used in Auto Form s Control, so the
setup effects the sequence in which the incom ing spooled files are handled. The sequence
should norm ally be SEQ(*FIFO) - First In First Out.
The Start Screen Attention Command
The com m and APF3812/STRSCNATN provides you the possibility to call predefined functions
when pressing the <Escape> key on the current call level. The functions are to be defined via
the com m and W ork with Screen Definitions (APF3812/W RKSCNDFN) - refer to page 482 for
inform ation of this com m and.
The APF3812/STRSCNATN com m and can e.g. be included in the initial program of the
relevant users. (Rem em ber to use MONMSG so the users can sign on even during an
upgrade of InterForm 400...).
The com m and looks like this:
480
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Start Screen Attention (STRSCNATN)
Type choices, press Enter.
Command
. . . . . . . . . . . . CMD
Default program . . . . . . . DFTPGM
Library . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
> GO MENU(MAIN)
> *ASSIST
F12=Cancel
Name,*USRPRF,*ASSIST,*NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
Above the com m and ‘GO MAIN’ is issued after the function has been activated. If the user
press <Escape> on a screeen that is not looked for in the definitions defined in W RKSCNDFN,
then the default program is called - above the ASSIST m enu is run.
Refer to page 568 in Appendix Q for an exam ple of how this can be used.
The TIF-file from folder to member Command
The APF3812/TIFTOMBR com m and can be used for inserting one or several TIF files (from a
folder) as m em bers in a physical file. The TIF files can be specified as generic or *ALL.
TIF-file from folder to member (TIFTOMBR)
Type choices, press Enter.
From folder . . . . . . . .
_________________
From PC-file name . . . . .
From PC-file extension . . .
To physical file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . . . . .
Member prefix . . . . . . .
Add extension to member name
Delete PC-file after copying
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
. .
FROMFLR
_____________________________
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DOCNAM
EXTENSION
OUTFILE
________
____
__________
*LIBL_____
_____
*NO__
*NO__
F5=Refresh
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PREFIX
MBREXT
DLTDOC
F12=Cancel
Char, generic*,
Char, generic*,
Name
Name, *LIBL
A - Z , *NONE
*NO, *YES
*NO, *YES
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
A m em ber prefix can be specified (A-Z or *NONE). If the prefix is a letter, then the m em ber
nam e of the TIF files will be the nam e of the PC file preceded by this character.
Note, that in order for being able to use the TIF files when designing, the PC files have to be
placed as m em bers in the APF3812/IMAGE file.
TIF files not placed in IMAGE can only be used by inserting &&-com m ands in the spool file.
PCL files can be inserted with a sim ular com m and, as seen on page 476.
InterForm A/S 481
The Work with Profile Jobs Command
The APF3812/W RKPRFJOB com m and can be used to list all active jobs for a specific user
profile. This com m and will also display all server jobs serving this user profile.
Server jobs are used for the Graphical Designer and this com m and can be used for ending all
jobs for a user profile is necessary. This is the list shown (if e.g. you have the graphical
designer running for this user profile):
Work with Job
WRKPRFJO
Position to . . . . . .
__________
Job name
Type options, press Enter.
5=Work with
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Job name
QGYSERVER
QNPSERVS
QNPSERVS
QPADEV000B
QRWTSRVR
QZHQSSRV
QZRCSRVS
User
QUSER
QUSER
QUSER
KSE
QUSER
QUSER
QUSER
Job number
029983
029837
029972
029982
029849
029843
029956
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Use option ‘5' to work with a job and then option 41 to end the job if wanted. If you want to
release a lock of overlay in InterForm 400 you can also do that in InterForm 400 by selecting
option ‘80. Adm inistering InterForm 400' followed by ‘50. W ork with Designer job overlay locks’
and ending the job locking the relevant overlay.
Work with Screen Definitions
The com m and APF3812/W RKSCNDFN (W ork with Screen Definitions) can be used for
defining actions on various screens when the <Escape > (or Attention) key is pressed. The
com m and has no param eters and when run you will see this:
Work with screen definitions
Position to . . . . . .
Required library . .
Screen definition
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
Screen
COPY_SPLF
WRKACTJOB
APFMENU
Req.lib
*NONE
*NONE
APF3812
SCR100D
5=Display
Description
Copy spooled file via SNDTCPSPLF from APFWRKOUTQ
Joblog as PDF in E-mail from WRKACTJOB
Enter InterForm400 from Main if APF3812 is in LIBL
End
F3=Exit
482
F5=Refresh
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
F6=Create
Version 2014
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
Above we have defined actions for 3 different screens. A screen definition looks like this:
(Use <Page Down> to view the second screen)
Change screen definition
SCR110D
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
APFMENU
APF3812
Description
Enter InterForm400 from Main if APF3812 is in LIBL
. . . . . . .
Name
Name, *NONE
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
AND/OR
Line
1
Pos.
33
Opr.
EQ
Compare value
OS/400 Main Menu
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
(Here we only want to call this function IF we are on the OS/400 Main Menu screen AND the
APF3812 library is in the library list of the job). If the ‘Required library’ field is *NONE then no
special library is required (in the library list).
W hat to do is defined on the next screen:
Change screen definition
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
APFMENU
APF3812
Command
APF3812/APFMENU KARTSET(&A)
. . . . . . . . .
SCR110D
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G
&H
&I
Line
20
Pos.
7
Len
10
Description
File set
End
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Here the first 10 characters from the com m and line is taken as used as identification of the file
set that you want to work with. You can use the variables &A to &I on the com m and in the top.
To invoke the com m ands in a specific job you need to run the APF3812/STRSCNATN
com m and, which will activate the function in the current call level. You can find inform ation of
the STRSCNATN (Start Screen Attention) on page 480.
For a few exam ples of how to im plem ent and use the APF3812/W RKSCNDFN and
APF3812/STRSCNATN com m ands please refer to page 568 in Appendix Q.
InterForm A/S 483
Work with Stream File Locks
W ith this com m and (APF3812/W RKSTMFLCK) you can list which jobs, that has a lock on a
certain file in the IFS. You state the path as the only param eter. Here you can see any job, that
locks the object:
Work with Stream File Locks
Position to . . . . . .
WRKSTMFL
Job name
Type options, press Enter.
5=Work with job
Opt
_
Job name
QZLSFILE
User
QUSER
Job number
074244
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
From this screen you can select to work with the job that has the lock e.g. in order to end it. Be
sure, that you are not causing a problem by ending the job - it m ight be doing som ething
im portant...
The Unzip to current directory Command
This com m and unzips a zip file into the current directory (after it is changed). The com m and
APF3812/UNZIP can be used for unzipping files in the IFS. It can e.g. be used for installations
where you have a lim ited bandwidth connection to the iSeries. W ith this com m and you can
upload/FTP a zip file onto the IFS and then unzip it before you use it.
Note: Licensed program 5722JV1 Java development kit is required in order to run this
com m and.
The com m and have 2 param eters:
484
ARCHIVE - path to archive
This is the path and file nam e of the zip file
e.g.’/PCDATA/MYFILE.ZIP’.
CURDIR - current directory
The current directory is tem porarily changed to this and the
unzipped file(s) are placed here e.g. ‘/unzip’. If the com m and
halts with an error or otherwise stopped during execution,
then this will be the current directory on return.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The Zip Stream File(s) Command
The APF3812/ZIP com m and can be used for zipping (com pressing) stream files in IFS or
folders (QDLS).
ZIP stream file(s) (ZIP)
Type choices, press Enter.
Archive path . . . . . . . . . . ARCHIVE
__________________
Create / Add to archive . . . . CREATE
_______________________________
*CREATE
*CREATE, *ADD
Current directory . . . . . . . CURDIR
_______________________________
_________________
From stream file . . . . . . . . FROMSTMF
_______________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Work dir, if FROMSTMF is /QDLS
WORKDIR
_______________________________
__________________
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
Archive path
Create / Add
Current
directory
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
This is the path and nam e of the archive (the zipped file). This m ust have the
extension ‘.zip’.
This specifies if you want to add files to the archive. If you select *CREATE
the file will be replaced if it already archived.
This directory will be added in front of the path stated in ‘From stream file’.
This com m and:
APF3812/ZIP ARCHIVE(‘/ZIPDIR/ARCH1.ZIP’) +
CURDIR(‘/MYDIR’) FROMSTMF(‘/STATEMENT/*’)
This will zip all files in the directory ‘/MYDIR/STATEMENT’ and in the
archive the files will be nam ed ‘/STATEMENT/file.ext’.
From stream
file
W ork
directory
This is the path and nam e of the file(s) to be zipped. If you are zipping file(s) in
the folder system (QDLS) this can only hold the file nam e, the path should be
stated in ‘current directory’. Generic nam es can be used e.g. ‘*’ and ‘A*.*’.
If you want to archive files placed in the folder system (QDLS) you need to
state a work directory. InterForm 400 ® will create a tem porary subdirectory in
the work directory called ZIP_nnnnnn, where nnnnnn is the jobnum ber, which
is rem oved before the com m and ends.
InterForm A/S 485
Appendix J - Handling InterWord400TM Spooled Files
If the system should operate with InterW ord400, you should be aware that som e specific word
processing features will disappear from the spooled file during m erge with an InterForm 400 ®
overlay - if you use conditions, tabulators, rem ap windows or other sim ular functions in your
overlays.
The features in question are sub-script, super-script, font changes and justification. The
reason is that OS/400 does not allow these attributes with the Copy spool file function, which
is one of the basic operations of the InterForm 400 ® system . OS/400 will report a m essage if
such unsupported attributes are found in the spool entries when the Copy spool file operation
is carried out.
There are, however, two ways to avoid using the Copy spool file operation and still add
overlays to InterW ord400 spooled files.
1. M erging with InterW ord400 spooled files with limited overlay features
Merge in Auto Form s Control or 3. Merge spool entry with overlay are used as norm al, but the
overlay m ust not include any of the following elem ents:
Tabulators
Rem ap W indow
If-then statem ents
Copy m anagem ent
Extended page definition
Besides this, Finishing functions are not allowed. In addition the m ain overlay definitions Line
Spacing, Rotation, Font and Drawer should all be set to *INPUT.
InterForm 400 ® will add the overlay and m ake conversions of the advanced word processing
features of the Office Spool file (SCS/DCA). If however just one of the above restrictions are
not obeyed the spool file will be regarded as a norm al SCS spool entry, and the advanced
features will be ignored.
J TIP J
A good idea is to make use of the overlay selector possibility for InterW ord400 spooled files.
You can include information in line 1 of the spooled file via the PAGDTA field on the
DCA400/PRTPCD command. (This command is used for printing in InterW ord400).
2. Dow nloading the overlay as a macro
The overlay should be downloaded as a HP m acro and the com m and APF3812/HPMACRO
(see page 474) should be used to create the spool entries containing the HP m acro. The
m acro can then be called directly from the docum ent by inserting a call com m and in the
header or footer text.
Note that this m ethod neither uses Auto Forms Control nor the interactive merge with option
3. M erge spool entry with overlay.
Limitations for InterWord400 spooled files
InterW ord400 spooled files are quite special so they need to be handled in a special way in
InterForm 400. This m eans that not all functions in InterForm 400 are supported for
InterW ord400 spooled files.
486
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The special functions supported for InterW ord400 spooled files are:
•
•
•
•
Use of soft fonts
Creation of both PCL and PDF output - if you use MRGSPLFPDF to create the PDF
files.
Output Schedule Control
Overlay selectors: Please note that only inform ation in line 1 of the spooled files
(generated via the PAGDTA field on the DCA400/PRTPCD com m and) are placed in
fixed positions so they can used for conditions in e.g. overlay selectors
Special functions that are unsupported for InterW ord400 spooled files are:
•
•
•
Split definitions
Sort definitions
Finishing definitions
Please ask you local InterForm 400 contact if you want to use an InterForm 400 function for
InterW ord400 spooled files that are not listed above.
InterForm A/S 487
Appendix K - Forms Server for non-System i
environments
InterForm 400 ® can act as a Form s Server for other environm ents, such as W indowsNT, UNIX,
Novell etc.
For instance it is possible with iSeries Access to create a printer in W indows, which directs
print jobs either as PCL (datatype *ASCII) or print jobs which has been converted to SCS
(datatype *SCS) to an System i attached printer. The latter function was originally designed for
printing PC print jobs on twinax printers, but can be used as input for InterForm 400 ® to print
electronic form s.
Adding Overlays to *SCS PC Print Jobs (PC Mail Merge)
This function is a popular way of doing large m ailings with advanced graphics. For exam ple
the norm al situation when m erging database records with a graphical MS-W ord docum ent is,
that each page in the resulting output will have all graphics included. This takes long tim e to
process on both the PC and the printer, it requires lots of hard disk space and not least, it
generates a lot of network traffic.
W ith InterForm 400 ®, you can load the form docum ent as an overlay and send the data records
as a sim ple SCS print job to a queue m onitored by InterForm 400 ®. This is an extrem ely
effective way of m aking large m ailings.
The following is a short description of the procedure for setting up the environm ent in W indows
with iSeries Access:
1.
In W indows Click Start, Printer and Click the “Add Printer” icon. The sam e printer
should be used as input to InterForm 400 ®. Tag “Network Printer” and click Continue,
Locate your System i under the “iSeries Access network” and chose a printer on the
System i.
Note: If no printers are displayed (if all printers are defined as rem ote writers), or if you
do not have a printer available on the System i to use as input queue to Auto Form s
Control, you m ust create a “dum m y” writer. This autom atically creates an output
queue, which you can use as input queue to AutoForm sControl:
CRTDEVPRT DEVD( LAN_FSP) DEVCLS(*VRT) TYPE(3812)
MODEL(1) FONT(11) ONLINE(*NO)
The printer installation wizard will now ask you to select a driver for the printer. Select
an older twinax printer type like an IBM 5256 or IBM 4214. Now finalise the add printer
wizard.
2.
488
Create a sim ple form s docum ent in e.g. MS-W ord to m erge the data into. This form s
docum ent should be without any form atting. It should contain nothing but the fields
where the data from the data source are inserted. Now m erge the data source with
this form s docum ent, and send the m erged docum ent to the printer created in step 1.
The spool file would look like this on the System i:
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
DISPLAY SPOOL FILE
File . . . . . :
QPRINT
Page/Line 1/800
Function . . . .
Columns
1 - 78
Search for . . .
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
Florence Flowers
Tulip Road 16
4000 Marigold
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Susan Sunflower
Forrest Friends Inc.
Oak Street 88
4000 Marigold
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Archie Acorn
Herring Marine Research
Seaweed Street 14
9000 Battleaxe
DK-Denmark
--------------------Att: Martin Merman
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
F19=Left
F20=Right
F24=More keys
3.
Create the form s docum ent in e.g. MS-W ord , which you want to use as m ail letter, but
do not include any codes for position of m erge records (address field). Now create an
InterForm 400 ® overlay including this docum ent. Refer to section Importing PCL
Overlay from PC Print File page 360, on how to im port the docum ent as an overlay
in InterForm 400 ®.
4.
Locate the spool file from step 2 on the System i, and use it to insert rem ap lines in the
overlay created in step 3.
5.
You can now either m ake a m anual m erge of the overlay with the form s docum ent and
the spool file, or you can activate Auto Form s Control on the queue for which you
created the printer in step 1.
Adding overlays to *ASCII PC printjobs (PCL)
InterForm 400 ® only requires the spool entry to be of data type *ASCII, and the input data to be
PCL4, PCL5 or PCL5e (Including PCL color com m ands). InterForm 400 ® will add an overlay to
the print job while m aintaining the form atting of the docum ent. Therefore the following overlay
com m and lines will be ignored:
Tabulators
Rem ap W indow
If-then statem ents
Copy m anagem ent
Extended page definition
InterForm 400 ® will also ignore all global settings of the overlay (used for pre-form atting
variable spool data) except for the ROTATION. W hen defining *INPUT for ROTATION
InterForm 400 ® will detect the PCL orientation com m and in the spool file, and print the overlay
with the sam e orientation.
Merging of overlays and data can be done by either the APF3812 CL com m and, interactively
with 3. Merge spool entry with overlay, or by Auto Form s Control.
The overlay selected for m erge in InterForm 400 ® will be applied to all pages in the PCL
(*ASCII) spool entry. Should you require another overlay to be applied to specific pages in the
PCL spool entry, you can insert the text string “##overlaynam e” in the docum ent.
InterForm 400 ® will pick this overlay instead of the one defined in the m erge definition, but will
InterForm A/S 489
pick it from the sam e file set. Note that the string “##overlaynam e” m ust be written in the
docum ent with a font that is resident in the printer (e.g. Courier).
In order to avoid the overlay to be added to certain pages in the overlay, you m ust create an
em pty overlay (eg. with the nam e “blank”), and insert the text “##blank” on all pages which
should be printed without overlay. Alternatively, you can define the m erge on the System i to
use the overlay “blank”, which m eans all pages in the spoll entry which do not specifically have
an overlay call (##overlaynam e) will be printed without overlay.
Defining a Virtual printer in iSeries Access:
In W indows Click Start, Printer and Click the “Add Printer” icon. The sam e printer should be
used as input to InterForm 400 ®. Tag “Network Printer” and click Continue, Locate your System
i under the “iSeries Access network” and chose a printer on the System i.
Note: If no printers are displayed (if all printers are defined as rem ote writers), or if you
do not have a printer available on the System i to use as input queue to Auto Form s
Control you m ust create a “dum m y” writer. This autom atically creates an output
queue, which you can use as input queue to Auto Form s Control:
CRTDEVPRT DEVD(DUMMY) DEVCLS(*VRT) TYPE(3812) MODEL(1) FONT(11)
ONLINE(*NO)
The printer installation wizard will now ask you to select a driver for the printer. Select
a PCL driver that corresponds to the PCL em ulation supported by the laser printer
connected to the System i.
M WARNING M
Note that the each page in the *ASCII spool entry must not exceed 80kb. If you receive an
error because of this, you should try to remove elements, especially graphics, in order to stay
within this limit.
J TIP J
You can convert a ASCII file in IFS into a SCS spool file by using the command
APF3812/PRTASCF. See page 461.
490
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix L - PDF and PCL Viewing
The PCL Viewer SwiftView included with InterForm 400 ® will display PCL spool files with data
type *USERASCII containing PCL5 and PCL5e data. This is a true W YSIW YG feature, which
is unique for verifying results of form s design, and to view the contents of spool files in the
System i output queues, that has been m erged with InterForm 400 ® overlays.
G NOTE G
For easy design of your overlays you can also install a graphical designer on your PC. Refer
to page 522 for m ore details.
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule for InterForm 400.
PDF viewing:
If you have Acrobat Reader (or another PDF file viewer) installed on your PC you can also
choose to use this program to view the PDF result of a m erge. This requires:
1. That this program (e.g. Acrobat Reader) is associated with the extension .PDF on the PC.
(Try to double click on a PDF file on your PC. It should open up the PDF file viewer and display
the file).
2. That the PC can ‘reach’ the /apf3812Hom e/view directory on the System i - follow the steps
as indicated for PCL viewing.
3. That the Netserver is running and the nam e is registered as described for PCL viewing
below.
4. IMPORTANT: The PDF viewing option is lim ited for users, that has a user profile with max.
8 characters.
Refer to page 58 for how to activate the PDF view.
PCL viewing:
SwitftView exploits the iSeries Access connection to a W indows PC, and is currently integrated
with the m enus 1. Design Overlay, and 10. W ork with actual output queue.
The com m and for 10. W ork with actual output queue is:
APF3812/APFWRKOUTQ
If you use option 5 to display a m erged PCL spooled file on this APFW RKOUTQ com m and the
spooled file will be shown in Swiftview.
Sw iftView licenses:
M WARNING M
W hen InterForm400 ® is running in test mode you can setup an unlimited number of users to
use SwiftView. 1 SwiftView license is included with InterForm400 ® free of charge. Additional
licenses can be ordered from your local InterForm400 ® dealer. The minimum licenses to order
is 5. You will receive the license in form of a code, which matches the serial number of your
System i. Refer to page 401 for more information on ordering and entering license code.
Requirements for running Sw iftView:
1.
You m ust connect to the System i via TCP/IP from a W indows PC with iSeries
InterForm A/S 491
Access or other 5250 em ulator supporting both STRPCO and the STRPCCMD
com m ands.
2.
The user m ust have full authorisation over the directory:
\\system\APF3812Home\VIEW. You can grant these rights with the com m and:
CHGAUT OBJ('/apf3812home/view') USER(*PUBLIC) DTAAUT(*RWX)
OBJAUT(*ALL)
3.
The system nam e defined in the InterForm 400 ® adm inistration m enu 2. Configure
InterForm 400 (see page 35), m ust correspond to the system nam e shown with the
com m and APF3812/DSPNETSVRA or use the IP-address of the System i.
4.
Port num ber 445 m ust be open in any firewall the PC m ay access the iSeries through.
Setting up a Sw iftView user.
1.
Use option 60. Install SwiftView at drive C:,located in 12. Service Functions, to create
a directory on the users PC’s C drive called C:\APF3812, and copy the program
SVIEW .EXE from the directory \\system \APF3812Hom e\VIEW into this directory on
the PC. Notice that the (C:) -Drive is configurable.
2.
If InterForm 400 ® is running in test m ode, F14 in m enu 1. Design overlays and option
5=display in m enu 10. W ork with actual output queue will now activate PCL
viewing. (See page 57 for m ore inform ation on using F14),
If InterForm 400 ® is running in production m ode, you will only have perm ission to one
license. If a code is installed for activating m ore SwiftView licenses, the user profiles
activating the viewer will autom atically be assigned to the group of users for access to
SwiftView (The Configuration m enu point 51. Sw iftview users).
If all licenses are already occupied, every new user will be inform ed about this, when
trying to activate the viewer. In this case, either order the needed num ber of SwiftView
licenses, or replace an existing user profile in m enu 51. Sw iftView users, with the
user profile that needs access to PCL viewing.
Setting up iSeries Access Express, enabling PCL-view ing
1. Use the com m and:
APF3812/DSPNETSVRA
- to display the NetServer Nam e and Dom ain of the System i. The Netserver nam e is the
nam e, that you could use for your System i when configuring iSeries Access Express - you can
also use the IP-Address instead.
M WARNING M
The NetServer Name should not be the same as the System i System name. The system
name can be displayed with the command, DSPNETA. If the names are identical you could
change the Netserver name with the command, APF3812/CHGNETSVRA.
3. Start the NetServer with the com m and:
APF3812/STRNETSVR
4. The person that should be able to view, m ust have full authorisation over the directory:
492
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
\\system \apf3812Hom e\view. You can grant these rights with the com m and:
CHGAUT OBJ('/apf3812home/view') USER(*PUBLIC) DTAAUT(*RWX)
OBJAUT(*ALL)
G NOTE G
W hen viewing graphically (PCL or PDF) a file will be created in the APF3812Hom e/VIEW
directory, that others can access/view. To avoid that you can specify, that the PUBLIC
authority of these tem porary files should be *EXCLUDE. Refer to page 36 for m ore
inform ation.
5. Create a new System i connection in iSeries Access stating the new System i server nam e.
6. Start up a new session and change the new network nam e to Qxxxxxxxx
under option 2. Setup default output queue and printer type, in 80. Adm inistration Menu.
7. If you are running iSeries Access Express, you should also m ake sure to start the Netserver
on the System i. This can be done with the com m and: STRHOSTSVR SERVER(*ALL). You
should also m ake sure to use the System i system nam e (on the PC and in InterForm 400 ®,
that you can find using the Explorer and opening the Other Computers folder.
8. Boot your PC and connect to the new server nam e Qsxxxxxxx via the Operations navigator.
9. If you are running W indow95/98 is it necessary to have to sam e User-ID and password on
the PC as on the System i.
J TIP J
You can choose to map a Network drive to APF3812Home from Explorer on your PC: Choose
‘Tools’ and ‘Map Network drive..’ and ‘\\<IP-Address of System>\APF3812Home’ as the
directory. This is helpful later when moving resources to/from the shared
/APF3812Home/W ork directory.
W hen configuring Netserver and share these com m ands could be very helpful:
(All are placed in library, APF3812)
NetServer commands:
DSPNETSVRA
Display NetServer Attributes
CHGNETSVRA
Change NetServer Attributes
STRNETSVR
Start NetServer
ENDNETSVR
End NetServer
NetServer share commands:
ADDFILSHR
Add NetServer File Share
ADDPRTSHR
Add NetServer Printer Share
RMVNETSHR
Rem ove NetServer Share
Troubleshooting problems using Sw iftView:
If you receive an error when starting up SwiftView (using e.g. F14), you m ight get som e help
here.
W hen using the full iSeries Access the System i nam e used on the PC can be found, by
choosing Start, Program s, IBM iSeries Access, Connections. Additional inform ation for iSeries
Access Express can be found below.
Problem: W hen pressing F14 from the design screen a DOS window opens and shuts very
quickly.
Solution: Install SwiftView as described above in the first paragraph of Setting up a SwiftView
user. Make sure, that the APF3812 directory is created at the C-drive of the PC AND that the
file SVIEW .EXE has been copied to that directory. If the directory and file has not been copied
m ake sure, that you are authorized to the /APF3812Hom e/VIEW directory (see requirem ent 5),
and that the System i nam e in InterForm 400 ® is the sam e as used on the PC (see requirem ent
InterForm A/S 493
5) and then try installing SwiftView again.
Problem: W hen starting up SwiftView, you get a sm all window with the m essage: Unusual file
access failure, check NDGDBUG \\systemi\APF3812Home\VIEW \user.
Solution: Make sure, that the AS400 system nam e set up in InterForm 400 ® is the sam e as
used on the PC (see requirem ent 5 above). If the System i is not found on the sam e network
and not on the DNS server, you m ight need to add the System i to the HOSTS file on the PC
like described below.
Problem: W hen starting up SwiftView, you get a sm all window with the m essage:
Access to the file is not permitted \\systemi\APF3812Home\VIEW \user.
Solution: You are not authorized to the APF3812Hom e/VIEW directory. Do as described in
requirem ent 3 as above. You will also get this error m essage if your User ID and password on
the PC does not fit with the User ID and password of the System i.
Problem : W hen trying to access APF3812Hom e through a m apped network drive on the PC
and you get this error m essage:
‘An error occoured while connecting <Drive>: to \\<ServerNam e>\APF3812Hom e.
Microsoft W indows Network: The local device nam e is already in use.
This connection cannot be restored.’
Solution: Use the sam e User ID and password on both the PC and System i or m ap a
network drive to /APF3812Hom e using the System i user ID and password (possible in
W indows XP).
Problem : The PC cannot ‘see’ the System i NetServer Nam e through a search of the Network
Neighbourhood and can because of that not access /APF3812Hom e.
Solution: Make sure, that the NetServer is started on the System i and you are using the
NetServer nam e - not the System Nam e of the System i (APF3812/DSPNETSVRA). If the
System i is placed in another Network it m ight be necessary to add the System i NetServer
nam e to the HOSTS file on the PC. You can also just use the IP address as the Netserver
nam e in InterForm 400 configuration.
494
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix M - InterForm400 charts
InterForm 400 supports the following two types of charts:
- Bar charts and
- Line charts
Sam ples are seen below:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Chart height
Chart width
Chart m argin, left
Chart m argin, right
Chart m argin, top
Chart m argin, bottom
Legend m argin
Legend width
Legend spacing
Displacem ent of group texts
You can define both types of charts by using the W ork with Charts (W RKCHT) com m and.
By using the W RKCHT com m and you can define the com plete layout of your charts including
data to be presented in the charts.
To print a chart enter the &&CHT com m and inside your spooled file.
The &&CHT com m and also enables you to do the following while printing:
- Change the layout of your chart
- Change the data to be presented in the charts
- Create a chart without using the W RKCHT com m and.
InterForm A/S 495
The Work with Charts command, WRKCHT
W hen using the W ork with Charts com m and, APF3812/W RKCHT, the following display is
shown:
Work with Chart definitions
Position to . . . . . .
_____________ Chart
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
Chart
DEMOSALES
SAMPLEBAR
SAMPLELINE
F3=Exit
CHA100D
5=Display
6=Print chart
Description
Demo of Bar chart
Sample bar chart
Sample line chart
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
End
Pressing F11 will result in an alternative display as seen below, where the size of the charts is
displayed. Status is *PARTIAL if the setup of the chart is not com plete.
Pressing F11 again will alternate between the two displays.
Work with Chart definitions
Position to . . . . . .
Chart
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
Chart
DEMOSALES
SAMPLEBAR
SAMPLELINE
Type
*BAR
*BAR
*LINE
CHA100D
5=Display
Chart heig
4,000
4,000
7,000
6=Print chart
Chart widt
4,000
4,000
7,000
Status
*PARTIAL
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
If a chart is com plete, it is possible to printout the chart using option 6. Print chart. The chart
will be printed out on the default output queue for the current job.
496
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Press F6 to create a new chart:
Create Chart definition
CHA110D
Chart . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . . . . . . . .
__________
__________
Description
___________________________________
F3=Exit
. . . . . . .
*BAR, *LINE
F12=Cancel
Chart:
Type:
Description:
The nam e of the chart, which is been created.
W rite *BAR for a Bar chart and *LINE for a Line chart.
Description of chart (not printed).
After entering the param eters above and pressing Enter, the ’Create Chart definition’ display
is shown:
Create Chart definition
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
CHA300D
MYBAR
*BAR
Type options, press Enter.
1=Select
Opt
_
_
_
_
_
_
Definition
R Define general layout
Define layout of the X-axis
R Define X-axis points
R Define layout of the Y1-axis
Define layout of the Y2-axis
R Define observations
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Note: R indicates required inform ation.
Enter ‘1' next to the definition you want to create or change.
W hen finished editing the chart, press F3 to exit and save the chart definition.
InterForm A/S 497
Define general layout
W hen selecting ’Define general layout’ the display below is shown. Here it is possible to set up
param eters, that describe the general layout of the chart.
Define general layout
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
CHA300D
MYBAR
*BAR
Type choices, press Enter.
Chart header . . . . . .
Chart header font . . .
Chart header font color
Chart height . . . . . .
Chart width . . . . . .
Chart margin, left . . .
Chart margin, right . .
Chart margin, top . . .
Chart margin, bottom . .
Frame line width . . . .
Frame line color . . . .
Legend margin . . . . .
Legend width . . . . . .
Legend spacing . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
_______________________________________
____
___
______
Inches.pels
______
Inches.pels
______
Inches.pels
______
Inches.pels
______
Inches.pels
______
Inches.pels
__
Dots
___
______
Inches.pels
______
Inches.pels
___
Pels
F12=Cancel
Chart header:
Chart header font:
Chart header font color:
The header of the chart.
Font used for the header text (prom pt with F4).
Color used for the header text (prom pt with F4).
Chart height/w idth:
Chart margins:
Frame line width/color:
Height and width of the fram e in which the chart is printed.
The distances from the chart to the fram e.
The line width (in dots) and color of the fram e.
Legend margin:
Distance from left edge of the fram e to the text of the first
observation set.
Distance between text of the various observation sets.
Distance from bottom edge of the fram e to the text of the
observation sets.
Legend w idth:
Legend spacing:
498
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Define layout of the X-axis
W hen defining the layout of the X-axis, it is possible to define the layout of the axis it self, but
also direction and displacem ent of the text belonging to the X-axis groups, if used.
Define layout of the X-axis
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
CHA300D
SAMPLELINE
*LINE
Type choices, press Enter.
X-axis line width . . .
X-axis line color . . .
X-axis text direction .
Displacement, grp texts
Bar width in % . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
__
___
_
______
_20
Dots
1=Right, 2=Up, 3=Down
Inches.pels
1-100
F12=Cancel
X-axis line width/color:
X-axis text direction:
Displacement, grp. texts:
Bar width in %:
.
.
.
.
.
Specifying the width and color of the X-axis of the chart.
The direction and rotation of the text for the X-axis: Right
m eans horizontal text. Up or down m eans vertical text
(going up or down).
Distance from bottom edge of the chart to the text of the Xaxis groups.
W idth of bars. The is m easured in percentage of the m axim um
width.
InterForm A/S 499
Define X-axis points and X-axis groups
W hen selecting Define X-axis points you get the screen below, which overviews the existing Xaxis groups:
Work with X-axis groups
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
Position to
. . . . .
CHX100D
MYBAR
*BAR
Seq number
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
7=Assign new seq nbr to x-axis grp
12=Work with X-axis points
Opt
__
Seq number
10
ID
MON
Text
Month
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
It is possible to change, copy and display the X-axis groups, it is also possible to change
sequence num bers and to work with X-axis points for the specific group.
Pressing F6 for creating a new X-axis group will display this:
Create X-axis group
CHX110D
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
MYBAR
*BAR
Seq number . . . . . . . .
___
X-axis group ID
Text . . . . . .
Text font . . .
Text font color
___
_______________________________________________
____
___
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
F4=Prompt
Seq number:
X-axis group ID:
Text:
Text font/color:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
Specify a sequence num ber. This will decide the order of the
groups.
ID of the specific X-axis group.
Text used to specify group on print out. (Printed below chart).
Font and color of the text above.
The position of the text is based upon the legend fields on the ’General Layout’ display and the
layout of the x-axis.
Using option 12 it is possible to change sequence num bers and to work with X-axis points for
the specific group as seen below.
500
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
W ork with X-axis points
You can assign X-axis points to an existing X-axis group, by using option 12=W ork with
X-axis points in front of the group as described above.
In the exam ple above, where we have created a group called Month, we m ight add 12 X-axis
points for that group, m arking the 12 m onths of the year.
Work with X-axis points
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
X-axis group ID . . . . :
CHX200D
SAMPLELINE
*LINE
G1
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
7=Assign new seq nbr to X-axis point
Opt
Seq number
ID
Text
Spc
(No X-axis points to display)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
If you press F6=Create to create a new X-axis point the following is displayed:
Create X-axis group
CHX110D
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
MYBAR
*BAR
Seq number . . . . . . . .
__1
X-axis group ID
Text . . . . . .
Text font . . .
Text font color
Relative spacing
__A
Jan.____________________________________________
__11
__1
_60
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
F4=Prompt
Seq number:
X-axis point ID:
Text:
Text font/color:
Relative spacing:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F12=Cancel
Sequence num ber which decides the order of the axis points.
ID of the X-axis point for this specific X-axis group.
This ID m ust be unique i.e. no other X-axis point can
have the sam e ID – not even in other X-axis groups.
Text below the chart to m ark this point.
Font and color of the text.
Specifies the spacing in pels between the bars (only used for bar
charts).
InterForm A/S 501
Define layout of the Y1 (and Y2)-axis
InterForm 400 ® offers the possibility to define two Y-axis’. This can be used for printing graphs
on the sam e chart with two different units of m easure.
Choose this option from the chart definition display, and the following is displayed:
Define layout of the Y1-axis
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
CHA300D
MYBAR
*BAR
Type choices, press Enter.
Text 1 . . . . . . . . . .
Number of installations________________________
Text 2 . . . . . . . . . .
_______________________________________________
Text font . . . . . . . .
__11
Text font color . . . . .
__1
Text direction . . . . . .
1
1=Right, 2=Up, 3=Down
Line width . . . . . . . .
_2
Dots
Line color . . . . . . . .
__1
Minimum . . . . . . . . .
_________0.00000
Increment . . . . . . . .
_________1.00000
Maximum . . . . . . . . .
________10.00000
Edit word . . . . . . . .
'__________________'
Values font . . . . . . .
__11
Values font color . . . .
__1
Grid line type . . . . . .
9
1-9
Grid line width . . . . .
_2
Dots
Grid line color . . . . .
__1
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Text1:
Text2:
Text font/color:
Text direction:
Line width:
M inim um :
Increment:
M axim um :
Edit word:
First line of text for the Y1-axis.
Second line of text for the Y1-axis.
Font and color for the text fields above.
Specifying the direction and rotation of the text for the
Y1-axis text:
Right m eans horizontal text. Up or down m eans vertical text (going up or
down).
W idth of the Y1-axis in dots.
Specifies the sm allest value for the Y1-axis.
Specifies the difference between the Y1-grid lines
(m easured in Y1-units).
Specifies the m axim um value for the Y1-axis.
Defines placem ent of com m as, punctuation and m inus sign. The
value is written like ’ , .-’ (apostrophes m ust be included).
Values font/color:
Grid line type:
Defines the font and color used for writing the values on the
Y1-axis.
The type or pattern of the grid line. The type num ber corresponds to
the pattern as follows:
1: ’
Grid line width/color:
502
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
’
2: ’
’
3: ’
’
4: ’
’
5: ’
’
6: ’
’
7: ’
’
8: ’
’
9: ’
’
Defines the width and color of the grid line.
Version 2014
Define observation set
W hen selecting Define observations from the Create chart definition m enu, the following
will be displayed:
Work with Observation sets
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
CHS100D
MYBAR
*BAR
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
5=Display
7=Assign new seq nbr to observation set
Opt
Seq number
Obs set
12=Work with sample observations
Text
(No Observation sets to display)
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F12=Cancel
Here it is possible to work with existing observation sets. It is also possible to create a new
observation set using F6=Create, which will result in the display below.
For charts with type *BAR the entry screen looks as follows:
Create Observation set
CHS110D
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
MYBAR
*BAR
Seq number . . . . . . . .
___
Observation set . . . . .
Text . . . . . . . . . . .
___
______________________________________
Text font . . .
Text font color
Use Y1/Y2-axis .
Line type . . .
Line width . . .
____
___
_
_
__
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Color . . . . . . . . . .
___
Pattern . . . . . . . . .
_
Pattern color . . . . . .
___
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
1=Y1, 2=Y2
1-9
Dots
0-8
InterForm A/S 503
For charts with type *LINE the screen looks like this:
Change Observation set
CHS110D
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
SAMPLELINE
*LINE
Seq number . . . . . . . :
___
Observation set . . . . .
Text . . . . . . . . . . .
___
_______________________________________
Text font . . .
Text font color
Use Y1/Y2-axis .
Line type . . .
Line width . . .
Point marker . .
Color . . . . .
____
___
_
_
__
_
___
F3=Exit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F4=Prompt
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1=Y1, 2=Y2
1-9
Dots
C, C1-C8
F12=Cancel
Seq number:
The sequence num ber of this observation set. The sequence num ber is
used for in which sequence this observation set is shown in relation to
other observation sets.
Observation set: Nam e of this observation set.
Text:
Description of the observation set. Printed below the chart.
Text font/color: Font and color used for the text above.
Use Y1/Y2-axis: Links the observation set to either the Y1- or Y2-axis.
Line type:
For charts with the type *LINE this decides the type of line representing this
observation set. The various types can be seen above under ’Define layout
of the Y1(and Y2)-axis’. The types used for grid lines are the sam e as
these types.
Line width:
Define the width of the line representing this observation set.
Color
Color used for the line representing this observation set.
Pattern:
Define the pattern inside the bars representing this observation set.
Pattern
Description
0
100% white
1
2% shading
2
10% shading
3
20% shading
4
35% shading
5
55% shading
6
80% shading
7
99% shading
8
100% shading
Pattern color:
Color filling for the bars.
Point marker:
For charts with type *LINE this decides the form of the points
representing this observation set.
504
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
M arker
Description
Blank
C
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
No point
Point
0
Point
2
Point
10
Point
20
Point
35
Point
55
Point
80
Point
99
Point
100
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
filled
filled
filled
filled
filled
filled
filled
filled
filled
W hen you press Enter, you will return to W ork with Observation sets. Now it is possible to
appoint values to this observation set. Select option 12=W ork with sample observations,
and this will be displayed:
Work with Sample observations
Chart . . . . . . . . . :
Type . . . . . . . . . . :
Observation set . . . . :
CHS200D
SAMPLELINE
*LINE
S1
Demo
Enter values, press Enter.
ID
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
Value
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
________________
Text
Jan.
Feb.
Mar.
Apr.
May
Jun.
Jul.
Aug.
Sep.
Okt.
Nov.
Dec.
Dec
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F12=Cancel
Prior to this an X-axis group has been created. In this case the group includes the ID’s P01P12 with the text, ’Jan.’- ’Dec.’. The W ork with sample observations has value fields for all
X-axis points no m atter what -axis group they belong to.
Now we have been through all states of creating a chart. If you have done this, you can now
view and print out the chart in the following ways:
If you have Sw iftview installed, you are able to view the chart by pressing F5
(Display chart), from the chart definition display.
You can print out the chart using option 6 from the W ork with Chart
definitions.
You can print out the chart when m erging with a spool file, if the spool file has
either the &&CHA01 PRCH or &&CHA01 PRCM com m and inside. See
descriptions of the &&CHA com m ands below.
InterForm A/S 505
The &&CHA Chart commands
General format of the &&CHA commands
From
To
Description
1
5
&&CHA
6
7
Format version
9
18
Chart name
20
23
Function ID
25
Dep.
Function data
General description of the &&CHA commands
Chart nam ing:
To create an internally defined chart the first com m and issued m ust be the CRIC com m and.
Internally defined charts are com pletely defined using the &&CHA com m ands in a spool file.
An externally defined chart is defined using the W RKCHT com m and before printing. First tim e
you issue a &&CHA com m and for an externally defined chart, all parts of the chart definition except the sam ple data - are autom atically loaded. (To load the sam ple data use the LOEC
com m and).
Internally defined chart nam es m ust begin with an asterisk (*) character as appose to
externally defined charts, which can not begin with the asterisk character.
To reload an externally defined chart use the LOEC com m and.
Com mand examples
To print the Sam plebar chart two inches down and two inches from the left m argin print:
&&CHA01 SAMPLEBAR PRSM 02000 02000 000
To print the Sam plebar chart with the following data:
Observation set, S1:
G11 = 1.2
G12 = 2.4
G21 = 1.4
G22 = 2.2
Observation set, S2:
G11 = 3.1
G22 = 1.5
Print:
&&CHA01 SAMPLEBAR OSDA S1 G11
G22
2.20000
&&CHA01 SAMPLEBAR OSDA S2 G11
&&CHA01 SAMPLEBAR PRCH
1.20000 G12
2.40000
3.10000 G22
1.50000
To print an internally defined bar chart:
&&CHA01
&&CHA01
&&CHA02
&&CHA01
&&CHA01
&&CHA01
&&CHA01
&&CHA01
&&CHA01
506
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
*INT1
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
CRIC ...
GNLO ...
GNLO ...
XALO ...
Y1LO ...
Y1LO ...
XGLO ...
XPLO ...
XPLO ...
(Create internal chart)
(General layout)
(General layout)
(Define X-axis layout)
(Define Y1-axis layout)
(Define Y1-axis layout)
(Define X-axis group layout)
(Define X-axis point - 1. point)
(Define X-axis point - 2. point)
Version 2014
G21
1.40000
&&CHA01 *INT1 OSLO ...
&&CHA01 *INT1 OSDA ...
&&CHA01 *INT1 PRCH ...
(Define observation set layout)
(Add data)
(Print chart)
Create/delete internal chart commands
Create internal chart (CRIC 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘CRIC’
25
34
*BAR or *LINE
Description:
Creates a new internal chart definition.
Delete internal chart (DLIC 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘DLIC’
Description:
Deletes an internal chart definition.
InterForm A/S 507
Load commands
Load external chart (LOEC 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘LOEC’
25
34
Load sample data for observation set ID / *NONE / *ALL
Description:
Loads (or reloads) a chart definition.
508
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
General layout commands
Define general layout (GNLO 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘GNLO’
25
74
Chart header / *BLANK
76
79
Chart header font
81
83
Chart header font color
85
89
Chart height INPEL
91
95
Chart width INPEL
97
101
Chart margin, left INPEL
103
107
Chart margin, right INPEL
109
113
Chart margin, top INPEL
115
119
Chart margin, bottom INPEL
121
122
Frame line width in points
124
126
Frame line color
Description:
Describes general layout of chart
Define general layout (GNLO 02):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘02'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘GNLO’
25
29
Legend margin INPEL
31
35
Legend width INPEL
37
39
Legend spacing in pels
Desciption:
Describes general layout of chart.
InterForm A/S 509
X-axis commands
Define X-axis layout (XALO 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘XALO’
25
26
X-axis line width in points
28
30
X-axis line color
32
32
X-axis text direction
34
38
Displacement, group texts
40
42
Bar width in % *1
Note:
*1 For *BAR charts only.
Description:
Describes layout of the X-axis.
510
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Y1-/Y2-axis commands
Define Y1-axis/Y2-axis layout (Y1LO 01/Y2LO 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘Y1LO’/’Y2LO’
25
74
Text 1 / *BLANK
76
125
Text 2 / *BLANK
Description:
Describes layout of the Y1- or Y2-axis.
InterForm A/S 511
Y1-/Y2-axis commands continued
Define Y1-axis/Y2-axis layout (Y1LO 02/Y2LO 02):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘02'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘Y1LO’/’Y2LO’
25
28
Text font
30
32
Text font color
34
34
Text direction
36
37
Line width in points
39
41
Line color
43
50
Minimum (Integer part)
51
51
Minimum (Decimal point)
52
56
Minimum (Decimals)
57
57
Sign minimum ( - indicates negative value)
59
66
Increment (Integer part)
67
67
Increment (Decimal point)
68
72
Increment (Decimals)
74
81
Maximum (Integer part)
82
82
Maximum (Decimal point)
83
87
Maximum (Decimals)
88
88
Sign maximum ( - indicates negative value)
90
109
Edit word (including ‘-s)
111
114
Values font
116
118
Values font color
120
120
Grid line type
122
123
Grid line width in points
125
127
Grid line color
Description:
Describes layout of the Y1- or Y2-axis.
512
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
X-axis group commands
Add/change X-axis group layout (XGLO 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘XGLO’
25
27
X-axis group ID
29
31
Copy definition from X-axis group ID
33
82
Text / *BLANK
84
87
Text font
89
91
Text font color
Description:
Adds or changes the layout of a X-axis group.
Delete X-axis group (DLXG 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart nam e
20
23
‘DLXG’
25
27
X-axis group ID
Description:
Deletes a X-axis group.
InterForm A/S 513
X-axis point commands
Add/change X-axis point layout (XPLO 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart nam e
20
23
‘XPLO’
25
27
X-axis group ID *1
29
31
X-axis point ID
33
35
Copy definition from X-axis point ID
37
86
Text / *BLANK
88
91
Text font
93
95
Text font color
97
99
Relative spacing
Note:
*1 Required for new X-axis points.
Description:
Adds or changes the layout of an X-axis point.
Delete X-axis point (DLXP 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart nam e
20
23
‘DLXP’
25
27
X-axis point ID
Description:
Deletes an X-axis point.
514
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Observation set commands
Add/change observation set layout (OSLO 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘OSLO’
25
27
Observation set ID
29
31
Copy definition from observation set ID
33
82
Text / *BLANK
84
87
Text font
89
91
Text font color
93
93
Use Y1/Y2-axis
95
95
Line type
97
98
Line width in points
100
101
Point marker *1
103
105
Color
107
107
Pattern *2
109
111
Pattern color *2
Notes:
*1 *LINE charts only
*2 *BAR charts only
Description:
Adds or changes the layout of an observation set.
Delete observation set (DLOS 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘DLOS’
25
34
Observation set ID / *ALL
Description:
Deletes an observation set.
InterForm A/S 515
Observation set commands continued
Clear observation set data (CLOS 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘CLOS’
25
34
Observation set ID / *ALL
Description:
Clears a single or all observation sets.
516
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Data commands
Add/change data by ID (OSDA 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘OSDA’
25
27
Observation set ID
29
31
Observation ID 1
33
40
Value 1 (Integer part)
42
46
Value 1 (Decimals)
47
47
Sign Value 1 ( - indicates negative value)
49
51
Observation ID 2
53
60
Value 2 (Integer part)
62
66
Value 2 (Decimals)
67
67
Sign Value 2 ( - indicates negative value)
69
71
Observation ID 3
73
80
Value 3 (Integer part)
82
86
Value 3 (Decimals)
87
87
Sign Value 3 ( - indicates negative value)
89
91
Observation ID 4
93
100
Value 4 (Integer part)
102
106
Value 4 (Decimals)
107
107
Sign Value 4 ( - indicates negative value)
109
111
Observation ID 5
113
120
Value 5 (Integer part)
122
126
Value 5 (Decimals)
127
127
Sign Value 5 ( - indicates negative value)
Description:
Adds or changes data in an observation set by observation ID.
InterForm A/S 517
Print chart commands
Print sample chart (PRSM 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘PRSM’
25
25
Sign (+/-) distance top edge
26
30
Distance to paper top edge INPEL
32
32
Sign (+/-) distance left edge
33
37
Distance to paper left edge INPEL
39
41
Rotation
Description:
Prints a sample chart.
Print chart (PRCH 01):
From
To
Description
1
5
‘&&CHA’
6
7
‘01'
9
18
Chart name
20
23
‘PRCH’
25
25
Sign (+/-) distance top edge
26
30
Distance to paper top edge INPEL
32
32
Sign (+/-) distance left edge
33
37
Distance to paper left edge INPEL
39
41
Rotation
Description:
Prints a chart.
J TIP J
The &&CHA commands in a spool file are interpreted when the spool file is merged with an
overlay.
518
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix N - Sending E-mails from the System i
G NOTE G
In order to get PDF output you need to purchase the PDF m odule for InterForm 400.
InterForm 400 can be used for sending em ails using either the OS/400 SMTP feature or via
InterForm400 SM TP.
J TIP J
W hen you send out e-mails from InterForm400 the e-mails will be stored in the IFS in
/APF3812Mail/OutBox. To prevent excessive disk usage it is a VERY good idea to run the
APF3812/CLRMAILLOG command on a regular basis.
To em ail spooled files as attached PDF-files do one of the following:
1)
Sending a com plete, m erged spooled file as an attached PDF file in an E-m ail.
For that purpose you would probably use the APF3812/M RGSPLFPDF
com m and. Refer to page
392 for m ore inform ation.
2)
Send a com plete spooled file having a program -generated front page.
The Spooled file m ust have PAGERANGE(2 n), where n=Any num ber or
*END.
The e-m ail front page m ust include lines with each of these keywords in any
sequence:
Pos 20-30 = Keyword:
FROMADR,
FROMNAME
TOADR
TONAME
SUBJECT
ATTACH
MSG (up to 10 lines can be used).
Positions from 31 to 286 are used for the value of each keyword - except MSG.
For MSG the text m ust be placed from position 31 to 106.
This is an exam ple of a front page:
InterForm A/S 519
*...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
To e-mail adr . : TOADR
[email protected]
Name . . . . . . : TONAME
Kim Egekjaer
Subject . . . . : SUBJECT
This is the e-mail subject
E-mail text . . : MSG
Up to 10 lines of e-mail text. This is line 1
Second MSG line
PDF-file name . : ATTACH
demo.pdf
From e-mail adr. : FROMADR
[email protected]
Name . . . . . . : FROMNAME
Name of e-mail sender
The spooled file should trigger a function P=Send spooled file as PDF email
in Auto Form s Control and the m erged spooled file will then be sent as an
attached PDF file.
Refer to page 160 for m ore inform ation.
3)
Splitting the spooled file into parts for e.g. each custom er, inserting e.g.
inform ation from the spooled file into the subject or contents of the E-m ail or
even into the nam e of the attached PDF file. This is done by use of an E-m ail
finishing definition. Refer to page 211 for m ore inform ation.
4)
Send e-m ails via the APF3812/SNDMAIL com m and.
5)
Send e-m ails to m ultiple receivers with the APF3812/SNDEMAIL com m and.
Before the e-m ails can actually be sent out you need to setup either InterForm 400 SMTP or
OS400 SMTP/MSF. You should really consider to use InterForm400 SM TP because of this:
a)
The details of the InterForm 400 SMTP log information is m uch m ore detailed
than for OS400 SMTP/MSF. The APF3812/W RKMAILLOG com m and will just
list *IBMSMTP if you use OS400 SMTP, but InterForm 400 SMTP will be able to
‘talk’ directly with the receiving m ailservers thus telling you the exact status.
b)
InterForm 400 SMTP is easier to setup.
c)
E-m ails sent via InterForm 400 SMTP are sent out faster.
Setup of InterForm400 SMTP
The setup of InterForm 400 SMTP is described on page 304.
Rem em ber to add a start of the subsystem APF3812/M AILINTER in the IPL start up program
if you chose to use the InterForm 400 SMTP.
Setup of OS400 SMTP
The created E-m ails can be sent out from the System i either directly from the
System i or through a m ail server. These are the com m ands, that you should
use:
520
1)
CFGTCP - Option 10. W ork with TCP/IP host table entries
- Insert IP-address and Hostnam e of the m ail server - if used.
2)
CHGTCPDMN
- Insert the IP-adresses of Dom ain Nam e Servers at INTNETADR
3)
Add possible unknown routes to the m ail server
CFGTCP - Option 2. W ork with TCP/IP routes
4)
CHGSMTPA, press F4 to prom pt
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
- Insert *YES to AUTOSTART SMTP server after IPL.
- Insert "HOSTNAME" of m ail server at "MAILROUTER" - if used. If you want to
m ail directly from the System i you should specify *NONE for the
MAILROUTER.
- Insert *YES as "FIREW ALL" if the System i is not able to send directly through
a firewall. The firewall param eter is ignored if you use *NONE for the
MAILROUTER.
5)
CHGPOPA
*NO at AUTOSTART, MSGSPLIT = *NOMAX or lim it of m ail server.
6)
STRMSF
- Starts the Mail Server Fram ework.
7)
STRTCPSVR *SMTP
- Starts the SMTP server on the System i
The com m ands STRMSF and STRTCPSVR should be called from the IPL Startup program of
the System i.
More inform ation can be found on the IBM web-pages:
http://publib.boulder.ibm .com /pubs/htm l/as400/v5r1/ic2924/index.htm
(Click on Netw orking, TCP/IP and E-m ail.)
and
http://www912.ibm .com /s_dir/slkbase.NSF/0cf528a492c9b4a886%2025680b0002037f/34879f5e413aa5c
d8625697b0053f36a?OpenDocum ent&Highlight=0,SNDDST,%2520SNADS
Combining OS400 SMTP and Domino/400 on the same machine
If you are already running Dom ino on the sam e iSeries as the one where you have
InterForm 400 installed there will be a problem sending via SMTP unless you e.g. bind the
OS400 SMTP to another IP-address than used for Dom ino.
An IBM Technical Docum ent describing how to do that can be found via this link:
http://www-912.ibm .com /s_dir/slkbase.NSF/1ac66549a21402188625680b0002037e/b8a7f2a2
5678830686256c1c0052e8fa
(Docum ent num ber 27850433)
InterForm A/S 521
Appendix O - Graphical Designer: Install and use
From InterForm 400 ® an unlim ited num ber of graphical designers can be installed. Below is a
description of the requirem ents and how to install and use the designer.
Requirements for the Graphical Designer
Requirements for the System i:
•
Select option ‘75. Prepare server to support Designer’ on the Service menu to start
all necessary servers. This option checks if these services are active (and checks if
journaling is active) and then starts journaling/servers if necessary:
STRTCPSVR SERVER(*DDM)
STRTCPSVR SERVER(*DTAQ *RMTCMD *SIGNON *SVRMAP)
•
Journaling of InterForm 400 ® files m ust be started. (Refer to page 380).
•
Execute the com m and: DSPNETA. Find the text/param eter 'DDM request access'.
This should norm ally be *OBJAUT, it can also refer to a user program , but if it is
*REJECT the DDM server will not work. Change the value if necessary with the
com m and:
CHGNETA DDMACC(*OBJAUT)
Requirements for the PC:
•
The PC m ust be running W indows 98 or newer.
•
The PC m ust be connected to the System i via TCP/IP
•
Minim um 256 Mb RAM is required.
•
JAVA Runtim e Environm ent version 6 or later m ust be installed.
•
A m inim um screen resolution of 1024x768 pixels is required.
•
The InterForm 400 graphical designer m ust be installed.
Requirements for the network:
If you access the iSeries through a firewall, be sure that these port num bers are not blocked:
Host Server
*CENTRAL
*DATABASE
*DTAQ
*FILE
*RMTCMD
*SIGNON
*SVRMAP
522
Port number
8470
8471
8472
8473
8475
8476
449
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
TCP-server
*DDM
Port number
446
Apart from that this port num ber m ust be open in order for to be able to activate Swiftview:
Service
Microsoft-DS
Port number
445
Limitations of the Graphical Designer
•
Barcodes are not displayed correctly. Only an im age looking like the barcode (in
about the sam e size) is shown.
•
PCL files included are not shown in the graphical designer. Only a fram e indicating
the PCL file is shown.
•
Regarding soft fonts: If the True Type font is installed on the PC and linked via
Autodownload to the used font num ber, and the True Type Font is uniquely identified
via the first 16 characters in the description, then it will show correctly. If not the
default font will be shown.
•
Rounding off: The designer use inches and pels in the background for storing the
overlay, so if you insert m easurem ents in cm or in inches with a decim al point (i.e. no
pels) then the designer will round up the positions to the nearest pels (1/240 of an
inch). The rounding off is the clearest if you select ‘inches’ (instead of inches.pels) and
change a m easurem ent 0.001 either up or down. Such a slight change will disappear
because of the designer rounding off.
•
The special ZPLII fonts: ‘CG Trium virate Bold Condensed’ and ‘Dot Matrix’ are shown
in sim ular fonts, which does not look exactly like the original fonts.
•
The preview option for label overlays (ZPLII/IPL) is not 100% correct. The data stream
is converted in InterForm 400 into PDF, so som e differences m ay be expected
com pared to the final, printed result.
If you want to see the actual output you can activate Acrobat Reader or SwiftView from the
graphical designer to see the exact result (after saving the design). (SwiftView will display the
PCL files).
Installing the Graphical Designer
Installing JAVA Environment
Before installing the graphical designer you need to install JAVA Runtim e Environm ent (if not
already installed). The Java Runtim e Environm ent can be installed in these m anners:
1) From the InterForm 400 menus by selecting ‘12. Service functions’, ‘70. Install InterForm
Designer on your PC’ and '2. Launch JAVA Runtim e Environm ent (JRE) setup program ':
2) From the iSeries IFS by downloading and then run the file:
/APF3812Hom e/Designer/jre-6u5-windows-i586-p-s.exe
3) You can dow nload the installation file from the web-site:
InterForm A/S 523
www.java.com
Make sure that you install a 64bit JRE if you are running a 64bit version of windows.
You need to restart your PC to com plete the installation.
524
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Installing and setting up the Graphical Designer
J TIP J
Prior to installing the designer via the InterForm400 menu it might help to add a network share
on the PC onto e.g. /APF3812Home.
You install the graphical designer from InterForm 400 ® by entering InterForm 400 with the
com m and APF3812/APFMENU and selecting ‘12. Service functions’ and ‘70. Install InterForm
Designer on your PC’.
If this installation fails you can also find the installation file for the graphical designer in the IFS:
/APF3812Hom e/Designer/. Find the directory with the highest num ber and download the .exe
file to your PC and double click on the file.
Note, that you can setup a fixed code page to use for the graphical designer - per user.
(If blank the system codepage or spooled file codepage will be used).
You set it up from the InterForm 400 m enu:
80. Adm inistering InterForm 400
1. W ork with InterForm 400 users
Edit the user via option 2 and type in the EBCDIC code page to use in ‘Designer code page’.
Setting up the designer for DBCS use
You will need to use other fonts in the designer, If you want to use the the designer for DBCS.
First you need to install the True Type Fonts on the PC and then you can refer to the fonts in
the designer configuration file. The configuration file is found here:
C:\Docum ents and Settings\<PC user>\.interform \conf\client.conf
If you open the file in e.g. Notepad you will find these lines:
#############################
## Font
#############################
DefaultFontBarcode:
Free 3 of 9 Extended Regular
DefaultFontPDF:
PDF417Sample
DefaultFontFixed:
Courier New
DefaultFontProportional:SansSerif
DefaultSpoolFont:
Monospaced
You can now change them e.g. to refer to the Sim Hei font instead (if installed) like this:
#############################
## Font
#############################
DefaultFontBarcode:
Free 3 of 9 Extended Regular
DefaultFontPDF:
PDF417Sample
DefaultFontFixed:
SimHei
DefaultFontProportional:SimHei
DefaultSpoolFont:
SimHei
You can also setup the DBCS codepage to use with this selection in InterForm 400:
80. Adm inistering InterForm 400
1. W ork with InterForm 400 users
Edit the user via option 2 and type in the DBCS code page under ‘Designer options’. W ith the
‘W hen to use code page’ setting you decide if the should be used always or if a specific
spooled file codepage (in the attribute) should override this.
InterForm A/S 525
Starting the Graphical Designer
If you have chosen to install a shortcut or Quick launch during install you can click on that to
start up the graphical designer. The icon looks like this:
You can also start up the graphical designer by selecting ‘Start’, ‘Program s’, ‘InterForm ’,
‘InterForm Design’ and ‘InterForm Design’.
You will be presented with this screen:
State your user profile, password and the Netserver
nam e or IP-address of the iSeries, that you run
InterForm 400 ® on and click on ‘Login’. W ait about 10
seconds (depending on the PC and the iSeries) and
the graphical designer will start up.
If you are not a registered user of InterForm 400 or if
you do not have access to any file sets in
InterForm 400 you will be refused access with the error
‘Lost connection to the host’ followed by another
m essage indicating the exact problem .
If you are not a registered user of InterForm 400 you can do that as described on page 309.
You can get access to file sets by using option ‘9=File set access’ in the sam e screen.
526
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Improving performance of the designer
If you want to speed up the graphical designer you can do this:
On the logon screen you need to click on the ‘Advanced settings’ tab. For m axim um
perform ance you can consider either of these settings:
a) Disable ‘Render 2D graphics in high quality’. This will reduce the quality of the rendering
a bit.
b) Enable ‘Use local cache of colors and fonts if available’. This will m ake the startup of the
designer a bit faster. To update the fonts and colours later you can later select ‘File’ and
‘Reload fonts and colors’ in the designer.
c) Set the ‘Image memory reduction’ to ‘M edium’ or even ‘Heavy’. This will m ake any
included im ages display in a low resolution but it will not affect the output quality of m erges and
previews. The higher reductions will use less RAM on the PC.
d) Set the ‘Debug level’ to either ‘Low’ or ‘None’.
e) Disable any background image that m ay have been included or reduce the size of the
im age used. You can toggle the background im age via this icon in the m iddle of screen in the
top:
Background im age disabled:
Background im age enabled:
f) You can locally cache the list of all spooled files by activating the option ‘Use local cache of
output queues if available’. If you want to update the list of spooled files you will then need to
click the ‘Refresh’ icon, when viewing the spooled file list - as shown on page 528.
InterForm A/S 527
Start designing an overlay
W hen the InterForm Graphical Designer starts up you will see a window with this heading:
If an overlay is open, the file set and overlay is shown on the left (SAMPLE/IF400DEMO).
Next the spooled file name and ow ner is shown (QPRINT[KSE]), followed by the user
profile, that is signed on (kse) and the IP-address or ID of the System i (192.168.250.250).
Finally the job number (010251) and the memory usage (77/227 Mb) is shown.
The job num ber in the heading refers to the job num ber of the corresponding job with the
nam e QZRCSRVS in subsystem QUSRW RK on the iSeries. Use the com m and
‘APF3812/WRKPRFJOB’ to display all jobs used by a specific user profile -including server
jobs. Refer to page 482 for m ore inform ation of this com m and.
Now you have these opportunities:
Create a new overlay
To create a new overlay for PCL and/or PDF output you can either press the icon looking like
this:
- Or select ‘File’ and ‘New overlay’.
If you want to create a new overlay for Zebra (ZPL) output you press this icon:
Edit an existing overlay
To edit an existing overlay you can either select this icon in the left side:
- Or select ‘File’ and ‘Open’.
Then you will see a list of the file sets, that you have access to. Open the file set and select the
overlay to edit.
If another already has opened the overlay you will get the error m essage ‘Locked by another
user’. To see exactly which job it is you need to try to edit the sam e overlay through the green
screen. If it is a graphical designer job (that is inactive) you can end that job from the
InterForm 400 m enues if you select ‘80. Adm inistering InterForm 400' followed by ‘50. W ork
with Designer job overlay locks’.
Open a Spooled File
If you want to design the overlay for a specific kind of spooled file you can see the spooled file
with the overlay if you select this icon on the right side of the screen header:
- or select ‘File’ and ‘Open Spool File’.
You will then see a list of all the output queues that contains spooled files. The output queues
are sorted by library nam e followed by output queue nam e as shown below. If you have
chosen to locally cache the list of spooled files and output queues, then you can press the
‘Refresh list’ icon to download an updated list from the System I.
528
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Settings and tools for the design
Before you start the actual design you want to setup the graphical designer. Below are a few
suggestions for that:
Changing the displayed size
You can zoom in or out by selecting ‘Display’ and ‘Zoom In’, ‘Zoom Out’ or ‘Size’ or by use of
the icons looking like m agnifying glasses. You can also click on this icon to select how you
want to divide the screen between the result and input view:
You can even also drag in the corners of the spool- and result-view to change the size and
position of these windows. Finally you can also drag the vertical line, that m arks the border
between to elem ent listing and the views to extend or reduce the space available for the views.
Apart from the zoom icons above you can also select this to zoom into a selected area:
After clicking the icon you place the pointer in the result view and drag (with left m ouse key)
around the area that you want to zoom into.
Changing the measurement used
You can chose the m easurem ent used to be either inches and pels (where the pels are 1/240
part of an inch - placed after the decim al point), pure inches (with a norm al decim al point) or
centimeters. Notice that m easurem ents will be rounded off to the nearest whole num ber of
pels (1/240 Inch).
InterForm A/S 529
You select it here:
Selecting unicode output
Press this icon to enable/disable unicode output for display and preview:
(Rem em ber to install unicode soft font(s) and specify autodownload for the
used font num bers.)
Previewing the result in PDF or SwiftView
You can preview the final result of the m erge. You preview the PCL result in SwiftView. The
ZPL and PDF preview is using the application associated with the ‘.PDF’ extension on your PC
- m ost likely Acrobat Reader.
To preview the current result press either of these icons:
(Found on the very top right of the screen)
G NOTE G
The ZPL preview result is not 100% correct. The ZPL datastream is converted into PDF and
an approxim ate result is shown.
Including a background image
If you have one of the following situations you can use a background im age to help you:
1) If you want to redesign or rem ap the spooled file to fit into a preprinted page, that you have
scanned earlier.
2) If you want to create a com plete design (or overlay) to be used instead of an existing
preprinted page.
The background im age is used only as help for the design and is not included in the overlay.
To select a background im age select this in the designer:’Setup’, ‘Background image’ and
‘Select background image’. Please note, that the background im age does not need to be
installed in InterForm 400 as the case is for other im ages, but can be selected directly from the
PC. Supported form ats are jpg files and bm p files.
Note, that the im age will be sized to fit to the page still keeping the im age ratio - unless you
deactivate ‘keep image ratio’ under ‘Background im age’. Deactivation of ‘keep im age ratio’
will m ake the background im age to be scaled to fit the full width and height of the page.
530
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Select ‘Setup’, ‘Background im age’ and ‘Display transparent background’ to m ake the
background m ore transparent like below: (Notice that the upper left fram e of the scanned
im age is covered by a fram e inserted in the overlay).
Lock spooled file selections
In order to prevent users from unintentionally changing rem ap window and tabulator elem ents
in the designer the ‘Double click remap and tabulator elements to update input’ feature is
added. If you activate it (and it is activated as default), then you cannot change the spooled file
area handled unless you double click on the elem ent in the elem ent list in the upper left corner
(m arked in red below) and click in the Result window when the change is done..
InterForm A/S 531
Other Design preferences
Use of Grid
As default the graphical designer has a grid activated, which is 40 pels by 40 pels (6 lines per
inch). W hen the grid is activited the cursor will snap to the grid, m aking it easier to align design
elem ents. Change the size of the grid by selecting ‘Setup’ and ‘Grid’:
Activate ‘Conditional repositioning’ to reposition the grid when designing conditioned
suboverlays.
Press this icon to enable a background im age, that previously have been included
in the designer via ‘Setup’, ‘Background image’ and ‘Select background
image’.
Press this icon to (tem porarily) disable the grid and the rulers. This will m ake it
possible to place elem ents freely without the corsor is snapping to the grid.
Designing for colour or B/W (For laser/pdf overlays only)
You can shift between looking at the B/W output or colour output by pressing this
icon in the upper toolbar.
This will affect what you see in the graphical design and when you preview the
result in SwiftView and Acrobat Reader.
Designing for 203 or 300 DPI (For Zebra overlays only)
The printed ZPL result depends on if you run a 203 or 300 dpi printer.
Click this icon to change the resolution view, so that it fits that of the printer.
Debugging the design
Press this icon to tem porarily disable all design elem ents below the m arked design
elem ent. This can be used e.g. to solve problem s with conditions, that does not
execute as you thought.
532
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Disabling/enabling the spooled file
Press this icon to (tem porarily) disconnect/connect the spooled file and view the
overlay without any spooled file text.
Flipping through the pages of the spooled file
On the right side of the tool bar you will see this:
This can be used for flipping through the pages of the m erged spooled file and e.g. looking at
the m erged result page by page. You can drag in the pointer, press the arrows to flip through
the spooled file or type a specific page num ber, that you want to look at.
The tool bar changes its function:
•
If you activate copy managem ent you can use this to see each of the resulting copies. P1
denotes e.g. the first prim ary copy/version of the output.
•
If you use an If..Then line and you transfer 1 or m ore lines onto the conditioned overlay,
then you can press the 'Conditional' tab in the input view. W hen looking at the conditional
tab you can use this to flip through the places where this condition is true on the current
page. The conditional tab will show you the lines transferred to the conditioned overlay.
This function is very handy when rem apping the spooled file text in the conditioned
overlay.
Decide the sort key for the font listing
Select 'Setup' followed by 'Font sort order' to decide in what order you want to have the
available fonts sorted when listed. You can chose to either list the fonts by the font num ber
(default) or by the font description (nam e).
InterForm A/S 533
Designing the overlay
Open up the ‘General’ folder to view the general settings for the overlay, that you are
designing:
The options within does the following:
(In dept inform ation of these options can be found on page 53.)
Document
534
Displays the file set and overlay nam e. You can change the description of the
overlay, size and orientation of the paper, m ulti-up (Pages per side) and
m argins (num ber of lines and/or characters to m ove the spooled file down or
right). Here you also specify the size of the label for ZPL output.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
If you select ‘Custom ’ as the size, then you are also asked for the length and
width of the paper as shown above. If you select other than Custom these
input fields will not be shown.
Duplex
Activate duplex if needed. (Not available for ZPL output).
Zebra
Sets specific Zebra (ZPL) param eters: Printing speed and relative
tem perature.
Copy
M anagement
Here you can activate or change the attributes of Copy Managem ent. Refer to
page 62 for m ore inform ation.
Page definitions refers to Extended Page definitions. Open up this folder and insert new lines
by use of the this icon:
For m ore inform ation of extended page definition refer to page 61.
InterForm A/S 535
The spool view
W hen you design, you can view the original spooled file and the resulting spooled file on the
right. Select the ‘Spool’ view to see the original spooled file. Text, that has already been
rem apped or tabulated will be shown in grey:
If the m ouse pointer is placed in the spool view the current position is shown in the bottom to
the right. Above the current position is position 8 in line 6. If you m ark a conditional elem ent
the 'Conditional' tab will light up - m aking it possible to view the lines transferred to the
specific overlay by activating this tab. You can use the conditional tab to define tabulators and
rem ap windows in the conditioned overlay.
536
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The Result view
The result view looks like this:
Please note, that the rulers are only displayed with the grid. You can m ark an elem ent and
drag it to the position you want. The current position of the m ouse pointer is shown in the
bottom in inches and pels.
InterForm A/S 537
Inserting design elements
To start editing or adding design elem ents for an overlay you need to open the ‘Elem ents’
folder of the overlay:
Press this icon to m ove the m arked elem ent upwards in the list.
Press this icon to m ove the m arked elem ent downwards in the list.
Deletes the m arked design elem ent. You can also just m ark an elem ent and
press the <Delete> key.
You can also use the norm al clipboard options cut/copy/paste to change the elem ents as well
as ‘undo’ and ‘redo’ the last changes. You need to click the elem ent(s) in the elem ent list on
the left to use the clipboard options.
All elem ents are placed between ‘Top’ and ‘Bottom’. Activate the position between ‘Top’ and
‘Bottom’, where you want to insert the elem ent. The new elem ent will be placed after this
position. After activating an elem ent you need to place it on the result view on the right.
Sticky elem ents
Note: If you want to insert m any elem ents of the sam e type you can double click on the
elem ent type (on the list to the left) m aking the elem ent type stick and it is m arked with a red
fram e. Now you can insert m any elem ents of the sam e type without having to select the
elem ent type each tim e. Just click on the elem ent type again (hold down the key for a while)
when you are done.
Page Control
For all the elem ents (except the Suboverlay elem ent) you can chose to insert the elem ent on
specific pages only via the Page Managem ent tab.
You can chose to inser the elem ent on:
All pages (default)
First page only
Page 2 and following
Last page only
538
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Copy management
If you have enabled copy m anagem ent on the overlay, then each elem ent can be inserted on
all or specific copies. You set that on the Page m anagem ent tab of the elem ent.
The prim ary and secondary pages refer to the m erge type.
You can set if you do a prim ary (default) or a secondary m erge when
you specify the m erge with an overlay or overlay selector.
All:
Include the elem ent on all copies.
Interval:
Include the elem ent on an interval of copies.
None:
Do not include the elem ent on any copies.
Here are the elem ent types you can insert:
Fixed text. The properties are:
Text
Position
The text to insert.
The position from the top and left. (Reference point changes with
rotation).
Font
The font to use for the text.
Rotate text 30 degrees
Option possible for font numbers >=5000. Rotates the text additional
30 degrees.
Outline
If the text is rotated 30 degrees, then you can also chose to outline it.
(Letters are not filled out).
Rotation
The rotation of the text. Notice that the text will change the reference
point when rotated, so you m ay need to zoom out in the Result view to
see the new position after rotation.
Adjust
Adjustm ent of the text. It can be unform atted, centered or right
adjusted.
Print Info. Inserts data of the spooled file or overlay in the output.
The elem ent works like the text elem ent above except the Inform ation type field,
which can be set to these values:
Value:
Prints out:
Page num ber
Page num ber of the actual page.
Last page num ber Total num ber of pages.
M ulti up page num ber
The actual page num ber when using Multi-Up.
Job Nam e
The job nam e.
User
Userprofile used for the job.
Job Num ber
Job num ber of the job.
Job
Job nam e/User/Job num ber.
Program Nam e
The program , that created the spool file.
Program Library Library of the program , that created the spool file.
InterForm A/S 539
Overlay
File set nam e
Print text
The nam e of this overlay.
File set of this overlay.
The PRTTXT attribute of the m erged spooled file.
Inserts an im ported TIF/BMP/JPG image in the design. This im age
m ust have previously have been im ported in InterForm 400. You can select either
a black/white im age, a color im age or both:
You can chose to include the im age on either the black/white, the color or both
outputs, by selecting the ‘Enable x im ages’. You get the best quality of output if
you select separate im ages for B/W and color like above. The im age is inserted by
clicking the folder icon, which lists the im ages installed in InterForm 400. Refer to
page 354 of how to install the im ages. If you click the red X you will delete the
reference to the im age - NOT the installed im age.
Resolution/resizing
You can resize the im age by changing the resolution. The higher the resolution the
sm aller the im age. The resolution for the B/W im age can only be changed in fixed
steps, while you can set the color resolution to any value. If you rem ove the ‘tick’
for the ‘Default resolution’ you can drag in the corners of the color im age to resize
it.
The Reverse image option for the B/W im age switches the colors black and
white. You can check the color and B/W output by clicking the Toggle color icon
in the top:
Line. Drag with the left m ouse key pressed in the result view to insert the line. The
properties are:
Repeat
The repeat option can be used for inserting m ultiple lines at once. Type in how
m any tim es the line should be repeated and how m uch you want to m ove the line
for each repetition.
540
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Inserts a fram e. The properties are:
Position
The distance from the top and left of the paper to the top, left corner of the fram e.
End
The distance from the top and left of the paper to the bottom , right
corner of the fram e.
Repeat
Refer to the description of the Line elem ent on the previous page.
Corner
Defines the shape of the corners:
Sharp
All corners are sharp.
Round All corners are default round (radius is 24 pels)
Custom
Set the radius of each corner in each com pass
direction: NW , NE, SW ,SE.
Radius = 0 is a sharp corner.
Radius = 24 is a ‘norm al’ round corner.
B/W Fill interior and Color Fill interior:
Sets the filling of the fram e in black/white and color output. For a nice
sm ooth shading a 600 dpi filling is recom m ended. For color PDF you
will get the best result if you set the color filling to 100% black and
com bine it with a grey color with the Ink elem ent. If you set the filling
to 100% white shading you can delete elem ents, that was previously
inserted and m ake the area white. Refer to the Ink elem ent on page
548 for details.
Tabulator: A "tabulator" perform s form atting and horizontal m ovem ent of an
interval of lines and positions in the spooled file. A related elem ent is the Remap
W indow (page 544). You should use the tabulator if you want to delete som e
spooled file text: Just tabulate the text and place it outside the page in the result
view. Mark first the area of text on the input view, that you want to tabulate and
then m ark the place in the result view where it should be printed.
Under the Input tab you will find this:
InterForm A/S 541
Position
The positions in the spooled file to tabulate.
Line
The lines in the spooled file to tabulate.
Conditions
If you activate this, then each spooled file line in the m arked line
interval is tested according to the condition and only lines fitting the
condition are tabulated.
Position
The positions of each line to be used for the
com parison.
Condition
(Com paring the selected positions with the compare
text below). Possible conditions are:
>
Greater than a num ber entered in the
following field. Com parison is text/char
based.
=
Equal to a text string (case sensitive)
<
Less than a text entered in the following field.
Com parison is text/char based.
N
Not equal to a text string (case sensitive) or a
num ber.
A
Acceptable characters. All the characters
m ust be one of the characters in the
com pare text below.
U
Unacceptable characters. Opposite to AAcceptable characters i.e. one or m ore of
characters are not found in the list in the
com pare text.
Com pare text The text with which the spooled file contents is
com pared to.
Blank Conditional text
If activated the positions used for the condition are rem oved from the
spooled file i.e. they are not printed. Any trailing blanks are trim m ed
off, so insert blanks e.g. a the first char if you need to use
blanks/spaces for the A and U com parisons.
542
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Example using condition A=Acceptable characters
If you want the tabulator only to work for lines, that contains a num ber, then you
can use this condition:
Under the formatting tab you define the position and layout of the tabulated text:
Position
Font
Adjust
The position in the output from the left edge of the paper - or
reference position for other adjustm ents.
The font to use for the tabulated text.
The adjustm ent of each line. Possible values are:
Unformatted. The area is printed without any changes to form atting,
and spaces.
Left.. Leading spaces in each text lines are rem oved, causing each
line to be left adjusted at the position indicated above.
Center. Trailing and leading spaces within the tabulator area are first
rem oved, then each line are centred.
Right. Trailing spaces are rem oved, and then each are right adjusted
at the position indicated above.
M WARNING M
Adjustment cannot place the adjusted text to the left of the left edge of the paper in PCL
output (negative positioning is not possible). So if you try to e.g. right adjust a long text, that
cannot fit in between the left edge of the paper and the specified position, the text is moved to
the right to make room for all the text.
Numeric. Right adjust for num eric values. The values are still nicely
right aligned even if som e should be negative (with a m inus as the
last character).
Barcode. Print succeeding spaces in barcode data. Indicates if the
spaces in the coloum n interval succeeding the barcode data should
be converted to barcode. This only apply to the barcodes 128 and
3of9. The barcodes will always be left-adjusted. (Norm ally succeeding
spaces will be ignored.)
Underline:
Underlining of text in the tabulator (leading and trailing blanks are not
underlined).
Punctuation and Punctuation Length:
If the last position of a tabulated line is a period sign, a line of
punctuation will be printed. The punctuation will start after the last
printable character, and continue to the Punctuation length. Only
Adjustm ent values Unformatted and Left can be com bined with the
punctuation. No punctuation will be m ade if other values are used, if
no period sign is found or if the text exceeds the punctuation length.
InterForm A/S 543
If you are unable to m ark a new area in the input view, when trying to change the tabulator:
Please refer to the ‘Lock spooled file selection’ section on page 531 for help.
M WARNING M
If two or more overlapping tabulators are defined the first defined will take the text it needs
and leave blank positions in the relevant place for the next tabulator. A maximum of 200
tabulators per overlay can be defined. The limit of 200 includes any referenced
suboverlays. If you are using many conditioned tabulators you should consider to use the
conditioned overlay instead.
M WARNING M
Adjustment cannot place the adjusted text to the left of the left edge of the paper in PCL
output (negative positioning is not possible). So if you try to e.g. right adjust a long text, that
cannot fit in between the left edge of the paper and the specified position the text is moved to
the right to make room for all the text.
Remap window . Mark the window of text, that you want to rem ap in the input
view and where to place it in the result view.
A m axim um of 300 Remap W indow lines are allowed in one overlay. The lim it of
300 includes any referenced suboverlays. Additional rem ap window lines are
ignored. If this lim itation is a problem you should use 'Conditional Elem ent' lines
instead, that is m ore efficient and easier to m aintain. Contact your local
InterForm 400 support to get m ore inform ation of how to do that if in doubt.
If you want to rem ove spooled file data, then you should use the tabulator. If you
use the rem ap window the data will still be searchable in the PDF output - even
tough it is not directly visable.
The properties are:
544
Remap
The spooled file positions and lines, that you want to
rem ap/reposition.
Conditions
Refer to the description for the tabulator above.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The Formatting tab has these options:
Som e features are covered for the tabulator elem ent above. The others are:
Rotation
The selected text is rotated. Please refer to the note in the
text elem ent on page 539 about rotation.
Line Distance
The height of each spooled file line counted in pels. (40 pels
equals 6 lines per inch). The rem ap window will advance this
distance for each spooled file line.
Ignore blank lines The rem apped window of text is m oved together so that any
blank lines (and lines without a valid condition) are ignored.
J TIP J
If you are unable to mark a new area in the input view, when trying to change the remap
window element: Please refer to the ‘Lock spooled file selection’ section on page 531 for help.
Adjust=Extended
(Aligns both left and right m argins). This function enables changes to the num ber
of letters per line, based on the font size and the max. line w idth of the
justification. Distances between words are autom atically adjusted.
Extended adjustm ent is not supported for fixed fonts like e.g. courier.
Use this option to e.g. change the line breaks dynam ically, but setting a m axim um
width and letting InterForm 400 decide when to do line breaks.
If you select Adjust=Extended, then two extra options are displayed and an
Escape Sequence tab is available:
M aximum line w idth
How wide the text is allowed to be. InterForm 400 will try to
use the full width and rearrange spooled file words.
Right margin filled
Defines when a text line should not be justified. This is based
on the percentage of text characters versus blank spaces left
on the last line of a rem apped paragraph.(0-100%)
InterForm A/S 545
The escape sequence tab m akes it possible to let the spooled file trigger
form atting and font selection in the m iddle of the text:
Escape sequences are not supported for Label printers (ZPL/IPL).
If the rem apped text e.g. contains the text ‘/UL’, then the following text will be
underlined until the text ‘/EL’ is found. (See Appendix H, page 438 for m ore
details).
Conditional Element. Use this elem ent to insert another overlay if a condition is
true. The other overlay can ‘receive’ spooled file lines from where the Mark the
area for the condition in the input view: Mark out the line interval while holding
down the left mouse key and m ark out the position interval for the condition
while holding down the right mouse key. Properties of this elem ent are:
You see these icons next to the conditioned suboverlay:
Insert an existing overlay as the overlay to call for this condition
Clear the reference to the suboverlay - does not delete the
actual suboverlay.
Creates a new suboverlay to be called.
W hen you have selected a conditioned overlay you can edit it
by
pressing this icon. W hen rem apping spooled file contents in
a
conditioned overlay you should use the 'Conditional view' instead of
'Input view'. W hen finished editing this return to the
m ain overlay
by selecting ‘File’ and ‘Close current overlay’ 546
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
or by pressing this icon in the toolbar:
The options are:
Remap
The line interval to scan for the condition.
Condition
Refer to the tabulator on page 542 for details.
Blank conditional text
If activated the characters used for the condition will be blanked out when the condition is true. The characters are still available in the
conditioned overlay if any lines are transferred.
Note the ‘Remap condition parameters’ in the bottom . ‘Until another is true
(*VAR)’ is default disabled and the num ber of spooled files lines transferred to the
conditioned overlay is 0.
If you specify a num ber, then that is the num ber of spooled file lines, that are
transferred to the other overlay, starting from the line where the condition was
true.
If ‘Until another is true (*VAR)’ is enabled, then all spooled file lines from the line
with the true condition are transferred to the suboverlay - until another (or this)
conditioned elem ent is true.
Notice the ‘Form atting’ tab. W ith this you can decide where the conditioned
overlay should be placed:
The vertical reposition can m ove this overlay and the subsequent spooled file
lines up or down:
Actual position:
This will m ove the rest of the spooled file up (negative value) or down (positive
value). See page 110 for an exam ple which uses this option.
Last non blank input line:
Use this repositioning e.g. in order to close the gap of blank lines on the original
spooled file. (Place the suboverlay relatively to the last non blank line.)
Reposition after execute of suboverlay:
The m ain benefit from this option is that if you are using an extended rem ap
window in the suboverlay, then you can m ake the height of the suboverlay
adaptive - to fit the text rem apped lowest on the page, but this option can be used
whenever the height of the suboverlay is uncertain.
The vertical and horizontal placement decides if the overlay should be placed in
a fixed position (absolute) or relative (+/-) to where the condition is true.
W ith a vertical displacem ent of ‘+’ you can push the suboverlay downwards and
with ‘-‘ the suboverlay is m oved upwards relatively to the line(s) where the
condition is true.
InterForm A/S 547
You should always have the vertical or the horizontal position (or both) set to
Absolute(A), if both are relative (+ or -) then you will see a wrong result in PDF.
An exam ple showing how to use the conditional elem ent is found on page 552
J TIP J
You can select an element in the element list (that has been inserted via either a conditioned
or unconditioned suboverlay) by pressing the <Ctrl> key while clicking the element in the result
view.
Suboverlay. Inserts an unconditioned suboverlay.
If you are printing general com pany info in several overlays, i.e. the com pany letter
head, it is convenient to place this info in a separate overlay. W ith this function
you can place such inform ation in an overlay that can be called as a sub-overlay
from any other overlays. Any general setting of the suboverlay are ignored.
Ink. Use this elem ent to change the ink with which you are ‘writing’. You can set
both a shade of grey (from white to black) and a color for the color output. The ink
elem ent has effect until the next ink is found. Rem em ber to set both black/white
ink and a color ink if needed. The best shades of grey in color PDF is created by
creating your own grey color and com bine that with a 100% black. Use the 100%
white shading option to e.g. print white text inside a black fram e.
You can define your own colors as described on page 363.
Inserts a PCL file in the design. A PCL file is generated by printing to file in e.g.
windows while using a generic PCL5 or PCL5e printer driver. Note: PCL files are
not displayed in the graphical designer - only as a red fram e. You can press this
icon:
-to view the correct result in SwiftView.
See page 360 for m ore inform ation about PCL files.
Inserts a HP-GL/2 file in the design. HP-GL/2 files are not displayed in
the graphical designer. Norm ally you should consider the PCL file above as a
better alternative. Refer to page 88 for m ore inform ation.
Inserts a com m ent. Com m ents are shown in blue in the graphical designer, but
are not visible in the result. Refer to page 89 for m ore inform ation.
W hen you have finished the design you need to upload/save onto the InterForm 400 databases
on your System i. You can do that in these m anners:
Save the current overlay
548
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Select this icon to close the current overlay. The designer will then ask if you want
to save the current design (you are not offered the possibility to save as a different
nam e). This is the sam e as ‘File’ and ‘Close current overlay’.
- Or select ‘File’ and ‘Save’/ ‘Save As’.
InterForm A/S 549
Page Management
W ith the Page Managem ent tab of the design elem ent you can decide, if you want to insert the
specific elem ent on certain pages. W ith the Page Control option you can chose to use the
elem ent on all the pages of the spooled file, on only the first page, from page 2 or only the last
page:
On the elem ent list the Page
P:1 This elem ent is included
P:2 This elem ent is included
P:9 This elem ent is included
Control setting is viewed on the right as:
only the first page (Page control=1).
from page 2 and onwards (Page control=2).
on the last page only (Page control=9)
If you have activated Copy M anagem ent you can also chose to include the elem ent on certain
copies:
You can insert the elem ent on all copies, an interval of copies or none. You can state that for
both Prim ary and Secondary m erges. You specify what kind of m erge you want on the m erge
com m and. W hen you have activated copy m anagem ent you can view the various copies by
selecting this icon on the upper right:
On the elem ent list you can see if an elem ent is conditioned on the copy m anagem ent copy on
the right:
The indication starts with C: followed by the Prim ary copies (if not all). P1-2 indicates e.g. that
the elem ent is included on Prim ary copy 1 and 2. P0 indicates, that the elem ent is not included
on any of the prim ary copies. The sam e indication follows for the Secondary copies. The
elem ent above is included on prim ary copies 1 and 2 and none of the secondary copies.
550
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Suspend design elements
All design elem ents can be suspended by activating the suspend option in the bottom of the
leftm ost tab:
This will disable the elem ent, so that it will not appear in the output. This can e.g. be used for
debugging purposes or if you tem porarily wants to rem ove/disable an elem ent.
The suspended elem ents are m arked with a white circle as shown above - instead of the
norm al blue one.
You can also suspend and unsuspend m ultiple elem ent by selecting them (as explained on
page 554) and then activate/deactivate the suspend option for all:
InterForm A/S 551
How to work with conditioned overlays in the Designer
W hen working with conditioned overlays with the graphical designer, you can actually do
advanced changes very easily:
You insert a reference to a conditioned overlay, but first clicking this icon on the left:
(Marked with a green circle above).
Next you decide how to insert how the conditioned overlay is to be placed (relatively or
absolute) via the ‘Form atting’ tab (m arked in a yellow circle). Here you can also m ove the
com plete conditioned overlay up or down (with with add/subtract and a vertical distance to
use).
If you want to transfer spooled file data to the conditioned overlay, you need to either activate
the ‘Until another is true’ (sam e as *VAR in the green screen) or state a ‘Num ber of Lines’ to
rem ap - both options are m arked with the blue circle above.
You also need to select or create a conditioned overlay. This is done by clicking either of the
icons m arked with red circles above
( either this:
- or this:
)
To m ark out the condition for the overlay you use the m ouse and hold down the left mouse
key to m ark out the lines to search for the condition. Hold down the right mouse key to
drag over the positions to com pare with the text above.
Now you can open the conditioned overlay for edit with the icon:
If you now click the ‘Conditional’ - m arked with an orange circle above, you can now rem ap or
tabulate spooled file data in the norm al m anner:
552
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
You m ay notice, that the top of the Result view som etim es turns grey when you start editing
the conditioned overlay, the reason is, that the grey area is unreachable as the bottom of the
grey area is actually the top of the conditioned overlay (0 from the top). If you want to insert
som ething higher in the conditioned overlay, then you will need to m ove the com plete
conditioned overlay upwards via the ‘Form atting’ tab shown on the previous im age.
Also notice that the conditioned overlay is written in bold, red and italic, when it is open for edit.
W hen you are done editing the overlay you click this icon:
(Close overlay)
- or you select ‘File’ and ‘Close overlay’, and you will return to editing the m ain overlay.
Local save in the designer
If you lose the contact with the System i, you will get the m essage 'Lost connection to host' and
the designer will end. But do not worry: A backup of your overlay is on your PC and you reload
that design when you restart the designer (after regaining contact to the System i). In that case
the designer will start up with the m essage 'Found previous unsaved overlay'.
Movement of elements in the result view
W hen you want to m ove an elem ent you can do either of these things:
•
Move the m ouse pointer to the elem ent in the result view. The elem ent lights up in green.
Click left or right m ouse button to select the elem ent. Now you can drag (by holding the
button down) the elem ent to the new position. Note, that the elem ent snaps to the grid
m aking it easy to align m ore elem ents
•
Find the elem ent on the list on the right and type in the new position in inches and pels.
•
Mark an elem ent with the m ouse and now you can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to
m ove the elem ent. The elem ent will m ove 10 pels (1/24 of an inch) each tim e you press an
arrow key. Com bine the arrow keys with <Ctrl> to m ove 80 pels (1/3 of an inch) at a tim e or
com bine the arrow keys with <Shift> to m ove the elem ents just 1 pel at a tim e. Note, that
this m ovem ent is independent of the grid.
M WARNING M
If you move a group while the grid is active all the elements of the group will snap to the grid.
InterForm A/S 553
Grouping and ungrouping elements
You can group several elem ents in order to reposition them all in one process. Note, that you
can only create one, current group. You can group elem ents together in the following m anners:
•
By holding down the <Ctrl> key and m arking each elem ent in the elem ent listing to the left
of the screen.
•
By holding down the <Ctrl> key and m arking each elem ent in the result window.
•
By clicking this icon:
- then hold down the left m ouse button and drag a red fram e around the elem ents you want
to select. After you have selected elem ents in this m anner you can still hold down the
<Ctrl> key and m ark additional elem ents as described above.
W hile you have grouped several elem ents you can change the font for all the elem ents at one
tim e by selecting the com m on font in the lower left corner of the designer.
You can ungroup the elements in these manners:
•
By holding down the <Ctrl> key and clicking on an elem ent you will rem ove this elem ent
from the group.
•
By clicking anywhere in the result window (without holding down <Ctrl>) outside an elem ent
then all the elem ents will be rem oved from the group.
Troubleshooting the designer
Problem: Error message: 'Unable to load color model'
W hen you start the InterForm 400 designer you m ight hit the m essage 'unable to load color
m odel'. This indicates a problem with the DDM server on the AS/400. Here are som e hints for
m aking that run:
First run option 75. Prepare server to support InterForm Designer to m ake sure that all
necessary servers are running.
Execute the com m and: DSPNETA. Find the text/param eter 'DDM request access'. This should
be *OBJAUT, it can also refer to a user program , but if it is *REJECT the DDM server will not
work. Change the value with:
CHGNETA DDMACC(*OBJAUT)
Try ending the *DDM server with this com m and: ENDTCPSVR SERVER(*DDM), then restart
the *DDM server with STRTCPSVR SERVER(*DDM). Now run this com m and: W RKSBMJOB
SBMFROM(*JOB) and it should show you a job called 'QRW TLSTN'. Start the designer and
look in the joblog of this job for m ore inform ation.
Open up System i Navigator and select 'Network/Servers/TCP/IP'. Double click on 'DDM' to
see the properties for this server. Look at the 'Subsystem s' folder. Here you m ight have defined
special rules for selecting subsystem , that prevent the DDM server from running. If you select
'Use server defaults' the DDM server should run OK.
If you access the AS/400 through a firewall be sure, that these port num bers can go through:
Host Server
554
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Port
Version 2014
*CENTRAL
*DATABASE
*DTAQ
*FILE
*NETPRT
*RMTCMD
*SIGNON
*SVRMAP
TCP-server
*DDM
8470
8471
8472
8473
8474
8475
8476
449
Port:
446
That m eans, that the following ports m ust be opened (Not blocked by any firewall):
446, 449, 8470-8476.
Finally you can test the connection to the servers by running the CW BPING com m and in a
DOS session on the PC. Try running this com m and followed by the IP-address of the iSeries
server and then it should report a successful connection for all servers - especially for DDM.
Please contact your local support if these hints still does not fix the problem .
BTW : Rem em ber to start the servers as a part of the IPL e.g. with these com m ands in the
startup program :
STRHOSTSVR
MONMSG
STRTCPSVR
MONMSG
SERVER(*ALL)
CPF0000
SERVER(*DDM)
CPF0000
Problem: Wrong font and/or missing characters in the result view
If you have the problem in the graphical designer, that the characters are not displayed
correctly in the result view, then you should first click a rem ap window, tabulator or text
elem ent, which is having this problem . Then click the ‘Font details’ tab:
In the exam ple above the font has been defined as a ‘univers’ font, but still the designer has
chosen to display the text in the font ‘SansSerif Plain’ as m entioned in the bottom under
‘Displaying as True Type font’. This is norm ally not a problem for the univers font as the Sans
Serif Plain is so very close to the univers font, that you probably cannot see the difference.
If the designer has chosen a wrong/different font (for ‘Displaying as True Type font’), than
expected then you should install a True Type Font (copy it to C:\windows\fonts) and restart the
designer to get the right result.
One exam ple is, that if you have installed the univers.ttf in InterForm 400 (and linked it in
autodownload), but not installed it on the PC, then the designer will try to link it with a sim ilar
TTF like e.g. ‘Universalm ath’ or even ‘Universal Fruit cake’ and displaying squares in the result
view. To solve this you need to either install the correct TTF (univers) on the PC (by copying it
InterForm A/S 555
into C:\windows\fonts), which is to be preferred or alternatively you can delete the wrongly
selected TTF from C:\windows\fonts if you are 100% sure, that you can live without it.
Problem: Spooled file data is not displayed correctly
If you see a code page problem when looking at the spooled file data in the designer i.e. that
the non-western characters are not displayed correctly, then you need to m ake sure, what code
page the designer is expecting the spooled file to be in. Very often the spooled file attributes
does not tell that, so you can specifically tell the designer what code page the spooled file is in.
You do that on your user profile settings in InterForm 400. Select this:
80. Adm inistering InterForm 400
1. W ork with InterForm 400 users
Now you use ‘2=Change’ for the user profile you use when starting the designer:
Change InterForm user
APF102D
User profile . . . . . . :
KSE
Kim S Egekjær
Language of user . . . . .
EN
DE, DK, EN, ES, FR, PT,
blank = system default
Users output queue . . . .
Library . . . . . . . .
AFC_INPUT1
APF3812
blank = system default
Printer type . . . . . . .
HP4
HP4, HP4D, HP4_PJL, HP4D_PJL,
HP5C, HP4500, HP4500D,
ZEBRA203, ZEBRA300, QLZPL203,
IPL203, IPL300
Designer options:
Code page . . . . . . . .
When to use code page .
870
*SPLFATR
blank = system default
*SPLFATR, *ALWAYS
DBCS code page . . . . . .
When to use code page .
935
*SPLFATR
blank = system default
*SPLFATR, *ALWAYS
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Above I have set the spooled file code page to be 870 (eastern europe) unless the spooled file
attribute contains another codepage. For any DBCS spooled files the designer will handle the
spooled file as it is codepage 935 unless it contains a specific code page.
556
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix P - Import/Export in details
This appendix describes the use of export and im port in details. For an introduction to the
export/im port feature you should refer to the description starting a page 384.
The appendix contains this:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
An overview of all possible cross references - to help you to rem em ber what to
export/im port.
Explaination of what will be exported when selecting 3. Copy resources used in already
copied overlays - and what will not be exported.
Explaination of option 4. Copy auto dow nload defs and soft font members for all
copied fonts
W arnings/hints during im port.
W hat will be updated if you renam e resources in the export or im port library.
A list of the resources, that cannot be exported/im ported.
The Multiple Export Libraries feature (MEL) - for concurrent export.
The Im port InterForm 400 Resources (IMPAPFRSC) com m and.
Overview of possible cross references
This is an overview of the cross references in InterForm 400:
(Im age with cross references: * indicates a resource, that cannot be exported/im ported)
The im age above illustrates the InterForm 400 resources and how they refer to each other.
From the im age you can e.g. see that AFC definitions can refer to other AFC definitions as well
as overlay selectors, finish definitions, split definitions, sort definitions, OSC (indirectly by
m oving spooled files), indirectly to output sorter definitions and printer drawer conversions.
An overlay selector refers to overlays, which can refer to other overlays as well as fonts,
im ages, PCL files, palette colors and user defined PJL sequences (for stapling).
InterForm A/S 557
W hen you want to export a setup you can refer to the im age above to be sure, that you are
exporting/im porting all the necessary resources. Resources and objects, that cannot be
exported are listed on page 563.
558
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
3. Copy resources used in already copied overlays
During the export procedure you can use option 3. Copy resources used in already copied
overlays after you have exported one or m ore overlays. This will export any resource referred
to by the overlays:
Font num bers
Im ages
Palette colors
PCL files
Overlays
Overlays referred to by the already exported overlays as either suboverlays or conditioned
overlays are also exported with this feature. Any of the resources above, that are referenced in
these suboverlays or conditioned overlays are also exported.
Any soft fonts linked with the font num bers and auto download setup are NOT exported with
this feature. You will need e.g. to run option 4. Copy auto download defs and soft font
members for all copied fonts to do that.
4. Copy auto download defs and soft font members for all copied
fonts
After running option 3. Copy resources used in already copied overlays it usually a very
good idea to run option 4. Copy auto dow nload defs and soft font members for all copied
fonts. W ith this any referred soft fonts and referenced auto download setup are also copied for
export.
The auto download and soft fonts for PCL are only copied for export if they are used in a printer
group, which includes the output queue *ALLPCL, which refers to all PCL output. (Any auto
download for other PCL printer groups cannot be exported).
Warnings/hints during import.
W hen you are im porting resources you will be warned if the resources already exists. Via
option 4. Transfer resources to production library you m ay see som ething like this:
InterForm A/S 559
Confirm transfer of all resources to production library
IMP820D
Press F10 to transfer all resources to production.
Press F3 or F12 to cancel.
Resource
DEMOIMAGE
4656
5012
ACME
DEMOIMAGE
SAMPLE/CUST1001
SAMPLE/FOOTER
SAMPLE/MAIN
Type
*COLORIMG
*FONT
*FONT
*IMAGE
*IMAGE
*OVERLAY
*OVERLAY
*OVERLAY
Notice
Exists
Exists
Exists
Exists
Exists
Exists
Exists
End
F3=Exit
F10=Transfer all resources to production
F12=Cancel
The text ‘Exists’ on the right m eans, that the resource already exists in the production and that
the im port will overwrite the existing object if you go on with the im port by pressing F10. If you
regret the im port with F3 or F12 you can do a selective im port instead.
W ith option 3. W ork with resources in import library you can do a selective im port and here
you m ight get even m ore detailed inform ation when im porting font num bers:
Work with Font Definitions in Import Library
Position to . . . . . .
Type options, press Enter.
1=Transfer to production
Opt
Font number
4656
5012
IMP432D
Font number
4=Delete
7=Assign new font number
Description
Code 39 (7.69 CPI, 28.32 points)
Arial 12 Normal
Notice
Exists
Recommended font
4656
5018 *
End
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
W hen im porting like this you m ight even get a suggestion for a different font like above. Here
the font 5012 is being im ported. There is no such font num ber in production, but yet
InterForm 400 inform s you, that the font you are installing is identical to the font 5018, which is
already in production - so you should consider to use that instead.
If you have not copied any of the other objects into production, you can now renam e the font
num ber with option 7=Assign new font number where som e references in the im port library to
the font num ber will also be changed. Renam ing resources in the im port or export library in this
m anner is covered below.
560
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Renaming resources in the export or import library
It is possible to renam e objects/resources while exporting and im porting. It is im portant to do
that at the right tim e.
For exports you can renam e the resources (via option 3. W ork with resources in export
library) after you have copied all the required resources into the export library and prior to
running option 4. W ork with distributions, where the export file is packed. That is, any update
of cross references are done for the resources, that has already been copied for export.
For im ports you can renam e the resources (via option 3. W ork with resources in import
library) after you have run option 2. Receive distribution into import library and prior to
m oving any resources into production via either option 3. W ork with resources in import
library or 4. Transfer resources to production library.
Below you see an im age indicating what cross references, that are updated if you chose to
renam e a resource in the export of im port library like described above:
InterForm A/S 561
Check list when renaming resources
•
If you have renamed an output in AFC:
If the output queue referenced by nam e in any of these functions in AFC:
1 = Merge with overlay
3 = Transform *AFPDS to *USERASCII
4 = Copy Spooled File
5 = Move Spooled File
And this AFC queue is also inside the export/im port library, then these lines are
autom atically updated to refer the new output queue.
If a split definition is referring to the output queue by nam e, then you will need to update
this reference m anually.
If you are using OSC (Output Schedule Control) to put spooled files on this queue, then
you will need to update the OSC definitions.
If you are m oving or creating new spooled files on this output queue in a user program ,
then these will also need to refer to the new output queue. (Such program s can e.g. be
called via function 8 in AFC or from a split definition).
•
562
Run the PRTXREF option before renam e:
The cross reference list can help you to identify what resources are referring to the
resource, that you intend to renam e.
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Resources that cannot be exported/imported
It is not all resources, that can be exported and im ported. This m ay be quite im portant to notice
if you e.g. want to m ove an installation from one m achine to another or if you want to m erge to
InterForm 400 installations into one.
These are the resources/settings, that cannot be exported/im ported:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The user output queue setting.
The work with em ail senders list.
Any referenced user program s.
Configuration in general.
The em ail log.
ZPL downloaded resources in flash m em ories.
Substitution ZEBRA internal fonts.
The AFPDS copy spooled file CPI & LPI table.
User setup.
Digital certificates.
User defined PJL sequences.
Output sorter (output bin support).
Drawer/tray conversion tables.
Output Schedule Control (OSC) settings
License code
Auto download setup for PCL printer groups, that does not include the outq *ALLPCL
InterForm A/S 563
Multiple Export Libraries (MEL) feature
Description
By default InterForm 400 only allows you to export resources to a library nam ed APFEXPORT.
The purpose of the MEL feature is to allow developers to export resources to other libraries as
well.
Activation/deactivation
To activate MEL you create a data area (of any type) nam ed APFEXPORT in library APF3812.
To deactivate MEL sim ply delete the data area APF3812/APFEXPORT.
Usage
W hen MEL is activated the F10=Select export library com m and key will be enabled and option
6.Delete export library APFEXPORT will be rem oved from the InterForm 400 export m enu.
At the InterForm 400 export m enu press F10 and overwrite APFEXPORT with another nam e (in
the Export library field) to select another library to be used for export. All options at the
InterForm 400 export m enu will now work on objects in this library.
Once you use option 1. Create export library with empty files all necessary InterForm 400
work files (and a data area nam ed EXPORTLIB) will be created in the specified library. Note: If
the library does not exist it will be created.
G NOTE G
IM PORTANT: Libraries created using option 1. Create export library with empty files at the
InterForm 400 export m enu CAN NOT be used after a release upgrade of InterForm 400.
The Import InterForm Ressources (IMPAPFRSC) command
The purpose of the IMPAPFRSC is to im port InterForm 400 resources without any (or with very
lim ited) user intervention.
The APF3812/IMPAPFRSC com m and:
Import InterForm resources (IMPAPFRSC)
Type choices, press Enter.
Save file . . . . . .
Library . . . . . .
Transfer to production
Display errors . . . .
Stream file name . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SAVF
TFRPROD
DSPERR
STMF
__________
Name
*LIBL
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
*YES
*YES, *NO, *PROMPT
*YES
*YES, *NO
/APF3812Home/Work/EXPORT.INS
Restrictions:
This com m and can only run from an interactive job.
Parameters:
SAVF
*LIBL:
564
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
This is required. Specifies the qualified nam e of the save file to be used
to restore the resources.The nam e of the save file can be qualified by one
of the following library values:
All libraries in the job's library list are searched until the first m atch is
found.
Version 2014
*CURLIB:
The current library for the job is searched. If no library is specified as the
current library for the job, the QGPL library is used.
Library-nam e:
Specify the nam e of the library to be searched.
Optional Param eters:
TFRPROD
*YES:
*PROM PT:
*NO:
DSPERR
*YES:
*NO:
Specifies whether resources are transferred to production in InterForm 400:
Copy resources to the im port library APFIMPORT and then transfer all
resources to production (the InterForm 400 system ).
Copy resources to the im port library APFIMPORT and then prom pt the user
whether to transfer all resources to production (the InterForm 400 system ).
Only im port resources to the im port library APFIMPORT.
Specifies whether any errors are displayed when running the IMPAPFRSC
com m and:
Display errors.
Do not display errors.
Examples
Example 1: Copy all resources from the CUSTINVLIB/EXPORT.INV save file to the im port
library APFIMPORT and then transfer all resources to production (the InterForm 400 system ):
IMPAPFRSC SAVF(CUSTINVLIB/EXPORT.INV)
Example 2: Copy all resources from the CUSTINVLIB/EXPORT.INV save file to the im port
library APFIMPORT and then prom pt the user whether to transfer all resources to production
(the InterForm 400 system ):
IMPAPFRSC SAVF(CUSTINVLIB/EXPORT.INV) TFRPROD(*PROMPT)
Example 3: Copy all resources from the CUSTINVLIB/EXPORT.INV save file to the im port
library APFIMPORT and then transfer all resources to production (the InterForm 400 system ). In
case of an error no display is shown:
IMPAPFRSC SAVF(CUSTINVLIB/EXPORT.INV) DSPERR(*NO)
Escape messages:
CPF9801 Object &2 in library &1 not found.
CPF9810 Library &1 not found.
APF9801 Error code &1 loading InterForm 400 resources.
Possible error codes for m essage APF9801:
Error code
Description
IMP0001
The InterForm APFIMPORT library can not be used.
IMP0002
The InterForm im port library APFIMPORT is in use.
IMP0003
The InterForm im port library APFIMPDST already exists.
IMP0004
Error installing the InterForm im port library APFIMPORT.
IMP0005
Error installing the InterForm im port library APFIMPDST.
IMP0006
One or m ore InterForm resources was not transferred to production.
InterForm A/S 565
Sample scenario of using MEL and the IMPAPFRSC command
Two developer team s at the sam e System i are using InterForm 400 to enhance printouts:
•
TEAM A are designing a French invoice nam ed INV003 in the file set FRINV for
custom er A
•
TEAM B are designing a Danish credit note nam ed CRE002 in the file set DKINV for
custom er B.
Then TEAM A and TEAM B both need to distribute their overlays to the custom ers:
•
First TEAM A creates a library nam ed TEAMA and export the overlay INV003 from file
set FRINV.
•
Then TEAM A creates a distribution (a save file) nam ed EXPORT.INV in library TEAMA
•
At the sam e tim e TEAM B creates a library nam ed TEAMB and export the overlay
CRE002 from file set DKINV and creates a distribution (a save file) nam ed
EXPORT.CRE in library TEAMB.
The TEAMA/EXPORT.INV save file can now be sent to custom er A, and the
TEAMB/EXPORT.CRE save file can now be sent to custom er B.
Restoring the savefile TEAMA/EXPORT.INV at custom er A's site and running the APFIMPRSC
com m and will im port the INV003 overlay to custom er A's system .
Likewise:
Restoring the savefile TEAMB/EXPORT.CRE at custom er B's site and running the
APFIMPRSC com m and will im port the CRE002 overlay to custom er B's system .
The CL program to restore the overlay at custom er A's site m ight look like this:
PGM
RSTLIB LIB(TEAMA) DEV(TAP01)
APF3812/IMPAPFRSC SAVF(TEAMA/EXPORT.INV)
ENDPGM
566
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix Q - Building functions into your menues
InterForm 400 provides a wide range of extra com m ands and tool that can help you and your
end users in your daily work. To see in what areas InterForm 400 can help you it is a very good
idea to go through the list of com m ands provided in InterForm 400 in Appendix I on page 450.
Below a few tips are listed:
The alternative to WRKOUTQ (display merged spooled files)
The norm al W RKOUTQ com m and is fine, but it has a few lim itations when working with
InterForm 400. It can e.g. not display a m erged spooled file. That is one of the reasons why
InterForm 400 is delivered with the alternative com m and: APF3812/APFW RKOUTQ.
The advantages of the APFW RKOUTQ com m and are:
•
•
•
•
You can see how m any pages a m erged spooled file is.
You can change the page range of a m erged spooled file if you used a PJL printer. type for
the m erge in InterForm 400.
You can display m erged spooled files via Swiftview.
You can e-m ail m erged spooled files directly from the m enu via option 1. (The senders em ail address is grabbed from the SMTP inform ation of the current user in the system
directory and the overlay or overlay selector is found in the afc setup of the outq).
J TIP J
Please also notice, that InterForm400 contains an alternative to the W RKSPLF command,
called APFW RKSPLF. This command is described on page 472.
One way to offer the advantages of this com m and can be to create a new library and create a
duplicate of the APFW RKOUTQ com m and in it:
CRTLIB APFWRKOUTQ
CRTDUPOBJ OBJ(APFWRKOUTQ) FROMLIB(APF3812) OBJTYPE(*CMD)
TOLIB(APFWRKOUTQ) NEWOBJ(WRKOUTQ)
This W RKOUTQ com m and will tem porarily not work during an upgrade of InterForm 400 or if
the apf3812 library does not exist. To avoid a problem you could rem ove or renam e the extra
W RKOUTQ com m and created above during an upgrade of InterForm 400 or if you decide to
rem ove InterForm 400 - but why would you do that? ;-)
View the last created spooled file as either PCL or PDF file
The com m ands: APF3812/APF3812 and APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF can m erge a spooled file
with an overlay or overlay selector and present the result directly on the screen if you are
running the com m ands in an interactive job.
If you e.g. have just created a screen shot in the sam e job, then you can refer to the last
spooled file generated with the right spooled file nam e. To view such a spooled file directly you
could build in either of these com m ands into your user m enues:
InterForm A/S 567
APF3812/APF3812 KARTSET(myfilset) KLICHE(overlay) FILNVN(QPRINT)
SPLNBR(*LAST) PRTTYP(HP4) OUTPUT(*VIEWER)
APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF KARTSET(myfileset) KLICHE(overlay) FILNVN(QPRINT)
SPLNBR(*LAST) OUTTYPE(*VIEW)
Above we assum e that the spooled file just generated is called QPRINT. W e are using an
overlay for the m erge, but we could of course also have used an overlay selector.
Add dynamic functions to the Attention (Escape) key
InterForm 400 can help you to add dynam ic functions to your existing applications for which you
do not even have the source code..
You can tell InterForm 400 to inspect the contents of a 5250 screen and decide what to do
depending on what is found. Then InterForm 400 can also pick out inform ation e.g. found in the
line of the cursor, and use that as param eters in a function or com m and.
To do this you first define what functions you want to execute and when they should be
activated. You define that via the com m and: APF3812/W RKSCNDFN:
Work with screen definitions
Position to . . . . . .
Required library . .
__________
Screen definition
__________
Type options, press Enter.
2=Change
3=Copy
4=Delete
Opt
_
_
_
Screen
COPY_SPLF
WRKACTJOB
APFMENU
SCR100D
Req.lib
*NONE
*NONE
APF3812
5=Display
Description
Copy spooled file via SNDTCPSPLF from APFWRKOUTQ
View Joblog as PDF from WRKACTJOB
Enter InterForm400 from Main if APF3812 is in LIBL
End
F3=Exit
F5=Refresh
F6=Create
F11=View 2
F12=Cancel
If you press F6=Create you can add a new screen definition:
568
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Create screen definition
SCR110D
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
APFMENU
APF3812
Description
Enter InterForm400 from Main if APF3812 is in LIBL
. . . . . . .
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
AND/OR
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
F3=Exit
Line
1
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Pos.
33
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Opr.
EQ
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Compare value
OS/400 Main Menu
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
More...
F12=Cancel
Above we have defined:
Required library is APF3812. This m eans that this function will ONLY be considered if the
APF3812 library is in the library list of the current job when <Escape> is pressed.
The com pare value is ‘OS/400 Main Menu’. This m eans, that this function will be run ONLY if
we press the <Escape> key when we are on the OS/400 Main Menu (This text m ust be found
on the screen in line 1 starting in position 33).
W e press <Page Down> to see this screen:
Create screen definition
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
APFMENU
APF3812
Command
APF3812/APFMENU KARTSET(&A)
. . . . . . . . .
SCR110D
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G
&H
&I
Line
20
Pos.
7
Len
10
Description
File set
End
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Here we can take various inform ation from the current screen and use it as param eters for a
com m and. Above we take the text found in line 20 from position 7 (10 characters from this
position) and use that as a param eter for the APF3812/APFMENU com m and in the file set
param eter (KARTSET). This m eans that if you type a file set before you press <Escape> then
this file set will be used when you enter InterForm 400 with this com m and.
If we leave out the line and/or position above then the position of the cursor is used (when
Escape was pressed).
InterForm A/S 569
Sim ular you can define that you want to view a joblog as a PDF file via this setup:
Change screen definition
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
WRKACTJOB
*NONE
Description
View Joblog as PDF from WRKACTJOB
. . . . . . .
SCR110D
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
AND/OR
Line
1
Pos.
30
Opr.
EQ
Compare value
Work with Active Jobs
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
Change screen definition
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
WRKACTJOB
*NONE
Command
CALL PGM(KSE/JOBLOGPDF) PARM(&A &B &C)
. . . . . . . . .
SCR110D
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
Line
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G
&H
&I
Pos.
9
22
34
Len
10
10
6
Description
JobName
User
JobNbr
End
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
The line num bers in the screen above are not filled out. So this m eans that the inform ation is
found in whatever line the cursor is in. Please note that the function requires that you first press
F11 twice on W RKACTJOB so you can see the jobnam e, user and Job num ber like below:
570
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Work with Active Jobs
CPU %:
.0
Elapsed time:
00:00:00
Opt Subsystem/Job User
Number Type
AUTO_FORM2
QSYS
221717 SBS
AFC_INPUT2
AFCOPER
221724 BCH
AMG2
AFCOPER
221725 BCH
DEMOIDX
AFCOPER
221743 BCH
IN_OUTQ04R
AFCOPER
221726 BCH
INFOR_TEST
AFCOPER
221727 BCH
INFORUM
AFCOPER
221728 BCH
LIFVOSS_IF
AFCOPER
221729 BCH
MU_PRTWT9I
AFCOPER
221730 BCH
PRT_APF25I
AFCOPER
221731 BCH
PRT_ZTESTI
AFCOPER
221732 BCH
USER2
AFCOPER
221733 BCH
USER2QUSRS
AFCOPER
221734 BCH
WOLFTEST
AFCOPER
221735 BCH
ZEBRA_KSE
AFCOPER
221736 BCH
ZZZZZZZZZZ
AFCOPER
221752 BCH
10/02/09
Active jobs:
170
CPU % Threads
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
.0
1
INTER03
15:21:42
More...
===>
F21=Display instructions/keys
The source of the called program could be this:
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------*/
/*
This is an example of a program, that can be called from
*/
/*
the APF3812/WRKSCNDFN command in InterForm400.
*/
/*
*/
/*
This program is to display the joblog of a job marked out in
*/
/*
WRKACTJOB. It will merge and display the joblog as a PDF file. */
/*
*/
/*
*/
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------*/
PGM
(&JOBNAME &USER &JOBNBR)
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
&ALL
&JOBNAME
&USER
&FILE
&JOBNBRA
&JOBNBR12
VAR(&JOBNBR)
*CHAR 31
*CHAR 10
*CHAR 10
*CHAR 40
*CHAR
6
*CHAR 12
TYPE(*DEC) LEN(15 5)
/* Convert the numeric jobnumber into 6 characters */
CHGVAR
VAR(&JOBNBR12) VALUE(&JOBNBR)
CHGVAR
VAR(&JOBNBRA) VALUE(%SST(&JOBNBR12 1 6))
/* First make sure that the joblog is not printed out.
*/
OVRPRTF
FILE(QPJOBLOG) OUTQ(APF3812/AFC_INPUT1) +
HOLD(*YES)
/* Now generate the joblog as a spooled file:
*/
DSPJOBLOG JOB(&JOBNBRA/&USER/&JOBNAME) OUTPUT(*PRINT)
MONMSG
MSGID(CPF0000) EXEC(DO)
SNDUSRMSG MSG('The job does not exist or is no longer +
active.') MSGTYPE(*INFO)
GOTO
END
ENDDO
/* Now merge the spooled file and view it:
*/
APF3812/MRGSPLFPDF KARTSET(MYFILESET) KLICHE(MYOVL) +
FILNVN(QPJOBLOG) SPLNBR(*LAST) +
OUTTYPE(*VIEW)
/* Delete the temporary spooled file
DLTSPLF
FILE(QPJOBLOG) SPLNBR(*LAST)
END:
*/
ENDPGM
InterForm A/S 571
W e want also to add a new function to the APFW RKOUTQ com m and via the <Escape> key.
This is only to be run if we press <Escape> on the APFW RKOUTQ screen:
Change screen definition
SCR110D
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
COPY_SPLF
*NONE
Description
Copy spooled file via SNDTCPSPLF from APFWRKOUTQ
. . . . . . .
Type comparisons, press Enter. Specify OR to start each new group.
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
AND/OR
Line
1
Pos.
72
Opr.
EQ
Compare value
APFOUTQD
More...
F3=Exit
F12=Cancel
If we press <Escape> we want to copy the spooled file in the line where the cursor is placed
(the lines are not filled out). It is defined as below (seen by pressing <Page Down>):
Change screen definition
SCR110D
Screen definition . . . :
Required library . . . :
COPY_SPLF
*NONE
Command
CALL PGM(KSE/COPY_SPLF) PARM(&A &B &C &D &E)
. . . . . . . . .
Leave line and/or position blank to select cursor line/position.
Line
&A
&B
&C
&D
&E
&F
&G
&H
&I
Pos.
8
28
40
52
20
Len
10
10
10
6
6
Description
Spooled file name
Job name
User
Job number
Spooled file number
End
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F12=Cancel
Also notice that the function will only work if the inform ation above is visible on the screen so
you need to press <F11> before you press <Escape>.
572
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
The source of the called program is this:
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------*/
/*
This is an example of a program, that can be called from
*/
/*
the APF3812/WRKSCNDFN command in InterForm400.
*/
/*
*/
/*
This program is to copy a spooled file to the default outq of */
/*
the current job.
*/
/*
*/
/*
*/
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------*/
PGM
(&SPLFNAME &JOBNAME &USER &JOBNBR &SPLFNBR)
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
DCL
&SPLFNAME
&JOBNAME
&USER
&FILE
&JOBNBRA
&JOBNBR12
&JOBNBR
&SPLFNBR
&SPLFNBRA
&SPLFNBR12
&OUTQ
*CHAR 10
*CHAR 10
*CHAR 10
*CHAR 40
*CHAR
6
*CHAR 12
*DEC LEN(15 5)
*DEC LEN(15 5)
*CHAR
6
*CHAR 12
*CHAR 10
/* Convert the numeric job number of the spooled file into 6 char:
CHGVAR
VAR(&JOBNBR12) VALUE(&JOBNBR)
CHGVAR
VAR(&JOBNBRA) VALUE(%SST(&JOBNBR12 1 6))
*/
/* Convert the numeric splf number of the spooled file into 6 char:
CHGVAR
VAR(&SPLFNBR12) VALUE(&SPLFNBR)
CHGVAR
VAR(&SPLFNBRA) VALUE(%SST(&SPLFNBR12 1 6))
*/
/* Get the outq of the current job:
RTVJOBA
OUTQ(&OUTQ)
*/
/* Send or copy the spooled file:
SNDTCPSPLF RMTSYS(*INTNETADR) PRTQ(&OUTQ) +
FILE(&SPLFNAME) +
JOB(&JOBNBRA/&USER/&JOBNAME) +
SPLNBR(&SPLFNBRA) DESTTYP(*AS400) +
TRANSFORM(*NO) MFRTYPMDL(*NONE) +
INTNETADR('127.0.0.1')
*/
SNDUSRMSG
END:
MSG('The spooled file has been copied.') +
MSGTYPE(*INFO)
ENDPGM
InterForm A/S 573
Now we are done setting up the functions and we only need to activate these functions on the
relevant jobs. In order to do that you just need to make sure that the jobs run the com m and:
APF3812/STRSCNATN:
Start Screen Attention (STRSCNATN)
Type choices, press Enter.
Command
. . . . . . . . . . . . CMD
Default program . . . . . . . . DFTPGM
Library . . . . . . . . . . .
F3=Exit
F4=Prompt
F24=More keys
F5=Refresh
> GO MENU(MAIN)
*USRPRF
F12=Cancel
Name,*USRPRF,*ASSIST,*NONE
Name, *LIBL, *CURLIB
Bottom
F13=How to use this display
The com m and (CMD) is the com m and that will be run when this com m and is done. The default
program is the program that will be run if no screen definition setup via W RKSCNDFN fits the
current screen when som eone is pressing <Attention> (or <Escape>).
Notice that the function above only works on the call level from where the STRSCNATN was
run so you could e.g. run this in the initial program of the user profiles - just rem em ber to do a
MONMSG after the com m and so the users can sign on - even during an upgrade of
InterForm 400...
574
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Appendix R - Install/Upgrade on mirrored machines
Quite a few of our custom ers are running system s, that are m irrored using a high availability
system like e.g. MIMIX or iTera. The usual questions for InterForm 400 in relation to such
system s are these:
What files (and other objects) should we include in the mirroring?
The im portant files in InterForm 400 are the files that are norm ally included in the journal, but
you could sim ply m irror all objects in library APF3812. Rem em ber that if you are using
journaling for this, the journaling MUST use IM AGES(*BOTH) (param eter on the STRJRNPF
and STJRNOBJ com m ands). This is necessary because InterForm 400 is using the journal to
roll back changes if necessary.
In older versions of InterForm 400 we em phasized that it was im portant NOT to m irror the data
area: APF3812/APFCONFIG, as it contains the license code and it m ust be different on the two
m achines, but with the 2008 and newer versions of InterForm 400, you can now m aintain up to
4 license codes via the sam e license screen. You now insert both license codes in the sam e
screen, and let the m irroring copy the changes onto the other m achine. So now you should
even m irror this object (the data area APF3812/APFCONFIG) as well!
You should also m irror the directories /apf3812hom e and /apf3812m ail and subdirectories
EXCEPT: /apf3812hom e/tem p and /apf3812m ail/PDFtem p. These tem p directories contains
tem porary work files and slow m irroring of these tem p directories can actually cause a problem
in InterForm 400.
What journal can we use for the mirroring?
You can use the default journal, which is APF3812/APFJRN, but you can also use your own
journal - also one that is outside the APF3812 library. If you chose to use a journal outside the
APF3812 library, you should m ake sure that you are journaling the new APF3812 library after
the upgrade - not the APF3812OLD library.
Procedure for install of InterForm400?
W hen you install InterForm 400 on a m irrored system , then you should first install InterForm 400
on both the destination and source m achines before activating the m irroring. This m akes sure
that the necessary objects exists on both m achines e.g. the needed user profiles and the
stream files and directories in the IFS. Refer to the description above for which objects that
should be journaled.
If you want to upgrade InterForm 400 on a m irrored m achine, you should first end the journaling
via these steps:
First determ ine the journal, that is used for journaling InterForm 400. As default this will be
APF3812/APFJRN. (Replace the references to this journal below if you are using a different
one).
You can end journaling of the objects, that is norm ally journaled by InterForm 400 via these
options in InterForm 400:
12. Service functions
9. Journal m enu
2. End journaling files in InterForm library APF3812 (Press F10 to confirm )
3. Delete journal and receivers in InterForm library APF3812
Option 3 will stop with this error if som eone has added extra objects to be journaled:
InterForm A/S 575
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
CPA0701
Inquiry
31/03/11
Severity . . . . . . . :
99
Time sent
13:01:31
. . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
CPF7021 received by JRN001C at 3600. (C D I R)
Cause . . . . . :
Control language (CL) program JRN001C in library APF3812
detected an error at statement number 3600. Message text for CPF7021 is:
Cannot delete journal APFJRN in APF3812.
So you will now need to end journaling of any objects in this journal. You can use this
com m and in order to find out exactly which objects that are still journaled:
W RKJRNA JRN(APF3812/APFJRN)
Now press: F19=Display journaled objects and select e.g. option '30. All object types' to go
through all object types that m ay be journaled. You should be able to find that extra objects e.g.
data areas or stream files / directories in the IFS are journaled. You will need to end this
journaling with the appropriate com m and - norm ally ENDJRNPF, ENDJRNOBJ or ENDJRN.
If you are using a rem ote journal you can also check for any active rem ote journals via
W RKJRNA and F16, where you can inactivate the rem ote journal via option 14=Inactivate.
Now you are ready to do the upgrade in the norm al m anner. You should upgrade InterForm 400
on both m achines before starting the journaling again - as described in the beginning of this
appendix.
Common problem during upgrade of mirrored systems
A problem , that is often seen during upgrade of InterForm 400 on a m irrored system is this
m essage:
Library APF3812 cannot be renam ed APF3812OLD.
Library APF3812 is in use.
Press F10 to view object locks for the library.
Press Enter to retry.
W hen pressing F10 no object locks are to be seen, so what is the problem ?
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Answer: The problem is, that InterForm 400 during the upgrade have tried to end all journaling,
save the journal and journal receiver and delete the journal and journal receiver, but was not
able to delete them . You can see the reason in the joblog:
Cannot delete journal APFJRN in APF3812. Details:
576
User’s Manual for InterForm400®
Version 2014
Additional Message Information
Message ID . . . . . . :
Message type . . . . . :
Date sent . . . . . . :
CPF7021
Escape
16/11/09
Severity . . . . . . . :
40
Time sent
12:11:09
. . . . . . :
Message . . . . :
Cannot delete journal APFJRN in APF3812.
Cause . . . . . :
Journal APFJRN in library APF3812 cannot be deleted
because either objects are being journaled to journal APFJRN or commitment
control is active for some job on the system and journal APFJRN controls the
commitment control environment.
Recovery . . . :
End journaling for all objects being journaled to journal
APFJRN in library APF3812 using one or more of the following:
-- End Journal Access Paths (ENDJRNAP)
-- End Journaling Physical File Changes (ENDJRNPF)
-- End Journal (ENDJRN)
-- End Journal Object (ENDJRNOBJ)
-- End Journal Library (ENDJRNLIB)
More...
Press Enter to continue.
F3=Exit
F6=Print
F9=Display message details
F21=Select assistance level
F12=Cancel
This is the core problem : Som eone have chosen to add journaling of other objects than files
thus creating this problem . Refer to the description above for install/upgrade of m irrored
sys